From 711594636704defae873be1a355a292505585afd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Jacob McDonnell Date: Sat, 25 Apr 2026 21:07:28 -0400 Subject: docs: Added UNIX V10 Manuals --- Dockerfile | 6 +- build | 2 +- manpage | Bin 17672658 -> 17672658 bytes static/index.html | 3 +- static/v10/=.1 | 123 ++ static/v10/Makefile | 14 + static/v10/man1/2500.1 | 120 ++ static/v10/man1/300.1 | 228 +++ static/v10/man1/450.1 | 110 ++ static/v10/man1/8q.1 | 92 + static/v10/man1/:.1.broken | 26 + static/v10/man1/=.1 | 123 ++ static/v10/man1/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man1/acro.1 | 59 + static/v10/man1/adb.1 | 1116 ++++++++++++ static/v10/man1/altran.1 | 82 + static/v10/man1/apl.1 | 202 +++ static/v10/man1/apnews.1 | 39 + static/v10/man1/apply.1 | 102 ++ static/v10/man1/apsend.1 | 60 + static/v10/man1/ar.1 | 83 + static/v10/man1/array.1 | 4 + static/v10/man1/as.1 | 89 + static/v10/man1/as80.1 | 80 + static/v10/man1/asa.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/ascii.1 | 82 + static/v10/man1/at.1 | 111 ++ static/v10/man1/awk.1 | 452 +++++ static/v10/man1/backup.1 | 351 ++++ static/v10/man1/badge.1 | 41 + static/v10/man1/bas.1 | 312 ++++ static/v10/man1/basename.1 | 58 + static/v10/man1/basic.1 | 14 + static/v10/man1/bc.1 | 274 +++ static/v10/man1/bcp.1 | 288 ++++ static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 | 68 + static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 | 38 + static/v10/man1/bison.1 | 62 + static/v10/man1/bite.1 | 712 ++++++++ static/v10/man1/bitship.1 | 24 + static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 | 54 + static/v10/man1/bprint.1 | 87 + static/v10/man1/btoa.1 | 82 + static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 | 214 +++ static/v10/man1/bundle.1 | 53 + static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 | 38 + static/v10/man1/c++.1 | 151 ++ static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 | 43 + static/v10/man1/calendar.1 | 118 ++ static/v10/man1/can.1 | 238 +++ static/v10/man1/cat.1 | 44 + static/v10/man1/catsim.1 | 27 + static/v10/man1/cb.1 | 49 + static/v10/man1/cbt.1 | 71 + static/v10/man1/cc.1 | 52 + static/v10/man1/cdb.1 | 41 + static/v10/man1/cf.1 | 1 + static/v10/man1/charge.1 | 194 +++ static/v10/man1/chash.1 | 44 + static/v10/man1/chdate.1 | 76 + static/v10/man1/chdir.1 | 29 + static/v10/man1/checknews.1 | 57 + static/v10/man1/checknr.1 | 99 ++ static/v10/man1/chmod.1 | 40 + static/v10/man1/chown.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/chunk.1 | 58 + static/v10/man1/cin.1 | 906 ++++++++++ static/v10/man1/cite.1 | 98 ++ static/v10/man1/clear.1 | 14 + static/v10/man1/cmp.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/column.1 | 143 ++ static/v10/man1/comm.1 | 48 + static/v10/man1/compress.1 | 238 +++ static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 | 33 + static/v10/man1/con.1 | 176 ++ static/v10/man1/cospan.1 | 315 ++++ static/v10/man1/courier.1 | 36 + static/v10/man1/cp.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/cpio.1 | 184 ++ static/v10/man1/cq.1 | 50 + static/v10/man1/cray.1 | 124 ++ static/v10/man1/cref.1 | 119 ++ static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 | 101 ++ static/v10/man1/crypt.1 | 41 + static/v10/man1/cscan.1 | 77 + static/v10/man1/csh.1 | 2145 +++++++++++++++++++++++ static/v10/man1/ctags.1 | 109 ++ static/v10/man1/cu.1 | 248 +++ static/v10/man1/cut.1 | 137 ++ static/v10/man1/cvt.1 | 8 + static/v10/man1/d202.1 | 138 ++ static/v10/man1/dag.1 | 150 ++ static/v10/man1/date.1 | 33 + static/v10/man1/db.1 | 283 +++ static/v10/man1/dc.1 | 196 +++ static/v10/man1/dcon.1 | 170 ++ static/v10/man1/dd.1 | 242 +++ static/v10/man1/dds.1 | 25 + static/v10/man1/deroff.1 | 178 ++ static/v10/man1/df.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 | 142 ++ static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 | 128 ++ static/v10/man1/diff.1 | 270 +++ static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 | 160 ++ static/v10/man1/dired.1 | 148 ++ static/v10/man1/dis.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/dist.1 | 84 + static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 | 92 + static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 | 247 +++ static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 | 31 + static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 | 210 +++ static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 | 61 + static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 | 195 +++ static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 | 702 ++++++++ static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 | 99 ++ static/v10/man1/docgen.1 | 68 + static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 | 101 ++ static/v10/man1/doctype.1 | 53 + static/v10/man1/double.1 | 60 + static/v10/man1/download.1 | 175 ++ static/v10/man1/dpost.1 | 310 ++++ static/v10/man1/dsw.1 | 28 + static/v10/man1/du.1 | 42 + static/v10/man1/echo.1 | 25 + static/v10/man1/ed.1 | 421 +++++ static/v10/man1/efl.1 | 74 + static/v10/man1/eqn.1 | 366 ++++ static/v10/man1/esterel.1 | 258 +++ static/v10/man1/exit.1 | 26 + static/v10/man1/expr.1 | 112 ++ static/v10/man1/f2c.1 | 191 +++ static/v10/man1/f77.1 | 212 +++ static/v10/man1/factor.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/fc.1 | 292 ++++ static/v10/man1/fed.1 | 127 ++ static/v10/man1/fields.1 | 5 + static/v10/man1/file.1 | 18 + static/v10/man1/find.1 | 182 ++ static/v10/man1/flex.1 | 716 ++++++++ static/v10/man1/fmt.1 | 37 + static/v10/man1/form.1 | 84 + static/v10/man1/forml.1 | 50 + static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 | 37 + static/v10/man1/ftp.1 | 963 +++++++++++ static/v10/man1/games.1 | 272 +++ static/v10/man1/gcc.1 | 641 +++++++ static/v10/man1/getlab.1 | 49 + static/v10/man1/getopt.1 | 78 + static/v10/man1/gets.1 | 55 + static/v10/man1/getuid.1 | 85 + static/v10/man1/goto.1 | 37 + static/v10/man1/grabit.1 | 86 + static/v10/man1/gram.1 | 81 + static/v10/man1/grap.1 | 400 +++++ static/v10/man1/graph.1 | 151 ++ static/v10/man1/gre.1 | 188 ++ static/v10/man1/grep.1 | 56 + static/v10/man1/hang.1 | 16 + static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 | 131 ++ static/v10/man1/hoc.1 | 156 ++ static/v10/man1/hostname.1 | 16 + static/v10/man1/hp.1 | 65 + static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 | 29 + static/v10/man1/ican.1 | 203 +++ static/v10/man1/iclc.1 | 136 ++ static/v10/man1/icon.1 | 162 ++ static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 | 205 +++ static/v10/man1/icont.1 | 267 +++ static/v10/man1/ideal.1 | 380 +++++ static/v10/man1/idiff.1 | 77 + static/v10/man1/if.1 | 76 + static/v10/man1/imscan.1 | 51 + static/v10/man1/inews.1 | 151 ++ static/v10/man1/init.1 | 16 + static/v10/man1/intro.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/jim.1 | 331 ++++ static/v10/man1/join.1 | 144 ++ static/v10/man1/jx.1 | 130 ++ static/v10/man1/kill.1 | 22 + static/v10/man1/kp.1 | 91 + static/v10/man1/ksh.1 | 3787 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ static/v10/man1/lab.1 | 40 + static/v10/man1/langs.1 | 191 +++ static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 | 41 + static/v10/man1/lcc.1 | 505 ++++++ static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 | 76 + static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 | 133 ++ static/v10/man1/ld.1 | 111 ++ static/v10/man1/ld80.1 | 120 ++ static/v10/man1/learn.1 | 84 + static/v10/man1/lex.1 | 71 + static/v10/man1/library.1 | 241 +++ static/v10/man1/lim.1 | 92 + static/v10/man1/limits.1 | 14 + static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/lint.1 | 319 ++++ static/v10/man1/lisp.1 | 101 ++ static/v10/man1/ln.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/load.1 | 52 + static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 | 212 +++ static/v10/man1/login.1 | 54 + static/v10/man1/look.1 | 79 + static/v10/man1/lorder.1 | 40 + static/v10/man1/lp.1 | 181 ++ static/v10/man1/lpr.1 | 54 + static/v10/man1/ls.1 | 215 +++ static/v10/man1/m.1 | 31 + static/v10/man1/m4.1 | 315 ++++ static/v10/man1/m6.1 | 109 ++ static/v10/man1/mail.1 | 662 +++++++ static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 | 93 + static/v10/man1/mailx.1 | 1249 ++++++++++++++ static/v10/man1/make.1 | 425 +++++ static/v10/man1/makeml.1 | 138 ++ static/v10/man1/man.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/maple.1 | 149 ++ static/v10/man1/match.1 | 63 + static/v10/man1/matlab.1 | 113 ++ static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 | 166 ++ static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 | 120 ++ static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 | 109 ++ static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 | 314 ++++ static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 | 42 + static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 | 162 ++ static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 | 164 ++ static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 | 341 ++++ static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 | 63 + static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 | 172 ++ static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 | 53 + static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 | 145 ++ static/v10/man1/memo.1 | 38 + static/v10/man1/merge.1 | 50 + static/v10/man1/mesg.1 | 27 + static/v10/man1/mint.1 | 420 +++++ static/v10/man1/mk.1 | 617 +++++++ static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 | 25 + static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 | 66 + static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 | 202 +++ static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 | 88 + static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/mm.1 | 274 +++ static/v10/man1/mmt.1 | 165 ++ static/v10/man1/monk.1 | 341 ++++ static/v10/man1/movie.1 | 165 ++ static/v10/man1/mp.1 | 304 ++++ static/v10/man1/mt.1 | 124 ++ static/v10/man1/mv.1 | 28 + static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 | 65 + static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 | 366 ++++ static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 | 42 + static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 | 34 + static/v10/man1/nice.1 | 14 + static/v10/man1/nm.1 | 33 + static/v10/man1/nm80.1 | 85 + static/v10/man1/nohup.1 | 15 + static/v10/man1/notary.1 | 94 + static/v10/man1/notify.1 | 114 ++ static/v10/man1/nroff.1 | 191 +++ static/v10/man1/occ.1 | 79 + static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 | 80 + static/v10/man1/ocr.1 | 176 ++ static/v10/man1/od.1 | 74 + static/v10/man1/olint.1 | 147 ++ static/v10/man1/opr.1 | 48 + static/v10/man1/ops5.1 | 185 ++ static/v10/man1/org.1 | 60 + static/v10/man1/osh.1 | 1151 +++++++++++++ static/v10/man1/ov.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/p.1 | 52 + static/v10/man1/pack.1 | 136 ++ static/v10/man1/paper.1 | 16 + static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 | 196 +++ static/v10/man1/pascal.1 | 170 ++ static/v10/man1/passwd.1 | 128 ++ static/v10/man1/patch.1 | 320 ++++ static/v10/man1/pax.1 | 657 +++++++ static/v10/man1/pc.1 | 176 ++ static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 | 28 + static/v10/man1/pfe.1 | 19 + static/v10/man1/pic.1 | 341 ++++ static/v10/man1/picasso.1 | 232 +++ static/v10/man1/pico.1 | 273 +++ static/v10/man1/picpack.1 | 123 ++ static/v10/man1/pl.1 | 52 + static/v10/man1/plot.1 | 72 + static/v10/man1/post.1 | 607 +++++++ static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 | 243 +++ static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 | 217 +++ static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 | 206 +++ static/v10/man1/postgif.1 | 157 ++ static/v10/man1/postio.1 | 308 ++++ static/v10/man1/postmd.1 | 330 ++++ static/v10/man1/postnews.1 | 74 + static/v10/man1/postprint.1 | 257 +++ static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 | 112 ++ static/v10/man1/posttek.1 | 198 +++ static/v10/man1/pp.1 | 39 + static/v10/man1/pq.1 | 52 + static/v10/man1/pr.1 | 49 + static/v10/man1/prefer.1 | 489 ++++++ static/v10/man1/printenv.1 | 33 + static/v10/man1/printfont.1 | 183 ++ static/v10/man1/priv.1 | 145 ++ static/v10/man1/prof.1 | 53 + static/v10/man1/proof.1 | 41 + static/v10/man1/proofr.1 | 111 ++ static/v10/man1/prose.1 | 228 +++ static/v10/man1/ps.1 | 66 + static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 | 37 + static/v10/man1/psifile.1 | 156 ++ static/v10/man1/psix.1 | 132 ++ static/v10/man1/ptx.1 | 120 ++ static/v10/man1/punct.1 | 22 + static/v10/man1/push.1 | 104 ++ static/v10/man1/pwd.1 | 21 + static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 | 178 ++ static/v10/man1/pxp.1 | 125 ++ static/v10/man1/qed.1 | 1617 ++++++++++++++++++ static/v10/man1/qsnap.1 | 117 ++ static/v10/man1/random.1 | 50 + static/v10/man1/rates.1 | 61 + static/v10/man1/ratfor.1 | 70 + static/v10/man1/rc.1 | 896 ++++++++++ static/v10/man1/rcp.1 | 87 + static/v10/man1/readnews.1 | 331 ++++ static/v10/man1/readslow.1 | 25 + static/v10/man1/redmail.1 | 48 + static/v10/man1/refer.1 | 273 +++ static/v10/man1/reloc.1 | 45 + static/v10/man1/remshent.1 | 31 + static/v10/man1/rev.1 | 75 + static/v10/man1/rew.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/rm.1 | 48 + static/v10/man1/rmdir.1 | 32 + static/v10/man1/roff.1 | 197 +++ static/v10/man1/route.1 | 85 + static/v10/man1/rscan.1 | 46 + static/v10/man1/sdb.1 | 407 +++++ static/v10/man1/sed.1 | 441 +++++ static/v10/man1/see.also.1 | 171 ++ static/v10/man1/sendnews.1 | 46 + static/v10/man1/seq.1 | 46 + static/v10/man1/server.1 | 35 + static/v10/man1/session.1 | 197 +++ static/v10/man1/setlab.1 | 142 ++ static/v10/man1/sexist.1 | 141 ++ static/v10/man1/sh.1 | 386 +++++ static/v10/man1/shift.1 | 38 + static/v10/man1/shstats.1 | 72 + static/v10/man1/sign.1 | 118 ++ static/v10/man1/size.1 | 31 + static/v10/man1/size80.1 | 17 + static/v10/man1/sleep.1 | 31 + static/v10/man1/sml.1 | 96 ++ static/v10/man1/sno.1 | 99 ++ static/v10/man1/snocone.1 | 269 +++ static/v10/man1/soelim.1 | 46 + static/v10/man1/sort.1 | 44 + static/v10/man1/speak.1 | 79 + static/v10/man1/spell.1 | 134 ++ static/v10/man1/spelltell.1 | 109 ++ static/v10/man1/spellwwb.1 | 164 ++ static/v10/man1/spin.1 | 134 ++ static/v10/man1/spitbol.1 | 404 +++++ static/v10/man1/spline.1 | 95 ++ static/v10/man1/split.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/splitrules.1 | 3 + static/v10/man1/stat.1 | 70 + static/v10/man1/stdarg.1 | 5 + static/v10/man1/strings.1 | 51 + static/v10/man1/strip.1 | 36 + static/v10/man1/strlic.1 | 72 + static/v10/man1/struct.1 | 4 + static/v10/man1/stty.1 | 49 + static/v10/man1/sum.1 | 31 + static/v10/man1/switch.1 | 76 + static/v10/man1/syl.1 | 93 + static/v10/man1/tabs.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/tail.1 | 95 ++ static/v10/man1/talk.1 | 67 + static/v10/man1/tap.1 | 147 ++ static/v10/man1/tape.1 | 60 + static/v10/man1/tar.1 | 154 ++ static/v10/man1/tbl.1 | 281 +++ static/v10/man1/tdc.1 | 184 ++ static/v10/man1/tee.1 | 29 + static/v10/man1/telnet.1 | 92 + static/v10/man1/test.1 | 206 +++ static/v10/man1/tex.1 | 325 ++++ static/v10/man1/time.1 | 30 + static/v10/man1/tk.1 | 60 + static/v10/man1/tmg.1 | 52 + static/v10/man1/tmpnam.1 | 24 + static/v10/man1/tp.1 | 150 ++ static/v10/man1/tr.1 | 86 + static/v10/man1/tr2tex.1 | 124 ++ static/v10/man1/track.1 | 77 + static/v10/man1/troff.1 | 76 + static/v10/man1/trofftable.1 | 164 ++ static/v10/man1/true.1 | 25 + static/v10/man1/tset.1 | 129 ++ static/v10/man1/tsort.1 | 27 + static/v10/man1/tss.1 | 65 + static/v10/man1/tty.1 | 24 + static/v10/man1/twig.1 | 67 + static/v10/man1/type.1 | 28 + static/v10/man1/typo.1 | 45 + static/v10/man1/ucache.1 | 46 + static/v10/man1/ul.1 | 32 + static/v10/man1/un.1 | 29 + static/v10/man1/uniq.1 | 51 + static/v10/man1/uptime.1 | 18 + static/v10/man1/usgmake.1 | 700 ++++++++ static/v10/man1/ustats.1 | 80 + static/v10/man1/uucp.1 | 255 +++ static/v10/man1/uuencode.1 | 62 + static/v10/man1/uurec.1 | 18 + static/v10/man1/uustat.1 | 145 ++ static/v10/man1/uuto.1 | 102 ++ static/v10/man1/uux.1 | 129 ++ static/v10/man1/v6run.1 | 42 + static/v10/man1/vacation.1 | 104 ++ static/v10/man1/vi.1 | 459 +++++ static/v10/man1/view2d.1 | 156 ++ static/v10/man1/vis.1 | 41 + static/v10/man1/visi.1 | 283 +++ static/v10/man1/vs.1 | 44 + static/v10/man1/vsw.1 | 93 + static/v10/man1/w.1 | 87 + static/v10/man1/wait.1 | 32 + static/v10/man1/wc.1 | 36 + static/v10/man1/wf1.1 | 74 + static/v10/man1/who.1 | 42 + static/v10/man1/worduse.1 | 157 ++ static/v10/man1/write.1 | 62 + static/v10/man1/wtinit.1 | 25 + static/v10/man1/wwb.1 | 143 ++ static/v10/man1/wwbhelp.1 | 74 + static/v10/man1/wwbinfo.1 | 48 + static/v10/man1/wwbmail.1 | 71 + static/v10/man1/wwbstand.1 | 94 + static/v10/man1/wwv.1 | 45 + static/v10/man1/xargs.1 | 163 ++ static/v10/man1/xd.1 | 159 ++ static/v10/man1/yacc.1 | 10 + static/v10/man1/yes.1 | 19 + static/v10/man1/zcmp.1 | 45 + static/v10/man1/zero.1 | 20 + static/v10/man1/zmore.1 | 125 ++ static/v10/man2/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man2/access.2 | 63 + static/v10/man2/acct.2 | 46 + static/v10/man2/alarm.2 | 83 + static/v10/man2/back.2 | 1 + static/v10/man2/boot.2 | 27 + static/v10/man2/break.2 | 34 + static/v10/man2/brk.2 | 52 + static/v10/man2/cemt.2 | 30 + static/v10/man2/chdir.2 | 24 + static/v10/man2/chmod.2 | 61 + static/v10/man2/chown.2 | 71 + static/v10/man2/close.2 | 27 + static/v10/man2/cq.2 | 10 + static/v10/man2/creat.2 | 74 + static/v10/man2/csw.2 | 29 + static/v10/man2/deprecated.2 | 84 + static/v10/man2/dirread.2 | 63 + static/v10/man2/dup.2 | 54 + static/v10/man2/exec.2 | 288 ++++ static/v10/man2/exit.2 | 126 ++ static/v10/man2/f2c.2 | 333 ++++ static/v10/man2/fields.2 | 2 + static/v10/man2/fmount.2 | 149 ++ static/v10/man2/fork.2 | 32 + static/v10/man2/fpe.2 | 34 + static/v10/man2/front.2 | 12 + static/v10/man2/fstat.2 | 27 + static/v10/man2/getflab.2 | 238 +++ static/v10/man2/getgid.2 | 25 + static/v10/man2/getplab.2 | 137 ++ static/v10/man2/getuid.2 | 29 + static/v10/man2/gtty.2 | 31 + static/v10/man2/ilgins.2 | 34 + static/v10/man2/indir.2 | 32 + static/v10/man2/intr.2 | 31 + static/v10/man2/intro.2 | 271 +++ static/v10/man2/ioctl.2 | 73 + static/v10/man2/kill.2 | 29 + static/v10/man2/labmount.2 | 25 + static/v10/man2/limits.2 | 145 ++ static/v10/man2/link.2 | 26 + static/v10/man2/lseek.2 | 47 + static/v10/man2/m.2 | 57 + static/v10/man2/makdir.2 | 27 + static/v10/man2/mdate.2 | 31 + static/v10/man2/mkdir.2 | 68 + static/v10/man2/mknod.2 | 42 + static/v10/man2/mount.2 | 38 + static/v10/man2/mpx.2 | 503 ++++++ static/v10/man2/nice.2 | 27 + static/v10/man2/nochk.2 | 32 + static/v10/man2/open.2 | 61 + static/v10/man2/pipe.2 | 51 + static/v10/man2/profil.2 | 40 + static/v10/man2/quit.2 | 24 + static/v10/man2/read.2 | 42 + static/v10/man2/rele.2 | 26 + static/v10/man2/seek.2 | 83 + static/v10/man2/select.2 | 130 ++ static/v10/man2/setgid.2 | 25 + static/v10/man2/setuid.2 | 50 + static/v10/man2/signal.2 | 220 +++ static/v10/man2/sleep.2 | 31 + static/v10/man2/stat.2 | 128 ++ static/v10/man2/stime.2 | 24 + static/v10/man2/stty.2 | 94 + static/v10/man2/sync.2 | 27 + static/v10/man2/syscall.2 | 17 + static/v10/man2/syslog.2 | 113 ++ static/v10/man2/time.2 | 28 + static/v10/man2/times.2 | 68 + static/v10/man2/udbuf.2 | 48 + static/v10/man2/umask.2 | 38 + static/v10/man2/umount.2 | 34 + static/v10/man2/unlink.2 | 40 + static/v10/man2/unsafe.2 | 59 + static/v10/man2/vtimes.2 | 51 + static/v10/man2/wait.2 | 59 + static/v10/man2/write.2 | 54 + static/v10/man3/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man3/abort.3 | 19 + static/v10/man3/arith.3 | 97 ++ static/v10/man3/assert.3 | 38 + static/v10/man3/atan.3 | 29 + static/v10/man3/atof.3 | 43 + static/v10/man3/atoi.3 | 43 + static/v10/man3/bessel.3 | 39 + static/v10/man3/bits.3 | 198 +++ static/v10/man3/block.3 | 175 ++ static/v10/man3/buildmap.3 | 62 + static/v10/man3/cbit.3 | 105 ++ static/v10/man3/cbt.3 | 86 + static/v10/man3/chrtab.3 | 24 + static/v10/man3/closeshares.3 | 21 + static/v10/man3/compar.3 | 43 + static/v10/man3/crypt.3 | 30 + static/v10/man3/ctime.3 | 36 + static/v10/man3/ctype.3 | 102 ++ static/v10/man3/curses.3 | 98 ++ static/v10/man3/dbm.3 | 144 ++ static/v10/man3/ddsput.3 | 82 + static/v10/man3/dialout.3 | 86 + static/v10/man3/directory.3 | 110 ++ static/v10/man3/ecvt.3 | 47 + static/v10/man3/end.3 | 45 + static/v10/man3/erf.3 | 39 + static/v10/man3/exit.3 | 61 + static/v10/man3/exp.3 | 28 + static/v10/man3/ferror.3 | 62 + static/v10/man3/fgets.3 | 73 + static/v10/man3/filebuf.3 | 200 +++ static/v10/man3/fio.3 | 255 +++ static/v10/man3/floor.3 | 57 + static/v10/man3/fopen.3 | 107 ++ static/v10/man3/fptrap.3 | 94 + static/v10/man3/fread.3 | 55 + static/v10/man3/frexp.3 | 49 + static/v10/man3/fseek.3 | 51 + static/v10/man3/fstream.3 | 154 ++ static/v10/man3/ftoa.3 | 39 + static/v10/man3/ftoo.3 | 32 + static/v10/man3/ftw.3 | 165 ++ static/v10/man3/ftwalk.3 | 209 +++ static/v10/man3/galloc.3 | 75 + static/v10/man3/gamma.3 | 48 + static/v10/man3/gerts.3 | 43 + static/v10/man3/getarg.3 | 49 + static/v10/man3/getc.3 | 59 + static/v10/man3/getchr.3 | 55 + static/v10/man3/getdate.3 | 169 ++ static/v10/man3/getenv.3 | 30 + static/v10/man3/getfields.3 | 74 + static/v10/man3/getflags.3 | 116 ++ static/v10/man3/getflds.3 | 86 + static/v10/man3/getfsent.3 | 89 + static/v10/man3/getgrent.3 | 79 + static/v10/man3/getlogin.3 | 32 + static/v10/man3/getopt.3 | 99 ++ static/v10/man3/getpass.3 | 27 + static/v10/man3/getpw.3 | 28 + static/v10/man3/getpwent.3 | 83 + static/v10/man3/getshares.3 | 43 + static/v10/man3/getshput.3 | 50 + static/v10/man3/getstsrc.3 | 43 + static/v10/man3/getwd.3 | 41 + static/v10/man3/hash.3 | 611 +++++++ static/v10/man3/hmul.3 | 16 + static/v10/man3/huff.3 | 89 + static/v10/man3/hypot.3 | 35 + static/v10/man3/ierror.3 | 52 + static/v10/man3/internet.3 | 104 ++ static/v10/man3/intro.3 | 109 ++ static/v10/man3/ios.3 | 384 +++++ static/v10/man3/ipc.3 | 348 ++++ static/v10/man3/iread.3 | 35 + static/v10/man3/istream.3 | 334 ++++ static/v10/man3/itoa.3 | 30 + static/v10/man3/juke.3 | 115 ++ static/v10/man3/l3tol.3 | 34 + static/v10/man3/labconst.3 | 32 + static/v10/man3/labeq.3 | 80 + static/v10/man3/labtoa.3 | 123 ++ static/v10/man3/ldiv.3 | 43 + static/v10/man3/log.3 | 26 + static/v10/man3/malloc.3 | 94 + static/v10/man3/manip.3 | 186 ++ static/v10/man3/map.3 | 274 +++ static/v10/man3/memory.3 | 118 ++ static/v10/man3/mesg.3 | 25 + static/v10/man3/mktemp.3 | 45 + static/v10/man3/mkunique.3 | 45 + static/v10/man3/mon.3 | 60 + static/v10/man3/monitor.3 | 103 ++ static/v10/man3/mp.3 | 154 ++ static/v10/man3/mvefil.3 | 62 + static/v10/man3/nargs.3 | 19 + static/v10/man3/nlist.3 | 62 + static/v10/man3/notary.3 | 92 + static/v10/man3/openshares.3 | 33 + static/v10/man3/ostream.3 | 249 +++ static/v10/man3/perror.3 | 46 + static/v10/man3/pex.3 | 63 + static/v10/man3/picfile.3 | 253 +++ static/v10/man3/pipebuf.3 | 73 + static/v10/man3/pipestream.3 | 59 + static/v10/man3/plot.3 | 161 ++ static/v10/man3/poly.3 | 50 + static/v10/man3/pool.3 | 85 + static/v10/man3/popen.3 | 108 ++ static/v10/man3/port.3 | 31 + static/v10/man3/pow.3 | 36 + static/v10/man3/print.3 | 274 +++ static/v10/man3/printf.3 | 137 ++ static/v10/man3/proj.3 | 370 ++++ static/v10/man3/ptime.3 | 34 + static/v10/man3/putc.3 | 60 + static/v10/man3/putchr.3 | 49 + static/v10/man3/putshares.3 | 37 + static/v10/man3/pwquery.3 | 71 + static/v10/man3/qsort.3 | 42 + static/v10/man3/rand.3 | 37 + static/v10/man3/re.3 | 178 ++ static/v10/man3/regex.3 | 66 + static/v10/man3/regexp.3 | 145 ++ static/v10/man3/reset.3 | 42 + static/v10/man3/salloc.3 | 160 ++ static/v10/man3/sbuf.prot.3 | 410 +++++ static/v10/man3/sbuf.pub.3 | 254 +++ static/v10/man3/scanf.3 | 300 ++++ static/v10/man3/setbuf.3 | 46 + static/v10/man3/setfil.3 | 34 + static/v10/man3/setjmp.3 | 42 + static/v10/man3/setlimits.3 | 58 + static/v10/man3/setupgroups.3 | 30 + static/v10/man3/setupshares.3 | 51 + static/v10/man3/sfio.3 | 628 +++++++ static/v10/man3/sharesfile.3 | 17 + static/v10/man3/sin.3 | 27 + static/v10/man3/sinh.3 | 31 + static/v10/man3/sleep.3 | 29 + static/v10/man3/sqrt.3 | 24 + static/v10/man3/ssbuf.3 | 130 ++ static/v10/man3/stak.3 | 163 ++ static/v10/man3/stdio.3 | 123 ++ static/v10/man3/stdiobuf.3 | 39 + static/v10/man3/string.3 | 205 +++ static/v10/man3/strstream.3 | 110 ++ static/v10/man3/swab.3 | 22 + static/v10/man3/switch.3 | 44 + static/v10/man3/system.3 | 22 + static/v10/man3/tcp.3 | 181 ++ static/v10/man3/termcap.3 | 175 ++ static/v10/man3/timec.3 | 109 ++ static/v10/man3/tm.3 | 550 ++++++ static/v10/man3/tolower.3 | 20 + static/v10/man3/ttyn.3 | 26 + static/v10/man3/ttyname.3 | 84 + static/v10/man3/udp.3 | 83 + static/v10/man3/uname.3 | 54 + static/v10/man3/ungetc.3 | 39 + static/v10/man3/valloc.3 | 27 + static/v10/man3/varargs.3 | 89 + static/v10/man3/view2d.3 | 93 + static/v10/man3/vt.3 | 37 + static/v10/man4/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man4/binarsys.4 | 39 + static/v10/man4/bk.4 | 74 + static/v10/man4/bl.4 | 41 + static/v10/man4/bufld.4 | 22 + static/v10/man4/cat.4 | 20 + static/v10/man4/connld.4 | 83 + static/v10/man4/console.4 | 63 + static/v10/man4/da.4 | 16 + static/v10/man4/dc.4 | 214 +++ static/v10/man4/dh.4 | 17 + static/v10/man4/dispatch.4 | 32 + static/v10/man4/dk.4 | 231 +++ static/v10/man4/dn.4 | 35 + static/v10/man4/dp.4 | 32 + static/v10/man4/drum.4 | 16 + static/v10/man4/dz.4 | 18 + static/v10/man4/ethernet.4 | 105 ++ static/v10/man4/fd.4 | 63 + static/v10/man4/fl.4 | 24 + static/v10/man4/font.4 | 59 + static/v10/man4/hp.4 | 105 ++ static/v10/man4/ht.4 | 81 + static/v10/man4/intro.4 | 91 + static/v10/man4/ip.4 | 261 +++ static/v10/man4/kl.4 | 41 + static/v10/man4/log.4 | 42 + static/v10/man4/lp.4 | 63 + static/v10/man4/lpr.4 | 52 + static/v10/man4/mailcnfg.4 | 117 ++ static/v10/man4/mailsurr.4 | 517 ++++++ static/v10/man4/mem.4 | 34 + static/v10/man4/mesgld.4 | 168 ++ static/v10/man4/modules.4 | 206 +++ static/v10/man4/mt.4 | 162 ++ static/v10/man4/newtty.4 | 90 + static/v10/man4/null.4 | 14 + static/v10/man4/pc.4 | 38 + static/v10/man4/pex.4 | 217 +++ static/v10/man4/proc.4 | 243 +++ static/v10/man4/ra.4 | 218 +++ static/v10/man4/rf.4 | 37 + static/v10/man4/rk.4 | 28 + static/v10/man4/rp.4 | 34 + static/v10/man4/rv.4 | 71 + static/v10/man4/scsi.4 | 117 ++ static/v10/man4/stream.4 | 272 +++ static/v10/man4/tbl.4 | 90 + static/v10/man4/tc.4 | 31 + static/v10/man4/tcp.4 | 193 +++ static/v10/man4/tiu.4 | 18 + static/v10/man4/tm.4 | 38 + static/v10/man4/tty.4 | 114 ++ static/v10/man4/ttyld.4 | 294 ++++ static/v10/man4/up.4 | 65 + static/v10/man4/va.4 | 121 ++ static/v10/man4/vc.4 | 64 + static/v10/man4/vp.4 | 100 ++ static/v10/man4/vs.4 | 20 + static/v10/man4/vt.4 | 230 +++ static/v10/man5/80.out.5 | 161 ++ static/v10/man5/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man5/a.out.5 | 150 ++ static/v10/man5/acct.5 | 63 + static/v10/man5/aliases.5 | 51 + static/v10/man5/ar.5 | 55 + static/v10/man5/ascii.5 | 61 + static/v10/man5/backup.5 | 168 ++ static/v10/man5/cdl.10.5 | 534 ++++++ static/v10/man5/config.5 | 149 ++ static/v10/man5/core.5 | 57 + static/v10/man5/cpio.5 | 87 + static/v10/man5/dir.5 | 34 + static/v10/man5/dist.5 | 68 + static/v10/man5/dump.5 | 211 +++ static/v10/man5/environ.5 | 91 + static/v10/man5/filsys.5 | 327 ++++ static/v10/man5/fizz.10.5 | 459 +++++ static/v10/man5/font.5 | 413 +++++ static/v10/man5/fs.5 | 147 ++ static/v10/man5/fsm.10.5 | 116 ++ static/v10/man5/fstab.5 | 106 ++ static/v10/man5/graw.10.5 | 79 + static/v10/man5/ident.5 | 37 + static/v10/man5/lde.10.5 | 295 ++++ static/v10/man5/lnode.5 | 166 ++ static/v10/man5/log.5 | 126 ++ static/v10/man5/map.5 | 83 + static/v10/man5/math.5 | 104 ++ static/v10/man5/mcolor.5 | 60 + static/v10/man5/mds.10.5 | 239 +++ static/v10/man5/minterm.10.5 | 78 + static/v10/man5/minus.z.5 | 77 + static/v10/man5/mpictures.5 | 220 +++ static/v10/man5/mpxio.5 | 187 ++ static/v10/man5/netnews.5 | 123 ++ static/v10/man5/news.5 | 146 ++ static/v10/man5/newsrc.5 | 50 + static/v10/man5/paddle.10.5 | 63 + static/v10/man5/passwd.5 | 33 + static/v10/man5/picfile.5 | 157 ++ static/v10/man5/plot.5 | 453 +++++ static/v10/man5/poly.5 | 141 ++ static/v10/man5/privs.5 | 282 +++ static/v10/man5/pwfile.5 | 52 + static/v10/man5/saf.10.5 | Bin 0 -> 4387 bytes static/v10/man5/share.5 | 309 ++++ static/v10/man5/shares.5 | 64 + static/v10/man5/speakm.5 | 42 + static/v10/man5/src.5 | 27 + static/v10/man5/stab.5 | 211 +++ static/v10/man5/stock.10.5 | 18 + static/v10/man5/tap.5 | 68 + static/v10/man5/termcap.5 | 350 ++++ static/v10/man5/tp.5 | 68 + static/v10/man5/troff.5 | 202 +++ static/v10/man5/ttys.5 | 41 + static/v10/man5/ttytype.5 | 23 + static/v10/man5/types.5 | 42 + static/v10/man5/uids.5 | 33 + static/v10/man5/utmp.5 | 23 + static/v10/man5/uuencode.5 | 49 + static/v10/man5/values.5 | 84 + static/v10/man5/vfont.5 | 88 + static/v10/man5/view2d.5 | 65 + static/v10/man5/whoami.5 | 14 + static/v10/man5/worm.5 | 103 ++ static/v10/man5/wtmp.5 | 21 + static/v10/man6/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man6/adventure.6 | 52 + static/v10/man6/arithmetic.6 | 71 + static/v10/man6/ascii.6 | 43 + static/v10/man6/atc.6 | 375 ++++ static/v10/man6/azel.6 | 104 ++ static/v10/man6/back.6 | 9 + static/v10/man6/banner.6 | 73 + static/v10/man6/basic.6 | 32 + static/v10/man6/bc.6 | 62 + static/v10/man6/bcd.6 | 24 + static/v10/man6/bianchi.6 | 37 + static/v10/man6/bj.6 | 84 + static/v10/man6/boggle.6 | 99 ++ static/v10/man6/bridge.6 | 96 ++ static/v10/man6/cal.6 | 35 + static/v10/man6/cards.6 | 43 + static/v10/man6/chess.6 | 31 + static/v10/man6/ching.6 | 127 ++ static/v10/man6/cubic.6 | 17 + static/v10/man6/das.6 | 27 + static/v10/man6/doctor.6 | 16 + static/v10/man6/dpt.6 | 31 + static/v10/man6/eqnchar.6 | 182 ++ static/v10/man6/factor.6 | 30 + static/v10/man6/festoon.6 | 17 + static/v10/man6/font.6 | 114 ++ static/v10/man6/fortune.6 | 16 + static/v10/man6/hangman.6 | 56 + static/v10/man6/hyphen.6 | 19 + static/v10/man6/imp.6 | 36 + static/v10/man6/ipa.6 | 72 + static/v10/man6/latex.6 | 100 ++ static/v10/man6/m6.6 | 110 ++ static/v10/man6/mail.6 | 126 ++ static/v10/man6/man.6 | 281 +++ static/v10/man6/mars.6 | 100 ++ static/v10/man6/maze.6 | 12 + static/v10/man6/mbits.6 | 118 ++ static/v10/man6/mcs.6 | 145 ++ static/v10/man6/mille.6 | 223 +++ static/v10/man6/mon.6 | 12 + static/v10/man6/monop.6 | 181 ++ static/v10/man6/moo.6 | 26 + static/v10/man6/mpictures.6 | 154 ++ static/v10/man6/mpm.6 | 173 ++ static/v10/man6/ms.6 | 340 ++++ static/v10/man6/number.6 | 14 + static/v10/man6/ogre.6 | 128 ++ static/v10/man6/ov.6 | 21 + static/v10/man6/ptx.6 | 36 + static/v10/man6/quiz.6 | 86 + static/v10/man6/rain.6 | 1 + static/v10/man6/redcode.6 | 80 + static/v10/man6/sail.6 | 560 ++++++ static/v10/man6/sfs.6 | 43 + static/v10/man6/sky.6 | 81 + static/v10/man6/snake.6 | 45 + static/v10/man6/spline.6 | 57 + static/v10/man6/term.6 | 71 + static/v10/man6/tmg.6 | 48 + static/v10/man6/trek.man.6 | 802 +++++++++ static/v10/man6/ttt.6 | 29 + static/v10/man6/warp.6 | 13 + static/v10/man6/worms.6 | 1 + static/v10/man6/wump.6 | 29 + static/v10/man6/yacc.6 | 43 + static/v10/man7/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man7/apnews.7 | 196 +++ static/v10/man7/ascii.7 | 37 + static/v10/man7/av.7 | 121 ++ static/v10/man7/avw.7 | 127 ++ static/v10/man7/cal.7 | 33 + static/v10/man7/dict.7 | 193 +++ static/v10/man7/dkname.7 | 16 + static/v10/man7/dpd.7 | 75 + static/v10/man7/getty.7 | 75 + static/v10/man7/glob.7 | 36 + static/v10/man7/greek.7 | 42 + static/v10/man7/hier.7 | 517 ++++++ static/v10/man7/init.7 | 75 + static/v10/man7/kbd.7 | 44 + static/v10/man7/library.7 | 126 ++ static/v10/man7/login.7 | 101 ++ static/v10/man7/map.7 | 451 +++++ static/v10/man7/me.7 | 270 +++ static/v10/man7/msh.7 | 34 + static/v10/man7/netlib.7 | 91 + static/v10/man7/netnews.7 | 148 ++ static/v10/man7/news.7 | 67 + static/v10/man7/obproc.7 | 240 +++ static/v10/man7/papers.7 | 85 + static/v10/man7/poly.7 | 98 ++ static/v10/man7/postnews.7 | 43 + static/v10/man7/pq.7 | 126 ++ static/v10/man7/qns.7 | 189 ++ static/v10/man7/readnews.7 | 400 +++++ static/v10/man7/scat.7 | 81 + static/v10/man7/sky.7 | 48 + static/v10/man7/submit.7 | 112 ++ static/v10/man7/tabs.7 | 30 + static/v10/man7/tel.7 | 127 ++ static/v10/man7/telno.7 | 43 + static/v10/man7/tmheader.7 | 15 + static/v10/man7/town.7 | 33 + static/v10/man7/units.7 | 140 ++ static/v10/man7/vs.7 | 58 + static/v10/man7/vsp.7 | 61 + static/v10/man7/weather.7 | 45 + static/v10/man7/wx.7 | 90 + static/v10/man8/11.8 | 12 + static/v10/man8/20boot.8 | 31 + static/v10/man8/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man8/ac.8 | 56 + static/v10/man8/acct.8 | 37 + static/v10/man8/adduser.8 | 87 + static/v10/man8/analyze.8 | 117 ++ static/v10/man8/apx.8 | 33 + static/v10/man8/arcv.8 | 23 + static/v10/man8/arff.8 | 64 + static/v10/man8/asd.8 | 174 ++ static/v10/man8/atalla.8 | 62 + static/v10/man8/authmgr.8 | 204 +++ static/v10/man8/backup.8 | 90 + static/v10/man8/blmount.8 | 23 + static/v10/man8/bproc.8 | 235 +++ static/v10/man8/check.8 | 50 + static/v10/man8/chk.8 | 21 + static/v10/man8/chown.8 | 47 + static/v10/man8/chuck.8 | 116 ++ static/v10/man8/cl.8 | 100 ++ static/v10/man8/clri.8 | 41 + static/v10/man8/config.8 | 48 + static/v10/man8/cpp.8 | 114 ++ static/v10/man8/crash.8 | 268 +++ static/v10/man8/cron.8 | 86 + static/v10/man8/dcheck.8 | 44 + static/v10/man8/delivermail.8 | 248 +++ static/v10/man8/df.8 | 21 + static/v10/man8/dist.8 | 146 ++ static/v10/man8/dkmgr.8 | 165 ++ static/v10/man8/dli.8 | 27 + static/v10/man8/dmesg.8 | 64 + static/v10/man8/downgrade.8 | 37 + static/v10/man8/dump.8 | 94 + static/v10/man8/dumpdir.8 | 38 + static/v10/man8/expire.8 | 67 + static/v10/man8/fsck.8 | 248 +++ static/v10/man8/fstat.8 | 49 + static/v10/man8/gacct.8 | 22 + static/v10/man8/gettable.8 | 65 + static/v10/man8/getty.8 | 88 + static/v10/man8/halt.8 | 21 + static/v10/man8/htable.8 | 116 ++ static/v10/man8/icheck.8 | 182 ++ static/v10/man8/inews.8 | 93 + static/v10/man8/init.8 | 147 ++ static/v10/man8/ino.8 | 10 + static/v10/man8/ins.8 | 103 ++ static/v10/man8/install.8 | 34 + static/v10/man8/ipconfig.8 | 125 ++ static/v10/man8/istat.8 | 35 + static/v10/man8/kill.8 | 36 + static/v10/man8/kmc.8 | 107 ++ static/v10/man8/ldpcs.8 | 58 + static/v10/man8/login.8 | 138 ++ static/v10/man8/makekey.8 | 53 + static/v10/man8/mkfs.8 | 138 ++ static/v10/man8/mknod.8 | 79 + static/v10/man8/mkpkg.8 | 179 ++ static/v10/man8/mount.8 | 153 ++ static/v10/man8/netfs.8 | 315 ++++ static/v10/man8/netstat.8 | 100 ++ static/v10/man8/nosh.8 | 138 ++ static/v10/man8/ns.8 | 153 ++ static/v10/man8/postbgi.8 | 138 ++ static/v10/man8/postio.8 | 205 +++ static/v10/man8/postreverse.8 | 97 ++ static/v10/man8/postscript.8 | 283 +++ static/v10/man8/privserv.8 | 60 + static/v10/man8/ps.8 | 77 + static/v10/man8/pstat.8 | 418 +++++ static/v10/man8/pwserv.8 | 77 + static/v10/man8/quot.8 | 135 ++ static/v10/man8/rarepl.8 | 115 ++ static/v10/man8/rc.8 | 77 + static/v10/man8/reboot.8 | 127 ++ static/v10/man8/recnews.8 | 24 + static/v10/man8/reloc.8 | 45 + static/v10/man8/renice.8 | 31 + static/v10/man8/restor.8 | 112 ++ static/v10/man8/route.8 | 95 ++ static/v10/man8/sa.8 | 185 ++ static/v10/man8/salv.8 | 86 + static/v10/man8/savecore.8 | 83 + static/v10/man8/scsish.8 | 222 +++ static/v10/man8/sendcover.8 | 28 + static/v10/man8/sendnews.8 | 60 + static/v10/man8/ship.8 | 118 ++ static/v10/man8/showq.8 | 56 + static/v10/man8/shutdown.8 | 9 + static/v10/man8/smash.8 | 43 + static/v10/man8/smstat.8 | 24 + static/v10/man8/smtp.8 | 200 +++ static/v10/man8/sticky.8 | 44 + static/v10/man8/su.8 | 34 + static/v10/man8/svcmgr.8 | 331 ++++ static/v10/man8/swapon.8 | 37 + static/v10/man8/swtmp.8 | 24 + static/v10/man8/symorder.8 | 23 + static/v10/man8/sync.8 | 18 + static/v10/man8/syslog.8 | 172 ++ static/v10/man8/tcpmgr.8 | 73 + static/v10/man8/tm.8 | 48 + static/v10/man8/tp.8 | 175 ++ static/v10/man8/umount.8 | 31 + static/v10/man8/unspk.8 | 43 + static/v10/man8/upas.8 | 275 +++ static/v10/man8/update.8 | 25 + static/v10/man8/uucico.8 | 205 +++ static/v10/man8/uucleanup.8 | 103 ++ static/v10/man8/uurec.8 | 18 + static/v10/man8/vipw.8 | 23 + static/v10/man8/vmstat.8 | 143 ++ static/v10/man8/vpac.8 | 49 + static/v10/man8/wall.8 | 23 + static/v10/man8/worm.8 | 436 +++++ static/v10/man8/xs.8 | 63 + static/v10/man8/xstr.8 | 108 ++ static/v10/man9/32ld.9 | 55 + static/v10/man9/3cc.9 | 163 ++ static/v10/man9/Makefile | 3 + static/v10/man9/add.9 | 138 ++ static/v10/man9/alloc.9 | 93 + static/v10/man9/bitblt.9 | 161 ++ static/v10/man9/bitfile.9 | 74 + static/v10/man9/blitblt.9 | 130 ++ static/v10/man9/blitmap.9 | 191 +++ static/v10/man9/brfs.9 | 27 + static/v10/man9/brush.9 | 301 ++++ static/v10/man9/button.9 | 108 ++ static/v10/man9/cip.9 | 58 + static/v10/man9/circle.9 | 78 + static/v10/man9/cos.9 | 59 + static/v10/man9/crabs.9 | 52 + static/v10/man9/demo.9 | 37 + static/v10/man9/face.9 | 86 + static/v10/man9/faced.9 | 179 ++ static/v10/man9/flickfile.9 | 86 + static/v10/man9/flicks.9 | 138 ++ static/v10/man9/font.9 | 110 ++ static/v10/man9/gebaca.9 | 18 + static/v10/man9/getfont.9 | 59 + static/v10/man9/graphdraw.9 | 310 ++++ static/v10/man9/icon.9 | 90 + static/v10/man9/intro.9 | 128 ++ static/v10/man9/jf.9 | 117 ++ static/v10/man9/jim.9 | 347 ++++ static/v10/man9/jioctl.9 | 74 + static/v10/man9/jx.9 | 112 ++ static/v10/man9/lens.9 | 108 ++ static/v10/man9/libc.9 | 42 + static/v10/man9/lsh.9 | 32 + static/v10/man9/mcc.9 | 227 +++ static/v10/man9/menuhit.9 | 210 +++ static/v10/man9/mld.9 | 146 ++ static/v10/man9/mouse.9 | 63 + static/v10/man9/movie.9 | 172 ++ static/v10/man9/mux.9 | 210 +++ static/v10/man9/muxstring.9 | 124 ++ static/v10/man9/newlayer.9 | 81 + static/v10/man9/newproc.9 | 193 +++ static/v10/man9/pads.9 | 102 ++ static/v10/man9/paint.9 | 218 +++ static/v10/man9/ped.9 | 318 ++++ static/v10/man9/pengo.9 | 72 + static/v10/man9/pi.9 | 397 +++++ static/v10/man9/proof.9 | 124 ++ static/v10/man9/psi.9 | 142 ++ static/v10/man9/reader.9 | 72 + static/v10/man9/rebecca.9 | 123 ++ static/v10/man9/request.9 | 238 +++ static/v10/man9/ruler.9 | 46 + static/v10/man9/sam.9 | 888 ++++++++++ static/v10/man9/samuel.9 | 420 +++++ static/v10/man9/string.9 | 102 ++ static/v10/man9/term.9 | 50 + static/v10/man9/thinkblt.9 | 108 ++ static/v10/man9/thinkclient.9 | 46 + static/v10/man9/twid.9 | 90 + static/v10/man9/types.9 | 147 ++ static/v10/man9/vismon.9 | 116 ++ static/v10/man9/windows.9 | 90 + 1115 files changed, 138083 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-) create mode 100644 static/v10/=.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/2500.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/300.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/450.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/8q.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/:.1.broken create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/=.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/acro.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/adb.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/altran.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apl.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apnews.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apply.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/apsend.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ar.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/array.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/as.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/as80.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/asa.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ascii.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/at.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/awk.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/backup.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/badge.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bas.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/basename.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/basic.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bcp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bison.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bite.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bitship.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bprint.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/btoa.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/bundle.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/c++.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/calendar.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/can.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cat.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/catsim.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cb.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cbt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cdb.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cf.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/charge.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chash.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chdate.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chdir.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/checknews.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/checknr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chmod.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chown.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/chunk.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cin.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cite.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/clear.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cmp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/column.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/comm.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/compress.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/con.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cospan.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/courier.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cpio.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cq.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cray.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cref.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/crypt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cscan.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/csh.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ctags.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cu.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cut.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/cvt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/d202.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dag.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/date.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/db.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dcon.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dd.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dds.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/deroff.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/df.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/diff.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dired.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dis.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dist.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/docgen.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/doctype.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/double.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/download.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dpost.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/dsw.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/du.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/echo.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ed.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/efl.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/eqn.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/esterel.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/exit.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/expr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/f2c.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/f77.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/factor.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fed.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fields.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/file.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/find.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/flex.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fmt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/form.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/forml.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ftp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/games.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gcc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/getlab.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/getopt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gets.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/getuid.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/goto.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/grabit.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gram.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/grap.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/graph.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/gre.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/grep.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hang.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hoc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hostname.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ican.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/iclc.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/icon.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/icont.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ideal.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/idiff.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/if.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/imscan.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/inews.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/init.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/intro.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/jim.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/join.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/jx.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/kill.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/kp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ksh.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lab.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/langs.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lcc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ld.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ld80.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/learn.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lex.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/library.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lim.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/limits.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lint.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lisp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ln.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/load.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/login.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/look.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lorder.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/lpr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ls.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/m.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/m4.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/m6.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mail.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mailx.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/make.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/makeml.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/man.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/maple.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/match.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/matlab.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/memo.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/merge.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mesg.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mint.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mk.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mm.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mmt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/monk.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/movie.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/mv.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nice.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nm.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nm80.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nohup.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/notary.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/notify.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/nroff.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/occ.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ocr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/od.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/olint.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/opr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ops5.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/org.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/osh.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ov.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/p.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pack.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/paper.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pascal.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/passwd.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/patch.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pax.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pfe.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pic.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/picasso.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pico.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/picpack.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pl.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/plot.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/post.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postgif.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postio.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postmd.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postnews.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postprint.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/posttek.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pq.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/prefer.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/printenv.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/printfont.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/priv.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/prof.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/proof.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/proofr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/prose.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ps.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/psifile.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/psix.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ptx.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/punct.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/push.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pwd.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/pxp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/qed.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/qsnap.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/random.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rates.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ratfor.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rcp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/readnews.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/readslow.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/redmail.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/refer.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/reloc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/remshent.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rev.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rew.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rm.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rmdir.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/roff.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/route.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/rscan.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sdb.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sed.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/see.also.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sendnews.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/seq.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/server.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/session.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/setlab.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sexist.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sh.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/shift.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/shstats.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sign.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/size.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/size80.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sleep.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sml.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sno.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/snocone.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/soelim.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sort.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/speak.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spell.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spelltell.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spellwwb.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spin.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spitbol.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/spline.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/split.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/splitrules.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/stat.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/stdarg.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/strings.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/strip.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/strlic.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/struct.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/stty.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/sum.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/switch.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/syl.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tabs.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tail.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/talk.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tap.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tape.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tar.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tbl.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tdc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tee.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/telnet.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/test.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tex.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/time.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tk.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tmg.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tmpnam.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tr.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tr2tex.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/track.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/troff.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/trofftable.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/true.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tset.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tsort.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tss.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/tty.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/twig.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/type.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/typo.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/ucache.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ul.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/un.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uniq.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uptime.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/usgmake.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/ustats.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uucp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uuencode.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uurec.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uustat.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uuto.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/uux.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/v6run.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vacation.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vi.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/view2d.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vis.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/visi.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vs.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/vsw.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/w.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wait.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wf1.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/who.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/worduse.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/write.1 create mode 100755 static/v10/man1/wtinit.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwb.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbhelp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbinfo.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbmail.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwbstand.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/wwv.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/xargs.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/xd.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/yacc.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/yes.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/zcmp.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/zero.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man1/zmore.1 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/access.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/acct.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/alarm.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/back.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/boot.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/break.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/brk.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/cemt.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/chdir.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/chmod.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/chown.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/close.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/cq.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/creat.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/csw.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/deprecated.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/dirread.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/dup.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/exec.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/exit.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/f2c.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fields.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fmount.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fork.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fpe.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/front.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/fstat.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getflab.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getgid.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getplab.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/getuid.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/gtty.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/ilgins.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/indir.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/intr.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/intro.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/ioctl.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/kill.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/labmount.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/limits.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/link.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/lseek.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/m.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/makdir.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mdate.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mkdir.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mknod.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mount.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/mpx.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/nice.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/nochk.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/open.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/pipe.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/profil.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/quit.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/read.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/rele.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/seek.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/select.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/setgid.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/setuid.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/signal.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/sleep.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/stat.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/stime.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/stty.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/sync.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/syscall.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/syslog.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/time.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/times.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/udbuf.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/umask.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/umount.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/unlink.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/unsafe.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/vtimes.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/wait.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man2/write.2 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/abort.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/arith.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/assert.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/atan.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/atof.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/atoi.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/bessel.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/bits.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/block.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/buildmap.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/cbit.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/cbt.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/chrtab.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/closeshares.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/compar.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/crypt.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ctime.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ctype.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/curses.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/dbm.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ddsput.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/dialout.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/directory.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ecvt.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/end.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/erf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/exit.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/exp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ferror.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fgets.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/filebuf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fio.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/floor.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fopen.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fptrap.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fread.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/frexp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fseek.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/fstream.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftoa.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftoo.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftw.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ftwalk.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/galloc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/gamma.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/gerts.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getarg.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getchr.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getdate.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getenv.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getfields.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getflags.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getflds.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getfsent.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getgrent.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getlogin.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getopt.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getpass.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getpw.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getpwent.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getshares.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getshput.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getstsrc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/getwd.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/hash.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/hmul.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/huff.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/hypot.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ierror.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/internet.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/intro.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ios.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ipc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/iread.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/istream.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/itoa.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/juke.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/l3tol.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/labconst.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/labeq.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/labtoa.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ldiv.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/log.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/malloc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/manip.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/map.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/memory.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mesg.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mktemp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mkunique.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mon.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/monitor.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/mvefil.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/nargs.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/nlist.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/notary.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/openshares.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ostream.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/perror.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pex.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/picfile.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pipebuf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pipestream.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/plot.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/poly.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pool.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/popen.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/port.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pow.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/print.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/printf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/proj.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ptime.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/putc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/putchr.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/putshares.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/pwquery.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/qsort.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/rand.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/re.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/regex.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/regexp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/reset.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/salloc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sbuf.prot.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sbuf.pub.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/scanf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setbuf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setfil.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setjmp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setlimits.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setupgroups.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/setupshares.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sfio.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sharesfile.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sin.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sinh.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sleep.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/sqrt.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ssbuf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/stak.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/stdio.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/stdiobuf.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/string.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/strstream.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/swab.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/switch.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/system.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/tcp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/termcap.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/timec.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/tm.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/tolower.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ttyn.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ttyname.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/udp.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/uname.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/ungetc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/valloc.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/varargs.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/view2d.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man3/vt.3 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/binarsys.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/bk.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/bl.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/bufld.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/cat.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/connld.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/console.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/da.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dc.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dh.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dispatch.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dk.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dn.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dp.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/drum.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/dz.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ethernet.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/fd.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/fl.4 create mode 100755 static/v10/man4/font.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/hp.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ht.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/intro.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ip.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/kl.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/log.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/lp.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/lpr.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mailcnfg.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mailsurr.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mem.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mesgld.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/modules.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/mt.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/newtty.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/null.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/pc.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/pex.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/proc.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ra.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rf.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rk.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rp.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/rv.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/scsi.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/stream.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tbl.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tc.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tcp.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tiu.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tm.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/tty.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/ttyld.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/up.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/va.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vc.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vp.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vs.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man4/vt.4 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/80.out.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/a.out.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/acct.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/aliases.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ar.5 create mode 100755 static/v10/man5/ascii.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/backup.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/cdl.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/config.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/core.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/cpio.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/dir.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/dist.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/dump.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/environ.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/filsys.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fizz.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/font.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fs.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fsm.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/fstab.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/graw.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ident.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/lde.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/lnode.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/log.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/map.5 create mode 100755 static/v10/man5/math.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mcolor.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mds.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/minterm.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/minus.z.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mpictures.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/mpxio.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/netnews.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/news.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/newsrc.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/paddle.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/passwd.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/picfile.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/plot.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/poly.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/privs.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/pwfile.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/saf.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/share.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/shares.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/speakm.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/src.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/stab.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/stock.10.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/tap.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/termcap.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/tp.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/troff.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ttys.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/ttytype.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/types.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/uids.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/utmp.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/uuencode.5 create mode 100755 static/v10/man5/values.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/vfont.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/view2d.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/whoami.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/worm.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man5/wtmp.5 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/adventure.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/arithmetic.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ascii.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/atc.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/azel.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/back.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/banner.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/basic.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bc.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bcd.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bianchi.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bj.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/boggle.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/bridge.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/cal.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/cards.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/chess.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ching.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/cubic.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/das.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/doctor.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/dpt.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/eqnchar.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/factor.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/festoon.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/font.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/fortune.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/hangman.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/hyphen.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/imp.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ipa.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/latex.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/m6.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mail.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/man.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mars.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/maze.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mbits.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mcs.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mille.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mon.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/monop.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/moo.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mpictures.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/mpm.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ms.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/number.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ogre.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ov.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ptx.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/quiz.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/rain.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/redcode.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/sail.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/sfs.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/sky.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/snake.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/spline.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/term.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/tmg.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/trek.man.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/ttt.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/warp.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/worms.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/wump.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man6/yacc.6 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/apnews.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/ascii.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/av.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/avw.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/cal.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/dict.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/dkname.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/dpd.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/getty.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/glob.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/greek.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/hier.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/init.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/kbd.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/library.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/login.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/map.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/me.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/msh.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/netlib.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/netnews.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/news.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/obproc.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/papers.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/poly.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/postnews.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/pq.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/qns.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/readnews.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/scat.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/sky.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/submit.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/tabs.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/tel.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/telno.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/tmheader.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/town.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/units.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/vs.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/vsp.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/weather.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man7/wx.7 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/11.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/20boot.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ac.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/acct.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/adduser.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/analyze.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/apx.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/arcv.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/arff.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/asd.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/atalla.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/authmgr.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/backup.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/blmount.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/bproc.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/check.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/chk.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/chown.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/chuck.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/cl.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/clri.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/config.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/cpp.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/crash.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/cron.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dcheck.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/delivermail.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/df.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dist.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dkmgr.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dli.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dmesg.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/downgrade.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dump.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/dumpdir.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/expire.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/fsck.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/fstat.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/gacct.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/gettable.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/getty.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/halt.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/htable.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/icheck.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/inews.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/init.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ino.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ins.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/install.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ipconfig.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/istat.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/kill.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/kmc.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ldpcs.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/login.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/makekey.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mkfs.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mknod.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mkpkg.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/mount.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/netfs.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/netstat.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/nosh.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ns.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postbgi.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postio.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postreverse.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/postscript.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/privserv.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ps.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/pstat.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/pwserv.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/quot.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/rarepl.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/rc.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/reboot.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/recnews.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/reloc.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/renice.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/restor.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/route.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sa.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/salv.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/savecore.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/scsish.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sendcover.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sendnews.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/ship.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/showq.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/shutdown.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/smash.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/smstat.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/smtp.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sticky.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/su.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/svcmgr.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/swapon.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/swtmp.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/symorder.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/sync.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/syslog.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/tcpmgr.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/tm.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/tp.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/umount.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/unspk.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/upas.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/update.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/uucico.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/uucleanup.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/uurec.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/vipw.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/vmstat.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/vpac.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/wall.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/worm.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/xs.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man8/xstr.8 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/32ld.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/3cc.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/Makefile create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/add.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/alloc.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/bitblt.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/bitfile.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/blitblt.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/blitmap.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/brfs.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/brush.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/button.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/cip.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/circle.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/cos.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/crabs.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/demo.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/face.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/faced.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/flickfile.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/flicks.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/font.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/gebaca.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/getfont.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/graphdraw.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/icon.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/intro.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jf.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jim.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jioctl.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/jx.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/lens.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/libc.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/lsh.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mcc.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/menuhit.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mld.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mouse.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/movie.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/mux.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/muxstring.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/newlayer.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/newproc.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/pads.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/paint.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/ped.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/pengo.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/pi.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/proof.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/psi.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/reader.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/rebecca.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/request.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/ruler.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/sam.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/samuel.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/string.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/term.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/thinkblt.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/thinkclient.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/twid.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/types.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/vismon.9 create mode 100644 static/v10/man9/windows.9 diff --git a/Dockerfile b/Dockerfile index 8d285c97..e263488a 100644 --- a/Dockerfile +++ b/Dockerfile @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ MAINTAINER Jacob McDonnell EXPOSE 8000 WORKDIR /app COPY . . -RUN apk add pandoc bash -RUN ./MdToHtml +RUN apk add mandoc bash sqlite +RUN ./build create RUN go build -cmd ["./web"] +cmd ["./manpage"] diff --git a/build b/build index 0e4af8fd..15b38182 100755 --- a/build +++ b/build @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ #!/usr/bin/env bash -SUBDIRS=(static/openbsd static/netbsd static/freebsd) +SUBDIRS=(static/openbsd static/netbsd static/freebsd static/v10) create() { sqlite3 man.db <Man Pages
- +

diff --git a/static/v10/=.1 b/static/v10/=.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..509409e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/=.1 @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +.TH = 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +=, ==, =p, ==p \- redo previous shell command +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B = +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.br +.B == +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.br +.B =p +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.br +.B ==p +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I = +command provides a simple history mechanism for the shell, +.IR sh (1). +The environment variable +.BR HISTORY , +if set, +names a file to which +the shell appends the text of each command before execution. +.I = +searches the history file for the most recent +command that matches the +.I pattern, +performs the +.IR substitutions, +and executes it. +The +.I pattern +must agree with an initial substring of the original +command except for variations in spacing. +If no +.I pattern +is specified, the most recent command is selected. +If no +substitution +is specified, the command is executed without modification. +.PP +.PP +Substitutions have the form +.IP +.IB old = new +.LP +specifying that the string +.I old +in the command is to be replaced by +.I new. +Substitutions are made in order +and operate on the first match. +.PP +The +.I == +command is identical to +.IR = , +but allows the substituted command to be edited before running. +The command is printed, +and a modification request is read from the terminal. +Generally each character in the request specifies how to +modify the character immediately above it: +.TP +.B # +Delete the character. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B % +Replace the character with a space. +.TP +.B ^ +Insert the rest of the request line before the character. +.TP +.B $ +Replace the characters in the command from this position on +with the rest of the request line. +.IP "space or tab" +Leave the character(s) unchanged. +.TP +.B = +Must be the first and only edit character. +Back up to the next most recent +match in the history file +and try again. +.IP "any other" +This character replaces the one above it. +.PD +.PP +If the request line is longer than the command, +the overhang is appended to the command. +.PP +.I =p +and +.I ==p +behave like +.I = +and +.IR == , +except that they print the command on +their standard output instead of executing it. diff --git a/static/v10/Makefile b/static/v10/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f47052cd --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +SUBDIRS = man1 \ + man2 \ + man3 \ + man4 \ + man5 \ + man6 \ + man7 \ + man8 \ + man9 + +export OS="Unix V10" + +include ../subdir.mk + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/2500.1 b/static/v10/man1/2500.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bfdec3a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/2500.1 @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.TH 2500 1 +.CT 1 graphics comm_dev +.SH NAME +2500 \- BVH2500 videotape recorder +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B 2500 +[ +.B -lq +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I 2500 +is an interpreter of commands to control +a SONY BVH2500 1-inch video recorder, whose +inputs and outputs have already been set up. +The options are +.TP +.B -l +Create a log file; useful in pursuit of bugs. +.TP +.B -q +Suppress the initial status report. +.PP +Most of the commands require an intimate knowledge of the equipment. +The simpler commands are described below; +see the +.B help +command for a complete list. +Times are given as +.B "[[hrs.]min.]sec.fr" +where there are 30 frames per second. +The commands are +.TF viewxxxxxx +.TP 10n +.BI cue \ t +Move the tape to time +.IR t . +.TP +.B help +Produce a list of all commands. +.TP +.BI loop "\ t0 t1 fps" +Play from +.I t0 +through +.I t1 +and back again at +.I fps +frames per second. +.TP +.B play +Start playing the tape from the current frame. +.TP +.BI snap \ n +When in still record mode, record the current input onto the next +.I n +frames. +A missing +.I n +is taken to be 1. +.TP +.B status +Print some status information. +The command +.B status status +prints all available status information. +.TP +.BI still \ t +Go into still record mode and cue to time +.IR t . +The command returns before the tape transport is done; +usually it must be followed by +.LR wait . +.TP +.B still mode on|off +Turn still mode on or off. +.TP +.B stop +Stop the tape transport. +.TP +.BI view " t0 t1" +Play from +.I t0 +through +.I t1. +.B wait +Wait for the previous tape transport command to finish. +.TP +.B ! +Interpret the rest of the line as a +.IR sh (1) +command. +.TP +.B # +Comment. Ignore the rest of the line. +.PD +.PP +.SH EXAMPLES +Assuming you have already set up the video switch to feed the BVH2500, +the following script will record (or rerecord) a movie starting at 2 minutes. +.EX +still 2.0.0 +wait +!generate an image +snap 1 +# repeat the last two lines as necessary +still mode off +stop +.EE +.br +.SH BUGS +The BVH2500 will misbehave if the pause between +.BR snap s +(in still record mode) is too long, +or if you record for many hours on end. +The latter problem can be avoided by using scripts that run +for 2 or 3 hours and sleeping for 10 minutes between scripts +with the tape transport off. +.br +Commands in the help list are (incorrectly) capitalized. + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/300.1 b/static/v10/man1/300.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c100fe71 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/300.1 @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +.TH 300 1 +.SH NAME +300, 300s \- handle special functions of DASI 300 and 300s terminals +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B 300 +[ +.B +12 +] +[ +.B \-n +] +[ +.BI \-d t,l,c +] +.PP +.B 300s +[ +.B +12 +] +[ +.B \-n +] +[ +.BI \-d t,l,c +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I 300\^ +supports special functions and optimizes the use of the +.SM DASI +300 +(\s-1GSI\s+1 300 or +.SM DTC +300) terminal; +.I 300s\^ +performs the same functions for the +.SM DASI +300s (\s-1GSI\s+1 300s or +.SM DTC +300s) terminal. +It converts half-line forward, half-line reverse, and full-line reverse +motions to the correct vertical motions. +It also +attempts to draw Greek letters and other special symbols. +It permits convenient use of 12-pitch text. +It also reduces printing time 5 to 70%. +.I 300\^ +can be used +to print equations neatly, in the sequence: +.PP +.RS +neqn file +.B \&.\|.\|. +\(bv nroff \(bv 300 +.PP +.RE +.SM WARNING: +if your terminal has a +.SM PLOT +switch, make sure it is turned +.I on\^ +before +.I 300\^ +is used. +.PP +The behavior of +.I 300\^ +can be modified by the optional flag arguments to handle +12-pitch text, fractional line spacings, messages, and delays. +.TP 9 +.B +12 +permits use of 12-pitch, 6 lines/inch text. +.SM DASI +300 terminals normally allow only two combinations: 10-pitch, 6 lines/inch, +or 12-pitch, 8 lines/inch. +To obtain the 12-pitch, 6 lines per inch combination, the user should turn the +.SM PITCH +switch to 12, and use the +.B +12 +option. +.TP 9 +.BI \- n\^ +controls the size of half-line spacing. +A half-line is, by default, +equal to 4 vertical plot increments. +Because each increment equals 1/48 of an inch, +a 10-pitch line-feed requires 8 increments, +while a 12-pitch line-feed needs only 6. +The first digit of +.I n\^ +overrides the default value, thus allowing for individual taste +in the appearance of subscripts and superscripts. +For example, +.IR nroff (1) +half-lines could be made to act as quarter-lines by using +.BR \-2 . +The user could also obtain appropriate half-lines for +12-pitch, 8 lines/inch mode by using the option +.B \-3 +alone, +having set the +.SM PITCH +switch to 12-pitch. +.TP 9 +.BI \-d t , l , c\^ +controls delay factors. +The default setting is +.BR \-d3,90,30 . +.SM DASI +300 terminals sometimes produce +peculiar output when faced with +very long lines, +too many tab characters, +or long strings of blankless, non-identical characters. +One null (delay) character is inserted in a line for every set of +.I t\^ +tabs, +and for every contiguous string of +.I c\^ +non-blank, non-tab characters. +If a line is longer than +.I l\^ +bytes, 1+(total length)/20 nulls are inserted at the end of that line. +Items can be omitted from the end of the list, +implying use of the default values. +Also, a value of +zero +for +.I t\^ +.RI ( c ) +results in two null bytes per tab (character). +The former may be needed for C programs, the latter for files like +.BR /etc/passwd . +Because terminal behavior varies according to the specific characters printed and +the load on a system, +the user may have to experiment with these values to get correct output. +The +.B \-d +option exists only as a last resort +for those few cases that do not otherwise print properly. +For example, the file +.B /etc/passwd +may be printed using +.BR \-d3,30,5 . +The value +.B \-d0,1 +is a good one to use for C programs that have many +levels of indentation. +.IP +Note that the delay control interacts heavily +with the prevailing carriage return and +line-feed delays. +The +.IR stty (1) +modes +.B "nl0 cr2" +or +.B "nl0 cr3" +are recommended for most uses. +.PP +.I 300\^ +can be used with the +.I nroff\^ +.B \-s +flag or +.B \&.rd +requests, when it is necessary to insert paper manually or change fonts +in the middle of a document. +Instead of hitting the +return +key in these cases, +you must use the +line-feed +key to +get any response. +.PP +In many (but not all) cases, the following sequences are equivalent: +.RS +.PP +nroff \-T300 files +.B \&.\|.\|. +\ \ and\ \ \ nroff files +.B \&.\|.\|. +\(bv 300 +.br +nroff \-T300\-12 files +.B \&.\|.\|. +\ \ and\ \ \ nroff files +.B \&.\|.\|. +\(bv 300\ +12 +.PP +.RE +The use of +.I 300\^ +can thus often be avoided unless +special delays or options are required; +in a few cases, however, the additional movement optimization of +.I 300\^ +may produce better-aligned output. +.PP +The +.IR neqn (1) +names of, and +resulting output for, the Greek and special characters supported +by +.I 300\^ +are shown in +.IR greek (7). +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR 450 (1), +.IR eqn (1), +.IR graph (1G), +.IR mesg (1), +.IR stty (1), +.IR tabs (1), +.IR tbl (1), +.IR tplot (1G), +.IR troff (1), +.IR greek (7). +.SH BUGS +Some special characters cannot be correctly printed in column 1 +because the print head cannot be moved to the left from there. +.br +If your output contains Greek and/or reverse line-feeds, +use a friction-feed platen instead of a forms tractor; +although good enough for drafts, +the latter has a tendency to slip when reversing direction, +distorting Greek characters and misaligning the first line of text after one or more +reverse line-feeds. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/450.1 b/static/v10/man1/450.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce3cecdd --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/450.1 @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +.TH 450 1 +.SH NAME +450 \- handle special functions of the DASI 450 terminal +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B 450 +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I 450\^ +supports special functions of, and optimizes the use of, the +.SM DASI +450 +terminal, +or any terminal that is functionally identical, +such as the +.SM DIABLO +1620 or +.SM XEROX +1700. +It converts half-line forward, half-line reverse, and full-line reverse +motions to the correct vertical motions. +It also +attempts to draw Greek letters and other special symbols +in the same manner as +.IR 300 (1). +.I 450\^ +can be used +to print equations neatly, in the sequence: +.PP +.RS +neqn\| file\| .\|.\|.\| \(bv\| nroff\| \(bv\| 450 +.RE +.PP +.SM WARNING: +make sure that the +.SM PLOT +switch on your terminal is +.SM ON +before +.I 450\^ +is used. +The +.SM SPACING +switch should be put in the desired position (either 10- or 12-pitch). +In either case, vertical spacing is 6 lines/inch, +unless dynamically changed to 8 lines per inch by an appropriate escape sequence. +.PP +.I 450\^ +can be used with the +.IR nroff (1) +.B \-s +flag or +.B \&.rd +requests, when it is necessary to insert paper manually or change fonts +in the middle of a document. +Instead of hitting the +return +key in these cases, +you must use the +line-feed +key to +get any response. +.PP +In many (but not all) cases, the use of +.I 450\^ +can be eliminated in favor of one of the following: +.PP +.RS +nroff\| \-T450\| files\| .\|.\|. +.RE +or +.RS +nroff\| \-T450\-12\| files\| .\|.\|. +.RE +.PP +The use of +.I 450\^ +can thus often be avoided unless +special delays or options are required; +in a few cases, however, the additional movement optimization of +.I 450\^ +may produce better-aligned output. +.PP +The +.IR neqn (1) +names of, and +resulting output for, the Greek and special characters supported +by +.I 450\^ +are shown in +.IR greek (7). +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR 300 (1), +.IR eqn (1), +.IR graph (1G), +.IR mesg (1), +.IR stty (1), +.IR tabs (1), +.IR tbl (1), +.IR tplot (1G), +.IR troff (1), +.IR greek (7). +.SH BUGS +Some special characters cannot be correctly printed in column 1 +because the print head cannot be moved to the left from there. +.br +If your output contains Greek and/or reverse line-feeds, +use a friction-feed platen instead of a forms tractor; +although good enough for drafts, +the latter has a tendency to slip when reversing direction, +distorting Greek characters and misaligning the first line of text after one or more +reverse line-feeds. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/8q.1 b/static/v10/man1/8q.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ed6437f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/8q.1 @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +1 5 8 6 3 7 2 4 +1 6 8 3 7 4 2 5 +1 7 4 6 8 2 5 3 +1 7 5 8 2 4 6 3 +2 4 6 8 3 1 7 5 +2 5 7 1 3 8 6 4 +2 5 7 4 1 8 6 3 +2 6 1 7 4 8 3 5 +2 6 8 3 1 4 7 5 +2 7 3 6 8 5 1 4 +2 7 5 8 1 4 6 3 +2 8 6 1 3 5 7 4 +3 1 7 5 8 2 4 6 +3 5 2 8 1 7 4 6 +3 5 2 8 6 4 7 1 +3 5 7 1 4 2 8 6 +3 5 8 4 1 7 2 6 +3 6 2 5 8 1 7 4 +3 6 2 7 1 4 8 5 +3 6 2 7 5 1 8 4 +3 6 4 1 8 5 7 2 +3 6 4 2 8 5 7 1 +3 6 8 1 4 7 5 2 +3 6 8 1 5 7 2 4 +3 6 8 2 4 1 7 5 +3 7 2 8 5 1 4 6 +3 7 2 8 6 4 1 5 +3 8 4 7 1 6 2 5 +4 1 5 8 2 7 3 6 +4 1 5 8 6 3 7 2 +4 2 5 8 6 1 3 7 +4 2 7 3 6 8 1 5 +4 2 7 3 6 8 5 1 +4 2 7 5 1 8 6 3 +4 2 8 5 7 1 3 6 +4 2 8 6 1 3 5 7 +4 6 1 5 2 8 3 7 +4 6 8 2 7 1 3 5 +4 6 8 3 1 7 5 2 +4 7 1 8 5 2 6 3 +4 7 3 8 2 5 1 6 +4 7 5 2 6 1 3 8 +4 7 5 3 1 6 8 2 +4 8 1 3 6 2 7 5 +4 8 1 5 7 2 6 3 +4 8 5 3 1 7 2 6 +5 1 4 6 8 2 7 3 +5 1 8 4 2 7 3 6 +5 1 8 6 3 7 2 4 +5 2 4 6 8 3 1 7 +5 2 4 7 3 8 6 1 +5 2 6 1 7 4 8 3 +5 2 8 1 4 7 3 6 +5 3 1 6 8 2 4 7 +5 3 1 7 2 8 6 4 +5 3 8 4 7 1 6 2 +5 7 1 3 8 6 4 2 +5 7 1 4 2 8 6 3 +5 7 2 4 8 1 3 6 +5 7 2 6 3 1 4 8 +5 7 2 6 3 1 8 4 +5 7 4 1 3 8 6 2 +5 8 4 1 3 6 2 7 +5 8 4 1 7 2 6 3 +6 1 5 2 8 3 7 4 +6 2 7 1 3 5 8 4 +6 2 7 1 4 8 5 3 +6 3 1 7 5 8 2 4 +6 3 1 8 4 2 7 5 +6 3 1 8 5 2 4 7 +6 3 5 7 1 4 2 8 +6 3 5 8 1 4 2 7 +6 3 7 2 4 8 1 5 +6 3 7 2 8 5 1 4 +6 3 7 4 1 8 2 5 +6 4 1 5 8 2 7 3 +6 4 2 8 5 7 1 3 +6 4 7 1 3 5 2 8 +6 4 7 1 8 2 5 3 +6 8 2 4 1 7 5 3 +7 1 3 8 6 4 2 5 +7 2 4 1 8 5 3 6 +7 2 6 3 1 4 8 5 +7 3 1 6 8 5 2 4 +7 3 8 2 5 1 6 4 +7 4 2 5 8 1 3 6 +7 4 2 8 6 1 3 5 +7 5 3 1 6 8 2 4 +8 2 4 1 7 5 3 6 +8 2 5 3 1 7 4 6 +8 3 1 6 2 5 7 4 +8 4 1 3 6 2 7 5 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/:.1.broken b/static/v10/man1/:.1.broken new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4a1e3b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/:.1.broken @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +.pa 1 +.he ': (I)'3/15/72': (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME : -- place a label +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS :_ [ label ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION :_ +does nothing. Its only function is to place +a label for the goto____ command. :_ is a command +so the Shell doesn't have to be fixed to ignore lines with +:'s. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO goto(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/=.1 b/static/v10/man1/=.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..509409e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/=.1 @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +.TH = 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +=, ==, =p, ==p \- redo previous shell command +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B = +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.br +.B == +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.br +.B =p +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.br +.B ==p +[ +.I pattern +] +[ +.I substitution ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I = +command provides a simple history mechanism for the shell, +.IR sh (1). +The environment variable +.BR HISTORY , +if set, +names a file to which +the shell appends the text of each command before execution. +.I = +searches the history file for the most recent +command that matches the +.I pattern, +performs the +.IR substitutions, +and executes it. +The +.I pattern +must agree with an initial substring of the original +command except for variations in spacing. +If no +.I pattern +is specified, the most recent command is selected. +If no +substitution +is specified, the command is executed without modification. +.PP +.PP +Substitutions have the form +.IP +.IB old = new +.LP +specifying that the string +.I old +in the command is to be replaced by +.I new. +Substitutions are made in order +and operate on the first match. +.PP +The +.I == +command is identical to +.IR = , +but allows the substituted command to be edited before running. +The command is printed, +and a modification request is read from the terminal. +Generally each character in the request specifies how to +modify the character immediately above it: +.TP +.B # +Delete the character. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B % +Replace the character with a space. +.TP +.B ^ +Insert the rest of the request line before the character. +.TP +.B $ +Replace the characters in the command from this position on +with the rest of the request line. +.IP "space or tab" +Leave the character(s) unchanged. +.TP +.B = +Must be the first and only edit character. +Back up to the next most recent +match in the history file +and try again. +.IP "any other" +This character replaces the one above it. +.PD +.PP +If the request line is longer than the command, +the overhang is appended to the command. +.PP +.I =p +and +.I ==p +behave like +.I = +and +.IR == , +except that they print the command on +their standard output instead of executing it. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/Makefile b/static/v10/man1/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000..31e80e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +MAN = $(wildcard *.1) + +include ../../mandoc.mk diff --git a/static/v10/man1/acro.1 b/static/v10/man1/acro.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18a45daa --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/acro.1 @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.2, February 26, 1981 +.TH ACRO 1 +.SH NAME +acro \- find acronyms in a text file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B acro +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Acro +searches for acronyms in a text file. +It prints each sentence containing an acronym. +.I Acro +also prints a frequency count of all acronyms used in the text. +.PP +.I Acro +skips lines that begin with a dot, "."; +so text files that contain standard +.IR nroff "(1) and " mm (1) +macros are acceptable input. +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH USES +.I Acro +can be used to locate acronyms in a text. +The user can then check to see that an acronym is fully defined +when it is first used. +.SH FILES +.TP 21 +/tmp/$$* +temporary files +.SH SEE ALSO +nroff(1), mm(1). +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/adb.1 b/static/v10/man1/adb.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe5191b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/adb.1 @@ -0,0 +1,1116 @@ +.TH ADB 1 +.CT 1 debug_tune +.ds TW \v'.25m'\s+2~\s-2\v'-.25m' +.ds ST \v'.25m'*\v'-.25m' +.ds IM \v'.1m'=\v'-.1m'\s-2\h'-.1m'>\h'.1m'\s+2 +.ds LE \(<= +.ds LT \s-2<\s+2 +.ds GT \s-2>\s+2 +.SH NAME +adb \- debugger +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B adb +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I objfil +[ +.I corfil +] +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Adb +is a general purpose debugging program. +It may be used to examine files and to provide +a controlled environment for the execution +of UNIX programs. +.PP +.I Objfil +is normally an executable program file, preferably +containing a symbol table; +if not then the +symbolic features of +.I adb +cannot be used although the file can still +be examined. +The default for +.I objfil +is +.LR a.out . +.I Corfil +is assumed to be a core image file produced after +executing +.IR objfil ; +the default for +.I corfil +is +.LR core . +.PP +Requests to +.I adb +are read from the standard input and +responses are to the standard output. +Quit signals are ignored; interrupts +cause return to the next +.I adb +command. +The options are +.TP +.B -w +Create +.I objfil +and +.I corfil +if they don't exist; open them for writing +as well as reading. +.TP +.BI -I path +Directory in which to look for relative pathnames in +.B $< +and +.B $<< +commands. +.PP +In general requests to +.I adb +have the following form. +Multiple requests on one line must be separated by +.LR ; . +.IP +.RI [ address ] +.RB [ , +.IR count ] +.RI [ command ] +.PP +If +.I address +is present then the current position, called `dot', +is set to +.IR address . +Initially dot +is set to 0. +In general commands are repeated +.I count +times. +Dot advances between repetitions. +The default +.I count +is 1. +.I Address +and +.I count +are expressions. +.PP +Some formats, +data sizes, +and command details have +different behavior +on different systems. +See the +.SM "MACHINE DEPENDENCIES" +attachment for details. +.SS Expressions +Expressions are computed with sufficient precision +to address the largest possible file; +generally this means a long integer. +On the VAX, +expressions are 32 bits; +on the Cray, +64 bits. +.TP 7.2n +.B . +The value of dot. +.TP 7.2n +.B + +The value of dot +incremented by the current increment. +.TP 7.2n +.B ^ +The value of dot +decremented by the current increment. +.TP 7.2n +.B \&" +The last +.I address +typed. +.TP 7.2n +.I integer +A number +in the +.IR "default radix" ; +see the +.B $d +command. +Regardless of the default, +the prefixes +.L 0o +and +.L 0O +(zero oh) force interpretation +in octal radix; the prefixes +.L 0t +and +.L 0T +force interpretation in +decimal radix; the prefixes +.LR 0x , +.LR 0X , +and +.L # +force interpretation in +hexadecimal radix. +Thus +.LR 0o20 , +.LR 0t16 , +and +.L #10 +all represent sixteen. +.TP 7.2n +.IB integer . fraction +A floating point number. +.TP 7.2n +.BI \' cccc\| \' +The +.SM ASCII +value of one or more characters. +.L \e +may be used to escape a +.LR \' . +.TP 7.2n +.BI < name +The value of +.IR name , +which is either a variable name or a register name. +.I Adb +maintains a number of variables +named by single letters or digits. +The register names are +those printed by the +.B $r +command. +.TP 7.2n +.I symbol +A +.I symbol +is a sequence +of upper or lower case letters, underscores or +digits, not starting with a digit. +.L \e +may be used to escape other characters. +The value of the +.I symbol +is taken from the symbol table +in +.IR objfil . +.TP 7.2n +.IB routine . name +The address of the variable +.I name +in the specified +C routine. +Both +.I routine +and +.I name +are +.IR symbols . +If +.I name +is omitted the value is the address of the +most recently activated C stack frame +corresponding to +.IR routine ; +if +.I routine +is omitted, +the active procedure +is assumed. +.TP 7.2n +.BI ( exp ) +The value of the expression +.IB exp . +.LP +.I Monadic operators +.TP 7.2n +.BI * exp +The contents of the location addressed +by +.I exp +in +.IR corfil . +.TP 7.2n +.BI @ exp +The contents of the location addressed by +.I exp +in +.IR objfil . +.TP 7.2n +.BI - exp +Integer negation. +.TP 7.2n +.BI ~ exp +Bitwise complement. +.TP 7.2n +.BI % exp +If +.I exp +is used as an address, +it is in register space; +see `Addresses'. +.LP +.I "Dyadic\ operators" +are left associative +and are less binding than monadic operators. +.TP 7.2n +.IB e1 + e2 +Integer addition. +.TP 7.2n +.IB e1 - e2 +Integer subtraction. +.TP 7.2n +.IB e1 * e2 +Integer multiplication. +.TP 7.2n +.IB e1 % e2 +Integer division. +.TP 7.2n +.IB e1 & e2 +Bitwise conjunction. +.TP 7.2n +.IB e1 | e2 +Bitwise disjunction. +.TP 7.2n +.IB e1 # e2 +.I E1 +rounded up to the next multiple of +.IR e2 . +.DT +.SS Commands +Most commands consist of a verb followed by a modifier or list +of modifiers. +The following verbs are available. +(The commands +.L ? +and +.L / +may be followed by +.LR * ; +see `Addresses' +for further details.) +.TP .5i +.BI ? f +Locations starting at +.I address +in +.I objfil +are printed according to the format +.IR f . +.TP +.BI / f +Locations starting at +.I address +in +.I corfil +are printed according to the format +.I f. +.TP +.BI = f +The value of +.I address +itself is printed in the +styles indicated by the format +.IR f . +(For +.B i +format +.L ? +is printed for the parts of the instruction that reference +subsequent words.) +.PP +A +.I format +consists of one or more characters that specify a style +of printing. +Each format character may be preceded by a decimal integer +that is a repeat count for the format character. +If no format is given then the last format is used. +.PP +Most format letters fetch some data, +print it, +and advance (a local copy of) dot +by the number of bytes fetched. +The total number of bytes in a format becomes the +.I current increment. +`Long integers' are full words, +the size of an expression item: +e.g.\& +4 bytes on the VAX, +8 bytes on the Cray. +`Short integers' +are some useful shorter size: +2 byte short integers on the VAX, +2 byte parcels on the Cray. +.ta 2.5n .5i +.RS +.TP +.PD 0 +.B r +Print short integer in the current default radix. +.TP +.PD 0 +.B R +Print long integer in the current default radix. +.TP +.PD 0 +.B o +Print short integer in octal. +.TP +.B O +Print long integer in octal. +.TP +.B q +Print short in signed octal. +.TP +.B Q +Print long in signed octal. +.TP +.B d +Print short in decimal. +.TP +.B D +Print long in decimal. +.TP +.B x +Print short in hexadecimal. +.TP +.B X +Print long in hexadecimal. +.TP +.B u +Print short in unsigned decimal. +.TP +.B U +Print long in unsigned decimal. +.TP +.B f +Print +as a floating point number. +.TP +.B F +Print double-precision floating point. +.TP +.B b +Print the addressed byte in octal. +.TP +.B c +Print the addressed character. +.TP +.B C +Print the addressed character. +Control characters +are printed in the form +.BI ^ X +and the delete character is printed as +.LR ^? . +.TP +.B s +Print the addressed characters until a zero character +is reached. +Advance dot +by the length of the string, +including the zero terminator. +.TP +.B S +Print a string using +the +.BI ^ X +escape convention (see +.B C +above). +.TP +.B Y +Print a long integer in date format (see +.IR ctime (3)). +.TP +.B i +Print as machine instructions. +This style of printing causes variables +0, (1, ...) +to be set to the offset parts +of the first (second, ...) +operand of the instruction. +.TP +.B a +Print the value of dot +in symbolic form. +Dot is unaffected. +.TP +.B p +Print the addressed value in symbolic form. +Dot is advanced by the size of a machine address +(4 bytes on the VAX, +8 bytes on the Cray). +.TP +.B t +When preceded by an integer tabs to the next +appropriate tab stop. +For example, +.B 8t +moves to the next 8-space tab stop. +Dot is unaffected. +.TP +.B n +Print a newline. +Dot is unaffected. +.tr '" +.TP +.BR ' ... ' +Print the enclosed string. +Dot is unaffected. +.br +.tr '' +.TP +.B ^ +Dot is decremented by the current increment. +Nothing is printed. +.TP +.B + +Dot is incremented by 1. +Nothing is printed. +.TP +.B - +Dot is decremented by 1. +Nothing is printed. +.RE +.PD +.TP +newline +Update dot by the current increment. +Repeat the previous command with a +.I count +of 1. +.TP +.RB [ ?/ ] l "\fI value mask\fR" +Words starting at dot +are masked with +.I mask +and compared with +.I value +until +a match is found. +If +.B l +is used, +the match is for a short integer; +.B L +matches longs. +If no match is found then dot +is unchanged; otherwise dot +is set to the matched location. +If +.I mask +is omitted then \-1 is used. +.TP +.RB [ ?/ ] w "\fI value ...\fR" +Write the short +.I value +into the addressed +location. +If the command is +.BR W , +write a long. +Option +.B -w +must be in effect. +.TP +.RB [ ?/ ] "m\fI b e f \fP" [ ?\fR] +.br +New values for +.RI ( b,\ e,\ f ) +in the first map entry +are recorded. +If less than three expressions are given then +the remaining map parameters are left unchanged. +The address type (instruction or data) +is unchanged in any case. +If the +.L ? +or +.L / +is followed by +.L * +then +the second segment +of the mapping is changed. +If the list is terminated by +.L ? +or +.L / +then the file +.RI ( objfil +or +.I corfil +respectively) is used +for subsequent requests. +For example, +.L /m? +will cause +.L / +to refer to +.IR objfil . +.TP +.BI > name +Dot is assigned to the variable or register named. +.TP +.B ! +A shell is called to read the +rest of the line following `!'. +.TP +.BI $ modifier +Miscellaneous commands. +The available +.I modifiers +are: +.RS +.TP +.PD 0 +.BI < f +Read commands from the file +.IR f . +If +.I f +cannot be found, try +.BI /usr/lib/adb/ f. +If this command is executed in a file, further commands +in the file are not seen. +If +.I f +is omitted, the current input stream is terminated. +If a +.I count +is given, and is zero, the command will be ignored. +The value of the count will be placed in variable +.B 9 +before the first command in +.I f +is executed. +.TP +.BI << f +Similar to +.B < +except it can be used in a file of commands without +causing the file to be closed. +Variable +.B 9 +is saved during the execution of this command, and restored +when it completes. +There is a (small) limit to the number of +.B << +files that can be open at once. +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI > f +Append output to the file +.IR f , +which is created if it does not exist. +If +.I f +is omitted, output is returned to the terminal. +.TP +.B ? +Print process id, the signal which caused stopping or termination, +as well as the registers. +This is the default if +.I modifier +is omitted. +.TP +.B r +Print the general registers and +the instruction addressed by +.BR pc . +Dot is set to +.BR pc . +.TP +.B R +Like +.BR $r , +but include miscellaneous registers +such as the kernel stack pointer. +.TP +.B b +Print all breakpoints +and their associated counts and commands. +.TP +.B c +C stack backtrace. +If +.I address +is given then it is taken as the +address of the current frame; +otherwise, +the current C frame pointer +is used. +If +.B C +is used then the names and (long) values of all +parameters, +automatic +and static variables are printed for each active function. +If +.I count +is given then only the first +.I count +frames are printed. +.TP +.B a +Set the maximum number of arguments +printed by +.B $c +or +.B $C +to +.IR address . +The default is 20. +.TP +.B d +Set the default radix to +.I address +and report the new value. +.I Address +is interpreted in the (old) current radix; +.L 10$d +never changes the default radix. +To make decimal the default radix, use +.LR 0t10$d . +A radix of zero (the initial default) is a special case; +input with a leading zero is octal, +that with a leading sharp-sign +.L # +is hexadecimal, +other numbers are decimal. +When the default radix is zero, +the default output radix is +appropriate to the machine: +hexadecimal on the VAX, +octal on the Cray. +.TP +.B e +The names and values of all +external variables are printed. +.TP +.B w +Set the page width for output to +.I address +(default 80). +.TP +.B s +Set the limit for symbol matches to +.I address +(default 255). +.TP +.B q +Exit from +.IR adb . +.TP +.B v +Print all non zero variables in the current radix. +.TP +.B m +Print the address maps. +.TP +.B k +Simulate kernel memory management. +.TP +.B p +Simulate per-process memory management. +.IP +.B $k +and +.B $p +are used for system debugging. +Their details vary with machine and operating system. +.PD +.RE +.TP +.BI : modifier +Manage a subprocess. +Available modifiers are: +.RS +.TP +.PD 0 +.BI b c +Set breakpoint at +.IR address . +The breakpoint is executed +.IR count \-1 +times before +causing a stop. +Each time the breakpoint is encountered +the command +.I c +is executed. +If this command is omitted or sets dot +to zero +then the breakpoint causes a stop. +.TP +.B d +Delete breakpoint at +.IR address . +.TP +.B r +Run +.I objfil +as a subprocess. +If +.I address +is given explicitly then the +program is entered at this point; otherwise +the program is entered at its standard entry point. +.I count +specifies how many breakpoints are to be +ignored before stopping. +Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the +same line as the command. +An argument starting with < or > causes the standard +input or output to be established for the command. +All signals are enabled on entry to the subprocess. +.TP +.BI c s +The subprocess is continued. +If +.I s +is omitted +or nonzero, +the subprocess +is sent the signal that caused it to stop; +if 0 +is specified, +no signal is sent. +Breakpoints +and single-stepping +don't count as signals. +Breakpoint skipping is the same +as for +.BR r . +.TP +.BI s s +As for +.B c +except that +the subprocess is single stepped +.I count +times. +If a signal is sent, +it is received +before the first instruction is executed. +If there is no current subprocess then +.I objfil +is run +as a subprocess as for +.BR r . +In this case no signal can be sent; the remainder of the line +is treated as arguments to the subprocess. +.TP +.B k +The current subprocess, if any, is terminated. +.PD +.RE +.SS Variables +.I Adb +provides a number of variables. +Named variables are set initially by +.I adb +but are not used subsequently. +Numbered variables are reserved for communication +as follows. +.TP +.BR 0 ", " 1 ", ..." +The offset parts of the first, second, ... +operands of the last instruction printed. +Meaningless if the operand was a register. +.br +.ns +.TP +.B 9 +The count on the last +.B $< +or +.B $<< +command. +.PP +On entry the following are set +from the system header in the +.IR corfil . +If +.I corfil +does not appear to be a +core image then +these values are set from +.IR objfil . +.TP +.B b +The base address of the data segment. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B d +The data segment size. +.TP +.B e +The entry point. +.TP +.B m +The `magic' number +.RI ( a.out (5)). +.TP +.B s +The stack segment size. +.TP +.B t +The text segment size. +.PD +.SS Addresses +The address in a file associated with +a written address is determined by a mapping +associated with that file. +Each mapping is represented by one or more quadruples +.RI ( "t, b, e, f" ), +each mapping addresses of type +.I t +(instruction, +data, +user block) +in the range +.I b +through +.I e +to the part of the file +beginning at +address +.IR f . +An address +.I a +of type +.I t +is mapped +to a file address +by finding a quadruple +of type +.IR t , +for which +.IR b \*(LE a < e ; +the file address +is +.IR address + f \(mi b . +As a special case, +if an instruction space address is not found, +a second search is made +for the same address in data space. +.PP +Typically, +the text segment of a program +is mapped as instruction space, +the data and bss segments +as data space. +If +.I objfil +is an +.IR a.out, +or if +.I corfil +is a core image +or process file, +maps are set accordingly. +Otherwise, +a single `data space' +map is set up, +with +.I b +and +.I f +set to zero, +and +.I e +set to a huge number; +thus the entire file can be examined +without address translation. +.PP +The +.B ? +and +.B / +commands attempt to examine +instruction and data space +respectively. +.B ?* +tries for data space +(in +.IR objfil ); +.B /* +accesses instruction space +(in +.IR corfil ). +.PP +Registers in +process and core images +are a special case; +they live in a special `register' address space. +The contents of register 0 +are located at address +.BR %0 ; +register 1 +at +.BR %4 +(if registers are 4 bytes long); +and so on. +.B % +addresses +are mapped to the registers +for the `current frame,' +set by local variable references, +and reset to the outermost frame +(the `real' registers) +whenever a process runs +or a stack trace is requested. +.PP +Simulated memory management +translations +(the +.B $k +and +.B $p +commands) +are done before the mapping described above. +.SH FILES +.F a.out +.br +.F core +.br +.F /usr/lib/adb/* +parameter files +.br +.F /proc/* +.SH SEE\ ALSO +.IR cin (1), +.IR pi (9.1), +.IR nm (1), +.IR proc (4), +.IR a.out (5), +.IR bigcore (1) +.br +J. F. Maranzano and S. R. Bourne, +`A Tutorial Introduction to ADB' in +Bell Laboratories, +.I UNIX Programmer's Manual, +Volume\ 2, +Holt, Rinehart and Winston (1984) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +`Adb' when there is no current command or format. +Exit status is 0, unless last command failed or +returned nonzero status. +.SH BUGS +Either the explanation +or the implementation +of register variables +is too complex and arcane. +.SH MACHINE DEPENDENCIES +.SS PDP-11 +Short integers (printed by +.B r +format) +are 2 bytes; +long integers +(printed by +.B R +format) +are 4 bytes. +Addresses printed by +.B a +format are 2 bytes. +.PP +Register variables match the hardware in the +obvious way: +.B r0 +is at address +.BR %0 , +.B r1 +at +.BR %2 , +and so on. +.PP +The default output radix +is octal. +.PP +.B $k +and +.B $p +are unimplemented. +.SS VAX +Short integers are 2 bytes, +long integers are 4 bytes, +addresses are 4 bytes. +.PP +Register variables match the hardware in the +obvious way: r0 +is at address +.BR %0 , +r1 at +.BR %4 , +and so on. +.PP +The default output radix +is hexadecimal. +.PP +.B $k +sets the system base register pointer to +.IR address . +System space addresses are thereafter +mapped according to the system page table +starting at that physical address. +An +.I address +of zero +turns off mapping. +.PP +.B $p +sets the process control block pointer to +.IR address ; +user space addresses are thereafter +translated according to the user page tables +described by the PCB. +Kernel mapping must already be in effect. +.I Address +may be a physical address +(that of the PCB) +or the system space virtual address +of a page table entry +pointing to the PCB +(the number stored in +.IR p_addr ). +If +.I address +is zero, +user mapping is turned off; +addresses less than +0x80000000 +will be treated as physical addresses. +.PP +The command +.L "$ > greater than + = = equal to , , comma + % \(di divide * * exponential (power) + ! ! factorial and combinations ? ? deal + .le \(<= less than or equal .ge \(>= greater than or equal + .ne \(!= not equal .om \(*W omega (not used) + .ep \(*e epsilon .rh \(*r shape (rho) + .nt \(no not (also \'~\') .tk \(ua take (also \'^\') + .dr \(da drop .it \(*i iota + .ci \(ci circular function .al \(*a alpha (not used) + .cl \(lc maximum (ceiling) .fl \(lf minimum (floor) + .dl \(*D del (not used) .de \(gr upside down del + .jt \(de small circle (null) .qd \(sq quad + .ss \(sb right U (not used) .sc \(sp left U (not used) + .si \(ca Down U .su \(cu U (not used) + .[^ \(gr upside-down del .bv \o'\(lf\(rf' decode (base) + .rp \o'\(lc\(rc' encode (rep) .br \(or residue (mod) + .sp \(<- assignment (also '_') .go \(-> goto + .or V or .nn \o'\(*L~' nand + .nr \o'v~' nor .lg \o'*\(ci' log + .rv \o'\(ci\(or' reversal .tr \o'\(ci\e' transpose + .rb reverse bar .cb \o',-' comma bar ( not used) + .sb \o'/-' slash bar .bb \o'\e-' blackslash bar + .gu \o'\(*D\(or' grade up .gd \o'\(gr\(or' grade down + .qq \o'\(sq\(fm' quote quad .dm \o'\(sq:' domino + .lm \o'\(ca\(de' lamp .ib \o'\(rc\(lc\(lf\(rf' I-beam + .ex execute (not used) .fr format(not used) + .di diamond (not used) .ot out (not used) + .ld \o'\(*D~' locked del (not used) ._a A alias for \'A\' + ._b B alias for \'B\' ._c C alias for \'C\' + ._d D alias for \'D\' ._e E alias for \'E\' + ._f F alias for \'F\' ._g G alias for \'G\' + ._h H alias for \'H\' ._i I alias for \'I\' + ._j J alias for \'J\' ._k K alias for \'K\' + ._l L alias for \'L\' ._m M alias for \'M\' + ._n N alias for \'N\' ._o O alias for \'O\' + ._p P alias for \'P\' ._q Q alias for \'Q\' + ._r R alias for \'R\' ._s S alias for \'S\' + ._t T alias for \'T\' ._u U alias for \'U\' + ._v V alias for \'V\' ._w W alias for \'W\' + ._x X alias for \'X\' ._y Y alias for \'Y\' + ._z Z alias for \'Z\' +.fi diff --git a/static/v10/man1/apnews.1 b/static/v10/man1/apnews.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42735c20 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/apnews.1 @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +.TH APNEWS 1 +.SH NAME +apnews \- present recent AP wire stories +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B apnews +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Apnews +is designed to skim the current news on the AP wire. +On a video terminal, it presents a top half screen of twenty +story slugs (two-word labels); typing the number of one of +these slugs displays the first ten lines of the story +on the bottom half screen. +Successive ten line pages of the story are obtained +by hitting carriage return. +Successive twenty slug top half pages are obtained +by hitting \fBm\fR +(if you aren't reading a story, carriage return will do). +You can return to the current top half page with +\fB\&.\fR, or to the first top half page with \fBt\fR. +.PP +If you type +\fBs\fI keywords\fR +a search through today's stories is done for stories +with those words; a menu of such stories is presented. +You can use the story now being displayed as a source +of keywords by typing \fBy\fR. +.PP +To get a copy of a story you are reading in your own +file space, type +\fBc\fI xyz\fR which will +copy the story to file or directory \fIxyz\fR +(appending if \fIxyz\fR is a file and not empty). +The command '?' prints some help. +.SH FILES +/data/ap +.SH "SEE ALSO" +ap.keys(5) +.SH BUGS +These are left as an exercise for the reader. Please report to mel. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/apply.1 b/static/v10/man1/apply.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b52bc40 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/apply.1 @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +.TH APPLY 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +apply, pick \- repeatedly apply a command; select arguments +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B apply +[ +.BI -a c +] +[ +.BI - n +] +.I command arg ... +.PP +.B pick +[ +.I arg ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Apply +runs the named +.I command +on each +argument +.I arg +in turn. +Normally arguments are chosen singly; the optional number +.I n +specifies the number of arguments to be passed to +.I command. +If +.I n +is zero, +.I command +is run without arguments once for each +.I arg. +Character sequences of the form +.BI % d +in +.I command, +where +.I d +is a digit from 1 to 9, +are replaced by the +.IR d th +following unused +.I arg. +If any such sequences occur, +.I n +is ignored, +and the number of arguments passed to +.I command +is the maximum value of +.I d +in +.I command. +The character +.L % +may be changed by the +.B -a +option. +.PP +.I Pick +writes each argument to the standard error and reads a reply. +If the reply is +.LR y , +the argument is echoed to the standard output; +if the reply is +.LR q , +.I pick +exits without reading any more arguments; +there is no output for any other response. +If there are no arguments, +lines of the standard input are taken instead. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +apply echo * +Time-consuming way to do +.LR ls . +.TP +.L +apply -2 cmp a1 b1 a2 b2 +Compare the `a' files to the `b' files. +.TP +.L +wc -l `pick *.[ch]` +Interactively select `.c' and `.h' files and count the lines in each. +.TP +.L +apply "wc -l %1" `pick *.[ch]` +Same, but use a separate process to count each file. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR sh (1) +.SH BUGS +There is no way to pass a literal +.L %2 +if +.L % +is +.I apply's +argument expansion character. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/apsend.1 b/static/v10/man1/apsend.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42640eec --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/apsend.1 @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +.TH APSEND 1 +.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev +.SH NAME +apsend \- send troff output to phototypesetter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B apsend +[ +.I options +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Apsend +sends +.IR troff (1) +output from the named files or from the standard input +to the Murray Hill computer center for high-quality typesetting. +.PP +The options, which need only be spelled far enough to be unique, are +.TF comment=xx +.TP +.BI account= xx +comp center account number (default from password file) +.PD +.TP +.BI bin= xx +comp center bin number (default from password file) +.TP +.BI mailto= xx +mailing instructions, up to 28 characters, instead of comp center bin +.TP +.BI comment= xx +up to 30 characters, for +.F APSLOG +file entry (default value is +.I file +or +.LR pipe.end ) +.TP +.BI device=imagen +Print on laser printer instead of phototypesetter. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/apsend/* +.TP +.F /usr/lib/apsend/* +.TP +.F APSLOG +record of apsend activity +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR troff (1), +.IR lp (1), +.IR font (5) +.SH BUGS +Do not be misled by the historical name of this program. +The correct +.I troff +device selection is +.BR -Tpost , +which is fortunately the default. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ar.1 b/static/v10/man1/ar.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e882a21 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ar.1 @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'AR (I)'3/15/72'AR (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME ar -- archive +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS ar__ key afile name918 ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION ar__ +maintains groups of files +combined into a single archive file. +Its main use +is to create and update library files as used by the loader. +It can be used, though, for any similar purpose. +.sp +key___ is one character from the set drtux_____, +optionally concatenated with v_. +afile_____ is the archive file. +The names_____ are constituent files in the archive file. +The meanings of the key___ characters are: +.sp +d_ means delete the named files from the archive file. +.sp +r_ means replace the named files in the archive file. +If the archive file does not exist, r_ will create it. +If the named files are not in the archive file, they are appended. +.sp +t_ prints a table of contents of the archive file. +If no names are given, all files in the archive are tabled. +If names are given, only those files are tabled. +.sp +u_ is similar to r_ except that only those +files that have been modified are replaced. +If no names are given, all files in the archive that +have been modified will be replaced by the modified version. +.sp +x_ will extract the named files. +If no names are given, all files in the archive are +extracted. +In neither case does x_ alter the archive file. +.sp +v_ means verbose. +Under the verbose option, +ar__ gives a file-by-file +description of the making of a +new archive file from the old archive and the constituent files. +The following abbreviations +are used: +.sp + c_ copy + a_ append + d_ delete + r_ replace + x_ extract +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /tmp/vtm? temporary +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO ld(I), archive(V) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "Bad usage", +"afile -- not in archive format", +"cannot open temp file", +"name -- cannot open", +"name -- phase error", +"name -- cannot create", +"no archive file", +"cannot create archive file", +"name -- not found". +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS Option +vt__ should be implemented as a table with more information. +.sp +There should be a way to specify the placement +of a new file in an archive. +Currently, it is placed at the end. + +"ar x" changes the modified-date of the current +directory to a random number. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/array.1 b/static/v10/man1/array.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d3817c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/array.1 @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ + 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 + 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 + 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 + 0 1 2 3 1000 1001 1002 1003 2000 2001 2002 2003 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/as.1 b/static/v10/man1/as.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0755075c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/as.1 @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'AS (I)'1/15/73'AS (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME as -- assembler +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS as__ [ -_ ] name918 ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION as__ +assembles the concatenation of name\d1\u, .... +If the optional first argument +-_ is used, +all undefined symbols in the assembly +are treated as global. + +The output of the assembly is left on the file "a.out". +It is executable if no errors occurred +during the assembly. + +.ti 0 +FILES /etc/as2 pass 2 of the assembler +.br +/tmp/atm1? temporary +.br +/tmp/atm2? temporary +.br +/tmp/atm3? temporary +.br +a.out object +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO ld(I), +nm(I), +un(I), +db(I), +a.out(V), +"UNIX Assembler Manual". +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS When +an input file cannot be read, its name +followed by a question mark is typed and assembly +ceases. +When syntactic or semantic errors occur, a single-character diagnostic is typed out +together with the line number and the file name in which it +occurred. Errors in pass 1 cause cancellation of pass 2. +The possible errors are: +.sp +.in +6 +.ti -6 +) parentheses error +.ti -6 +] parentheses error +.ti -6 +< String not terminated properly +.ti -6 +* Indirection ("*_") used illegally +.ti -6 +.li +. Illegal assignment to "." +.ti -6 +A error in A_ddress +.ti -6 +B B_ranch instruction is odd or too remote +.ti -6 +E error in E_xpression +.ti -6 +F error in local ("F_" or "b") type symbol +.ti -6 +G G_arbage (unknown) character +.ti -6 +I End of file inside an If__ +.ti -6 +M M_ultiply defined symbol as label +.ti -6 +O O_dd-- word quantity assembled at odd address +.ti -6 +P P_hase error-- "." different in pass 1 and 2 +.ti -6 +R R_elocation error +.ti -6 +U U_ndefined symbol +.ti -6 +X syntaX_ error +.in -6 +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS Symbol table overflow is not checked. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/as80.1 b/static/v10/man1/as80.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4babfcfb --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/as80.1 @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +.h 1 1 2/3/78 +.th as80 +.sh NAME +as80 \*- assembler for the 8080 and Z80 microprocessors +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd as80 +[ +.bd \*-lhzi +] name ... +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it as80 +assembles the concatenation of the named files. +The output of the assembly is left on the file +.bd "80.out". +It is executable if no errors occurred +during the assembly, +and if there were no unresolved external references. +.s1 +The -l option causes as80 to produce a listing +on the standard output. +.s1 +The -h option causes as80 to produce the output listing +in hex. Octal is default. +.s1 +Register names: a,b,c,d,e,h,l,af,bc,de,hl,ix,iy,sp +.br +Condition codes: nz,z,nc,c,po,pe,p,m +.br +Psuedo operations: .globl,.text.textorg,.data,.dataorg +.br + .bss,.bssorg,.byte,.word,.list, +.br +.s1 +.s3 +.sh FILES +as80 the assembler +.br +"80.out" +.br +OPCODES the external instruction set +.sh DIAGNOSTICS +When +an input file cannot be read, its name and +a "can't open" diagnostic is produced and assembly +ceases. +Whenever sytactic or semantic errors are +encountered, +a single-character diagnostic is produced. +The possible diagnostics are: +.s3 +.ta 3 +\. moving dot backwards +.br +[ byte constant error +.br +( Parentheses error +.br +" String not terminated properly +.br +E Illegal expression +.br +R Illegal register usage +.br +G Garbage (unknown) character +.br +M Multiply defined symbol +.br +P `\fB.\fR' different in pass 1 and 2 +.br +T A 16 bit expression has been truncated to an 8 bit value +.br +U Undefined symbol +.br +X Syntax error +.br +.sh BUGS +.s1 +If .list 1 is ever encountered, +a listing will start to come out +whether or not -l was selected. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/asa.1 b/static/v10/man1/asa.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a813e73 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/asa.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.TH ASA 1 +.SH NAME +asa \- interpret ASA control characters +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B asa +[ +.I file +] +... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Asa +takes files which were written with ASA carriage control characters, +usually by FORTRAN programs, converts them to a form suitable for printing +on a terminal, line printer, and so on, and writes the results on the +standard output. +.PP +The control characters handled are: +.PP + \' \' single space +.br + \'0\' double space +.br + \'-\' triple space +.br + \'+\' overprint the previous line +.br + \'1\' start a new page +.PP +If no file names are given, the standard input is used. +.PP +Each input +file given starts a new page. +A skip to a new page on the first line of the +first input file is ignored. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ascii.1 b/static/v10/man1/ascii.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3495a297 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ascii.1 @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +.TH ASCII 1 +.CT 1 inst_info +.SH NAME +ascii \- interpret ASCII characters +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ascii +[ +.BI -oxdb n +] +[ +.B -nct +] +[ +.B -e +] +[ +.I text +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ascii +prints the +.SM ASCII +values corresponding to characters and +.I vice +.IR versa . +The values are interpreted in a settable numeric base; +.B -o +specifies octal (the default), +.B -d +decimal, +.B -x +hexadecimal, and +.BI -b n +base +.I n. +.PP +With no arguments, +.I ascii +reproduces +.F /usr/pub/ascii +in the specified base. +Characters of +.I text +are converted to their +.SM ASCII +values, one per line. +If, however, the first +.I text +argument +is a valid number in the specified base, conversion +goes the opposite way. +Control characters are printed as they appear in +.FR /usr/pub/ascii . +Other options are: +.TP +.B -n +Force numeric output. +.TP +.B -c +Force character output. +.TP +.B -t +Convert from numbers to running text; do not interpret +control characters or insert newlines. +.TP +.B -e +Interpret remaining arguments as +.I text. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L "ascii -d" +Print the +.SM ASCII +table base 10. +.TP +.L "ascii p" +Print the octal value of `p'. +.TP +.L "ascii 160" +Show which character is octal 160. +.SH "SEE ALSO +.IR ascii (6) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/at.1 b/static/v10/man1/at.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..69613be6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/at.1 @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +.TH AT 1 +.CT 1 time_man +.SH NAME +at \(mi execute commands at a later time +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B at +[ +.B -r +] +.I time +[ +.I day +] +[ +.I file +] +.PP +.B at -l +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I At +squirrels away a copy of the named +.I file +(standard input default) +to be used as input to +.IR sh (1) +at a specified later time. +A +.I cd +command to the current directory is inserted +at the beginning, +followed by assignments to all environment variables. +When the script is run, it uses the userid and groupid +of the creator of the copy. +.PP +The +.I time +is 1 to 4 digits, with an optional following +.LR A , +.LR P , +.L N +or +.L M +for +AM, PM, noon or midnight. +One and two digit numbers are taken to be hours, three and four digits +to be hours and minutes. +If no letters follow the digits, a 24 hour clock time is understood. +.PP +The optional +.I day +is either a month name followed by a day number, +or a day of the week; if the word +.L week +follows, invocation is moved seven days further off. +Names of months and days may be recognizably truncated. +A year number, spelled out in full, may follow the month. +.PP +The options are +.TP +.B -r +Remove the specified activity. +.TP +.B -l +List all activities scheduled for this user. +.PP +.I At +programs are executed by periodic execution +of +.F /usr/lib/atrun +from +.IR cron (8). +The granularity of +.I at +depends upon how often +.I atrun +is executed. +.PP +The standard output and standard error files are lost unless redirected. +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +at 0800 dec 24 +echo ho ho ho | mail claus +.EE +.TP +.L +at -r `at -l` +Remove a scheduled activity. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/spool/at/yy.ddd.hhmm +.TP +.F /usr/lib/atrun +.TP +.BI /usr/spool/at/ yy . ddd . hhmm\fP.* +activity for year, day, hour +.TP +.F /usr/spool/at/lasttimedone +last +.I hhmm +.TP +.F /usr/spool/at/past +activities in progress +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR calendar (1), +.IR pwd (1), +.IR sleep (1), +.IR cron (8) +.SH BUGS +Due to the granularity of the execution of +.I atrun, +there may be bugs in scheduling things almost +exactly 24 hours into the future. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/awk.1 b/static/v10/man1/awk.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ac74960 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/awk.1 @@ -0,0 +1,452 @@ +.TH AWK 1 +.CT 1 files prog_other +.SH NAME +awk \- pattern-directed scanning and processing language +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B awk +[ +.BI -F fs +] +[ +.I prog +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Awk +scans each input +.I file +for lines that match any of a set of patterns specified literally in +.IR prog +or in a file +specified as +.B -f +.IR file . +With each pattern +there can be an associated action that will be performed +when a line of a +.I file +matches the pattern. +Each line is matched against the +pattern portion of every pattern-action statement; +the associated action is performed for each matched pattern. +The file name +.L - +means the standard input. +Any +.IR file +of the form +.I var=value +is treated as an assignment, not a filename. +.PP +An input line is made up of fields separated by white space, +or by regular expression +.BR FS . +The fields are denoted +.BR $1 , +.BR $2 , +\&...; +.B $0 +refers to the entire line. +.PP +A pattern-action statement has the form +.IP +.IB pattern " { " action " } +.PP +A missing +.BI { " action " } +means print the line; +a missing pattern always matches. +Pattern-action statements are separated by newlines or semicolons. +.PP +An action is a sequence of statements. +A statement can be one of the following: +.PP +.EX +.ta \w'\f5delete array[expression]'u +if(\fI expression \fP)\fI statement \fP\fR[ \fPelse\fI statement \fP\fR]\fP +while(\fI expression \fP)\fI statement\fP +for(\fI expression \fP;\fI expression \fP;\fI expression \fP)\fI statement\fP +for(\fI var \fPin\fI array \fP)\fI statement\fP +do\fI statement \fPwhile(\fI expression \fP) +break +continue +{\fR [\fP\fI statement ... \fP\fR] \fP} +\fIexpression\fP #\fR commonly\fP\fI var = expression\fP +print\fR [ \fP\fIexpression-list \fP\fR] \fP\fR[ \fP>\fI expression \fP\fR]\fP +printf\fI format \fP\fR[ \fP,\fI expression-list \fP\fR] \fP\fR[ \fP>\fI expression \fP\fR]\fP +return\fR [ \fP\fIexpression \fP\fR]\fP +next #\fR skip remaining patterns on this input line\fP +delete\fI array\fP[\fI expression \fP] #\fR delete an array element\fP +exit\fR [ \fP\fIexpression \fP\fR]\fP #\fR exit immediately; status is \fP\fIexpression\fP +.EE +.DT +.PP +Statements are terminated by +semicolons, newlines or right braces. +An empty +.I expression-list +stands for +.BR $0 . +String constants are quoted \f5"\ "\fR, +with the usual C escapes recognized within. +Expressions take on string or numeric values as appropriate, +and are built using the operators +.B + - * / % ^ +(exponentiation), and concatenation (indicated by a blank). +The operators +.B +! ++ -- += -= *= /= %= ^= **= > >= < <= == != ?: +are also available in expressions. +Variables may be scalars, array elements +(denoted +.IB x [ i ] ) +or fields. +Variables are initialized to the null string. +Array subscripts may be any string, +not necessarily numeric; +this allows for a form of associative memory. +Multiple subscripts such as +.B [i,j,k] +are permitted; the constituents are concatenated, +separated by the value of +.BR SUBSEP . +.PP +The +.B print +statement prints its arguments on the standard output +(or on a file if +.BI > file +or +.BI >> file +is present or on a pipe if +.BI | cmd +is present), separated by the current output field separator, +and terminated by the output record separator. +.I file +and +.I cmd +may be literal names or parenthesized expressions; +identical string values in different statements denote +the same open file. +The +.B printf +statement formats its expression list according to the format +(see +.IR printf (3)). +The built-in function +.BI close( expr ) +closes the file or pipe +.IR expr . +.PP +The customary functions +.BR exp , +.BR log , +.BR sqrt , +.BR sin , +.BR cos , +.BR atan2 +are built in. +Other built-in functions: +.TF length +.TP +.B length +the length of its argument +taken as a string, +or of +.B $0 +if no argument. +.TP +.B rand +random number on (0,1) +.TP +.B srand +sets seed for +.B rand +.TP +.B int +truncates to an integer value +.TP +.BI substr( s , " m" , " n\fB) +the +.IR n -character +substring of +.I s +that begins at position +.IR m +counted from 1. +.TP +.BI index( s , " t" ) +the position in +.I s +where the string +.I t +occurs, or 0 if it does not. +.TP +.BI match( s , " r" ) +the position in +.I s +where the regular expression +.I r +occurs, or 0 if it does not. +The variables +.B RSTART +and +.B RLENGTH +are set to the position and length of the matched string. +.TP +.BI split( s , " a" , " fs\fB) +splits the string +.I s +into array elements +.IB a [1] , +.IB a [2] , +\&..., +.IB a [ n ] , +and returns +.IR n . +The separation is done with the regular expression +.I fs +or with the field separator +.B FS +if +.I fs +is not given. +.TP +.BI sub( r , " t" , " s\fB) +substitutes +.I t +for the first occurrence of the regular expression +.I r +in the string +.IR s . +If +.I s +is not given, +.B $0 +is used. +.TP +.B gsub +same as +.B sub +except that all occurrences of the regular expression +are replaced; +.B sub +and +.B gsub +return the number of replacements. +.TP +.BI sprintf( fmt , " expr" , " ...\fB ) +the string resulting from formatting +.I expr ... +according to the +.IR printf (3) +format +.I fmt +.TP +.BI system( cmd ) +executes +.I cmd +and returns its exit status +.PD +.PP +The ``function'' +.B getline +sets +.B $0 to +the next input record from the current input file; +.B getline +.BI < file +sets +.B $0 +to the next record from +.IR file . +.B getline +.I x +sets variable +.I x +instead. +Finally, +.IB cmd " | getline +pipes the output of +.I cmd +into +.BR getline ; +each call of +.B getline +returns the next line of output from +.IR cmd . +In all cases, +.B getline +returns 1 for a successful input, +0 for end of file, and \-1 for an error. +.PP +Patterns are arbitrary Boolean combinations +(with +.BR "! || &&" ) +of regular expressions and +relational expressions. +Regular expressions are as in +.IR egrep ; +see +.IR grep (1). +Isolated regular expressions +in a pattern apply to the entire line. +Regular expressions may also occur in +relational expressions, using the operators +.BR ~ +and +.BR !~ . +.BI / re / +is a constant regular expression; +any string (constant or variable) may be used +as a regular expression, except in the position of an isolated regular expression +in a pattern. +.PP +A pattern may consist of two patterns separated by a comma; +in this case, the action is performed for all lines +from an occurrence of the first pattern +though an occurrence of the second. +.PP +A relational expression is one of the following: +.IP +.I expression matchop regular-expression +.br +.I expression relop expression +.br +.I expression in array-name +.br +.I (expr,expr,...) in array-name +.PP +where a relop is any of the six relational operators in C, +and a matchop is either +.B ~ +(matches) +or +.B !~ +(does not match). +A conditional is an arithmetic expression, +a relational expression, +or a Boolean combination +of these. +.PP +The special patterns +.B BEGIN +and +.B END +may be used to capture control before the first input line is read +and after the last. +.B BEGIN +and +.B END +do not combine with other patterns. +.PP +Variable names with special meanings: +.TF SUBSEP +.TP +.B FS +regular expression used to separate fields; also settable +by option +.BI -F fs. +.TP +.BR NF +number of fields in the current record +.TP +.B NR +ordinal number of the current record +.TP +.B FNR +ordinal number of the current record in the current file +.TP +.B FILENAME +the name of the current input file +.TP +.B RS +input record separator (default newline) +.TP +.B OFS +output field separator (default blank) +.TP +.B ORS +output record separator (default newline) +.TP +.B OFMT +output format for numbers (default +.BR "%.6g" ) +.TP +.B SUBSEP +separates multiple subscripts (default 034) +.TP +.B ARGC +argument count, assignable +.TP +.B ARGV +argument array, assignable; +non-null members are taken as filenames +.PD +.PP +Functions may be defined (at the position of a pattern-action statement) thus: +.IP +.L +function foo(a, b, c) { ...; return x } +.PP +Parameters are passed by value if scalar and by reference if array name; +functions may be called recursively. +Parameters are local to the function; all other variables are global. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +length > 72 +Print lines longer than 72 characters. +.TP +.L +{ print $2, $1 } +Print first two fields in opposite order. +.PP +.EX +BEGIN { FS = ",[ \et]*|[ \et]+" } + { print $2, $1 } +.EE +.ns +.IP +Same, with input fields separated by comma and/or blanks and tabs. +.PP +.EX + { s += $1 } +END { print "sum is", s, " average is", s/NR } +.EE +.ns +.IP +Add up first column, print sum and average. +.TP +.L +/start/, /stop/ +Print all lines between start/stop pairs. +.PP +.EX +BEGIN { # Simulate echo(1) + for (i = 1; i < ARGC; i++) printf "%s ", ARGV[i] + printf "\en" + exit } +.EE +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR lex (1), +.IR sed (1) +.br +A. V. Aho, B. W. Kernighan, P. J. Weinberger, +.I +Awk \- a Pattern Scanning and Processing Language (Programmer'sManual), +CSTR 118, 1985 +.SH BUGS +There are no explicit conversions between numbers and strings. +To force an expression to be treated as a number add 0 to it; +to force it to be treated as a string concatenate +\f5""\fP to it. +.br +The scope rules for variables in functions are a botch. +.br +.L -S +and +.L -R +are flaky. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/backup.1 b/static/v10/man1/backup.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a1c35e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/backup.1 @@ -0,0 +1,351 @@ +.TH BACKUP 1 +.CT 1 sa_mortals +.SH NAME +backup \- backup and recover files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B "backup recover" +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B "backup grep" +[ +.I option ... +] +.I pattern ... +.PP +.B "backup fetch" +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B "backup stats" +[ +.I option ... +] +.PP +.B "backup backup" +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B "backup munge" +.PP +.B "backup mount" +[ +.I option ... +] +.I mountpt +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I backup +programs save and restore archival copies of files in an optical disk +store on a central system (see +.IR backup (5)). +Backup occurs automatically daily (see +.IR backup (8)) +and upon specific request via +.IR "backup backup" . +.I "Backup grep" +shows backup copy names for specific files, and +.I "backup fetch" +restores data from specific backup copies. +.I "Backup recover" +is a combination of these two; +it fetches the most recent copy. +All the +.I backup +programs describe their options when presented +with a bad option such as +.BR -? . +.PP +.I "Backup recover" +retrieves +.I files +by name. +The names should be full pathnames rooted at +.BR /n/ ; +if not, +.I backup +tries to guess names that begin with +.BR /n/ . +Directories should be recovered before their contents. +Regular files that are linked together will stay linked if they +are recovered together. +The options for +.I recover +are: +.TP +.BI -o " dir" +The argument is restored as an entry in the directory +.IR dir . +.PD 0 +.TP +.B -v +Verbose (enforced). +.TP +.B -F +Restore directories as files containing a null-terminated list of element names. +.TP +.B -r +Recursively recover any subdirectories. +.TP +.B -d +Create any missing intermediate directories. +.TP +.BI -D old = new +Replace the prefix +.I old +of the original filename with +.I new +to form the new output filename. +.TP +.B -m +The names are backup copy names, as determined from +.I backup grep, +not original filenames. +.TP +.BI -fdevice +Use +.I device +rather than +.B /dev/worm0 +for the WORM. +.I Device +may be on another machine: +.IB machine ! device\fR. +An initial +.B w +implies a WORM device; a +.B j +implies a jukebox. +A numeric +.I device +means +.BI /dev/worm device\fR. +.TP +.B -e +Cause the +.I worm fetch +server on the backup system to terminate gracefully. +.TP +.B -i +Append +.BI . n +to the output name for each file where +.I n +is an increasing integer. +This is useful for recovering multiple copies of the same file. +.PD +.PP +A diagnostic like +.B "need disk backup2a" +means you need to mount the +A side of the cartridge labeled +.BR backup2 . +.PP +.I "Backup grep" +searches for names of backed up files that match the strings +.IR patterns . +If the pattern is a literal (no +.BR -e ) +that looks like a filename, +it reports the filename catenated with +.B // +and the time +of the most recent backup copy. +If the pattern is a literal that looks like the output under option +.BR -d , +it reports the name of the corresponding backup copy. +The options are: +.TP +.B -d +Print file change times +.RB ( ctime , +see +.IR stat (2)) +as integers rather than as dates. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B -e +Interpret +.I patterns +as regular expressions +given in the notation of +.IR regexp (3). +Warning: +this option can execute extremely slowly; +it is almost always better to use +.IR gre (1) +on +.F /usr/backup/filenames +on the backup machine; see +.IR backup (5). +.TP +.B -a +Print all names in the database. +.TP +.B -V +Treat +.I pattern +as a literal filename +and list all versions of the file. +.TP +.BI -< n +Only list entries with a date less than or equal to +.IR n . +If +.I n +is not a simple integer date, it is interpreted as by +.IR timec (3). +.TP +.BI -> n +Only list entries with a date greater than or equal to +.IR n . +.TP +.B -D +Print the most recent entry for every file name starting with +.I pattern, +taking into account any cutoff date, but turning off option +.BR -e . +.PD +.PP +.I Backup fetch +takes from its arguments or from standard input +backup copy names as reported by +.I backup grep +(such as +.BR v2345/987 ) +and restores the corresponding files. +It accepts the same options as +.I backup recover +except +.BR -m ; +.B -v +is really optional. +Irrelevant prefixes are stripped from backup copy names. +Thus the output of the +.I "backup grep" +command can be used directly. +.PP +.I "Backup stats" +provides statistics about the files backed up. +By default, it looks for all systems and all users and gives a grand total. +The options are +.nr xx \w'\f5-u \fIusers ' +.TP \n(xxu +.B -i +Give information per system or user +rather than a total. +.TP +.BI -s " systems +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI -u " users +With option +.BR -i , +restrict the total to the systems or users named in +comma-separated lists. +The name +.L * +expands to all systems or all users. +.TP +.B -d +Print average number of files and bytes for the last 1 day, +7 days and 30 days. +.PP +.I "Backup backup" +backs up files. +If no file names are given, +they are taken from standard input. +File names are interpreted as in +.IR "backup recover" . +The files are safely on the backup system when the command exits but +will normally take a day to get into the backup database. +.PP +.I "Backup munge" +causes the backup system to process any received files. +When this terminates (assuming no errors), the files have been +put onto backup media and have been absorbed into the database. +.PP +.I "Backup mount" +is an experimental way to access backed up files. +The specified part of the backup files +(set by +.BI -D root +or +.B / +by default) is mounted at +.IR mountpt . +There is one option +.TP \n(xxu +.BI -d " date +Make the mounted hierarchy reflect the state at +the given date. +The mounting can be reversed with +.IR umount ; +see +.IR mount (8). +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +backup stats -i -s '*' +Get totals for all systems. +.TP +.L +backup fetch `backup grep -d \e`backup grep -d /n/bowell/etc/passwd\e`` +What +.I backup recover +does for you. +.TP +.L +backup recover /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes +.br +.ns +.TP +.L +cd /n/coma/usr/rob; backup recover fortunes +Two ways to get the latest available copy of +.BR /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes . +.TP +.L +backup grep -V /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes +List all available copies of +.B /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes +with their dates. +.TP +.L +backup recover -m -o /tmp /n/wild/usr/backup/v/v919/678 +.br +.ns +.TP +.L +backup recover -m -o /tmp v919/678 +Two ways to recover a specific backup copy and place the result in +.BR /tmp . +.B /n/wild/usr/backup/v/v919/678 +is the name of the backup copy; the file will be restored to +its home machine, not to +.BR wild . +.TP +.L +backup grep -V /n/coma/usr/rob/fortunes | backup fetch -i -o . +Recover all the versions of the fortunes file into +.BR fortunes.1 , +.BR fortunes.2 , +\&... in the current directory. +.PD +.SH FILES +.F /usr/lib/backup +\h'.5i'home of all datafiles and executables (on client machines) +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR worm (8), +.IR backup (5), +.IR backup (8) +.SH BUGS +Recovery via symbolic links may not work; use the non-linked pathname. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/badge.1 b/static/v10/man1/badge.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76457c60 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/badge.1 @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +.TH BADGE A +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +badge \- print Bell Labs badge +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B badge +.I string1 +.I string2 +.I [ picture.ps ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Badge +is an ASCII-to-PostScript converter that frames +its arguments in a pleasant, colorful badge, +suitable for laminating. +File +.I picture.ps +is assumed to contain 24-bit color encapsulated PostScript. +If it is omitted or doesn't exist, a blank box will appear; +.B goofy +and +.B donald +(see FILES) are available for the camera-shy. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +badge "DONALD F" DUCK /usr/games/ps/donald | lp -dpeacock +.TP +.L +badge "P J" "WEINBERGER" /usr/games/ps/goofy | lp -dpeacock +.EX +.SH BUGS +Very long names (over 1.75 inches in 14 point type) are not accounted for. +.P +Unlike a similar badge provided by security, the +logo adheres to corporate standards. +.SH FILES +/usr/games/ps/donald +.br +/usr/games/ps/goofy +.br +/usr/games/ps/logo A corporate logo. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bas.1 b/static/v10/man1/bas.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2bdaa5b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bas.1 @@ -0,0 +1,312 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'BAS (I)'1/15/73'BAS (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME bas -- basic +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS bas___ [ file ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION bas___ +is a dialect of basic [1]. +If a file argument is provided, +the file is used for input before the console +is read. +.sp +bas___ accepts lines of the form: +.sp + statement + integer statement +.sp +Integer numbered statements +(known as internal statements) +are stored for later execution. +They are stored in sorted ascending order. +Non-numbered statements are immediately executed. +The result of an immediate expression statement +(that does not have '=' as its highest operator) is printed. +.sp +Statements have the following syntax: +.sp +.in +6 +.ti -3 +expression +.br +The expression is executed for its side +effects (assignment or function call) +or for printing as described above. +.sp +.ti -3 +done____ +.br +Return to system level. +.sp +.ti -3 +draw____ expression expression expression +.br +A line is drawn on the Tektronix 611 display (/dev/vt0) from +the current display position +to the XY co-ordinates specified by the +first two expressions. +(The scale is zero to one in both X and Y directions) +If the third expression +is zero, the line is invisible. +The current display position is set to the end point. +.sp +.ti -3 +display_______ list +.br +The list of expressions and strings is +concatenated and displayed (i.e. printed) on the 611 starting +at the current display position. +The current display position is not changed. +.sp +.ti -3 +erase_____ +.br +The 611 screen is erased. +.sp +.ti -3 +for___ name =_= expression expression statement +.ti -3 +for___ name =_ expression expression +.br +.li +... +.ti -3 +next____ +.br +The for___ statement +repetitively executes a +statement (first form) +or a group of statements (second form) +under control of a named variable. +The variable takes on the value of +the first expression, +then is incremented by one on each loop, +not to exceed the value of +the second expression. +.sp +.ti -3 +goto____ expression +.br +The expression is evaluated, truncated to an integer +and execution goes to the corresponding integer numbered statment. +If executed from immediate mode, +the internal statements are compiled first. +.sp +.ti -3 +if__ expression statement +.br +The statement is executed if the expression evaluates +to non-zero. +.sp +.ti -3 +list____ [expression [expression]] +.br +list____ is used to print out the stored internal statements. +If no arguments are given, all internal statements are printed. +If one argument is given, only that +internal statement is listed. +If two arguments are given, all internal statements +inclusively between the arguments are printed. +.sp +.ti -3 +print_____ list +.br +The list of expressions and strings are concatenated and +printed. +(A string is delimited by " characters.) +.sp +.ti -3 +return______ [expression] +.br +The expression is evaluated and the result is passed +back as the value of a function call. +If no expression is given, zero is returned. +.sp +.ti -3 +run___ +.br +The internal statements are compiled. +The symbol table is re-initialized. +The random number generator is re-set. +Control is passed to the lowest numbered internal +statement. +.sp +.ti -6 +Expressions have the following syntax: +.sp +.ti -3 +name +.br +A name is used to specify a variable. +Names are composed of a letter ('a' - 'z') +followed by letters and digits. +The first four characters of a name are significant. +.sp +.ti -3 +number +.br +A number is used to represent a constant value. +A number is composed of digits, at most one decimal point ('.') +and possibly a scale factor of the form +e_ digits or e-__ digits. +.sp +.ti -3 +(_ expression )_ +.br +Parentheses are used to alter normal order of evaluation. +.sp +.ti -3 +expression operator expression +.br +Common functions of two arguments are abbreviated +by the two arguments separated by an operator denoting the function. +A complete list of operators is given below. +.sp +.ti -3 +expression (_ [expression [,_ expression ...]] )_ +.br +Functions of an arbitrary number of arguments +can be called by an expression followed by the arguments +in parentheses separated by commas. +The expression evaluates to the +line number of the entry of the function in the +internally stored statements. +This causes the internal statements to be compiled. +If the expression evaluates negative, +a builtin function is called. +The list of builtin functions appears below. +.sp +.ti -3 +name [_ expression [,_ expression ...] ]_ +.br +Each expression is truncated to an integer +and used as a specifier for the name. +The result is syntactically identical to a name. +a[1,2] is the same as a[1][2]. +The truncated expressions are restricted to +values between 0 and 32767. +.sp +.ti -6 +The following is the list of operators: +.sp +.ti -3 += +.br += is the assignment operator. +The left operand must be a name or an array element. +The result is the right operand. +Assignment binds right to left, +all other operators bind left to right. +.sp +.ti -3 +& | +.br +&_ (logical and) +has result zero if either of its arguments are zero. +It has result one if both its arguments are non-zero. +|_ (logical or) +has result zero if both of its arguments are zero. +It has result one if either of its arguments are non-zero. +.sp +.ti -3 +< <= > >= == <> +.br +The relational operators +(< less than, <= less than or equal, +> greater than, +>= greater than or equal, +== equal to, +<> not equal to) +return one if their arguments are in the specified +relation. +They return zero otherwise. +Relational operators at the same level extend as follows: +a>b>c is the same as a>b&b>c. +.sp +.ti -3 ++ - +.br +Add and subtract. +.sp +.ti -3 +* / +.br +Multiply and divide. +.sp +.ti -3 +^ +.br +Exponentiation. +.sp +.ti -6 +The following is a list of builtin functions: +.sp +.ti -3 +arg +.br +Arg(i) is the value of the i_th +actual parameter on the current level +of function call. +.sp +.ti -3 +exp +.br +Exp(x) is the exponential function of x. +.sp +.ti -3 +log +.br +Log(x) is the logarithm base e of x. +.sp +.ti -3 +sin +.br +Sin(x) is the sine of x (radians). +.sp +.ti -3 +cos +.br +Cos(x) is the cosine of x (radians). +.sp +.ti -3 +atn +.br +Atn(x) is the arctangent of x. +.sp +.ti -3 +rnd +.br +Rnd() is a uniformly distributed random +number between zero and one. +.sp +.ti -3 +expr +.br +Expr() is the only form of program input. +A line is read from the input and +evaluated as an expression. +The resultant value is returned. +.sp +.ti -3 +int +.br +Int(x) returns x truncated to an integer. +.in -6 +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /tmp/btm? temporary +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO [1] DEC-11-AJPB-D +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS Syntax +errors cause the incorrect line to be typed +with an underscore where the parse failed. +All other diagnostics are self explanatory. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/basename.1 b/static/v10/man1/basename.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d984abd --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/basename.1 @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +.TH BASENAME 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +basename, dirname \- strip filename affixes +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B basename +.I string +[ +.I suffix +] +.PP +.B dirname +.I string +.SH DESCRIPTION +These functions split off useful parts of a pathname; +they are typically used inside substitution marks +.BR `\ ` +in shell scripts. +.PP +.I Basename +deletes any prefix ending in +.L / +and the +.I suffix, +if present in +.I string, +from +.I string, +and prints the result on the standard output. +.PP +.I Dirname +places on standard output the name of the directory in which +a file named +.I string +would nominally be found. +The calculation is syntactic and independent of +the contents of the file system. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +cc $1 -o `basename $1 .c` +Compile into +.LR file , +where +.L $1 +is +.L file.c +or +.LR dir/file.c . +.TP +.L +cc $1 -o `dirname $1`/`basename $1 .c` +Compile +.LR dir/file.c +into +.LR dir/file . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR sh (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/basic.1 b/static/v10/man1/basic.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..137985e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/basic.1 @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +.TH BASIC 1 grigg +.SH NAME +basic, bas, bite \- basic language interpreters +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B /usr/bin/lcl/basic +.PP +.B /usr/bin/lcl/bas +.PP +.B /usr/bin/lcl/bite +.SH DESCRIPTION +Of these three completely different Basic interpreters, +.I basic +is the biggest, and unfortunately the best. +Caveat emptor. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bc.1 b/static/v10/man1/bc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f0528aa --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +.TH BC 1 +.CT 1 numbers +.SH NAME +bc \- arbitrary-precision arithmetic language +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bc +[ +.B -c +] +[ +.B -l +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bc +is an interactive processor for a language that resembles +C but provides arithmetic on numbers of arbitrary length with up +to 100 digits right of the decimal point. +It takes input from any files given, then reads +the standard input. +The +.B -l +argument stands for the name +of an arbitrary precision math library. +The following syntax for +.I bc +programs is like that of C; +.I L +means letter +.BR a - z , +.I E +means expression, +.I S +means statement. +.TF length(E) +.TP +Lexical +.RS +.HP +comments are enclosed in +.B /* */ +.HP +newlines end statements +.RE +.TP +Names +.IP +simple variables: +.I L +.br +array elements: +.IB L [ E ] +.br +The words +.BR ibase , +.BR obase , +and +.B scale +.TP +Other operands +arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and decimal point. +.RS +.TP +.BI ( E ) +.TP +.BI sqrt( E ) +.TP +.BI length( E ) +number of significant decimal digits +.TP +.BI scale( E ) +number of digits right of decimal point +.TP +.IB L ( E , ... ,\fIE\fP) +.RE +.TP +Operators +.RS +.HP +.B "+ - * / % ^\ " +.RB ( % +is remainder; +.B ^ +is power) +.HP +.B "++ --\ " +(prefix and postfix; apply to names) +.TP +.B "== <= >= != < >" +.TP +.B "= += -= *= /= %= ^=" +.RE +.TP +Statements +.RS +.br +.I E +.br +.B { +.I S +.B ; +\&... +.B ; +.I S +.B } +.br +.B "if (" +.I E +.B ) +.I S +.br +.B "while (" +.I E +.B ) +.I S +.br +.B "for (" +.I E +.B ; +.I E +.BI ; E ) +.I S +.br +null statement +.br +.B break +.br +.B quit +.br +\f5"\fRtext\f5"\fR +.RE +.TP +Function definitions +.RS +.br +.B define +.I L +.B ( +.I L +.B , +\&... +.B , +L +.BR ) { +.PD0 +.br +.B auto +.I L +.B , +\&... +.B , +.I L +.br +.I S +.B ; +\&... +.B ; +.I S +.br +.B "return (" +.I E +.B ) +.LP +.B } +.RE +.TP +Functions in +.B -l +math library +.RS +.TP +.BI s( x ) +sine +.TP +.BI c( x ) +cosine +.TP +.BI e( x ) +exponential +.TP +.BI l( x ) +log +.TP +.BI a( x ) +arctangent +.TP +.BI j( n,x ) +Bessel function +.RE +.PP +.DT +All function arguments are passed by value. +.PD +.PP +The value of a statement that is an expression is printed +unless the main operator is an assignment. +Text in quotes, which may include newlines, is also printed. +Either semicolons or newlines may separate statements. +Assignment to +.B scale +influences the number of digits to be retained on arithmetic +operations in the manner of +.IR dc (1). +Assignments to +.B ibase +or +.B obase +set the input and output number radix respectively. +.PP +The same letter may be used as an array, a function, +and a simple variable simultaneously. +All variables are global to the program. +Automatic variables are pushed down during function calls. +In a declaration of an array as a function argument +or automatic variable +empty square brackets must follow the array name. +.PP +.I Bc +is actually a preprocessor for +.IR dc (1), +which it invokes automatically, unless the +.B -c +(compile only) +option is present. +In this case the +.I dc +input is sent to the standard output instead. +.SH EXAMPLES +Define a function to compute an approximate value of +the exponential. +Use it to print 10 values. +(The exponential function in the library gives better answers.) +.PP +.EX +scale = 20 +define e(x){ + auto a, b, c, i, s + a = 1 + b = 1 + s = 1 + for(i=1; 1==1; i++){ + a = a*x + b = b*i + c = a/b + if(c == 0) return(s) + s = s+c + } +} +for(i=1; i<=10; i++) e(i) +.EE +.SH FILES +.F /usr/lib/lib.b +mathematical library +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR dc (1), +.IR hoc (1) +.SH BUGS +No +.LR && , +.LR || , +or +.L ! +operators. +.br +A +.L for +statement must have all three +.LR E s. +.br +A +.L quit +is interpreted when read, not when executed. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bcp.1 b/static/v10/man1/bcp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab7cf541 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bcp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,288 @@ +.TH BCP 1 +.CT 1 graphics +.SH NAME +bcp \(mi reformat black-and-white picture files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bcp +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file1 +[ +.I file2 +] +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bcp +copies black-and-white (B&W) image +.I file1 +to +.I file2, +optionally changing the file format and transforming the image. +If +.I file1 +is a directory name, +then every leaf of its file tree is processed in turn; and, in this case, +if +.I file2 +also is specified, it is made the root directory +of an isomorphic tree of output files. +If +.I file2 +is not specified, all output is catenated to stdout. +.PP +.I Bcp +can copy among all the B&W +.IR picfile (5) +formats, and some others. +The default output format is +.BR TYPE=ccitt-g4 . +Image transformations include trimming, translation, scaling, and rotation, +performed in that order (not in argument order). +.PP +Input files in +.IR picfile (5) +format must begin with an ASCII +.BI TYPE= type +header line. +.I Types +supported both as input and output are: +.nr xx \w'\fLccitt-g4\ ' +.TP \n(xxu +.B dump +One byte/pixel. +.B NCHAN=1 +is required. +On input, the grey pixel values are thresholded +to B&W; +see option +.BR -T . +On output, black becomes 0 and white 255. +.TP +.B bitmap +One bit/pixel. +Essentially Sun rasterfile format, with a +.IR picfile (5) +header replacing the Sun binary header. +.TP +.B ccitt-g4 +CCITT Group 4 FAX encoding, strongly compressive on printed text. +Also, +.B ccitt-g31 +(Group 3, 1-dim) +and +.B ccitt-g32 +(Group 3, 2-dim; see +.BR -k ). +.LP +Other supported +.I types +are: +.TP \n(xxu +.B binary +One bit/pixel encoding; obsolescent, but needed for old image archives. +Both input and output. +.TP +.B rle +Fast run-length encoding; obsolescent, but needed for old image archives. +Input or output, but not both. +.TP +.B pico +Same as +.BR dump . +Input only. +.TP +.B cdf +`Compound document format', used in AT&T FAX Connection product. +Input only. +Only the first of multiple pages is read. +.LP +Other formats not using a +.BI TYPE= type +header, are: +.IR bitfile (9.5) +format; +PostScript bitmap format (output only); and +Sun rasterfile format (with the Sun binary header; output only). +.PP +The options are: +.TP \n(xxu +.B -B[io] +Read/write +.IR bitfile (9.5) +format (no +.BI TYPE= type +header). +.TP +.B -M +Write +.B TYPE=bitmap +format. +.TP +.B -P +Write Postscript bitmap format (Suns only). +.TP +.BI -R x , y +Force output resolutions to +.I x,y +(pixels/inch). +If +.BI , y +is missing, it is taken to be the same as +.I x. +Overrides +.BI -x x , y . +Requires a +.BI RES= "x y +line in the header (but, see +.BR -Z ). +.TP +.B -R= +Force the output resolution to be equal to the greater of +the input resolutions. +.TP +.B -S +Write Sun rasterfile format (no +.BI TYPE= type +header; on Suns only). +.TP +.BI -T t +Threshold. +When reading +.BR TYPE=dump , +assign black to grey levels less than +.I t, +and white to others. +Default: +.BR -T128 . +.TP +.BI -Z x , y +Force input +.BI RES= "x y. +.TP +.B -b +Write +.B TYPE=binary +format. +.TP +.B -g4 +.br +.ns +.TP +.B -4 +Write +.B TYPE=ccitt-g4 +format. +Similarly, +.B -g31 +or +.B -31 +and +.B -g32 +or +.BR -32 . +.TP +.BI -k n +Set the `k' for +.B ccitt-g32 +encoding on output (default +.BR -k4 ). +.TP +.BI -o x , y +Offset (translate) the image by +.I x,y +pixels. +The width and height of the picture are not changed. +.TP +.B -p +Write +.B TYPE=dump NCHAN=1 +format. +Map black to 0, white to 255. +.TP +.B -r +Write +.B TYPE=rle +format. +.TP +.B -tl +Rotate the image to bring the left edge of the page to the top. +Set top-left corner of the rotated +image at the top-left corner of the image. +.TP +.BI -t d +Rotate the image +.I d +degrees counterclockwise about its center. +.I d +is a real number. +.TP +.BI -w l,t,r,b +Specify window (trim the image): +.I l,t +is the left-top corner and +.I r,b +the right-bottom corner measured in pixels. +If the new margins are outside the original picture, +the new area is set to white. +An argument given as +.L % +leaves the edge unchanged. +.TP +.BI -x x , y +Expand/contract (scale) the image, by real factors +.I x +and +.I y. +If +.BI , y +is missing, +.I y +is taken to be the same as +.I x. +May be overridden by +.BI -R x , y. +Requires a +.BI RES= "x y +line in the header (but, see +.BR -Z ). +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR cscan (1), +.IR imscan (1), +.IR ocr (1), +.IR pico (1), +.IR picfile (5) +.br +CCITT facsimile coding standards Rec. T.4(1988) and T.6(1988). +.SH BUGS +Concatenated pages are supported, but only if each new page has a complete +header. +.br +Scaling is accomplished by naive replication/deletion of pixels. +.br +Rotation by small angles exhibits aliasing effects, and is slow. +.br +Rotations +.B -tr +and +.B -tb +are unfinished. +.br +CCITT FAX `uncompressed' (or, `transparent') mode is not implemented. +.br +Postscript output is useful only for small images. +.br +.BI WINDOW= "l t r b +where +.I l +or +.I t +is non-zero +may not be handled correctly for every combination of file types. +.br +.B TYPE=rle +can't be both input and output. +.br +Should be merged with T. Duff's +.I pcp. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 b/static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f63ee30 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bdiff.1 @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +.TH BDIFF 1 +.SH NAME +bdiff \- big diff +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bdiff +file1 file2 [n] +.RB [ \-s ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bdiff\^ +is used in a manner analogous to +.IR diff (1) +to find which lines must be changed in two files to bring them +into agreement. +Its purpose is to allow processing of files which are too large +for +.IR diff . +.I Bdiff\^ +ignores lines common to the beginning of both files, +splits the remainder of each file into +.IR n -line +segments, and invokes +.I diff\^ +upon corresponding segments. +The value of +.I n\^ +is 3500 by default. +If the optional third argument is given, and it is +numeric, it is used as the value for +.IR n . +This is useful in those cases in which 3500-line segments are +too large for +.IR diff , +causing it to fail. +If +.I file1\^ +.RI ( file2 ) +is \fB\-\fR, +the standard input is read. +The optional +.B \-s +(silent) argument specifies that +no diagnostics are to be printed by +.I bdiff\^ +(note, however, that this does not suppress possible exclamations by +.IR diff . +If both optional arguments are specified, they must appear in the +order indicated above. +.PP +The output of +.I bdiff\^ +is exactly that of +.IR diff , +with line numbers adjusted to account for the segmenting of the files +(that is, to make it look as if the files had been processed +whole). +Note that +because of the segmenting of the files, +.I bdiff\^ +does not necessarily find a +smallest sufficient set of file differences. +.SH FILES +/tmp/bd????? +.SH "SEE ALSO" +diff(1). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Use +.IR help (1) +for explanations. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 b/static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18159971 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bigcore.1 @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +.TH BIGCORE 1 +.CT 1 debug_tune +.SH NAME +bigcore, coreid \- permit big core images, identify source of image +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bigcore +.I command +.PP +.B coreid +[ +.I file +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bigcore +calls the named +.I command +with no restriction on the size of core images. +By default, +no core image will be written when a program aborts +if it would be larger than a megabyte. +.PP +.I Coreid +reads the file +.FR core , +or the specified core image +.I file, +and prints on the standard output the argument list +of the program that produced the core image. +.SH FILES +.F core +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR core (5) +.SH BUGS +.I Coreid +only works for core images from C and Fortran programs. +.br +The arguments shown are those at the time of the dump, +not at invocation of the program. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bison.1 b/static/v10/man1/bison.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebd6d11c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bison.1 @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +.TH BISON 1 local +.SH NAME +bison \- GNU Project parser generator (yacc replacement) +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bison +[ +.B \-dvy +] file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bison +is a parser generator in the style of +.IR yacc (1). +It should be upwardly compatible with input files designed +for +.IR yacc . +.PP +Input files should follow the +.I yacc +convention of ending in ``.y''. +Unlike +.IR yacc , +the generated files do not have fixed names, but instead use the prefix +of the input file. +For instance, a grammar description file named +.B parse.y +would produce the generated parser in a file named +.BR parse.tab.c , +instead of +.IR yacc 's +.BR y.tab.c . +.PP +.I Bison +takes three optional flags. +.TP +.B \-d +Produce a +.B .tab.h +file, similar to +.IR yacc 's +.B y.tab.h +file. +.TP +.B \-v +Be verbose. Analogous to the same flag for +.IR yacc . +.TP +.B \-y +Use fixed output file names. I.e., force the output to be in files +.BR y.tab.c , +.BR y.tab.h , +and so on. This is for full +.I yacc +compatibility. +.SH FILES +/usr/local/lib/bison.simple simple parser +.br +/usr/local/lib/bison.hairy complicated parser +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR yacc (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +``Self explanatory.'' +... ha! diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bite.1 b/static/v10/man1/bite.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..41638a81 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bite.1 @@ -0,0 +1,712 @@ +.TH BITE 1 local +.SH NAME +bite \- Basic Interpreter for Testing & Engineering +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bite +[ - ] [prog1 prog2 prog3 .....] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bite +is a BASIC language interpreter. +Its virtues are in that it is written in the Bell System 'C' +compiler language which lends itself to +.I portability +and +.I readability. +One of the most important aspects is that the interpreter is +.I interfaced +with the +.I system shell via the '!' command. +Shell commands can be executed inmmediately or actually typed into +the BASIC program itself! +"bite" may also be invoked by a shell script and when given an argument +(a program name) will automatically cause the BASIC program to be +executed. In that case the BASIC program should be terminated with +a "bye" statement. +The inclusion of the '-' option, along with a BASIC program name will +cause "bite" to start and then "load" the BASIC program +.I without +running it. +.PP +.I Bite +is designed so that BASIC language programs +of the original Dartmouth syntax will be loadable +with little or no incompatibility and extra features that do not +follow common standards will be +.I additions +to, rather than +.I exceptions +to the syntax rules of BASIC. + +The commands and functions in this interpreter +are implemented by entries into +tables and the procedure for implementing new +commands will be documented as another virtue of the +configuration of this interpreter. +.PP +.I Bite +was implemented +with +.I instrument control +and +.I data collection +in mind +for the purpose of controlling an +.I Automated Test System (ATS). +These functions will be available as an extended instruction set. +Another version of "bite" is being configured for this purpose +which will reside (initially) on an PDP-11/03 (subsequently on +a PDP-11/23). +.PP +A standard string capability is implemented on the BASIC interpreter +BITE. +.TP 4 +.I Conventions +.TP 8 +.I THIS DOCUMENT +All things enclosed in [] are optional. +.TP 8 +.I EDITING +Editing is accomplished as it is in any BASIC language intepreter +in that line-numbers are entered by typing a line-number followed +by the statement and removed or deleted by merely typing the line-number. +Listing is accomplished with the "list" command (explained under "COMMANDS"). +In addition to the above, it is possible to list single lines by typing +the return-key in which case the program is listed one line-at-a-time, +starting at the first. When the last one is reached, the sequence starts +at the first line again. +At any time it is also possible to type the '-' symbol to "backup" a line- +at-a-time. +Other editing facilities are "s", "delete", and "reseq" also explained +under "COMMANDS". +.TP 8 +.I EXPR +Any algebraic expression which could be a constant, variable, math +function or a combination of same, seperated by arithmetic operators +as in: a+b*3.14*(4.4+c2*sin(b+s))+a(2,2) +See "variables" and "math functions" below. +.TP 8 +.I OPERATORS ++,-,*,/ or ^ for addition, subtraction, multiplication, division or +exponentiation in order of lowest to highest precidence. + and - have +the same precidence and * and / have the same precidence. +.TP +.I RELATIONALS +<, >, =, <=, >=, <> for less than, greater than, equality, less or equal, +greater than or equal and not equal. +.TP 8 +.I SOURCE PATH +When reference is made to a "bite" source file (i.e. the "old" and "load" +command), at least two directories are searched, the first being the current +directory and then /usr/lib/bites which is a "pool" where shared programs +should be stored. The /usr/lib/bites directory is analogous to the +/usr/bin directory in UNIX. +The user may specify extra paths to be searched by defining them in +BITEPATH and then exporting BITEPATH like: +.br +BITEPATH=:$HOME/BASIC:/usr/local/lib/: +.br +which adds the two pathnames between the ':' delimiters to the +other paths. In this way, one may have private BITE programs +and execute them from any directory. +.TP 8 +.I SOURCE PROGRAM NAME +The source program name is twelve or less characters suffixed by a .b . +.TP 8 +.I STATEMENT +A basic statement consists of a line number (integer value between 1 and +32767) followed by a command, space and operand which follows the +syntax governed by the command as in: 100 print "hello world" +A statement can be typed without a line number in which case it will +execute immediately. This is true for all commands, but doesn't make +sense for all commands such as "for". Immediate execution is handy +for diagnostic purposes such as: print a, to find out what the value +of a. +.TP 8 +.I VARIABLES +All variable names are either a lower case alpha character (a-z) +or a lower-case alpha character followed by an integer (0-9). +Array have the same name convention as regular variables and take +the form varname(D1,D2,D3....D10) where D1-D10 are the dimension +attributes of the array and can take the form of any legal expression +(including another array) as in a(b(2,2),x). +.TP 8 +.I STRING VARIABLE +A string variable is any single lower case alpha character (a-z) +followed by a '$' or any single alpha character followed by a single digit +(1-9) then followed by a '$' like a$ or z9$. +.TP 8 +.I STRING ARRAY VARIABLE +A string array variable has the same naming convention as a regular string +variable and contains one or two "subscripts" enclosed in parenthesis +as in: +.br + x1$(x,y) + +Like other array variables in BASIC string arrays must be declared +in a dimension statement prior to their use: e.g. dim a$(20) or +d$(100,3). +.TP 8 +.I STRING EXPRESSION +A string expression is any combination of string variables and +literals added together by a '+' operator which indicates concatenation. +An example of an assignment statement for string variables is: + + b$="Joan"+a1$+c2$+"John"+x$(20) +.SH COMMANDS +.TP 8 +.I bye or q +Exit +the interpreter. +.TP 8 +.I com[mon] +Preserve +variables for subsequent "run". Issue of the run command +otherwise de-allocates all variables. +.TP 8 +.I con \fR[line#] +Continue normal execution from single step mode. See "sing" command. +.TP 8 +.I data \fR(expr),(expr),(expr),.......... +The data statement is a string of defined constants or expressions referred +to by the "read" statement. Unlike most BASIC interpreters, the data is +stored only in the form of text strings which allows the read statement to +evaluate expressions as well as constants. +.TP 8 +.I del[ete] \fRlownum [, highnum] +Delete line-number specified if only lownum given. Delete all lines +between lownum and highnum if both are specified. +See the "undo" command. +.TP 8 +.I dim \fRvariable(expr1,expr2,....,expr10) +Allocate space and define the dimensional characteristics of +subscripted variable. +.TP 8 +.I end +Define logical end of program. Cause termination or current "run". +.TP 8 +.I expunge +Force all variable space, including subscripted variables to be freed. +Or de-allocate used varriable space. +.TP 8 +.I f +Identify current file. Typing "f" causes the currently referenced +file (if any) to be displayed. +.TP 8 +.I for - next +Cause code enclosed by this combination to be executed under the +conditions specified in the +.I for +statement as in: for variable = expr1 to expr2 [step expr]. +.TP 8 +.I gosub \fRline# +Goto subroutine, resume from following statement after "return" encountered. +.TP 8 +.I goto \fRline# +Force execution to continue starting at the line# specified. +.TP 8 +.I if \fR(expr1) relational (expr2) \fIthen \fRline# +Redirect program flow to line# if expr1 is related to expr2 by the +specified relational. +String expressions are also compared by the "if" statement as in: +.br +if a$ < "jim" goto 100 +.br +The results of the comparison are based on alphabetical order +of the two objects being compared. +The "then" in the "if" statement can be optionally replaced with "goto" +"go to" or "gosub". The "if" statement can also take the form: +.br +.I if \fR(expr) relatioanl (expr) \fIthen \fRvar = (expr) +.TP 8 +.I if \fRmore _fd \fI then \fRline# +Direct program flow to line# if there are more lines to be read +from the file associated with fd where fd is the file designator +between 1 and 4 inclusive. This type if statement is used to detect +EOF (End Of File) condition. +.br +Example: 100 if more _2 then 200 +.br +Note that "gosub" can be used in place of "then" in which case +the subroutine would be one for reading another line. +.TP 8 +.I input \fR[_fildes]var1[,var2,var3,....] +Prompt for input and assign inputed value to variable. +If 's' is typed program is halted. +String variables may be specified in the "input" statement. The +variables can be mixed like: +.br +input a$,a,b$(2,2) +.br +which will interpret the first input as a string, require the second +input to be numerical and interpret the third as a string input. +.TP 8 +.I [let] \fRvariable = expr +Assign the value of expr to variable. +The let is optional. +The let or assignment statement also allows the assignment of +string expressions to string variables like: +.br +b$="Joan"+a1$+c2$+"John"+x$(20) +.TP 8 +.I l[ist] \fR[lownum [, highnum]] +List the text in working storage. If lownum is given then only that number +is listed, if lownum and highnum are specified, then a listing is +displayed between the given statement numbers. +.TP 8 +.I load \fR[prog-name] +Same as the "old" command, except working storage is not cleared. +.TP 8 +.I ls \foptions +List directory. Same as UNIX "ls" command. +.TP 8 +.I mov \fRstartnum,endnum,newnum [,increm] +The mov command causes the lines beginning with +.I startnum +and ending with +.I endnum +to be moved (ie. resequenced) to the line beginning with +.I newnum +and incremented by +.I increm \fR. +The default value for +.I increm +is 10. +All references to the moved lines are updated. The user is responsible to +see that line numbers associated with moved lines do not conflict with +existing lines which will cause loss of program text. +.I mov +is similar to +.I reseq +(see below) except that only the specified lines are resequenced. +.TP 8 +.I n +List the next 23 lines. Useful for paging through a listing on a CRT. +.TP 8 +.I new +Clear program working storage for new program to be typed. +.TP 8 +.I old \fR[prog-name] +Clear user space and load program. If old is typed with no argument +it will prompt the user for a program name if not defined or load +the last defined program name. +.TP 8 +.I on \fR(expr) \fIgoto \fRline#,line#,....... +Is a selective goto with multiple line number targets. The target +branched to depends on the value of expr which is truncated. +Control is passed to the first line# specified after goto if the +value of the expression is 1. Control passes to the second line# +if the value is 2, the third if 3 and so on. +.TP 8 +.I on \fR(expr) \fIgosub \fRline#,line#,....... +Same action as on-goto, except action taken is that of "gosub". +.TP 8 +.I pause +Causes execution to be suspended until a "newline" or "return" is typed. +This is useful for programs which need to be continuously in "run", but +need to allow a time for user action i.e. unit insertion. +.TP 8 +.I pr[int] \fR[_fildes](expr's,quoted strings or tab operators) +The print statment is a limited format display statement in which +expressions are evaluated and displayed along with quoted literals. +The tab(expr) operator causes the print head to move to the absolute +column position computed by expr provided the current head position +is less. The specifiers must be seperated by onee or more commas +or semicolons. +String expressions are also expanded by the print statement. +.TP 8 +.I printf \fR[_fildes]"format string"[,expr1,expr2,.....,expr10] +This is an interpretive implementation of the UNIX 'C' library +routine, printf. It is, however restricted to only the floating +point format control specifiers 'f' and 'g'. Use of any of the +other specifiers such as 'o', 'd' or 's' will give erroneous results. +Print controls such as \\b (backspace), \\n (newline), \\r (return) +or \\t can also be used. The printf format was chosen in lieu +of the usual "print using" command because it was felt that +printf is not only a 'C' language standard but easier to use +than "print using". +.br +Usage Example: +.br +100 printf "Variable a=%2.2f\\tVariable b=%g.\\n",a,b +.TP 8 +.I randomize +Causes "rnd" statement to start at an "unpredictable" value. +.TP 8 +.I read \fRvar1,var2,var3,.............. +The "read" statement causes data to be assigned to each variable in the +list from the constants or expressions contained in "data" statements. The +reading starts where-ever the data pointer is currently at. The data pointer +points to the last data field accessed, if a read was done, the first +data field in the first data statment if the "restore" statment is issued +or the program is re-run. +The "read" statement will also assign values to string variables or +expressions in the "data" statement. +.TP 8 +.I rem +The remark statement causes no operation in +.I bite +but may be followed by any string of characters for the purpose of commenting +a program. Unlike compiler languages, remarks do take up program buffer space, +however, they are of paramount importance in making a program readable by +human beings and are therefore strongly recommended. +.TP 8 +.I reseq \fR[startnum [, increm]] +The resequence command causes the statement numbers and all references +to them (such as if's goto's, gosub's, etc) to be resequenced starting +at +.I startnum +and incremented by +.I increm. +If startnum and/or increm are omitted, the default values are 10 and +10 respectively. +.TP 8 +.I restore +Restores the data pointer to the first field of the first "data" statment. +.TP 8 +.I return +Return from subroutine called by "gosub" statement. +.TP 8 +.I rm \ffilename(s) +Remove file(s). Same as UNIX "rm" command. +.TP 8 +.I run \fR[prog-name] +Run basic program specified. If no argument is given, "run" attempts to +execute whatever is currently in working storage. +.TP 8 +.I s \fRline#/old-string/new-string[/] +Substitute in line line# the new-string for the old-string. The last delimiter +is optional, unless new-string is null in which case it is desired that +old-string merely be removed. +See the "undo" command. +.TP 8 +.I sing \fR[line#] +Enter the single step mode starting at the line# specified or at +the first line of the program if no line# is specified. +In single step mode an instruction is executed and then the prompt '^' +is displayed. +At this time the user may enter +any command (i.e. print) or hit the "return" key to execute the next +instruction. +See the "con" instruction. +.TP 8 +.I size +Causes amount of storage used and remaining or free space in +decimal number of bytes. +.TP 8 +.I stop +Stop execution of program. +.TP 8 +.I save \fR[prog-name] +Save the contents of working storage in file-name specified by progname. +If no progname is given last referenced file-name is used. If no file +name was referenced, the user is prompted for a name. +.TP 8 +.I undo +Undo last "s" command or +.I single line deletion. +.TP 8 +.I ! (any shell command string) +Unix shell command invocation allows system commands to be +executed from the interpreter. +Not available in restricted version. +.SH FILE COMMANDS +The file commands: append, openi, and openo are followed by one or more +file-names seperated by commas, each file-name being no more that +14 characters long. Files are assigned to designators (integer values +between 1 and 8 inclusive) in the order that they are open. +All commands +such as "print" and "input" which refer to a file use the designator +number preceded by a '_' character to refer to that file +as in: 100 print _1"hello world" or 100 input _3a(x,y) . +.TP 8 +.I append \fRfile1[,file2,.....,file8] +If file exists open for output cause new data to be appended. If file +does not exist, the named file is created. +.TP 8 +.I openi \fRfile1[,file2,.....,file8] +Open file for input. File must exist. +.TP 8 +.I openo \fRfile1[,file2,.....,file8] +Create named file(s) and open for output. If named files exist, the old +data is destroyed. +.TP 8 +.I seek \fR_fildes, offset, mode +Seek to a line whose position in the file is offset. If mode = 0 the +offset is from the beginning, if mode = 1 then the offset is relative +to the current file pointer. +.br +Usage Example: 101 seek _1, 33, 0 +.br +would cause the file pointer to the 33rd line. +.TP 8 +.I rewind \fR_fildes +Rewind the file specified by fildes to the beginning (first line). +This is effectively the same as seek _fildes, 0, 0. +.TP 8 +.I close \fR_fildes +Close file associated with file designator. +.TP 8 +.I closeall +Close all files input and output. +.SH MATH FUNCTIONS +.TP 8 +.I abs\fR(expr) +Absolute value. +.TP 8 +.I atn\fR(expr) +Arc-tangent. +.TP 8 +.I cos\fR(expr) +Cosine. +.TP 8 +.I exp\fR(expr) +Natural exponential. +.TP 8 +.I fact\fR(expr) +Factorial. (Truncates fractions i.e. fact(3.22) interpreted as fact(3)) +.TP 8 +.I int\fR(expr) +Integerize or truncate fractional part of result of expr. +.TP 8 +.I log\fR(expr) +Natural log. +.TP 8 +.I rnd\fR(expr) +Return random number between 0 and evaluated expr. +.TP 8 +.I sin\fR(expr) +Sine. +.TP 8 +.I sqr\fR(expr) +Square root. +.SH STRING FUNCTIONS +.TP 8 +.I asc(string) +Returns ASCII value of first character in string. +.TP 8 +.I chr$(expr) +Return the character corresponding to the value of expr where expr +is a numerical expression. If the value of the expression exceeds +octal 177 the least significant 7 bits are used. +.TP 8 +.I ext$(string,pos,len) +The ext$ "extract" string function returns a substring of the +string expression string starting at position "pos" having length "len". +If attempt is made to extract a string beyond the end of "string" the result +will be truncated and an error message will be displayed. +.TP +.I len(string) +Return the length of the string expression "string". +.TP +.I left$(string,n) +Return the leftmost n characters of the string. If the string length is +less than n, then the string itself is returned. +.TP +.I loc$(string) +Converts all upper case alphabetic characters in the string to lower case. +.br +EX: a$=loc$("ABCdef123#$^&*") +.br +returns abcdef123#$^&* to a$ +.TP +.I mid$(string,pos,len) +Does exactly same as ext$. Included because it is part of another +popular dialect of BASIC. +.TP +.I right$(string,n) +Return rightmost n characters of string. If string length is less than +n the string itself is returned. +.TP +.I str$(expr) +Returns value of expr (numerical expression) as an ASCII string. +.TP +.I string$(n,string) +Returns n occurrences of the first character in string. +.TP +.I upc$(string) +Converts all lower case alphabetic characters in the string to upper case. +.TP +.I val(string) +Return numerical value represented by ASCII number. +.br +Ex: a=val("100.2") +.br +assigns the value 100.2 to variable a. This function is good for +converting ASCII tabulations of numbers. ext$ or mid$ can be used +to select the column. +.SH ATS INSTRUMENT COMMANDS +.TP 8 +.I buspr \fR'busadr(text and expressions) +Buspr is merely an extension of the print statement which allows +the print string which would otherwise be displayed on the tty +to be sent via the IBV-11 bus to the bus address specified by "busadr". +The ' preceding busadr distinguishes the following character from anything +other than a single character to be interpreted as an address. +.br +Usage Example: 100 buspr '6"F2R";r +.TP 8 +.I cmd "string" +Send character string over IBV-11 command lines. +.TP 8 +.I delay num +Causes a delay of num 60ths of a second where num is an integer. +.br +Usage Example: 100 delay 120 (delay 2 minutes or 120/60ths sec) +.TP 8 +.I dvminit +Initialize Digital Voltmeter. +.TP 8 +.I dvms \fRfunction, range +Digital voltmeter set command, where: function is "ac", "dc" or "ohms" +and range is .1, 1, 10, 100, 1k, 10k or "aut". i.e. +.br +Usage Example: 100 dvms dc,1k +.TP 8 +.I hprintf \fR"format text"[,expr1,expr2,...,expr10] +Formatted print to strip printer. Syntax rules are the same as +. I printf. +Strip printer is 20 columns wide, anything past the 20th column is +truncated. +.TP 8 +.I lodset \fRlodnum,mode,value +Set load. Where lodnum an integer describing which load referred to, +mode is the manner in which the load is set and value is an expression +describing the current or resistance the load was set to depending on the +mode. Mode is a single character 'r', 'R', 'i' or 'I' where 'r' is resistance +mode (value in ohms) and 'i' is current mode (value in amperes). Small +letter causes a hunt for the value and capital causes set on first try. +.TP 8 +.I relay \fRfunction, relnum1[, relnum2, relnum3,... ] +Set multiprogrammer relays. Function is m (make), b (break) or c (clear). +Function is followed by all relay numbers to be acted upon which may +be expressions or variables. The clear function when not followed by +anything, simply means open all relays. When followed by relay numbers, +clear means all relays are open EXCEPT the ones specified. +.br +Usage Example: 100 relay m,10,20,21,a,b,rnd(10) +.TP 8 +.I ps \fRpsno, voltage, current limit, overvoltage +Set power supply parameters. Psno is an integer representing the +power supply number describing which power supply is to be used, +voltage, current limit and overvoltage are self explanatory. Each +one of the parameters may be a legal algebraic expression so that +they may be controlled by the program. +.br +Usage Example: 100 dvms 1,10,1,11 or 100 dvms n,v1,i1,v1+1 +.SH INSTRUMENT FUNCTIONS +.TP 8 +.I btn\fR(expr) +Button function returns non-zero if control button number (expr) is +depressed. +.TP 8 +.I dvmr() +Return digital voltmeter reading. +.TP 8 +.I error() +Return 1 if last instrument command caused instrument error, otherwise +return 0. + +.SH AUTHORS +Richard B. Drake & James P. Hawkins +.SH FILES +source.b +.br +/usr/lib/bites/ +.br +.SH "SEE ALSO" +sh(1),bstring(1) +BASIC Programming and Applications, C. Joseph Sass 1972 +.br +.br +BITE Users Guide, J.P.Hawkins, Bell Labs, TM-79-2425-4 +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Diagnostic error messages are issued by the interpreter +which indicate syntax errors , system failure, illegal commands or expressions,etc. +The +.I LSI-11/03 +Version of +.I bite +does not issue explicit error messages, but displays an error number +in which the meanings are listed below. This is done to regain approx. +2Kb memory in an already tight LSI-11/03 memory. +.nf +.I Standard Error Messages + + NUMBER MESSAGE TEXT + -------------------- + 0 REFERS TO A NON EXISTING LINE NUMBER + 1 UNRECOGNIZABLE OPERATION + 2 CANNOT OPEN FILE + 3 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME + 4 BAD FILENAME + 5 WORKING STORAGE AREA EMPTY + 6 RUNS NESTED TOO DEEPLY + 7 UNASSIGNED VARIABLE + 8 EXPRESSION SYNTAX + 9 BAD KEYWORD IN STATEMENT + 10 IMPROPER OR NO RELATIONAL OPERATOR + 11 UNBALANCED QUOTES + 12 FILE EDITING NOT PERMITTED IN SINGLE STEP MODE + 13 MISSING OR ILLEGAL DELIMITER + 14 GOSUB WITH NO RETURN + 15 IS FATAL + 16 UNBALANCED PARENTHESIS + 17 UNKNOWN MATH FUNCTION + 18 NEXT WITH NO OR WRONG FOR IN PROGRESS + 19 CANNOT PROCESS IMAGINARY NUMBER + 20 WHAT ? + 21 BAD DIMENSION SYNTAX + 22 TOO MANY DIMENSIONS + 23 REDUNDANT DIM STATEMENT + 24 NOT ENOUGH WORKING STORAGE SPACE + 25 VARIABLE NOT DIMENSIONED + 26 WRONG NUM OF DIMS + 27 ONE OR MORE DIMS LARGER THAN ASSIGNED + 28 NEG. OR ZERO DIMENSION ILLEGAL + 29 DIVIDE BY ZERO + 30 BAD TAB SPEC. IN PRINT + 31 SYS CALL FAILED + 32 BAD FILE DECLARE SYNTAX + 33 OUT OF DATA + 34 FILE-NAME TOO LONG + 35 FILE DES. USED UP + 36 FILE NOT OPEN FOR OUTPUT + 37 FILE NOT OPEN FOR INPUT + 38 EXPRESSION YIELDS AN IMPOSSIBLE VALUE + 39 PRINTF: ARG COUNT MISMATCH + 40 PRINTF: MORE THAN 10 ARGS + 41 LINE TOO LONG FOR STRIP PRINTER + 42 MOV REQUIRES 3 LINE #'s SPACING IS OPTIONAL +.I String error messages + 49 STRING VARIABLE IN NUMERICAL EXPR. + 50 NON-STRING IN STRING ASSIGNMENT + 51 NUMERIC IN STRING EXPRESSION + 52 INVALID STRING OPERATOR + 53 CANNOT COMPARE STRING WITH NUM. TYPES + 54 UNKNOWN STRING FUNCTION + 55 OUT OF STRING RANGE + +.I Test Set and Instrument Error Messages + + 100 MISSING ' DELIMITER BEFORE BUS ADDR + 101 PS: VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE + 102 PS: CURRENT OUT OF RANGE + 103 PS: OVERVOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE + 104 RELAY ERR + 105 RELAY: INVALID FUNC. + 106 RELAY: INVALID NUMBER + 107 DVM: INVALID MODE + 108 DVM: INVALID RANGE + 109 LODSET: IMPROPER NUMBER OF ARGUMENTS + 110 LODSET: IMPROPER MODE + 111 LODSET: UNABLE TO SET LOAD +.fi +.SH BUGS + There are more or less common features not yet available such as +.I string variables, multiple statment lines, matrix statements +and the +.I def +statement. +Array variables do not accept reference to 0th elements. +Bugs will be found as local users write and execute programs and report +their problems. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bitship.1 b/static/v10/man1/bitship.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8afd9dcd --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bitship.1 @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.TH BITSHIP 1 " " +.SH NAME +bitship \- convert file to or from visible representation +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bitship +[ +.B \-a +| +\-b +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bitship \-a +pipes an arbitrary file into a visible ASCII-95 representation. +.I Bitship \-b +performs the inverse transformation. If you are sending a file to +someone for the first time, you should probably include a copy of +the source code. +.SH FILES +/usr/src/cmd/bitship.c +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +"Usage:..." in case of an error in the command line. +.SH BUGS +There is no error correction. Illegal characters in a "visible" file +produce garbage. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 b/static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..41fe07a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bmd08v.1 @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +.TH BMD08V I +.UC +.SH NAME +bmd08v \- Analysis of Variance +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bmd08v +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bmd08v +performs analysis of variance for any hierarchical +design with equal cell sizes. +This includes the nested, partially nested and partially crossed, +and fully crossed designs. +Separate analyses may be performed on several dependent +variables simultaneously. +.I Bmd08v +takes its input from the standard input and writes its results on +the standard output. +All bmd control cards must have the identifying field in +upper case (eg. PROBLM, INDEX, FINISH, etc.). +One important departure from previous +versions concerns the variable format card \- +it is no longer necessary! If you specify 0 for +the number of variable format cards, the data will +be assumed to be in "free format" \- items +separated by blanks or commas. +.SH EXAMPLES +In the first example, +.I data +contains the bmd control cards and the +input data. +Output is directed to the standard output. +.sp +bmd08v output +.SH FILES +/tmp/1????? temporary file +.br +/tmp/2????? temporary file +.SH "SEE ALSO" +BMD User's Guide, /usr/doc/bmd08v +.SH BUGS +Temporary files are not always scratched. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bprint.1 b/static/v10/man1/bprint.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aaefc641 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bprint.1 @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +.TH BPRINT 1 "local \- 9/24/91" +.SH NAME +bprint \- expression profiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bprint +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I bprint +produces on the standard output a listing of the programs compiled by +.I lcc +with the +.B \-b +option. +Executing an +.B a.out +so compiled appends profiling data to +.BR prof.out . +The first token of each expression in the listing is preceded +by the number of times it was executed +enclosed in angle brackets as determined from the data in +.BR prof.out . +.I bprint +interprets the following options. +.TP +.B \-c +Compress the +.B prof.out +file, which otherwise grows with every execution of +.BR a.out . +.TP +.B \-b +Print an annotated listing as described above. +.TP +.B \-n +Include line numbers in the listing. +.TP +.B \-f +Print only the number of invocations of each function. +A second +.B \-f +summarizes call sites instead of callers. +.TP +.SM +.BI \-I \*Sdir +specifies additional directories in which to seek +files given in +.B prof.out +that do not begin with `/'. +.PP +If any file names are given, only the requested data for those files are printed +in the order presented. +If no options are given, +.B \-b +is assumed. +.SH FILES +.PP +.ta \w'/usr/lib/bbexit.oXX'u +prof.out profiling data +.br +/usr/lib/bbexit.o creates +.B prof.out +when +.B a.out +exits +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR lcc (1), +.IR prof (1) +.SH BUGS +Macros and comments can confuse +.I bprint +because it uses post-expansion source coordinates +to annotate pre-expansion source files. +If +.I bprint +sees that it's about to print a statement count +.I inside +a number or identifier, it moves the count to just +.I before +the token. +.PP +Can't cope with an ill-formed +.BR prof.out . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/btoa.1 b/static/v10/man1/btoa.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb20d204 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/btoa.1 @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +.TH BTOA 1 local +.SH NAME +btoa, atob, tarmail, untarmail \- encode/decode binary to printable ASCII +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B btoa +.br +.B atob +.br +.B tarmail +who subject files ... +.br +.B untarmail +[ file ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Btoa +is a filter that reads anything from the standard input, and encodes it into +printable ASCII on the standard output. It also attaches a header and checksum +information used by the reverse filter +.I atob +to find the start of the data and to check integrity. +.PP +.I Atob +reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and +trailing lines added by mailers, and recreates a copy of the original file +on the standard output. +.I Atob +gives NO output (and exits with an error message) if its input is garbage or +the checksums do not check. +.PP +.I Tarmail +is a shell script that tar's up all the given files, pipes them +through +.IR compress "," +.IR btoa "," +and mails them to the given person with the given subject phrase. For +example: +.PP +.in 1i +tarmail ralph "here it is ralph" foo.c a.out +.in -1i +.PP +Will package up files "foo.c" and "a.out" and mail them to "ralph" using +subject "here it is ralph". Notice the quotes on the subject. They are +necessary to make it one argument to the shell. +.PP +.I Tarmail +with no args will print a short message reminding you what the required args +are. When the mail is received at the other end, that person should use +mail to save the message in some temporary file name (say "xx"). +Then saying "untarmail xx" +will decode the message and untar it. +.I Untarmail +can also be used as a filter. By using +.IR tarmail "," +binary files and +entire directory structures can be easily transmitted between machines. +Naturally, you should understand what tar itself does before you use +.IR tarmail "." +.PP +Other uses: +.PP +compress < secrets | crypt | btoa | mail ralph +.PP +will mail the encrypted contents of the file "secrets" to ralph. If ralph +knows the encryption key, he can decode it by saving the mail (say in "xx"), +and then running: +.PP +atob < xx | crypt | uncompress +.PP +(crypt requests the key from the terminal, +and the "secrets" come out on the terminal). +.SH AUTHOR +Paul Rutter (modified by Joe Orost) +.SH FEATURES +.I Btoa +uses a compact base-85 encoding so that +4 bytes are encoded into 5 characters (file is expanded by 25%). +As a special case, 32-bit zero is encoded as one character. This encoding +produces less output than +.IR uuencode "(1)." +.SH "SEE ALSO" +compress(1), crypt(1), uuencode(1), mail(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 b/static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd7ce7de --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/buildtables.1 @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ +.ds dF /usr/lib/font +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH BUILDTABLES 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B buildtables +\- build +.B troff +tables on a PostScript printer +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBbuildtables\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" "name \(el" [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B buildtables +builds font width tables or the typesetter description +file on a PostScript printer. +No arguments means build a default set of tables; +usually a superset of the LaserWriter Plus collection. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-b speed +Transmit data over +.I line +at baud rate +.I speed. +Recognized baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. +The default +.I speed +is 9600 baud. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-l line +Build the tables on the PostScript printer attached to +.I line. +There is no default. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-t name +Use +.I name +as the template for fonts not in the default set. +Choose +.MW R +for proportionally spaced fonts and +.MW CW +for fixed width fonts. +Try +.MW ZD +(ZapfDingbats) if the font has a non-standard +character set. +The default is +.MR R . +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +into each PostScript table program; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-H hostdir +Use +.I hostdir +as the host-resident font directory. +A file in +.I hostdir +that matches the name of the +.B troff +font is assumed to be a host-resident font program and is included +in the PostScript width table program. +There is no default. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-S file +Use +.I file +as the shell library file. +Overrides the choice made with the +.OP \-T +option. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-T name +Set the target device to +.I name. +.br +Device +.I name +means +.ft 2 +.MI \*(dF/dev name /shell.lib +.ft 1 +is the shell library file. +There is no default. +.PP +If +.OP \-l +is omitted output files are the PostScript programs that +build the tables, rather than the tables themselves. +One of +.OP \-T +or +.OP \-S +is required. +If both are given +.OP \-S +wins. +Although +.OP \-H +is the preferred mechanism for including host-resident font files, +.OP \-C +makes sense when only one width table is built. +.PP +The shell library file defines a collection of functions used to +build +.BR troff (1) +tables. +The default set of tables is the list of names returned by the +.MW AllTables +function. +Changes to the default list can be made by updating the +.MW BuiltinTables +function. +.PP +Each +.B buildtables +argument +must be a default table name, or a pair of names enclosed in quotes. +If the argument is a pair, the first name is the +.B troff +font and the second is the full PostScript font name. +Tables are created in the current directory. +Each is assigned a name that matches the +.B troff +table name. +.PP +The PostScript table programs created by +.BR trofftable (1) +are written to files that have +.MW .ps +appended to the +.B troff +table name. +The +.MW .ps +file is deleted after the table is built. +Options not listed above are passed to +.B trofftable. +The PostScript table programs return data to the host computer using +PostScript's +.MW print +operator. +See +.BR hardcopy (1) +if you do not have access to the printer's serial port. +.SH EXAMPLES +.PP +Build the default collection of devpost tables on the printer +connected to +.MW /dev/tty00 +(no font name arguments): +.EX +buildtables -l/dev/tty00 -Tpost +.EE +To do the same and to restrict the tables that are built, +Add +.B troff +font names (or +.MR DESC ) +to restrict the tables built on the printer connected to +.MR /dev/tty00 : +.EX +buildtables -l/dev/tty00 -Tpost R I B BI DESC S +.EE +Enclose the +.B troff +and PostScript font names in quotes to +build the width table for a font not in the default set +(also on the printer connected to +.MR /dev/tty00 ): +.EX +buildtables -l/dev/tty00 -TLatin1 "GL Garamond-Light" +.EE +A font must be available on the printer when the table is built. +Use +.OP \-H +or +.OP \-C +to include host-resident fonts. +.SH WARNINGS +.PP +A width table will not build properly if the printer cannot access +the PostScript font. +.PP +The +.OP \-TLatin1 +option only works on PostScript printers that support the full +.SM ISO +Latin-1 character set. +The error message from older printers will likely indicate a missing +.MW ISOLatin1Encoding +array. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dF/dev*/shell.lib +.br +.MW \*(dQ/dpost.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/trofftable.ps +.br +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR hardcopy (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR troff (1), +.BR trofftable (1), +.BR font (5) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/bundle.1 b/static/v10/man1/bundle.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fcbd5b67 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/bundle.1 @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +.TH BUNDLE 1 +.CT 1 comm_users +.SH NAME +bundle \- collect files for distribution +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B bundle +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Bundle +writes on its standard output a shell script for +.IR sh (1) +that, when executed, +will recreate the original +.IR files . +Its main use is for distributing small numbers of text files by +.IR mail (1). +.PP +Although less refined than standard archives from +.IR ar (1), +.IR cpio (1), +or +.IR tar (1), +a +.IR bundle +file +is self-documenting and complete; little preparation is required on +the receiving machine. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +bundle makefile *.[ch] | mail elsewhere!mark +Send a makefile to Mark together with related +.L .c +and +.L .h +files. +Upon receiving the mail, Mark may save the file sans postmark, +say in +.BR gift/horse , +then do +.TP +.L +cd gift; sh horse; make +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR ar (1), +.IR cpio (1), +.IR tar (1), +.IR mail (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Bundle +will not create directories and is unsatisfactory for non-ASCII files. +.br +Beware of gift horses. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 b/static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3d05fa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/byteyears.1 @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +.TH BYTEYEARS 1 +.SH NAME +byteyears \- time-space product for file residency +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B byteyears +[ +.B \-a +] +[ +.I file +] +. . . +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Byteyears +reports the product of the age of each +.I file +in years +and the length in bytes. +Files for which this number is large +may be reasonable candidates for deletion. +If the file is a directory, +.I byteyears +reports (recursively) on everything in that +directory. +If no arguments are given, the current directory is assumed. +If the +.B \-a +option is given, the time since last access +is used instead of the time since last modification. +.PP +Each line of output contains +the number of byte years (rounded to the nearest integer), +the size of the file in bytes, the time last +modified, and the name of the file. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +byteyears | sort \-r | sed 10q +List the ten leading candidates in the current directory. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/c++.1 b/static/v10/man1/c++.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e41cfe58 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/c++.1 @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +.TH C++ 1 +.CT 1 prog_c +.SH NAME +CC, cfront \- C++ compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B CC +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B cfront +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I CC +compiles and links C++ programs in the manner of +.IR cc (1). +It handles source files with names ending in +.LR .c , +assembler files in +.LR .s , +and object files in +.LR .o . +Various passes of the compiler can be substituted via +environment variables listed under +.SM `FILES'. +Options include those of +.IR cc (1) +except +.BR -B +and +.BR -t , +those of +.IR ld (1), +those of +.I cfront, +and in addition +.TP +.BR -F +Run only the macro preprocessor +.IR cpp (8) +and +.I cfront +on the named +.B .c +files, and send the result to the +standard output. +.TP +.BI -. suffix +Instead of the standard output, place +.B -E +and +.B -F +output in files whose name is that of the source with +.BI . suffix +substituted for +.LR .c . +.PP +.I Cfront +reads C++ code (without preprocessing) from the standard input +and writes equivalent C code on the standard output. +The options are +.TP +.B +d +Don't expand inline functions. +.TP +.BI +x file +Take size and alignment information from +.I file +for cross compiling. +.TP +.B +e0 +.PD0 +.TP +.B +e1 +Make external declarations +.RB (+e0) +or definitions +.BR (+e1) +for virtual function tables. +These tables may appear as static data in +every compilation; +the options are intended to save redundant space. +.PD +.TP +.B +a0 +Produce classic C output (default). +.TP +.B +a1 +Produce +.SM ANSI +C output. +If this option is used with +.I CC, +then an +.SM ANSI +C compiler such as +.I lcc +must be specified in environment variable +.BR ccC . +.TP +.BI +f name +Use +.I name +to identify the source file in diagnostics. +.TP +.B +L +Produce +.SM ANSI +standard +.B #line +directives instead of +.BI # number. +.SH FILES +.TF cfrontC=/usr/bin/cfront +.TP +.B cppC=/lib/cpp +C preprocessor +.TP +.B cfrontC=/usr/bin/cfront +C++ translator +.TP +.B ccC=/bin/cc +C compiler +.TP +.B munchC=/usr/lib/munch +linker postprocessor for static initialization +.TP +.F /usr/lib/libC.a +C++ library +.TP +.F /usr/include/CC +standard directory for C++ +.L #include +files +.TP +Other files as in \fIcc\fR +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR cc (1), +.IR ld (1) +.br +B. Stroustrup, +.I The C++ Programming Language, +Addison-Wesley, 1986 +.br +B. Stroustrup, +.I C++ Reference Manual, +AT&T Bell Laboratories, May 1989 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 b/static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8caf170e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/c++filt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +. \"ident "@(#)ctrans:demangler/c++filt.1 1.1" +. \"This CC man page is generated by: troff -man c++filt.1 +. \"Copyright (c) 1988 AT&T +. \"All Rights Reserved +. \"THIS IS UNPUBLISHED PROPRIETARY SOURCE CODE OF AT&T +. \"The copyright notice above does not evidence any +. \"actual or intended publication of such source code. +.TH c++filt 1 +.UC 4 +.SH NAME +c++filt \- C++ name demangler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B c++filt +.RB [ -m ] +.RB [ -s ] +.RB [ -v ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I C++filt +copies standard input to standard output after decoding +tokens which look like C++ encoded symbols. +Any combination of the following options may be used: +.TP 15 +.B \-m +Produce a symbol map on standard output. +This map contains a list of the encoded names encountered and the +corresponding decoded names. +This output follows the filtered output. +.TP 15 +.B \-s +Produce a side-by-side decoding with each encoded symbol encountered +in the input stream replaced by the decoded name followed by the +original encoded name. +.TP 15 +.B \-v +Output a message giving information about the version of +.I c++filt +being used. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +CC(1), ld(1), nm(1). +.br +Bjarne Stroustrup, +.I The C++ Programming Language, +Addison-Wesley 1986. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/calendar.1 b/static/v10/man1/calendar.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a94e9bc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/calendar.1 @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ +.TH CALENDAR 1 +.CT 1 time_man +.SH NAME +calendar \- reminder service +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B calendar +[ +.B - +] +[ +.I n +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Calendar +consults calendar files +and prints out lines that contain today's date or +any date up through the +.IR n th +working day hence +.RI ( n =1 +by default). +Most American-style month-day dates such as +.BR "Aug. 19" ,\ +.BR "august 19" ,\ +.BR "8/19" , +etc., are recognized, but not +.LR 19/8 . +The symbol +.L * +denotes every month as in +.B * +19 or +.BR */19 . +A year may follow the day, as in +.BR "August 19 86" ,\ +.BR "8/19/86" , +or +.BR "Aug. 19, 1986" . +.PP +By default, the program consults the file +.F calendar +in directory +.B $HOME +(see +.IR sh (1)), +or in the current directory if a home directory is not known. +Other calendar files to be consulted may be specified by calendar +lines in one of the forms +.IP +.B #include +\f5\fIfile\^\f5 +.br +.B #include +\f5\fImachine\f5!\fIfile\^\f5\fR +.LP +where +.I file +is the name of some other calendar and +.I machine +is the name of a machine or service accessible via +.IR con (1). +.PP +When the optional +.L - +argument is present, +.I calendar +reminds all users of their calendar engagements by +.IR mail (1). +Normally this happens daily in the wee hours under control of +.IR cron (8). +Calendars not in home directories, or recipients not registered +as users, may be registered +for reminder service by placing lines of the form +.I calendarfile mailname +in file +.FR /usr/lib/calendar . +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +#include /usr/pub/btlcalendar +#include /n/coma/usr/pub/btlcalendar +#include mh/astro/coma.calendar!/usr/pub/btlcalendar +.EE +.ns +.IP +Ways to subscribe to a public calendar by +(1) users of +.LR mh/astro/coma , +(2) users elsewhere who have +.IR netfs (8) +access to +.BR coma , +and (3) users elsewhere without +.I netfs +access. +.SH FILES +.TF +.TP +.F calendar +.PD0 +.TP +.F /usr/lib/calendar? +.TP +.F /etc/passwd +.TP +.F /tmp/cal* +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR at (1) +.SH BUGS +.BR #include s +do not nest. +.br +The mail reminder service doesn't work when +it finds fewer than two calendars. +.br +Your calendar must be public information for you +to get reminder service. +.br +Holidays are what the program says they are. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/can.1 b/static/v10/man1/can.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a070d4d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/can.1 @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +.TH CAN 1 +.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev +.SH NAME +can, bcan, dcan, tcan, xcan \- interface to Canon laser-printer spooler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B can +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B bcan +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B dcan +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B tcan +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B xcan +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +These commands print +.I files +(standard input by default) on Canon laser printers. +Four commands, all special cases of the generic +.I xcan, +handle particular kinds of data files: +.TP +.I can +ASCII text +.TP +.I bcan +bitmap images created by +.IR blitblt (9.1) +.TP +.I dcan +output from +.IR troff (1) +.TP +.I tcan +output for a Tektronix 4014 terminal, as produced by +.IR plot (1) +.PP +The destination printer is determined in the following ways, +listed in order of decreasing precedence. +.IP +option +.B -d +.I dest +.br +environment variable +.L CANDEST +.br +printer named in file +.F /etc/candest +.LP +Printers at the mother site are: +.RS +.TP +.B 3 +3rd floor, end of 9S corridor (seki) +.PD0 +.TP +.B 4 +4th floor, stair 8 (swift) +.TP +.B 8 +3rd floor, stair 8 (tukey) +.TP +.B 9 +4th floor, stair 9 (wild) +.TP +.B j +jones room (jones) +.TP +.B u +unix room (panther) +.TP +.BI / name +printer attached to machine with Datakit destination +.I name +.RE +.PD +.PP +Options: +.PP +.TP +.BI -d " dest" +Select the destination printer. +.TP +.BI -f " font" +Set the font (default +.LR CW.11 ) +for +.IR can ; +see +.IR font (7). +.TP +.B -L +(landscape) Rotate +.I bcan +pages 90 degrees. +.TP +.BI -l " n" +Set number of lines per page for +.I can +(default 66). +.TP +.BI -m " n" +Set +.I bcan +magnification +(default 2). +.TP +.B -n +Spool only, input has already been formatted by a remote +.IR xcan . +.TP +.BI -o " list" +Print only pages whose page numbers appear in +the comma-separated +.I list +of numbers and ranges. +A range +.IB n - m +means pages +.I n +through +.IR m ; +a range +.BI - b +means from the beginning to page +.IR n ; +a range +.IB n - +means from page +.I n +to the end. +.B -o +implies +.BR -r . +.TP +.B -r +print +pages in reverse order +(default for +.IR can " and " dcan ). +.TP +.B -sb +.RI "make " xcan " expect " bcan " input;" +.BR -sb " implies defaults of " -x176 " and " -y96 . +.TP +.B -sc +.RI "make " xcan " expect " can " input;" +.BR -sc " does not imply " -r . +.TP +.B -sd +.RI "make " xcan " expect " dcan " input;" +.BR -sd " does not imply " -r . +.TP +.B -st +.RI "make " xcan " expect " tcan " input." +.TP +.BI -t " n" +.I tcan +scale factor is +.RI ( n /100)/( n %100). +The default is 813, i.e., 13 tekpoints become 8 dots on the laser printer. +.TP +.BI -u " user" +set the name which appears on the banner page; +default is login name. +.TP +.BI -x " n" +set the horizontal +offset of the print image, measured in dots (default 48). +There are 240 dots to the inch. +.TP +.BI -y " n" +set the vertical +offset of the print image (default 0), +except in +.I tcan, +where this option specifies +.I n +extra tekpoints vertically. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/spool/jpd +.TP +.F /etc/candest +default destination +.PD0 +.TP +.F /usr/lib/font/devi10 +font directory +.TP +.F /usr/spool/jpd +spool directory +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR pr (1), +.IR lpr (1), +.IR blitblt (9.1), +.IR plot (1), +.IR font (7) +.SH BUGS +The `landscape' option is supported only by +.IR bcan ; +.BR -o " and " -r +are supported only by +.I can +and +.I dcan. +.br +There ought to be a way to determine the service class from the input data. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cat.1 b/static/v10/man1/cat.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f366ec7c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cat.1 @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CAT (I)'1/15/73'CAT (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME cat -- concatenate and print +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS cat___ file918 ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION cat___ +reads each file in sequence +and writes it on the standard output. +Thus: +.sp +.ti +3 +cat___ file____ +.sp +is about the easiest way to print a file. +Also: +.sp +.ti +3 +cat___ file1_____ file2_____ >file3______ +.sp +is about the easiest way to concatenate +files. +.sp +If no input file is given cat___ reads from the standard +input file. +.sp +If the argument "-" is encountered, cat reads from +the standard input file. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO pr(I), cp(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS none; +if a file cannot be found it is ignored. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS cat x y >x and cat x y >y cause strange results. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/catsim.1 b/static/v10/man1/catsim.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8dee1e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/catsim.1 @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +.th CATSIM I 11/1/73 +.sh NAME +catsim \*- phototypesetter simulator +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd catsim +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Catsim +will interpret its +standard input as codes for the phototypesetter (cat). +The output of +.it catsim +is output to the display (vt). +.s3 +About the only use of +.it catsim +is to save time and paper on the phototypesetter +by the following command: +.s3 + troff \*-t files | catsim +.sh FILES +/dev/vt0 +.sh "SEE ALSO" +troff(I), cat(IV), vt(IV) +.sh BUGS +Point sizes are not correct. +The vt character set is restricted to +one font of ASCII. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cb.1 b/static/v10/man1/cb.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cdf3a803 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cb.1 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +.TH CB 1 +.CT 1 prog_c writing_output +.SH NAME +cb \- C program beautifier +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cb +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Cb +reads C programs either from the named +.I files +or from the +standard input +and writes them +on the standard output with spacing and indentation +that displays the structure of the code. +The options are: +.TP +.B -s +Place newlines as in +Kernighan and Ritchie. +(Original newlines are preserved by default.) +.TP +.B -j +Join split lines. +.TP +.BI -l " leng" +Split lines that are longer than +.I leng, +120 by default. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR pr (1), +.IR troff (1), +.IR lp (1), +.IR font (6) +.br +B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, +.I "The C Programming Language," +Prentice-Hall, 1988. +.SH BUGS +Punctuation hidden in +preprocessor statements causes +.I cb +to make indentation errors. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cbt.1 b/static/v10/man1/cbt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fe8f0ed --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cbt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +.TH CBT 1 +.SH NAME +cbt +\- programs for b-trees +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cbt +.I command +arguments ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +B-trees support lookup of values by key. +A b-tree +.I file +corresponds to two files, +.I file.T +and +.IR file.F . +.I file.T +contains the keys and pointers to values. +.I file.F +contains the values. +If the b-tree is an +.I index +there is no +.I .F +file. +.PP +.B cbt creat +.I arguments +creates empty b-trees. +Each argument may be a file name or the flag +.BR -i . +The b-trees created for all the names following a flag argument +will be indexes. +.PP +.B cbt report +.I file-names +reports on the sizes of the files. +If the amount of useful data is much less than the file sizes, +.B cbt squash +.I file +will make the b-tree much smaller by reconstructing it in nearly +minimal form. +.PP +.B cbt cat +.I file +prints out the contents of the b-tree in the form +.RS +.I key tab value new-line +.RE +.PP +.B cbt build [-r] +.I file +fills an empty b-tree with key-value pairs read from the standard +input. +The keys must be sorted and without duplicates. +If the optional argument is not present, then the part of each line +up to the first tab is the key, and the part after the first tab, +not including the new-line, is the value. +If the optional argument is present, then the input is assumed to +be a sequence of +.RS +.RI short klen; char key[klen]; short vlen; char value[vlen] +.RE +quadruples. +The smallest possible value for +.I klen +is 1, +so the shortest quadruple consists of 2 short integers and one character. +.SH SEE ALSO +memo by pjw, cbt(3) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cc.1 b/static/v10/man1/cc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..348a79e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CC (I)'3/15/72'CC (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME cc -- C compiler +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS cc__ [ -c__ ] sfile\d1\u.c__ ... ofile\d1\u ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION cc__ +is the UNIX C compiler. +It accepts three types of arguments: + +Arguments whose names end with ".c" are assumed to be +C source programs; they are compiled, and +the object program is left on the file sfile\d1\u.o (i.e. +the file whose name is that of the source with ".o" substituted +for ".c"). + +Other arguments (except for "-c") are assumed +to be either loader flag arguments, or C-compatible +object programs, typically produced by an earlier cc__ run, +or perhaps libraries of C-compatible routines. +These programs, together with the results of any +compilations specified, are loaded (in the order +given) to produce an executable program with name +a.out_____. + +The "-c" argument suppresses the loading phase, as does +any syntax error in any of the routines being compiled. + +.ti 0 +FILES file.c input file +.nf +file.o object file +a.out loaded output +/tmp/ctm? temporary +/lib/c[01] compiler +/lib/crt0.o runtime startoff +/lib/libc.a builtin functions, etc. +/lib/liba.a system library +.fi +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO C reference manual (in preparation), cdb(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS Diagnostics +are intended to be self-explanatory. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cdb.1 b/static/v10/man1/cdb.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a32353c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cdb.1 @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CDB (I)'1/15/73'CDB (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME cdb -- C debugger +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS cdb___ [ core [ a.out ] ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION cdb___ +is a debugging program for use with C programs. +It is by no means completed, +and this section is essentially only a placeholder +for the actual description. + +Cdb resembles db__ in many respects, except that +all integers are decimal. + +Even the present cdb___ has one useful feature: +the command + + $ + +will give a stack +trace +of the core image of a terminated C program. +The calls are listed in the order made; +the actual arguments to each routine are given +in octal. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO cc(I), db(I), C Reference Manual +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cf.1 b/static/v10/man1/cf.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..727293e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cf.1 @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +char freq diff --git a/static/v10/man1/charge.1 b/static/v10/man1/charge.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4fe818f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/charge.1 @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ +.TH CHARGE 1 SHARE +.SH NAME +charge, charges \- change (show) charges for share system usage calculations +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B charge +[\-flags] +.br +.B charges +[\-flags] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Charge +will change the costs associated with the usage calculations for the +.IR "Share Scheduler" . +The flag \fB\-C\fR, if used, should be mentioned first +to cause +.I charge +to read the +existing values, +instead of working on default values. +The alternate name is used to show the charges currently in operation, +for which the default assumes \fB\-C\fR, unless the flag \fB\-\fP is used. +The optional flags are as follows:- +.TP "\w'-NmaxnormuXX'u" +.BI - +Causes +.I charges +to show the default settings for the charging parameters. +.TP +.BI -C +Causes +.I charge +to read in the current values, +which it will use instead of the defaults. +\fBMust be first flag if used\fP. +.TP +.BI -D h1,h2 +Will set the decay rate for process priorities with normal \fInice\fP +so that they will decay to half their initial value in +.I h1 +seconds, +and set the decay rate for process priorities with maximum \fInice\fP +so that they will decay to half their initial value in +.I h2 +seconds. +.TP +.BI -E half-life +Will set the decay rate for users' process +.I rates +so that they will decay to half their initial value in +.I half-life +seconds. +.TP +.BI -F flags +Sets various global scheduling flags \(em see +.IR share (5) +for details. +.I Flags +are assumed to be in octal. +.TP +.BI -G maxgroups +Sets the maximum depth for the scheduling tree. +.TP +.BI -K half-life [s] +Will set the decay rate for users' usages +so that they will decay to half their initial value in +.I half-life +hours. +If the +.I half-life +is followed by the character \fBs\fP, +then the number will be interpreted as seconds. +.TP +.BI -N maxnormu +Upper bound on +.I "normalised usage" +used in process priority calculations. +The number can be added to a running process's priority every clock tick, +so it should be small enough not to overrun the value +.I maxupri +in too short a time interval +(ie: it should be less than \fI(maxupri*(1\-pri_decay)) / \s-1HZ\s0\fP, +see the output of \fIcharges -v\fP for the low priority value of \fIpri_decay\fP.) +.TP +.BI -P maxpri +Absolute upper bound for a process's priority. +(Something less than the largest non-negative integer.) +.TP +.BI -Q maxupri +Upper bound for normal processes' priorities. +.I Idle +processes run with priorities in the range +.IB maxupri < pri < maxpri . +.TP +.BI -R delta +Sets the +.I run-rate +for the share scheduler in seconds. +.TP +.BI -S maxusers +Sets the maximum number of users and groups that can be active. +Note that this cannot exceed the maximum configured in the kernel. +.TP +.BI -U maxusage +Upper bound for ``reasonable'' usages. +Users with usages larger than this are grouped together and given a +.I "normalised usage" +which prevents them from interfering with ``normal'' users. +.TP +.BI -X maxushare +If the +.SM LIMSHARE +scheduling flag is on, +then this parameter limits the maximum effective share an +individual user can have to +.I maxushare +times their allocated share. +.TP +.BI -Y mingshare +If the +.SM ADJGROUPS +scheduling flag is on, +and any group is getting less than +.I mingshare +times its allocated share, +the costs incurred by the group members will be adjusted down to compensate. +(Does not affect the long-term charges.) +.TP +.BI -b bio +The charge for a disk block I/O operation. +.TP +.BI -m click +The charge for a +.IR "memory tick" . +.TP +.BI -s syscall +The charge for a system call. +.TP +.BI -t tick +The charge for a CPU tick. +.TP +.BI -v +Show scheduling feed-back parameters +.RI ( charges " only)." +.TP +.BI -y tio +The charge for a stream I/O operation. +(This is really dependent on the number of kernel buffer operations, +so a +.I "write(1)" +will cost the same as a +.I "write(64)" +to an ordinary stream, +or a +.I "write(1024)" +to a pipe.) +.TP +.IR percent +The percentage change to apply to all the charges. +.SH EXAMPLES +.B charge 10 +.RS +will change the costs to 10% of the default. +.RE +.B charges +.RS +show the current charges. +.RE +.B "charges \-" +.RS +show the default settings. +.RE +.SH SEE ALSO +.PD 0 +.TP "\w'/usr/include/sys/charges.hXX'u" +.IR /usr/include/sys/charges.h +The default values in the kernel. +.TP +.IR /usr/include/sys/share.h +Definition of charges structure. +.TP +.IR share (5) +A description of the +.IR "Share Scheduler" . +.PD +.SH BUGS +The percent flag will also affect any new constants, +so bias them accordingly. +.PP +.I Charges +works out the current charging percentage +by using the difference between the default cost for ``ticks'' +and the current setting. +.PP +The defaults are hardly ever relevant. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chash.1 b/static/v10/man1/chash.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fbe4e38c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/chash.1 @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +.pa 1 +.he '6/13/1972''CHASH (I)' +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +NAME chash -- precompile a hash table for cref____ +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS chash_____ file1 file2 +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION CHASH +takes symbols (character sequences; one per line) from +file1_____ and compiles a hash table for the use of cref____. +The table is written on file2_____. +.sp +A subroutine suitable for searching such a hash table +is available from the author. +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +FILES --- +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO cref(I) +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS --- +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +BUGS There +can only be 199 symbols; they may total +only 600 characters of text. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chdate.1 b/static/v10/man1/chdate.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e471a8e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/chdate.1 @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +.TH CHDATE 1 +.CT 1 files dirs +.SH NAME +touch, chdate \- set modification or access date of a file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B touch +[ +.B -c +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B chdate +[ +.B -am +] +.I date file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Touch +attempts to set the modification time of the +.I files +to the current time. +If a +.I file +does not exist, +it will be created unless option +.B -c +is present. +.PP +.I Chdate +sets the access and modification times of +.I files. +The +.I date +comprises two or more arguments: a month (3 letters or more), +a day number, an optional time in hour:min[:sec] form, and an +optional year. +A missing year means a time in the last 12 months. +The options are +.TP +.B -a +Change the access time only. +.TP +.B -m +Change the modification time only. +.PP +.I Chdate +knows how to carry between fields of a date. +Only a file's owner or the super-user can change its date. +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +.ta \w'chdate jul 4 12:00 1976 independence 'u +chdate jul 4 12:00 1976 independence +chdate jul -3 1976 independence # backdate one week +.EE +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR ls (1), +.IR utime +in +.IR chmod (2), +.IR stat (2), +.IR timec (3), +.IR chmod (1), +.IR chown (8) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.I Chdate +returns the number of files on which the date +could not be changed. +.SH BUGS +.I Touch +will not touch directories. +.PP +The first +.I file +name for +.I chdate +cannot begin with a digit. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chdir.1 b/static/v10/man1/chdir.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8313507 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/chdir.1 @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CHDIR (I)'3/15/72'CHDIR (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME chdir -- change working directory +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS chdir_____ directory +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION directory_________ +becomes the new working directory. +.sp +Because a new process is created to execute each command, +chdir_____ would be ineffective if it were written as a +normal command. It is therefore recognized and executed +by the Shell. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO sh(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "Bad directory" if the directory cannot +be changed to. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/checknews.1 b/static/v10/man1/checknews.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29401198 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/checknews.1 @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +.TH CHECKNEWS 1 +.SH NAME +checknews \- check to see if user has news +.SH SYNOPSIS +.BR checknews " [ " ynqevv " ] [ " +.IR "readnews options" " ] " +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I checknews +reports to the user whether or not he has news. +.TP 10 +.B y +Reports ``There is news'' if the user has news to read. +.TP 10 +.B n +Reports ``No news'' if there isn't any news to read. +.TP 10 +.B q +causes checknews to be quiet. +Instead of printing a message, the exit status indicates news. +A status of 0 means no news, 1 means there is news. +.TP 10 +.B v +alters the +.B y +message to show the name of the first newsgroup containing unread news. +Doubling +.B v +(e.g. +.BR vv ) +will cause an explanation of +.I any +claim of new news, +and is useful if +.B checknews +and +.B readnews +disagree on whether there is news. +.TP 10 +.B e +Executes +.IR readnews (1) +if there is news. +.PP +If there are no options, +.B y +is the default. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 25 +~/.newsrc +/usr/lib/news/active +Active newsgroups +Options and list of previously read articles +.SH SEE ALSO +inews(1), +postnews(1), +readnews(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/checknr.1 b/static/v10/man1/checknr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a590a377 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/checknr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +.TH CHECKNR 1 4/5/80 +.UC 4 +.SH NAME +checknr \- check nroff/troff files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B checknr +[ +.B \-s +] [ +.B \-f +] [ +.BR \-a ".x1.y1.x2.y2. ... .xn.yn" +] [ +.BR \-c ".x1.x2.x3 ... .xn" +] +\fIfile\fP ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Checknr +checks a list of +.IR nroff (1) +or +.IR troff (1) +input files for certain kinds of errors +involving mismatched opening and closing delimiters +and unknown commands. +Delimeters checked are: +.IP (1) +Font changes using \efx ... \efP. +.IP (2) +Size changes using \esx ... \es0. +.IP (3) +Macros that come in open ... close forms, for example, +the .TS and .TE macros which must always come in pairs. +.PP +.I Checknr +knows about the +.IR ms (7) +and +.IR me (7) +macro packages. +.PP +Additional pairs of macros can be added to the list using the +.B \-a +option. +This must be followed by groups of six characters, each group defining +a pair of macros. +The six characters are +a period, +the first macro name, +another period, +and the second macro name. +For example, to define a pair .BS and .ES, use \-\fBa\fP.BS.ES +.PP +The +.B \-c +option defines commands which would otherwise be complained about +as undefined. +.PP +The +.B \-f +option requests +.I checknr +to ignore \ef font changes. +.PP +The +.B \-s +option requests +.I checknr +to ignore \es size changes. +.PP +.I Checknr +is intended to be used on documents that are prepared with +.I checknr +in mind, much the same as +.I lint. +It expects a certain document writing style for \ef and \es commands, +in that each \efx must be terminated with \efP and +each \esx must be terminated with \es0. +While it will work to directly go into the next font or explicitly +specify the original font or point size, +and many existing documents actually do this, +such a practice will produce complaints from +.I checknr. +Since it is probably better to use the \efP and \es0 forms anyway, +you should think of this as a contribution to your document +preparation style. +.SH SEE\ ALSO +nroff(1), troff(1), ms(7), me(7), checkeqn(1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Complaints about unmatched delimiters. +.br +Complaints about unrecognized commands. +.br +Various complaints about the syntax of commands. +.SH AUTHOR +Mark Horton +.SH BUGS +There is no way to define a 1 character macro name using +.B \-a diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chmod.1 b/static/v10/man1/chmod.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c67cfca9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/chmod.1 @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CHMOD (I)'3/15/72'CHMOD (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME chmod -- change mode +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS chmod_____ octal file918 ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION The octal mode +replaces the mode of each of the files. +The mode is constructed from the OR of the +following modes: +.sp +.ti +3 +01 write for non-owner +.ti +3 +02 read for non-owner +.ti +3 +04 write for owner +.ti +3 +10 read for owner +.ti +3 +20 executable +.ti +3 +40 set-UID +.sp +Only the owner of a file may change its mode. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO stat(I), ls(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chown.1 b/static/v10/man1/chown.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9262195e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/chown.1 @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CHOWN (I)'3/15/72'CHOWN (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME chown -- change owner +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS chown_____ owner file918 ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION owner_____ +becomes the new owner of the files. +The owner may be either a decimal UID or +a login name found in the password file. +.sp +Only the owner of a file is allowed to change the owner. +It is illegal to change the owner of a file with the set-user-ID +mode. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /etc/passwd +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO stat(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "Who?" if owner cannot be found, +"file?" if file cannot be found. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/chunk.1 b/static/v10/man1/chunk.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b4c71ba --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/chunk.1 @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 +.TH CHUNK 1 +.SH NAME +chunk \- segment text into phrase units +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B chunk +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +[file ...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Chunk +segments text into phrase units +by beginning a new line at the end of each unit it identifies. +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH USES +This program is useful for reading research, +and it can be used to reformat text files for easier editing. +Additionally, editors may find it easier to edit a text whose microstructure +is typographically clear. +.SH BUGS +Since +.I chunk +runs +.IR deroff (1) +on the input text, +formatting commands (and thus paragraph and heading structures) are lost +in the output. +.PP +.I Chunk +will think unfamiliar abbreviations are the end of a sentence, +and hence the end of the chunk. +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cin.1 b/static/v10/man1/cin.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94542852 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cin.1 @@ -0,0 +1,906 @@ +. \" Copyright 1984,1985,1986,1987,1988,1989,1990 AT&T Bell Laboratories +.TH CIN 1 +.CT 1 prog_c +.SH NAME +cin \- C interpreter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cin +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +[ +.B -- +.I arg ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Cin +interprets a C program comprising the +.I file +arguments as in +.IR cc (1). +The special name +.L - +signifies standard input. +When called with no +.I file +arguments, +.I cin +defaults to +.BR -i . +Arguments +.I arg +are passed to the interpreted program as +.BR cin_argv[1] , +.BR cin_argv[2] , +\&... +and +.BR cin_argc . +.PP +Options +.BI -D name = def , +.BI -D name , +.BI -L name , +.BI -U name , +.BI -I name , +.BI -l x , +.BI -o name , +and +.BI -u name +are as in +.IR cc . +Options +.B -O +and +.B -g +are ignored. +Other options are: +.TP +.BI -0 name +Pass +.I name +to the interpreted program as +.BR cin_argv[0] . +.TP +.BI -C name +Use +.I name +as the interpreter startup file +(by default, the file +.FR $HOME/.cin.c ). +The interpreter startup file is ignored by using +.BR -C/dev/null . +.TP +.BI -F i : o : e +Use file descriptors +.IR i , o , e +as standard input, standard output, and standard error for the +interpreter, as distinct from the interpreted code +(by default, 0, 1, and 2). +.TP +.B -S +Enable interactive mode after run-time errors. +.TP +.BI -V name : n +Declare function +.I name +to have a variable number of arguments, the first +.I n +of which are to be type-checked. +.TP +.B -c +Parse files but do not execute the program. +.TP +.B -i +Enable interactive interpretation. +C statements are evaluated immediately using local and global variables. +Non-void values are printed. +Function, variable, and C pre-processor declarations are stored +in the current `view'. +A function definition must include its return type. +Declarations and statements can appear in any order and +identifiers can be redeclared. +.TP +.B -r +Prohibit multiply-declared global variables. +.TP +.B -s +Do not catch signals using +.IR signal (2) +(by default, +.I cin +catches +.BR SIGBUS , +.BR SIGEMT , +.BR SIGFPE , +.BR SIGILL , +.BR SIGINT , +.BR SIGIOT , +.BR SIGSEGV , +.BR SIGSYS , +.BR SIGTRAP ). +.TP +.B -v +Print the user and system times associated with loading files and executing +the program, as in +.IR time (1). +.TP +.BI + option +Turn off the specified +.IR option . +.PP +The functions and variables listed below are predefined in +.I cin +and +.IR libcin.a . +Their arguments are typed according to these conventions: +.IP +.B char +.BI * func , +.BI * message , +.BI * mod , +.BI * name , +.BI * ref , +.BI * string ; +.br +.B enode +.BI * code ; +.br +.B int +.IB level , +.IB line ; +.br +.B long +.BI (* after )(); +.br +.B unsigned +.B long +.IB addr ; +.br +.B void +.BI (* before )(), +.BI (* routine )(); +.PP +This first group of functions and variables are the most commonly used. +To use them load +.F libcin.a +and include +.FR cin.h . +.PP +.HP +.BI "int cin_break(" name , +.IB line , +.IB string ) +.br +If +.I string +is +.BR "(char *)0" , +place a +.B cin_system +in file +.I name +before line number +.IR line . +Otherwise, +place the C-language statement specified by +.I string +in file +.I name +before line number +.IR line . +Thus, +.IR string +is read and evaluated +within the prevailing context of the function +without stopping execution. +Return 0 if line number +.I line +cannot be found in file +.IR name . +.TP +.BI "int cin_dump(" name ) +Create an +.F a.out +and place it in the file +.IR name . +Return 0 if +.I name +cannot be created. +.TP +.BI "void cin_info(" string ) +Where +.I string +is: +.RS +.TP +.B breakpoint +Print +.IR cin 's +.BR cin_break s +and +.BR cin_stopin s. +.TP +.B log +Print +.IR cin 's +interactive mode log file name. +.TP +.B memory +Print +.IR cin 's +memory usage. +.TP +.B spy +Print +.IR cin 's +spies. +.TP +.B symboltable +Print +.IR cin 's +symbol table. +.TP +.B undefined +Print +.IR cin 's +undefined variables. +.TP +.B usage +Print +.IR cin 's +usage message. +.TP +.B version +Print +.IR cin 's +version number. +.TP +.B view +List the available views. +The current view is starred +.RB ( * ). +.TP +.B where +Print a trace of function calls. +.TP +.B wrapper +Print +.IR cin 's +wrappers. +.RE +.TP +.BI "int cin_load(" string ) +Evaluate +.I string +as invocation arguments of +.IR cin . +Return 0 if arguments are not valid. +.TP +.BI "int cin_log(" name ) +.IR mv (1) +the interactive mode session log to file +.IR name . +Return 0 if +.I name +cannot be +.IR mv ed. +.TP +.BI "void cin_make(" string ) +If +.I string +is +.BR "(char *)0" , +then re-load any file that is out of date. +Otherwise, +run +.BR $MAKE , +passing +.I string +as arguments, and scan +its standard output for lines that begin with pound sign +.RB ( # ). +Characters following the pound sign are executed as +a C-language statement. +.HP +.BI "int cin_pp(" func , +.IB level ) +.br +Print the C-language for the function +.IR func . +Where +.I level +is: +.RS +.TP +.B 0 +Print declaration. +.TP +.B 1 +Print declaration and body. +.PP +Return 0 if +.I func +cannot be found. +.RE +.TP +.B "void cin_quit()" +Flush output and exit +.IR cin . +If all else fails, +use +.IR _exit(2) . +.TP +.B "int cin_reset()" +Preserve function definitions, +zero bss variables, +and restore initialized data variables to their original values. +Return 0 if +state cannot be reset. +.TP +.B "void cin_return()" +Return from a call to +.BR cin_system . +.TP +.BI "void cin_run(" string ) +Set +.BR cin_argv[1] , +.BR cin_argv[2] , +\&... +and +.B cin_argc +from +.I string +and then +.BR "main(cin_argc, cin_argv)" . +.HP +.BI "int cin_spy(" func , +.IB name , +.IB mod , +.IB ref ) +.br +Trace variable references and modifications. +If +.I mod +is not +.BR "(char *)0" , +place the C-language statement specified by +.I mod +after the variable +.I name +is modified in the function +.IR func . +If +.I ref +is not +.BR "(char *)0" , +place the C-language statement specified by +.I ref +before the variable +.I name +is referenced in the function +.IR func . +If function value +.I func +is +.BR "(char *)0" , +search all functions. +Return 0 if +.I name +cannot be found in +.IR func . +.TP +.B "void cin_step()" +Step over function calls +to the next C-language statement in the current or previous function. +.TP +.B "void cin_stepin()" +Step into any function to the next C-language statement. +.TP +.B "void cin_stepout()" +Step out of the current function back to the next C-language statement +in the previous function. +.HP +.BI "int cin_stopin(" func , +.IB string ) +.br +If +.I string +is +.BR "(char *)0" , +place a +.B cin_system +before the first +executable line in the function +.IR func , +either in the current view or wherever +.I func +can be found. +Otherwise, +place the C-language statement specified by +.I string +before the first +executable line in the function +.IR func , +either in the current view or wherever it can be found. +Thus, +.IR string +is read and evaluated +within the prevailing context of the function +without stopping execution. +Return 0 if function +.I func +cannot be found. +.TP +.BI "char *cin_sync(" string ) +Where +.I string +is: +.RS +.TP +.B filename +Return the non-interactive C source file name being executed. +.TP +.B lineno +Return the non-interactive C source line number being executed. +.RE +.TP +.B "void cin_system()" +Start a +.BR cin_read - cin_eval - cin_print +loop. +.HP +.BI "int cin_unbreak(" name , +.IB line , +.IB string ) +.br +Clear a +.B cin_break +or a +.B cin_stopin +in file +.I name +before line number +.I line +with string +.IR string . +Return 0 if +.B cin_break +or +.B cin_stopin +cannot be cleared. +.TP +.BI "int cin_unload(" name ) +Unload the object file +.IR name . +Return 0 if +.I name +cannot be unloaded. +.HP +.BI "int cin_unspy(" func , +.IB name , +.IB mod , +.IB ref ) +.br +Remove the C-language statement specified by +.I mod +after the variable +.I name +is modified, +and the C-language statement specified by +.I ref +before the variable +.I name +is referenced in the function +.IR func . +Return 0 if spy cannot be cleared. +.HP +.BI "int cin_unstopin(" func , +.IB string ) +.br +Clear a +.B cin_stopin +or +.B cin_break +at the first +executable line in the function +.I func +with string +.I string +in either the current view or wherever +.I func +can be found. +Return 0 if the +.B cin_stopin +or +.B cin_break +cannot be cleared. +.HP +.BI "int cin_unwrapper(" func , +.IB before , +.IB after ) +.br +Remove the call of function +.I before +before the function +.I func +is called. +Remove the call of function +.I after +after the function +.I func +is called. +Return 0 if +.I func +cannot be found. +.TP +.BI "int cin_view(" name ) +Change the current view to +.IR name . +Return 0 if the view cannot be found. +.HP +.BI "int cin_wrapper(" func , +.IB before , +.IB after ) +.br +If +.I before +is not +.BR "(void (*)())0" , +call the function +.I before +with the arguments of function +.I func +before the function +.I func +is called. +If +.I after +is not +.BR "(long (*)())0" , +call the function +.I after +with the argument of the return value of function +.I func +after the function +.I func +is called. +The return value of function +.I after +is substituted for the return value of function +.IR func . +Return 0 if +.I name +cannot be found either in the current view or any other view. +.TP +.B "extern int cin_argc" +The number of elements passed to the interpreted program. +.TP +.B "extern char **cin_argv" +An array of the arguments passed to the interpreted program. +.TP +.B "extern char *cin_filename" +The current C source file name being executed. +.TP +.B "extern int cin_level" +The number of nested calls to +.BR cin_system . +.TP +.B "extern char *cin_libpath" +A colon +.RB ( : ) +-separated list of libraries to search for undefined routines +(by default, +the libraries specified on the command line and +.FR -lc ). +.TP +.B "extern int cin_lineno" +The current C source line number being executed. +.TP +.B "extern char *cin_prompt" +The interactive mode prompt (by default, +the string +.RB `` cin> " '')." +.PP +These are some of the less frequently used functions and variables in +.IR cin . +They are primarily used by +.I cin +library or language developers. +.TP +.BI "enode *cin_compile(" code ) +Analyze +.I code +and return an optimized program. +Return +.B "(enode *)0" +if +.I code +cannot be compiled. +.TP +.BI "int cin_epp(" func ) +Print the +.BR enode s +for function +.IR func . +Return 0 if +.I func +cannot be found. +.TP +.BI "enode *cin_eprint(" code ) +Print the +.I code +as +.BR enode s. +Return the argument. +.HP +.BI "char *cin_error_code_set(" message , +.IB string ) +.br +Where +.I message +is: +.RS +.TP +.B dynamic error +When +.I cin +detects +a divide by zero, +a modulus by zero, +a null pointer access, +or +an abnormal signal +execute the C-language statement specified by +.IR string . +.TP +.B undefined function +When +.I cin +detects an undefined function execute the C-language statement specified by +.IR string . +.TP +.B undefined symbol +When +.I cin +detects +an undefined symbol execute the C-language statement specified by +.IR string . +.PP +If +.I string +is +.BR "(char *)0" , +execute +.BR cin_system() . +Return the old +.I string +for +.IR message . +.RE +.TP +.BI "enode *cin_eval(" code ) +Execute the +.I code +as if it were present in the program where +.B cin_eval +is called. +Return the resulting program. +.TP +.BI "ident *cin_find_ident(" name ) +If +.I name +is not +.BR "(char *)0" , +return the identifier for the variable +.I name +either in the current view or wherever +.I name +can be found. +If +.I name +is +.BR "(char *)0" , +return the identifier for the previous non- +.B "(char *)0" +value of the variable +.I name +in the next view where +.I name +can be found. +Return +.B "(ident *)0" +if +.I name +cannot be found. +.TP +.BI "struct nlist *cin_find_nlist(" addr ) +Return the loader symbol table entry for the external address +.IR addr . +Return +.B "(struct nlist *)0" +if +.I addr +cannot be found. +.HP +.BI "void (*cin_info_set())(" string , +.IB routine ) +.br +Inform +.B cin_info +that it should call +.I routine +when it is passed +.IR string . +Return the old +.I routine +for +.IR string . +.TP +.BI "char *cin_ltof(" line ) +Return the function name at line number +.I line +in the current view. +Return +.B "(char *)0" +if a function cannot be found for +.IR line . +.TP +.BI "void cin_pop(" level ) +Replace +.I level +interpreted function calls from the stack with +.BR cin_system . +.HP +.BI "enode *cin_print(" code , +.IB level ) +.br +Print the +.I code +as C-language code. +Where +.I level +is: +.RS +.TP +.B 0 +Print declaration. +.TP +.B 1 +Print declaration and body. +.PP +Return the +.I code +argument. +.RE +.TP +.BI "enode *cin_read(" string ) +Read +.I string +and return a program. +Return +.B "(enode *)0" +if +.I string +cannot be parsed. +.TP +.BI "char *cin_slashify(" string ) +Return a pointer to storage obtained from +.IR malloc (3) +and there create a character array from +.I string +by translating +backspace, +form feed, +newline, +carriage return, +horizontal tab, +vertical tab, +backslash, +single quote, +and double quote +into +.BR \eb , +.BR \ef , +.BR \en , +.BR \er , +.BR \et , +.BR \ev , +.BR \e\e , +.BR \e' , +and +.B \e" +respectively. +Other non-printable characters are translated into +.BI \e ddd +octal notation. +.TP +.B "extern int cin_err_fd" +.IR Cin 's +standard error file descriptor. +.TP +.B "extern int cin_in_fd" +.IR Cin 's +standard input file descriptor. +.TP +.B "extern int cin_out_fd" +.IR Cin 's +standard output file descriptor. +.TP +.B "extern stackelem *cin_stack" +The trace of function calls. +.TP +.B "extern view *cin_views" +The list of available views. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +The world's shortest ``Hello world'' program. +.EX +cin> printf("Hello world\en"); +Hello world +(int)12 +.EE +.TP +Setting breakpoints and tracing function calls. +.EX +$ cin -lcin +cin> int f(x) { return x <= 1 ? 1 : x * f(x - 1); } +extern int f(); +cin> cin_stopin("f", (char*)0); +/tmp/cin006795: 1: f: set breakpoint: (char *)0 +(int)1 +cin> f(2); +/tmp/int006795: 1: f: stopped execution: +cin> cin_return(); +/tmp/int006795: 1: f: stopped execution: +cin> (void)cin_info("where"); +/tmp/cin006795: 5: cin_system: info: where: () +/tmp/cin006795: 1: f: info: where: (x = (int)1) +/tmp/cin006795: 1: f: info: where: (x = (int)2) +/tmp/cin006795: 3: cin_system: info: where: () +cin> x; +(int)1 +cin> cin_return(); +(int)2 +cin> cin_quit(); +$ +.EE +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/include/cin.h +.TP +.F /tmp/cin* +default interactive log +.TP +.F /usr/include/cin.h +various function and variable declarations +.TP +.F /usr/lib/libcin.a +various predefined functions +.TP +.F $HOME/.cin.c +interpreter startup file +.HP +other files as in +.IR cc (1) +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.I "Cin User Manual" +.br +.I "Cin Reference Manual" +.br +B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, +.IR "The C Programming Language" , +Prentice-Hall, +1978 +.br +.IR lint (1), +.IR ar (1), +.IR cc (1) +.SH BUGS +The addresses of +.IR etext , +.IR edata , +and +.I end +are not meaningful with incrementally loaded code. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cite.1 b/static/v10/man1/cite.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d8dc908 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cite.1 @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +.TH CITE 1 +.CT 1 writing_troff +.SH NAME +cite \- process citations in a document +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cite +[ +.B -s +] +[ +.B -u +] +[ +.I files +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Cite +is a +.IR troff (1) +preprocessor for forward and backward references. +It copies the +.I files +or the standard input to standard output, +observing lines of the forms +.IP +\f5\&.CD "\fIkey\f5" "\fIdefinition\f5" +.br +\&.CU "\fIkey\f5"\fItext +.EE +.LP +Each +.B .CD +line is remembered. +A later +.B .CU +with the same +.I key +will be replaced by the +.I definition +for that key; the +.I text +will be copied verbatim. +If no definition is yet available for a +.B .CU +reference, the key will be replaced by +.BR ZZ . +.PP +At the location of each +.B .CD +command, +.I cite +causes +.I troff +to send the line (with macro substitutions) +to the standard error file. +The resulting definitions may be included at the beginning of another +.I cite-troff +run, effectively eliminating forward references. +Unfortunately, the definition file +may contain obsolete definitions (included +from a previous run) plus other +.I troff +messages. +These should be deleted using option +.BR -s . +.PP +The options are +.TP +.B -s +Place only the latest definitions +on the standard output; shunt +.RI non -cite +data to standard error. +.TP +.B -u +Place on standard error a list of undefined or unused citations. +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +cite file.defs file | troff -ms 2>temp.defs >/dev/null +cite -s temp.defs >file.defs +cite file.defs file | troff -ms 2>temp.defs | lp +.EE +.br +.ns +.IP +Run +.I cite-troff +to collect updated definitions in +.BR temp.defs . +.br +Eliminate old definitions, putting updates back in +.BR file.defs . +.br +Run +.IR cite-troff +again, using latest definitions. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR troff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/clear.1 b/static/v10/man1/clear.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e3f6f21 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/clear.1 @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +.TH CLEAR 1 +.SH NAME +clear \- clear terminal screen +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B clear +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Clear +clears the screen of the terminal on its standard output. +It depends upon the environment variable TERM to +know how to do it. +.SH FILES +.F /etc/termcap +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR term (7) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cmp.1 b/static/v10/man1/cmp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..05113c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cmp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CMP (I)'1/15/73'CMP (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME cmp -- compare two files +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS cmp___ file918 file928 +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION The two files are +compared for identical contents. +Discrepancies are noted +by giving the offset and the differing words, +all in octal. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO proof(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS Messages +are given for inability to open either argument, premature +EOF on either argument, and incorrect usage. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS If +the shorter of the two files is of odd length, +cmp acts as if a null byte had been appended to it. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/column.1 b/static/v10/man1/column.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..316a062f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/column.1 @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ +.TH COLUMN 1 +.CT 1 files writing_output +.SH NAME +col, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, mc, fold, expand \- column alignment +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B col +[ +.B -bfx +] +.PP +.B 2 +[ +.I file +] +.PP +.B mc +[ +.B - +] +[ +.BI - N +] +[ +.B -t +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B fold +[ +.BI - N +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B expand +[ +.BI - stops +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +These programs rearrange files for appearance's sake. +All read the standard input and write the standard output. +Some optionally read from files instead. +.PP +.I Col +overlays lines to expunge reverse line feeds +(ESC-7) +and half line feeds (ESC-9 and ESC-8) +as produced by +.I nroff +for .2C in +.IR ms (6) +and for +.IR tbl (1). +It normally emits only full line feeds; +option +.B -f +(fine) allows half line feeds too. +Option +.B -b +removes backspaces, printing just one of each pile of overstruck +characters. +.I Col +normally converts white space to tabs; +option +.B -x +overrides this feature. +Other escaped characters and non-printing characters, except for +SO and SI, are ignored. +.PP +.I Col +should not be used for printing on an HP ThinkJet printer with +.I think +.RI ( thinkblt (9.1)), +which performs the +.I col +function itself. +.PP +Commands +.I "2, 3, 4, 5, 6" +convert their input to 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-, or 6-column form, +with consecutive input lines arranged across each row. +.PP +.I Fold +inserts newlines after each +.I N +characters (default +.IR n =80, +or +.IR mux (9.1) +window size) +of long lines. +.PP +.I Mc +splits the input into as many columns as will fit in +.I N +print positions (default +.IR N =80). +Under option +.B - +each input line ending in a colon +.L : +is printed separately (see example). +On output, multiple spaces are converted to tabs; this +is suppressed by option +.BR -t . +.PP +.I Expand +replaces tabs by spaces. +The optional +.I stops +argument is a comma-separated list of tab stops, counted from 0; +default is every 8 columns. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +tbl file | nroff -ms | col | hp +Format some tables for printing on typewriters; +use +.I col +to remove reverse line feeds and +.I hp +(see +.IR ul (1)) +to do underlining, etc., on an HP terminal. +.TP +.L +ls directory1 directory2 | mc - +List files in multiple columns, separated by directory. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR pr (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Col +can't back up more than 128 lines or +handle more than 800 characters per line, +and understands +.L VT +(013) as reverse line feed. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/comm.1 b/static/v10/man1/comm.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ce8bb63 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/comm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +.th COMM I 8/21/73 +.sh NAME +comm \*- print lines common to two files +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd comm +[ +.bd \*- +[ +.bd 123 +] +] file1 file2 +[ +file3 +] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Comm +reads +.it file1 +and +.it file2, +which should be in sort, +and produces a three column output: lines only in +.it file1; +lines only in +.it file2; +and lines in both files. +.s3 +If +.it file3 +is given, the output will be placed there; +otherwise it will be written on the standard output. +.s3 +Flags 1, 2, or 3 suppress printing of the corresponding +column. +Thus +.bd comm +.bd \*-12 +prints only the lines common to the two files; +.bd comm +.bd \*-23 +prints only lines in the first file but not in the second; +.bd comm +.bd \*-123 +is a no-op. +.s3 +.sh "SEE ALSO" +uniq(\|I\|), proof(\|I\|), cmp(\|I\|) +.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/compress.1 b/static/v10/man1/compress.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bebae189 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/compress.1 @@ -0,0 +1,238 @@ +.PU +.TH COMPRESS 1 local +.SH NAME +compress, uncompress, zcat \- compress and expand data +.SH SYNOPSIS +.ll +8 +.B compress +[ +.B \-f +] [ +.B \-v +] [ +.B \-c +] [ +.B \-V +] [ +.B \-b +.I bits +] [ +.I "name \&..." +] +.ll -8 +.br +.B uncompress +[ +.B \-f +] [ +.B \-v +] [ +.B \-c +] [ +.B \-V +] [ +.I "name \&..." +] +.br +.B zcat +[ +.B \-V +] [ +.I "name \&..." +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Compress +reduces the size of the named files using adaptive Lempel-Ziv coding. +Whenever possible, +each file is replaced by one with the extension +.B "\&.Z," +while keeping the same ownership modes, access and modification times. +If no files are specified, the standard input is compressed to the +standard output. +Compressed files can be restored to their original form using +.I uncompress +or +.I zcat. +.PP +The +.B \-f +option will force compression of +.I name. +This is useful for compressing an entire directory, +even if some of the files do not actually shrink. +If +.B \-f +is not given and +.I compress +is run in the foreground, +the user is prompted as to whether an existing file should be overwritten. +.PP +The +.B \-c +option makes +.I compress/uncompress +write to the standard output; no files are changed. +The nondestructive behavior of +.I zcat +is identical to that of +.I uncompress +.B \-c. +.PP +.I Compress +uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized in +"A Technique for High Performance Data Compression", +Terry A. Welch, +.I "IEEE Computer," +vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984), pp. 8-19. +Common substrings in the file are first replaced by 9-bit codes 257 and up. +When code 512 is reached, the algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and +continues to use more bits until the +limit specified by the +.B \-b +flag is reached (default 16). +.I Bits +must be between 9 and 16. The default can be changed in the source to allow +.I compress +to be run on a smaller machine. +.PP +After the +.I bits +limit is attained, +.I compress +periodically checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, +.I compress +continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, +if the compression ratio decreases, +.I compress +discards the table of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows +the algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file. +.PP +Note that the +.B \-b +flag is omitted for +.I uncompress, +since the +.I bits +parameter specified during compression +is encoded within the output, along with +a magic number to ensure that neither decompression of random data nor +recompression of compressed data is attempted. +.PP +.ne 8 +The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the +input, the number of +.I bits +per code, and the distribution of common substrings. +Typically, text such as source code or English +is reduced by 50\-60%. +Compression is generally much better than that achieved by +Huffman coding (as used in +.IR pack ), +or adaptive Huffman coding +.RI ( compact ), +and takes less time to compute. +.PP +Under the +.B \-v +option, +a message is printed yielding the percentage of +reduction for each file compressed. +.PP +If the +.B \-V +option is specified, the current version and compile options are printed on +stderr. +.PP +Exit status is normally 0; +if the last file is larger after (attempted) compression, the status is 2; +if an error occurs, exit status is 1. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +pack(1), compact(1) +.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" +Usage: compress [\-dfvcV] [\-b maxbits] [file ...] +.in +8 +Invalid options were specified on the command line. +.in -8 +Missing maxbits +.in +8 +Maxbits must follow +.BR \-b \. +.in -8 +.IR file : +not in compressed format +.in +8 +The file specified to +.I uncompress +has not been compressed. +.in -8 +.IR file : +compressed with +.I xx +bits, can only handle +.I yy +bits +.in +8 +.I File +was compressed by a program that could deal with +more +.I bits +than the compress code on this machine. +Recompress the file with smaller +.IR bits \. +.in -8 +.IR file : +already has .Z suffix -- no change +.in +8 +The file is assumed to be already compressed. +Rename the file and try again. +.in -8 +.IR file : +filename too long to tack on .Z +.in +8 +The file cannot be compressed because its name is longer than +12 characters. +Rename and try again. +This message does not occur on BSD systems. +.in -8 +.I file +already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)? +.in +8 +Respond "y" if you want the output file to be replaced; "n" if not. +.in -8 +uncompress: corrupt input +.in +8 +A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means that the input file has +been corrupted. +.in -8 +Compression: +.I "xx.xx%" +.in +8 +Percentage of the input saved by compression. +(Relevant only for +.BR \-v \.) +.in -8 +-- not a regular file: unchanged +.in +8 +When the input file is not a regular file, +(e.g. a directory), it is +left unaltered. +.in -8 +-- has +.I xx +other links: unchanged +.in +8 +The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See +.IR ln "(1)" +for more information. +.in -8 +-- file unchanged +.in +8 +No savings is achieved by +compression. The input remains virgin. +.in -8 +.SH "BUGS" +Although compressed files are compatible between machines with large memory, +.BR \-b \12 +should be used for file transfer to architectures with +a small process data space (64KB or less, as exhibited by the DEC PDP +series, the Intel 80286, etc.) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 b/static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3514120f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/compressdir.1 @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +.PU +.TH COMPRESSDIR 1 local +.SH NAME +compressdir, uncompressdir \- compress and uncompress directories of files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.ll +8 +.B compressdir +[ flags ] [ +.I "directory \&..." +] +.ll -8 +.br +.B uncompressdir +[ flags ] [ +.I "directory \&..." +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +Recursively decends each specified directory and compresses each +file. +Each file is replaced by a file with the extension +.B "\&.Z," +but only if the file got smaller. +If no directories are specified, +the compression is applied to all files starting with the current directory. +Compressed files can be restored to their original form by running +.I uncompressdir +on the directories. +.PP +The +.I flags +specified are passed to the compress(1) program. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +compress(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/con.1 b/static/v10/man1/con.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8d7dfa66 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/con.1 @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +.TH CON 1 +.CT 1 comm_mach +.SH NAME +con, rx \- remote login and execution +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B con +[ +.B -l +] +.I machine +.PP +.B rx +[ +.B -n +] +.I machine +[ +.I command-word ... +] +.PP +.BI /usr/bin/m/ machine +[ +.I command-word ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Con +connects to the computer whose network address is +.I machine +and logs in if possible. +Standard input and output go to the local machine. +Option +.B -l +prevents automatic login; a normal login dialog ensues. +.PP +The quit signal (control-\e) is a local escape. +It prompts with the local machine name and +.BR >> . +Legitimate responses to the prompt are +.TP \w'\fL!\fIcommand\ \ 'u +.B i +Send a quit [sic] signal to the remote machine. +.PD0 +.TP +.BR q , " x" ", or " . +Exit. +.TP +.B b +Send a break. +.TP +.BI ! command +Execute +.I command +locally. +.PD +.PP +.I Rx +executes one shell command +on the remote machine as if logged in there, +but with local standard input and output. +Unquoted shell metacharacters in the command +are interpreted +locally, quoted ones remotely. +The assignment +.B REXEC=1 +appears in the remote environment. +With no arguments, +.I rx +just diagnoses availability. +Option +.B -n +ignores sporadic end-of-file indications on a +sick network. +.PP +Network addresses for both +.I con +and +.I rx +have the form +.IB network ! host +or simply +.I host. +Supported networks are +.L dk +(Datakit) and +.L tcp +(TCP/IP, usually Ethernet). +.PP +Directory +.F /usr/bin/m +contains machine names as commands: +.BI /usr/bin/m/ machine +with no argument runs an appropriate flavor of +.I con +for the named +.I machine. +If given arguments, +.BI /usr/bin/m/ machine +runs +.I rx +with those arguments. +If +.F /usr/bin/m +is in the +.IR sh (1) +search path, +the names become commands for navigating the +local cluster. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +rx overthere cat file1 >file2 +Copy remote +.I file1 +to local +.IR file2 . +.TP +.L +rx overthere cat file1 ">file2" +Copy remote +.I file1 +to remote +.IR file2. +.TP +.L +eqn paper | rx pipe troff -ms | rx arend lp +Parallel processing: +do each stage of a pipeline on a different machine. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/ipc/lib/auth* +.TP +.F /usr/ipc/lib/auth* +authentication +.TP +.F /usr/ipc/lib/serv* +servers +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR push (1), +.IR dcon (1), +.IR cu (1), +.IR dkmgr (8), +.IR svcmgr (8), +.IR tcpmgr (8), +.IR ipc (3) +.br +D. L. Presotto, +`Interprocess Communication in the Eighth Edition +.SM UNIX +System', +this manual, Volume\ 2 +.SH BUGS +The remote standard error and standard output are combined +and go inseparably to the local standard output. +.br +Under +.I rx, +a program +that should behave specially towards terminals may not: +.IR sh (1) +will not prompt, +.IR vi (1) +will not manage the screen, etc. +.I Nrx +(see +.IR dcon (1)) +avoids this trouble, but has others of its own. +.br +.I Con +and +.I rx +may not guess the right kind of connection. +In case of trouble, try the programs in +.IR dcon (1). +.br +The names in +.F /usr/bin/m +are conventions, not actual network addresses. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cospan.1 b/static/v10/man1/cospan.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d672e447 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cospan.1 @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ +.TH COSPAN 1 +.CT 1 prog_other +.SH NAME +cospan, psr \- coordination-specification analyzer +and pretty-printer +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cospan +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file +.PP +.B psr +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Cospan +analyzes the behavior of coordinating systems. +Three types of input +.I file +are distinguished by suffix: +.TP +.B .sr +The normal case. +The file contains +.SM S/R +specifications as described in the reference, possibly including +.IR cpp (8) +commands, to be compiled into +.TP +.B .c +C code, which is compiled and linked into +.TP +.B .an +executable analysis program. +.PP +The options are +.TP +.BI -D name = value +.PD0 +.TP +.BI -D name +.TP +.BI -U name +.TP +.BI -I directory +Same as in +.IR cc (1). +.PD +.TP +.B -v +Produce verbose syntax error messages. +.TP +.B -p +Suppress file-name/line-number information +for embedded C code. +.TP +.B -i +Produce an implementation version of +the C code. +.TP +.B -m +Produce a merged version of +the C code. +.TP +.B -n +Compile no transition checks (except deadlocks). +By default, the analysis gives a warning on the first stability violation +and aborts on non-semi-deterministic resolutions. +.TP +.B -b +Use C built-in (machine-dependent) +integer division operations. +By default, an +.SM S/R +integer division +.IB i / j +results in the greatest integer not higher then the +mathematical quotient, and the remainder operation +.IB i " mod " j +yields a result in the range +.RI 0... j \-1. +.TP +.BI -C opt +Pass option +.BI - opt +to the C compiler. +.TP +.BI -h size +Set the state hash table size to the next prime after +.I size ; +default is 32693. +.TP +.BI -H size +Similar to +.BI \-h size, +except that states which produce hash collisions are ignored. +.TP +.BI -t secs +Abort analysis after +the specified number of seconds. +.TP +.BI -V s +Produce verbose analysis output messages. +The string +.I s, +by default +.LR awel , +specifies message types: +.I advice, warning, error, +or +.I list. +.TP +.B -r +Restart previously aborted analysis. +Recovery is possible in cases of hangups, interrupts, +software termination signals (due to a kill command), +timer alarms, no-space conditions, and aborts due to +.B -c +or +.B -L +requests. +.TP +.B -d +Abort on deadlocks. +By default, the analysis gives a warning on the first deadlock and reports +the number of deadlocks in the analysis summary. +.TP +.B -s +Abort on stability failures. +.TP +.B -l +List analysis on standard output. +.TP +.BI -T +Time each translation and execution step. +.PD0 +.TP +.BI -L number,number +List analysis, reporting states +in the given range, and abort after searching the upper bound. +.TP +.BI -c number +Check each back-edge in the +component identified by the given +.I number +and abort analysis. +.PP +.TP +.BI CC= name +Use an alternate C compiler; default is +.BR CC=cc . +.PD +.PP +The order of the arguments is arbitrary, and several options may +be combined to a single argument, provided that option +values are terminated by white space. +Options can be preset by defining the environment variable +.BR COSPANOPT . +.PP +.I Psr +is a pretty-printer for +.SM S/R +specifications. +It places +.IR troff (1) +or +.I nroff +output on the standard output. +.PP +The options, which may be reset between +.I files, +are: +.TP +.B -d +Show current date in page footer. +.TP +.B -m +show file modification time in footer (default). +.TP +.BI -n N +Number every +.IR N th +line; default is +.BR -n0, +no numbering. +.TP +.BI -s N +Set type size +to +.I N +points, vertical spacing to +.IR N /60 +inch, and tab stops every +.IR N /20 +inch. +.TP +.BI -w N +Set the page width +to +.IR N +(in +.I troff +notation). +.PD0 +.TP +.BI -f F +Use the +.I troff +font +.I F +and its italic, bold, and bold-italic counterparts. +Known fonts are +Bembo, CW, Euro, Futura, H, Hcond, Memphis, Optima, PA, R. +.TP +.BI -. request +Issue a +.I troff +request before printing the next +.IR file . +Multiple requests may be given. +.TP +.BI -T name +As in +.I troff. +Applies to all +.IR files . +If +.I name +is omitted, +.I troff +input is written on standard output. +.PD +.PP +.I Psr +sets the escape character to +.SM BEL. +The \e character is copied without +interpretation, to allow printing of embedded C code. +The macro +.B .SO +may be used to include +.I troff +text that uses the standard +escape character. +.PP +The strings +.BI DT , +.BI L , +and +.B R +contain today's date, the left-hand, and the right-hand side +of the page header, respectively. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.B COSPANOPT=-TlImyincludedir cospan myfile.sr +equivalent to +.BR "cospan -T -l -Imyincludedir myfile.sr" . +.TP +.B psr -.ll6.5i -.lt6.5i myfile.sr +equivalent to +.BR "psr -w6.5i myfile.sr +.SH "FILES" +.TF /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.psr +.TP +.F *.R +recovery data +.PD0 +.TP +.F *.T +error track +.TP +.F *.L +list output ( +.B -L +option) +.TP +.F *.M +merging data +.TP +.F /tmp/srtm?????? +temporary file +.TP +.F /usr/lib/sr +S/R compiler +.TP +.F /usr/lib/sr_D +S/R verbose compiler +.TP +.F /usr/include/crank.h +header file +.TP +.F /usr/include/crunch.h +implementation header file +.TP +.F /usr/libsr.a +analysis object library +.TP +.F /usr/lib/pretty +.I troff +preprocessor +.TP +.F /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.psr +.I troff +macros +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +Z. Har'El and R. P. Kurshan, +.I +COSPAN User's Guide, +11211-871009-21TM, AT&T Bell Laboratories. +.IR spin (1), +.IR d202 (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/courier.1 b/static/v10/man1/courier.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..598707e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/courier.1 @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +.TH COURIER 1 +.SH NAME +courier \- remote procedure call compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B courier +[ +.B \-x +] +.I specfile +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Courier +compiles the Mesa-like specification language +associated with the Courier remote procedure call protocol. +.SH FILES +.ta \w'prog_server.c 'u +prog.cr Courier specification file for \fIprog\fR. +.PP +The following files are generated by courier from the above: +.LP +prog.h definitions and typedefs +.br +prog_stubs.c mappings between C and Courier +.br +prog_server.c server routines +.br +prog_client.c client routines +.SH BUGS +Note that program names are restricted to 5 characters to keep +generated filenames within the 14 character limit. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +Eric C. Cooper, +`Writing Distributed Programs with Courier' +.br +`Courier: The Remote Procedure Call Protocol,' +Xerox System Integration Standard 038112, +December 1981. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cp.1 b/static/v10/man1/cp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1f61d95 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CP (I)'1/24/73'CP (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME cp -- copy +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS cp__ file918 file928 +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION The +first file is copied onto the second. +The mode and owner of the target file +are preserved if it already +existed; the mode of the source file +is used otherwise. +.sp +If file928 is a directory, then the target +file is a file in that directory with the file-name +of file918. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO cat(I), pr(I), mv(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS Error returns are +checked at every system call, and +appropriate diagnostics are produced. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS Copying +a file onto itself destroys its contents. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cpio.1 b/static/v10/man1/cpio.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b4129266 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cpio.1 @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +.TH CPIO 1 +.CT 1 comm_users +.SH NAME +cpio \- copy file archives in and out +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cpio +.BI -o +[ +.I acBv +] +.PP +.B cpio +.BI -i +[ +.I BcdmrtuvfsSb6 +] +[ +.I pattern ... +] +.PP +.B cpio +.BI -p +[ +.I adlmruv +] +.I directory +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B Cpio -o +(copy out) +reads the standard input to obtain a list of path names +and copies those files onto the +standard output +together with path name and status information. +.PP +.B Cpio -i +(copy in) +extracts files from the +standard input +which is assumed to be the product of a previous +.BR "cpio -o" . +Only files with names that match the +.I patterns +are selected. +.I Patterns +are given in the name-generating notation of +.IR sh (1); +the default is +.BR * +(all files). +The extracted files are conditionally created and copied +into the current directory tree +based upon the options described below. +File ownership is preserved if possible. +.PP +.B Cpio -p +(pass) reads from the standard input a list of path names +of files to copy +into the destination +.IR directory. +.PP +The options are: +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B a +Reset access times of input files after they have been copied. +.TP +.B B +Input/output is to be blocked 5,120 bytes to the record +(does not apply to the +.I pass\^ +option; meaningful only with data directed to or from +.FR /dev/rmt? ). +.TP +.B d +.I Directories\^ +are to be created as needed. +.TP +.B c +Write header +information in +.SM ASCII +character form for portability. +.TP +.B r +Interactively rename +files. +An empty name (newline only) causes a file to be skipped. +.TP +.B t +Print a table of contents +of the input. +No files are created. +.TP +.B u +Copy unconditionally +(normally an older file will not overwrite a newer file). +.TP +.B v +(Verbose) +List file +names; +.B -vt +looks like +.BR "ls -l" . +.TP +.B l +Whenever possible, link files rather than copying them. +Usable only with +the +.B -p +option. +.TP +.B m +Retain previous file modification time. +This option is ineffective on directories that are being copied. +.TP +.B f +Copy in all files except those in +.I patterns.\^ +.TP +.B s +Swap bytes. +Use only with the +.B -i +option. +.TP +.B S +Swap halfwords. +Use only with the +.B -i +option. +.TP +.B b +Swap both bytes and halfwords. +Use only with the +.B -i +option. +.TP +.B 6 +Process an old (i.e., +.SM UNIX Sixth\^ +Edition format) +file. +Only useful with +.B -i +(copy in). +.PD +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +ls | cpio -oc >/dev/mt1 +Copy the contents of the current directory to a tape. +.PP +.EX +mkdir newdir +cd olddir +find . -print | cpio -pd ../newdir +.EE +.ns +.IP +Reproduce a directory hierarchy; +.B newdir +must exist. +.PD +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR ar (1), +.IR bundle (1), +.IR tar (1), +.IR find (1), +.IR cpio (5), +.IR cp (1) +.SH BUGS +Path names are restricted to 128 characters. +.br +Does not know about symbolic links. +.br +If there are too many unique linked files, +linking information is lost. +.br +Only the super-user can copy special files. +.br +The archive size is reported in archaic `blocks' of 512 bytes. +.\" @(#)cpio.1 5.2 of 5/18/82 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cq.1 b/static/v10/man1/cq.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18561305 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cq.1 @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +Section s22 returned 0. +Decimal and octal/hex constants sometimes give + different results when assigned to longs. +Decimal and octal/hex constants sometimes give + different results when assigned to longs. +Decimal and octal/hex constants sometimes give + different results when assigned to longs. +Section s241 returned 0. +Section s243 returned 0. +Section s244 returned 0. +Section s25 returned 0. + 8 bits in chars. + 32 bits in ints. + 16 bits in shorts. + 32 bits in longs. + 32 bits in unsigneds. + 32 bits in floats. + 64 bits in doubles. +5.960464e-08 is the least number that can be added to 1. (float). +1.387779e-17 is the least number that can be added to 1. (double). +Section s26 returned 0. +Section s4 returned 0. +Section s61 returned 0. +Section s626 returned 0. +Section s71 returned 0. +Section s72 returned 0. +Section s757 returned 0. +Section s7813 returned 0. +Section s714 returned 0. +Section s715 returned 0. +Register count for char is unreliable. +Register count for pointer is unreliable. +Register count for int is unreliable. +Section s81 returned 0. +Section s84 returned 0. +char alignment: 1 +short alignment: 2 +int alignment: 4 +long alignment: 4 +unsigned alignment: 4 +float alignment: 4 +double alignment: 4 +Sign extension in fields +Be especially careful with 1-bit fields! +Section s85 returned 0. +Section s86 returned 0. +Section s88 returned 0. +Section s9 returned 0. + +No errors detected. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cray.1 b/static/v10/man1/cray.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b91ce672 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cray.1 @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +.TH CRAY 1 +.CT 1 comm_mach +.SH NAME +cray \- run job remotely on cray-xmp +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cray +[ +.I options +] +[ +.I jcl +[ +[ +.B + +] +.I file +] +... +] +.PP +.B c1sts +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Cray +submits the named files to the MHCC Cray. +A plus sign stands for a Cray end-of-file, +which separates jcl, source code, and data files. +A file +.I jcl +that doesn't exist in the current directory +is searched for in the directory specified +by the shell environment variable CRAYJCL. +.TP 1i +.BI -o ofile +Send the job output to +.I ofile. +.TP 1i +.BI -p pages +If the jcl file doesn't begin with a job line, +.I cray +supplies one. +In that case, +the option +.BI -p n +specifies the maximum number of pages +(actually, 45-line blocks) +that can be output; +the default is 100. +.TP 1i +.BI -s n +Run the job at service grade +.I n. +(The default is +.LR -s2 ; +fastest is +.LR -s1 ; +long runs should be at +.Lr -s4 .) +.TP 1i +.BI -t seconds +If the jcl file doesn't begin with a job line, +specifies the maximum running time; +the default is 15. +.PP +.I C1sts +gives a status report on the cray. +.SH EXAMPLES +Run a Fortran program and subroutine, reading from param +on unit 5 and writing on unit 6, +.TP +.L +cray -o output ft + main.f sub.f + param +Run a Fortran program and subroutine, reading from param +on unit 5 and writing on unit 6, +.SH BUGS +Because of a problem with the standard input, the +.B -o +option is required for remote execution via Datakit. +.SH "THE FIRST TIME" +An incredible amount of busywork is required the first +time you use this command. +Get an account on mhuxa by filing an application +at the computer center accounting office, +and if possible get password aging turned off. +Set up your +.F .profile +on your home machine +and in the comp center so that remote execution in either +direction gets a silent login. +(Otherwise, you may get a `Bad magic number' +message when trying to execute a push.) +(Try copying the mhuxa file +.FR /a2/c1127/ehg/.profile .) +Set up mail forwarding from mhuxa to your +home machine. +(See +.FR /usr/mail/ehg .) +Now, from your home machine, execute +.IP +.L dkcc mhcc/mhuxa who +.LP +to be sure everything is set up properly. +The first time you try this, you will be asked to +login; this legalizes remote execution from your +home machine onto the comp center machine. +For the reverse direction, +your user id should be added to +.F /etc/procuid.local +on your home machine. +Export +.L CRAYJCL=/n/swift/usr/lsrc/cmd/cray/Jcl +from your +.F .profile +on your home machine. +By editing a copy of +.F /usr/bin/crmail +in your bin, +you can arrange for special action to be taken when +your output arrives; the default is mail notification. +Now you should be ready to run; try +.IP +.L cray -s1 -o tmp audit +.LP +If you don't get some job output back from the cray within a few minutes, +something is wrong. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cref.1 b/static/v10/man1/cref.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffa705bb --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cref.1 @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CREF (I)'2/5/1973'CREF (I)' +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +NAME cref -- make cross reference listing +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS cref____ [ -soi____ ] name1 ... +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION CREF makes a cross reference listing +of files in assembler format (see AS(I)). The files +named as arguments in the command +line are searched for symbols (defined as a succession +of alphabetics, numerics, '.', or '_', beginning with +an alphabetic, '.', or '_'). +.sp +The output report is in four columns: +.nf +.sp +(1) (2) (3) (4) +symbol file see text as it appears in file + below +.sp +.fi +The third column contains the line number in the file +by default; the -s__ option +will cause the most recent name symbol to appear there +instead. +.sp +CREF uses either an ignore______ file or an only____ file. +If the -i__ option is given, it will take the next +file name to be an ignore______ file; if the -o__ option +is given, the next file name will be taken as an only____ file. +Ignore______ and only____ +files should be lists of symbols separated by new lines. +If an ignore______ file is given, all the symbols in the file +will be ignored in columns (1) and (3) of the output. +If an only____ file is given, only symbols appearing in the +file will appear in column (1), but column (3) +will still contain the most recent name encountered. +Only one of the options -i__ or +-o__ may be used. +The default setting +is -i__; +all symbols predefined in the assembler are ignored, except +system call names, which are collected. +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +FILES Files t.0, t.1, t.2, t.3 are +created (i.e. DESTROYED) in the working +directory of anyone +using cref____. This nuisance will be repaired soon. +The output is left in file s.out_____ in the working directory. +.sp +/usr/lem/s.tab is the default ignore______ file. +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO as(I) +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "line too long" -- input line >131 characters +.nf +.sp +"symbol too long" -- symbol >20 characters +.sp +"too many symbols" -- >10 symbols in line +.sp +"cannot open t.?" -- bug; see LEM +.sp +"cannot fork; examine t.out" -- can't start sort____ +.in 20 +.fi +process; intermediate results are on files t.0___, +t.1___,t.2___,t.3___. These may be sorted independently +and the results concatenated by the user. +.sp +.in 16 +"cannot sort" -- odd response from sort____; examine +.in 20 +intermediate results, as above. +.sp +.in16 +.nf +"impossible situation" -- system bug +.sp +"cannot open" file -- one of the input names +.in 20 +.fi +cannot be opened for reading. +.in16 +.nf +.sp +.fi +.in16 +.ti 0 +BUGS The destruction of +unsuspecting users' files should soon be fixed. +A limitation that may eventually go away is the +restriction to assembler language format. There +should be options for FORTRAN, English, etc., lexical +analysis. +.sp +File names longer than eight characters cause misalignment in +the output if tabs are set at every eighth column. + +It should +write on the standard output, not s.out. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 b/static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e991eb80 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cropmarks.1 @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH CROPMARKS 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B cropmarks +\- add cropmarks to PostScript files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBcropmarks\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B Cropmarks +surrounds PostScript +.I files +with code that centers each page and adds cropmarks to the four +corners. +The results are written on the standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.I files, +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-d +Disable the device-dependent PostScript code that expands page sizes. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-h num +Set the height of each page to +.I num +inches. +The default is 11.0 inches. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-s +Scale pages so cropmarks always show up. +Primarily for debugging and development on devices that don't adjust +page sizes. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-w num +Set the width of each page to +.I num +inches. +The default is 8.5 inches. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/cropmarks.ps . +.PP +Height and width set with the +.OP \-h +and +.OP \-w +options adjust the size of the image area available on each sheet +of paper. +Neither suggests anything about the orientation of output in that area. +Cropmarks are printed at each corner just outside the image area. +.SH EXAMPLES +.PP +Print text in a 6.5\(mu8.0-inch area centered on each sheet of paper: +.EX +troff -mm \f2file\fP | dpost | cropmarks -w6.5 -h8.0 | \f2spool +.EE +Print landscape text in exactly the same 6.5\(mu8.0-inch area: +.EX +troff -mm \f2file\fP | dpost -pland | cropmarks -w6.5 -h8.0 | \f2spool +.EE +In both examples, +.I spool +is the spooling command used to send PostScript output to a local printer. +.SH WARNINGS +.PP +Device-dependent PostScript code to automatically expand page sizes may +only work on Linotronic 200P typesetters that use 12-inch-wide paper. +Local changes to the printer-dependent code can be made in the +.MW expandpagesize +procedure defined in +.MR \*(dQ/cropmarks.ps . +.PP +The PostScript +.I files +must be reasonably well behaved. +There are no guarantees, particularly if the input +.I files +redefine the +.MW showpage +operator. +.PP +The program is unsupported and may not be included in future releases. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/cropmarks.ps +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BRpostio (1), +.BR troff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/crypt.1 b/static/v10/man1/crypt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f366e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/crypt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'CRYPT (I)'10/23/71'CRYPT (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME crypt -- encode/decode +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS crypt_____ [ password ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION crypt_____ +is an exact implementation of Boris Hagelin's +cryptographic machine called the M-209 by the U. S. Army [1]. + +crypt_____ reads from the standard input file and writes +on the standard output. +For a given password, the encryption +process is idempotent; +that is, + + crypt znorkle cypher + crypt znorkle ' `(' `)' +form separate words. +If doubled in `&&', `|\|\||', `<<' or `>>' these pairs form single words. +These parser metacharacters may be made part of other words, or prevented their +special meaning, by preceding them with `\e'. +A newline preceded by a `\e' is equivalent to a blank. +.PP +In addition strings enclosed in matched pairs of quotations, +`\*(aa', `\*(ga' or `"', +form parts of a word; metacharacters in these strings, including blanks +and tabs, do not form separate words. +These quotations have semantics to be described subsequently. +Within pairs of `\'' or `"' characters a newline preceded by a `\e' gives +a true newline character. +.PP +When the shell's input is not a terminal, +the character `#' introduces a comment which continues to the end of the +input line. +It is prevented this special meaning when preceded by `\e' +and in quotations using `\`', `\'', and `"'. +.sh "Commands" +A simple command is a sequence of words, the first of which +specifies the command to be executed. +A simple command or +a sequence of simple commands separated by `|' characters +forms a pipeline. +The output of each command in a pipeline is connected to the input of the next. +Sequences of pipelines may be separated by `;', and are then executed +sequentially. +A sequence of pipelines may be executed without immediately +waiting for it to terminate by following it with an `&'. +.PP +Any of the above may be placed in `(' `)' to form a simple command (which +may be a component of a pipeline, etc.) +It is also possible to separate pipelines with `|\|\||' or `&&' indicating, +as in the C language, +that the second is to be executed only if the first fails or succeeds +respectively. (See +.I Expressions.) +.sh "Jobs" +The shell associates a \fIjob\fR with each pipeline. It keeps +a table of current jobs, printed by the +\fIjobs\fR command, and assigns them small integer numbers. When +a job is started asynchronously with `&', the shell prints a line which looks +like: +.PP +.DT + [1] 1234 +.PP +indicating that the jobs which was started asynchronously was job number +1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process id was 1234. +.PP +If you are running a job and wish to do something else you may hit the key +\fB^Z\fR (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to the current job. +The shell will then normally indicate that the job has been `Stopped', +and print another prompt. You can then manipulate the state of this job, +putting it in the background with the \fIbg\fR command, or run some other +commands and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground with +the foreground command \fIfg\fR. A \fB^Z\fR takes effect immediately and +is like an interrupt in that pending output and unread input are discarded +when it is typed. There is another special key \fB^Y\fR which does +not generate a STOP signal until a program attempts to +.IR read (2) +it. +This can usefully be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands +for a job which you wish to stop after it has read them. +.PP +A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to read +from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, +but this can be disabled by giving the command ``stty tostop''. +If you set this +tty option, then background jobs will stop when they try to produce +output like they do when they try to read input. +.PP +There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The character +`%' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer to job number 1, you can +name it as `%1'. Just naming a job brings it to the foreground; thus +`%1' is a synonym for `fg %1', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. +Similarly saying `%1 &' resumes job 1 in the background. +Jobs can also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start them, +if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus `%ex' would normally restart +a suspended +.IR ex (1) +job, if there were only one suspended job whose name began with +the string `ex'. It is also possible to say `%?string' +which specifies a job whose text contains +.I string, +if there is only one such job. +.PP +The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. +In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is marked with a `+' +and the previous job with a `\-'. The abbreviation `%+' refers +to the current job and `%\-' refers to the previous job. For close +analogy with the syntax of the +.I history +mechanism (described below), +`%%' is also a synonym for the current job. +.sh "Status reporting" +This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes state. +It normally informs you whenever a job becomes blocked so that +no further progress is possible, but only just before it prints +a prompt. This is done so that it does not otherwise disturb your work. +If, however, you set the shell variable +.I notify, +the shell will notify you immediately of changes of status in background +jobs. +There is also a shell command +.I notify +which marks a single process so that its status changes will be immediately +reported. By default +.I notify +marks the current process; +simply say `notify' after starting a background job to mark it. +.PP +When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you will +be warned that `You have stopped jobs.' You may use the \fIjobs\fR +command to see what they are. If you do this or immediately try to +exit again, the shell will not warn you a second time, and the suspended +jobs will be terminated. +.sh Substitutions +We now describe the various transformations the shell performs on the +input in the order in which they occur. +.sh "History substitutions" +History substitutions place words from previous command input as portions +of new commands, making it easy to repeat commands, repeat arguments +of a previous command in the current command, or fix spelling mistakes +in the previous command with little typing and a high degree of confidence. +History substitutions begin with the character `!' and may begin +.B anywhere +in the input stream (with the proviso that they +.B "do not" +nest.) +This `!' may be preceded by an `\e' to prevent its special meaning; for +convenience, a `!' is passed unchanged when it is followed by a blank, +tab, newline, `=' or `('. +(History substitutions also occur when an input line begins with `\*(ua'. +This special abbreviation will be described later.) +Any input line which contains history substitution is echoed on the terminal +before it is executed as it could have been typed without history substitution. +.PP +Commands input from the terminal which consist of one or more words +are saved on the history list. +The history substitutions reintroduce sequences of words from these +saved commands into the input stream. +The size of which is controlled by the +.I history +variable; the previous command is always retained, regardless of its value. +Commands are numbered sequentially from 1. +.PP +For definiteness, consider the following output from the +.I history +command: +.PP +.DT +.br + \09 write michael +.br + 10 ex write.c +.br + 11 cat oldwrite.c +.br + 12 diff *write.c +.PP +The commands are shown with their event numbers. +It is not usually necessary to use event numbers, but the current event +number can be made part of the +.I prompt +by placing an `!' in the prompt string. +.PP +With the current event 13 we can refer to previous events by event +number `!11', relatively as in `!\-2' (referring to the same event), +by a prefix of a command word +as in `!d' for event 12 or `!wri' for event 9, or by a string contained in +a word in the command as in `!?mic?' also referring to event 9. +These forms, without further modification, simply reintroduce the words +of the specified events, each separated by a single blank. +As a special case `!!' refers to the previous command; thus `!!' +alone is essentially a +.I redo. +.PP +To select words from an event we can follow the event specification by +a `:' and a designator for the desired words. +The words of a input line are numbered from 0, +the first (usually command) word being 0, the second word (first argument) +being 1, etc. +The basic word designators are: +.PP +.DT +.nf + 0 first (command) word + \fIn\fR \fIn\fR\|'th argument + \*(ua first argument, i.e. `1' + $ last argument + % word matched by (immediately preceding) ?\fIs\fR\|? search + \fIx\fR\|\-\fIy\fR range of words + \-\fIy\fR abbreviates `0\-\fIy\fR\|' + * abbreviates `\*(ua\-$', or nothing if only 1 word in event + \fIx\fR\|* abbreviates `\fIx\fR\|\-$' + \fIx\fR\|\- like `\fIx\fR\|*' but omitting word `$' +.fi +.PP +The `:' separating the event specification from the word designator +can be omitted if the argument selector begins with a `\*(ua', `$', `*' +`\-' or `%'. +After the optional word designator can be +placed a sequence of modifiers, each preceded by a `:'. +The following modifiers are defined: +.ta .5i 1.2i +.PP +.nf + h Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving the head. + r Remove a trailing `.xxx' component, leaving the root name. + e Remove all but the extension `.xxx' part. + s/\fIl\fR\|/\fIr\fR\|/ Substitute \fIl\fR for \fIr\fR + t Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail. + & Repeat the previous substitution. + g Apply the change globally, prefixing the above, e.g. `g&'. + p Print the new command but do not execute it. + q Quote the substituted words, preventing further substitutions. + x Like q, but break into words at blanks, tabs and newlines. +.fi +.PP +Unless preceded by a `g' the modification is applied only to the first +modifiable word. With substitutions, it is an error for no word to be +applicable. +.PP +The left hand side of substitutions are not regular expressions in the sense +of the editors, but rather strings. +Any character may be used as the delimiter in place of `/'; +a `\e' quotes the delimiter into the +.IR l "" +and +.IR r "" +strings. +The character `&' in the right hand side is replaced by the text from +the left. +A `\e' quotes `&' also. +A null +.IR l "" +uses the previous string either from a +.IR l "" +or from a +contextual scan string +.IR s "" +in `!?\fIs\fR\|?'. +The trailing delimiter in the substitution may be omitted if a newline +follows immediately as may the trailing `?' in a contextual scan. +.PP +A history reference may be given without an event specification, e.g. `!$'. +In this case the reference is to the previous command unless a previous +history reference occurred on the same line in which case this form repeats +the previous reference. +Thus `!?foo?\*(ua !$' gives the first and last arguments +from the command matching `?foo?'. +.PP +A special abbreviation of a history reference occurs when the first +non-blank character of an input line is a `\*(ua'. +This is equivalent to `!:s\*(ua' providing a convenient shorthand for substitutions +on the text of the previous line. +Thus `\*(ualb\*(ualib' fixes the spelling of +`lib' +in the previous command. +Finally, a history substitution may be surrounded with `{' and `}' +if necessary to insulate it from the characters which follow. +Thus, after `ls \-ld ~paul' we might do `!{l}a' to do `ls \-ld ~paula', +while `!la' would look for a command starting `la'. +.PP +.if n .ul +\fBQuotations\ with\ \'\ and\ "\fR +.PP +The quotation of strings by `\'' and `"' can be used +to prevent all or some of the remaining substitutions. +Strings enclosed in `\'' are prevented any further interpretation. +Strings enclosed in `"' are yet variable and command expanded +as described below. +.PP +In both cases the resulting text becomes (all or part of) a single word; +only in one special case (see +.I "Command Substitition" +below) does a `"' quoted string yield parts of more than one word; +`\'' quoted strings never do. +.sh "Alias substitution" +The shell maintains a list of aliases which can be established, displayed +and modified by the +.I alias +and +.I unalias +commands. +After a command line is scanned, it is parsed into distinct commands and +the first word of each command, left-to-right, is checked to see if it +has an alias. +If it does, then the text which is the alias for that command is reread +with the history mechanism available +as though that command were the previous input line. +The resulting words replace the +command and argument list. +If no reference is made to the history list, then the argument list is +left unchanged. +.PP +Thus if the alias for `ls' is `ls \-l' the command `ls /usr' would map to +`ls \-l /usr', the argument list here being undisturbed. +Similarly if the alias for `lookup' was `grep !\*(ua /etc/passwd' then +`lookup bill' would map to `grep bill /etc/passwd'. +.PP +If an alias is found, the word transformation of the input text +is performed and the aliasing process begins again on the reformed input line. +Looping is prevented if the first word of the new text is the same as the old +by flagging it to prevent further aliasing. +Other loops are detected and cause an error. +.PP +Note that the mechanism allows aliases to introduce parser metasyntax. +Thus we can `alias print \'pr \e!* \||\| lpr\'' to make a command which +.I pr's +its arguments to the line printer. +.sh "Variable substitution" +The shell maintains a set of variables, each of which has as value a list +of zero or more words. +Some of these variables are set by the shell or referred to by it. +For instance, the +.I argv +variable is an image of the shell's argument list, and words of this +variable's value are referred to in special ways. +.PP +The values of variables may be displayed and changed by using the +.I set +and +.I unset +commands. +Of the variables referred to by the shell a number are toggles; +the shell does not care what their value is, +only whether they are set or not. +For instance, the +.I verbose +variable is a toggle which causes command input to be echoed. +The setting of this variable results from the +.B \-v +command line option. +.PP +Other operations treat variables numerically. +The `@' command permits numeric calculations to be performed and the result +assigned to a variable. +Variable values are, however, always represented as (zero or more) strings. +For the purposes of numeric operations, the null string is considered to be +zero, and the second and subsequent words of multiword values are ignored. +.PP +After the input line is aliased and parsed, and before each command +is executed, variable substitution +is performed keyed by `$' characters. +This expansion can be prevented by preceding the `$' with a `\e' except +within `"'s where it +.B always +occurs, and within `\''s where it +.B never +occurs. +Strings quoted by `\*(ga' are interpreted later (see +.I "Command substitution" +below) so `$' substitution does not occur there until later, if at all. +A `$' is passed unchanged if followed by a blank, tab, or end-of-line. +.PP +Input/output redirections are recognized before variable expansion, +and are variable expanded separately. +Otherwise, the command name and entire argument list are expanded together. +It is thus possible for the first (command) word to this point to generate +more than one word, the first of which becomes the command name, +and the rest of which become arguments. +.PP +Unless enclosed in `"' or given the `:q' modifier the results of variable +substitution may eventually be command and filename substituted. +Within `"' a variable whose value consists of multiple words expands to a +(portion of) a single word, with the words of the variables value +separated by blanks. +When the `:q' modifier is applied to a substitution +the variable will expand to multiple words with each word separated +by a blank and quoted to prevent later command or filename substitution. +.PP +The following metasequences are provided for introducing variable values into +the shell input. +Except as noted, it is an error to reference a variable which is not set. +.HP 5 +$name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +${name} +.br +Are replaced by the words of the value of variable +.I name, +each separated by a blank. +Braces insulate +.I name +from following characters which would otherwise be part of it. +Shell variables have names consisting of up to 20 letters and digits +starting with a letter. The underscore character is considered a letter. +.br +If +.I name +is not a shell variable, but is set in the environment, then +that value is returned (but \fB:\fR modifiers and the other forms +given below are not available in this case). +.HP 5 +$name[selector] +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +${name[selector]} +.br +May be used to select only some of the words from the value of +.I name. +The selector is subjected to `$' substitution and may consist of a single +number or two numbers separated by a `\-'. +The first word of a variables value is numbered `1'. +If the first number of a range is omitted it defaults to `1'. +If the last member of a range is omitted it defaults to `$#name'. +The selector `*' selects all words. +It is not an error for a range to be empty if the second argument is omitted +or in range. +.HP 5 +$#name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +${#name} +.br +Gives the number of words in the variable. +This is useful for later use in a `[selector]'. +.HP 5 +$0 +.br +Substitutes the name of the file from which command input is being read. +An error occurs if the name is not known. +.HP 5 +$number +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +${number} +.br +Equivalent to `$argv[number]'. +.HP 5 +$* +.br +Equivalent to `$argv[*]'. +.PP +The modifiers `:h', `:t', `:r', `:q' and `:x' may be applied to +the substitutions above as may `:gh', `:gt' and `:gr'. +If braces `{' '}' appear in the command form then the modifiers +must appear within the braces. +.B "The current implementation allows only one `:' modifier on each `$' expansion." +.PP +The following substitutions may not be modified with `:' modifiers. +.HP 5 +$?name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +${?name} +.br +Substitutes the string `1' if name is set, `0' if it is not. +.HP 5 +$?0 +.br +Substitutes `1' if the current input filename is know, `0' if it is not. +.HP 5 +$$ +.br +Substitute the (decimal) process number of the (parent) shell. +.HP 5 +$< +.br +Substitutes a line from the standard +input, with no further interpretation thereafter. It can be used +to read from the keyboard in a shell script. +.sh "Command and filename substitution" +The remaining substitutions, command and filename substitution, +are applied selectively to the arguments of builtin commands. +This means that portions of expressions which are not evaluated are +not subjected to these expansions. +For commands which are not internal to the shell, the command +name is substituted separately from the argument list. +This occurs very late, +after input-output redirection is performed, and in a child +of the main shell. +.sh "Command substitution" +Command substitution is indicated by a command enclosed in `\*(ga'. +The output from such a command is normally broken into separate words +at blanks, tabs and newlines, with null words being discarded, +this text then replacing the original string. +Within `"'s, only newlines force new words; blanks and tabs are preserved. +.PP +In any case, the single final newline does not force a new word. +Note that it is thus possible for a command substitution to yield +only part of a word, even if the command outputs a complete line. +.sh "Filename substitution" +If a word contains any of the characters `*', `?', `[' or `{' +or begins with the character `~', then that word is a candidate for +filename substitution, also known as `globbing'. +This word is then regarded as a pattern, and replaced with an alphabetically +sorted list of file names which match the pattern. +In a list of words specifying filename substitution it is an error for +no pattern to match an existing file name, but it is not required +for each pattern to match. +Only the metacharacters `*', `?' and `[' imply pattern matching, +the characters `~' and `{' being more akin to abbreviations. +.PP +In matching filenames, the character `.' at the beginning of a filename +or immediately following a `/', as well as the character `/' must +be matched explicitly. +The character `*' matches any string of characters, including the null +string. +The character `?' matches any single character. +The sequence `[...]' matches any one of the characters enclosed. +Within `[...]', +a pair of characters separated by `\-' matches any character lexically between +the two. +.PP +The character `~' at the beginning of a filename is used to refer to home +directories. +Standing alone, i.e. `~' it expands to the invokers home directory as reflected +in the value of the variable +.I home. +When followed by a name consisting of letters, digits and `\-' characters +the shell searches for a user with that name and substitutes their +home directory; thus `~ken' might expand to `/usr/ken' and `~ken/chmach' +to `/usr/ken/chmach'. +If the character `~' is followed by a character other than a letter or `/' +or appears not at the beginning of a word, +it is left undisturbed. +.PP +The metanotation `a{b,c,d}e' is a shorthand for `abe ace ade'. +Left to right order is preserved, with results of matches being sorted +separately at a low level to preserve this order. +This construct may be nested. +Thus `~source/s1/{oldls,ls}.c' expands to +`/usr/source/s1/oldls.c /usr/source/s1/ls.c' +whether or not these files exist without any chance of error +if the home directory for `source' is `/usr/source'. +Similarly `../{memo,*box}' might expand to `../memo ../box ../mbox'. +(Note that `memo' was not sorted with the results of matching `*box'.) +As a special case `{', `}' and `{}' are passed undisturbed. +.sh Input/output +The standard input and standard output of a command may be redirected +with the following syntax: +.HP 5 +< name +.br +Open file +.I name +(which is first variable, command and filename expanded) as the standard +input. +.HP 5 +<< word +.br +Read the shell input up to a line which is identical to +.I word. +.I Word +is not subjected to variable, filename or command substitution, +and each input line is compared to +.I word +before any substitutions are done on this input line. +Unless a quoting `\e', `"', `\*(aa' or `\*(ga' appears in +.I word +variable and command substitution is performed on the intervening lines, +allowing `\e' to quote `$', `\e' and `\*(ga'. +Commands which are substituted have all blanks, tabs, and newlines +preserved, except for the final newline which is dropped. +The resultant text is placed in an anonymous temporary file which +is given to the command as standard input. +.HP 5 +> name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +>! name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +>& name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +>&! name +.br +The file +.I name +is used as standard output. +If the file does not exist then it is created; +if the file exists, its is truncated, its previous contents being lost. +.IP +If the variable +.I noclobber +is set, then the file must not exist or be a character special file (e.g. a +terminal or `/dev/null') or an error results. +This helps prevent accidental destruction of files. +In this case the `!' forms can be used and suppress this check. +.IP +The forms involving `&' route the diagnostic output into the specified +file as well as the standard output. +.I Name +is expanded in the same way as `<' input filenames are. +.HP 5 +>> name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +>>& name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +>>! name +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +>>&! name +.br +Uses file +.I name +as standard output like `>' but places output at the end of the file. +If the variable +.I noclobber +is set, then +it is an error for the file not to exist unless +one of the `!' forms is given. +Otherwise similar to `>'. +.PP +A command receives the environment in which the shell was +invoked as modified by the input-output parameters and +the presence of the command in a pipeline. +Thus, unlike some previous shells, commands run from a file of shell commands +have no access to the text of the commands by default; rather +they receive the original standard input of the shell. +The `<<' mechanism should be used to present inline data. +This permits shell command scripts to function as components of pipelines +and allows the shell to block read its input. +Note that the default standard input for a command run detached is +.B not +modified to be the empty file `/dev/null'; rather the standard input +remains as the original standard input of the shell. If this is a terminal +and if the process attempts to read from the terminal, then the process +will block and the user will be notified (see +.B Jobs +above.) +.PP +Diagnostic output may be directed through a pipe with the standard output. +Simply use the form `|\|&' rather than just `|'. +.sh Expressions +A number of the builtin commands (to be described subsequently) +take expressions, in which the operators are similar to those of C, with +the same precedence. +These expressions appear in the +.I @, +.I exit, +.I if, +and +.I while +commands. +The following operators are available: +.DT +.PP + |\|\|| && | \*(ua & == != =~ !~ <= >= < > << >> + \- * / % ! ~ ( ) +.PP +Here the precedence increases to the right, +`==' `!=' `=~' and `!~', `<=' `>=' `<' and `>', `<<' and `>>', `+' and `\-', +`*' `/' and `%' being, in groups, at the same level. +The `==' `!=' `=~' and `!~' operators compare their arguments as strings; +all others operate on numbers. +The operators `=~' and `!~' are like `!=' and `==' except that the right +hand side is a +.I pattern +(containing, e.g. `*'s, `?'s and instances of `[...]') +against which the left hand operand is matched. This reduces the +need for use of the +.I switch +statement in shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern matching. +.PP +Strings which begin with `0' are considered octal numbers. +Null or missing arguments are considered `0'. +The result of all expressions are strings, +which represent decimal numbers. +It is important to note that no two components of an expression can appear +in the same word; except when adjacent to components of expressions which +are syntactically significant to the parser (`&' `|' `<' `>' `(' `)') +they should be surrounded by spaces. +.PP +Also available in expressions as primitive operands are command executions +enclosed in `{' and `}' +and file enquiries of the form `\-\fIl\fR name' where +.I l +is one of: +.PP +.DT +.nf + r read access + w write access + x execute access + e existence + o ownership + z zero size + f plain file + d directory +.fi +.PP +The specified name is command and filename expanded and then tested +to see if it has the specified relationship to the real user. +If the file does not exist or is inaccessible then all enquiries return +false, i.e. `0'. +Command executions succeed, returning true, i.e. `1', +if the command exits with status 0, otherwise they fail, returning +false, i.e. `0'. +If more detailed status information is required then the command +should be executed outside of an expression and the variable +.I status +examined. +.sh "Control flow" +The shell contains a number of commands which can be used to regulate the +flow of control in command files (shell scripts) and +(in limited but useful ways) from terminal input. +These commands all operate by forcing the shell to reread or skip in its +input and, due to the implementation, restrict the placement of some +of the commands. +.PP +The +.I foreach, +.I switch, +and +.I while +statements, as well as the +.I if\-then\-else +form of the +.I if +statement require that the major keywords appear in a single simple command +on an input line as shown below. +.PP +If the shell's input is not seekable, +the shell buffers up input whenever a loop is being read +and performs seeks in this internal buffer to accomplish the rereading +implied by the loop. +(To the extent that this allows, backward goto's will succeed on +non-seekable inputs.) +.sh "Builtin commands" +Builtin commands are executed within the shell. +If a builtin command occurs as any component of a pipeline +except the last then it is executed in a subshell. +.HP 5 +.B alias +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR alias " name" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR alias " name wordlist" +.br +The first form prints all aliases. +The second form prints the alias for name. +The final form assigns the specified +.I wordlist +as the alias of +.I name; +.I wordlist +is command and filename substituted. +.I Name +is not allowed to be +.I alias +or +.I unalias. +.HP 5 +.B alloc +.br +Shows the amount of dynamic core in use, broken down into used and +free core, and address of the last location in the heap. +With an argument shows each used and free block on the internal dynamic +memory chain indicating its address, size, and whether it is used or free. +This is a debugging command and may not work in production versions of the +shell; it requires a modified version of the system memory allocator. +.HP 5 +.B bg +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBbg\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Puts the current or specified jobs into the background, continuing them +if they were stopped. +.HP 5 +.B break +.br +Causes execution to resume after the +.I end +of the nearest enclosing +.I foreach +or +.I while. +The remaining commands on the current line are executed. +Multi-level breaks are thus possible by writing them all on one line. +.HP 5 +.B breaksw +.br +Causes a break from a +.I switch, +resuming after the +.I endsw. +.HP 5 +.BR case " label:" +.br +A label in a +.I switch +statement as discussed below. +.HP 5 +.B cd +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR cd " name" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B chdir +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR chdir " name" +.br +Change the shells working directory to directory +.I name. +If no argument is given then change to the home directory of the user. +.br +If +.I name +is not found as a subdirectory of the current directory (and does not begin +with `/', `./' or `../'), then each +component of the variable +.I cdpath +is checked to see if it has a subdirectory +.I name. +Finally, if all else fails but +.I name +is a shell variable whose value begins with `/', then this +is tried to see if it is a directory. +.HP 5 +.B continue +.br +Continue execution of the nearest enclosing +.I while +or +.I foreach. +The rest of the commands on the current line are executed. +.HP 5 +.B default: +.br +Labels the default case in a +.I switch +statement. +The default should come after all +.I case +labels. +.HP 5 +.BR "dirs" +.br +Prints the directory stack; the top of the stack is at the left, +the first directory in the stack being the current directory. +.HP 5 +.BR echo " wordlist" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR "echo \-n" " wordlist" +.br +The specified words are written to the shells standard output, separated +by spaces, and terminated with a newline unless the +.B \-n +option is specified. +.HP 5 +.B else +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B end +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B endif +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B endsw +.br +See the description of the +.I foreach, +.I if, +.I switch, +and +.I while +statements below. +.HP 5 +.BR eval " arg ..." +.br +(As in +.IR sh (1).) +The arguments are read as input to the shell and the resulting +command(s) executed. This is usually used to execute commands +generated as the result of command or variable substitution, since +parsing occurs before these substitutions. See +.IR tset (1) +for an example of using +.I eval. +.HP 5 +.BR exec " command" +.br +The specified command is executed in place of the current shell. +.HP 5 +.B exit +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR exit (expr) +.br +The shell exits either with the value of the +.I status +variable (first form) or with the value of the specified +.I expr +(second form). +.HP 5 +.B fg +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBfg\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Brings the current or specified jobs into the foreground, continuing them if +they were stopped. +.HP 5 +.BR foreach " name (wordlist)" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B end +.br +The variable +.I name +is successively set to each member of +.I wordlist +and the sequence of commands between this command and the matching +.I end +are executed. +(Both +.I foreach +and +.I end +must appear alone on separate lines.) +.IP +The builtin command +.I continue +may be used to continue the loop prematurely and the builtin +command +.I break +to terminate it prematurely. +When this command is read from the terminal, the loop is read up once +prompting with `?' before any statements in the loop are executed. +If you make a mistake typing in a loop at the terminal you can rub it out. +.HP 5 +.BR glob " wordlist" +.br +Like +.I echo +but no `\e' escapes are recognized and words are delimited +by null characters in the output. +Useful for programs which wish to use the shell to filename expand a list +of words. +.HP 5 +.BR goto " word" +.br +The specified +.I word +is filename and command expanded to yield a string of the form `label'. +The shell rewinds its input as much as possible +and searches for a line of the form `label:' +possibly preceded by blanks or tabs. +Execution continues after the specified line. +.HP 5 +.BR hashstat +.br +Print a statistics line indicating how effective the internal hash +table has been at locating commands (and avoiding +.I exec's). +An +.I exec +is attempted for each component of the +.I path +where the hash function indicates a possible hit, and in each component +which does not begin with a `/'. +.HP 5 +.B history +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BI history " n" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BI "history \-r" " n" +.br +Displays the history event list; if \fIn\fR is given only the +.I n +most recent events are printed. +The +.B \-r +option reverses the order of printout to be most recent first +rather than oldest first. +.HP 5 +.BR if " (expr) command" +.br +If the specified expression evaluates true, then the single +.I command +with arguments is executed. +Variable substitution on +.IR command "" +happens early, at the same +time it does for the rest of the +.I if +command. +.I Command +must be a simple command, not +a pipeline, a command list, or a parenthesized command list. +Input/output redirection occurs even if +.I expr +is false, when command is +.B not +executed (this is a bug). +.HP 5 +.BR if " (expr) " "then" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR else " " "if\fR (expr2) \fBthen" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B else +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B endif +.br +If the specified +.IR expr "" +is true then the commands to the first +.I else +are executed; else if +.IR expr2 "" +is true then the commands to the +second else are executed, etc. +Any number of +.I else-if +pairs are possible; only one +.I endif +is needed. +The +.I else +part is likewise optional. +(The words +.I else +and +.I endif +must appear at the beginning of input lines; +the +.I if +must appear alone on its input line or after an +.I else.) +.HP 5 +.B jobs +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B "jobs \-l" +.br +Lists the active jobs; given the +.B \-l +options lists process id's in addition to the normal information. +.HP 5 +\fBkill %\fRjob +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ \fB%\fRjob\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\fR\ pid +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ pid\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\ \-l\fR +.br +Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the +specified signal to the specified jobs or processes. +Signals are either given by number or by names (as given in +.I /usr/include/signal.h, +stripped of the prefix ``SIG''). +The signal names are listed by ``kill \-l''. +There is no default, saying just `kill' does not +send a signal to the current job. +If the signal being sent is TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), +then the job or process will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well. +.HP +\fBlimit\fR +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR \fImaximum-use\fR +.br +Limits the consumption by the current process and each process +it creates to not individually exceed \fImaximum-use\fR on the +specified \fIresource\fR. If no \fImaximum-use\fR is given, then +the current limit is printed; if no \fIresource\fR is given, then +all limitations are given. +.IP +Resources controllable currently include \fIcputime\fR (the maximum +number of cpu-seconds to be used by each process), \fIfilesize\fR +(the largest single file which can be created), \fIdatasize\fR +(the maximum growth of the data+stack region via +.IR sbrk (2) +beyond the end of the program text), \fIstacksize\fR (the maximum +size of the automatically-extended stack region), and \fIcoredumpsize\fR +(the size of the largest core dump that will be created). +.IP +The \fImaximum-use\fR may be given as a (floating point or integer) +number followed by a scale factor. For all limits other than \fIcputime\fR +the default scale is `k' or `kilobytes' (1024 bytes); +a scale factor of `m' or `megabytes' may also be used. +For +.I cputime +the default scaling is `seconds', while `m' for minutes +or `h' for hours, or a time of the form `mm:ss' giving minutes +and seconds may be used. +.IP +For both \fIresource\fR names and scale factors, unambiguous prefixes +of the names suffice. +.HP 5 +.B login +.br +Terminate a login shell, replacing it with an instance of +.B /bin/login. +This is one way to log off, included for compatibility with +.IR sh (1). +.HP 5 +.B logout +.br +Terminate a login shell. +Especially useful if +.I ignoreeof +is set. +.HP 5 +.B newgrp +.br +Changes the group identification of the caller; for details see +.IR newgrp (1). +A new shell is executed by +.I newgrp +so that the shell state is lost. +.HP 5 +.B nice +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR nice " \+number" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR nice " command" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR nice " \+number command" +.br +The first form sets the +.I nice +for this shell to 4. +The second form sets the +.I nice +to the given number. +The final two forms run command at priority 4 and +.I number +respectively. +The super-user may specify negative niceness by using `nice \-number ...'. +Command is always executed in a sub-shell, and the restrictions +place on commands in simple +.I if +statements apply. +.HP 5 +.B nohup +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR "nohup" " command" +.br +The first form can be used in shell scripts to cause hangups to be +ignored for the remainder of the script. +The second form causes the specified command to be run with hangups +ignored. +All processes detached with `&' are effectively +.I nohup'ed. +.HP 5 +.B notify +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBnotify\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when the status of the +current or specified jobs changes; normally notification is presented +before a prompt. This is automatic if the shell variable +.I notify +is set. +.HP 5 +.B onintr +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR onintr " \-" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR onintr " label" +.br +Control the action of the shell on interrupts. +The first form restores the default action of the shell on interrupts +which is to terminate shell scripts or to return to the terminal command +input level. +The second form `onintr \-' causes all interrupts to be ignored. +The final form causes the shell to execute a `goto label' when +an interrupt is received or a child process terminates because +it was interrupted. +.IP +In any case, if the shell is running detached and interrupts are +being ignored, all forms of +.I onintr +have no meaning and interrupts +continue to be ignored by the shell and all invoked commands. +.HP 5 +.BR "popd" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR "popd" " +n" +.br +Pops the directory stack, returning to the new top directory. +With a argument `+\fIn\fR' discards the \fIn\fR\|th +entry in the stack. +The elements of the directory stack are numbered from 0 starting at the top. +.HP 5 +.BR "pushd" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR "pushd" " name" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR "pushd" " +n" +.br +With no arguments, +.I pushd +exchanges the top two elements of the directory stack. +Given a +.I name +argument, +.I pushd +changes to the new directory (ala +.I cd) +and pushes the old current working directory +(as in +.I csw) +onto the directory stack. +With a numeric argument, rotates the \fIn\fR\|th argument of the directory +stack around to be the top element and changes to it. The members +of the directory stack are numbered from the top starting at 0. +.HP 5 +.BR rehash +.br +Causes the internal hash table of the contents of the directories in +the +.I path +variable to be recomputed. This is needed if new commands are added +to directories in the +.I path +while you are logged in. This should only be necessary if you add +commands to one of your own directories, or if a systems programmer +changes the contents of one of the system directories. +.HP 5 +.BR repeat " count command" +.br +The specified +.I command +which is subject to the same restrictions +as the +.I command +in the one line +.I if +statement above, +is executed +.I count +times. +I/O redirections occur exactly once, even if +.I count +is 0. +.HP 5 +.B set +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR set " name" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR set " name=word" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR set " name[index]=word" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR set " name=(wordlist)" +.br +The first form of the command shows the value of all shell variables. +Variables which have other than a single word as value print as a parenthesized +word list. +The second form sets +.I name +to the null string. +The third form sets +.I name +to the single +.I word. +The fourth form sets +the +.I index'th +component of name to word; +this component must already exist. +The final form sets +.I name +to the list of words in +.I wordlist. +In all cases the value is command and filename expanded. +.IP +These arguments may be repeated to set multiple values in a single set command. +Note however, that variable expansion happens for all arguments before any +setting occurs. +.HP 5 +.BR setenv " name value" +.br +Sets the value of environment variable +.I name +to be +.I value, +a single string. +The most commonly used environment variable USER, TERM, and PATH +are automatically imported to and exported from the +.I csh +variables +.I user, +.I term, +and +.I path; +there is no need to use +.I setenv +for these. +.HP 5 +.B shift +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR shift " variable" +.br +The members of +.I argv +are shifted to the left, discarding +.I argv[1]. +It is an error for +.I argv +not to be set or to have less than one word as value. +The second form performs the same function on the specified variable. +.HP 5 +.BR source " name" +.br +The shell reads commands from +.I name. +.I Source +commands may be nested; if they are nested too deeply the shell may +run out of file descriptors. +An error in a +.I source +at any level terminates all nested +.I source +commands. +Input during +.I source +commands is +.B never +placed on the history list. +.HP 5 +.B stop +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBstop\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Stops the current or specified job which is executing in the background. +.HP 5 +.B suspend +.br +.ns +Causes the shell to stop in its tracks, much as if it had been sent a stop +signal with \fB^Z\fR. This is most often used to stop shells started by +.IR su (1). +.HP 5 +.BR switch " (string)" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR case " str1:" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ +.B breaksw +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\&... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B default: +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ +.B breaksw +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B endsw +.br +Each case label is successively matched, against the specified +.I string +which is first command and filename expanded. +The file metacharacters `*', `?' and `[...]' may be used in the case labels, +which are variable expanded. +If none of the labels match before a `default' label is found, then +the execution begins after the default label. +Each case label and the default label must appear at the beginning of a line. +The command +.I breaksw +causes execution to continue after the +.I endsw. +Otherwise control may fall through case labels and default labels as in C. +If no label matches and there is no default, execution continues after +the +.I endsw. +.HP 5 +.B time +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR time " command" +.br +With no argument, a summary of time used by this shell and its children +is printed. +If arguments are given +the specified simple command is timed and a time summary +as described under the +.I time +variable is printed. +If necessary, an extra shell is created to print the time +statistic when the command completes. +.HP 5 +.B umask +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR umask " value" +.br +The file creation mask is displayed (first form) or set to the specified +value (second form). The mask is given in octal. Common values for +the mask are 002 giving all access to the group and read and execute +access to others or 022 giving all access except no write access for +users in the group or others. +.HP 5 +.BR unalias " pattern" +.br +All aliases whose names match the specified pattern are discarded. +Thus all aliases are removed by `unalias *'. +It is not an error for nothing to be +.I unaliased. +.HP 5 +.BR unhash +.br +Use of the internal hash table to speed location of executed programs +is disabled. +.HP 5 +\fBunlimit\fR \fIresource\fR +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBunlimit\fR +.br +Removes the limitation on \fIresource\fR. If no \fIresource\fR +is specified, then all \fIresource\fR limitations are removed. +.HP 5 +.BR unset " pattern" +.br +All variables whose names match the specified pattern are removed. +Thus all variables are removed by `unset *'; this has noticeably +distasteful side-effects. +It is not an error for nothing to be +.I unset. +.HP 5 +.BR unsetenv " pattern" +.br +Removes all variables whose name match the specified pattern from the +environment. See also the +.I setenv +command above and +.IR printenv (1). +.HP 5 +.B wait +.br +All background jobs are waited for. +It the shell is interactive, then an interrupt can disrupt the wait, +at which time the shell prints names and job numbers of all jobs +known to be outstanding. +.HP 5 +.BR while " (expr)" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B end +.br +While the specified expression evaluates non-zero, the commands between +the +.I while +and the matching end are evaluated. +.I Break +and +.I continue +may be used to terminate or continue the loop prematurely. +(The +.I while +and +.I end +must appear alone on their input lines.) +Prompting occurs here the first time through the loop as for the +.I foreach +statement if the input is a terminal. +.HP 5 +\fB%\fRjob +.br +Brings the specified job into the foreground. +.HP 5 +\fB%\fRjob \fB&\fR +.br +Continues the specified job in the background. +.HP 5 +.B "@" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR "@" " name = expr" +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.BR "@" " name[index] = expr" +.br +The first form prints the values of all the shell variables. +The second form sets the specified +.I name +to the value of +.I expr. +If the expression contains `<', `>', `&' or `|' then at least +this part of the expression must be placed within `(' `)'. +The third form assigns the value of +.I expr +to the +.I index'th +argument of +.I name. +Both +.I name +and its +.I index'th +component must already exist. +.IP +The operators `*=', `+=', etc are available as in C. +The space separating the name from the assignment operator is optional. +Spaces are, however, mandatory in separating components of +.I expr +which would otherwise be single words. +.IP +Special postfix `++' and `\-\-' operators increment and decrement +.I name +respectively, i.e. `@ i++'. +.sh "Pre-defined and environment variables" +The following variables have special meaning to the shell. +Of these, +.I argv, +.I cwd, +.I home, +.I path, +.I prompt, +.I shell +and +.I status +are always set by the shell. +Except for +.I cwd +and +.I status +this setting occurs only at initialization; +these variables will not then be modified unless this is done +explicitly by the user. +.PP +This shell copies the environment variable USER into the variable +.I user, +TERM into +.I term, +and +HOME into +.I home, +and copies these back into the environment whenever the normal +shell variables are reset. +The environment variable PATH is likewise handled; it is not +necessary to worry about its setting other than in the file +.I \&.cshrc +as inferior +.I csh +processes will import the definition of +.I path +from the environment, and re-export it if you then change it. +(It could be set once in the +.I \&.login +except that commands through +.IR net (1) +would not see the definition.) +.TP 15 +.B argv +\c +Set to the arguments to the shell, it is from this variable that +positional parameters are substituted, i.e. `$1' is replaced by +`$argv[1]', etc. +.TP 15 +.B cdpath +\c +Gives a list of alternate directories searched to find subdirectories +in +.I chdir +commands. +.TP 15 +.B cwd +The full pathname of the current directory. +.TP 15 +.B echo +\c +Set when the +.B \-x +command line option is given. +Causes each command and its arguments +to be echoed just before it is executed. +For non-builtin commands all expansions occur before echoing. +Builtin commands are echoed before command and filename substitution, +since these substitutions are then done selectively. +.TP 15 +.B history +\c +Can be given a numeric value to control the size of the history list. +Any command which has been referenced in this many events will not be +discarded. +Too large values of +.I history +may run the shell out of memory. +The last executed command is always saved on the history list. +.TP 15 +.B home +\c +The home directory of the invoker, initialized from the environment. +The filename expansion of `\fB~\fR' refers to this variable. +.TP 15 +.B ignoreeof +\c +If set the shell ignores +end-of-file from input devices which are terminals. +This prevents shells from accidentally being killed by control-D's. +.TP 15 +.B mail +\c +The files where the shell checks for mail. +This is done after each command completion which will result in a prompt, +if a specified interval has elapsed. +The shell says `You have new mail.' +if the file exists with an access time not greater than its modify time. +.IP +If the first word of the value of +.I mail +is numeric it specifies a different mail checking interval, in seconds, +than the default, which is 10 minutes. +.IP +If multiple mail files are specified, then the shell says +`New mail in +.IR name ' +when there is mail in the file +.I name. +.TP 15 +.B noclobber +\c +As described in the section on +.I Input/output, +restrictions are placed on output redirection to insure that +files are not accidentally destroyed, and that `>>' redirections +refer to existing files. +.TP 15 +.B noglob +\c +If set, filename expansion is inhibited. +This is most useful in shell scripts which are not dealing with filenames, +or after a list of filenames has been obtained and further expansions +are not desirable. +.TP 15 +.B nonomatch +\c +If set, it is not an error for a filename expansion to not match any +existing files; rather the primitive pattern is returned. +It is still an error for the primitive pattern to be malformed, i.e. +`echo [' still gives an error. +.TP 15 +.B notify +\c +If set, the shell notifies asynchronously of job completions. The +default is to rather present job completions just before printing +a prompt. +.TP 15 +.B path +\c +Each word of the path variable specifies a directory in which +commands are to be sought for execution. +A null word specifies the current directory. +If there is no +.I path +variable then only full path names will execute. +The usual search path is `.', `/bin' and `/usr/bin', but this +may vary from system to system. +For the super-user the default search path is `/etc', `/bin' and `/usr/bin'. +A shell which is given neither the +.B \-c +nor the +.B \-t +option will normally hash the contents of the directories in the +.I path +variable after reading +.I \&.cshrc, +and each time the +.I path +variable is reset. If new commands are added to these directories +while the shell is active, it may be necessary to give the +.I rehash +or the commands may not be found. +.TP 15 +.B prompt +\c +The string which is printed before each command is read from +an interactive terminal input. +If a `!' appears in the string it will be replaced by the current event number +unless a preceding `\e' is given. +Default is `% ', or `# ' for the super-user. +.TP 15 +.B shell +\c +The file in which the shell resides. +This is used in forking shells to interpret files which have execute +bits set, but which are not executable by the system. +(See the description of +.I "Non-builtin Command Execution" +below.) +Initialized to the (system-dependent) home of the shell. +.TP 15 +.B status +\c +The status returned by the last command. +If it terminated abnormally, then 0200 is added to the status. +Builtin commands which fail return exit status `1', +all other builtin commands set status `0'. +.TP 15 +.B time +\c +Controls automatic timing of commands. +If set, then any command which takes more than this many cpu seconds +will cause a line giving user, system, and real times and a utilization +percentage which is the ratio of user plus system times to real time +to be printed when it terminates. +.TP 15 +.B verbose +\c +Set by the +.B \-v +command line option, causes the words of each command to be printed +after history substitution. +.sh "Non-builtin command execution" +When a command to be executed is found to not be a builtin command +the shell attempts to execute the command via +.IR exec (2). +Each word in the variable +.I path +names a directory from which the shell will attempt to execute the command. +If it is given neither a +.B \-c +nor a +.B \-t +option, the shell will hash the names in these directories into an internal +table so that it will only try an +.I exec +in a directory if there is a possibility that the command resides there. +This greatly speeds command location when a large number of directories +are present in the search path. +If this mechanism has been turned off (via +.I unhash), +or if the shell was given a +.B \-c +or +.B \-t +argument, and in any case for each directory component of +.I path +which does not begin with a `/', +the shell concatenates with the given command name to form a path name +of a file which it then attempts to execute. +.PP +Parenthesized commands are always executed in a subshell. +Thus `(cd ; pwd) ; pwd' prints the +.I home +directory; leaving you where you were (printing this after the home directory), +while `cd ; pwd' leaves you in the +.I home +directory. +Parenthesized commands are most often used to prevent +.I chdir +from affecting the current shell. +.PP +If the file has execute permissions but is not an +executable binary to the system, then it is assumed to be a +file containing shell commands an a new shell is spawned to read it. +.PP +If there is an +.I alias +for +.I shell +then the words of the alias will be prepended to the argument list to form +the shell command. +The first word of the +.I alias +should be the full path name of the shell +(e.g. `$shell'). +Note that this is a special, late occurring, case of +.I alias +substitution, +and only allows words to be prepended to the argument list without modification. +.sh "Argument list processing" +If argument 0 to the shell is `\-' then this +is a login shell. +The flag arguments are interpreted as follows: +.TP 5 +.B \-c +\c +Commands are read from the (single) following argument which must +be present. +Any remaining arguments are placed in +.I argv. +.TP 5 +.B \-e +\c +The shell exits if any invoked command terminates abnormally +or yields a non-zero exit status. +.TP 5 +.B \-f +\c +The shell will start faster, because it will neither search for nor +execute commands from the file +`\&.cshrc' in the invokers home directory. +.TP 5 +.B \-i +\c +The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level input, +even if it appears to not be a terminal. +Shells are interactive without this option if their inputs +and outputs are terminals. +.TP 5 +.B \-n +\c +Commands are parsed, but not executed. +This may aid in syntactic checking of shell scripts. +.TP 5 +.B \-s +\c +Command input is taken from the standard input. +.TP 5 +.B \-t +\c +A single line of input is read and executed. +A `\e' may be used to escape the newline at the end of this +line and continue onto another line. +.TP 5 +.B \-v +\c +Causes the +.I verbose +variable to be set, with the effect +that command input is echoed after history substitution. +.TP 5 +.B \-x +\c +Causes the +.I echo +variable to be set, so that commands are echoed immediately before execution. +.TP 5 +.B \-V +\c +Causes the +.I verbose +variable to be set even before `\&.cshrc' is executed. +.TP 5 +.B \-X +\c +Is to +.B \-x +as +.B \-V +is to +.B \-v. +.PP +After processing of flag arguments if arguments remain but none of the +.B \-c, +.B \-i, +.B \-s, +or +.B \-t +options was given the first argument is taken as the name of a file of +commands to be executed. +The shell opens this file, and saves its name for possible resubstitution +by `$0'. +Since many systems use either the standard version 6 or version 7 shells +whose shell scripts are not compatible with this shell, the shell will +execute such a `standard' shell if the first character of a script +is not a `#', i.e. if the script does not start with a comment. +Remaining arguments initialize the variable +.I argv. +.sh "Signal handling" +The shell normally ignores +.I quit +signals. +Jobs running detached (either by `&' or the \fIbg\fR or \fB%... &\fR +commands) are immune to signals generated from the keyboard, including +hangups. +Other signals have the values which the shell inherited from its parent. +The shells handling of interrupts and terminate signals +in shell scripts can be controlled by +.I onintr. +Login shells catch the +.I terminate +signal; otherwise this signal is passed on to children from the state in the +shell's parent. +In no case are interrupts allowed when a login shell is reading the file +`\&.logout'. +.SH AUTHOR +William Joy. +Job control and directory stack features first implemented by J.E. Kulp of +I.I.A.S.A, Laxenburg, Austria, +with different syntax than that used now. +.SH FILES +.ta 1.75i +.nf +~/.cshrc Read at beginning of execution by each shell. +~/.login Read by login shell, after `.cshrc' at login. +~/.logout Read by login shell, at logout. +/bin/sh Standard shell, for shell scripts not starting with a `#'. +/tmp/sh* Temporary file for `<<'. +/etc/passwd Source of home directories for `~name'. +.fi +.SH LIMITATIONS +Words can be no longer than 1024 characters. +The system limits argument lists to 10240 characters. +The number of arguments to a command which involves filename expansion +is limited to 1/6'th the number of characters allowed in an argument list. +Command substitutions may substitute no more characters than are +allowed in an argument list. +To detect looping, the shell restricts the number of +.I alias +substititutions on a single line to 20. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +sh(1), newcsh(1), access(2), exec(2), fork(2), killpg(2), pipe(2), sigsys(2), +umask(2), vlimit(2), wait(2), jobs(3), sigset(3), tty(4), a.out(5), environ(5), +`An introduction to the C shell' +.SH BUGS +When a command is restarted from a stop, +the shell prints the directory it started in if this is different +from the current directory; this can be misleading (i.e. wrong) +as the job may have changed directories internally. +.PP +Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. +Command sequences of the form `a ; b ; c' are also not handled gracefully +when stopping is attempted. If you suspend `b', the shell will then +immediately execute `c'. This is especially noticeable if this +expansion results from an +.I alias. +It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to force it to +a subshell, i.e. `( a ; b ; c )'. +.PP +Control over tty output after processes are started is primitive; +perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good virtual +terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface much more +interesting things could be done with output control. +.PP +Alias substitution is most often used to clumsily simulate shell procedures; +shell procedures should be provided rather than aliases. +.PP +Commands within loops, prompted for by `?', are not placed in the +.I history +list. +Control structure should be parsed rather than being recognized as built-in +commands. This would allow control commands to be placed anywhere, +to be combined with `|', and to be used with `&' and `;' metasyntax. +.PP +It should be possible to use the `:' modifiers on the output of command +substitutions. +All and more than one `:' modifier should be allowed on `$' substitutions. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ctags.1 b/static/v10/man1/ctags.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..184739e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ctags.1 @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +.TH CTAGS 1 +.UC 4 +.SH NAME +ctags \- create a tags file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ctags +[ +.B \-BFatuwx +] +name ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ctags +makes a tags file for +.IR ex (1) +from the specified C, Pascal and Fortran sources. +A tags file gives the locations of specified objects (in this case +functions and typedefs) in a group of files. Each line of the tags +file contains the object name, the file in which it is defined, and +an address specification for the object definition. Functions are +searched with a pattern, typedefs with a line number. Specifiers are +given in separate fields on the line, separated by blanks or tabs. +Using the +.I tags +file, +.I ex +can quickly find these objects definitions. +.PP +If the +.B \-x +flag is given, +.I ctags +produces a list of object names, the line number and file +name on which each is defined, as well as the text of that line +and prints this on the standard output. This is a simple index +which can be printed out as an off-line readable function index. +.PP +Files whose name ends in +.B \.c +or +.B \.h +are assumed to be C source files and are searched for C routine and +macro definitions. +Others are first examined to see if they contain any Pascal or +Fortran routine definitions; if not, they are processed again +looking for C definitions. +.PP +Other options are: +.TP 5 +.B \-F +use forward searching patterns (/.../) (default). +.TP 5 +.B \-B +use backward searching patterns (?...?). +.TP 5 +.B \-a +append to tags file. +.TP 5 +.B \-t +create tags for typedefs. +.TP 5 +.B \-w +suppressing warning diagnostics. +.TP 5 +.B \-u +causing the specified files to be +.I updated +in tags, that is, all references to them are deleted, +and the new values are appended to the file. +(Beware: this option is implemented in a way which is rather slow; +it is usually faster to simply rebuild the +.I tags +file.) +.PP +The tag +.I main +is treated specially in C programs. +The tag formed is created by prepending +.I M +to the name of the file, with a trailing .c removed, if +any, and leading pathname components also removed. +This makes use of +.I ctags +practical in directories with more than one program. +.SH FILES +.DT +tags output tags file +.SH SEE ALSO +ex(1), vi(1) +.SH AUTHOR +Ken Arnold; FORTRAN added by Jim Kleckner; Bill Joy +added Pascal and +.B \-x, +replacing +.I cxref; +C typedefs added by Ed Pelegri-Llopart. +.SH BUGS +Recognition of \fBfunctions\fR, \fBsubroutines\fR and \fBprocedures\fR +for FORTRAN and Pascal is done is a very simpleminded way. +No attempt is made to deal with block structure; if you have two +Pascal procedures in different blocks with the same name you lose. +.PP +The method of deciding whether to look for C or Pascal and FORTRAN +functions is a hack. +.PP +Does not know about #ifdefs. +.PP +Should know about Pascal types. +Relies on the input being well formed to detect typedefs. +Use of -tx shows only the last line of typedefs. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cu.1 b/static/v10/man1/cu.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8e365ce8 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cu.1 @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ +.TH CU 1 +.CT 1 comm_mach +.SH NAME +cu, ct \- call out to a terminal or another system +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cu +[ +.B -htn +] [ +.B -p +.I parity +] [ +.B -s +.I speed +] +.I telno +[ +.I service-class +] +.PP +.B ct +[ option ... +] +.I phone-number +[ +.I service-class +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Cu +places a data call to a given telephone number +and expects a computer to answer. +It manages an interactive conversation with possible +transfers of text files. +.I Telno +is the telephone number, consisting of digits with minus signs at appropriate +places to indicate delay for second or subsequent dial tones. +A telephone number may also be expressed symbolically. +A symbolic number is looked up in the files +.F $HOME/lib/cunumber +and +.F /usr/lib/cunumber +whose lines look like this: +.IP +symbolic-number +actual-number +service-class +comment +.LP +The actual number +may be preceded by options +such as +.BR \-t . +The +.I comment, +if present, is printed out when the connection is made. +.PP +The options are +.TP +.B -n +Print the the called number but do not call it. +.TP +.B -t +Tandem: +use DC1/DC3 +.RB (control- S /control- Q ) +protocol to stop transmission from +the remote system when the local terminal buffers are almost full. +This argument should only be used if the remote system +understands that protocol. +.TP +.B -h +Half-duplex: +echo locally the characters that are sent to the remote system. +.TP +.BI -s " speed" +Set the line speed; +.L 1200 +means 1200 baud, etc. +The default depends on service class. +.TP +.BI -p " parity" +Set the parity of transmitted characters: +.BR 0 , +.BR 1 , +.BR e , +.BR o +mean +zero, +one, +even, +odd parity. +.B 0 +is the default. +.PP +The service class is expressed as in +.IR dialout (3). +A special class +.L direct +causes the +.I telno +argument to be taken +as the pathname +of a terminal line. +.I Cu +opens the file, +sets line speed and other modes, +and proceeds as if connected. +The default line speed is +9600 baud. +.PP +An explicit service class on the command line overrides +any specified in a +.L cunumber +file. +.PP +After making the connection, +.I cu +runs as two processes: +the sending +process reads the standard input and +passes most of it to the remote system; +the receiving +process reads from the remote system and passes +most data to the standard output. +Lines beginning with +.L ~ +have special meanings. +.PP +The sending +process interprets: +.TP `\fL~%break\ 'u +.B ~. +.br +.ns +.TP +.BR ~ EOT +Terminate the conversation. +.TP +.BI ~< file +Send the contents of +.I file +to the remote system, +as though typed at the terminal. +.TP +.B ~! +Invoke an interactive shell on the local system. +.TP +.BI ~! cmd +Run the command on the local system +(via +.LR "sh -c" ). +.TP +.BI ~$ cmd +Run the command locally and send its output +to the remote system. +.TP +.B ~b +.br +.ns +.TP +.B ~%break +Send a break (300 ms space). +.TP +.BI ~%take " from \fR[\fIto\fR]" +Copy file +.I from +(on the remote system) +to file +.I to +on the local system. +If +.I to +is omitted, +the +.I from +name is used both places. +.TP +.BI ~%put " from \fR[\fIto\fR]" +Copy file +.I from +(on local system) +to file +.I to +on remote system. +If +.I to +is omitted, the +.I from +name is used both places. +.TP +.BI ~~ text +send +the line +.BI ~ text . +.PD +.PP +WARNING: Using +.I cu +to reach your home machine from a machine you don't trust +can be hazardous to your password. +.PP +.I Ct +places a telephone call to a remote terminal +and allows a user to log in on that terminal +in the normal fashion. +The terminal must be equipped with an auto-answer +modem. +.PP +The +phone number and service class +are as in +.I cu. +The options are +.TP +.BI -c " count" +If the number doesn't answer, try +.I count +times before giving up (default 5). +.TP +.BI -w " interval +Space retries +.I interval +seconds apart (default 60). +.TP +.B -h +Try to hang up the phone before placing the +call. +This is useful for a +`call me right back' arrangement. +.SH FILES +.F /usr/lib/cunumber +.br +.F $HOME/lib/cunumber +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR con (1), +.IR ttyld (4), +.IR dialout (3) +.SH BUGS +Unless erase and kill characters are the same on the two machines, +they will be damaged by +.BR ~%put . +.br +.B ~%take +uses +.BR ~> +at the beginning of line to synchronize transmission. +This sequence can cause misfunction if it is received +for any other purpose. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cut.1 b/static/v10/man1/cut.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6394f788 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cut.1 @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ +.TH CUT 1 +.CT 1 files +.SH NAME +cut, paste \- rearrange columns of data +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B cut +.BI -c list +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B cut +.BI -f list +[ +.BI -d char +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B paste +[ +.B -s +] +[ +.BI -d chars +] +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Cut +selects fields from each line of the +.I files +(standard input default). +In data base parlance, it +projects a relation. +The fields +can be fixed length, +as on a punched card (option +.BR -c ), +or be marked with a delimiter character (option +.BR -f ). +.PP +The meanings of the options follow. +A +.I list +is an increasing sequence of integers separated by commas, or by +.B - +to indicate a range, for example +.L 1,3-5,7. +.TF -d\ char\ \ +.PD +.TP +.BI -c list +The +.I list +specifies character +positions. +.TP +.BI -f list +The +.I list +specifies field numbers. +.TP +.BI -d char +The character +is the delimiter for option +.BR -f . +Default is tab. +.TP +.B -s +Suppress lines with no delimiter characters. +Normally such lines pass through untouched under option +.BR -f . +.PP +.I Paste +concatenates corresponding lines of the input +.I files +and places the result on the standard output. +The file name +.L - +refers to the standard input. +Lines are glued together with +characters taken circularly from the set +.I chars. +The set may contain the special escape sequences +.B \en +(newline), +.B \et +(tab), +.B \e\e +(backslash), and +.B \e0 +(empty string, not a null character). +The options are +.TP +.BI -d chars +The output separator characters. +Default is a tab. +.TP +.B -s +Paste together lines of one file, +treating every line as if it came from a distinct input. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +cut -d: -f1,3 /etc/passwd +Print map from login names to userids, see +.IR passwd (5). +.TP +.L +NAME=`who am i | cut -f1 -d" "` +Set +.L NAME +to current login name (subtly different from +.IR getuid (1)). +.PP +.EX +ls | paste - - - - +ls | paste -s '-d\et\en' - +.EE +.ns +.IP +4-column and 2-column file listing +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR gre (1), +.IR awk (1), +.IR sed (1), +.IR pr (1), +.IR column (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Cut +should handle disordered lists under option +.BR -f . +.br +In default of file names, +.I paste +should read the the standard input. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/cvt.1 b/static/v10/man1/cvt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..892d6f15 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/cvt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +1 1 1 1 1 1 1.000000 1.000000 +2 2 2 2 2 2 2.000000 2.000000 +3 3 3 3 3 3 3.000000 3.000000 +4 4 4 4 4 4 4.000000 4.000000 +5 5 5 5 5 5 5.000000 5.000000 +6 6 6 6 6 6 6.000000 6.000000 +7 7 7 7 7 7 7.000000 7.000000 +8 8 8 8 8 8 8.000000 8.000000 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/d202.1 b/static/v10/man1/d202.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0817688 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/d202.1 @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +.TH D202 1 +.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev +.SH NAME +d202, tc \- typesetter filters +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B d202 +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B e202 +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B tc +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I D202 +and its companions print files +created by +.IR troff (1) +on various devices: +.TP +.I d202 +Mergenthaler Linotron 202 +.PD0 +.TP +.I e202 +same, +with half-tone and extra graphics capability +.PD0 +.TP +.I tc +Tektronix 4014 display +.PD +.PP +If no +.I file +is mentioned, the standard input is printed. +The following options are understood. +.TP +.B -b +Report whether the typesetter is busy; do not print. +.TP +.BI -o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains comma-separated numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IB N1 - N2. +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest-numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.BI -s n +Stop after every +.I n +pages of output. +(Default 1 on 4014). +Proceed when the `RUN' button is pushed on the typesetter +.RI ( d202 ) +or newline on the terminal +.RI ( tc ). +.TP +.B -t +Direct output to the standard output instead of the typesetter. +Don't wait between pages in +.I tc. +.TP +.B -w +Wait for typesetter to become free, then print. +.TP +.BI -f " dir" +Take font information from +directory +.I dir +instead of the default. +.TP +.BI -a "r" +Set the aspect ratio to +.I r +(default +.IR r =1.5). +.I Tc +only. +.PP +While waiting between pages +.I tc +accepts +.BI ! command +to insert a shell command; +.BI + n +to skip forward +.I n +pages; +.BI - n +to skip backwards +.I n +pages; +.BI a r +to set the aspect ratio; +and +.B ? +to print the list of available actions. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/font/dev202/* +.TP +.F /usr/lib/font/dev202/* +202 description files +.PD0 +.PD0 +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR lp (1), +.IR troff (1), +.IR proof (9.1), +.IR apsend (1), +.IR font (5) +.SH BUGS +.I E202, +largely a superset of +.I d202, +should be combined with +.I d202. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dag.1 b/static/v10/man1/dag.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ea92348 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dag.1 @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ +.TH DAG 1 "15 April 1987" +.SH NAME +dag \- preprocessor for DAGs and other directed graphs +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dag +[ +.B \-T\fItype\fP +] [ +.B \-p\fIwidth\fPx\fIheight\fP +[ +.B ,\fImarginwidth\fP +[ +.B x\fImarginheight\fP +] ] +] [ +.B \-O +] [ +.B \-l +] [ files ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dag +is a +.IR pic (1) +or +.IR Postscript +preprocessor for drawing directed graphs. It works well on +directed acyclic graphs and other graphs that can be drawn +as a hierarchy. +.IR dag +selects coordinates for the nodes of the graph and creates a picture. +Input graphs are surrounded by the +.I troff +`commands' +.B \&.GS +and +.BR \&.GE . +The graph contains nodes, edges, and optional control statements. +Statements are semicolon terminated. Here is a brief summary: +.PP +\fBedge from\fP \fItail\fP \fBto\fP \fIhead0 edge-items, \fBto\fP head1 edge-items, \fBto\fP head2 edge-items... \fR: creates edges from the tail node +to the head nodes (or node). Nodes are implicitly created if they do +not already exist. \fIedge-items\fP (which apply to the +edge just made, as described below) and the noisewords \fBedge\fP, +\fBfrom\fP, and \fBto\fP are optional. Node names may be quoted +to avoid conflicting with keywords. +.PP +\fBordered\fP \fI tail head0 head1 head2... \fR: makes edges and also +constrains the left-to-right order of the head nodes and keeps them +on the same rank. May contain noisewords and edge-items. +.PP +\fBpath\fP \fI node0 node1 node2...\fR: creates a path of edges. +May contain noisewords and edge-items. +.PP +\fBbackedge\fP \fItail head0 head1 head2...\fR: creates edges that +point backward (up or left). +.PP +\fBbackpath\fP \fInode0 node1 node2...\fR: makes a path of backedges. +.PP +\fBdraw nodes\fP \fInode-items\fP: Changes default definition for all nodes +subsequently created. \fInode-items\fP are: \fBas\fP \fIshape\fP +(standard shapes are \fBBox, Circle, Ellipse, Diamond, Square,\fP +and \fBPlaintext\fP), \fBlabel\fR \fIstring\fP, +\fBpointsize\fP \fIn\fP, \fBwidth\fP \fIn\fP, +\fBheight\fP \fIn\fP, \fBcolor\fP \fIstring\fP. Dimensions are +in inches. \fIcolor\fP only works with PostScript and should evaluate +to an HSB triple. +.PP +\fBdraw\fP \fInodelist\fP \fInode-items\fP: controls drawing (shapes, +labels, etc.) of nodes in the list. +.PP +\fBdraw edges\fP \fIedge-items\fP: Changes default definition of edges +subsequently created. \fIedge-items\fP are: \fBdotted, dashed, solid\fP, +or \fBinvis\fP, \fBlabel\fP \fIstring\fP, \fBweight\fP \fIn\fP, +\fBcolor\fP \fIstring\fP, \fBpointsize\fP \fIn\fP. +.PP +\fBminimum rank\fP \fInodelist\fP: constrains nodes +to be on the topmost rank (or leftmost if drawn with .GR). +.PP +\fBmaximum rank\fP \fInodelist\fP: bottommost or rightmost rank. +.PP +\fBsame rank\fP \fInodelist\fP: constrains nodes to be +placed on the same rank. +.PP +\fBseparate ranks\fP \fIn\fP \fBequally\fP or \fBexactly\fP: +sets separation between ranks. +\fBexactly\fP means rank separation is fixed. +\fBequally\fP means that all ranks have the same separation. +.PP +The \fB\-O\fP option requests ``optimal'' node placement. This makes +slightly better layouts, but is only practical for graphs of a few +dozen nodes. +.PP +Output languages other than +.IR pic +are requested with \fB\-T\fP: \fB\-Tps\fP for PostScript, \fB\-Tsimple\fP +for a simple format similar to that of the Ninth Edition Unix \fIgraphdraw\fP +editor, and \fB\-Tcip\fP for a simplified form of \fIpic\fP code that +can be read by the obsolescent \fIcip\fP editor. PostScript drawings +are paginated by giving the \fB\-p\fP option to set page dimensions. +Default margins are one-half inch. +Although the margins can be set to zero, Laserwriters have hard margins +that prevent making seamless mosaics. +The \fB\-p\fP option replaces the \fIPoster\fP +program from CIA, which is inefficient for large drawings +because of quadratic behavior. +.PP +The \fB\-l\fP option disables automatic loading of the +.IR dag +graphics library. +.PP +A graph is drawn with left-to-right edges by using .GR +instead of .GS. The maximum height and width of the drawing may +be given on the .GS/.GR line. The optional keyword \fBfill\fP at +the end of this line makes \fIdag\fP adjust node positions +to fill the bounding box. +In-line graphics code such as \fIpic\fP or PostScript macros +may be defined in a block between \fB.PS\fP and \fB.PE\fP. +.PP +If \fIdag\fP is installed under EXPTOOLS, it uses the standard +\fBTOOLS\fP environment variable to find its libraries. +.SH "EXAMPLE" +.br +\&.GS 6 8 fill +.br +a b c; +.br +path a x y; +.br +draw nodes as Box; +.br +a z label "hi" weight 1000; +.br +draw edges dashed; +.br +b x; +.br +same rank b x; +.br +\&.GE +.br +.SH "BUGS" +\fItroff\fP doesn't have \fBdotted\fP or \fBdashed\fP splines. +Use PostScript. +.PP +\fIdag\fP doesn't keep edge labels from accidentally overlapping. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.I +E. R. Gansner, S. C. North, K. P. Vo, "DAG \(em A Graph Drawing Program," +TM 59554-871019-04TM. +.br diff --git a/static/v10/man1/date.1 b/static/v10/man1/date.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ec8af09 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/date.1 @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'DATE (I)'3/15/72'DATE (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME date -- print and set the date +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS date____ [ mmddhhmm ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION If no argument is given, the current date is printed +to the second. +If an argument is given, the current date is set. +mm__ is the month number; +dd__ is the day number in the month; +hh__ is the hour number (24 hour system); +mm__ is the minute number. +For example: + + date 10080045 + +sets the date to Oct 8, 12:45 AM. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO -- +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" if the argument is syntactically incorrect. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/db.1 b/static/v10/man1/db.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..859bd7e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/db.1 @@ -0,0 +1,283 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'DB (I)'3/15/72'DB (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME db -- debug +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS db__ [ core [ namelist ] ] [ -_ ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION Unlike +many debugging packages (including DEC's ODT, on +which db__ is loosely based) db__ is not loaded as part of the +core image which it is used to examine; instead it examines files. +Typically, the file will be either a core image produced +after a fault or the binary output of +the assembler. +Core____ is the file being debugged; if omitted "core" is assumed. +namelist________ is a file containing a symbol table. +If it is omitted, +the symbol table is obtained from the +file being debugged, +or if not there from a.out_____. +If no appropriate name list file +can be found, db__ can still be used but some of its symbolic +facilities become unavailable. + +For the meaning of the optional third argument, see +the last paragraph below. +.sp +The format for most db__ requests is an address followed +by a one character command. +.sp +Addresses are expressions built up as follows: +.sp +.in +6 +.un 3 +1. A name has the value assigned to it +when the input file was assembled. +It may be relocatable or not depending +on the use of the name during the assembly. +.br +.un 3 +.sp +2. An octal number is an absolute quantity with the appropriate +value. +.br +.un 3 +.sp +3. A decimal number immediately followed by "." is +an absolute quantity with the appropriate value. +.br +.un 3 +.sp +4. An octal number immediately followed by "r" is a relocatable +quantity with the appropriate value. +.br +.un 3 +.sp +5. The symbol "." indicates the current pointer +of db__. The current pointer is set by many db__ requests. + +.ti -3 +6. A "*" before +an expression forms an expression whose value is the +number in the word addressed by the first expression. +A "*" alone is equivalent to "*.". + +.ti -3 +6. Expressions separated by "+" or " " (blank) are expressions +with value equal to the sum of the components. At most +one of the components may be relocatable. +.br +.un 3 +.sp +8. Expressions separated by "-" form an expression +with value equal to the difference to the components. +If the right component is relocatable, the left component +must be relocatable. +.br +.un 3 +.sp +9. Expressions are evaluated left to right. +.sp 1 +.in -6 +Names for registers are +built in: +.sp + r0 ... r5 + sp + pc + fr0 ... fr5 +.sp +These may be examined. +Their values are deduced from the contents +of the stack in a core image file. They are meaningless +in a file that is not a core image. +.sp +If no address is given for a command, the current address +(also specified by ".") is assumed. In general, "." +points to the last word or byte printed by db__. +.sp +There are db__ commands for examining locations +interpreted as octal numbers, machine instructions, +ASCII characters, and addresses. +For numbers and characters, either bytes +or words may be examined. +The following commands are used to examine the specified file. +.sp +.in +6 +.un 3 +/ The addressed word is printed in octal. + +.un 3 +\\ The addressed byte is printed in octal. + +.un 3 +" The addressed word is printed as two ASCII characters. + +.un 3 +' The addressed byte is printed as an ASCII character. +.ti -3 + +` The addressed word is printed in decimal. + +.un 3 +? The addressed word is interpreted as a machine +instruction and a symbolic form of the instruction, +including symbolic addresses, is printed. +Often, the result will appear exactly as it was written +in the source program. +.br +.un 3 + +& The addressed word is interpreted as a symbolic address +and is printed as the name of the symbol whose value is closest +to the addressed word, possibly followed by a signed offset. +.br +.un 3 + + (i. e., the character "new line") This command advances +the current location counter "." and prints the resulting +location in the mode last specified by +one of the above requests. +.br +.un 3 + +^ This character decrements "." and prints the +resulting location in the mode last selected +one of the above requests. It is a converse to . + +.un 3 +% Exit. +.sp +.in -6 +Odd addresses to word-oriented commands are rounded +down. +The incrementing and decrementing +of "." done by the and ^ requests is by one or +two depending on whether the last command +was word or byte oriented. +.sp +The address portion of any of the above commands +may be followed by a comma and then by an +expression. In this case that number of sequential +words or bytes specified by the expression is printed. +"." is advanced so that it points at the +last thing printed. +.sp +There are two commands to interpret the value +of expressions. +.sp +.in +6 +.un 3 += When preceded by an expression, the value of the expression +is typed in octal. +When not preceded by an expression, the value of "." is +indicated. +This command does not change the value of ".". +.br +.un 3 + +: An attempt is made to print the given expression +as a symbolic address. If the expression is relocatable, +that symbol is found whose value is nearest +that of the expression, and the symbol is typed, followed by +a sign and the appropriate offset. +If the value of the expression is absolute, a symbol +with exactly the indicated value is sought and +printed if found; if no matching symbol is discovered, the +octal value of the expression is given. +.sp +.in -6 +The following command may be used to patch the file being debugged. +.sp +.in +6 +.un 3 +! This command must be preceded by an expression. +The value of the expression is stored at the location +addressed by the current value of ".". +The opcodes do not appear in the symbol +table, so the user must assemble them by hand. + +.sp +.in -6 +The following command is used after a fault has caused +a core image file to be produced. +.sp +.in +6 +.un 3 +$ causes the fault type and +the contents of the general registers and +several other registers to be printed both in octal and symbolic +format. +The values are as they were at the time of the fault. +.sp +.in -6 +Db__ should not be used to examine special files, +for example disks and tapes, since it reads one byte +at a time. +Use od(I) instead. + +For some purposes, it is important to know how addresses +typed by the user correspond with +locations in the file being debugged. +The mapping algorithm employed by db__ is non-trivial +for two reasons: +First, in an a.out_____ file, there is a 20(8) byte header +which will not appear when the file is loaded into +core for execution. +Therefore, apparent location 0 should correspond +with actual file offset 20. +Second, some systems cause a "squashed" core +image to be written. +In such a core +image, addresses in the stack must be mapped +according to the degree of squashing +which has been employed. +Db__ obeys the following rules: + +If exactly one argument is given, and if it appears +to be an a.out_____ file, the 20-byte header is skipped +during addressing, i.e., 20 is added to all addresses typed. +As a consequence, the header can be examined +beginning at location -20. + +If exactly one argument is given and if the file does +not appear to be an a.out_____ file, no mapping is done. + +If zero or two arguments are given, +the mapping appropriate to a core image file is employed. +This means that locations above the program break +and below the stack +effectively do not exist (and are not, in fact, recorded +in the core file). +Locations above the user's stack pointer are mapped, +in looking at the core file, to +the place where they are really stored. +The per-process data kept by the +system, which is stored in the last 512(10) bytes +of the core file, +can be addressed at apparent locations 160000-160777. + +If one wants to examine +a file which has an associated name list, +but is not a core image file, the last argument "-" +can be used (actually the only purpose of the +last argument is to make the number of +arguments not equal to two). +This feature is used most frequently in +examining the memory file /dev/mem. + +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO as(I), core(V), a.out(V), od(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "File not found" if the first argument +cannot be read; otherwise "?". +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dc.1 b/static/v10/man1/dc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06e48454 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'DC (I)'1/15/73'DC (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME dc -- desk calculator +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS dc__ [file] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION dc__ +is an arbitrary precision integer arithmetic package. +The overall structure of dc is +a stacking (reverse Polish) calculator. +The following constructions are recognized +by the calculator: +.sp +.in +3 +.ti -3 +number +.br +The value of the number is pushed on the stack. +A number is an unbroken string of the digits 0-9. +It may be preceded by an underscore (_) to input a +negative number. +.sp +.ti -3 ++_ -_ *_ /_ %_ ^_ +.br +The top two values on the stack are added (+_), +subtracted (-_), multiplied (*_), divided (/_), +remaindered (%_) or exponentiated (^). +The two entries are popped off the stack; +the result is pushed on the stack in their place. +.sp +.ti -3 +s_x +.br +The top of the stack is popped and stored into +a register named x, where x may be any character. +.sp +.ti -3 +l_x +.br +The value in register x is pushed on the stack. +The register x is not altered. +All registers start with zero value. +.sp +.ti -3 +d_ +.br +The top value on the stack is pushed on the stack. +Thus the top value is duplicated. +.sp +.ti -3 +p_ +.br +The top value on the stack is printed. +The top value remains unchanged. +.sp +.ti -3 +f_ +.br +All values on the stack and in registers are printed. +.sp +.ti -3 +.ul 1 +q +.br +exits the program. If executing a string, the nesting level is +popped by two. +.sp +.ti -3 +.ul +x +.br +treats the top element of the stack as a character string +and executes it as a string of dc commands. +.sp +.ti -3 +[...]_____ +.br +puts the bracketed ascii string onto the top of the stack. +.sp +.ti -3 +<_x =_x >_x +.br +The top two elements of the stack are popped and compared. +Register x is executed if they obey the stated +relation. +.sp +.ti -3 +.ul +v +.br +replaces the top element on the stack by its square root. +.sp +.ti -3 +!_ +.br +interprets the rest of the line as a UNIX command. +.sp +.ti -3 +c_ +.br +All values on the stack are popped. +.sp +.ti -3 +i_ +.br +The top value on the stack is popped and used as the +number radix for further input. +.sp +.ti -3 +o_ +.br +the top value on the stack is popped and used as the +number radix for further output. +.sp +.ti -3 +z_ +.br +the stack level is pushed onto the stack. +.sp +.ti -3 +?_ +.br +a line of input is taken from the input source (usually the console) +and executed. +.sp +.ti -3 +new-line +.br +ignored except as the name of a register or to end the +response to a ?_. +.sp +.ti -3 +space +.br +ignored except as the name of a register or to terminate a number. +.br +.sp +.in -3 +If a file name is given, input is taken from that file until +end-of-file, then input is taken from the console. +.sp +An example to +calculate the monthly, weekly and +hourly rates for a $10,000/year salary. +.sp +.nf +.in +3 +10000 +100* (now in cents) +dsa (non-destructive store) +12/ (pennies per month) +la52/ (pennies per week) +d10* (deci-pennies per week) +375/ (pennies per hour) +f (print all results) + 512 + 19230 + 83333 +"a" 1000000 +.sp +.in -3 +An example which prints the first ten values of n! is +.in +3 +[la1+dsa*pla10>x]sx +0sa1 +lxx +.sp +.fi +.in -3 +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO msh(VII), salloc(III) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS (x) ? for unrecognized character x. +.br +(x) ? for not enough elements on the stack to do what was asked +by command x. +.br +"Out of space" when the free list is exhausted (too many digits). +.br +"Out of headers" for too many numbers being kept around. +.br +"Out of pushdown" for too many items on the stack. +.br +"Nesting Depth" for too many levels of nested execution. +.sp +.ti 0 +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dcon.1 b/static/v10/man1/dcon.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..575102dc --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dcon.1 @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +.TH DCON 1 +.CT 1 comm_mach +.SH NAME +dcon, ndcon, rlogin, nrx, rsh, scriptcon \- remote login and execution +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dcon +[ +.I option ... +] +.I machine +.PP +.B ndcon +.I machine +.PP +.B rlogin +.I machine +.PP +.B nrx +.I machine +[ +.I command-word ... +] +.PP +.B rsh +[ +.I option ... +] +.I machine +[ +.I command-word ... +] +.PP +.B scriptcon +.I machine script +.SH DESCRIPTION +Do not read this page unless you are familiar with +.IR con (1). +.PP +.I Dcon, +.I ndcon, +and +.I rlogin +are analogs (or special cases) of +.IR con (1) +for specific kinds of network connection. +They support the same local escape convention with the quit signal. +.PP +Similarly, +.I nrx +and +.I rsh +are analogs of +.IR rx. +.PP +Network addresses are as in +.IR con (1). +The default networks for the various commands are +.TP "\w'dcon, ndcon, nrx 'u +.I dcon, ndcon, nrx +.B dk +.TP +.I rlogin, rsh +.B tcp +.PP +.I Dcon +connects to the remote machine, and attempts +automatically to log in under +the login id of the invoking user. +Option +.BR -l +turns off automatic login; the remote machine will ask +for a login id and password. +.PP +.I Ndcon +behaves like +.I dcon +but provides a more transparent +transport protocol. +In particular terminal line disciplines are preserved +and it is possible to download into a +.IR mux (9.1) +window across an +.I ndcon +connection. +.PP +.I Rlogin +is like +.IR dcon , +but uses the connection protocol +found on Berkeley systems. +.PP +.I Rx +(see +.IR con (1)) +executes one shell command on the remote machine +as if logged in there, +with local standard input and output. +It uses a connection protocol specific to Research machines. +.PP +.I Nrx +is to +.I rx +as +.I ndcon +is to +.IR dcon : +it runs a command +remotely with line discipline preserved. +.PP +.I Rsh +is to +.I rx +as +.I rlogin +is to +.IR dcon : +it runs a command remotely using the Berkeley execution protocol. +.PP +.I Scriptcon +provides a connection like +.BR "dcon \-l" , +except that the login and other initial protocol are +controlled by a +.I script +file. +The first line of the file gives a string (e.g.\& +.LR login: ) +expected from the +remote machine; the second gives the local response, and +so on in alternation. +Unrecognized data from the remote machine are ignored. +Warning: a script that contains a password +may compromise the security of the remote system, hence +.I scriptcon +should be used only for restricted logins. +.PP +.I Con +tries to connect using the protocol of +.IR ndcon ; +if that fails, +it tries that of +.IR dcon , +then that of +.IR rlogin . +.I Rx +attempts its own style of connection; +if that fails, +it tries that of +.IR rsh . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR con (1), +.IR dkmgr (8), +.IR svcmgr (8), +.IR tcpmgr (8), +.IR ipc (3) +.br +D. L. Presotto, +`Interprocess Communication in the Eighth Edition +.SM UNIX +System', +this manual, Volume\ 2 +.SH BUGS +If a program run by +.I nrx +won't let go, for example by ignoring +signals, there is no way of getting out short of hanging up. +.br +There is no error correction or retry in a +.I scriptcon +script. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dd.1 b/static/v10/man1/dd.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d4aa458d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dd.1 @@ -0,0 +1,242 @@ +.TH DD 1 +.CT 1 files comm_dev +.SH NAME +dd, dblbuf \- convert and copy a file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dd +[ +.I option=value +] +... +.PP +.B dblbuf +[ +.B -b +.I blocksize +] +[ +.I file +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dd\^ +copies the specified input file +to the specified output with +possible conversions. +The standard input and output are used by default. +The input and output block size may be +specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O. +The options are +.TP \w'\f5count=\ \fIn'u +.BI if= file\^ +Set the input file (standard input by default). +.TP +.BI of= file\^ +Set the output file (standard output by default). +.TP +.BI ibs= n\^ +Set input block size to +.I n\^ +bytes (default 512). +.TP +.BI obs= n\^ +Set output block size (default 512). +.TP +.BI bs= n\^ +Set both input and output block size, +superseding +.I ibs\^ +and +.IR obs . +If no conversion is specified, +preserve the input block size instead of packing short blocks +into the output buffer. +This is particularly efficient since no in-core copy need be done. +.TP +.BI cbs= n\^ +Set conversion buffer size. +.TP +.BI skip= n\^ +Skip +.I n +input records before copying. +.TP +.BI iseek= n\^ +Seek +.I n +records forward on input file +before copying. +.TP +.BI files= n\^ +Copy and concatenate +.I n +input files (makes sense only +where input is a magnetic tape or similar device). +.TP +.BI oseek= n\^ +Aeek +.I n\^ +records from beginning of output file before copying. +.TP +.BI count= n\^ +Copy only +.I n +input records. +.HP +\f5conv=ascii\ \ \ \ \fRConvert \s-2EBCDIC\s0 to \s-2ASCII\s0. +.PD0 +.RS "\w'\f5conv=\fP'u" +.TP "\w'\f5unblock\ \ \fP'u" +.B ebcdic +Convert +.SM ASCII +to +.SM EBCDIC. +.TP +.B ibm +Like +.B ebcdic +but with a slightly different character map. +.TP +.B block +Convert variable length +.SM ASCII +records to fixed length. +.TP +.B unblock +Convert fixed length +.SM ASCII +records to variable length. +.TP +.B lcase +Map alphabetics to lower case. +.TP +.B ucase +Map alphabetics to upper case. +.TP +.B swab +Swap every pair of bytes. +.TP +.B noerror +Do not stop processing on an error. +.TP +.B sync +Pad every input record to +.I ibs\^ +bytes. +.RE +.PD +.PP +.fi +Where sizes are specified, +a number of bytes is expected. +A number may end with +.LR k , +.LR b , +or +.L w +to specify multiplication by +1024, 512, or 2 respectively; +a pair of numbers may be separated by +.L x +to indicate a product. +Multiple conversions may be specified in the style: +.LR conv=ebcdic,ucase . +.PP +.L Cbs\^ +is used only if +.LR ascii\^ , +.LR unblock\^ , +.LR ebcdic\^ , +.LR ibm\^ , +or +.L block\^ +conversion is specified. +In the first two cases, +.I n +characters are copied into the conversion buffer, any specified +character mapping is done, +trailing blanks are trimmed and new-line is added +before sending the line to the output. +In the latter three cases, characters are read into the +conversion buffer and blanks are added to make up an +output record of size +.I n. +If +.L cbs\^ +is unspecified or zero, the +.LR ascii\^ , +.LR ebcdic\^ , +and +.L ibm\^ +options convert the character set without changing the block +structure of the input file; the +.L unblock\^ +and +.L block\^ +options become a simple file copy. +.PP +.I Dblbuf +copies the named +.IR file , +or the standard input if no file +is specified, to the standard output. +Output is written in blocks matching the +input up to the given blocksize, or 32768 +bytes if not specified. +.PP +.I Dblbuf +uses multiple processes +to run faster, which is particularly useful in dealing with +a device such as a streaming tape drive. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +dd if=/dev/rmt0 of=x ibs=800 cbs=80 conv=ascii,lcase +Read an +.SM EBCDIC +tape blocked ten 80-byte +.SM EBCDIC +card images per record into an +.SM ASCII +file. +Note the use of raw magtape to handle arbitrary record sizes. +.TP +.L +tar cf /dev/stdout /usr | dblbuf >/dev/rmt1 +Copy the +.F /usr +directory to tape on +.FR /dev/rmt1 . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR cp (1), +.IR tar (1), +.IR cpio (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.I Dd +reports the number of full + partial input and output +blocks handled. +.SH BUGS +The +.SM ASCII/EBCDIC +conversion tables for +.I dd +were taken +from the 256-character standard in +.SM CACM +Nov, 1968. +The +.L ibm\^ +conversion, while less blessed as a standard, +corresponds better to certain +.SM IBM +print train conventions. +There is no universal solution. +.br +Options +.B if +and +.B of +are verbose equivalents of +.B < +and +.BR > . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dds.1 b/static/v10/man1/dds.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35023aa4 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dds.1 @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'Y''X' +.ti 0 +NAME X +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS X +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION X +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES X +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO X +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS X +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS X +.sp +.ti 0 +OWNER X diff --git a/static/v10/man1/deroff.1 b/static/v10/man1/deroff.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..01dfb1be --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/deroff.1 @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +.TH DEROFF 1 +.CT 1 writing_aids +.SH NAME +deroff, demonk, detex, delatex \- remove formatting requests +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B deroff +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B demonk +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B detex +.I file +.PP +.B delatex +.I file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Deroff +reads each file in sequence +and removes all +.I nroff +and +.IR troff (1) +requests and non-text arguments, backslash constructions, +and constructs of preprocessors such as +.I eqn, pic, +and +.IR tbl (1). +Remaining text is written on the standard output. +.I Deroff +follows files included by +.L .so +and +.L .nx +commands; +if a file has already been included, a +.L .so +for that file is ignored and a +.L .nx +terminates execution. +If no input file is given, +.I deroff +reads from standard input. +.PP +The options are +.TP +.B -w +Output a word list, one `word' (string of letters, digits, and +properly embedded ampersands and apostrophes, +beginning with a letter) per line. +Other characters are skipped. +Otherwise, the output follows the original, with the deletions mentioned above. +.TP +.B -i +Ignore +.L .so +and +.L .nx +requests. +.TP +.BR -ms +.PD0 +.TP +.B -mm +Remove titles, attachments, etc., as well as ordinary +.IR troff +constructs, from +.IR ms (6) +or +.I mm +documents. +.PD +.TP +.B -ml +Same as +.BR -mm , +but remove lists as well. +.PP +.I Demonk +removes all +.IR monk (1) +commands and then invokes +.I deroff +to handle both +.I troff +commands and preprocessor constructs. +.I Demonk +follows files included by +.L |\^insert +and +.L |\^source +commands as well as +.I troff +.L .so +and +.L .nx +requests. +If no input file is given, +.I demonk +reads from standard input. +.PP +.I Demonk +recognizes the following options and passes all options except +.B -b +and +.B -d +to +.I deroff . +.TP +.B -i +Ignore +.I monk +.L |\^insert +and +.L |\^source +commands as well as +.I troff +.L .so +and +.L .nx +requests. +.TP +.B -b +Do not output blank lines resulting from the removal of +.I monk +commands. +.TP +.BI -d dir +Use non-standard +.I monk +database directory +.I +dir. +.PP +.I Detex +and +.I delatex +do for +.IR tex (1) +and +.IR latex (6) +files what +.B deroff -w +does for +.I troff +files. +.I Delatex +largely subsumes +.I detex. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR troff (1), +.IR monk (1), +.IR tex (1), +.IR spell (1), +.IR wwb (1) +.SH BUGS +These filters are not complete interpreters of +.I troff +or +.I tex. +For example, macro definitions containing +.L \e$ +cause chaos in +.IR deroff +when the popular +.L $$ +delimiters for +.I eqn +are in effect. +.br +Text inside macros is emitted at place of +definition, not place of call. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/df.1 b/static/v10/man1/df.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb1e1ec5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/df.1 @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'DF (I)'1/20/73'DF (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME df -- disk free +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS df__ [ filesystem ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION df__ +prints out the number of free blocks +available on a file system. +If the file system is unspecified, +the free space on all of +the normally mounted file systems +is printed. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /dev/rf?, +/dev/rk?, +/dev/rp? +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO check(VIII) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 b/static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..219d3c02 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dictadd.1 @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.4, March 9, 1981 +.tr @ +.TH DICTADD 1 +.SH NAME +dictadd \- add phrases to user's diction or sexist dictionary +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dictadd +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dictadd +adds words and/or phrases to the user's dictionaries +for use by the +.IR wwb "(1), " proofr "(1), " dictplus "(1), +.IR " diction "(1), " +.RI "and " sexist (1) +programs. +.I Sexist +searches a text for sexist phrases, +while the other programs search a text for wordy or misused diction. +These programs allow the user to have +dictionary files containing additional words and/or phrases +for the programs to locate or ignore. +.I Dictadd +automatically sets up these dictionary files. +.PP +.I Dictadd +asks users whether they want to add words to +.I $HOME/lib/ddict, $HOME/lib/sexdict, +or some other file. +The results depend on the user's response, +as shown below. +.PP +.RS 2 +.TP 21 +@@@User's request +.IR "Dictadd's " action +.TP +.I $HOME/lib/ddict +adds words and/or phrases to the user's dictionary, +.I $HOME/lib/ddict. +This file is checked automatically by +.I wwb +and +.I proofr +and can be specified for use by +.I dictplus +and +.I diction. +(See +.IR diction (1).) +.TP +.I $HOME/lib/sexdict +adds words and/or phrases to the user's dictionary, +.I $HOME/lib/sexdict. +This file is checked automatically by +.I sexist. +.TP +.I filename +adds words to +.I filename, +to be used with +.I diction, dictplus, +or +.I sexist. +.RE +.PP +In all cases, +.I dictadd +questions whether the user wants instructions, +and prompts with ">" for more words or phrases. +If the dictionary is not in existence when +.I dictadd +is invoked, it is created. +If the dictionary already exists, +.I dictadd +adds to it. +To quit, type "q" after the prompt. +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH EXAMPLE +1. The sequence: +.PP +.RS 5 +.B dictadd +(carriage return) +.br +(program asks if the user wants the words to be added to $HOME/lib/ddict) +.br +.B y +(user responds yes) +.br +(program asks if the user wants instructions) +.br +.I [~]phrase 1 +(carriage return) +.br +.I [~]phrase 2 +(carriage return) +.br +.I "[~]phrase n" +(carriage return) +.RE +.PP +will add phrases to +.IR $HOME/lib/ddict . +Phrases to be ignored must be preceded by a tilde(~), +phrases to be located require no special symbol. +When finished, type "q" on a line by itself. +.SH SEE ALSO +diction(1), +dictplus(1), +proofr(1), +sexist(1), +suggest(1), +wwb(1). +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 b/static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36c7f99f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dictplus.1 @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.2, March 3, 1981 +.TH DICTPLUS 1 +.SH NAME +dictplus \- automatic combination of diction and suggest +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dictplus +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +][ +.B \-f +pfile [ +.B \-n +] ][ file ...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +.PP +.I Dictplus +automatically combines +.I diction +and +.IR suggest . +Options are: +.RS 5 +.TP 9 +.BI \-f " pfile" +Use the user's phrase file, +.IR pfile , +in addition to the default file of bad or wordy diction. +.IR Dictadd (1) +can be used +to set up this file. +.TP +.B \-n +Locate the phrases in +.I pfile +instead of the default phrase file. +.B \-n +cannot be used without +.B \-f +.IR pfile . +.RE +.I Dictplus +is one of the programs run under the +.IR proofr (1) +and +.IR wwb (1) +commands. +.PP +.IR Dictadd (1) +adds words and/or phrases that are to be located or ignored by +.IR diction " or " dictplus +to the user's dictionary, +.I $HOME/lib/ddict . +.I Dictadd +gives instructions on the necessary format +for phrases to be located or ignored by +.IR diction " or " dictplus. +.I $HOME/lib/ddict +is only used by +.I diction +and +.I dictplus +when it is specified by the +.B \-f +flag. +.IR Proofr (1) +checks +.I $HOME/lib/ddict +automatically when it runs +.IR dictplus . +.PP +All programs can take the following two options +that give information on the programs: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH EXAMPLES +1. The command: +.PP +.RS 5 +.B "dictplus -f patfile filename" +.RE +.PP +will print sentences from +.I filename +that contain bad or wordy diction, +including or suppressing phrases as specified in +.IR patfile . +Suggested replacements for bad phrases will also be printed. +(The +.I patfile +can be +.IR $HOME/lib/ddict .) +.SH FILES +.TP 21 +/tmp/$$* +temporary files used by +.I dictplus +.SH "SEE ALSO" +diction(1), +suggest(1), +proofr(1), +wwb(1), +worduse(1), +sexist(1), +dictadd(1). +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/diff.1 b/static/v10/man1/diff.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7942ec4b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/diff.1 @@ -0,0 +1,270 @@ +.TH DIFF 1 +.CT 1 files +.SH NAME +diff, diff3 \- differential file comparison +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B diff +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file1 file2 +.PP +.B diff3 +[ +.B \-ex3 +] +.I file1 file2 file3 +.SH DESCRIPTION +When run on regular files +.I diff +tells what lines must be changed in the files to bring them into agreement. +Except in rare circumstances, +.I diff +finds a smallest sufficient set of differences. +If neither file +is a directory, then one +may be +.LR - , +meaning the standard input. +If one file +is a directory, +then a file in that directory with basename the same as that of +the other file is used. +.PP +If both files are directories, +similarly named files in the two directories +are compared by the method of +.I diff +for text files and +.IR cmp (1) +otherwise. +Options when comparing directories are: +.TP +.B -r +Apply +.I diff +recursively to similarly named subdirectories. +.TP +.B -s +Report files that are the same (normally not mentioned). +.PP +There are several options for output format; +the default output format contains lines of these forms: +.IP +.IB n1 a +.IB n3 , n4 +.br +.IB n1 , n2 d +.I n3 +.br +.IB n1 , n2 c +.IB n3 , n4 +.PP +These lines resemble +.I ed +commands to convert +.I file1 +into +.IR file2 . +The numbers after the letters pertain to +.IR file2 . +In fact, by exchanging +.L a +for +.L d +and reading backward +one may ascertain equally how to convert +.I file2 +into +.IR file1 . +As in +.I ed, +identical pairs where +.IR n1 = n2 +or +.I n3 = n4 +are abbreviated as a single number. +.PP +Following each of these lines come all the lines that are +affected in the first file flagged by +.LR < , +then all the lines that are affected in the second file +flagged by +.LR > . +.PP +.TP +.B -e +Produce a script of +.LR a , +.LR c , +and +.L d +for +.IR ed (1) +to recreate +.I file2 +from +.IR file1 . +When comparing directories, produce a +.IR sh (1) +script to convert text files common to the two directories. +.TP +.BI -c n +Include +.I n +extra lines of context with each set of differences. +The output format is modified: +the output begins with identification of the files involved and +their creation dates and changes are separated +by lines of *'s. +Lines removed from +.I file1 +are marked with +.LR - ; +those added to +.I file2 +are marked +.LR + . +Lines which are changed from one +file to the other are marked in both files with +.LR ! . +.TP +.B -h +Do a fast, half-hearted job, +useful only when changed stretches are short +and well separated, +but does work on files of unlimited length. +.TP +.B -b +Ignore trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) and treat other +strings of blanks as if they were a single space. +.TP +.B -B +Ignore all blanks. +.PP +.I Diff3 +compares three versions of a file +and publishes the various disagreeing ranges of text. +One of the following indicators introduces each reported +difference. +.TP +.B ==== +All three files differ. +.TP +.BI ==== f +File +.I f +differs, where +.I f +is 1, 2, or 3. +.PP +Disagreeing fragments from the three files follow the +.B ==== +line, each identified by a +.IR diff -like +range indication: +.TP +.IB f : n1 a +File +.I f +lacks text that other files have; their text would +be appended after line +.I n1. +.TP +.IB f : n1 , n2 c +.br +.ns +.TP +.IB f : n1 c +Lines +.I n1 +through +.I n2 +(or line +.I n1 +only) of file +.I f +would have to be changed to agree with some other file. +The original contents follow, unless a higher-numbered file +has the same contents. +.PP +Under option +.BR -e , +.I diff3 +publishes a script for +.IR ed (1) +that will incorporate into +.I file1 +all changes between +.I file2 +and +.I file3, +i.e. the changes that normally would be flagged +.B ==== +and +.BR ====3 . +Option +.B \-x +(\fB\-3\fR) +produces a script to incorporate +only changes flagged +.B ==== +.RB ( ====3 ). +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +(cat diff0-1 diff1-2 diff2-3; echo '1,$p') | ed - file0 >file3 +An ancestral +.L file0 +has been kept along with a chain of version-to-version +difference files made thus: +.LR "diff -e file0 file1 >diff0-1" . +The shell command reconstructs the latest version. +.PP +.EX +if diff3 mod1 old mod2 | grep -s '^====$' +then : +else (diff3 -e mod1 old mod2; echo '1,$p') | ed - mod1 >new +fi +.EE +.PD0 +.IP +Compare two different modified versions with an old file. +If no modifications interfere with each other +.RI ( grep +finds no +.B ==== +lines), make a new file incorporating both modifications. +.PD +.SH FILES +.F /tmp/d* +.br +.F /usr/lib/diffh +for +.B -h +.br +.F /usr/lib/diff3 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR cmp (1), +.IR comm (1), +.IR ed (1), +.IR idiff (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.I Diff +yields exit status is 0 for no differences, 1 for some, 2 for trouble. +.SH BUGS +Text lines that consist of a single `.' will +defeat options +.BR -e , +.BR -x , +and +.BR -3 . +.br +Superfluous output may result for files that differ +only in insignificant blanks when comparing directories +under option +.BR -b . +.br +Option +.B -c +is unpardonably bizarre. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 b/static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3bc4dbd --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dimpress.1 @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ +.TH DIMPRESS 1 local +.SH NAME +dimpress \- Imagen printer filter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dimpress +[ option ] ... [ file ] ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dimpress +prints +.I files +created by +.IR troff (1) +on any printer that accepts the Impress graphics and page layout +language. +If no +.I file +is mentioned, the standard input is printed. +The following options are understood. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IB N1 \- N2. +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest-numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP 1.0i +.B \-t +Direct output to the standard output instead of the printer. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-x num +Leave a margin +.I num +inches from the left side edge of the paper. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-y num +Leaves a margin +.I num +inches down from the top of the page. +Negative values for +.I num +are allowed and often useful, especially to get macro generated +cut marks off the page. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-l +Print the job in landscape mode. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-p num +Set the horizontal and vetical step sizes for graphics to +.I num +pixels. +If Impress graphics commands are used for drawing this option +will only affect splines. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-P num +Use +.I num +as the pixel diameter of the Impress graphics pen. +Only useful when Impress graphics commands are being used. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-T name +Generate output to be printed on the target printer +.I name. +The printers currently supported are: +.RS 1i +.TP .5i +.PD 0 +.B i300 +Imagen 8/300 +.TP .5i +.B i480 +Imagen 5/480 +.TP .5i +.B i10 +Imagen Imprint-10 using rasti10 raster files +.TP .5i +.B i240 +Imagen Imprint-10 using rasti240 raster files +.RE +.PD 1 +.IP +By default the output printer is assumed to be +.I i300. +Although +.I i10 +and +.I i240 +select the same target printer, namely the Imprint-10, +the raster tables used for character generation will be +found in different directories. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-F dir +Use +.I dir +as the +.I troff +font directory. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-B dir +Use +.I dir +as the raster table directory. +When processing a +.I file +generated by +.I troff +for printing on device xxx +.I dimpress +will first look for the binary font directory devxxx +in the raster table directory. +If it's not found there the devxxx directory in +.I troff's +font directory will be used. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-R name +Use raster tables generated for device +.I name +when printing +.I file. +By default +.I dimpress +will attempt to use the target printer's raster files. +.TP 1.0i +.BI \-f file +Read resident font information from +.I file +which is located in directory /usr/lib/raster/RESIDENT. +By default +.I dimpress +looks for a file in that directory that has the same +name as the target printer. +Useful if several otherwise identical printers +support different sets of resident fonts. +.PP +The +.I files +should be prepared by +.I troff. +Best results will almost certainly be obtained only when +.I troff +and +.I dimpress +agree on the target printer. +.SH FILES +/tmp/dimp* +.br +/usr/lib/font/dev*/* +.br +/usr/lib/raster/rast* +.br +/usr/lib/raster/RESIDENT/* +.br +.SH SEE ALSO +troff(1), tc(1), troff(5), daps(1) +.\" @(#)daps.1 1.1 of 12/17/82 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dired.1 b/static/v10/man1/dired.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16c2b312 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dired.1 @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ +.TH DIRED 1 +.CT 1 dirs +.SH NAME +dired \- directory editor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dired +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dired +displays a directory listing like +.L ls -l +(see +.IR ls (1)) +and allows you to prowl around the listed entries, +deleting, editing, and displaying them. +It requires a cursor-addressed terminal identified +in environment variable +.BR TERM ; +see +.IR term (9.1) +to simulate such terminals in +.IR mux (9.1). +.PP +With no +.I file +argument, the current directory is listed. +With only one +.I file +argument, the argument is interpreted as a directory and it is listed. +With multiple arguments, the arguments are interpreted as filenames. +The options are: +.TP +.BR - [ sr ][ nsrw ] +Sort the file list by +name (default), size, access time, or modification time. +Ordering for +.B s +is increasing if by name, decreasing otherwise. +Ordering is opposite for +.BR r . +.TP +.BI -w n +If +.I n +is +.BR f, +use the full screen; if +.BR h , +use half the screen (default); if a number, use +.I n +lines for the directory listing, reserving the rest +of the screen for quick +file display. +.PP +The fields of a +.I dired +listing are: mode, link count, owner, size, write date and name. +A cursor shows the current entry. +.PP +Commands consist of single characters; arguments are +prompted for at the bottom of the screen. +To get a complete list, use the help command. +Fuller descriptions of less obvious commands are given below. +.TP +.B ! +Prompt for a shell command. +The command is executed with +.L % +characters in the command are replaced by the pathname of the current +entry, and +.L # +characters by the basename. +.TP +.B . +Repeat the previous +.B ! +shell command, using the current entry to replace +.L % +or +.LR # . +.TP +.B d +Mark the current entry for deletion. +Deletion of a directory is recursive. +.TP +.B e +If the current entry is a file, +edit it with the editor +.I e, +or an editor named by the environment variable +.BR EDITOR . +If it is a directory, +invoke +.IR dired +recursively for that directory. +.TP +.B h +.br +.ns +.TP +.B ? +Display a help file. +.TP +.B m +Display the current file with the pager +.IR p (1), +or another pager named by the environment variable +.BR PAGER . +.TP +.B q +Quit this directory level of +.I dired. +List the files marked for deletion and request +confirmation before deleting them. +.TP +.B t +Type. +Display the current file. +In two-window mode pause after each screenfull until you type +a carriage return. +The display may be interrupted. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/dired +.TP +.F /usr/lib/dired +help file +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR ls (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +While +.I dired +is preparing a listing it reports `Reading', +and types a dot +for each 10 files. +.SH BUGS +Long lines and diagnostics can foul up the +display. +.br +Needs a command to search for a given file. +.br +The off-line print command +.L p +is broken. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dis.1 b/static/v10/man1/dis.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2361c0ff --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dis.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.TH DIS 1 SHARE +.SH NAME +dis \- display input as refreshed page on VDU output +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dis +.RB [ -t timeout] +.RB [ -c refresh] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dis +looks up the terminal capability database for the characteristics +of the device represented by the environment variable "TERM". +Assuming that the standard input consists of repetitive pages, +.I Dis +then uses cursor addressing to write changed data only on its standard output. +Pages are delimited by a +.I form-feed +or by a timeout, if requested. +.PP +The timeout is specified by the flag \fB-t\fR followed by a number +representing seconds. +.PP +If the +.B -c +flag is specified, the screen is completely redrawn every +.I refresh +updates. +.SH EXAMPLES +(while true; do date; echo '\\f\\c'; sleep 10; done)|dis +.SH FILES +/etc/termcap +.SH SEE ALSO +termlib(3), or curses(3). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +If your terminal doesn't have cursor addressing. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dist.1 b/static/v10/man1/dist.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3e3edf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dist.1 @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +.TH DIST 1 +.SH NAME +dist \(mi distribute files to remote systems +.SH SYNOPSIS +.\".BI "dist [ " system " | -[Ff] " file " ] [ -n ] " files +.BI "dist [ " system " | -[Ff] " file " ] " files +.PP +.B "dist -q [" +.I system +.B "| -[Ff]" +.I file +.B "]" +.PP +.B "dist -r [" +.I system +.B "| -[Ff]" +.I file +.B "]" +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dist +distributes files to other systems, where they are installed +under the same names. +.I Dist +operates by packaging the files with +.IR mkpkg (1), +and queuing the resulting package in a spool directory to be +picked up by the remote systems. +.PP +The remote systems' names are given as a single argument, containing +the system names (in the format of +.IR ipc (3)) +separated by white space; alternatively, the +.B -f +option may be used to specify a file containing a list of system names. +The +.B -F +option is identical to +.B -f +except +.I dist +looks for the file in a standard directory. +.PP +The +.I dist +command has two forms of use. In the first form, +.I dist +packages a group of files and queues them for transmission. +.\"If the +.\".B -n +.\"option is specified, the remote systems are notified that the package +.\"is available. +The +.I file +arguments may be either file names or options for +.IR mkpkg (1). +.PP +When +.B -q +is given, +.I dist +queries the named systems and displays the contents of their transmission +queues; if no systems are given the local queue is displayed +by default. +.PP +When +.B -r +is given, +.I dist +calls the named system and installs any packages it has queued for +the local system. +.SH EXAMPLES +Distribute a new binary for grep to all vaxes: +.IP +.B "dist -F vaxes /bin/grep" +.SH FILES +.B /usr/lib/dist/* +.br +.B /usr/lib/dist/destinations/* +.br +.B /usr/spool/dist/* +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR mkpkg (1), +.IR dist (5), +.IR dist (8) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..ce5ee409 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmdcat.1 @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +.TH DMDCAT 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmdcat - send files to a 630 MTG connected printer. +.SH SYNOPSIS +\fBdmdcat\fR [ \f3\-s\f1 ] [ \f3\-b\f1 ] [ \f3\-v\f1 ] [ +\f3\-u\f1 ] [ \f3\-t\f1 ] [ \f3\-e\f1 ] [ file\&.\&.\&. ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I dmdcat +command is intended to be used +to send files to a printer connected to the Printer port of the 630 +MTG terminal. +\f2Dmdcat\f1 will send the concatenation of files specified on its +command line, or the standard input if no files are specified. +.PP +The data is sent to the terminal preceded by a \fIPrinter-On\fR Request +escape sequence, and is terminated by a \fIPrinter-Off\fR request +escape sequence. +The \fIPrinter-On\fR request escape sequence commands the terminal emulator to start +sending incoming data to the printer if the printer is available. The \fIPrinter-Off\fR request escape sequence tells +the terminal emulator to stop the sending. +The escape sequences sent are: +.RS 8 +.ft CW +.sp +\f3Printer On\f1 - ESC[?5;1i +.sp +\f3Printer Off\f1 - ESC[?4i +.ft 1 +.RE +.PP +If the \fB\-s\fR is present, \f2dmdcat\f1 uses this set of escape +sequences: +.RS 8 +.ft CW +.sp +\f3Printer On (no screen)\f1 - ESC[?5;2i +.sp +\f3Printer Off (no screen)\f1 - ESC[4i +.ft 1 +.RE +.sp +which tells the terminal emulator to start/stop +sending incoming data to the printer (if the printer is available) as before +but not to display this data on the screen. +.PP +The terminal responds with: +.RS 8 +.ft CW +.sp +ESC[?\f3ps\f1i where: +.sp +\f3ps\f1=0 indicates printer was not granted +.sp +\f3ps\f1=1 indicates printer was granted. +.ft 1 +.RE +.sp +If the printer was not granted, or if the terminal does not respond, +\fIdmdcat\fR displays a message and aborts. +.PP +The second option, \fB\-b\fR, strips backspaces +from the output of \f2dmdcat\f1. +If backspaces result in two or more characters appearing +in the same place, only the last character read is output. +This means that the printed output appears exactly as it +appears on the 630 MTG screen, without bold and underline. +This option is useful for printers which either cannot process +backspaces or are slow in processing backspaces. +.PP +\fIDmdcat\fR is a shell program that calls \fIcat\fR(1) and will pass +the options \fB-u\fR, \fB-v\fR, \fB-t\fR, and \fB-e\fR to \fIcat\fR(1). + +.SH FILES +$DMD/lib/dmdgetpr reads terminal response + +.SH SEE ALSO +cat(1), col(1) in the +\f2UNIX System V User Reference Manual\f1. +.br +\f2630 MTG Terminal User's Guide\f1. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +\f2Dmdcat\f1 uses the \f2col\f1(1) command to +strip backspaces with the \fB\-b\fR option. +\fICol\f1(1) is not available on all \s-1UNIX\s+1 +systems. +The \fB\-b\fR option will give +an error message if it cannot locate the \f2col\f1(1) command. +.PP +\f2Dmdcat\f1 only works if it is executed from +the default 630 MTG terminal emulator or any terminal emulator that supports the +escape sequence sets described above. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..757eba1a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmdcc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ +.TH DMDCC 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmdcc \- 630 MTG C compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f3dmdcc [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I dmdcc +command is the 630 MTG C compiler. Any software to be downloaded +into the 630 MTG must be compiled using this command. +.PP +\fIDmdcc\fR works in a similar manner to +other compiler (cc) commands but is enhanced to call +\fImc68cpp\fR and \fImc68ld\fR +with special arguments for the 630 MTG development environment. +In particular, +the \fIdmdcc\fR command defines the variable \fBDMD630\fR, +it sets the include search path +to $DMD/include, it sets the library search path to $DMD/lib, +it includes the standard 630 MTG libraries, it links in the 630 +MTG C +run-time start-up routine crtm.o, and it tells \fImc68ld\fR +to retain relocation information so the +resulting executable file can be relocated before download into the +630 MTG. +.PP +The exact arguments passed to \fImc68cpp\fR and \fImc68ld\fR +can be viewed by including the \fI-#\fR debugging argument on the +\fIdmdcc\fR command line. +.PP +The +\fIdmdcc\fR utility +accepts three types of arguments: +.RS 8 +.B .c +.br +.B .s +.br +.B .o +.RE +.PP +Arguments whose names end with +.B .c +are the C source programs, and those with +.B .s +are the assembly programs. +They are compiled/assembled, and +each object program +whose name is that of the source with +.B .o +substituted +.RB "for " .c " or " .s +is left in the file. +The +.B .o +file is normally deleted if a single +C program is compiled and link-edited all at one time. +.PP +The following flags are interpreted by +.I dmdcc\c +\&. +See +.IR mc68cpp (1), +.IR mc68as (1) +and +.IR mc68ld (1) +for other useful flags. +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-c\fR +Suppress the link-editing phase of the compilation, and force +an object file to be produced even if only one program is compiled. +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-g\fR +Flag to the compiler to produce additional information needed for the +use of +.IR dmdpi (1). +\} +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-O\fR +Invoke an object-code optimizer. +The optimizer will move, merge, and delete code; this option should not be +used if it is expected that compiled code may be debugged with \fIdmdpi\fR(1). +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-W\fIc\fB,\fRarg1[\fB,\fRarg2...] +Hand off the argument[s] +to pass +.I c +where +.I c +is one of +.RB [ p02al ] +indicating preprocessor, +compiler, +optimizer, +assembler, +or link editor, respectively. For example: +.RS 6 +.ce +.B \-Wa,\-m +.br +invokes the \f2m4\f1 macro preprocessor on the input to the assembler. +.RE +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-S\fR +Compile the named C programs, and leave the +assembler-language output on corresponding files suffixed +.BR .s . +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-P\fR +Run only the macro preprocessor +on the named C programs, and leave the output on corresponding +files suffixed +.BR .i . +.TP 6 +\fB\-E\fR +Same as the +.B \-P +option except the output is directed to the standard output. +This allows the preprocessor to be used as a filter for +any other compiler. +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-#\fR +Debug flag. Show the command lines passed to \fImc68cpp\fR, +\fImc68ccom\fR, \fImc68as\fR and \fImc68ld\fR. +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB\-x\fR +Turn off special processing for the 630 MTG environment. This argument should +not be used when compiling programs to be downloaded into the 630 +MTG. +.PP +.TP 6 +\f3\-Z\f1 \f2n\f1 +Allocate \f2n\f1 bytes of stack for process. If not specified the +default is 2048, Note that stack size can be overridden at +download time with the \f2dmdld -Z\f1 option. If \f2n\f1 is +specified smaller than 2048, it is defaulted to 2048. +.PP +.DT +.br +.DT +.PP +Other arguments +are taken +to be either C preprocessor or link-editor flag arguments, or C-compatible +object programs, typically produced by an earlier +.I dmdcc +run, +or perhaps libraries of C-compatible routines. +These programs, together with the results of any +compilations specified, are link-edited (in the order +given) to produce an executable program with name +.B dmda.out +unless the +.B \-o +option of the link-editor is used. +.PP +The +.I dmdcc +command expects the \fBDMD\fR shell variable to be set and exported in +the user's environment. +This variable must point to the "root" directory of the 630 MTG software +node. +.PP +\fIDmdcc\fR tags the downloadable ouput file with a +programming envirionment identification number (PEID) which is +used by \fIdmdld\fR prior to download to verify copatibility +with terminal firmware. The PEID is determined by \fIdmdcc\fR +from the firmware routine linkages included in the process. +Every firmware routine called by the process causes a linkage +to the routine to be retrieved from archive and included in +the load module. Each of these linkage routines is tagged with +a PEID related to the firmware version that supports the +called firmware routine. The PEID associated with the latest +level of firmware required to support those linkages retrieved +from archive is tagged to the load module. Compatibility with +earlier firmware releases is maintained as long as new +firmware functions not supported by older firmware are not used +in the program. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 22 +file.c +input file +.TP 22 +file.o +object file +.TP 22 +file.s +assembly language file +.TP 22 +dmda.out +link-edited output +.TP 22 +/usr/tmp/mc68? +temporary file +.TP 22 +$DMD/lib/mc68cpp +preprocessor +.TP 22 +$DMD/lib/mc68ccom +compiler +.TP 22 +$DMD/lib/mc68optim +optimizer +.TP 22 +$DMD/bin/mc68as +assembler +.TP 22 +$DMD/bin/mc68ld +link loader +.DT +.PD +.br +.SH SEE ALSO +dmdpi(1), +mc68as(1), +mc68cpp(1), +mc68ld(1). +.br +m4(1) in the +\f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference Manual\f1. +.br +.sp +.IR "The C Programming Language", +by Kernighan, B. W., and Ritchie, D. M., +Prentice-Hall, 1978. +.br +.I Programming in C\-A Tutorial +by Kernighan, B. W. +.br +.I C Reference Manual +by Ritchie, D. M. +.br +.br +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The diagnostics produced by the C compiler are sometimes +cryptic. +Occasional messages may be produced by the assembler +or link-editor. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..596e85b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmddemo.1 @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +.TH DMDDEMO 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmddemo - demonstrations available on the 630 MTG +.SH SYNOPSIS +\fBdmddemo\fR [options] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The \fIdmddemos\fR are graphical demonstration programs that run on the 630 MTG. +All programs will become local unless they are downloaded into a window +which is the last window connected to a host. +Exiting each program can be done by typing 'q' when that window is current +or by deleting the window. +Typing \fIdmddemo\fR +with no options gives you a list of demonstrations available. +.sp 2 +Options (demos) available are: +.nf +.sp + \fBball\fR A bouncing ball +.sp + \fBbounce\fR Ricocheting lines. Button 1 controls speed. +.sp + \fBclock\fR Displays face of clock with moving hands in + addition to a digital time display. +.sp + \fBdoodle\fR An interactive doodler. Button 1 draws and + button 2 erases. +.sp + \fBrose\fR Rotates trigonometric figures to produce various + flower shapes. +.sp + \fBstar\fR Interactive drawing. Button 1 draws and button 2 erases. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..e129f264 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmdld.1 @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH DMDLD 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmdld \- 630 MTG application bootstrap loader +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f3dmdld [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file \f3[\f1 application - arguments \f3]\f1 +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I dmdld +program downloads the named +.I file +from the host, for execution in the 630 MTG terminal's window connected +to its standard output. It can also be used to invoke +cached applications. +.PP +The \fIdmdld\fR program works in \fIlayers(1)\fR and non-layers environments. +In \fIlayers(1)\fR, the download runs on top of the existing \fIxt\fR error-correcting +protocol. In non-layers, \fIdmdld\fR temporarily puts the 630 +MTG terminal into +\fIxt\fR protocol, and mimics that protocol from its side, thus insuring an error-free +download. +.PP +.I Dmdld +first asks the terminal if there is a cached application +of name +.I file +already in the terminal. The inquiry uses the filename +clipped from any pathname prefix. +If such an application exists and is +available, that application will be booted in the window without going +through the download sequence. +.PP +If a cached application of inquired filename +does not exist +in the terminal or is not available (see \fIcache(3L)\fR for reasons), +.I dmdld +will attempt to download +.I file +from the host. +Files to be downloaded by +.I dmdld +must be 630 object files created with +\fIdmdcc(1)\fR. +.PP +During compilation, \fIdmdcc(1)\fR looks for the programming environment identification +(PEID) number of all the library functions link-loaded, and assumes the highest number +as the PEID of the application. During the download initialization, \fIdmdld\fR +will send this number to the terminal. If the terminal's firmware version does not support +this PEID - in other words, the firmware does not have some new library functions used +by the application, the download will be aborted. The argument flag +.B \-f +will override this checking, but the sanity of the application (after being downloaded +and running) cannot be guaranteed. +.PP +The optional \f2application-arguments\f1 are also sent to the terminal in order to +initialize the parameters \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR of the function \fImain\fR +of the application. +.PP +During the download, the 630 mouse cursor will turn into a +"coffee cup" and the progress +of the download is shown by a gradual filling of the window with inverse video. +The code to be downloaded is relocated on-the-fly by \fIdmdld\fR to the +memory area allocated for it by the terminal. +If the download succeeds, the application will take over the +window and start execution. +.PP +The following options are supported by \fIdmdld\fR: +.TP +.B \-d +causes a printout of the download information on the +diagnostic output (standard error). +.TP +.B \-p +prints non-layers protocol statistics on the diagnostic output (standard error). +Note that this option forces the +.B \-d +option. In \fIlayers(1)\fR, this option is the same as the +.B \-d +option. +.TP +.B \-z +loads the process but does not run it. +The process can then be started using +.IR dmdpi (1). +This option works only under +.IR layers (1). +.TP +.B \-f +forces the download even if the programming environment identification +number of the application is not supported by the terminal it is downloaded +into. +.TP +.B \-n +is a null option, and is ignored by \f2dmdld\f1. It is used by +processes that want to fork \f2dmdld\f1 with a variable argument +option. +.TP +\f3\-Z\f1 \f2n\f1 +overrides the inherent stack size of the download application and sets it +to \fIn\fR bytes. \fIN\fR must be greater than or equal to 2048, or else stack +size is defaulted to 2048. Inherent stack size of the download application +is specified through the -Z option of \fIdmdcc(1)\fR (or defaulted to 2048). + +.TP +.B \-T +loads an absolute file (already link-loaded to a fixed address) +such as a new version of the terminal's firmware into the terminal's RAM space. +This download is called a takeover (overlay) download because it will close all +physical ports except for the one running \fIdmdld\fR. The whole terminal screen +will turn blank, and will be gradually filled up with inverse video representing +the code being downloaded. When the download is finished, execution will begin at +the first address of \fIfile\fR. Relocation will be done by \fIdmdld\fR only if the +first address of \fIfile\fR is lower than the first available RAM address of the +terminal. This is necessary because low-addressed RAM is used to store the +terminal's system tables and variables, and overwriting them with the downloaded data +may put the terminal into undetermined states. The \f3\-N\f1 +option can be used instead, if the relocation possibility is +not wanted. +.TP +.B \-N +loads an absolute file into the terminal's RAM space. The +difference between the \f3\-T\f1 and \f3\-N\f1 options is that +the \f3\-N\f1 does not relocate the absolute file. Therefore +the absolute file can be generated without relocation +information. +.PP +The \f3\-T\f1 and \f3\-N\f1 options only work in the +non-layers environment, and are exclusive of each other. +\ +.PP +The environment variable +.B JPATH +is the analog of the shell's +.B PATH +variable to define a set of directories in which to search for +.IR file . +.TP +\s-1\f3NOTE\s+1\f1: +Standard error should be redirected when using the +.B \-d +or +.B \-p +options. +.SH EXAMPLE +Invoking the terminal resident \fBPF Edit\fR application using \fIdmdld\fR: +.br +.ti +4 +.ft CM +dmdld "PF Edit" +.ft R +.PP +Invoking a \fIdmdcc(1)\fR compiled application: +.br +.ti +4 +.ft CM +dmdld dmda.out +.ft R +.PP +Invoking a \fIdmdcc(1)\fR compiled application with the +.B \-d +flag, redirecting standard error to \fItemp\fR: +.br +.ti +4 +.ft CM +dmdld -d dmda.out 2>temp +.ft R +.PP +Invoking a \fIdmdcc(1)\fR compiled application with \f2application-argument\f1: +.br +.ti +4 +.ft CM +dmdld $DMD/lib/demolib/clock "`date`" +.ft R + +.SH SEE ALSO +cache(3L), dmdcc(1), dmdpi(1), jx(1). +.br +layers(1) in the +\fIUNIX System V Release 3 User's Reference Manual\fR. +.br +layers(1) in the \fI5620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference Manual\fR. + +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.PP +The error message "\fIdmdld: ... is not compatible with terminal\fR" +means that the application the user attempts to +download cannot execute safely in the terminal because it calls +library routines which do not exist in the terminal's firmware version +(i.e. the programming environment ID of the application is "newer" than the +one supported +by the terminal). A firmware upgrade is necessary, or the user can force +the download by using the +.B \-f +flag. +.PP +The error messages "\fIdmdld: cannot access ...\fR" or "\fIdmdld: cannot open ...\fR" +appearing when the named \fIfile\fR is known to be in the cache, indicate that the +application is not available for booting, and \fIdmdld\fR cannot find or open the +named \fIfile\fR in the host. +.PP +The error message "\fIdmdld: no memory in terminal\fR" indicates +that the terminal has run out of memory to accept the download. The user may +free up memory (by deleting windows, etc..) and re-try. +.PP +Other error messages are self-explanatory. + +.SH BUGS +The \f2application-arguments\f1 are not sent to the terminal +to update \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR if the named +\fIfile\fR is found in the terminal's application cache. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..79f3b06e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmdman.1 @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +.TH DMDMAN 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmdman \- print manual pages +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B "dmdman" +[options] [sections] titles +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I dmdman +utility +prints the on-line manual pages for the given titles. +\f3Titles\f1 are entered in lower case. The \f3sections\f1 are +numbers from one to eight and correspond to the manual page +section numbers. The \f3section\f1 +number may not have a letter suffix. If no \f3section\f1 is +specified, the whole manual is searched for \f3title\f1 and +all occurences of it are printed. +.sp +\f3Options\f1 and their meanings are: +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB-c\fR +Preprocess output with col(1). +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB-d\fR +Search the current directory rather than \f2$DMD/man\f1. +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB-w\fR +Prints on the standard output only the \f3pathname\f1 of the +entries, relative to \f2$DMD/man\f1, or the current directory +for \f2-d\f1 option. +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB-Tterm\fR +Set \f2TERM\f1 (refer greek(1)) before printing the manual +page. In addition, a null \f3term\f1 will clear the +\f3term\f1 variable for the duration of the \f2dmdman\f1 +invocation. +.PP +.TP 6 +\fB-12\fR +Indicates that the terminal type specified on the \f2-T\f1 +option or in the \f2$Term\f1 variable is to be placed in 12 pitch +mode. If this option is used, then the terminal type must not +include the ``-12'' string; otherwise, this string will occur +twice in the \f2$Term\f1 variable, thus making it invalid. +.PP +Since the manual pages are not available on the +AT&T 3B2 Computer, this command will not work on that computer. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 32 +$DMD/man/?_man/man[1-8]/* +Packed manual entries +.DT +.PD +.SH SEE ALSO +col(1), greek(1) in the +\fIUNIX System V User's Reference Manual\fR. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..5cd5043c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmdmemory.1 @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ +.nr Hy 0 +.nh +.TH DMDMEMORY 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmdmemory - 630 MTG memory profiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dmdmemory [ \-c ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +Memory in the 630 MTG terminal is divided into two types of memory which can be +requested by user level function calls: +.IP . 2 +non-compactible \fIalloc\fR memory [\fIalloc\fR(3R)], +.IP . 2 +garbage-collectible \fIgcalloc\fR memory [\fIgcalloc\fR(3R)]. +.P +The \fIalloc\fR memory pool starts from the low addressed end of the user memory pool and +grows upward. The \fIgcalloc\fR memory pool begins at the other end of the user +memory pool (i.e. at the highest address) and grows downward. +The mobile boundaries of the \fIalloc\fR and +\fIgcalloc\fR pools are named respectively \fBalloclevel\fR and \fBgclevel\fR. +.P +To contain fragmentation due to the non-compactibility of the \fIalloc\fR memory, +there is an \fBalloclimit\fR which restricts the expansion of the \fIalloc\fR pool. +.P +In order to make better use of \fIalloc\fR fragments, the 630 +MTG memory allocation scheme converts a \fIgcalloc\fR request +that cannot fit into +the \fIgcalloc\fR pool to an \fIalloc\fR request. +If there is a fragment big enough +to satisfy the request, it becomes a \fIgcastray\fR block. \fIGcastray\fR memory is +of the same type as \fIgcalloc\fR but resides inside the \fIalloc\fR pool. Note that this +type of memory is only known +by the terminal memory allocation system and cannot be requested directly by a user level +function call. +.P +The \fIdmdmemory\fR utility +presents a graphical representation of the memory usage in the 630 MTG terminal. +A user is able to monitor all three types of +memory with a scope (or zoom) facility, modify the \fBalloclimit\fR, and look +at the memory or stack usage of a particular process. +.P +The \-c option causes \f2dmdmemory\f1 to be cached in the 630 MTG +application cache. +.P +The window size used by \fIdmdmemory\fR is fixed. If the window size is +not correct, a \fICore\fR icon and a "\fImenu on button 2\fR" string are displayed. +The window must be reshaped if this appears by selecting either the +reshape option from the mouse button 2 menu or the reshape +function from the mouse button 3 menu. If reshape is selected +from the button 2 menu, the window is automatically reshaped to +the proper size. If the reshape function from the button 3 menu +is selected, the default window size presented is the correct window +for \fIdmdmemory\fR. +.bp + If a different window size is swept, the core icon and +message string are again displayed. Similarly, if at any time the +window is reshaped back to an incorrect size, the core icon and string are +again displayed. When the window size is incorrect, \fIdmdmemory\fR is largely inactive, so at +times it may be desirable to place \fIdmdmemory\fR in this state to +free cpu resources for other processes. Reshaping the window back to the +correct size reactivates \fIdmdmemory\fR. +.P +In the working mode, the \fIdmdmemory\fR window contains the following, from top to bottom: +.IP "" 2 +\f3\(em\f1 Three numerical upper fields which are, from left to right: +.IP "" 5 +the scoped number of \fIalloc\fR blocks. +.br +the scoped number of \fIgcastray\fR blocks, +.br +the scoped number of \fIgcalloc\fR blocks. +.IP "" 5 +The number of scoped blocks is the number of those bolcks that +fall within the range of memory represented by the dmdmemory +window. +.IP "" 2 +\f3\(em\f1A bar graph which represents the user memory pool in +.br +.in +1 +the viewing scope. \fIAlloc\fR +blocks are reverse-videoed, \fIgcastray\fR blocks are \fIbackground\fR textured, and +\fIgcalloc\fR blocks are grey shaded. To help the visualization, the bar graph is +marked by 100 tick marks, 8 pixels apart. The \fIalloclimit\fR is represented by a longer +vertical bar. +.in 0 +.IP "" 2 +\f3\(em\f1 Five numerical lower fields which are, from left to right: +.IP "" 5 +the starting address of the viewing scope, +.br +the \fBalloclevel\fR address, +.br +the \fBalloclimit\fR address, +.br +the \fBgclevel\fR address, +.br +the ending address of the viewing scope. +.IP "" 2 +In \fIfull view\fR +the viewing scope addresses are the same as the boundary addresses of the total user +memory pool. In a \fIscoped view\fR, the \fBalloclevel\fR, \fBalloclimit\fR or \fBgclevel\fR +addresses may not be displayed if they are out of the viewing scope. +.IP "" 2 +\f3\(em\f1An alphanumeric field which displays information or +.br +.in +1 +help messages. Information +includes the scope setting (\fIfull view\fR or \fIscoped view\fR) and the number of +bytes per pixel. Help messages depend on the command selected. +.in 0 +.P +The \fIdmdmemory\fR facility supports six commands, all accessed from mouse button 2. +Note that when a command is being executed, the \fIdmdmemory\fR window cannot be reshaped. The six commands are described below. +.bp +.SS Base +This command toggles between decimal and hexadecimal bases. Hexadecimal numbers are +preceded by a "0x" prefix. + +.SS Process +This command changes the mouse cursor to a "target" cursor and asks the user to +pick a window by clicking button 1 over it. Picking nothing (i.e., the screen background) +or clicking other buttons will cancel the command. +.P +Clicking button 1 over a window will cause the three numerical upper fields to blink. +They now represent scoped amounts of \fIalloc\fR, \fIgcastray\fR and \fIgcalloc\fR +memory used by the process running inside the selected window. +The +display inside the bar graph also blinks to mark the corresponding positions of these memory +blocks. The alphanumeric field displays the address of the +process. +.P +Clicking or holding any button stops the blinking, exits this command mode, and returns +\fIdmdmemory\fR to the normal viewing mode. +.P +If a cached process is selected, dmdmemory displays only that +memory used by the process that was allocated via an alloc ro +gcalloc procedure call. The memory actually occupied by the +process code and data is not displayed by the process +command. + +.SS Stack +This command is similar to the \fIprocess\fR command, except that the information +now deals with the stack assigned to the specified process. +.P +Since the process stack is \fIalloc\fR'ed, only the \fIalloc\fR field can have a +non-zero value (assuming the stack is inside the viewing scope). The alphanumeric field +shows how many bytes of its stack a process has used. +.P +The stack command displays the amount of assigned stack space +whether the process is cached or not. +.bp +.SS Scope +This command allows the user to zoom in (or out) in order to have a closer look at +a particular region of the user memory pool. +.P +When this command is selected, a full-length vertical bar blinks at the left side of +the bar graph. The user drags the vertical bar by holding down button 1. Note that the +starting address of the viewing scope (left-most lower numerical field) also blinks, +and changes with new values corresponding to the dragged bar positions. Releasing +button 1 will select the new starting address of the viewing scope. +.P +The ending address of the viewing scope is modified in the same manner with a +blinking bar appearing at the right end of the bar graph. If this bar +is positioned to the left of the previous one, \fIdmdmemory\fR takes it as a +zoom-out, back to \fIfull view\fR setting. Otherwise, the action results +in a zoomed-in (or scoped) view of the memory pool, and the numerical fields are +updated accordingly. Note that some addresses in the +lower fields are now out of scope and therefore are +not displayed. +.P +During this process, if any button other than button 1 is pressed and held, the +command is aborted and the current viewing scope is retained. +.P +The smallest scope is one byte per pixel. Attempts to zoom in +further will automatically re-expand the viewing scope to this minimum setting. + +.SS Limit +This command allows the user to modify the value of \fBalloclimit\fR. +.P +When this command is selected, the vertical bar which represents the position +of \fBalloclimit\fR in the graphical bar starts to blink. The same thing happens +to the \fBalloclimit\fR numerical field (middle lower field). To modify its value, +the user holds down button 1 and drags the vertical bar to new positions. The numerical +field changes accordingly. Note that \fBalloclimit\fR cannot go lower than \fBalloclevel\fR; +otherwise, some \fIalloc\fR blocks would be out of the \fIalloc\fR pool. +.P +This command does nothing if the \fBalloclimit\fR is not within the scope. +.P +\fBCaution\fR: a value for \fBalloclimit\fR that is too low restricts the expansion of the +\fIalloc\fR pool, causing \fIalloc\fR requests to fail. +.SH FILES +$DMD/lib/dmdmemory.m downloadable file + +.SH SEE ALSO +ucache(1), alloc(3R), gcalloc(3R). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..aff5f198 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmdpi.1 @@ -0,0 +1,702 @@ +.TH DMDPI 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmdpi \- 630 MTG process inspector and debugger +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dmdpi [ -c ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Dmdpi +is a C language debugger that is bound dynamically to multiple subject +processes executing in a 630 MTG window in the layers environment. +In order to use dmdpi to its full capabilities, it is necessary to compile +the source program with the +.I -g +option of +.IR dmdcc . +However, if the target program is not compiled with +.I -g, +or no symbol tables +at all are available, dmdpi works as well as possible with the information +provided to it. +.PP +If the -c option is selected, \f2dmdpi\f1 will be +cached in the 630 MTG cache system. This will enable +\f2dmdpi\f1 to be executed again without the need for another +download. +.PP +Dmdpi uses a +multi-window user interface. +There are three types of windows: +debugger control windows, +which access the global state of the debugger; +process control windows (exactly one per process), +which start and stop processes and connect to process-specific functions; +and process inspection windows, +which include viewers for source text and memory, formatted various ways. +Initially, there are three debugger control +windows available: \fBdmdpi\fR, \fBhelp\fR +and \fBpwd/cd\fR. +.P +One might need to debug some initialization code that would ordinarily be +executed before dmdpi has a chance to gain control of the process. +The \fI-z\fR +of \fIdmdld\fR is useful for this purpose. This allows you to take +control of a process before the first statement is executed. +See the \fIdmdld(1)\fR manual page for details on using this option. + +.SS User Interface +Button 1 points. +Pointing at a window makes it current, noted with a highlighted border; +pointing at a line of text makes it current and inverts its video. +A scroll bar at the left of each window shows how +much of the text of a window is visible; +pointing into the scroll region and moving the mouse +controls what text is displayed. +.PP +Button 2 has a menu of operations that apply to the current line. +Operations above the +.B ~~~~~ +separator are specific to each line; +operations below the separator are generic line operations: +.TP 1i +.B cut +Remove the line. +.TP +.B sever +Remove the line and all lines above it. +.TP +.B fold +Wrap the line, if it extends past the right margin. +.TP +.B truncate +Truncate the line at the right margin. +.LP +Button 3 has a menu of window-level operations and is in two parts. +Operations above the separator are specific to each window. +Operations below the separator are the following generic window operations: +.TP 1i +.B reshape +Change the size of a window. +.TP +.B move +Move a window to a different place. +.TP +.B close +Delete a window. +.TP +.B fold +Like button 2 fold above except it applies to all lines in the window. +.TP +.B truncate +Like button 2 truncate above except it applies to all lines in the window. +.TP +.B top +The sub-menu off the \fBtop\fR +is a list of windows; +selecting one makes it top and current. +.LP +Button 3 also is also used to sweep out new windows. +.PP +Keyboard characters accumulate at the bottom of the window. +If the current line accepts input, it flashes with each keystroke; +otherwise, if the current window accepts input, its border flashes. +Carriage return is ignored until a line or window +accepts the text, whereupon +the input line is sent to the line or window. +.PP +The following keyboard commands are also available: +.TP +.B "\'>file\'" +This saves the contents of the current line, or current window if there is +no current line, into the named file. To achieve the status of no current line +in the window, scroll off the top or bottom of the window. +.TP +.B "\'state +variable is displayed and updated. +.PP +The menu operations on the process are: +.TP 1i +.PD 0 +.B run +let the process run +.TP +.B stop +stop the process +.TP +.B src text +open source text window(s) +.TP +.B Globals +open window for evaluating expressions in global scope +.TP +.B RawMemory +open window for editing uninterpreted memory +.TP +.B Assembler +open window for disassembler +.TP +.B User Types +open window for setting user types +.TP +.B Journal +open debugging session journal window +.TP +.B Bpt List +open breakpoint list window +.PD +.LP +Each line of the call stack traceback describes one function. +Each function in the traceback can open a stack frame +expression evaluator window +or display its current source line. + +.SS Process Inspection Windows +.TP +.B Source Text Windows +The source text window contains a listing of a source file. If there is more +than one source file for the process, selecting the +.B src text +item in the process control window will give you a source files window +in which there is a listing of all the source files associated with that +process. Library function source files are included in this list, even +though one might not actually have the source for these functions. +By highlighting a source line and selecting +.B open source file +in the button 2 menu, you can open a source listing for that file. +Each source file is in a separate window, which can be opened when needed. +The source files are searched for in the working directory. +Entering a pathname from the keyboard (when the Source files window is +current) enters a pathname prefix which points to a directory +where the source can be found, without changing the working directory. +.RS +.P +When opening a source file, +dmdpi +checks to see whether the source file is in time sync with the object module. +If not, dmdpi gives a message of this fact. One may override this +condition with the +.B reopen +item in the button 3 menu of the source text window. +Source lines are displayed on a "per request basis." In other words, only +the lines that are currently visible are sent from the host. More lines +are sent to be displayed on the terminal as needed. +.P +Specific strings may be searched for in the source text by +using \fI/string\fR, or the \fI?string\fR entered at the +keyboard, for searching forward and backward in the source +text respectively. The search will begin at the next (previous +for backwards search) C language statement rather than at the +next source line. Note that repeated reverse searches for the +same pattern must be specified as \fI??\fR rather than \fI?\fR +due to a conflict with the help operator (?). +Line numbers can also be searched +for by entering a line number at the keyboard when a line is not current +within the window. If a line is current, the number is evaluated as +a constant expression (see expressions below). To achieve the +status of no current line, scroll the current line off the top or bottom of +the window. +.P +.B Breakpoints +are set on source lines. A breakpoint is set by highlighting +the line on which you wish to break execution and selecting +.B set bpt +from the button 2 menu. +A breakpoint is denoted by a '>>>' next to the source line. +When the process reaches this line the process +halts and will not execute the line on which the breakpoint is set. +Clearing the breakpoint is done by highlighting the line on which a breakpoint +is set and selecting +.B clear bpt +from the button 2 menu. Clearing the breakpoint can also be done from the +breakpoint list +window (see below). A +.B conditional breakpoint +is a breakpoint that is set with a certain condition. When this condition +evaluates to TRUE, the process is halted. +Any valid dmdpi expression may be used as a condition +(see keyboard expressions). +To set a conditional breakpoint, select +.B cond bpt +from the button 2 menu. You are prompted to enter an expression +from the keyboard as a condition. +An example of a condition would be (x==1). When the variable x becomes +equal to 1, then execution breaks. The +.B trace on +item in the button 2 menu is actually a conditional breakpoint with +the condition of 0, meaning that the condition never evaluates to TRUE. +This has the effect of tracing a statement but never breaking execution. +The conditional breakpoint is removed in the same way a +regular breakpoint is removed. +.P +Once the process has been halted, select \f3run\f1 to start the process running again. +You can also +.B step +(execute) a number of source lines and then stop +again after these statements have been executed. +When statements are stepped, the debugger will not enter functions +unless the +.B step into fcn +item is actually specified. The current statement can always +be seen by selecting +the +.B current stmt +item in the button 3 menu. This highlights the statement currently in the PC. +.P +Another option that is available in the source text window is the ability +to look at the assembly code for a specified line. Highlighting a line and +selecting +.B assembler +in the button 2 menu displays the first assembler instruction of the +statement. +.RE + +.TP +.B Globals and Stack Frame Windows +A stack frame window is opened from a line in the call stack traceback +in the process control window or +from a line of source text. A globals window is opened from the button 3 menu +in the process control window. +These windows evaluate expressions with respect to global scope, +and scope in a function, respectively. +.RS +.P +.B "Expressions" +.P +Expressions may be entered from the keyboard or with the mouse. +The syntax for expressions in dmdpi is the same as C language expressions, +except for differences noted below. +The expressions are most commonly used for inspecting values of variables in +the program that is being debugged. +An example of an expression is +.I r.origin.x. +This +may be typed in order +to inspect the x coordinate value of a rectangle origin point if the process +has a rectangle +.I r. +.P +A summary of dmdpi's expression syntax is presented here only to +aid comprehension, rather than an exact statement of the language. +.RE +.sp +.RS +\fI +expression : + constant + primary + \(**expression + &expression + -expression + !expression + ~expression + sizeof expression + typeof expression + fabs (expression) + (type-name) expression /\(** from menu only \(**/ + {expression} identifier + expression binop expression + expression = expression + expression , expression + + +primary: + $ + identifier + ( expression ) + primary ( [expression-list] ) + primary[ expression ] + lvalue.identifier + primary -> identifier + +lvalue: + identifier + primary[expression] + lvalue.identifier + primary -> identifier + \(**expression + (lvalue) + +binop: + \(** / % + - >> << < > <= >= == != & ^ + | && || +\fR +.P +The major differences in the expressions which dmdpi understands and +the C expressions are: +.IP "" +The unary operators \fIfabs\fR and \fItypeof\fR are supported. +.I fabs +evaluates the absolute value of a floating point number. +.I typeof +evaluates the type of an expression. +Examples are: +.br + fabs(-2.0)=2 +.br + typeof(r.origin)= struct Point +.IP "" +The concept of a "current expression" has been introduced with the +.B $ +operator. +.B $ +is equal to the current highlighted expression. For example, if the line +containing \fIr.origin\fR is highlighted, one may type +.B $.x +to see the value of the x coordinate. +Another example of the +.B $ +expression is +.B $=. +This can be used, for instance if +.B $ +is equal to a variable x and you wish +to change the value of x to . +.IP "" +Expressions are evaluated within the scope boundaries of the window in +which they are typed. One can cross scope boundaries in order to evaluate +an expression with the syntax { expression } function-name. +This, for example, is useful for using the globals window to look +at static variables that are local +to a function +without having to open up a stack frame window. +.IP "" +Type casting may only be done through the use of the menu. +.IP "" +The following is not supported by dmdpi: ++ -- ?: op= string. +.IP "" +NOTE: expressions are always evaluated internally with a 32-bit precision. +Therefore, +results may not correspond in all cases with those generated by a C +program. +.P +Expressions are also used to specify the condition in the conditional +breakpoint. Note that the C comma operator is very useful in specifying +the condition. +Expressions separated by a comma are evaluated left-to-right and all but +the rightmost expression are discarded. +For example, a condition of \fI(x,y,x==y)\fR evaluates all +three expressions; however, only the last expression (x==y) determines +the result of the overall condition. The result is that the values of +x and y are printed but execution halts only when x==y. +.P +Registers in the stack frame windows are prefixed with the character +.B $ +, for example, +.B $d0. +The address of a register is the location at which it was saved. +Register values are only available after execution has been halted +at a breakpoint or after a step. The exception to this rule is that +one may look at register variables in calling functions if they happened +to be saved in the called function. +.P +An expression may be made +.I spy, +in order to observe changes in the expression. +The value of a spy expression is evaluated and displayed +each time the debugger looks at the process, i.e., when the process calls +wait() or sleep(). +If the value of a spy changes, the expression is updated and a message is +given that the expression has changed. +If a conditional breakpoint (or trace on) is set, then the process will be +halted. +The option +.B changed spies +in the button 2 menu will manually force all spies to be re-evaluated. +.P +A maximum of 150 global variables will fit into the globals menu. If +the targeted program has more than 150 global variables, the remaining +variables must be accessed by typing their name from the keyboard. +.RE +.SK +.TP +.B Raw Memory Window +The raw memory window is +a ``memory editor'' in which +memory is viewed as a sequence of 1-, 2-, 4- or 8-byte cells. +The +.B '.' +operator is a special symbol which denotes a cell address. Therefore, commands +such as +.B .+1 +in the button 2 menu give the next increment of memory after the current +cell address. The keyboard command +.B .= +displays the cell with address equal to expression. +The expression syntax is the same as defined above. +The format of the displayed +memory cells is +.I x/y: , +where x is the cell address, and y is the viewing increment. +.RS +Some of the functions available are: +.RS +.TP +change cell size and display format +Use the \fBsize\fR and \fBformat\fR items in the menu. +.TP +display cells above and below current cell. +Use the \fB.[+-]\fR options in the menu. +.TP +indirect to cell +Look at the cell using the contents of the current cell as an address. +Use the +.B \(** thru . +option. +.TP +change cell value +This is done with the keyboard expression: +.B $= +.TP +spy on memory cell +If the memory contents change, dmdpi will give notification. +.TP +disassemble instruction at cell. +Display the assembler instruction in the assembler window. Use the +.B asmblr +option in the button 2 menu. +.RE +.RE +.TP +.B (Dis)Assembler Window +Allows viewing of memory as a sequence of assembler instructions. +The menu options of this window are similar to those in the source text +window. The difference is that this window deals with assembler instructions +rather than the high-level source code. +.RS +.P +An instruction at a certain address can be displayed by entering the +keyboard expression +.B .=. +The expression syntax is the same as defined above. +More instructions can be viewed in a sequential manner using the +.B next +options in the button 2 menu. The next 1, 5, or 10 instructions +starting from the current instruction can be displayed. +.P +When setting a breakpoint or stepping into an assembler function, one must +step through the link and the movm.l instructions before \fIdmdpi\fR will be +able to generate the stack frame for the function. +.P +Some of the other functions available are: +.RS +.TP +change display format +.TP +open a stack frame window for instruction's function +.TP +display instruction as cells in the raw memory window +.TP +set/clear breakpoint on instruction +.TP +open stack frame window for instruction's function +.TP +display instruction at current PC +.TP +single step instruction(s) +.RE +.RE +.TP +.B User Types Window +Shows user-defined types and allows the display format of user-defined +types displayed in the globals and stack frame windows to be changed. +For example, the display format of a structure may be changed so that +certain fields are not displayed (hidden) and other fields are displayed +(shown). +.TP +.B Journal Window +Keeps a log of significant events in the course of a debugging session. +.TP +.B Breakpoint List Window +Lists all active source and assembler breakpoints. +Allows clearing of specified breakpoints or all breakpoints. +.RS +.P +Functions available include: +.RS +.TP +show source or assembler line at which a breakpoint is set +.TP +clear a single breakpoint +.TP +clear all breakpoints +.SH SEE ALSO +.PP +dmdcc(1), +dmdld(1), +ucache(1). +.SH WARNINGS +Do not use the -O optimizer option of dmdcc when compiling a program +to be debugged with dmdpi. +This will confuse dmdpi. +.P +It is possible to receive a message that there is no more memory on the +host system. This will happen if the process you are debugging has a very +large symbol table, or if you are debugging many processes at the same time. +The maximum amount of memory that a UNIX process is allowed to consume +can be changed by a system administrator. For a 3B2 host computer running +System V Release 2.0, how to change the per process memory limit is +documented in the manual \f2AT&T 3B2 Computer Unix System V Release 2.0 +System Administration Utilities Guide\f1 in the chapter +"Administrative Tasks" under "Tunable Parameters." An alternative to +changing the host computer's per process memory limit is to use +the \fImc68cprs\fR CCS utility to compress the size of process symbol tables +before they are opened for debugging with dmdpi. +.SH BUGS +In switch statements there is no boundary between the last case +and the branch code; the program +.I appears +to jump to the last case (but is really in the branch) +and then to the real case. +.P +The structure P which is of type "struct Proc \(**" within applications is +interpreted by \fIdmdpi\fR as "struct proc". This implies that one must +type P.state rather than P->state when accessing the structure P from the +keyboard. +.P +If a program contains multiple global structure declarations +of the same name, dmdpi will ignore all but the first declaration. +.P +A breakpoint cannot be set on a goto or return statement. +Attempting to do so will set a breakpoint on the following +line. Also, stepping onto a goto or return statement will +execute the goto or return instead of stopping on the line. +.P +When stepping past an if statement that is the +last statement within a while loop and the if condition fails +and does not have an else condition, +the program will appear to jump to the last line within the if +statement. It is really jumping to the statement that will +branch back to the top of the while loop. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 b/static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..104cb1fa --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dmdversion.1 @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +.TH DMDVERSION 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +dmdversion \- inquire terminal/host software version +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B dmdversion +[ +.B \-ehlst +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I dmdversion +utility displays the version numbers of the 630 MTG terminal and host software. +The terminal version number is the equivalent to the ASCII +string which contains three fields (f1;f2;f3) defined as +follows: +.TP 1i +.B f1 +identifies the 630 MTG as a windowing terminal +.TP +.B f2 +identifies the terminal as a 630 MTG +.TP +.B f3 +identifies the firmware release +.LP +.PP +Host software version is read from the file $DMD/VERSION. +.PP +The \f3\-t\f1 option is used to display the terminal version number. +The \f3\-h\f1 option is used to display the host software version +number. The default action is to display both terminal and +host software version numbers. +.PP +In the \fBlayers\fR environment, terminal version is found through an +\fIioctl(2)\fR call to the +xt device driver. In non-layers, or if the \fB-e\fR flag is specified, the +terminal version is found through the Request Terminal Type escape sequence \fBESC[c\fR. +.PP +The \fB-l\fR option can be used to inquire if Local Area +Network (LAN) Encoding is set for the terminal +through terminal setup. This is found through the Request Encoding escape +sequence \fBESC[F\fR. This option excludes the \fB-e\fR option and does not +inquire the terminal version number. +.PP +When the \f3\-s\f1 flag is present, no output is printed but +an exit value is returned as follows. If the \f3\-t\f1 or +\f3\-e\f1 options are present, the decimal ascii value of the +last digit of the terminal's version is returned. If the +\f3\-l\f1 option is present, 1 is returned if LAN encoding is +enabled; 0 otherwise. The \f3\-l\f1 option will overide the +\f3\-t\f1 or \f3\-e\f1 options. In all other cases, 255 (-1) is +returned. +.SS EXAMPLE +The following example can be used to determine if a 630 MTG or +some other windowing terminal (such as a 5620) is being used. +.RS 6 +.nf +.ft CM +case `dmdversion -t` in + *'8;8'*) + echo I am a 630 + ;; + *'8;7'*) + echo I am a 5620 + ;; + *) + echo Unknown terminal type + ;; +esac +.fi +.ft R +.RE +.SH FILES +.TP 22 +$DMD/VERSION +the host version +.SH SEE ALSO +version(3R). +.br +ioctl(2) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference Manual\f1. +.br +layers(1) in the UNIX System V Release 3 User's Reference +Manual. +.br +layers(1) in the 5620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference +Manual. +.br +\f2630 MTG Terminal User's Guide\f1. + +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The +.B -e +and +.B -l +flags only work if the window connected to the standard output is +running the default 630 MTG terminal emulator or any other emulator that +supports the described escape sequences. + + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/docgen.1 b/static/v10/man1/docgen.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4036ea71 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/docgen.1 @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +.TH DOCGEN 1 +.CT 1 writing_aids +.SH NAME +docgen \- generate a document from a script +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B docgen +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I ofile +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Docgen +guides interactive preparation of standard documents +according to canned scripts and +places the output in +.I ofile. +The output typically takes the form of +.IR troff (1) +input. +These options invoke standard scripts: +.TP +.B -mcs +(default) Bell Labs cover sheet; output (\c +.F temp.cover +by default) +may be typeset thus: +.L "troff temp.cover" +.TP +.B -ms +documents using the macro package +.IR ms (6); +output +.RF ( temp +by default) may be typeset thus: +.L "troff -ms temp" +.TP +.B -mm +similarly for the MM macro package of System V +.PP +Other options are: +.TP +.BI -f " file" +take script from +.I file +.TP +.B -v +(verbose) print document as it is generated +.TP +.B -d +(debug) print information about the script +as it is read +.PP +The reference tells how to construct scripts. +.SH FILES +.F /usr/lib/docgen/* +scripts +.br +.F temp.cover +.br +.F temp +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR troff (1), +.IR ms (6), +.IR mcs (6) +.SH BUGS +Not all document types are implemented. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 b/static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e0bd4eeb --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/docsubmit.1 @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +.TH DOCSUBMIT 1 +.CT 1 writing_output +.SH NAME +docsubmit \- send document to library +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B docsubmit +[ +.B -c +.I cover-file +] +[ +.B -C +] +[ +.B -r +.I ref-file +] +[ +.B -t +] +[ +.B -f +.I copyf +] +[ +.B -d +] +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Docsubmit +sends the full text of a TM, including cover sheet, +to the Bell Laboratories library network, for inclusion +in the libraries' Linus database. +The +.I files +are those that would be mentioned in a +.I troff +command to print the paper; files included by +.B .so +macros or by preprocessors such as +.IR pic (1) +should not be mentioned. +The options are +.TP +.BI -c " coverfile +Cover sheet is in a file by itself. +.TP +.B -C +Cover sheet is in the document. +One of +.B -c +or +.B -C +must be specified. +.TP +.BI -r " ref-file +Specify a separate reference file for +.IR refer (1) +or +.IR prefer (1). +.TP +.B -t +The single +.I file +is +.IR tex (1) +source; only the base name, without +.BR .tex , +should be specified. +.TP +.BI -f copyf +Include a copy of +.I copyf +in the cpio file. This flag should only be necessary for +things like awk scripts executed inside the paper with .sy commands. +.TP +.B -d +Don't consided include files that can't be found as fatal errors. +.PP +Electronic submission +is not a substitute for the official paper submission. +For more information +contact your local library or call (201)582-4840. +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +docgen cover-file +eqn cover-file file.1 file.2 | troff | lp +docsubmit -c cover-file file.1 file.2 +.EE +.SH FILES +.F /usr/lib/docsubmit/* +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR troff (1), +.IR docgen (1) +.SH BUGS +Only documents that may be viewed by any AT&T employee can +have their full text made available under Linus. +.br +Documents with a complicated construction process, +such as a shell script or makefile, cannot be handled +directly. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/doctype.1 b/static/v10/man1/doctype.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d33ab684 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/doctype.1 @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +.TH DOCTYPE 1 +.CT 1 writing_troff +.SH NAME +doctype \- guess command line for formatting a document +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B doctype +[ +.I option ... +] [ +.I file +] +... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Doctype +guesses and prints on the standard output the command line for printing +a document that uses +.IR troff (1), +related preprocessors like +.IR eqn (1), +and the +.IR ms (6) +and +.I mm +macro packages. +.PP +Option +.B -n +invokes +.I nroff +instead of +.I troff. +Other options are passed to +.I troff. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +eval `doctype chapter.?` | apsend +Typeset files named chapter.0, chapter.1, ... +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR troff (1), +.IR eqn (1), +.IR tbl (1), +.IR refer (1), +.IR prefer (1), +.IR pic (1), +.IR ideal (1), +.IR grap (1), +.IR ped (9.1), +.IR mcs (6), +.IR ms (6), +.IR man (6) +.SH BUGS +It's pretty dumb about guessing the proper macro package. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/double.1 b/static/v10/man1/double.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f2da42d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/double.1 @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 +.TH DOUBLE 1 +.SH NAME +double \- double word finder +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B double +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +[file ...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Double +searches text for consecutive occurrences of words. +It skips text contained in tables formatted with +.IR tbl (1) +and ignores consecutive occurrences of any single character +except +.IR a . +When +.I double +finds two words in a row, +it prints them with the line number of the first one. +.PP +.I Double +is one of the programs run under the +.IR proofr (1) +and +.IR wwb (1) +commands. +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH SEE ALSO +proofr(1), +wwb(1), +tbl(1). +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/download.1 b/static/v10/man1/download.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72ff6730 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/download.1 @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +.ds dH /usr/lib/font/postscript +.TH DOWNLOAD 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +download \- host-resident PostScript font download +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBdownload\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B download +prepends host-resident fonts to +.I files +and writes the results on the standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +.B download +assumes the input +.I files +are a single PostScript job and that requested fonts +can be included at the start of each input +.IR file . +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-f +Force a complete scan of each input +.I file. +In the absence of an explicit comment pointing +.I download +to the end of the file, the default scan stops +immediately after the PostScript header comments. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-m name +Use +.I name +as the font map table. +A +.I name +that begins with +.MW / +is the full pathname of the +map table. +Otherwise +.I name +is relative to the host font directory. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-p printer +Read the printer-resident font list from file +.br +.MI /etc/lp/printers/ printer /residentfonts \f1. +.br +Fonts named in this file will not be downloaded. +The +.OP \-p +option is for use with Unix 4.0 lp. +Other spoolers should use the +.OP \-r +option. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-r file +Read the list of printer-resident fonts from +.I file. +Fonts named in this file will not be downloaded. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-H dir +Use +.I dir +as the host font directory. +The default is +.MR \*(dH . +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-T dir +Use +.I dir +as the temporary file directory. +Only used to make a copy of standard input. +By default +.I dir +is set to +.MR /tmp . +.PP +Requested fonts are named in a +.MW %%DocumentFonts: +comment in the input +.IR files . +Available fonts are the ones listed in the map table +selected using the +.OP \-m +option. +.PP +The map table consists of fontname\-filename pairs. +The fontname is the full name of the PostScript font, +exactly as it would appear in a +.MW %%DocumentFonts: +comment. +The filename is the pathname of the host resident font. +A filename that begins with a +.MW / +is used as is, +otherwise the pathname is relative to the host font +directory. +Comments are introduced by +.MW % +(as in PostScript) and +extend to the end of the line. +.PP +The only candidates for downloading are fonts listed +in the map table that point +.B download +to readable files. +A font is downloaded at most once per job. +Requests for unlisted fonts or inaccessible files +are ignored. +All requests are ignored if the map table can't be read. +.SH EXAMPLES +A map table used to control the downloading +of the Bookman font family might be, +.EX -1 +% +% The first string is the full PostScript font name. The second string +% is the file name - relative the host font directory unless it begins +% with a /. +% + + Bookman-Light KR + Bookman-LightItalic KI + Bookman-Demi KB + Bookman-DemiItalic KX +.EE +Use file +.MW myprinter +(in the default host font directory) as the +map table: +.EX +download -m myprinter \f2file +.EE +Set the host font directory to +.MW /tmp/font +and use +.MW /tmp/font/xxx +as the map table: +.EX +download -H /tmp/font -mxxx \f2file +.EE +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.SH BUGS +.B download +should be part of a more general program. +.PP +.B download +does not look for +.MW %%PageFonts: +comments +and there is no way to force multiple downloads of +a particular font. +.PP +Using full pathnames, either in map tables or for the map table +name, is not often recommended. +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy (1), +.BR postdmd (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR postmd (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR posttek (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dpost.1 b/static/v10/man1/dpost.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..976c2024 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dpost.1 @@ -0,0 +1,310 @@ +.ds dF /usr/lib/font +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH DPOST 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B dpost +\- +.B troff +postprocessor for PostScript printers +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBdpost\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B dpost +translates +.I files +created by +.BR troff (1) +into PostScript and writes the results on the +standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num +(default is 1.0). +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which is located near the upper left corner of +each page. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default, +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP mode. +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP +.OP \-w num +Set the line width used to implement +.B troff +graphics commands to +.I num +points, where a point is approximately 1/72 +of an inch. +By default +.I num +is set to 0.3 points. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed near the +upper left corner of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y down the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves text down the page. +The default offset is 0. +.TP +.OP \-B +Include +.MW %%BoundingBox +comments in the output file. +Should only be used when the comments are needed +for picture inclusion. +Output is forced onto an 8.5\(mu11-inch page. +.TP +.OP \-E name +Set the character encoding for text fonts to +.IR name . +Requesting +.I name +means include file +.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. +A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. +There is no default. +.TP +.OP \-F dir +Use +.I dir +as the font directory. +The default +.I dir +is +.MR \*(dF , +and +.B dpost +reads +.SM ASCII +font files from directory +.MR \*(dF/devpost . +.TP +.OP \-H dir +Use +.I dir +as the host-resident font directory. +A file in +.I dir +that matches the name of the +.B troff +font is assumed to be a host resident font program +and is included in +.B dpost +output. +There is no default. +.TP +.OP \-L \^file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/dpost.ps . +.TP +.OP \-T name +Use font files for device +.I name +as the best description of available PostScript fonts. +By default, +.I name +is +\*(mBpost\fP +and +.B dpost +reads +.SM ASCII +files from +.MR \*(dF/devpost . +.br +.ne 1i +.PP +Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C \^file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include +.I string +in the output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-R action +Requests special +.I action +(e.g., +.MR manualfeed ) +on a per page or global basis. +The +.I action +string can be given as +.IR request \|, +.IM request : page\f1\|, +or +.IM request : page : file\f1\|. +If +.I page +is omitted or given as 0 the request +applies to all pages. +If +.I file +is omitted the request +lookup is done in +.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . +.PP +All +.I files +should be prepared by +.B troff +for the same device. +Device tables that describe real PostScript fonts that can be +used by +.B dpost +should include +.EX +PDL PostScript +.EE +in their +.SM DESC +file. +Tables that depend on a non-standard character set encoding indicate +that fact by an +.MW Encoding +entry in their +.SM DESC +file. +For example, +.EX +Encoding Latin1 +.EE +means include file +.MR \*(dQ/Latin1.enc . +The +.OP \-E +option overrides the +.SM DESC +setting. +.SH EXAMPLES +.PP +A typical command line might be: +.EX +pic \f2files\fP | tbl | eqn | troff -mm | dpost +.EE +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully translated, +while 2 often indicates a syntax error in the input +.IR files . +.SH WARNINGS +.PP +.B dpost +output does not usually conform to Adobe's file-structuring conventions. +Send the output through +.B postreverse +to produce a minimally conforming PostScript file. +.PP +Emulation is expensive and does not always produce satisfactory results. +No attempt has been made to implement the character sets or fonts available +on all devices supported by +.BR troff . +Missing characters are replaced by white space, and unrecognized +fonts default to one of the Times fonts (e.g., +.MR R , +.MR I , +.MR B , +or +.MR BI ). +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dF/devpost/* +.br +.MW \*(dF/devpost/charlib/* +.br +.MW \*(dQ/dpost.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/color.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/draw.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR buildtables (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR postreverse (1), +.BR psencoding (1), +.BR troff (1), +.BR font (5), +.BR troff (5) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/dsw.1 b/static/v10/man1/dsw.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20db6304 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/dsw.1 @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'DSW (I)'3/15/72'DSW (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME dsw -- delete interactively +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS dsw___ [ directory ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION For +each file in the given directory ("." if not specified) +dsw___ types its name. If "y" is typed, the file is deleted; +if "x", dsw___ exits; if anything else, the file +is not removed. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO rm(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS The name "dsw" +is a carryover from the ancient past. Its etymology is +amusing but the name is nonetheless ill-advised. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/du.1 b/static/v10/man1/du.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4af9382c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/du.1 @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'DU (I)'1/20/73'DU (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME du -- summarize disk usage +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS du__ [ -s__ ] [ -a__ ] [ name ... ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION du__ +gives the number of blocks contained in all files +and (recursively) directories within each specified directory or file name____. +If name____ is missing, ._ is used. + +The optional argument -s__ causes only the grand total to +be given. +The optional argument -a__ causes an entry to be generated +for each file. +Absence of either causes an entry to be generated for +each directory only. + +A file which has two links to it is only counted once. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES . +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO -- +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS Non-directories +given as arguments (not under -a option) are not listed. +.sp +Removable +file systems do not work correctly +since i-numbers may be repeated while the corresponding +files are distinct. +Du should maintain an i-number list per root directory +encountered. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/echo.1 b/static/v10/man1/echo.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba2bdb50 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/echo.1 @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'ECHO (I)'3/15/72'ECHO (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME echo -- echo arguments +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS echo____ [ arg89918 ... ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION echo____ +writes all its arguments in order as a line on the +standard output file. +It is mainly useful for producing diagnostics in command files. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO -- +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ed.1 b/static/v10/man1/ed.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9a38bb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ed.1 @@ -0,0 +1,421 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'ED (I)'1/15/73'ED (I)' +.tr | +.ti 0 +NAME +.br +ed -- editor +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS +.br +ed__ [ name ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION +.br +.in -8 +ed__ +is the standard text editor. +.sp +If the optional argument is given, ed__ +simulates an e_ command on the named file; that is to say, +the file is read into ed__'s buffer so that it can be edited. +.sp +ed__ operates on a copy of any file it is editing; changes made +in the copy have no effect on the file until a write +(w_) command is given. +The copy of the text being edited resides +in a temporary file called the buffer______. There is only +one buffer. +.sp +Commands to ed__ have a simple and regular structure: zero or +more addresses_________ followed by a single character command_______, possibly +followed by parameters to the command. +These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. +Every command which requires addresses has default addresses, +so that the addresses can often be omitted. +.sp +In general, only one command may appear on a line. +Certain commands allow the input of text. +This text is placed in the appropriate place in the buffer. +While ed__ is accepting text, it is said +to be in input_____ mode____. In this mode, no commands are recognized; +all input is merely collected. +Input mode is left by typing a period (.) alone at the +beginning of a line. +.sp +ed__ supports a limited form of regular_______ expression__________ notation. +A regular expression is an expression which specifies +a set of strings of characters. +A member of this set of strings is said to be matched_______ +by the regular expression. +The regular expressions allowed by ed__ are constructed as follows: +.sp +.in +6 +.ti -3 +1. An ordinary character (not one of those discussed below) +is a regular expression and matches that character. +.sp +.ti -3 +2. A circumflex (^) at the beginning of a regular expression +matches the null character at the beginning of a line. +.sp +.ti -3 +3. A currency symbol ($) at the end of a regular expression +matches the null character at the end of a line. +.sp +.ti -3 +4. A period (.) matches any character but a new-line character. + +.ti -3 +5. A regular expression followed by an asterisk (*) +matches any number of adjacent occurrences (including zero) +of the regular expression it follows. + +.ti -3 +6. A string of characters enclosed in square brackets +([]) matches any character in the string but no others. +If, however, the first character of the string is a circumflex +(^) the regular expression matches any character but new-line +and the characters in the string. + +.ti -3 +7. The concatenation of regular expressions is a regular +expression which matches the concatenation of the strings +matched by the components of the regular expression. + +.ti -3 +8. The null regular expression standing alone +is equivalent to the last regular expression encountered. + +.in -6 +Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify +lines and in one command (s_, see below) +to specify a portion of a line which is to be replaced. + +If it is desired to use one of +the regular expression metacharacters as an ordinary +character, that character may be preceded by "\\". +This also applies to the character bounding the regular +expression (often "/") and to "\\" itself. +.sp +Addresses are constructed as follows. +To understand addressing in ed__ +it is necessary to know that at any time there is a current_______ +line____. Generally speaking, the current line is +the last line affected by a command; however, +the exact effect on the current line +by each command is discussed under the description of +the command. + +.in +6 +.ti -3 +1. The character "." addresses the current line. + +.ti-3 +2.|The character "^" addresses the line immediately before the current line. +.sp +.ti -3 +3. The character "$" addresses the last line of the buffer. + +.ti -3 +4. A decimal number n_ addresses the n_th line of the buffer. + +.ti -3 +6. A regular expression enclosed in slashes "/" addresses +the first line found by searching toward the end of the +buffer and stopping at the first line containing a +string matching the regular expression. +If necessary the search wraps around to the beginning of the +buffer. + +.ti -3 +5. A regular expression enclosed in queries "?" addresses +the first line found by searching toward the beginning of +the buffer and stopping at the first line found containing +a string matching the regular expression. If necessary +the search wraps around to the end of the buffer. + +.ti -3 +7. An address followed by a plus sign "+" +or a minus sign "-" followed by a decimal number specifies that address plus +(resp. minus) the indicated number of lines. +The plus sign may be omitted. + +.ti-3 +8.|"'x" addresses the line associated (marked) with the +mark name character "x" +which must be a printable character. +Lines may be marked with the "k" command described below. +.sp +.in -6 +Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. +Commands which require no addresses regard the presence +of an address as an error. +Commands which accept one or two addresses +assume default addresses when insufficient are given. +If more addresses are given than such a command requires, +the last one or two (depending on what is accepted) are used. + +Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma +(,). +They may also be separated by a semicolon +(;). In this case the current line "." is set to +the previous address before the next address is interpreted. +This feature can be used to determine the starting +line for forward and backward searches ("/", "?"). +The second address of any two-address sequence +must correspond to a line following the line corresponding to the first address. + +In the following list of ed__ commands, the default addresses +are shown in parentheses. The parentheses are not part of +the address, but are used to show that the given addresses are +the default. + +As mentioned, it is generally illegal for more than one +command to appear on a line. +However, any command may be suffixed by "p" (for "print"). +In that case, the current line is printed after the command +is complete. +.ne 6 + +.in +6 +.ti -3 +(.)a +.ti -3 + +.ti -3 +.li +. +.br +The a_ppend command reads the given text +and appends it after the addressed line. "." is left +on the last line input, if there +were any, otherwise at the addressed line. +Address "0" is legal for this command; text is placed +at the beginning of the buffer. + +.ti -3 +(.,.)c +.ti -3 + +.ti -3 +. +.br +The c_hange +command deletes the addressed lines, then accepts input +text which replaces these lines. +"." is left at the last line input; if there were none, +it is left at the first line not changed. + +.ti -3 +(.,.)d +.br +The d_elete command deletes the addressed lines from the buffer. +The line originally after the last line deleted becomes the current line; +if the lines deleted were originally at the end, +the new last line becomes the current line. + +.ti -3 +e filename +.br +The e_dit +command causes the entire contents of the buffer to be deleted, +and then the named file to be read in. +"." is set to the last line of the buffer. +The number of characters read is typed. +"filename" is remembered for possible use as a default file name +in a subsequent r_ or w_ command. +.sp +.ti-3 +f filename +.br +The f_ilename command prints the currently remembered file name. +If "filename" is given, +the currently remembered file name is changed to "filename". + +.ti -3 +(1,$)g/regular expression/command list +.br +In the g_lobal +command, the first step is to mark every line which matches +the given regular expression. +Then for every such line, the +given command list is executed with "." initially set to that line. +A single command or the first of multiple commands +appears on the same line with the global command. +All lines of a multi-line list except the last line must be ended with "\\". +a_, i_, and c_ commands and associated input are permitted; +the "." terminating input mode may be omitted if it would be on the +last line of the command list. +The (global) commands, g_ and v_, are not permitted in the command list. + +.ti -3 +(.)i +.ti -3 + +.ti -3 +. +.br +This command i_nserts the given text before the addressed line. +"." is left at the last line input; if there were none, +at the addressed line. +This command differs from the a_ command only in the placement of the +text. + +.ti-3 +(.)kx +.br +The mark_ command associates or marks the addressed line with +the single character mark name "x". +The ten most recent mark names are remembered. +The current mark names may be printed with the n_ command. + +.ti -3 +(.,.)mA +.br +The m_ove command will reposition the addressed lines after the line +addressed by "A". +The line originally after the last line moved becomes the current line; +if the lines moved were originally at the end, +the new last line becomes the current line. + +.ti-3 +n +.br +The markn_ames command will print the current mark names. + +.ti -3 +(.,.)p +.br +The p_rint command prints the addressed lines. "." +is left at the last line printed. +The p_ command may___ be placed on the same line after any command. + +.ti -3 +q_ +.br +The q_uit command causes ed__ to exit. No automatic write +of a file is done. + +.ti -3 +($)r filename +.br +The r_ead command +reads in the given file after the addressed line. +If no file name is given, +the remembered file name, if any, is used (see e_ and f_ commands). +The remembered file name is not changed unless +"filename" is the very first file name +mentioned. +Address "0" is legal for r_ and causes the +file to be read at the beginning of the buffer. +If the read is successful, the number of characters +read is typed. +"." is left at the last line read in from the file. + +.ti -3 +(.,.)s/regular expression/replacement/ or, +.ti -3 +(.,.)s/regular expression/replacement/g +.br +The s_ubstitute command searches each addressed +line for an occurrence of the specified regular expression. +On each line in which a match is found, +all matched strings are replaced by the replacement specified, +if the global replacement indicator "g" appears after the command. +If the global indicator does not appear, only the first occurrence +of the matched string is replaced. +It is an error for the substitution to fail on all addressed lines. +Any character other than space or new-line +may be used instead of "/" to delimit the regular expression +and the replacement. +"." is left at the last line substituted. + +The ampersand "&" appearing in the replacement +is replaced by the regular expression that was matched. +The special meaning of "&" in this context may be +suppressed by preceding it by "\\". + +.ti -3 +(1,$)v/regular expression/command list +.br +This command is the same as the g_lobal command +except that the command list is executed +with "." initially set to every line except______ those +matching the regular expression + +.ti -3 +(1,$)w filename +.br +The w_rite command writes the addressed lines onto +the given file. +If the file does not exist, +it is created mode 17 (readable and writeable by everyone). +The remembered file name is not___ changed unless +"filename" is the very first file name mentioned. +If no file name is given, +the remembered file name, if any, is used (see e_ and f_ commands). +"." is unchanged. +If the command is successful, the number of characters written is +typed. + +.ti -3 +($)= +.br +The line number of the addressed line is typed. +"." is unchanged by this command. + +.ti -3 +!UNIX command +.br +The remainder of the line after the "!" is sent +to UNIX to be interpreted as a command. +"." is unchanged. + +.ti -3 +(.+1) +.br +An address alone on a line causes that line to be printed. +A blank line alone is equivalent to ".+1p"; it is useful +for stepping through text. + +.in -6 +If an interrupt signal (ASCII DEL) is sent, +ed__ will print a "?" and return to its command level. + +If invoked with the command name '-', (see init____) +ed__ will sign on with the message "Editing system" +and print "*" as the command level prompt character. +.sp +Ed__ has size limitations on the maximum number of lines that can be edited, +and on the maximum number of characters in a line, +in a global's command list, +and in a remembered file name. +These limitations vary with the physical core size of the PDP11 computer +on which ed__ is being used. +The range of limiting sizes +for the above mentioned items is; +1300|-|4000 lines per file, +256|-|512 characters per line, +63|-|256 characters per global command list, +and +64 characters per file name. +.sp +.ti 0 +.in +8 +FILES +.br +/tmp/etm? temporary +.br +/etc/msh to implement the "!" command. +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO -- +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" for any error +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/efl.1 b/static/v10/man1/efl.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0bb15834 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/efl.1 @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +.TH EFL 1 +.SH NAME +efl \- extended Fortran language preprocessor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B efl +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I filename ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Efl +compiles a program written in the EFL language into clean Fortran. +.I Efl +provides the same control flow constructs as does Ratfor (1), +which are essentially identical to those in C: +.TP +statement grouping with braces; +decision-making with if, if-else, and switch-case; +while, +for, +Fortran do, +repeat, +and repeat...until loops; +multi-level break and next. +In addition, EFL has C-like data structures, +and more uniform and convenient input/output syntax, +generic functions. +EFL also provides +some syntactic sugar to make programs easier to read and write: +.TP +free form input: +multiple statements/line; automatic continuation +statement label names (not just numbers), +.TP +comments: +# this is a comment +.TP +translation of relationals: +>, >=, etc., become .GT., .GE., etc. +.TP +return (expression) +returns expression to caller from function +.TP +define: +define name replacement +.TP +include: +include filename +.PP +.fi +The Efl command option +.B \-w +suppresses warning messages. +The option +.B \-C +causes comments to be copied through to the Fortran output (default); +.B \-# +prevents comments from being copied through. +If a command argument contains an embedded equal sign, +that argument is treated as if it had appeared in an +.B option +statement at the beginning of the program. +.I Efl +is best used with +.IR f77 (1). +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR f77 (1), +.IR ratfor (1). +.br +S. I. Feldman, +.IR "The Programming Language EFL", +Bell Labs Computing Science Technical Report #78. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/eqn.1 b/static/v10/man1/eqn.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6236bea5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/eqn.1 @@ -0,0 +1,366 @@ +.TH EQN 1 +.CT 1 writing_troff +.EQ +delim $$ +.EN +.SH NAME +eqn, neqn, checkeq \- typeset mathematics +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B eqn +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B neqn +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B checkeq +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Eqn +is a +.IR troff (1) +preprocessor +for typesetting mathematics +on a phototypesetter, +.I neqn +on terminals. +Usage is almost always +.IP +.L +eqn file ... | troff +.br +.L +neqn file ... | nroff +.PP +If no files are specified, +these programs +read from the standard input. +.I Eqn +prepares output for the typesetter +named in the +.BI -T dest +option (Mergenthaler Linotron 202 default, see +.IR troff (1)). +When run with other preprocessor filters, +.I eqn +usually comes last. +.PP +A line beginning with +.B .EQ +marks the start of an equation; +the end of an equation +is marked by a line beginning with +.BR .EN . +Neither of these lines is altered, +so they may be defined in macro packages +to get +centering, numbering, etc. +It is also possible to set two characters +as `delimiters'; +text between delimiters is also +.I eqn +input. +Delimiters may be set to characters +.I x +and +.I y +with the option +.BI -d xy +or (more commonly) with +.B delim +.I xy +between +.B .EQ +and +.BR .EN . +Left and right delimiters may be identical. +(They are customarily taken to be +$font CW "$$" )$. +Delimiters are turned off by +.LR "delim off" . +All text that is neither between delimiters nor between +.B .EQ +and +.B .EN +is passed through untouched. +.PP +.I Checkeq +reports missing or unbalanced delimiters and +.BR .EQ / .EN +pairs. +.PP +Tokens within +.I eqn +are separated by +spaces, tabs, newlines, braces, double quotes, +tildes or circumflexes. +Braces {} are used for grouping; +generally speaking, +anywhere a single character like +.L x +could appear, a complicated construction +enclosed in braces may be used instead. +Tilde +.L ~ +represents a full space in the output, +circumflex +.L ^ +half as much. +.if t .ig +.PP +WARNING to users of the on-line manual. +Unless your terminal understands half-spacing, the +examples below will be nearly unreadable. +To get a well printed copy execute +.BR "man -t eqn | lp" . +.. +.PP +.vs 13p +Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords +.B sub +and +.B sup. +Thus +.L "x sub i" +makes +$x sub i$, +.L "a sub i sup 2" +produces +$a sub i sup 2$, +and +.L "e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2}" +gives +$e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2}$. +.PP +Fractions are made with +.BR over : +.L "a over b" +yields $a over b$. +.PP +.B sqrt +makes square roots: +.L "1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}" +results in +$1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}$ . +.PP +The keywords +.B from +and +.B to +introduce lower and upper +limits on arbitrary things: +$lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i$ +is made with +.L "lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i". +.PP +Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height are made with +.B left +and +.B right: +.L "left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right ] ~=~1" +produces +$left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right ] ~=~1$. +The +.B right +clause is optional. +Legal characters after +.B left +and +.B right +are braces, brackets, bars, +.B c +and +.B f +for ceiling and floor, +and +.B +"" +for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only bracket). +.PP +Vertical piles of things are made with +.BR pile , +.BR lpile , +.BR cpile , +and +.BR rpile : +.L "pile {a above b above c}" +produces +$pile {a above b above c}$. +There can be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. +.B lpile +left-justifies, +.B pile +and +.B cpile +center, with different vertical spacing, +and +.B rpile +right justifies. +.PP +Matrices are made with +.BR matrix : +.L "matrix { lcol { x sub i above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }" +produces +$matrix { lcol { x sub i above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }$. +In addition, there is +.B rcol +for a right-justified column. +.PP +.vs 12p +Diacritical marks are made with +.BR prime , +.BR dot , +.BR dotdot , +.BR hat , +.BR tilde , +.BR bar , +.BR under , +.BR vec , +.BR dyad , +and +.BR under : +.L "x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under" +is +$x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under$, +and +.L "x vec = y dyad" +is +$x vec = y dyad$. +.PP +Sizes and font can be changed with prefix operators +.B size +.I n, +.B size +.BI \(+- n, +.BR fat , +.BR roman , +.BR italic , +.BR bold , +or +.BR font +.I n. +Size and fonts can be changed globally in a document by +.B gsize +.I n +and +.B gfont +.IR n , +or by the command-line arguments +.BI -s n +and +.BI -f n. +.PP +Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by +3 point sizes from the previous size; +this may be changed by the command-line argument +.BI -p n. +.PP +Successive display arguments can be lined up. +Place +.B mark +before the desired lineup point in the first equation; +place +.B lineup +at the place that is to line up vertically in subsequent equations. +.PP +Shorthands may be defined +or existing keywords redefined with +.BI define : +.L define +.I thing +.L % +.I replacement +.L % +defines a new token called +.I thing +which will be replaced by +.I replacement +whenever it appears thereafter. +The +.L % +may be any character that does not occur in +.L replacement. +.PP +Keywords like +.L sum +.EQ +( sum ) +.EN +.L int +.EQ +( int ) +.EN +.L inf +.EQ +( inf ) +.EN +and shorthands like +.L >= +.EQ +(>=) +.EN +.L -> +.EQ +(->), +.EN +and +.L != +.EQ +( != ) +.EN +are recognized. +Greek letters are spelled out in the desired case, as in +.L alpha +or +.LR GAMMA . +Mathematical words like +.LR sin , +.LR cos , +.L log +are made Roman automatically. +.IR Troff (1) +four-character escapes like +.L \e(lh +(\(lh) can be used anywhere. +Strings enclosed in double quotes +.B +" " +are passed through untouched; +this permits keywords to be entered as text, +and can be used to communicate +with +.I troff +when all else fails. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR troff (1), +.IR tbl (1), +.IR ms (6), +.IR eqnchar (6), +.IR doctype (1) +.br +B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, +`Typesetting Mathematics\(emUser's Guide', +this manual, Volume 2 +.br +J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, +`NROFF/TROFF User's Manual', +.I ibid. +.SH BUGS +To embolden digits, parens, etc., +it is necessary to quote them, +as in +.LR bold\ "12.3" . +.EQ +delim off +.EN diff --git a/static/v10/man1/esterel.1 b/static/v10/man1/esterel.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad619c79 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/esterel.1 @@ -0,0 +1,258 @@ +.EV +.TH esterel 1 local INRIA-CMA Esterel +.SH NAME +esterel \- Esterel compiler +.SH SYNTAX +.B esterel +[options] [file] ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I esterel +command invokes the various utilities constituting the Esterel language +development tools: +.IP "\fIstrlic\fP" +The Esterel front-end: receives files containing Esterel source +(\fB.strl\fP suffix) producing intermediate code (\fB.ic); +.IP "\fIiclc\fP" +The Esterel binder, performing the expansion of the \fBcopymodule\fP +statements; it receives several \fB.ic\fP (or \fB.lc\fP) +files and builds an unique linked code file (\fB.lc\fP); +.IP "\fIlcoc\fP" +The Esterel compiler, which produces from an unique \fB.lc\fP file, +Esterel automata in portable format (\fB.oc\fP); +.IP "\fIocl\fP" +A generic name for Esterel code generators, +translating portable automata (\fB.oc\fP) into a program written in one of +the supported target languages (see the \fB-L\fP option below). +.PP +If no files are given to the \fIesterel\fP command, the standard input +is used. Any suffix in the list \fB.strl\fP, \fB.ic\fP, \fB.lc\fP, +or \fB.oc\fP is recognized in the files names: the \fIesterel\fP command +will arrange for only the appropriate utilities to be called. +.SH OPTIONS +The following option is for the \fIesterel\fP command itself: +.IP "\fB-n\fP" +Tell what is to be done, but don't do it. +.PP +The option +.IP "\fB-version\fP" +display the version number of the \fIesterel\fP command, as well as the +ones of the various utilities including all known code generators. +.PP +The following options are passed to all four utilities: +.IP "\fB-v\fP" +Verbose mode: the \fIesterel\fP command and the various utilities +tell what they are doing; +.IP "\fB-w\fP" +Suppresse all warning messages; +.IP "\fB-W\fP" +Display all warning messages (the default is to display only "selected" +warnings); +.IP "\fB-stat\fP" +Display various time statistics; +.IP "\fB-memstat\fP" +Display statistics on dynamically allocated memory. +.PP +The three following options enable to stop the compilation process at +some intermediate stage: +.IP "\fB-ic\fP" +Just use \fIstrlic\fP to convert \fB.strl\fP files into \fB.ic\fP files +(with the same base name), ignoring all other files; +.IP "\fB-lc\fP" +Stop after running the binder (\fIiclc\fP); +.IP "\fB-oc\fP" +Stop after running the compiler (\fIlcoc\fP). +.PP +For the \fB-lc\fP and \fB-oc\fP options, one can specify the output +file name(s) with the \fB-B\fP and \fB-D\fP options. +.IP "\fB-B \fP\fIname\fP" +\fIname\fP denotes the output files default base name. +The appropriate suffix is added automatically (and possibly a working +directory name --see the following option). +If this option is omitted and if the \fIesterel\fP command +is invoked with only one file name, \fIname\fP defaults to the +base name of this unique file with the appropriate suffix; +otherwise it defaults to the base name \fBesterel\fP, still followed +by the appropriate suffix. +.IP "\fB-D \fP\fIdirectory\fP" +Specify a directory where the files produced by the command will be +placed. The default is the current directory. + +The \fB-B\fP and \fB-D\fP options and the corresponding +default rules apply to the files produced by +the \fB-K\fP (except \fB-Kic\fP) and \fB-L\fP options below. +.PP +The \fIesterel\fP command removes all the intermediate files it has created, +unless one of the following options is given: +.IP "\fB-Kic\fP +Keep all the \fB.ic\fP files (their names being the original ones, with +the suffix \fB.strl\fP replaced by \fB.ic\fP); +.IP "\fB-Klc\fP" +Keep the (unique) \fB.lc\fP file; +.IP "\fB-Koc\fP" +Keep the (unique) \fB.oc\fP file; +.IP "\fB-K" +Keep all the intermediate files. +.PP +The binder \fIiclc\fP recognizes some specific options: +.IP "\fB-Rs\fP" +Trace signal captures and renaming; +.IP "\fB-Rc\fP" +Trace constant captures and renaming; +.IP "\fB-R\fP" +Trace both signal and constant captures and renaming. +.PP +The compiler \fIlcoc\fP recognizes also some specific options: +.IP "\fB-size\fP" +Display the final size (states and bytes) of the generated automata; +.IP "\fB-show\fP" +Display dynamically the number of states generated so far. +.PP +The code generators (\fIocl\fP) recognize an unique option: +.IP "\fB-L\fP[\fIlanguage\fP][:\fIspecific_options\fP]" +.br +Set the target language: at this time only \fBc\fP, \fBlelisp\fP, +\fBtex\fP, \fBplm\fP, \fBauto\fP, +and \fBdebug\fP are known; it is likely that other languages be added. +The code generators have a name of the form \fBoc\fP\fIlanguage\fP. +If the \fB-L\fP option or the language are omitted, the default is \fBc\fP. +The string \fIspecific_options\fP allows to transmit language dependent +options to a given code generator (see \fBocl(1)\fP). +.IP +There can be as many \fB-L\fP options as needed. +.PP +Finally, there is a particular option to do as much as specified (by the +stop options) but producing nothing. +.IP "\fB-s\fP" +Perform all the compilation process, as specified by the other options, +but produce nothing. +.SH EXAMPLES +The simple command +.sp +.RS +.B esterel foo.strl +.RE +.sp +performs a full Esterel compilation, leaving the produced automaton, +in C language form, in the file \fBfoo.c\fP. +.PP +To produce debug format while keeping the generated automaton in portable +format, try +.sp +.RS +.B esterel -Koc -Ldebug foo.strl +.RE +.sp +.PP +A little more complex, the following command +.sp +.RS +.B esterel -Kic -Koc -Bautom -Llisp +.B f1.strl f2.ic f3.lc +.RE +.sp +will pass \fBf1.strl\fP through \fIstrlic\fP and keep the \fBf1.ic\fP file; +then it will pass \fBf1.ic\fP, \fBf2.ic\fP, and \fBf3.lc\fP +through \fIiclc\fP and \fIlcoc\fP, producing the file \fBautom.oc\fP +(the intermediate files are discarded); finally, +this last file will be converted into the LeLisp file \fBautom.ll\fP +by \fIoclelisp\fP. +.PP +The command +.sp +.RS +.B esterel -K -Bfoo -D/a/b f1.strl f2.strl f3.ic f4.oc +.RE +.sp +produces the following files: \fB/a/b/f1.ic\fP, \fB/a/b/f2.ic\fP, +\fB/a/b/foo.lc\fP, \fB/a/b/foo.oc\fP, and \fB/a/b/foo.c\fP. +.PP +To illustrate the \fB-s\fP option, note that +.sp +.RS +.B esterel -s foo.strl +.RE +.sp +performs a full compilation upto C code generation, but the C file is not +produced; similarly, +.sp +.RS +.B esterel -ic -s foo.strl +.RE +.sp +will only execute the front-end \fIstrlic\fP without producing any \fB.ic\fP +file. +.PP +Finally, +.sp +.RS +.B esterel -Lc -Lauto:"-signal EV1,EV2" foo.strl +.RE +.sp +performs a full compilation of the Esterel source file \fBfoo.strl\fP +to auto format (\fBfoo.auto\fP), passing the arguments +\fB-signal EV1,EV2\fP untouched to the corresponding code generator +(here \fIocauto\fP). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The command returns with exit code 0 if (and only if) +no error was detected by the various utilities. +.PP +Various error or warning messages indicate +incompatible or redundant options, or error +conditions related to file handling. +.SH BUGS +The command checks whether it generates a file which is already +present in its argument list, and if so, stops with an error, to +avoid clobbering the file. +.PP +The corresponding test is based on the name of files as given +by the user and is rather rustic. +For instance, the following erroneous condition (or any similar one) +is not detected +.sp +.RS +.B esterel -K -Bfoo -D.. foo.strl .././foo.lc +.RE +.sp +and will certainly result in loosing the original content of ../foo.lc +(use the \fB-n\fP option to see what will occur). +.SH FILES +.PP +In the following, $lib designates the default library directory for +Esterel utilities (usually /usr/local/lib/esterel). This default +path can be modified by the installer of the Esterel system, or by any +user setting the environment variable ESTERELLIB. +.sp +.ta \w'mmmmmm'u +\w'$lib/strlic 'u +.br +.ti0 + $lib/strlic Esterel front-end +.ti0 + $lib/iclc Esterel binder +.ti0 + $lib/lcoc Esterel compiler (automaton generator) +.ti0 + $lib/oc* Esterel code generators +.ti0 + + *.strl Esterel source files +.ti0 + *.ic Intermediate code files +.ti0 + *.lc Linked intermediate code file +.ti0 + *.oc Portable automata file +.ti0 + esterel.* Default names for keeping intermediate files +.SH SEE ALSO +strlic(l), iclc(l), lcoc(l), ocl(l) +.br +\fIEsterel V3 Reference Manual\fP +.br +\fIEsterel V3 System Manuals\fP +.SH IDENTIFICATION +Author: Jean-Paul Rigault, Ecole des Mines de Paris, CMA +.br +$Revision: 1.1 $ +.br +$Date: 88/04/07 13:39:34 $ diff --git a/static/v10/man1/exit.1 b/static/v10/man1/exit.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..970eacd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/exit.1 @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'EXIT(I)'3/15/72'EXIT(I)' +.ti 0 +NAME exit -- terminate command file +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS exit____ +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION exit____ +performs a seek____ to the end of its standard input file. +Thus, if it is invoked inside +a file of commands, upon return from exit____ the shell will +discover an end-of-file and terminate. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO if(I), goto(I), sh(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/expr.1 b/static/v10/man1/expr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3bc6fe3b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/expr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +.TH EXPR 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +expr \- integer and string-match expression evaluator for shell scripts +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B expr +.I arg ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The arguments are taken as an expression. +After evaluation, the result is written on the standard output. +Each token of the expression is a separate argument. +.PP +The operators and keywords are listed below +in order of increasing precedence, +with equal precedence operators grouped. +.TP \w'\f5(\fI\ expr\ \f5)\ 'u +.IB expr1 " | " expr2 +Value is the value of +.I expr1 +if that is neither empty nor 0, +otherwise the value of +.IR expr2. +.TP +.IB expr1 " & " expr2 +Value is the value of +.I expr1 +if neither +.I expr1 +nor +.I expr2 +is empty or 0, otherwise 0. +.TP +.I expr1 relop expr2 +.I Relop +is one of +.L "< <= = != >= >" . +Value is 1 +if the indicated comparison is true, 0 +if false. +The comparison is numeric if both +.I expr +are integers, otherwise lexicographic. +.TP +.IB expr1 " + " expr2 +.br +.ns +.TP +.IB expr1 " - " expr2 +.br +Value is the sum or difference of the (integer) values of +.I expr1 +and +.I expr2. +.TP +.IB expr1 " * " expr2 +.br +.ns +.TP +.IB expr1 " / " expr2 +.br +.ns +.TP +.IB expr1 " % " expr2 +.br +Value is the product, quotient, or remainder of the (integer) +values of +.I expr1 +and +.I expr2. +.TP +.IB expr " : " regexp +Match the string value of +.I expr +with the regular expression +.IR regexp ; +regular expression syntax is the same as in +.IR ed (1), +but matches are anchored at the left. +On success a subexpression +.BR \e(\| ... \|\e) , +if present in +.I regexp, +picks out a return value from the matched string. +Otherwise, +the matching operator yields the number of characters matched +(0 on failure). +.TP +.BI ( " expr " ) +Parentheses for grouping. +.TP +.I arg +Value is the string +.I arg. +.PP +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +a=`expr $a + 1` +Add 1 to shell variable +.IR a . +.TP +.L +expr $a : '.*/\e(.*\e)' '|' $a +Same as +.LR "basename $a" . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR sh (1), +.IR test (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.I Expr +returns exit code 0 if the expression is neither null nor 0, +1 if the expression is null or 0, 2 for invalid expressions. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/f2c.1 b/static/v10/man1/f2c.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..419ba030 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/f2c.1 @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + F2C(1) F2C(1) + + NAME + f2c - Convert Fortran 77 to C or C++ + + SYNOPSIS + f2c [ option ... ] file ... + + DESCRIPTION + F2c converts Fortran 77 source code in files with names end- + ing in `.f' or `.F' to C (or C++) source files in the cur- + rent directory, with `.c' substituted for the final `.f' or + `.F'. If no Fortran files are named, f2c reads Fortran from + standard input and writes C on standard output. File names + that end with `.p' or `.P' are taken to be prototype files, + as produced by option `-P', and are read first. + + The following options have the same meaning as in f77(1). + + -C Compile code to check that subscripts are within + declared array bounds. + + -I2 Render INTEGER and LOGICAL as short, INTEGER*4 as long + int. Assume the default libF77 and libI77: allow only + INTEGER*4 (and no LOGICAL) variables in INQUIREs. + Option `-I4' confirms the default rendering of INTEGER + as long int. + + -onetrip + Compile DO loops that are performed at least once if + reached. (Fortran 77 DO loops are not performed at all + if the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit.) + + -U Honor the case of variable and external names. Fortran + keywords must be in lower case. + + -u Make the default type of a variable `undefined' rather + than using the default Fortran rules. + + -w Suppress all warning messages. If the option is + `-w66', only Fortran 66 compatibility warnings are sup- + pressed. + + The following options are peculiar to f2c. + + -A Produce ANSI C. Default is old-style C. + + -a Make local variables automatic rather than static + unless they appear in a DATA, EQUIVALENCE, NAMELIST, or + SAVE statement. + + -C++ Output C++ code. + + -c Include original Fortran source as comments. + + Page 1 Local (printed 2/2/93) + + F2C(1) F2C(1) + + -E Declare uninitialized COMMON to be Extern (overridably + defined in f2c.h as extern). + + -ec Place uninitialized COMMON blocks in separate files: + COMMON /ABC/ appears in file abc_com.c. Option `-e1c' + bundles the separate files into the output file, with + comments that give an unbundling sed(1) script. + + -ext Complain about f77(1) extensions. + + -f Assume free-format input: accept text after column 72 + and do not pad fixed-format lines shorter than 72 char- + acters with blanks. + + -72 Treat text appearing after column 72 as an error. + + -g Include original Fortran line numbers in #line lines. + + -h Emulate Fortran 66's treatment of Hollerith: try to + align character strings on word (or, if the option is + `-hd', on double-word) boundaries. + + -i2 Similar to -I2, but assume a modified libF77 and libI77 + (compiled with -Df2c_i2), so INTEGER and LOGICAL vari- + ables may be assigned by INQUIRE and array lengths are + stored in short ints. + + -kr Use temporary values to enforce Fortran expression + evaluation where K&R (first edition) parenthesization + rules allow rearrangement. If the option is `-krd', + use double precision temporaries even for single- + precision operands. + + -P Write a file.P of ANSI (or C++) prototypes for defini- + tions in each input file.f or file.F. When reading + Fortran from standard input, write prototypes at the + beginning of standard output. Option -Ps implies -P + and gives exit status 4 if rerunning f2c may change + prototypes or declarations. + + -p Supply preprocessor definitions to make common-block + members look like local variables. + + -R Do not promote REAL functions and operations to DOUBLE + PRECISION. Option `-!R' confirms the default, which + imitates f77. + + -r Cast values of REAL functions (including intrinsics) to + REAL. + + -r8 Promote REAL to DOUBLE PRECISION, COMPLEX to DOUBLE + COMPLEX. + + Page 2 Local (printed 2/2/93) + + F2C(1) F2C(1) + + -s Preserve multidimensional subscripts. + + -Tdir + Put temporary files in directory dir. + + -w8 Suppress warnings when COMMON or EQUIVALENCE forces + odd-word alignment of doubles. + + -Wn Assume n characters/word (default 4) when initializing + numeric variables with character data. + + -z Do not implicitly recognize DOUBLE COMPLEX. + + -!bs Do not recognize backslash escapes (\", \', \0, \\, \b, + \f, \n, \r, \t, \v) in character strings. + + -!c Inhibit C output, but produce -P output. + + -!I Reject include statements. + + -!i8 Disallow INTEGER*8. + + -!it Don't infer types of untyped EXTERNAL procedures from + use as parameters to previously defined or prototyped + procedures. + + -!P Do not attempt to infer ANSI or C++ prototypes from + usage. + + The resulting C invokes the support routines of f77; object + code should be loaded by f77 or with ld(1) or cc(1) options + -lF77 -lI77 -lm. Calling conventions are those of f77: see + the reference below. + + FILES + file.[fF] + input file + + *.c output file + + /usr/include/f2c.h + header file + + /usr/lib/libF77.a + intrinsic function library + + /usr/lib/libI77.a + Fortran I/O library + + /lib/libc.a + C library, see section 3 + + Page 3 Local (printed 2/2/93) + + F2C(1) F2C(1) + + SEE ALSO + S. I. Feldman and P. J. Weinberger, `A Portable Fortran 77 + Compiler', UNIX Time Sharing System Programmer's Manual, + Tenth Edition, Volume 2, AT&T Bell Laboratories, 1990. + + DIAGNOSTICS + The diagnostics produced by f2c are intended to be self- + explanatory. + + BUGS + Floating-point constant expressions are simplified in the + floating-point arithmetic of the machine running f2c, so + they are typically accurate to at most 16 or 17 decimal + places. + Untypable EXTERNAL functions are declared int. + + Page 4 Local (printed 2/2/93) + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/f77.1 b/static/v10/man1/f77.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d226c9f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/f77.1 @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ +.TH F77 1 +.CT 1 prog_other +.SH NAME +f77 \(mi Fortran 77 compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B f77 +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I F77 +is a Fortran 77 compiler. +It accepts several types of arguments: +.PP +Arguments whose names end with +.L .f +are taken to be +Fortran 77 source programs; +they are compiled, and +each object program is left on the file in the current directory +whose name is that of the source with +.L .o +substituted +for +.LR .f . +.PP +Arguments whose names end with +.L .r +or +.L .e +are taken to be Ratfor or EFL +source programs, respectively; these are first transformed by the +appropriate preprocessor, then compiled by +.I f77. +.PP +In the same way, +arguments whose names end with +.L .c +or +.L .s +are taken to be C or assembly source programs +and are compiled or assembled, producing a +.L .o +file. +.PP +The following options have the same meaning as in +.IR cc (1). +See +.IR ld (1) +for load-time options. +.TP +.B -c +Suppress loading and produce +.L .o +files for each source +file. +.TP +.B -g +Have the compiler produce additional symbol table information for +.IR sdb (A) +or +.IR pi (9.1). +.TP +.BR -w +Suppress all warning messages. +If the option is +.LR -w66 , +only Fortran 66 compatibility warnings are suppressed. +.TP +.B -p +Prepare object files for profiling, see +.IR prof (1). +.TP +.B -O +Invoke an +object-code optimizer. +.TP +.B -S +Compile the named programs, and leave the +assembler-language output on corresponding files suffixed +.LR .s . +(No +.L .o +is created.). +.TP +.BI -o " output" +Name the final output file +.I output +instead of +.LR a.out . +.PP +The following options are peculiar to +.IR f77 . +.TP +.BR -onetrip +Compile DO loops that are performed at least once if reached. +(Fortran 77 DO loops are not performed at all if the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit.) +.TP +.BR -u +Make the default type of a variable `undefined' rather than using the default Fortran rules. +.TP +.BR -C +Compile code to check that subscripts are within declared array bounds. +.TP +.B -I2 +Render +.SM INTEGER +and +.SM LOGICAL +as short, +.SM INTEGER\*S\(**4 +as long. +Allow only +.SM INTEGER\*S\(**4 +(and no +.SM LOGICAL\*S) +variables in +.SM INQUIRE\*Ss. +.TP +.B -U +Honor the case of variable and external names. +Fortran keywords must be in lower case. +.TP +.BR -F +Apply EFL and Ratfor preprocessors to relevant files, +put the results in the files +with the suffix changed to +.LR .f , +but do not compile. +.TP +.BR -m +Apply the M4 preprocessor to each +.L .r +or +.L .e +file before transforming +it with the Ratfor or EFL preprocessor. +.TP +.BI -E x +Use the string +.I x +as an EFL option in processing +.L .e +files. +.TP +.BI -R x +Use the string +.I x +as a Ratfor option in processing +.L .r +files. +.PP +Other arguments +are taken +to be either loader option arguments, or F77-compatible +object programs, typically produced by an earlier +run, +or perhaps libraries of F77-compatible routines. +These programs, together with the results of any +compilations specified, are loaded (in the order +given) to produce an executable program with name +.LR a.out . +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/libF77.a +.TP +.IB file .[fresc] +input file +.TP +.B *.o +object file +.TP +.F a.out +loaded output +.TP +.F ./fort* +temporary +.TP +.F /usr/lib/f77pass1 +compiler +.TP +.F /lib/f1 +pass 2 +.TP +.F /lib/c2 +optional optimizer +.TP +.F /usr/lib/libF77.a +intrinsic function library +.TP +.F /usr/lib/libI77.a +Fortran I/O library +.TP +.F /lib/libc.a +C library, see section 3 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR prof (1), +.IR cc (1), +.IR ld (1), +.IR efl (A), +.IR ratfor (A) +.br +S. I. Feldman and +P. J. Weinberger, +`A Portable Fortran 77 Compiler', +this manual, Volume 2 +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The diagnostics produced by +.I f77 +itself are intended to be +self-explanatory. +Occasional messages may be produced by the loader. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/factor.1 b/static/v10/man1/factor.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb1aa2a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/factor.1 @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'FACTOR (I)'1/15/73'FACTOR (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME factor -- discover prime factors of a number +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS factor______ +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION When factor is invoked, it types +out "Enter:" at you. If you type in a positive +number less than 2^56 (about 7.2E16), it will repeat the number +back at you and then its prime factors each one printed +the proper number of times. Then it says "Enter:" again. +To exit, feed it an EOT or a delete. +.sp +Maximum time to factor is proportional to sqrt(n) and occurs +when n is prime. It takes 1 minute to factor a prime near 10^13. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO -- +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "Ouch." for input out of range or for garbage input. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fc.1 b/static/v10/man1/fc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c33f614 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/fc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,292 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'FC (I)'9/1/72'FC (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME fc -- fortran compiler +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS fc__ [ -c__ ] sfile\d1\u.f__ ... ofile\d1\u ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION fc__ +is the UNIX Fortran compiler. +It accepts three types of arguments: + +Arguments whose names end with ".f" are assumed to be +Fortran source program units; they are compiled, and +the object program is left on the file sfile\d1\u.o (i.e. +the file whose name is that of the source with ".o" substituted +for ".f"). + +Other arguments (except for "-c") are assumed +to be either loader flags, or +object programs, typically produced by an earlier fc__ run, +or perhaps libraries of Fortran-compatible routines. +These programs, together with the results of any +compilations specified, are loaded (in the order +given) to produce an executable program with name +a.out_____. + +The "-c" argument suppresses the loading phase, as does +any syntax error in any of the routines being compiled. + +The following is a list +of differences between fc__ +and ANSI standard Fortran (also see the BUGS section): +.sp +.in +3 +.ti -3 +1. Arbitrary combination of types is allowed +in expressions. Not all combinations are expected to +be supported at runtime. +All of the normal +conversions involving integer, real, double +precision and complex are allowed. +.sp +.ti -3 +2. The 'standard' implicit statement is recognized. +.sp +.ti -3 +3. The types +doublecomplex, logical*1, +integer*2 and real*8 (doubleprecision) +are supported. +.sp +.ti -3 +4. &_ as the first character of a line +signals a continuation card. +.sp +.ti -3 +5. c_ as the first character of a line signals a comment. +.sp +.ti -3 +6. All keywords are recognized in lower case. +.sp +.ti -3 +7. The notion of 'column 7' is not implemented. + +.ti -3 +8. G-format input is free form-- +leading blanks are ignored, the first blank after the start +of the number terminates the field. + +.ti -3 +9. A comma in any numeric or logical input field terminates +the field. + +.ti -4 +10. There is no carriage control on output. +.sp +.in -3 +In I/O statements, only unit numbers 0-19 are supported. +Unit number nn__ corresponds to file "fortnn__;" +(e.g. unit 9 is file "fort09"). +For input, the file must exist; +for output, it will be created. + +Unit 5 is permanently associated with +the standard input file; unit 6 with the +standard output file. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES file.f input file +.nf +a.out loaded output +f.tmp[123] temporary (deleted) +/usr/fort/fc[1234] compilation phases +/usr/lib/fr0.o runtime startoff +/usr/lib/filib.a interpreter library +/usr/lib/libf.a builtin functions, etc. +/usr/lib/liba.a system library +.fi +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO ANSI standard +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS Compile-time diagnostics +are given by number. +If the source code is available, it is +printed with an underline at the current +character pointer. +Errors possible are: + +.in +8 +.ti -8 +1 statement too long +.ti -8 +2 syntax error in type statement +.ti -8 +3 redeclaration +.ti -8 +4 missing ( in array declarator +.ti -8 +5 syntax error in dimension statement +.ti -8 +6 inappropriate or gratuitous array declarator +.ti -8 +7 syntax error in subscript bound +.ti -8 +8 illegal character +.ti -8 +9 common variable is a parameter or already in common +.ti -8 +10 common syntax error +.ti -8 +11 subroutine/blockdata/function not first statement +.ti -8 +12 subroutine/function syntax error +.ti -8 +13 block data syntax error +.ti -8 +14 redeclaration in external +.ti -8 +15 external syntax error +.ti -8 +16 implicit syntax error +.ti -8 +17 subscript on non-array +.ti -8 +18 incorrect subscript count +.ti -8 +19 subscript out of range +.ti -8 +20 subscript syntax error +.ti -8 +22 DATA syntax error +.ti -8 +23 Illegal variable in DATA +.ti -8 +23 equivalence inconsistency +.ti -8 +24 equivalence syntax error +.ti -8 +25 separate common blocks equivalenced +.ti -8 +26 common block illegally extended by equivalence +.ti -8 +27 common inconsistency created by equivalence +.ti -8 +28 DATA table overflow +.ti -8 +29 () imbalance in expression +.ti -8 +30 expression syntax error +.ti -8 +31 illegal variable in equivalence +.ti -8 +32 Storage initialized twice by DATA +.ti -8 +33 non array/function used with subscripts/arguments +.ti -8 +35 goto syntax error +.ti -8 +37 illegal return +.ti -8 +38 continue, return, stop, call, end, or pause syntax error +.ti -8 +39 assign syntax error +.ti -8 +40 if syntax error +.ti -8 +41 I/O syntax error +.ti -8 +42 do or I/O iteration error +.ti -8 +43 do end missing +.ti -8 +50 illegal statement in block data +.ti -8 +51 multiply defined labels +.ti -8 +52 undefined label +.ti -8 +53 dimension mismatch +.ti -8 +54 expression syntax error +.ti -8 +55 end of statement in hollerith constant +.ti -8 +56 array too large +.ti -8 +99 B table overflow +.ti -8 +101 unrecognized statement +.ti -8 + +.ti -8 +Runtime diagnostics: +.ti -8 + +.ti -8 +1 invalid log argument +.ti -8 +2 bad arg count to amod +.ti -8 +3 bad arg count to atan2 +.ti -8 +4 excessive argument to cabs +.ti -8 +5 exp too large in cexp +.ti -8 +6 bad arg count to cmplx +.ti -8 +7 bad arg count to dim +.ti -8 +8 excessive argument to exp +.ti -8 +9 bad arg count to idim +.ti -8 +10 bad arg count to isign +.ti -8 +11 bad arg count to mod +.ti -8 +12 bad arg count to sign +.ti -8 +13 illegal argument to sqrt +.ti -8 +14 assigned/computed goto out of range +.ti -8 +15 subscript out of range +.ti -8 +16 real**real overflow + +.ti -8 +100 illegal I/O unit number +.ti -8 +101 inconsistent use of I/O unit +.ti -8 +102 cannot create output file +.ti -8 +103 cannot open input file +.ti -8 +104 EOF on input file +.ti -8 +105 illegal character in format +.ti -8 +106 format does not begin with ( +.ti -8 +107 no conversion in format but non-empty list +.ti -8 +108 excessive parenthesis depth in format +.ti -8 +109 illegal format specification +.ti -8 +110 illegal character in input field +.ti -8 +111 end of format in hollerith specification +.ti -8 +999 unimplemented input conversion +.sp +.in -8 +.ti 0 +BUGS The following is a list of +those features not yet implemented: +.sp +.br +arithmetic statement functions + +backspace, endfile, rewind runtime + +binary I/O + +no scale factors on input diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fed.1 b/static/v10/man1/fed.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17413593 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/fed.1 @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'FED (I)'1/15/73'FED (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME +.br +fed -- edit associative memory for form letter +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS +.br +fe__d_ +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION +.br +fed___ is used to edit a form letter associative memory +file, form.m, which consists of named strings. +Commands consist of single letters followed by a list of +string names separated by a single space and ending with a +new line. +The conventions of the Shell with respect to '*' and '?' hold for +all commands but m_ where literal string names are expected. +The commands are: + +.in +5 +.ti -5 +e name918 ... + +e_dit writes the string whose name is name918 onto a temporary file +and executes the system editor ed__. On exit from the system +editor the temporary file is copied back into the associative +memory. Each argument is operated on separately. The sequence of +commands to add the string from 'file' to memory with name +'newname' is as follows: + + e newname + 0 (printed by ed) + r file + 200 + w + 200 + q (get out of ed) + q (get out of fe) + +To dump a string onto a file: + + e name + 200 (printed by ed) + w filename + 200 + q (get out of ed) + q (get out of fe) +.sp2 +.ti -5 +d [ name918 ... ] + +d_eletes a string and its name from the memory. When called with +no arguments d_ operates in a verbose mode typing each string +name and deleting only if a 'y' is typed. A 'q' response returns +to fed's command level. Any other response does nothing. +.sp 2 +.ti -5 +m name918 name928 ... + +(m_ove) changes the name of name918 to name928 and removes previous +string name928 if one exists. Several pairs of arguments may be given. +.sp 2 +.ti -5 +n [ name918 ... ] + +(n_ames) lists the string names in the memory. If called with +the optional arguments, it just lists those requested. +.sp 2 +.ti -5 +p name918 ... + +p_rints the contents of the strings with names given by the arguments. +.sp 2 +.ti -5 +q +(q_uit) returns to the system. +.sp 2 +.ti -5 +c [ p_ ] [ f_ ] + +c_hecks the associative memory file for consistency +and reports the number of free headers and blocks. +The optional arguments do the following: +.sp +.in +5 +.ti -2 +p causes any unaccounted for string to be +printed + +.ti -2 +f fixes broken memories by adding +unaccounted-for headers to free +storage and removing references to +released headers from associative +memory. +.in -5 +.sp +.sp +.in -5 +.ti 0 +FILES /tmp/ftmp? temporary +.br +form.m associative memory +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO form(I), ed(I), sh(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS '?' unknown command +.br +'Cannot open temp. file'-- cannot create a temporary file for ed command +.br +'name not in memory.' if string 'name' is not in the associative +memory and is used as an argument for d_ or m_. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +WARNING It +is legal but an unwise idea to have string names +with blanks, ":" or "?" in them. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fields.1 b/static/v10/man1/fields.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56fdeb98 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/fields.1 @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +x = 1 2 3 4 -3 6 +y = 3 8 9 +x = 1 2 3 0 0 6 +y = 2 8 16 +p->a = 0x3, p->b = 0xf diff --git a/static/v10/man1/file.1 b/static/v10/man1/file.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e2aaa2a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/file.1 @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ +.th FILE I 11/1/73 +.sh NAME +file \*- determine format of file +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd file +files +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it File +will examine each of its arguments +and give a guess as to the contents of the file. +It is the only program that will give +device numbers of special files. +.sh BUGS +If the file is not instantly recognized, +its type is given as `unknown'. +There should be some heuristic to +recognize source file `signatures' +in each of the standard languages. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/find.1 b/static/v10/man1/find.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9fe8dd0c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/find.1 @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +.TH FIND 1 +.CT 1 files dirs +.SH NAME +find \- find files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B find +.I pathname ... expression +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Find +recursively descends +the directory hierarchy for each +.I pathname, +seeking files that match a boolean +.I expression, +which consists of one or more arguments. +It does not follow symbolic links. +In the following descriptions of primary expressions, +.I n +is a decimal integer; +.BI + n +may be written to specify more than +.I n +and +.BI - n +to specify less. +.TP 10n +.BI -name " filename" +True if the +.I filename +argument matches the current file name. +Normal shell filename metacharacters may be used if quoted. +.TP +.BI -perm " onum" +True if the file permission flags +exactly +match the +octal number +.I onum +(see +.IR chmod (1)). +If +.I onum +is prefixed by a minus sign, +more mode bits (017777, see +.IR stat (2)) +become significant and +the modes are compared: +.IR (mode&onum)==onum . +.TP +.BI -type " c" +True if the type of the file +is +.I c, +where +.I c +is +.BI b ", " c ", " d ", " +.BI f ", " +or +.B L +for +block special file, character special file, +directory, plain file or symbolic link. +.TP +.BI -links " n" +True if the file has +.I n +links. +.TP +.BI -user " uname" +True if the file belongs to the user +.I uname +(login name or numeric userid). +.TP +.BI -group " gname" +True if the file belongs to group +.I gname +(group name or numeric groupid). +.TP +.BI -size " n" +True if the file is +.I n +blocks long (512 bytes per block). +.TP +.BI -inum " n" +True if the file has inode number +.I n. +.TP +.BI -atime " n" +True if the file has been accessed in +.I n +days. +.TP +.BI -mtime " n" +True if the file has been modified in +.I n +days. +.TP +.BI -ctime " n" +True if the inode has been changed in +.I n +days. +.TP +.BI -exec " command" +True if the executed command returns +a zero value as exit status. +The end of the command must be punctuated by an escaped +semicolon. +A command argument +.L {} +is replaced by the +current pathname. +.TP +.BI -ok " command" +Like +.B -exec +except that the generated command is written on +the standard output, then the standard input is read +and the command executed only upon response +.BI y . +.TP +.B -print +Always true; +causes the current pathname to be printed. +.TP +.BI -newer " file" +True if +the file has been modified more recently than the argument +.I file. +.TP +.BI -status " n +True if +.IR lstat +(see +.IR stat (2)) +applied to the file yields error number +.IR n ; +see +.IR intro (2). +Testing +.L -status +turns off diagnostics that errors normally produce. +On ordinary systems a nonzero error number occurs when a file +disappears underfoot or a file system is in trouble. +.PP +The following operators, listed in order of decreasing precedence, +may be used to combine primary expressions. +.TP +.BI ( " expression " ) +Group with parentheses. +.TP +.BI ! " expression +Negation. +True if and only if +.I expression +is not true. +.TP +.I expression expression +Conjunction. +True if both expressions are true. +.TP +.IB expression " -o " expression +Disjunction. +True if either expression is true. +.SH EXAMPLES +.HP +.L +find / \e( -name a.out -o -name '*.o' \e) -atime +7 -exec rm '{}' \e; +.br +Remove all files named +.L a.out +or +.L *.o +that have not been accessed for a week. +.SH FILES +.F /etc/passwd +.br +.F /etc/group +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR sh (1), +.IR test (1), +.IR filsys (5) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/flex.1 b/static/v10/man1/flex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..99cb5667 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/flex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,716 @@ +.TH FLEX 1 "20 June 1989" "Version 2.1" +.SH NAME +flex - fast lexical analyzer generator +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B flex +[ +.B -bdfipstvFILT -c[efmF] -Sskeleton_file +] [ +.I filename +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I flex +is a rewrite of +.I lex +intended to right some of that tool's deficiencies: in particular, +.I flex +generates lexical analyzers much faster, and the analyzers use +smaller tables and run faster. +.SH OPTIONS +In addition to lex's +.B -t +flag, flex has the following options: +.TP +.B -b +Generate backtracking information to +.I lex.backtrack. +This is a list of scanner states which require backtracking +and the input characters on which they do so. By adding rules one +can remove backtracking states. If all backtracking states +are eliminated and +.B -f +or +.B -F +is used, the generated scanner will run faster (see the +.B -p +flag). Only users who wish to squeeze every last cycle out of their +scanners need worry about this option. +.TP +.B -d +makes the generated scanner run in +.I debug +mode. Whenever a pattern is recognized the scanner will +write to +.I stderr +a line of the form: +.nf + + --accepting rule #n + +.fi +Rules are numbered sequentially with the first one being 1. Rule #0 +is executed when the scanner backtracks; Rule #(n+1) (where +.I n +is the number of rules) indicates the default action; Rule #(n+2) indicates +that the input buffer is empty and needs to be refilled and then the scan +restarted. Rules beyond (n+2) are end-of-file actions. +.TP +.B -f +has the same effect as lex's -f flag (do not compress the scanner +tables); the mnemonic changes from +.I fast compilation +to (take your pick) +.I full table +or +.I fast scanner. +The actual compilation takes +.I longer, +since flex is I/O bound writing out the big table. +.IP +This option is equivalent to +.B -cf +(see below). +.TP +.B -i +instructs flex to generate a +.I case-insensitive +scanner. The case of letters given in the flex input patterns will +be ignored, and the rules will be matched regardless of case. The +matched text given in +.I yytext +will have the preserved case (i.e., it will not be folded). +.TP +.B -p +generates a performance report to stderr. The report +consists of comments regarding features of the flex input file +which will cause a loss of performance in the resulting scanner. +Note that the use of +.I REJECT +and variable trailing context (see +.B BUGS) +entails a substantial performance penalty; use of +.I yymore(), +the +.B ^ +operator, +and the +.B -I +flag entail minor performance penalties. +.TP +.B -s +causes the +.I default rule +(that unmatched scanner input is echoed to +.I stdout) +to be suppressed. If the scanner encounters input that does not +match any of its rules, it aborts with an error. This option is +useful for finding holes in a scanner's rule set. +.TP +.B -v +has the same meaning as for lex (print to +.I stderr +a summary of statistics of the generated scanner). Many more statistics +are printed, though, and the summary spans several lines. Most +of the statistics are meaningless to the casual flex user, but the +first line identifies the version of flex, which is useful for figuring +out where you stand with respect to patches and new releases. +.TP +.B -F +specifies that the +.ul +fast +scanner table representation should be used. This representation is +about as fast as the full table representation +.ul +(-f), +and for some sets of patterns will be considerably smaller (and for +others, larger). In general, if the pattern set contains both "keywords" +and a catch-all, "identifier" rule, such as in the set: +.nf + + "case" return ( TOK_CASE ); + "switch" return ( TOK_SWITCH ); + ... + "default" return ( TOK_DEFAULT ); + [a-z]+ return ( TOK_ID ); + +.fi +then you're better off using the full table representation. If only +the "identifier" rule is present and you then use a hash table or some such +to detect the keywords, you're better off using +.ul +-F. +.IP +This option is equivalent to +.B -cF +(see below). +.TP +.B -I +instructs flex to generate an +.I interactive +scanner. Normally, scanners generated by flex always look ahead one +character before deciding that a rule has been matched. At the cost of +some scanning overhead, flex will generate a scanner which only looks ahead +when needed. Such scanners are called +.I interactive +because if you want to write a scanner for an interactive system such as a +command shell, you will probably want the user's input to be terminated +with a newline, and without +.B -I +the user will have to type a character in addition to the newline in order +to have the newline recognized. This leads to dreadful interactive +performance. +.IP +If all this seems to confusing, here's the general rule: if a human will +be typing in input to your scanner, use +.B -I, +otherwise don't; if you don't care about how fast your scanners run and +don't want to make any assumptions about the input to your scanner, +always use +.B -I. +.IP +Note, +.B -I +cannot be used in conjunction with +.I full +or +.I fast tables, +i.e., the +.B -f, -F, -cf, +or +.B -cF +flags. +.TP +.B -L +instructs flex to not generate +.B #line +directives (see below). +.TP +.B -T +makes flex run in +.I trace +mode. It will generate a lot of messages to stdout concerning +the form of the input and the resultant non-deterministic and deterministic +finite automatons. This option is mostly for use in maintaining flex. +.TP +.B -c[efmF] +controls the degree of table compression. +.B -ce +directs flex to construct +.I equivalence classes, +i.e., sets of characters +which have identical lexical properties (for example, if the only +appearance of digits in the flex input is in the character class +"[0-9]" then the digits '0', '1', ..., '9' will all be put +in the same equivalence class). +.B -cf +specifies that the +.I full +scanner tables should be generated - flex should not compress the +tables by taking advantages of similar transition functions for +different states. +.B -cF +specifies that the alternate fast scanner representation (described +above under the +.B -F +flag) +should be used. +.B -cm +directs flex to construct +.I meta-equivalence classes, +which are sets of equivalence classes (or characters, if equivalence +classes are not being used) that are commonly used together. +A lone +.B -c +specifies that the scanner tables should be compressed but neither +equivalence classes nor meta-equivalence classes should be used. +.IP +The options +.B -cf +or +.B -cF +and +.B -cm +do not make sense together - there is no opportunity for meta-equivalence +classes if the table is not being compressed. Otherwise the options +may be freely mixed. +.IP +The default setting is +.B -cem +which specifies that flex should generate equivalence classes +and meta-equivalence classes. This setting provides the highest +degree of table compression. You can trade off +faster-executing scanners at the cost of larger tables with +the following generally being true: +.nf + + slowest smallest + -cem + -ce + -cm + -c + -c{f,F}e + -c{f,F} + fastest largest + +.fi +Note that scanners with the smallest tables compile the quickest, so +during development you will usually want to use the default, maximal +compression. +.TP +.B -Sskeleton_file +overrides the default skeleton file from which flex constructs +its scanners. You'll never need this option unless you are doing +flex maintenance or development. +.SH INCOMPATIBILITIES WITH LEX +.I flex +is fully compatible with +.I lex +with the following exceptions: +.IP - +There is no run-time library to link with. You needn't +specify +.I -ll +when linking, and you must supply a main program. (Hacker's note: since +the lex library contains a main() which simply calls yylex(), you actually +.I can +be lazy and not supply your own main program and link with +.I -ll.) +.IP - +lex's +.B %r +(Ratfor scanners) and +.B %t +(translation table) options +are not supported. +.IP - +The do-nothing +.ul +-n +flag is not supported. +.IP - +When definitions are expanded, flex encloses them in parentheses. +With lex, the following +.nf + + NAME [A-Z][A-Z0-9]* + %% + foo{NAME}? printf( "Found it\\n" ); + %% + +.fi +will not match the string "foo" because when the macro +is expanded the rule is equivalent to "foo[A-Z][A-Z0-9]*?" +and the precedence is such that the '?' is associated with +"[A-Z0-9]*". With flex, the rule will be expanded to +"foo([A-z][A-Z0-9]*)?" and so the string "foo" will match. +Note that because of this, the +.B ^, $, , +and +.B / +operators cannot be used in a definition. +.IP - +The undocumented lex-scanner internal variable +.B yylineno +is not supported. +.IP - +The +.B input() +routine is not redefinable, though may be called to read characters +following whatever has been matched by a rule. If +.B input() +encounters an end-of-file the normal +.B yywrap() +processing is done. A ``real'' end-of-file is returned as +.I EOF. +.IP +Input can be controlled by redefining the +.B YY_INPUT +macro. +YY_INPUT's calling sequence is "YY_INPUT(buf,result,max_size)". Its +action is to place up to max_size characters in the character buffer "buf" +and return in the integer variable "result" either the +number of characters read or the constant YY_NULL (0 on Unix systems) +systems) to indicate EOF. The default YY_INPUT reads from the +file-pointer "yyin" (which is by default +.I stdin), +so if you +just want to change the input file, you needn't redefine +YY_INPUT - just point yyin at the input file. +.IP +A sample redefinition of YY_INPUT (in the first section of the input +file): +.nf + + %{ + #undef YY_INPUT + #define YY_INPUT(buf,result,max_size) \\ + result = (buf[0] = getchar()) == EOF ? YY_NULL : 1; + %} + +.fi +You also can add in things like counting keeping track of the +input line number this way; but don't expect your scanner to +go very fast. +.IP - +.B output() +is not supported. +Output from the ECHO macro is done to the file-pointer +"yyout" (default +.I stdout). +.IP - +If you are providing your own yywrap() routine, you must "#undef yywrap" +first. +.IP - +To refer to yytext outside of your scanner source file, use +"extern char *yytext;" rather than "extern char yytext[];". +.IP - +.B yyleng +is a macro and not a variable, and hence cannot be accessed outside +of the scanner source file. +.IP - +flex reads only one input file, while lex's input is made +up of the concatenation of its input files. +.IP - +The name +.bd +FLEX_SCANNER +is #define'd so scanners may be written for use with either +flex or lex. +.IP - +The macro +.bd +YY_USER_ACTION +can be redefined to provide an action +which is always executed prior to the matched rule's action. For example, +it could be #define'd to call a routine to convert yytext to lower-case, +or to copy yyleng to a global variable to make it accessible outside of +the scanner source file. +.IP - +In the generated scanner, rules are separated using +.bd +YY_BREAK +instead of simple "break"'s. This allows, for example, C++ users to +#define YY_BREAK to do nothing (while being very careful that every +rule ends with a "break" or a "return"!) to avoid suffering from +unreachable statement warnings where a rule's action ends with "return". +.SH ENHANCEMENTS +.IP - +.I Exclusive start-conditions +can be declared by using +.B %x +instead of +.B %s. +These start-conditions have the property that when they are active, +.I no other rules are active. +Thus a set of rules governed by the same exclusive start condition +describe a scanner which is independent of any of the other rules in +the flex input. This feature makes it easy to specify "mini-scanners" +which scan portions of the input that are syntactically different +from the rest (e.g., comments). +.IP - +.I yyterminate() +can be used in lieu of a return statement in an action. It terminates +the scanner and returns a 0 to the scanner's caller, indicating "all done". +.IP - +.I End-of-file rules. +The special rule "<>" indicates +actions which are to be taken when an end-of-file is +encountered and yywrap() returns non-zero (i.e., indicates +no further files to process). The action can either +point yyin at a new file to process, in which case the +action should finish with +.I YY_NEW_FILE +(this is a branch, so subsequent code in the action won't +be executed), or it should finish with a +.I return +statement. <> rules may not be used with other +patterns; they may only be qualified with a list of start +conditions. If an unqualified <> rule is given, it +applies only to the INITIAL start condition, and +.I not +to +.B %s +start conditions. +These rules are useful for catching things like unclosed comments. +An example: +.nf + + %x quote + %% + ... + <> { + error( "unterminated quote" ); + yyterminate(); + } + <> { + yyin = fopen( next_file, "r" ); + YY_NEW_FILE; + } + +.fi +.IP - +flex dynamically resizes its internal tables, so directives like "%a 3000" +are not needed when specifying large scanners. +.IP - +The scanning routine generated by flex is declared using the macro +.B YY_DECL. +By redefining this macro you can change the routine's name and +its calling sequence. For example, you could use: +.nf + + #undef YY_DECL + #define YY_DECL float lexscan( a, b ) float a, b; + +.fi +to give it the name +.I lexscan, +returning a float, and taking two floats as arguments. Note that +if you give arguments to the scanning routine, you must terminate +the definition with a semi-colon (;). +.IP - +flex generates +.B #line +directives mapping lines in the output to +their origin in the input file. +.IP - +You can put multiple actions on the same line, separated with +semi-colons. With lex, the following +.nf + + foo handle_foo(); return 1; + +.fi +is truncated to +.nf + + foo handle_foo(); + +.fi +flex does not truncate the action. Actions that are not enclosed in +braces are terminated at the end of the line. +.IP - +Actions can be begun with +.B %{ +and terminated with +.B %}. +In this case, flex does not count braces to figure out where the +action ends - actions are terminated by the closing +.B %}. +This feature is useful when the enclosed action has extraneous +braces in it (usually in comments or inside inactive #ifdef's) +that throw off the brace-count. +.IP - +All of the scanner actions (e.g., +.B ECHO, yywrap ...) +except the +.B unput() +and +.B input() +routines, +are written as macros, so they can be redefined if necessary +without requiring a separate library to link to. +.IP - +When +.B yywrap() +indicates that the scanner is done processing (it does this by returning +non-zero), on subsequent calls the scanner will always immediately return +a value of 0. To restart it on a new input file, the action +.B yyrestart() +is used. It takes one argument, the new input file. It closes the +previous yyin (unless stdin) and sets up the scanners internal variables +so that the next call to yylex() will start scanning the new file. This +functionality is useful for, e.g., programs which will process a file, do some +work, and then get a message to parse another file. +.IP - +Flex scans the code in section 1 (inside %{}'s) and the actions for +occurrences of +.I REJECT +and +.I yymore(). +If it doesn't see any, it assumes the features are not used and generates +higher-performance scanners. Flex tries to be correct in identifying +uses but can be fooled (for example, if a reference is made in a macro from +a #include file). If this happens (a feature is used and flex didn't +realize it) you will get a compile-time error of the form +.nf + + reject_used_but_not_detected undefined + +.fi +You can tell flex that a feature is used even if it doesn't think so +with +.B %used +followed by the name of the feature (for example, "%used REJECT"); +similarly, you can specify that a feature is +.I not +used even though it thinks it is with +.B %unused. +.IP - +Comments may be put in the first section of the input by preceding +them with '#'. +.SH FILES +.TP +.I flex.skel +skeleton scanner +.TP +.I lex.yy.c +generated scanner (called +.I lexyy.c +on some systems). +.TP +.I lex.backtrack +backtracking information for +.B -b +flag (called +.I lex.bck +on some systems). +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.LP +lex(1) +.LP +M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, +.I LEX - Lexical Analyzer Generator +.SH AUTHOR +Vern Paxson, with the help of many ideas and much inspiration from +Van Jacobson. Original version by Jef Poskanzer. Fast table +representation is a partial implementation of a design done by Van +Jacobson. The implementation was done by Kevin Gong and Vern Paxson. +.LP +Thanks to the many flex beta-testers and feedbackers, especially Casey +Leedom, Frederic Brehm, Nick Christopher, Chris Faylor, Eric Goldman, Eric +Hughes, Greg Lee, Craig Leres, Mohamed el Lozy, Jim Meyering, Esmond Pitt, +Jef Poskanzer, and Dave Tallman. Thanks to Keith Bostic, John Gilmore, Bob +Mulcahy, Rich Salz, and Richard Stallman for help with various distribution +headaches. +.LP +Send comments to: +.nf + + Vern Paxson + Real Time Systems + Bldg. 46A + Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory + 1 Cyclotron Rd. + Berkeley, CA 94720 + + (415) 486-6411 + + vern@csam.lbl.gov + vern@rtsg.ee.lbl.gov + ucbvax!csam.lbl.gov!vern + +.fi +I will be gone from mid-July '89 through mid-August '89. From August on, +the addresses are: +.nf + + vern@cs.cornell.edu + + Vern Paxson + CS Department + Grad Office + 4126 Upson + Cornell University + Ithaca, NY 14853-7501 + + + +.fi +Email sent to the former addresses should continue to be forwarded for +quite a while. Also, it looks like my username will be "paxson" and +not "vern". I'm planning on having a mail alias set up so "vern" will +still work, but if you encounter problems try "paxson". +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.LP +.I flex scanner jammed - +a scanner compiled with +.B -s +has encountered an input string which wasn't matched by +any of its rules. +.LP +.I flex input buffer overflowed - +a scanner rule matched a string long enough to overflow the +scanner's internal input buffer (16K bytes - controlled by +.B YY_BUF_MAX +in "flex.skel"). +.LP +.I old-style lex command ignored - +the flex input contains a lex command (e.g., "%n 1000") which +is being ignored. +.SH BUGS +.LP +Some trailing context +patterns cannot be properly matched and generate +warning messages ("Dangerous trailing context"). These are +patterns where the ending of the +first part of the rule matches the beginning of the second +part, such as "zx*/xy*", where the 'x*' matches the 'x' at +the beginning of the trailing context. (Lex doesn't get these +patterns right either.) +If desperate, you can use +.B yyless() +to effect arbitrary trailing context. +.LP +.I variable +trailing context (where both the leading and trailing parts do not have +a fixed length) entails the same performance loss as +.I REJECT +(i.e., substantial). +.LP +For some trailing context rules, parts which are actually fixed-length are +not recognized as such, leading to the abovementioned performance loss. +In particular, parts using '|' or {n} are always considered variable-length. +.LP +Use of unput() or input() trashes the current yytext and yyleng. +.LP +Use of unput() to push back more text than was matched can +result in the pushed-back text matching a beginning-of-line ('^') +rule even though it didn't come at the beginning of the line. +.LP +yytext and yyleng cannot be modified within a flex action. +.LP +Nulls are not allowed in flex inputs or in the inputs to +scanners generated by flex. Their presence generates fatal +errors. +.LP +Flex does not generate correct #line directives for code internal +to the scanner; thus, bugs in +.I +flex.skel +yield bogus line numbers. +.LP +Pushing back definitions enclosed in ()'s can result in nasty, +difficult-to-understand problems like: +.nf + + {DIG} [0-9] /* a digit */ + +.fi +In which the pushed-back text is "([0-9] /* a digit */)". +.LP +Due to both buffering of input and read-ahead, you cannot intermix +calls to stdio routines, such as, for example, +.B getchar() +with flex rules and expect it to work. Call +.B input() +instead. +.LP +The total table entries listed by the +.B -v +flag excludes the number of table entries needed to determine +what rule has been matched. The number of entries is equal +to the number of DFA states if the scanner does not use REJECT, +and somewhat greater than the number of states if it does. +.LP +To be consistent with ANSI C, the escape sequence \\xhh should +be recognized for hexadecimal escape sequences, such as '\\x41' for 'A'. +.LP +It would be useful if flex wrote to lex.yy.c a summary of the flags used in +its generation (such as which table compression options). +.LP +The scanner run-time speeds still have not been optimized as much +as they deserve. Van Jacobson's work shows that the can go +faster still. +.LP +The utility needs more complete documentation. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fmt.1 b/static/v10/man1/fmt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..470951f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/fmt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +.TH FMT 1 +.CT 1 writing_other +.SH NAME +fmt \(mi ultra-simple text formatter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B fmt +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Fmt +copies the given +.I files +(standard input by default) +to its standard output, filling and indenting lines. +The options are +.TP +.BI -l " n +Output line length is +.I n, +including indent, (default 70). +.TP +.BI -i " n +Indent +.I n +spaces (default 0). +.PP +Empty lines and initial white space in input lines are preserved. +Empty lines are inserted between input files. +.PP +.I Fmt +is idempotent: it leaves already formatted text unchanged. +.SH BUGS +Words longer than 256 characters are split. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/form.1 b/static/v10/man1/form.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4087d531 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/form.1 @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'FORM (I)'6/15/72'FORM (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME +.br +form -- form letter generator +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS +.br +form____ proto arg918 ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION +.br +form____ generates a form letter from a prototype +letter, an associative memory, arguments and in a special case, the +current date. +.sp +If form____ is invoked with the proto_____ argument 'x', the associative memory is +searched for an entry with name 'x' and the contents filed under that name are +used as the prototype. If the search fails, the message "[x]:" is typed on +the console and whatever text is typed in from the console, terminated by +two new lines, is used as the prototype. +.sp +If the prototype argument is missing, '{letter}' is assumed. +.sp +Basically, form____ is a copy process from the prototype to the output file. +If an element of the form [n] (where n_ is a digit from 1 to 9) is encountered, +the n_th argument arg___9n8 is inserted in its place, and that argument is then +rescanned. If [0] is encountered, the current date is inserted. If +the desired argument has not been given, a message of the form "[n]:" is +typed. The response typed in then is used for that argument. +.sp +If an element of the form [name] or {name} is encountered, the name is looked up in the +associative memory. If it is found, the contents of the memory under this +name replaces the original element (again rescanned). If +the name is not found, a message of the form "[name]:" is typed. +The response typed in is used for that element. The response is +entered in the memory under the name if the name is enclosed in []. +The response is not entered in the memory but is remembered for the +duration of the letter if the name is enclosed in {}. +.sp +In both of the above cases, the response is typed in by entering +arbitrary text terminated by two new lines. Only the first of the +two new lines is passed with the text. +.sp +If one of the special characters [{]}\\ is preceded by +a \\, it loses its special character. +.sp +If a file named "forma" already exists in the users directory, "formb" is +used as the output file and so forth to "formz". +.sp +The file "form.m" is created if none exists. Because form.m is +operated on by the disc allocater, it should only be changed by using +fed___, the form letter editor, or form____. +.sp +.fi +.ti 0 +FILES +.br +form.m associative memory +.br +form? output file (read only) +.sp +.fi +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO +.br +fed(I), type(I), roff(I) +.sp +.fi +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS +.br +"cannot open output file" "cannot open memory file" +when the appropriate files cannot be located or created. +.sp +.fi +.ti 0 +BUGS +.br +An unbalanced ] or } acts as an end of file but +may add a few strange entries to the associative memory. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/forml.1 b/static/v10/man1/forml.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..092553b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/forml.1 @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'FORML (I)'10/24/72'FORML (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME forml -- form letter generator processor +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS forml_____ [ name ] ... +.sp +.ti0 +DESCRIPTION A streamlined program for typing form letters. +The names pick out +prestored form letters prepared according to the conventions +of +.ul +form +and +.ul +roff. +The program prompts to get each blank +filled in. +When all the forms are completed, it prompts "Set paper." +It waits for a newline before printing each letter. + +If more than one name is given, the name of +each letter is announced +before the prompts for it begin. +If no names are given, the program asks "Which letter?" before +each. +Respond with the name and a newline, or newline only when done. +.sp +On a 2741 type terminal, the program assumes the +letter is to be typed with a correspondence ball, +and also prompts "Change ball." +Replace the ball at the end. +.sp +.ti0 +FILES form.m (memory), +.br +forma, formb, ... temporaries +.sp +.ti0 +SEE ALSO form(I), fed(I), roff(I) +.br +.sp +.ti0 +DIAGNOSTICS "Try again"--can't get a process +.br +.sp +.ti0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 b/static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8e89e8c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/fstrip.1 @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +.pa 1 +.he '10/24/72''FSTRIP (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME fstrip -- remove Fortran internal symbols +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS fstrip______ name\d1\u ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION Fortran output +files occasionally refer to so +many symbols that the debugger db__ (I) balks. +.ul +fstrip +massages a Fortran output file to remove the symbols +which are internal to Fortran. + +From the symbol tables contained in the files +given as arguments, +fstrip______ removes the symbols of the form "l#", +where "l" is one of "t", "c", or "d", and "#" is +a decimal number. + +The output of fstrip______ is unacceptable to the loader +under any circumstances. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO fc(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS yes, hopefully self-explanatory +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ftp.1 b/static/v10/man1/ftp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be3ed7a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ftp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,963 @@ +.\" Copyright (c) 1985 The Regents of the University of California. +.\" All rights reserved. +.\" +.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted +.\" provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are +.\" duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, +.\" advertising materials, and other materials related to such +.\" distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed +.\" by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the +.\" University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived +.\" from this software without specific prior written permission. +.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR +.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED +.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. +.\" +.\" @(#)ftp.1 6.12.1.1 (Berkeley) 3/2/89 +.\" +.TH FTP 1 "February 23, 1989" +.UC 5 +.SH NAME +ftp \- internet file transfer program +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ftp +[ +.I option ... +] [ +.B host +] +.PP +.B pftp +[ +.I option ... +] [ +.B host +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ftp +transfers files to and from a remote network +.I host +computer via the Internet file transfer protocol. +To reach outside Internet sites from +v10 machines, prefix the Internet host name with +.LR inet! ; +from System V machines, use +.I pftp. +After attempting to connect to the remote host, if any, +.I ftp +enters its command interpreter and prompts for instructions. +The following commands are recognized: +.TP +\f5\&!\fP [ \fIcommand\fP [ \fIargs\fP ] ] +Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine. +If there are arguments, the first is taken to be a command to execute +directly, with the rest of the arguments as its arguments. +.TP +\f5\&$\fP \fImacro-name\fP [ \fIargs\fP ] +Execute the macro \fImacro-name\fP that was defined with the +\f5macdef\fP command. +Arguments are passed to the macro unglobbed. +.TP +\f5account\fP [ \fIpasswd\fP ] +Supply a supplemental password required by a remote system for access +to resources once a login has been successfully completed. +If no argument is included, the user will be prompted for an account +password in a non-echoing input mode. +.TP +\f5append\fP \fIlocal-file\fP [ \fIremote-file\fP ] +Append a local file to a file on the remote machine. If a +.I remote-file +is not specified, the local file name is used +subject to altering +.I ntrans +or +.I nmap . +File transfer uses the current settings for +.IR type , +.IR format , +.IR mode , +and +.IR structure . +.TP +.B ascii +Set the file transfer +.I type +to network ASCII. This is the default type. +.TP +.B bell +Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer +command is completed. +.TP +.B binary +Set the file transfer +.I type +to support binary image transfer. +.TP +.B bye +Terminate the session. +An end of file will also terminate the session. +.TP +.B case +Toggle remote computer file name case mapping during +.B mget +commands. +When +.B case +is on (default is off), remote computer file names with all letters in +upper case are written in the local directory with the letters mapped +to lower case. +.TP +.BI cd " remote-directory" +Change the working directory on the remote machine +to +.IR remote-directory . +.TP +.B cdup +Change the remote machine working directory to the parent of the +current remote machine working directory. +.TP +.B close +Terminate the session. +Any defined macros are erased. +.TP +.B cr +Toggle carriage return stripping during +ascii type file retrieval. +Records are denoted by a carriage return/linefeed sequence +during ascii type file transfer. +When +.B cr +is on (the default), carriage returns are stripped from this +sequence to conform with the UNIX single linefeed record +delimiter. +Records on non-UNIX remote systems may contain single linefeeds; +when an ascii type transfer is made, these linefeeds may be +distinguished from a record delimiter only when +.B cr +is off. +.TP +.BI delete " remote-file" +Delete the file +.I remote-file +on the remote machine. +.TP +\f5debug\fP [ \fIdebug-level\fP ] +Toggle debugging or set the debugging level. +When debugging is on, +.I ftp +prints each command sent to the remote machine, preceded +by the string +.LR --> . +.TP +\f5dir\fP [ \fIremote-directory\fP ] [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] +Place in +.IR local-file +a listing of the contents of +.IR remote-directory . +If +.I local-file +is +.LR - +or absent send output to the terminal. +If +.L prompt +is on, +.I ftp +asks for +.I local-file +to be confirmed. +If no +.IR remote-directory +is specified, the current working +directory on the remote machine is used. +.TP +.B disconnect +A synonym for +.BR close . +.TP +.BI form " format" +Set the file transfer +.I form +to +.IR format . +The default format is +.LR file . +.TP +\f5get\fP \fIremote-file\fP [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] +Retrieve the +.I remote-file +and store it on the local machine. If the local +file name is not specified, it is given the same +name it has on the remote machine, subject to +altering by +.IR case , +.IR ntrans , +and +.I nmap +settings. +The current settings for +.IR type , +.IR form , +.IR mode , +and +.I structure +are used while transferring the file. +.TP +.B glob +Toggle filename expansion for +.BR mdelete , +.BR mget , +and +.BR mput . +If globbing is turned off with +.BR glob , +the file name arguments +are taken literally and not expanded. +Globbing for +.B mput +is done as in +.IR csh (1). +For +.B mdelete +and +.BR mget , +ach remote file name is expanded +separately on the remote machine and the lists are not merged. +Expansion of a directory may be +different from expansion of the name of an ordinary file, +depending on the foreign operating system and FTP server. +It may be previewed by doing `\f5mls\fP\ \fIremote-files\fP\ \f5-\fP'. +Note: +.B mget and +.B mput +are not meant to transfer +entire directory subtrees of files. That can be done by +transferring a +.IR tar (1) +archive of the subtree (in binary mode). +.TP +.B hash +Toggle hash-sign +.RB ( # ) +printing for each data block +transferred. The size of a data block is 1024 bytes. +.TP +\f5help\fP [ \fIcommand\fP ] +Print an informative message about the meaning of +.IR command . +If no argument is given, +.I ftp +prints a list of the known commands. +.TP +\f5lcd\fP [ \fIdirectory\fP ] +Change the working directory on the local machine. If +no +.I directory +is specified, the user's home directory is used. +.TP +\f5ls\fP [ \fIremote-directory\fP ] [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] +List in +.I local-file +the contents of a +directory on the remote machine. +If \fIlocal-file\fR is +.L - +or absent, +the output is sent to the terminal. +The form of the list depends on the remote +server; most UNIX systems will produce +output from the command +.LR "ls -l" . +(See also +.BR nlist .) +If +.I remote-directory +is not specified, the current working directory is used. +.TP +\f5macdef\fP \fImacro-name\fP +Define a macro. +Subsequent lines are stored under +\fImacro-name\fP; a null line (consecutive newline characters +in a file or +carriage returns from the terminal) terminates macro input mode. +There is a limit of 16 macros and 4096 total characters in all +defined macros. +Macros remain defined until a +.B close +command is executed. +The macro processor interprets +.B $ +and +.B \e +as special characters. +A +.B $ +followed by a number (or numbers) is replaced by the +corresponding argument on the macro invocation command line. +A +.B $ +followed by an +.L i +signals that macro processor that the +executing macro is to be looped. +On the first pass +.B $i +is +replaced by the first argument on the macro invocation command line, +on the second pass it is replaced by the second argument, and so on. +A +.B \e +followed by any character is replaced by that character. +Use +.B \e +to prevent special treatment of +.BR $ . +.TP +\f5mdelete\fP [ \fIremote-files\fP ] +Delete the +.I +remote-files +on the remote machine. +.TP +\f5mdir\fP \fIremote-files\fP \fIlocal-file\fP +Like +.BR dir , +except multiple remote files may be specified. +If interactive prompting is on, +.I ftp +will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the +target local file for receiving +.B mdir +output. +.TP +\f5mget\fP \fIremote-files\fP +Expand +.I remote-files +on the remote machine +and do a +.L get +for each file name thus produced. +See +.L glob +for details on the filename expansion. +Resulting file names will then be processed according to +.IR case , +.IR ntrans , +and +.I nmap +settings. +Files are transferred into the local working directory. +.TP +\f5mkdir\fP \fIdirectory-name\fP +Make a directory on the remote machine. +.TP +\f5mls\fP \fIremote-files\fP \fIlocal-file\fP +Like +.LR nlist , +except multiple remote files may be specified, +and a +.I local-file +must be specified. +If +.L prompt +is on, +.I ftp +asks to confirm the +.I local-file. +.TP +\f5mode\fP [ \fImode-name\fP ] +Set the file transfer mode to +.IR mode-name . +The default mode is +.LR stream . +.TP +\f5modtime\fP \fIfile-name\fP +Show the last modification time of the file on the remote machine. +.TP +\f5mput\fP \fIlocal-files\fP +Expand wild cards in the list of local files given as arguments +and do a +.L put +for each file in the resulting list. +See +.L glob +for details of filename expansion. +Resulting file names will then be processed according to +.I ntrans +and +.I nmap +settings. +.TP +\f5nlist\fP [ \fIremote-directory\fP ] [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] +Like +.LR ls , +giving only file names. +.TP +\f5nmap\fP [ \fIinpattern\fP \fIoutpattern\fP ] +Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism. +If no arguments are specified, the filename mapping mechanism is unset. +If arguments are specified, remote filenames are mapped during +.B mput +commands and +.B put +commands issued without a specified remote target filename. +If arguments are specified, local filenames are mapped during +.B mget +commands and +.B get +commands issued without a specified local target filename. +This command is useful when connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer +with different file naming conventions or practices. +The mapping follows the pattern set by +.I inpattern +and +.IR outpattern . +.I Inpattern +is a template for incoming filenames (which may have already been +processed according to the +.B ntrans +and +.B case +settings). +Variable templating is accomplished by including the sequences +.LR $1 , +.LR $2 ", ...," +.LR $9 +in +.IR inpattern . +Use +.L \e +to prevent special treatment of +.BR $ . +For example, given +.I inpattern +.B $1.$2 +and the remote file name +.LR mydata.data , +.B $1 +would have the value +.LR mydata , +and +.B $2 +would have the value +.LR data . +The +.I outpattern +determines the resulting mapped filename. +The sequences +.BR $1 , +.BR $2 ", ....," +.B $9 +are replaced by any value resulting +from the +.I inpattern +template. +The sequence +.B $0 +is replace by the original filename. +Additionally, the sequence '[\fIseq1\fP,\fIseq2\f\P]' is replaced by +.I seq1 +if +.I seq1 +is not a null string; otherwise it is replaced by +.IR seq2 . +For example, the command +.L "nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]" +would yield +the output filename +.L myfile.data +for input filenames +.L myfile.data +and +.LR myfile.data.old , +.L myfile.file +or the input filename +.LR myfile , +and +.LR myfile.myfile +for the input filename +.LR .myfile . +Spaces may be included in +.IR outpattern , +for example: +.L +nmap $1 "|sed 's/ *$//' > $1" . +.TP +\f5ntrans\fP [ \fIinchars\fP [ \fIoutchars\fP ] ] +Set or unset the filename character translation mechanism. +If no arguments are specified, the filename character +translation mechanism is unset. +If arguments are specified, characters in +remote filenames are translated during +.B mput +commands and +.B put +commands issued without a specified remote target filename. +If arguments are specified, characters in +local filenames are translated during +.B mget +commands and +.B get +commands issued without a specified local target filename. +This command is useful when connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer +with different file naming conventions or practices. +Characters in a filename matching a character in +.I inchars +are replaced with the corresponding character in +.IR outchars . +If the character's position in +.I inchars +is longer than the length of +.IR outchars , +the character is deleted from the file name. +.TP +\f5open\fP \fIhost\fP [ \fIport\fP ] +Establish a connection to the specified +.I host +FTP server. An optional port number may be supplied, +in which case, +.I ftp +will attempt to contact an FTP server at that port. +If the +.I auto-login +option is on (default), +.I ftp +will also attempt to automatically log the user in to +the FTP server (see below). +.TP +.B prompt +Toggle file-by-file prompting fo +.BR mget , +.BR mput , +and +.BR mdelete +(on by default). +.TP +\f5proxy\fP \fIftp-command\fP +Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connection. +This command allows simultaneous connection to two remote ftp +servers for transferring files between the two servers. +The first +.B proxy +command should be an +.BR open , +to establish the secondary control connection. +Enter the command +.L "proxy ?" +to see other commands executable on the +secondary connection. +The following commands behave differently when prefaced by +.BR proxy : +.B open +will not define new macros during the auto-login process, +.B close +will not erase existing macro definitions, +.B get +and +.B mget +transfer files from the host on the primary control connection +to the host on the secondary control connection, and +.BR put , +.BR mput , +and +.B append +transfer files from the host on the secondary control connection +to the host on the primary control connection. +.TP +\f5put\fP \fIlocal-file\fP [ \fIremote-file\fP ] +Store a local file on the remote machine. If +.I remote-file +is not specified, the local file name is used +after processing according to any +.I ntrans +or +.I nmap +settings. File transfer uses the +current settings for +.IR type , +.IR format , +.IR mode , +and +.IR structure . +.TP +.B pwd +Print the name of the current working directory on the remote +machine. +.TP +.B quit +A synonym for +.BR bye . +.TP +.BI quote " arg1 arg2 ..." +The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote FTP +server. +.TP +\f5recv\fP \fIremote-file\fP [ \fIlocal-file\fP ] +A synonym for get. +.TP +\f5remotehelp\fP [ \fIcommand-name\fP ] +Request help from the remote FTP server. If a +.I command-name +is specified it is supplied to the server as well. +.TP +\f5remotestatus\fP [ \fIfile-name\fP ] +With no arguments, show status of remote machine. +If +.I file-name +is specified, show status of +.I file-name +on the remote machine. +.TP +\f5rename\fP [ \fIfrom\fP ] [ \fIto\fP ] +Rename the file +.I from +on the remote machine, to the file +.IR to . +.TP +.B reset +Clear reply queue. +This command re-synchronizes command/reply sequencing with the remote +ftp server. +Resynchronization may be necessary following a violation of the ftp protocol +by the remote server. +.TP +.BI rmdir " directory-name" +Delete a directory on the remote machine. +.TP +.B runique +Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique filenames. +If the target of a +.B get +or +.B mget +command already exists locally, a +.L .1 +is appended to the name. +If that name, too, matches another existing file, +a +.L .2 +is appended and so on until +.LR .99 , +when the transfer is aborted. +Note that +.B runique +will not affect local files generated from a shell command +(see below). +The default value is off. +.TP +\f5send\fP \fIlocal-file\fP [ \fIremote-file\fP ] +A synonym for put. +.TP +.B sendport +Toggle the use of PORT commands. By default, +.I ftp +will attempt to use a PORT command when establishing +a connection for each data transfer. +The use of PORT commands can prevent delays +when performing multiple file transfers. If the PORT +command fails, +.I ftp +will use the default data port. When the use of PORT +commands is disabled, no attempt will be made to use +PORT commands for each data transfer. This is useful +for certain FTP implementations which ignore PORT +commands but incorrectly indicate they've been accepted. +.TP +.BI size " file-name" +Return size of +.I file-name +on the remote machine. +.TP +.B status +Show the current status of +.IR ftp . +.TP +\f5struct\fP [ \fIstruct-name\fP ] +Set the file transfer +.I structure +to +.IR struct-name . +By default +.L stream +structure is used. +.TP +.B sunique +Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique file names. +Default value is off. +.TP +.B system +Show the type of operating system running on the remote machine. +.TP +.B tenex +Set the file transfer type to that needed to +talk to TENEX machines. +.TP +.B trace +Toggle packet tracing. +.TP +\f5type\fP [ \fItype-name\fP ] +Set the file transfer +.I type +to +.IR type-name . +If no type is specified, the current type +is printed. The default type is network ASCII. +.TP +\f5user\fP \fIuser-name\fP [ \fIpassword\fP ] [ \fIaccount\fP ] +Identify yourself to the remote FTP server. If the +password is not specified and the server requires it, +.I ftp +will prompt the user for it (after disabling local echo). +If an account field is not specified, and the FTP server +requires it, the user will be prompted for it. +If an account field is specified, an account command will +be relayed to the remote server after the login sequence +is completed if the remote server did not require it +for logging in. +Unless +.I ftp +is invoked with +.L auto-login +disabled, this +process is done automatically on initial connection to +the FTP server. +.TP +.B verbose +Toggle verbose mode. In verbose mode, all responses from +the FTP server are displayed to the user. In addition, +if verbose is on, when a file transfer completes, statistics +regarding the efficiency of the transfer are reported. By default, +verbose is on. +.TP +\f5?\fP [ \fIcommand\fP ] +A synonym for help. +.PP +Command arguments which have embedded spaces may be quoted with +quote +.B \&" marks. +.SS "Aborting a file transfer +The signal processing in the research version of +.I ftp +has been stripped out. Aborts will generally close the connection. +.SS "File naming conventions +Files specified as arguments to +.I ftp +commands are processed according to the following rules. +.TP +1) +If the file name +.L - +is specified, +.B stdin +(for reading) or +.B stdout +(for writing) is used. +.TP +2) +If the first character of the file name is +.LR | , +the remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell command. +.I Ftp +reads the standard output of the command, or writes the +standard input. +If the shell command includes spaces, it +must be quoted with double quotes. +A useful example of this mechanism is: +.LR |more . +.TP +3) +Failing the above checks, if glob is enabled, +local file names are expanded +according to the rules used in +.IR csh (1); +c.f. the +.I glob +command. +If the +.I ftp +command expects a single local file (e.g. +.BR put ), +only the first filename generated by the globbing operation is used. +.TP +4) +For +.B mget +commands and +.B get +commands with unspecified local file names, the local filename is +the remote filename, subject to altering by +.BR case , +.BR ntrans , +or +.B nmap +setting. +The resulting filename may then be altered if +.B runique +is on. +.TP +5) +For +.B mput +commands and +.B put +commands with unspecified remote file names, the remote filename is +the local filename, subject to altering by +.B ntrans +or +.B nmap +setting. +The resulting filename may then be altered by the remote server if +.B sunique +is on. +.SS "File transfer parameters +The FTP specification specifies many parameters which may +affect a file transfer. The +.I type +may be one of +.LR ascii , +.LR image +(binary), +.LR ebcdic , +and +.L local byte size +(for PDP-10's +and PDP-20's mostly). +.I Ftp +supports the ascii and image types of file transfer, +plus local byte size 8 for +.B tenex +mode transfers. +.PP +.I Ftp +supports only the default values for the remaining +file transfer parameters: +.IR mode , +.IR form , +and +.IR struct . +.SS "Options +Options may be specified at the command line, or to the +command interpreter. +.TP +.B \-v +Verbose. +Show all responses from the remote server, as well +as report on data transfer statistics. +.TP +.B \-n +Do not attempt +.L auto-login +upon initial connection. +If auto-login is enabled, +.I ftp +will check the +.F .netrc +(see below) file in the user's home directory for an entry describing +an account on the remote machine. If no entry exists, +.I ftp +will prompt for the remote machine login name (default is the user +identity on the local machine), and, if necessary, prompt for a password +and an account with which to login. +.TP +.B \-i +Do not prompt during +multiple file transfers. +.TP +.B \-d +Enable debugging. +.TP +.B \-g +Disables file name globbing. +.SS "The .netrc file +The +.F .netrc +file contains login and initialization information +used by the auto-login process. +It resides in the user's home directory. +The following tokens are recognized; they may be separated by spaces, +tabs, or new-lines: +.TP +\f5machine\fP \fIname\fP +Identify a remote machine name. +The auto-login process searches +.F .netrc +for a +.B machine +token that matches the remote machine specified on the +.I ftp +command line or as an +.B open +command argument. +Once a match is made, subsequent tokens are processed, +until end of file is reached or another +.B machine +or a +.B default +token is encountered. +.TP +.B default +This is the same as +.BI machine " name +except that +.B default +matches any name. +There can be only one +.B default +token, and it must be after all +.B machine +tokens. +This is normally used as: +.RS +.IP +.B +default login anonymous password user@site +.LP +thereby giving the user automatic anonymous ftp login to +machines not specified in +.BR .netrc . +.RE +.TP +\f5login\fP \fIname\fP +Identify a user on the remote machine. +If this token is present, the auto-login process will initiate +a login using the specified name. +.TP +\f5password\fP \fIstring\fP +Supply a password. +If this token is present, the auto-login process will supply the +specified string if the remote server requires a password as part +of the login process. +If this token is present in +.F .netrc +for any user other +than +.LR anonymous , +and +.F .netrc +is readable by nonowners, +.I ftp +will abort auto-login. +.TP +\f5account\fP \fIstring\fP +Supply an additional account password. +If this token is present, auto-login supplies the +.I string +when the remote server demands an additional +account password; otherwise auto-login initiates an +ACCT command. +.TP +\f5macdef\fP \fIname\fP +Define a macro in the style of +.BR macdef . +If a macro named +.I init +is defined, it is automatically executed as the last step in +auto-login. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR ftpd (8) +.SH BUGS +Remote servers may not support all features documented here. +.br +Interrupts cause +.I ftp +to exit. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/games.1 b/static/v10/man1/games.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b50fea6f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/games.1 @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ +.TH GAMES 1 +.CT 1 misc inst_info +.SH NAME +games, demo \- some playthings +.SH SYNOPSIS +.2C +.fi +.BI /usr/jerq/bin/demo +[ +.I game +] +.de xx +.ti -3n +\fB\\$1 \\$2 \\$3\fP +.br +.. +.PP +.xx Labyrinth games +.B adventure +.br +.B zork +.br +.B rogue +.br +.B wump +.PP +.xx Card games +.B fish +.br +.B canfield +.br +.B bridge +[ +.I arg ... +] +.br +.B mille +.PP +.xx Board games +.B back +.PP +.xx Word games +.B hangman +[ +.B -a +] +.br +.B word_clout +.br +.B ana +[ +.I n +] +.br +.B festoon +.I length percent +.PP +.xx System games +.B imp +.br +.B tso +.PP +.xx War games +.B mars +[ +.B -dfhmp +] +[ +.BI -cqs value +] +.I file ... +.br +.B ogre +[ +.I type +] +.br +.B warp +.PP +.xx Games of speed and dexterity +.B atc +.br +.B snake +.br +.B worm +.br +.PP +.xx Educational games +.B quiz +[ +.B \-i +.I file +] +[ +.B \-t +] +[ +.I question answer +] +.br +.B arithmetic +[ +.B +-x/ +] +[ +.I range +] +.br +.PP +.xx Creative games +.B /usr/jerq/bin/twid +.br +.B banner +.PP +.xx Sayings +.B fortune +[ +.I file +] +.br +.B doctor +.br +.B say +[ +.I N +] +.PP +.xx Coding games +.br +.B bcd +.IR text +.br +.B ppt +.br +.B morse +.br +.B /usr/bin/number +.PP +.xx Out-of-layer games +.B /usr/jerq/bin/pen +.br +.B /usr/jerq/bin/crabs +[ +.B -i +] +.B \e +.br + [ +.B -s +.I gracetime +] +[ +.B -v +.I speed +] +[ +.I n +] +.sp +.1C +.PD +.SH DESCRIPTION +Game programs exist sporadically on various machines. +Manuals for many of them may be obtained by using +.IR man (1). +For example, to see manual pages for +.I atc +and +.I twid, +type +.BR "man atc twid" . +Unless shown otherwise, games live in +.FR /usr/games , +which may be put in your shell +.B PATH +to reach them more conveniently. +Some need a cursor-addressed terminal; see the appropriate +manual pages and +.IR term (9.1). +.PP +.I Demo +and other games found in +.FR /usr/jerq/bin +need a Teletype 5620 terminal running under +.IR mux (9.1). +.I Demo +comprises many games, which are listed when it +is invoked without an argument. +Experiment with the mouse to find out they work. +Some unobvious interactions are these: +.IP +.I Swar +is for two players, one using +.L asdwx +on the keyboard, the other +.LR 12350 +on the keypad. +.br +.I Pacman +is controlled by +.L hjkl +keys as in +.IR vi (1). +.PP +Here is a list of some +.I demo +games. +.LP +.2C +.xx Watch the time +.B clock +.PP +.xx War games +.B swar +.br +.PP +.xx Games of speed and dexterity +.B gebam +.br +.B pengo +.br +.B centipede +.br +.B asteroids +.br +.B pacman +.PP +.xx Educational games +.B maxwell +.PP +.xx Out-of-layer games +.B tracks +.br +.B pogo +.br +.B magnet +.PP +.xx Animation +.B EWD +.br +.B road +.br +.B juggle +.br +.B ball +.br +.B fence +.PP +.xx Movies +.B horse +.br +.B dodec +.br +.B explode +.br +.B arno +.PP +.xx Patterns +.B bounce +.br +.B moire +.br +.B fireworks +.br +.B rose +.br +.B disc +.br +.B lunch +.1C +.SH " " + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gcc.1 b/static/v10/man1/gcc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df8fcd52 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/gcc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,641 @@ +bg +.\ " ====================== +.\ " This version is 1.22 +.\ " ====================== +.TH GCC 1 "17 May 1988" "Version 1.22" +.SH NAME +gcc \- GNU project C Compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gcc +[ option ] ... file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I GNU\ C\ compiler +uses a command syntax much like the Unix C compiler. The +.I gcc +program accepts options and file names as operands. Multiple +single-letter options may +.I not +be grouped: `\fB\-dr\fR' +is very different from `\fB\-d\ \-r\fR'. +When you invoke +.I GNU\ CC +\, it normally does preprocessing, compilation, +assembly and linking. File names which end in `\fB.c\fR' +are taken as C +source to be preprocessed and compiled; compiler output files plus any +input files with names ending in `\fB.s\fR' +are assembled; then the +resulting object files, plus any other input files, are linked together to +produce an executable. +Command options allow you to stop this process at an intermediate stage. +For example, the `\fB\-c\fR' +option says not to run the linker. +Then the output consists of object files output by the assembler. +Other command options are passed on to one stage. +Some options control the preprocessor and others the compiler itself. +.SH OPTIONS +Here are the options to control the overall compilation process, +including those that say whether to link, whether to assemble, and so on. +.TP +.BI \-o "\ \ file" +Place linker output in file \fIfile\fR. +This applies regardless to whatever sort of output is being produced, +whether it be an executable file, an object file, an assembler file or +preprocessed C code. +If `\fB\-o\fR' +is not specified, the default is to put an executable file +in `a.out', the object file `\fIsource\fB.c\fR' in `\fIsource\fB.o\fR', +an assembler file in `\fIsource\fB.s\fR', +and preprocessed C on standard output. +.TP +.B \-c +Compile or assemble the source files, but do not link. +Produce object files with names made by replacing `\fB\.c\fR' +or `\fB\.s\fR' +with `\fB\.o\fR' +at the end of the input file names. +Do nothing at all for object files specified as input. +.TP +.B \-S +Compile into assembler code but do not assemble. +The assembler output file name is made by replacing `\fB\.c\fR' +with `\fB\.s\fR' +at the end of the input file name. +Do nothing at all for assembler source files or object files specified +as input. +.TP +.B \-E +Run only the C preprocessor. +Preprocess all the C source files specified +and output the results to standard output. +.TP +.B \-v +Compiler driver program prints the commands it executes as it runs +the preprocessor, compiler proper, assembler and linker. +Some of these are directed to print their own version numbers. +.TP +.BI \-B "prefix" +Compiler driver program tries \fIprefix\fR as a prefix for each program +it tries to run. These programs are `\fBcpp\fR', `\fBcc1\fR', +`\fBas\fR' and `\fBld\fR'. +For each subprogram to be run, the compiler driver first tries +the `\fB\-B\fR' prefix, if any. +If that name is not found, or if `\fB\-B\fR' was not specified, +the driver tries two standard prefixes, +which are `\fB/usr/lib/gcc-\fR' and `\fB/usr/local/lib/gcc-\fR'. +If neither of those results in a file name that is found, +the unmodified program name is searched for using the directories +specified in your `\fBPATH\fR' environment variable. +The run-time support file `\fBgnulib\fR' is also searched for using +the `\fB\-B\fR' prefix, if needed. +If it is not found there, the two standard prefixes above are tried, +and that is all. +The file is left out of the link if it is not found by those means. +Most of the time, on most machines, you can do without it. +.PP +These options control the C preprocessor, +which is run on each C source file before actual compilation. +If you use the `\fB\-E\fR' option, nothing is done except C preprocessing. +Some of these options make sense only together with `\fB\-E\fR' +because they request preprocessor output that is not suitable +for actual compilation. +.TP +.B \-C +Tell the preprocessor not to discard comments. Used with the `\fB\-E\fR' +option. +.TP +.BI \-I "dir" +Search directory +.I dir +for include files. +.TP +.B \-I\- +Any directories specified with `\fB\-I\fR' options before the `\fB\-I\-\fR' +option are searched only for the case of `\fB#include "\fIfile\fB"\fR'; +they are not searched for `\fB#include <\fIfile\fB>\fR'. +If additional directories are specified with `\fB\-I\fR' options after +the `\fB\-I\-\fR', these directories are searched for all '\fB#include\fR' +directives. (Ordinally \fIall\fR '\fB\-I\fR' directories are used this +way.) +In addition, the `\fB\-I\-\fR' option inhibits the use of the current +directory as the first search directory for `\fB#include "\fIfile\fB"\fR'. +Therefore, the current directory is searched only if it is requested +explicitly with `\fB\-I.\fR'. +Specifying both `\fB\-I\-\fR' and `\fB\-I.\fR' allows you to control precisely +which directories are searched before the current one and which are +searched after. +.TP +.B \-nostdinc +Do not search the standard system directories for header files. +Only the directories you have specified with `\fB\-I\fR' options +(and the current directory, if appropriate) are searched. +Between `\fB\-nostdinc\fR' and `\fB\-I-\fR', you can eliminate all +directories from the search path except those you specify. +.TP +.B \-M +Tell the preprocessor to output a rule suitable for \fBmake\fR +describing the dependencies of each source file. +For each source file, the preprocessor outputs one \fBmake\fR-rule +whose target is the object file name for that source file and +whose dependencies are all the files `\fB#include\fR'd in it. +This rule may be a single line or may be continued `\fB\\\fR'-newline +if it is long.`\fB\-M\fR' implies `\fB\-E\fR'. +.TP +.B \-MM +Like `\fB\-M\fR' but the output mentions only the user-header files included +with `\fB#include "\fIfile\fB"\fR'. +System header files included with `\fB#include <\fIfile\fB>\fR' +are omitted.`\fB\-MM\fR' implies `\fB\-E\fR'. +.TP +.BI \-D "macro" +Define macro \fImacro\fR +with the empty string as its definition. +.TP +.B \-D\fImacro=defn\fR +Define macro \fImacro\fR as \fIdefn\fR. +.TP +.BI \-U "macro" +Undefine macro \fImacro\fR. +.TP +.B \-T +Support ANSI C trigraphs. +You don't want to know about this brain-damage. +The `\fB\-ansi\fR' option also has this effect. +.PP +These options control the details of C compilation itself. +.TP +.B \-ansi +Support all ANSI standard C programs. +This turns off certain features of GNU C that are incompatible with +ANSI C, such as the \fBasm\fR, \fBinline\fR and \fBtypeof\fR keywords, and +predefined macros such as \fBunix\fR and \fBvax\fR that identify +the type of system you are using. +It also enables the undesirable and rarely used ANSI trigraph feature. +The `\fB\-ansi\fR' option does not cause non-ANSI programs to be rejected +gratuitously. +For that, `\fB\-pedantic\fR' is required in addition to `\fB\-ansi\fR'. +The macro \fB__STRICT_ANSI__\fR +is predefined when the `-ansi' option is used. +Some header files may notice this macro and refrain from declaring +certain functions or defining certain macros that the ANSI standard +doesn't call for; this is to avoid interfering with any programs +that might use these names for other things. +.TP +.B \-traditional +Attempt to support some aspects of traditional C compilers. +Specifically: +.br +\(** All \fBextern\fR declarations take effect globally even if +they are written inside of a function definition. +This includes implicit declarations of functions. +.br +\(** The keywords \fBtypeof\fR, \fBinline\fR, \fBsigned\fR, \fBconst\fR +and \fBvolatile\fR are not recognized. +.br +\(** Comparisons between pointers and integers are always allowed. +.br +\(** Integer types \fBunsigned short\fR and \fBunsigned char\fR +promote to \fBunsigned int\fR. +.br +\(** In the preprocessor, comments convert to nothing at all, +rather than to a space. +This allows traditional token concatenation. +.br +\(** In the preprocessor, single and double quote characters are +ignored when scanning macro definitions, so that macro arguments +can be replaced even within a string or character constant. +Quote characters are also ignored when skipping text inside +a failing conditional directive. +.TP +.B \-pedantic +Issue all the warnings demanded by strict ANSI standard C; +reject all programs that use forbidden extensions. +Valid ANSI standard C programs should compile properly with or +without this option (though a rare few will require `\fB\-ansi\fR'. +However, without this option, certain GNU extensions and +traditional C features are supported as well. +With this option, they are rejected. +There is no reason to \fIuse\fR +this option; it exists only to satisfy pedants. +.TP +.B \-O +Optimize. Optimizing compilation takes somewhat more time, and a lot +more memory for a large function. +Without `\fB\-O\fR', the compiler's goal is to reduce the cost of +compilation and to make debugging produce the expected results. +Statements are independent: if you stop the program with a breakpoint +between statements, you can then assign a new value to any variable or +change the program counter to any other statement in the function and +get exactly the results you would expect from the source code. +Without `\fB\-O\fR', only variables declared \fBregister\fR +are allocated in registers. +The resulting compiled code is +a little worse than produced by PCC without `\fB\-O\fR'. +With `\fB\-O\fR', the compiler tries to reduce code size and execution time. +Some of the `\fB\-f\fR' options described below turn specific +kinds of optimization on or off. +.TP +.B \-g +Produce debugging information in DBX format. +Unlike most other C compilers, +GNU CC allows you to use `\fB\-g\fR' with `\fB\-O\fR'. +The shortcuts taken by optimized code may occasionally +produce surprising results: some variables you declared may not exist +at all; flow of control may briefly move where you did not expect it; +some statements may not be executed because they compute constant +results or their values were already at hand; some statements may +execute in different places because they were moved out of loops. +Nevertheless it proves possible to debug optimized output. +This makes it reasonable to use the optimizer for programs that might +have bugs. +.TP +.B \-gg +Produce debugging information in GDB(GNU Debugger)'s own format. +This requires the GNU assembler and linker +in order to work. +.TP +.B \-w +Inhibit all warning messages. +.TP +.B \-W +Print extra warning messages for these events: +.br +\(** An automatic variable is used without first being initialized. +These warnings are possible only in optimizing compilation, because +they require data flow information that is computed only when +optimizing. +They occur only for variables that are candidates for register +allocation. Therefore, they do not occur for a variable that is +declared +.B volatile, +or whose address is taken, or whose size is other than +1,2,4 or 8 bytes. Also, they do not occur for structures, +unions or arrays, even when they are in registers. +Note that there may be no warning about a variable that is used +only to compute a value that itself is never used, because such +computations may be deleted by the flow analysis pass before the +warnings are printed. +These warnings are made optional because GNU CC is not smart +enough to see all the reasons why the code might be correct +despite appearing to have an error. +.br +\(** A nonvolantile automatic variable might be changed +by a call to \fBlongjmp\fR. +These warnings as well are possible only in optimizing compilation. +The compiler sees only the calls to \fBsetjmp\fR. +It cannot know where \fBlongjmp\fR +will be called; in fact, a signal handler could call it at any point +in the code. As a result, you may get a warning even when there is +in fact no problem because \fBlongjmp\fR +cannot in fact be called at the place which would cause a problem. +.br +\(** A function can return either with or without a value. +(Falling off the end of the function body is considered returning +without a value.) +Spurious warning can occur because GNU CC does not realize that +certain functions (including \fBabort\fR +and \fBlongjmp\fR) will never return. +.TP +.B \-Wimplicit +Warn whenever a function is implicitly declared. +.TP +.B \-Wreturn-type +Warn whenever a function is defined with a return-type that +defaults to \fBint\fR. Also warn about any \fBreturn\fR +statement with no return-value in a function whose return-type +is not \fBvoid\fR. +.TP +.B \-Wcomment +Warn whenever a comment-start sequence `/*' appears in a comment. +.TP +.B \-p +Generate extra code to write profile information suitable for the +analysis program \fBprof\fR. +.TP +.B \-pg +Generate extra code to write profile information suitable for the +analysis program \fBgprof\fR. +.TP +.BI \-l "library" +Search a standard list of directories for a library named \fIlibrary\fR, +which is actually a file named `\fBlib\fIlibrary\fB.a\fR'. +The linker uses this file as if it had been specified precisely by name. +The directories searched include several standard system directories +plus any that you specify with `\fB\-L\fR'. +Normally the files found this way are library files - archive files whose +members are object files. The linker handles an archive file by through +it for members which define symbols that have so far been referenced +but not defined. But if the file that is found is an ordinary +object file, it is linked in the usual fashion. +The only difference between an `\fB\-l\fR' option and the full file name of +the file that is found is syntactic and the fact that several directories +are searched. +.TP +.BI \-L "dir" +Add directory \fIdir\fR to the list of directories to be searched +for `\fB\-l\fR'. +.TP +.B \-nostdlib +Don't use the standard system libraries and startup files when +linking. Only the files you specify (plus `\fBgnulib\fR') +will be passed to the linker. +.TP +.BI \-m "machinespec" +Machine-dependent option specifying something about the type of target machine. +These options are defined by the macro \fBTARGET_SWITCHES\fR +in the machine description. The default for the options is also +defined by that macro, which enables you to change the defaults. +.IP +These are the `\fB\-m\fR' options defined in the 68000 machine description: +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-m68020 +Generate output for a 68020 (rather than a 68000). +This is the default if you use the unmodified sources. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-m68000 +Generate output for a 68000 (rather than a 68020). +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-m68881 +Generate output containing 68881 instructions for floating point. +This is the default if you use the unmodified sources. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-msoft-float +Generate output containing library calls for floating point. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mshort +Consider type \fBint\fR to be 16 bits wide, like \fBshort int\fR. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mnobitfield +Do not use the bit-field instructions. +.B '\-m68000' +implies +.B '\-mnobitfield'. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mbitfield +Do use the bit-field instructions. +.B '\-m68020' +implies +.B '\-mbitfield'. +This is the default if you use the unmodified sources. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mrtd +Use a different function-calling convention, in which functions that +take a fixed number of arguments return with the \fBrtd\fR +instruction, which pops their arguments while returning. This saves +one instruction in the caller since there is no need to pop the +arguments there. +This calling convention is incompatible with the one normally used on +Unix, so you cannot use it if you need to call libraries compiled with +the Unix compiler. +Also, you must provide function prototypes for all functions that take +variable numbers of arguments (including \fBprintf\fR); otherwise +incorrect code will be generated for calls to those functions. +In addition, seriously incorrect code will result if you call a +function with too many arguments. (Normally, extra arguments are +harmlessly ignored.) +The \fBrtd\fR +instruction is supported by the 68010 and 68020 +processors, but not by the 68000. +.IP +These are the `\fB\-m\fR' options defined in the VAX machine description: +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-munix +Do not output certain jump instructions ( +.B aobleq +and so on) that the Unix assembler +for the VAX cannot handle across long ranges. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-mgnu +Do output those jump instructions, on the assumption +that you will assemble with the GNU assembler. +.TP 5 +.BI \-f "flag" +Specify machine-independent flags. These are the flags: +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-ffloat-store +Do not store floating-point variables in registers. +This prevents undesirable excess precision on machines such as the 68000 +where the floating registers (of the 68881) keep more precision +than a \fBdouble\fR is supposed to have. +For most programs, the excess precision does only good, but a few +programs rely on the precise definition of IEEE floating point. +Use ` +.B \-ffloat-store' +for such programs. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-frno-asm +Do not recognize \fBasm\fR, \fBinline\fR or \fBtypeof\fR +as a keyword. These words may then be used as identifiers. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fno-defer-pop +Always pop the arguments to each function call as soon as that +function returns. +Normally the compiler (when optimizing) lets arguments accumulate on the +stack for several function calls and pops them all at once. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fcombine-regs +Allow the combine pass to combine an instruction that copies one +register into another. +This might or might not produce better code when used in addition to ` +.B \-O'. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fforce-mem +Force memory operands to be copied into registers before doing +arithmetic on them. +This may produce better code by making all +memory references potential common subexpressions. +When they are not common subexpressions, +instruction combination should eliminate the separate register-load. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fforce-addr +Force memory address constants to be copied into registers before +doing arithmetic on them. +This may produce better code just as ` +.B \-fforce-mem' +may. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fomit-frame-pointer +Don't keep the frame pointer in a register for functions that don't +need one. This avoids the instructions to save, set up and restore +frame pointers; it also makes an extra register available in many +functions. \fBIt\ also\ makes\ debugging\ impossible.\fR +On some machines, such as the VAX, this flag has no effect, +because the standard calling sequence automatically handles +the frame pointer and nothing is saved by pretending it doesn't exist. +The machine-description macro \fBFRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED\fR +controls whether a target machine supports this flag. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-finline-functions +Integrate all simple functions into their callers. +The compiler heuristically decides which functions are simple enough +to be worth integrating in this way. +If all calls to a given function are integrated, and the function +is declared \fBstatic\fR, +then the function is normally not output as assembler code in its +own right. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fkeep-inline-functions +Even if all calls to a given function are integrated, and the +function is declared \fBstatic\fR, +nevertheless output a separate run-time callable version of +the function. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fwritable-strings +Store string constants in the writable data segment and don't uniquize them. +This is for compatibility with old programs which assume +they can write into string constants. Writing into string constants +is a very bad idea; ``constants'' should be constant. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fno-function-cse +Do not put function addresses in registers; make each instruction that +calls a constant function contain the function's address explicitly. +This option results in less efficient code, but some strange hacks +that alter the assembler output may be confused by the optimizations +performed when this option is not used. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fvolatile +Consider all memory references through pointers to be volatile. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-funsigned-char +Let the type \fBchar\f be the unsigned, like \fBunsigned char\fR. +Each kind of machine has a default for what \fBchar\fR +should be. It is either like \fBunsigned char\fR +by default of like \fBsigned char\fR +by default. (Actually, at present, the default is always signed.) +The type \fBchar\fR +is always a distinct type from either \fBsigned char\fR +or \fBunsigned char\fR, +even though its behavior is always just like one of those two. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fsigned-char +Let the type \fBchar\fR be the same as \fBsigned char\fR. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-ffixed-\fIreg\fR +Treat the register named \fIreg\fR as a fixed register; generated +code should never refer to it (except perhaps as a stack pointer, +frame pointer or in some other fixed role). \fIreg\fR +must be the name of a register. +The register names accepted are machine-specific and are defined in +the \fBREGISTER_NAMES\fR +macro in the machine description macro file. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fcall-used-\fIreg\fR +Treat the register named \fIreg\fR +as an allocatable register that is clobberred by function calls. +It may be allocated for temporaries or variables +that do not live across a call. +Functions compiled this way will not save and restore the +register \fIreg\fR. +Use of this flag for a register that has a fixed pervasive role +in the machine's execution model, such as the stack pointer or +frame pointer, will produce disastrous results. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \-fcall-saved-\fIreg\fR +Treat the register named \fIreg\fR +as an allocatable register saved by functions. +It may be allocated even for temporaries or +variables that live across a call. Functions compiled this way +will save and restore the register \fIreg\fR if they use it. +Use of this flag for a register that has a fixed pervasive role +in the machine's execution model, such as the stack pointer or +frame pointer, will produce disastrous results. +A different sort of disaster will result from the use of this +flag for a register in which function values are may be returned. +.TP +.BI \-d "letters" +Says to make debugging dumps at times specified by \fIletters\fR. +Here are the possible letters: +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ r +Dump after RTL generation. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ j +Dump after first jump optimization. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ J +Dump after last jump optimization. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ s +Dump after CSE (including the jump optimization that sometimes +follows CSE). +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ L +Dump after loop optimization. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ f +Dump after flow analysis. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ c +Dump after instruction combination. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ l +Dump after local register allocation. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ g +Dump after global register allocation. +.TP 10 +.B \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ m +Print statistics on memory usage, at the end of the run. +.SH FILES +.ta \w'/usr/local/lib/gcc-gnulib 'u +file.c input file +.br +file.o object file +.br +a.out loaded output +.br +/tmp/cc? temporary +.br +/usr/local/lib/gcc-cpp preprocessor +.br +/usr/local/lib/gcc-cc1 compiler +.br +/usr/local/lib/gcc-gnulib library need by GCC on some machines +.br +/lib/crt0.o runtime startoff +.br +/lib/libc.a standard library, see +.IR intro (3) +.br +/usr/include standard directory for `#include' files +.br +.SH "SEE ALSO" +B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, +.I The C Programming Language, +Prentice-Hall, +1978 +.br +B. W. Kernighan, +.I +Programming in C +.br +D. M. Ritchie, +.I +C Reference Manual +.br +adb(1), ld(1), dbx(1), as(1) +.SH BUGS +Bugs should be reported to bug-gcc@prep.ai.mit.edu. Bugs tend actually to be +fixed if they can be isolated, so it is in your interest to report them +in such a way that they can be easily reproduced according to get newer version. +.SH COPYING +Copyright (C) 1988 Richard M. Stallman. +.br +Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of +this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice +are preserved on all copies. +.br +Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this +manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the +section entitled "GNU CC General Public License" is included exactly as +in the original, and provided that the entire resulting derived work is +distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one. +.br +Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual +into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions, +except that the section entitled "GNU CC General Public License" may be +included in a translation approved by the author instead of in the original +English. +.SH AUTHORS +Richard M. Stallman diff --git a/static/v10/man1/getlab.1 b/static/v10/man1/getlab.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a740e23d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/getlab.1 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +.TH GETLAB 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +getlab \- print security labels of files and processes +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B getlab +[ +.B -d +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +If there is a +.I file +argument, +.I getlab +prints, in the style of +.IR labtoa (3), +the security labels of the named files. +Otherwise, +.I getlab +prints the security label of the process and the process ceiling, +The option is +.TP +.B -d +Also print labels of all open file descriptors. +.PP +If a (character special) +.I file +can be opened, and the labels of the file and the file descriptor +differ, both are printed. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.B getlab /dev/stdin +Print the labels (file system entry and file +descriptor) of the standard input. +.TP +.B drop getlab -d +Print the process label, +preventing the open-file check and the ceiling-label +check (see +.IR getplab (2)) +from raising the +process label. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR stat (1), +.IR getflab (2), +.IR getplab (2) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/getopt.1 b/static/v10/man1/getopt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed35b03f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/getopt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +.if t .ds ' \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\'\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ +.if n .ds ' ' +.if t .ds ` \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\`\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ +.if n .ds ` ` +.TH GETOPT 1 +.SH NAME +getopt \- parse command options +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B set \-\- \*`getopt optstring $\(**\*` +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Getopt\^ +is used to break up options in command lines for easy parsing by shell +procedures, and to check for legal options. +.I Optstring\^ +is a string of recognized option letters (see getopt(3C)); +if a letter is followed by a colon, the option +is expected to have an argument which may or +may not be separated from it by white space. +The special option \fB\-\-\fP is used to delimit the end of the +options. +.I Getopt\^ +will place \fB\-\-\fP in the arguments at the end +of the options, or recognize it if used explicitly. +The shell arguments ($1 $2 . . .) are reset so that each option +is preceded by a \fB\-\fP and in its own shell argument; each option +argument is also in its own shell argument. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.I Getopt\^ +prints an error message on +the standard error +when it encounters an option letter not included in +.IR optstring . +.SH EXAMPLES +The following code fragment shows how one might process the arguments +for a command that can take the options +.B a +and +.BR b , +and the option +.BR o , +which requires an argument. +.PP +.RS +.nf +.ss 18 +set \-\- \*`getopt abo: $\(**\*` +if [ $? != 0 ] +then + echo $USAGE + exit 2 +fi +for i in $\(** +do + case $i in + \-a \(bv \-b) FLAG=$i; shift;; + \-o) OARG=$2; shift; shift;; + \-\-) shift; break;; + esac +done +.fi +.ss 12 +.RE +.PP +This code will accept any of the following as equivalent: +.PP +.RS +.nf +.ss 18 +cmd \-aoarg file file +cmd \-a \-o arg file file +cmd \-oarg \-a file file +cmd \-a \-oarg \-\- file file +.fi +.ss 12 +.RE +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR sh (1), +.IR getopt (3C). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gets.1 b/static/v10/man1/gets.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66fddb86 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/gets.1 @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +.TH GETS 1 deprecated +.UC 4 +.SH NAME +gets \- get a string from standard input +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gets +[ default ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B N.B.: +This command was introduced for use in \fI.login\fR scripts when the facilities +of the +.IR tset (1) +command were not totally adequate in setting the terminal type. +This is no longer true, and +.I gets +should no longer be needed. +To boot, a construct ``$<'' is available in +.IR csh (1) +now which has the functionality of +.IR gets: +.IP +\fBset a=$<\fR +.br +\fBif ($a == '') set a=default +.LP +replaces +.IP +\fBset a=`gets default`\fR +.LP +Users of +.IR sh (1) +should use its +.I read +command rather than +.I gets. +.PP +.I Gets +can be used with +.IR csh (1) +to read a string from the standard input. +If a +.I default +is given it is used if just return is typed, or if an error occurs. +The resultant string (either the default or as read from the standard +input is written to the standard output. +If no +.I default +is given and an error occurs, +.I gets +exits with exit status 1. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +csh (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Gets +is obsolete. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/getuid.1 b/static/v10/man1/getuid.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b04e2e6b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/getuid.1 @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +.TH GETUID 1 +.CT 1 proc_man secur +.SH NAME +getuid, id \(mi get user identity +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B getuid +[ +.B - +] +[ +.I arguments +] +.PP +.B id +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Getuid +prints on its standard output information about its invoker, +based on the effective user id, as presented in the password file. +With no arguments, +.I getuid +prints the login id of its invoker. +Arguments select which information to print: +.IP +.TF passwd +.TP +.B user +login id +.TP +.B group +group id +.TP +.B passwd +encrypted password +.TP +.B uid +numerical user id +.TP +.B gid +numerical group id +.TP +.B acct +comp center account number +.TP +.B bin +comp center output bin +.TP +.B home +home directory +.TP +.B shell +default shell +.PD +.PP +If the optional +.B - +or more than one argument is present, +the information is displayed in the form +.IP +user=name +.LP +as suitable for setting environment variables in the shell. +.PP +.I Id +prints the effective userid and groupid +and the login name. +The userid and groupid are printed numerically and, if +possible, textually. +.SH FILES +.TP +.F /etc/passwd +.TP +.F /etc/group +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR who (1), +.IR getuid (2), +.IR passwd (5), +.IR newgrp (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Getuid +reports the default group for the user, +not the current effective group id. +.br +The login id reported is the first one in the password file with +the correct numerical user id, not necessarily the login +for the current session. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/goto.1 b/static/v10/man1/goto.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64feea78 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/goto.1 @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'GOTO (I)'3/15/72'GOTO (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME goto -- command transfer +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS goto____ label +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION goto____ +is only allowed when the Shell +is taking commands from a file. +The file is searched (from the beginning) +for a line beginning with ":" followed by one +or more spaces followed by +the label_____. +If such a line is found, the goto____ command returns. +Since the read pointer in the command file points to the +line after the label, +the effect is to cause the Shell to transfer to the +labelled line. + +":" is a do-nothing +command that only serves to place a label. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO sh(I), :(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "goto error", if +the input file is a typewriter; "label not found". +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/grabit.1 b/static/v10/man1/grabit.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04b4845f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/grabit.1 @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH GRABIT 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B grabit +\- recover the text representation of PostScript objects +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBgrabit\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" object +\&... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B Grabit +builds a PostScript program that generates a text representation +of one or more PostScript +.IR object s. +The program is written on the standard output. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-d +Do not automatically dump the contents of unrecognized dictionary +objects found in PostScript arrays. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +into the PostScript program. +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/grabit.ps . +.PP +When the program built by +.B grabit +is sent to a PostScript printer the text representation of each +.I object +is normally returned to the host computer over the printer's serial port. +Use +.BR hardcopy (1) +if you do not have access to the port. +.PP +Each argument should be a PostScript +.I object +or commands that generate a PostScript +.IR object . +The program built by +.B grabit +produces results that are often close to legitimate PostScript that +can be successfully sent through an interpreter. +.SH EXAMPLES +.PP +If you can read and write +.MW /dev/tty00 +and there is a PostScript printer on +the other end, then +recover the readable portions of the +.MW userdict +and +.MW statusdict +dictionaries: +.EX +grabit userdict statusdict | postio -l/dev/tty00 -t +.EE +Otherwise get a printout of the dictionaries: +.EX +grabit userdict statusdict | hardcopy | lp ... +.EE +Arguments should be PostScript code that leaves an object on the stack. +Dump the contents of Adobe's +.MW internaldict +dictionary: +.EX +grabit "1183615869 internaldict" | postio -l/dev/tty00 -t +.EE +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/grabit.ps +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR hardcopy (1), +.BR postio (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gram.1 b/static/v10/man1/gram.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..627301c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/gram.1 @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 +.TH GRAM (1) +.SH NAME +gram \- find split infinitives and incorrect indefinite articles +.br +splitrules \- print information about split infinitives +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gram +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +[file ...] +.PP +.B splitrules +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Gram +uses the +.IR parts (1) +(part of speech assignment) program +to look for infinitives that are split by one or more adverbs. +It also checks for incorrect indefinite articles. +.PP +Grammatical information about split infinitives +can be obtained by typing: +.BR splitrules . +.PP +Two options, which apply to both programs, +give information about the programs: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.PP +.I Gram +is one of the programs run under the +.IR proofr (1) +and +.IR wwb (1) +commands. +.SH FILES +.TP 21 +/tmp/$$ +temporary files +.SH SEE ALSO +proofr(1), +wwb(1), +deroff(1), +parts(1). +.SH BUGS +.PP +Because +.I parts +is not always correct in its assignments, +.I gram +also makes errors. +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/grap.1 b/static/v10/man1/grap.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b380401e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/grap.1 @@ -0,0 +1,400 @@ +.TH GRAP 1 +.CT 1 writing_troff graphics +.SH NAME +grap \(mi pic preprocessor for drawing graphs +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B grap +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Grap +is a +.IR pic (1) +preprocessor for drawing graphs on a typesetter. +Graphs are surrounded by the +.I troff +`commands' +.B \&.G1 +and +.BR \&.G2 . +Data that is enclosed is scaled and plotted, +with tick marks supplied automatically. +Commands exist to modify the frame, +add labels, override the default ticks, +change the plotting style, +define coordinate ranges and transformations, +and include data from files. +In addition, +.I grap +provides the same loops, conditionals and macro processing that +.I pic +does. +.PP +.BI frame +.B ht +.I e +.B wid +.I e +.B top +.B dotted +.I \&...: +Set the frame around the graph to specified +.B ht +and +.BR wid ; +default is 2 by 3 (inches). +The default mode applies to all four sides; +.BR top , +.BR bot , +.BR left , +or +.B right +can be set to +.BR dotted , +.BR dashed , +.BR invis , +or +.BR solid +independently. +.PP +.B label +.I side +.B \&"a label" +.B \&"as a set of strings" +.I adjust: +Place label on specified side; default side is bottom. +.I adjust +is +.B up +(or +.B down +.B left +.BR right ) +.I expr +to shift default position; +.B width +.I expr +sets the width explicitly. +.PP +.BI ticks +.I side +.B in +.B at +.I "optname expr, expr, ...: +Put ticks on +.I side +at +.I "expr, ..., +and label with +.I \&"expr". +If any +.I expr +is followed by "...", label tick with "...", +and turn off all automatic labels. +If "..." contains +.BR %f 's, +they will be interpreted as +.B printf +formatting instructions for the tick value. +Ticks point +.B in +or +.B out +(default out). +Tick iterator: instead of +.B at +.I \&..., +use +.BI from +.I expr +.B to +.I expr +.B by +.I "o expr +where +.I o +is optionally +.B +-*/ +for additive or multiplicative steps. +.B by +can be omitted, to give steps of size 1. +If no ticks are requested, they are supplied automatically; +suppress this with +.B ticks +.BR off . +Automatic ticks normally +leave a margin of 7% on each side; set this to anything by +.B margin +.B = +.I expr. +.PP +.B grid +.I "side linedesc" +.B at +.I "optname expr, expr, ...: +Draw grids perpendicular to +.I side +in style +.I linedesc +at +.I "expr, ....\& +Iterators and labels work as with ticks. +.PP +.B coord +.I optname +.B x +.I "min, max" +.B y +.I "min, max" +.B "log x +.BR " log y : +Set range of coords and optional log scaling on either or both. +This overrides computation of data range. +Default value of +.I optname +is current coordinate system +(each +.B coord +defines a new coordinate system). +.PP +.B plot +.I \&"str" +.B at +.IR point ; +.B +.I \&"str" +.B at +.I point: +Put +.I str +at +.I point. +Text position can be qualified with +.BR rjust , +.BR ljust , +.BR above , +.BR below +after "...". +.PP +.B line +.B from +.I point +.B to +.I "point linedesc: +Draw line from here to there. +.B arrow +works in place of +.BR line . +.PP +.B next +.I optname +.B at +.I "point linedesc: +Continue plot of data in +.I optname to +.IR point ; +default is current. +.PP +.BI draw +.I "optname linedesc...:" +Set mode for +.BR next : +use this style from now on, +and plot "..." at each point (if given). +.PP +.BI new +.I "optname linedesc ...:" +Set mode for +.BR next , +but disconnect from previous. +.PP +A list of numbers +.I "x y1 y2 y3 ... +is treated as +.B plot +.B bullet +.B at +.IR x,y1 ; +.B plot +.B bullet +.B at +.IR x,y2 ; +etc., or as +.B next +.B at +.I x,y1 +etc., if +.B draw +is specified. +Abscissae of 1,2,3,... are provided if there is only one input number per line. +.PP +A +point +.I "optname expr, expr +maps the point to the named coordinate system. +A +.I linedesc +is one of +.B dot +.B dash +.B invis +.B solid +optionally followed by an expression. +.PP +.BI define +.I name +.BI { whatever } : +Define a macro. +There are macros already defined for standard plotting +symbols like +.BR bullet , +.BR circle , +.BR star , +.BR plus , +etc., in +.FR /usr/lib/grap.defines , +which is included if it exists. +.PP +.I var +.B = +.I expr: +Evaluate an expression. +Operators are +.B= +.B + +.B - +.B * +and +.B / . +Functions are +.B log +and +.B exp +(both base 10), +.BR sin , +.BR cos , +.BR sqrt ; +.B rand +returns random number on [0,1); +.BI max( e , e ) , +.BI min( e , e ) , +.BI int( e ) . +.PP +.B print +.IR expr ; +.B print +.I \&"...:" +As a debugging aid, print +.I expr or +.I string +on the standard error. +.PP +.B copy +\f5"\fIfilename\f5"\fR +.I : +Include this file right here. +.PP +.B copy +.B thru +.I macro: +Pass rest of input (until +.BR \&.G2 ) +through +.IR macro , +treating each field (non-blank, or "...") as an argument. +.I macro +can be the name of a macro previously defined, +or the body of one in place, like +.BR "/plot $1 at $2,$3/" . +.PP +.B copy +.B thru +.I macro +.B until +.B \&" +.I string +.B \&" +: +Stop copy when input is +.I string +(left-justified). +.PP +.BI pic +.I "remainder of line: +Copy to output with leading blanks removed. +.PP +.BI graph +.I "Name pic-position: +Start a new frame, place it at specified position, +e.g., +.B graph +.B Thing2 +.BR "with .sw at Thing1.se + (0.1,0)" . +.I Name +must be capitalized to keep +.I pic +happy. +.PP +.BI \&. "anything at beginning of line: +Copied verbatim. +.PP +.B sh +.BI % anything % : +Pass everything between the +.BR % 's +to the shell; +as with macros, +.B % +may be any character and +.I anything +may include newlines. +.PP +.B # +.I anything: +A comment, which is discarded. +.PP +Order is mostly irrelevant; no category is mandatory. +Any arguments on the +.B \&.G1 +line are placed on the generated +.B \&.PS +line for +.I pic. +.SH +EXAMPLES +.EX +.ps -1 +.vs -1 +\&.G1 +frame top invis right invis +coord x 0, 10 y 1, 5 log y +ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3,4,5 "top tick" +ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2 +label bot "this is a" "silly graph" +label left "left side label" "here" +grid bot dotted at 2,4,6,8 +grid left dashed at 2.5 +copy thru / circle at $1,$2 / +1 1 +2 1.5 +3 2 +4 1.5 +10 5 +\&.G2 +.ps +.vs +.EE +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/grap.defines +.TP +.F /usr/lib/grap.defines +definitions of standard plotting characters, e.g., bullet +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR graph (1), +.IR pic (1), +.IR plot (3) +.br +J. L. Bentley and B. W. Kernighan, +.I "GRAP \(em A Language for Typesetting Graphs, +CSTR 114, 1984 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/graph.1 b/static/v10/man1/graph.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..839aa2a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/graph.1 @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +.TH GRAPH 1 +.CT 1 numbers graphics +.SH NAME +graph \- draw a graph +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B graph +[ +.I option ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Graph +with no options takes pairs of numbers from the +standard input as abscissas +.RI ( x -values) +and ordinates +.RI ( y -values) +of a graph. +Successive points are connected by straight lines. +The graph is encoded on the standard output +for display by +.IR plot (1) +filters. +.PP +If the ordinate of a point is followed by +a nonnumeric string, that string is printed as a +label beginning on the point. +Labels may be surrounded with quotes +.L +" " +in which case they may be empty or contain blanks +and numbers; +labels never contain newlines. +.PP +The following options are recognized, +each as a separate argument. +.TP +.B -a +Supply abscissas automatically; no +.IR x -values +appear in the input. +Spacing is given by the next +argument (default 1). +A second optional argument is the starting point for +automatic abscissas (default 0, or 1 +with a log scale in +.I x, +or the lower limit given by +.BR -x ). +.TP +.B -b +Break (disconnect) the graph after each label in the input. +.TP +.B -c +Character string given by next argument +is default label for each point. +.TP +.B -g +Next argument is grid style, +0 no grid, 1 frame with ticks, 2 full grid (default). +.TP +.B -l +Next argument is a legend to title the graph. +Grid ranges +are automatically printed as part +of the title unless a +.B -s +option is present. +.TP +.B -m +Next argument is mode (style) +of connecting lines: +0 disconnected, 1 connected. +Some devices give distinguishable line styles +for other small integers. +Mode \-1 (default) begins with style 1 and +rotates styles for successive curves under option +.BR -o . +.TP +.B -o +(Overlay.) +The ordinates for +.I n +superposed curves appear in the input +with each abscissa value. +The next argument is +.IR n . +.TP +.B -s +Save screen; no new page for this graph. +.TP +.B -x l +If +.B l +is present, +.IR x -axis +is logarithmic. +Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) +.I x +limits. +Third argument, if present, is grid spacing on +.I x +axis. +Normally these quantities are determined automatically. +.TP +.B -y l +Similarly for +.IR y . +.TP +.B -e +Make automatically determined +.I x +and +.I y +scales equal. +.TP +.B -h +Next argument is fraction of space for height. +.TP +.B -w +Similarly for width. +.TP +.B -r +Next argument is fraction of space to move right before plotting. +.TP +.B -u +Similarly to move up before plotting. +.TP +.B -t +Transpose horizontal and vertical axes. +(Option +.B -a +now applies to the vertical axis.) +.PP +If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, +the axis +is reversed. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR plot (1), +.IR grap (1), +.IR spline (A) +.SH BUGS +In +.I graph +segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed. +.br +Logarithmic axes may not be reversed. +.br +Option +.B -e +actually makes automatic limits, rather than automatic scaling, +equal. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/gre.1 b/static/v10/man1/gre.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbaa0b8c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/gre.1 @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ +.TH GRE 1 +.CT 1 files +.SH NAME +gre, grep, egrep, fgrep \(mi search a file for a pattern +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B gre +[ +.I option ... +] +.I pattern +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B grep +[ +.I option ... +] +.I pattern +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B egrep +[ +.I option ... +] +.I pattern +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B fgrep +[ +.I option ... +] +.I strings +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Gre\^ +searches the input +.I files\^ +(standard input default) +for lines (with newlines excluded) that match the +.I pattern, +a regular expression as defined in +.IR re (3). +A file name of +.B - +is interpreted as standard input. +Normally, each line matching the pattern is `selected', +and each selected line is copied to the standard output. +The options are +.TP +.B -1 +Print only the first selected line of each file argument. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B -b +Mark each printed line with its byte position in its file. +This is sometimes useful in locating patterns in non-text files. +.TP +.B -c +Print only a count of matching lines. +.TP +.BI -e " pattern" +Same as a simple +.I pattern +argument, +but useful when +.I pattern +begins with a +.BR - . +.TP +.B -E +Simulate +.IR egrep. +.TP +.BI -f " file" +Read the pattern from +.IR file ; +there is no +.I pattern +argument +.TP +.B -F +Simulate +.IR fgrep. +.TP +.B -G +Simulate +.IR grep. +.TP +.B -h +Do not print filename tags (headers) with output lines. +.TP +.B -i +Ignore alphabetic case distinctions. +.TP +.B -l +Print the names of files with selected lines; don't print the lines. +.TP +.B -L +Print the names of files with no selected lines; +the converse of +.BR -l . +.TP +.B -n +Mark each printed line with its line number counted in its file. +.TP +.B -s +Produce no output, but return status. +.TP +.B -v +Reverse: print lines that do not match the pattern. +.TP +.B -x +Exact match: The pattern is +.BI ^( pattern )$ . +The implicit parentheses count in back references. +.PD +.PP +Output lines are tagged by filename when there is more than one +input file. +(To force this tagging, include +.B /dev/null +as a filename argument.) +If the output line exceeds some internal limit, +a warning is given and a small block of text surrounding the match is printed. +.PP +Care should be taken when +using the shell metacharacters +.B $*[^|()\e +and newline +in +.IR pattern ; +it is safest to enclose the +entire expression +in single quotes +.BR \&\|\(fm \|.\|.\|.\| \(fm . +.PP +.I Gre +supplants three classic programs, which are still available: +.PP +.I Grep +handles only +.IR ed (1)-like +regular expressions. +It uses +.L \e(\|\e) +instead of +.LR (\|) . +.PP +.I Egrep +handles the same patterns as +.I gre +except for back-referencing with +.BR \e1 , +.BR \e2 , +\&... +.PP +.I Fgrep +handles no operators except newline (alternation). +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR re (3), +.IR awk (1), +.IR sed (1), +.IR sam (9.1), +.IR strings (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Exit status is 0 if any lines are selected, +1 if none, 2 for syntax errors, inaccessible files +(even if matches were found). +Warnings will be given for input lines that exceed +a (generous) internal limit. +.SH BUGS +.I Grep, egrep, +and +.I fgrep +do not support some options and print block numbers +rather than byte numbers for option +.BR -b . +.br +.I Egrep +may fail on input containing characters greater +than 0176. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/grep.1 b/static/v10/man1/grep.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd5a1010 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/grep.1 @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +.th GREP I 3/3/73 +.sh NAME +grep \*- search a file for a pattern +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd grep +[ +.bd \*-v +] [ +.bd \*-l +] [ +.bd \*-n +] expression [input] [output] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Grep +will search the input file +(standard input default) +for each line containing the +regular expression. +Normally, each line found +is printed on the output file +(standard output default). +If the +.bd \*-v +flag is used, +all lines but those matching +are printed. +If the +.bd \*-l +flag is used, +each line printed is +preceded by its line number. +If the +.bd \*-n +flag is used, +no lines are printed, +but the number of lines that would +normally have been printed is reported. +If interrupt is hit, +the number of lines +searched is printed. +.s3 +For a complete description +of the regular expression, +see ed(I). +Care should be taken when +using the characters +$ * [ ^ | ( ) and \\ in the regular +expression as they are +also meaningful to the shell. +(Precede them by \\) +.sh "SEE ALSO" +ed(I), sh(I) +.sh BUGS +Lines +are limited to 512 characters; +longer lines are truncated. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hang.1 b/static/v10/man1/hang.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8915394a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/hang.1 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +.TH HANG 1 +.CT 1 proc_man debug_tune +.SH NAME +hang \(mi start a process in stopped state +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B hang +.I command +.SH DESCRIPTION +The given command is executed, but stopped before +.B main() +is called so that +the process can be picked up by a debugger. +To ensure that breakpoints may be set, the process does not share its text. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR pi (9.1), +.IR kill (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 b/static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fd43e269 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/hardcopy.1 @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH HARDCOPY 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B hardcopy +\- redirects output from PostScript file operators to paper +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBhardcopy\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B hardcopy +surrounds +.I files +with PostScript that redirects file output to paper, +and writes the results on the standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-f name +Print +.I files +using font +.IR name , +which should be the name of a constant width font. +The default font is Courier. +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-m num +Magnify each page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which is located near the upper left corner of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-s num +Print +.I files +using point size +.IR num . +When printing in landscape mode +.I num +is scaled by a factor that depends on the +imaging area of the device. +The default size for portrait mode is 10. +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed near the +upper left corner of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y down the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0.25 inches. +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves text down the page. +The default offset is 0.25 inches. +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/hardcopy.ps . +.PP +.B hardcopy +generates paper output from data that a PostScript program +normally sends back to a host computer. +It is particularly useful for recovering data from a printer +that does not allow access to its serial port. +.SH EXAMPLES +For a list of ROM based fonts type: +.EX +echo 'FontDirectory {pop ==} forall' | hardcopy | lp \(el +.EE +To recover the version number of the PostScript interpreter: +.EX +echo 'version ==' | hardcopy -pland | lp \(el +.EE +To build and print a width table for font +.MW R +type: +.EX +trofftable -TLatin1 R | hardcopy | lp \(el +.EE +.SH WARNINGS +Results are unpredictable if the input +.I files +make changes to the graphics state. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/hardcopy.ps +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR buildtables (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR trofftable (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hoc.1 b/static/v10/man1/hoc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18786cd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/hoc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +.TH HOC 1 +.CT 1 numbers +.SH NAME +hoc \(mi interactive floating point language +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B hoc +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Hoc +interprets a simple language for floating point arithmetic, +at about the level of Basic, with C-like syntax and +functions. +.PP +The named +.IR file s +are read and interpreted in order. +If no +.I file +is given or if +.I file +is +.L - +.I hoc +interprets the standard input. +.PP +.I Hoc +input consists of +.I expressions +and +.IR statements . +Expressions are evaluated and their results printed. +Statements, typically assignments and function or procedure +definitions, produce no output unless they explicitly call +.IR print . +.PP +Variable names have the usual syntax, including +.LR _ ; +the name +.L _ +by itself contains the value of the last expression evaluated. +Certain variables are already initialized: +.TP +.B E +base of natural logs +.PD0 +.TP +.B PI +.TP +.B PHI +golden ratio +.TP +.B GAMMA +Euler's constant +.TP +.B DEG +180/PI, degrees per radian +.TP +.B PREC +maximum number of significant digits in output, initially 15; +.B PREC=0 +gives shortest `exact' values. +.PD +.PP +Expressions are formed with these C-like operators, listed by +decreasing precedence. +.TP +.B ^ +exponentiation +.TP +.B ! - ++ -- +.TP +.B * / % +.TP +.B + - +.TP +.B > >= < <= == != +.TP +.B && +.TP +.B || +.TP +.B = += -= *= /= %= +.PP +Built in functions include +.BR abs , +.BR acos , +.B atan +(one argument), +.BR cos , +.BR cosh , +.BR erf , +.BR erfc , +.BR exp , +.BR gamma , +.BR int , +.BR log , +.BR log10 , +.BR sin , +.BR sinh , +.BR sqrt , +.BR tan , +and +.BR tanh . +The function +.B read(x) +reads a value into the variable +.BR x ; +the statement +.B print +prints a list of expressions that may include +string constants such as +.B \&\&\&"hello\en". +.PP +Control flow statements are +.BR if - else , +.BR while , +and +.BR for , +with braces for grouping. +Newline ends a statement. +Backslash-newline is equivalent to a space. +.PP +Functions and procedures are introduced by the words +.B func +and +.BR proc ; +.B return +is used to return with a value from a function. +Within a function or procedure, +arguments are referred to as +.BR $1 , +.BR $2 , +etc.; all other variables are global. +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +func gcd() { + temp = abs($1) % abs($2) + if(temp == 0) return abs($2) + return gcd($2, temp) +} +for(i=1; i<12; i++) print gcd(i,12) +.EE +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR bc (1), +.IR dc (1) +.br +B. W. Kernighan and R. Pike, +.I +The Unix Programming Environment, +Prentice-Hall, 1984 +.SH BUGS +Error recovery is imperfect within function and procedure definitions. +.br +The treatment of newlines is not exactly user-friendly. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hostname.1 b/static/v10/man1/hostname.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d4754bb --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/hostname.1 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +.TH HOSTNAME 1 +.SH NAME +hostname, whoami \- computer name +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B hostname +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Hostname +prints the computer name as used by +.IR mail (1) +or +.IR uucp (1). +.SH FILES +.TF /etc/whoami +.TP +.F /etc/whoami +file containing the computer name diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hp.1 b/static/v10/man1/hp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb0ce0e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/hp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +.TH UL 1 +.CT 1 comm_term +.SH NAME +ul, hp \- print underlines on screen terminals +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ul +[ +.B -i +] +[ +.B -t +.I terminal +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B hp +[ +.B -e +] +[ +.B -m +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ul +replaces backspaced, overstruck underscores by control sequences suitable +for the terminal given by the environment variable +.L TERM +or by option +.BR -t . +It reads from the standard input or the named files and +writes on the standard output. +Option +.B -i +represents underlining by a separate line of +.L - +characters. +.PP +.I Hp +is a filter that presents most +.IR nroff +output sensibly on HP 2600 series terminals. +Option +.B -s +stops and waits for a newline at the beginning of each page. +Option +.B -e +uses `display enhancement' features to distinguish +underlines, superscripts, and subscripts, +which are normally all shown in inverse video. +Option +.B -m +squeezes multiple newlines out of the output. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR column (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Hp +does not reliably handle reverse line feeds as produced +by +.IR tbl (1); +pipe the input through +.I col +to get rid of them; see +.IR column (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 b/static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..77daab21 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/hyphen.1 @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'HYPHEN (I)'1/15/73'HYPHEN (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME hyphen -- find hyphenated words +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS hyphen______ file\d1\u ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION It finds all of the words in a +document which are hyphenated across lines +and prints them back at you in a convenient format. + +If no arguments are given, the standard output +is used. +Thus hyphen______ may be used as a filter. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO -- +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS yes +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS yes, it gets confused, but with no ill effects other than +spurious extra output. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ican.1 b/static/v10/man1/ican.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48df33cd --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ican.1 @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ +.TH ICAN 1 +.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev +.SH NAME +ican, ibcan, idcan, itcan \- interface to Imagen laser-printer spooler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ican +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B ibcan +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B idcan +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B itcan +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +These commands print +.I files +(standard input by default) on Imagen laser printers. +The four commands +handle particular kinds of data files: +.TP +.I ican +ASCII text +.TP +.I ibcan +bitmap images created by +.IR blitblt (9.1) +.TP +.I idcan +output from +.IR troff (1) +.TP +.I itcan +output for a Tektronix 4014 terminal, as produced by +.IR plot (1) +.PP +The destination printer is determined in the following ways, +listed in order of decreasing precedence. +.IP +option +.B -d +.I dest +.br +environment variable +.L ICANDEST +.br +printer named in file +.F /etc/icandest +.LP +Printers at the mother site are: +.RS +.TP +.B 1 +1st floor, stair 8 (sid) +.PD0 +.TP +.B 3 +3rd floor, stair 8 (shannon) +.TP +.B 5 +5th floor, 2C-5 (hunny) +.TP +.B j +5th floor, 2D-5 (jones) +.TP +.BI / name +printer attached to machine with Datakit destination +.I name +.RE +.PD +.PP +Options: +.PP +.TP +.BI -c " n" +Number of copies to be printed. +.TP +.BI -d " dest" +Select the destination printer. +.TP +.BI -f " font" +Set the font (default +.LR CW.11 ) +for +.IR can ; +see +.IR font (7). +.TP +.B -L +(landscape) Rotate +.I ibcan +pages 90 degrees. +.TP +.BI -l " n" +Set number of lines per page for +.I can +(default 66). +.TP +.BI -m " n" +Set +.I ibcan +magnification to a power of 2, +where +.I n += 0, 1, or 2 +(default 1). +.TP +.BI -o " list" +Print only pages whose page numbers appear in +the comma-separated +.I list +of numbers and ranges. +A range +.IB n - m +means pages +.I n +through +.IR m ; +a range +.BI - b +means from the beginning to page +.IR n ; +a range +.IB n - +means from page +.I n +to the end. +.B -o +implies +.BR -r . +.TP +.B -r +print +pages in reverse order +(default for +.IR ican " and " idcan ). +.TP +.BI -u " user" +set the name which appears on the banner page; +default is login name. +.TP +.BI -x " n" +set the horizontal +offset of the print image, measured in dots (default 60). +There are 300 dots to the inch. +.TP +.BI -y " n" +set the vertical +offset of the print image (default 0), +except in +.I itcan, +where this option specifies +.I n +extra tekpoints vertically. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/spool/lp +.TP +.F /etc/icandest +default destination +.PD0 +.TP +.F /usr/lib/font/devi300 +font directory +.TP +.F /usr/spool/lp +spool directory +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR pr (1), +.IR blitblt (9.1), +.IR plot (1), +.IR font (7) +.SH BUGS +The `landscape' option is supported only by +.IR ibcan ; +.BR -o +is supported only by +.I ican +and +.I idcan. +.br +There ought to be a way to determine the service class from the input data. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/iclc.1 b/static/v10/man1/iclc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f1ad4cb --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/iclc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +.TH ICLC 1 "1 July 1988" +.SH NAME +iclc \- Esterel binder +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B iclc +[ option ] ... [ file ]... +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fIiclc\fR is the Esterel v3 binder. +It produces an \fIlc\fR format output +(or \fIic\fR if some \fBcopymodule\fP instruction +could not be expanded) from one or more \fIic\fR format inputs. +If there is no input file, the standard input is used. +\fIic\fP format input describes Esterel \fBmodules\fP to be processed, +and \fIlc\fP format output describes Esterel \fBmodules\fP with +no \fBcopymodule\fP instruction. +Typical use is: +.br +.DS +iclc < game1.ic > game.lc +.DE +.br +or +.br +.DS +iclc game1.ic game2.ic > game.lc +.DE +.LP +The following options are interpreted by \fIiclc\fP: +.IP \fB-v\fR 10 +Verbose mode. Tells what's going on. +.IP \fB-version\fR 10 +Prints the version number and exits. +.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 +Prints times and memory sizes for the main phases. +.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 +Gives the memory allocator state at the end of processing. +.IP \fB-Rs\fR 10 +Signal renaming trace mode. +.IP \fB-Rc\fR 10 +Constant renaming trace mode. +.IP \fB-cascade\fR 10 +"Cascade" mode. Creates a file FOO.casc +using the -o, -B and -D options to find the name +(esterel.casc as a last resort). +.IP "\fB\-B\fP \fIname\fP" 10 +Basename for the auxiliary output file. +.IP "\fB-D\fP \fIname\fP" 10 +The name of the directory where the auxiliary output file will go. +For instance, +.br +iclc -D /users/john/wd -B game -cascade game*.ic +.br +will write in the file "/users/john/wd/game.casc". +.IP "\fB\-d\fP[level]" 10 +Debug mode. Barely for you. +.IP "\fB\-o\fP \fIname\fP" 10 +Names the final output file \fIname\fP (deleting the existing text). +Obsolete. +.IP \fB-\fR 10 +Specifies the standard input as input stream. Works only once. Obsolete. +.SH FILES +The caller of the command +must have read/write permission for the directories containing +the working files, and execute permission for the \fIiclc\fR file itself. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The diagnostics produced by \fIiclc\fR compiler are intended (as usual) +to be self-explanatory. +They have one of the following forms: +.IP +"file",line n: iclc error (or warning) : message +.IP +*** iclc: message +.IP +>>>iclc s_trace (or c_trace) : message +.LP +The first two forms are described in the \fIError Messages Manual\fR. +The last one is +generated by the -Rs or -Rc option. +The possible messages with -Rc are: +.IP "root module FOO:" +the binder begins to treat the root module FOO. +.IP "submodule /FOO/BAR:" +the binder begins to treat the module BAR, "called" +by module FOO. +.LP +CONSTANT added as @33 <<: +.IP +CONSTANT is added to the list of final +constants with number 33. The "<<" is here +to help you find later the name of constant +number 33. Just look upward for 33 followed by "<<". +.LP +CONSTANT captured by @33 in module /FOO/BAR: +.IP +CONSTANT is implicitly captured by final constant +number 33 which was defined in module /FOO/BAR. +.LP +CONSTANT replaced by @33 in module /FOO/BAR: +.IP +CONSTANT is explicitly renamed to final +constant number 33 by a copymodule instruction defined in module /FOO/BAR. +.LP +Messages generated by -Rs are alike, except that no module name is given +(all signals must be defined in the parent module). + +.SH IDENTIFICATION +.de VL +\\$2 +.. +Author: J-M. Tanzi, +CMA, Ecole des Mines de Paris, +.sp 0 +Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE +.sp 0 +Revision Number: +$Revision: 1.3 $ +; Release Date: +$Date: 88/07/04 10:32:28 $ +\&. +.SH SEE ALSO +Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual +.sp 0 +Esterel v3 System Manuals. +.sp 0 +strlic (1), lcoc(1), ocl (1). +.sp 0 +.SH BUGS +.IP - +error messages should point to the Esterel source code +and not to an intermediate code input file. +.IP - +there is no error message if the same signal or constant +appears more than once in a renaming list. Only one renaming +is applied, however. +.IP - +the "cascade" mode in not fully implemented. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/icon.1 b/static/v10/man1/icon.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..34b3fa86 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/icon.1 @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +.TH ICON 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +icon \- interactive icon drawing program +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B icon +[ \fB\-x\fR m ] [ \fB\-y\fR n ] [ \fB\-c\fR ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I icon +utility +is a menu-driven interactive icon and picture drawing program. +It runs under +.I layers +using the "mouse" and keyboard for command and text entry. +The default \fIicon\fR display consists of a 50X50 cell grid in the +lower right-hand corner of the layer in which +.I icon +is invoked. By invoking \fIicon\fR with the \fB\-x\fR and \fB\-y\fR flags, +the grid size may be specified to be \fIm\fRX\fIn\fR, overriding the default. +Each cell in this grid corresponds to a single bit in the +.I icon +being created or edited. +In the upper left-hand corner of the layer, +an actual size view of the icon is displayed. +.P +The \f3\-c\f1 option causes icon to be cached in the 630 MTG +application cache. +.P +The grid size parameters \f2m\f1 and \f2n\f1 must be in the +range of 1 to 480. A parameter larger than 480 is reduced to +480, and a parameter smaller than 1 is set to the default +value of 50. +.P +If icon is invoked in a window that is too small for the +specified grid size, icon will display a grid icon in +the upper left corner of the window along with a message +``menu on button 2''. The window must be reshaped before icon +will continue. At this point a menu on button 2 will contain a +reshape selection. If selected, icon will automatically +reshape its window to a size and shape appropriate for the +grid size. Alternately, the button 3 reshape function can be +used to manually reshape the window. If at any time the window +is again reshaped to a size too small to display the selected +grid size, icon will redisplay the grid icon and the ``menu on +button 2'' message. +.P +When using icon, the meanings of the three mouse buttons are +as follows: +.TP 15 +\f3Button 1\f1 +Button 1, when depressed and held in, fills in the +grid position pointed to by the mouse cursor. +.TP +\f3Button 2\f1 +Button 2, when depressed and held in, clears the +grid position pointed to by the mouse cursor. +.TP +\f3Button 3\f1 +Button 3, when depressed, displays a matrix of icons. +By moving the cursor (now a box) over the desired icon and releasing the +button, commands will be invoked. +If the command requires a section of the grid display to be +selected, depressing button 2 will select a 16x16 grid outline. +To specify other than this 16x16 grid outline, +depress button 3 and sweep out the rectangle you wish +the command to act on. +.bp +.SS Commands +The command selection matrix icons are described below from the upper left by rows +to the bottom right. +On the bottom row is a help command designated by the word "help." +.TP 25 +\fBArrow\fR +move selection to another portion of the grid. +.TP +\fBCopier\fR +copy selection to another portion of the grid. +.TP +\fBBlack and white squares\fR +change light squares to dark and dark squares +to light (invert video). +.TP +\fBGarbage can\fR +erase. +.TP +\fBHorizontal wrap arrow\fR +flip on the x-axis. +.TP +\fBVertical wrap arrow\fR +flip on the y-axis. +.TP +\fBTo right and down arrow\fR +rotate 90 degrees clockwise. +.TP +\fBUp and to left arrow\fR +rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise. +.TP +\fBHorizontal lines\fR +shear along the x-axis. +.TP +\fBVertical lines\fR +shear along the y-axis. +.TP +\fBFour line sets\fR +stretch (expand). +.TP +\fBPinwheels\fR +take one pattern and make many copies of it. +.TP +\fBEyeglasses\fR +read an icon file. +.TP +\fBGrid\fR +draw a reference grid. +.TP +\fBMouse\fR +change current mouse cursor to selected 16 x 16 grid. +.TP +\fBQuill pen\fR +write an icon file. +.TP +\fBGrid, arrow to grid\fR +bitblt operator. +.TP +\fBHELP\fR +prints the help menu. +.TP +\fBSmoking gun\fR +exit the \fIicon\fR program. +.SS Cursor Icons +The following are status indicator icons that the mouse cursor changes to +under various conditions: +.TP 25 +\fBAlarm clock\fR +wait. +.TP +\fBDead Mouse\fR +mouse inactive. +.TP +\fBDark square in stack\fR +menu on button 3. +.TP +\fBSquare with arrow\fR +sweep rectangle (button 3). +.TP +\fBDouble square with arrow\fR +sweep rectangle (button 3) +or get 16x16 grid frame (button 2). +.bp +.SH FILES +.ta \w'$DMD/src/icons/texture/* 'u +$DMD/lib/icon.m terminal support program +.br +$DMD/icons/* icons +.SH SEE ALSO +ucache(1). +.br +layers(1) in the +\f2UNIX System V Release 3 User's Reference Manual\f1. +.br +layers(1) in the +\f25620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference Manual\f1. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 b/static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2fc07e27 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/icon_pi.1 @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ +.ds M \fH +.de Ds +.nf +.in +.5i +.ft H +.sp .5 +.. +.de De +.ft R +.in -.5i +.fi +.sp .5 +.. +.TH ICON_PI 1 "The University of Arizona \- 5/6/86" +.SH NAME +icon_pi \- construct personalized interpreter for Icon +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*Micon_pi\fR +.SH DESCRIPTION +A personalized interpreter is +a version of Icon in which the run-time system can be easily +augmented and modified by the user. +.PP +To set up a personalized interpreter, a new directory should +be created solely for the use of the interpreter; otherwise +files may be accidentally destroyed by the set-up process. +For the purpose of example, suppose this directory is +named \*Mmyicon\fR. The set-up process consists of +.Ds +mkdir myicon +cd myicon +icon_pi +.De +Note that \*Micon_pi\fR must be run in the area in which the personalized +interpreter is to be built. +.PP +The shell script \*Micon_pi\fR constructs three subdirectories: +\*Mh\fR, \*Mstd\fR, and \*Mpi\fR. The subdirectory \*Mh\fR +contains header files that are needed in C routines. The subdirectory +\*Mstd\fR contains the portions of the Icon system that are needed +to build a personalized interpreter. The subdirectory \*Mpi\fR +contains a \*MMakefile\fR for building a personalized interpreter +and also is the place where source code for new C functions normally +resides. +.PP +The \*MMakefile\fR that is constructed by \*Micon_pi\fR +contains two definitions to facilitate building personalized +interpreters: +.IP \*MOBJS\fR .5i +a list of object modules that are to be added to or replaced +in the run-time system. \*MOBJS\fR initially is empty. +.IP \*MLIB\fR +a list of library options that are used when the run-time system +is built. \*MLIB\fR initially is empty. +.PP +Performing a \fImake\fR in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR creates four additional files +in \*Mmyicon\fR: +.Ds +.ta 1i +picont \fRcommand processor\*M +pilink \fRlinker\*M +piconx \fRrun-time system\*M +piconx.hdr \fRheader for linker output\*M +.De +A link to \*Mpicont\fR also is constructed in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR so that +the new personalized interpreter can be tested in the directory in +which it is made. +.PP +The file \*Mpicont\fR normally is built only on the first \fImake\fR. The +file \*Mpilink\fR is built on the first \fImake\fR and is +rebuilt whenever the repertoire of built-in functions is changed. +The file \*Mpiconx\fR is rebuilt whenever the source code in the +run-time system is changed. +.PP +The user of the personalized interpreter uses \*Mpicont\fR in +the same fashion that the standard \*Micont\fR; see \fIicont(1)\fR. +(Note that the accidental use of \*Micont\fR in place of +\*Mpicont\fR may produce mysterious results.) +In turn, \*Mpicont\fR translates a source program using the +standard Icon translator and links it using \*Mpilink\fR. +The resulting icode file uses \*Mpiconx\fR. +Note that the location of \*Mpiconx\fR is built into the icode file. +.PP +The relocation bits and symbol tables in +\*Mpiconx\fR can be removed by +.Ds +make Stripx +.De +in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR. This reduces the size of this file substantially +but makes the use of debuggers impractical. +.PP +If a \fImake\fR is performed in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR before any +run-time files are added or modified, the resulting personalized +interpreter is identical to the standard one. Such a \fImake\fR can +be performed to verify that the personalized interpreter system +is performing properly. +.PP +Note that a personalized interpreter inherits the parameters and +configuration of the locally installed version of Icon in \*Mv6\fR, including +optional language extensions. +The file \*Mmyicon/h/config.h\fR contains configuration information. +The definitions in this file should not be changed. +.PP +To add a new function to the personalized interpreter, it is first +necessary to provide the C code, adhering to the conventions and +data structures used throughout Icon. +Some useful functions are +contained in \*Mv6/pi/pil\fR, where \*Mv6\fR is the root +of the source hierarchy for the Icon system. +The directory +\*Mv6/src/iconx\fR contains the source code for the standard built-in +functions, which also can be used as models for new ones. +.PP +Suppose that \*Mgetenv\fR from \*Mv6/pi/pil\fR is to be +added to a personalized interpreter. The source code can be obtained by +.Ds +cp v6/pi/pil/getenv.c myicon/pi +.De +(Note that the actual paths depend on the +local hierarchy.) +.PP +Four things now need to be done to +incorporate this function in the personalized interpreter: +.IP 1. 5n +Add a line consisting of +.Ds +FncDef(getenv) +.De +to \*Mmyicon/h/fdef.h\fR in proper alphabetical order. +This causes the linker and the run-time system to know about the new function. +.IP 2. +Add \*Mgetenv.o\fR to the definition of \*MOBJS\fR in +\*Mmyicon/pi/Makefile\fR. +This causes \*Mgetenv.c\fR to be compiled and the resulting +object file to be loaded with the run-time system when a \fImake\fR is performed. +.IP 3. +Add a dependency line in \*Mmyicon/pi/Makefile\fR for \*Mgetenv.o\fR +to reflect the file that it includes, namely +.Ds +getenv.o: ../h/rt.h +.De +.IP 4. +Perform a \fImake\fR in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR. +This produces +new versions of \*Mpilink\fR and \*Mpiconx\fR in \*Mmyicon\fR. +.LP +The function \*Mgetenv\fR now can be used like any other built-in +function. +.PP +More than one function can be included in a single source file. +If a function requires a library to be loaded, that library should +be added to the definition of \*MLIB\fR in the \*MMakefile\fR. +.PP +The use of personalized interpreters is not limited to the addition +of new functions. Any module in the standard run-time system can +be modified as well. +To modify an existing portion of the Icon run-time system, +copy the source code file from the standard system to \*Mmyicon/pi\fR. +(Source code for a few run-time routines is placed in \*Mmyicon/std\fR +when a personalized interpreter is set up. Check this directory +first and use that file, if appropriate, rather than making +another copy in \*Mmyicon/pi\fR.) When a source-code file in +\*Mmyicon/pi\fR has been modified, place it in the \*MOBJS\fR +list just like a new file and perform a \fImake\fR. Note that +an entire module must be replaced, even if a change is made to +only one routine. +Any module that is replaced must contain all the global variables in +the original module to prevent \fIld(1)\fR from also loading the +original module. There is no way to delete routines from the run-time +system. +.PP +The directory \*Mmyicon/h\fR contains header files that are included +in various source-code files. +The file \*Mmyicon/h/rt.h\fR contains declarations and definitions that +are used throughout the run-time system. This is where the declaration +for the structure of a new type of data object would be placed. +.PP +Care +must be taken when modifying header files not to make changes that +would produce inconsistencies between previously compiled components +of the Icon run-time system and new ones. +.SH FILES +.ta 1i +.nf +\*Mv6/pi\fR code for building personalized interpreters +\*Mv6/src/iconx\fR run-time system +.fi +.SH SEE ALSO +icont(1) +.LP +\fIPersonalized Interpreters for Version 6.0 of Icon\fR, Ralph E. +Griswold, TR 86-12, Department of Computer Science, The University +of Arizona, May 1986. +.LP +\fIThe Icon Programming Language\fR, +Ralph E. Griswold and Madge T. Griswold, +Prentice-Hall Inc., +Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, +1983. +.LP +\fIVersion 6.0 of Icon\fR, Ralph E. Griswold, William H. Mitchell, and +Janalee O'Bagy, +TR 86-10, +Department of Computer Science, The University of Arizona, +May 1986. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/icont.1 b/static/v10/man1/icont.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf252d5c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/icont.1 @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +.ds M \fH +.de Ds +.nf +.in +.5i +.ft H +.sp .5 +.. +.de De +.ft R +.in -.5i +.fi +.sp .5 +.. +.TH ICONT 1 "The University of Arizona \- 5/27/86" +.SH NAME +icont \- process Icon programs +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*Micont\fR +[ option ... ] file ... [ +\*M\-x\fR +arg ... ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The program \*Micont\fR +is a command processor for running Version 6.0 Icon programs. +Used in its simplest form, +it produces a file suitable for interpretation by the Icon +interpreter. +Processing consists of two phases: +\fItranslation\fR +and +\fIlinking\fR. +During translation, +each Icon source file is translated into an intermediate language called \fIucode\fR; +during linking, +the one or more ucode files are combined and a single +\fIicode\fR file is produced. +Unless the +\*M\-o\fR +option is specified, the name of the resulting icode file is +formed by deleting the suffix of the first input file named on the +command line. +If the +\*M\-x\fR +argument is used, +the file is automatically executed by the interpreter +and any arguments following the +\*M\-x\fR +are passed as execution arguments to the Icon program itself. +.PP +Files whose names end in \*M.icn\fR are assumed to be Icon source programs. +These programs are translated, and the intermediate code is left in two ucode files of +the same name with \*M.u1\fR and \*M.u2\fR substituted for \*M.icn\fR. +The ucode code files normally are deleted when \*Micont\fR completes. +Files whose names end in \*M.u1\fR are assumed to refer to ucode +files from a previous translation; these files and the corresponding \*M.u2\fR +files are included in the linking phase after any \*M.icn\fR +files have been translated. +A \*M.u1\fR or \*M.u2\fR file that is explicitly named is not deleted. +Icon source programs may be read from standard input. +The argument +\*M\-\fR +signifies the use of standard input as a source file. +In this case, the ucode files are named \*Mstdin.u1\fR and \*Mstdin.u2\fR +and the icode file is named \*Mstdin\fR. +.PP +The following options are recognized by +\*Micont\fR: +.TP 4 +\*M\-c\fR +Suppress the linking phase. +The ucode code files are not deleted. +.TP +\*M\-m\fR +Preprocess each \*M.icn\fR source file +with the \fIm4\^(1)\fR +macro processor before translation. +.TP +\*M\-o \fIoutput\fR +Name the icode file +\fIoutput\fR. +.TP +\*M\-s\fR +Suppress informative messages from the translator and +linker. +Normally, both informative messages and error messages are sent +to standard error output. +.TP +\*M\-t\fR +Arrange for \*M&trace\fR to have an initial value of \-1 +when the program is executed. +Normally, \*M&trace\fR has an initial value of 0. +.TP +\*M\-u\fR +Issue warning messages for undeclared identifiers in the program. +The warnings are issued during the linking phase. +.PP +Icon has several tables related to the translation and linking +of programs. +These tables are large enough for most programs, but their sizes can be +changed, if necessary, by the \*M\-S\fR option. This option has the +form \*M\-S\^[cfgilrstCL]\fI n\fR, where the letter following the +\*MS\fR specifies the table and \fIn\fR is the number of storage units to +allocate for the table. +Some sizes depend on the size of the address space of the computer. +For this purpose, a VAX has a large address space, +while a PDP-11 has a small address space. +The tables and their default sizes for computers +with large and small memory sizes are: +.nf +.in +.5i +.sp +.ta .3i 2.5iR 3.3iR + \fIlarge small\fR +.sp .5 +\*Mc\fR constant table 100 100 +\*Mf\fR field table 100 100 +\*Mg\fR global symbol table 200 200 +\*Mi\fR identifier table 500 500 +\*Ml\fR local symbol table 100 100 +\*Mr\fR field table for records 100 100 +\*Ms\fR string space 15,000 7,500 +\*Mt\fR tree space 15,000 5,000 +\*MC\fR code buffer 20,000 4,000 +\*ML\fR labels 500 500 +.sp +.in -.5i +.fi +The units depend on the table involved, but the default values can +be used as a general guide for appropriate settings of \*M\-S\fR +options without knowing the units. +.PP +The environment variable \*MIPATH\fR controls the location of files +specified in link directives. The value of \*MIPATH\fR should be a blank-separated +form \fIp1\0p2 \*(El\0 pn\fR where the \fIpi\fR name directories. +Each directory is searched in turn to locate files named in link +directives. The default value for \*MIPATH\fR is \*M.\fR , that is, the current +directory. +.PP +The icode +file produced by the Icon linker is +executable. +\fRFor example, the command +.nf +.in +.5i +\*M +.sp -.5 +icont hello.icn +.ft R +.in -.5i +.sp .5 +.fi +produces a file named \*Mhello\fR +that can be run by the command +.nf +.in +.5i +\*M +.sp -.5 +hello +.ft R +.in -.5i +.sp .5 +.fi +.PP +Arguments can be passed to the Icon program by following the program +name with the arguments. Any such arguments are passed to the main +procedure as a list of strings. +.PP +When an Icon program is executed, several environment variables +are examined to determine certain execution parameters. +The values assigned to these variables should be numbers. +The variables that affect execution +and the interpretations of their values are as follows: +.TP 4 +\*MTRACE\fR +Initialize the value of \*M&trace\fR. +If this variable has a value, it overrides the translation-time +\*M\-t\fR +option. +.TP +\*MNBUFS\fR +The number of i/o buffers to use for files. +When a file is opened, it is assigned an i/o buffer if one is available +and the file is not a tty. +If no buffer is available, the file is not buffered. +\*M&input\fR, \*M&output\fR, and \*M&errout\fR are buffered if buffers +are available. +On large-memory systems, the default value of \fINBUFS\fR is 10. +On small-memory systems, it is 5. +.TP +\*MNOERRBUF\fR +If set, \*M&errout\fR is not buffered. +.TP +\*MICONCORE\fR +If set, a core dump is produced for error termination. +.TP +\*MSTRSIZE\fR +The initial size of the string space, in bytes. +The string space grows if necessary, but it never shrinks. +On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MSTRSIZE\fR is 51,200; +on small-memory systems, it is 10,240. +.TP +\*MHEAPSIZE\fR +The initial size of the allocated block region, in bytes. +The heap grows if necessary, but it never shrinks. +On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MHEAPSIZE\fR is 51,200; +on small-memory systems, it is 10,240. +.TP +\*MCOEXPSIZE\fR +The size, in words, of each co-expression block. +On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MCOEXPSIZE\fR is 2,000; +on small-memory systems, it is 1,000. +.TP +\*MMSTKSIZE\fR +The size, in words, of the main interpreter stack. On large-memory +systems, the default value of \*MMSTKSIZE\fR is 10,000; +on small-memory systems, it is 3,000. +.TP +\*MSTATSIZE\fR +The size, in bytes, of the static region in which co-expression blocks +are allocated. On large-memory systems, the default value of \*MSTATSIZE\fR +is 20,480; on small-memory systems, it is 1,024. +.TP +\*MSTATINCR\fR +The size of the increment used when the static region is expanded. +The default increment is one-fourth of the initial size of the static +region. +.SH FILES +.ta \w'\*Mitran\fR 'u +\*Micont\fR Icon command processor +.br +\*Mitran\fR Icon translator +.br +\*Milink\fR Icon linker +.br +\*Miconx\fR Icon run-time system +.br +.SH SEE ALSO +\fIThe Icon Programming Language\fR, +Ralph E. Griswold and Madge T. Griswold, +Prentice-Hall Inc., +Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, +1983. +.LP +\fIVersion 6.0 of Icon\fR, Ralph E. Griswold, William H. Mitchell, +and Janalee O'Bagy, +TR 86-10, +Department of Computer Science, The University of Arizona, +May 1986. +.LP +m4\^(1), icon_pi(1) +.SH BUGS +.LP +Icode files do not stand alone; the Icon run-time system must be +present. +An icode +file produced on one system will not work on another system unless +the Icon run-time system is in the same place on both systems and +the run-time system is of the same version of Icon as the linker +that produced the icode file. +.LP +Stack overflow is checked using a heuristic that is not always effective. +.LP +If the +\*M\-m\fR +option is used, +line numbers reported in error messages or tracing messages +are from the file after, not before, preprocessing. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ideal.1 b/static/v10/man1/ideal.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38f6740a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ideal.1 @@ -0,0 +1,380 @@ +.TH IDEAL 1 +.CT 1 writing_troff graphics +.SH NAME +ideal \(mi troff preprocessor for drawing pictures +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ideal +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ideal +is a constraint-based +.IR troff (1) +preprocessor for typesetting figures in the complex plane. +A line beginning +.L .IS +marks the start of an +.I ideal +program, +.B .IE +or +.BR .IF +marks the end. +.B .IE +leaves the typesetting baseline below the bottom of the picture; +.B .IF +(flyback) leaves it at the top. +The options are +.TP +.BI -T dev +Produce instructions for +.IR troff (1) +device +.I dev. +.B -a +is a synonym for +.BR -Taps ; +.B -t +for +.BR -T202 . +.TP +.B -tex +Produce output for +.IR tex (1). +.TP +.B -p +Produce +.IR plot (1) +instructions. +Erases come unbidden at every +.BR .IS . +.TP +.B -4 +Produce instructions for a Tektronix +4014 and wait at each +.B .IE +for an input character +before erasing and starting the next picture. +.TP +.B -n +Produce raw +.IR ideal +output, which passes unharmed through +.I nroff. +.TP +.B -v +Print calculated values of variables on standard error. +.PP +.I Ideal +programs are built of +`boxes'; +boxes look like C functions, +in that they are named and delimited by braces. +They may include the following kinds of statements, +each terminated by a semicolon: +.TF spline +.TP +.B var +declares one or more complex variables local to the box. +Variable names are made up of letters and digits, and +start with a letter; do not use any of the following +keywords as variable names: +.LR at , +.LR bdlist , +.LR boundary , +.LR box , +.LR conn , +.LR construct , +.LR draw , +.LR exterior , +.LR interior , +.LR left , +.LR opaque , +.LR put , +.LR right , +.LR spline , +.LR text , +.LR to , +.LR using , +.L var +.TP +.I equation +declares relative positions of significant points of the box +.TP +.B conn +asks for a straight-line path through named points +.TP +.B pen +asks for a box to be replicated along a line between two points +.TP +.B left +left-justifies text with respect to a point +.TP +.B text +centers text with respect to a point +.TP +.B right +right-justifies text with respect to a point +.TP +.B spline +draws a spline guided by the named points +.TP +.B put +asks for an instance of a box to be drawn +.TP +.B opaque +asks for a box to erase lines already in the picture that +are covered by its bounding polygon +.TP +.B boundary +specifies the bounding polygon for an opaque box +.TP +.B construct +builds a partial picture on a separate `sheet of paper' +.TP +.B draw +adds the contents of the named constructed box to the current picture +.PD +.PP +.I Ideal +expects all components of a picture to be specified as boxes; +instructions to draw the entire picture should comprise a box called +.LR main . +Boxes are remembered across +.BR .IS / .IE +boundaries; +if you won't need a box again, you can reclaim the +space it requires by including the command +.BI ...forget " boxname" +on a line between any +.BR .IS / .IE +pair after the last use of +.I boxname. +Box +.L main +is an exception to this rule: +it is always forgotten at +.BR .IE . +.PP +During its first pass, +.I ideal +solves all the equations to determine the locations of all points +it needs to know. +These equations must be linear equations in complex variables, +although they may include non-linear operators: +.I ideal +plugs in for as many variables, and does as much function evaluation, +as it can before solving the linear equation. +It waits until it has absolutely no hope of reducing an equation +to a linear equation before complaining. +.I Ideal +knows about the following functions: +.TF f[z,w] +.TP +.IB f [ z , w ] +.I == z+(w-z)f, +fraction +.I f +of the way from +.I z +to +.I w +.TP +.BI re( z ) +real part of complex number +.TP +.BI im( z ) +imaginary part of complex number +.TP +.BI conj( z ) +complex conjugate of complex number +.TP +.BI abs( z ) +absolute value (modulus) of complex number +.TP +.BI cis( z ) +the unit vector +.if n .ig +$cos^x~+~i^sin^x$, +.. +.if t .ig +cos(x) + i*sin(x) +.. +where +.IR x " = re(" z ) +and +.I x +is measured in degrees +(radians if the line +.B ...radians +appeared more +recently in the file than the line +.BR ...degrees ) +.TP +.BI E( x ) +.RI "== cis(360 x ) +if +.I x +is measured in degrees +.TP +.BI angle( z ) +angle of complex number, +.RI arctan(im( z )/re( z )) +.PD +.PP +During the second pass, +.I ideal +draws the picture. +.PP +To draw a circle, +include the line +.B ...libfile circle +between the +.B .IS +and +.B .IE +lines, +and +.B put +the box named +.LR circle , +giving enough information that +the circle can be determined; +for instance, give the center and the radius, +or give three points through which the circle passes, +or give the center and a point on the circle. +The circle has center +.LR center , +radius +.LR radius , +and passes through +.BR z1 , +.BR z2 , +and +.B z3. +.PP +To draw an arc, +include the line +.B ...libfile arc +between the +.B .IS +and +.B .IE +lines, +and +.B put +the box named +.LR arc , +again giving enough information to determine the arc; +for instance, give the center, radius, and starting and ending angles, +or give three points on the arc--where to start, where to end, and somewhere +in between. +The arc has center +.LR center , +radius +.LR radius , +starts at point +.LR start , +passes through point +.L midway +at angle +.LR midang , +and +ends at point +.L end +at angle +.LR endang . +If no +.L midway +is specified, the arc is drawn counterclockwise from +.L start +to +.LR end . +.PP +The picture will be scaled to a default width of four inches +and centered in a column of six inches. +The default width can be changed by a +.B ...width +command, +which includes a number in inches. +The default column width can be changed by a +.B ...colwid +command. +To defeat +.I ideal's +notion of the size of the picture, you can include lines of +the form +.BR ...minx , +.BR ...miny , +.BR ...maxx , +or +.BR ...maxy ; +these give the various coordinates of the bounding box of the +picture in the coordinate system used by the picture. +.PP +.I Ideal +supports both C-style comments (between +.L /* +and +.L */ +brackets \(em which nest), +and shell-style comments (between +.L # +and newline). +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +.mk +\&...libfile circle +triangle { + var z1, z2, z3; + conn z1 to z2 to z3 to z1; +} +main { + put T: triangle { + z1 = 0; z2 = 1; z3 = (2,2); + } + put circle { + z1 = T.z1; z2 = T.z2; z3 = T.z3; + } +} +.EE +.de xx +.. +.if n .ig xx +.rt +.IS +...width 6 +...libfile circle +...minx -8 +triangle { + var z1, z2, z3; + conn z1 to z2 to z3 to z1; +} +main { + put T: triangle { + z1 = 0; z2 = 1; z3 = (2,2); + } + put circle { + z1 = T.z1; z2 = T.z2; z3 = T.z3; + } +} +.IE +.xx +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR troff (1), +.IR pic (1), +.IR ped (9.1), +.IR doctype (1) +.br +C. J. Van Wyk, +`IDEAL User's Manual', +this manual, Volume 2 +.SH BUGS +.I Ideal +is relatively unforgiving about syntax errors. +.br +Bounding box computation is naive for arcs and text strings. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/idiff.1 b/static/v10/man1/idiff.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a8047eb --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/idiff.1 @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +.TH IDIFF 1 +.CT 1 files dirs +.SH NAME +idiff \(mi interactive file comparison +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B idiff +[ +.I option +] +.I file1 file2 +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Idiff +compares +.I file1 +with +.I file2 +using +.IR diff , +then presents each set of changed lines +for selection or processing. +.I File2 +may be a directory; +in that case, the basename of +.I file1 +is appended. +.PP +For each group, legal responses are +.TP +.B < +to retain the `from' lines +.TP +.B > +to retain the `to' lines +.TP +.B e +to edit both sets of lines +.TP +.B d +to delete both sets +.TP +.B 1 +to retain the rest of the `from' file +.TP +.B 2 +to retain the rest of the `to' file +.TP +.B ! +to invoke a shell command +.PP +Lines that compare equal are copied verbatim from +.I file1. +Lines produced by this process, +including the lines written from within the editor, +are written to file +.IR idiff.out . +Comparison may be affected by the +.IR diff (1) +options +.TP +.B -b +Ignore trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) and treat other +strings of blanks as if they were a single space. +.TP +.B -B +Ignore all blanks. +.SH FILES +.TF /tmp/idiff.* +.TP +.F idiff.out +.TP +.F idiff.* +.TP +.F /tmp/idiff.* +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR diff (1) +.SH BUGS +There is no way to revisit a choice. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/if.1 b/static/v10/man1/if.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..917ec740 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/if.1 @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'IF (I)'3/15/72'IF (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME if -- conditional command +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS if__ expr command [ arg918 ... ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION if__ +evaluates the expression expr____, and if its value is true____, +executes the given command_______ with the given arguments. + +The following primitives are used to construct +the expr____: + +.in +9 +.ti -4 +-r__ file +.br +true if the file exists and is readable. + +.ti -4 +-w__ file +.br +true if the file exists and is writable + +.ti -4 +s1 =_ s2 +.br +true if the strings s1__ and s2__ are equal. + +.ti -4 +s1 !=__ s2 +.br +true if the strings s1__ and s2__ are not equal. + +.in -9 +These primaries may be combined with the +following operators: + +.in +5 +!_ +.ti +4 +unary negation operator + +-a__ +.ti +4 +binary and___ operator + +-o__ +.ti +4 +binary or__ operator + +(_ expr )_ +.ti +4 +parentheses for grouping. + +.in -5 +-a__ has higher precedence than -o__. +Notice that all the operators and flags are separate +arguments to if__ and hence must be surrounded by spaces. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO sh(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "if error", +if the expression has the wrong syntax; +"command not found." +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/imscan.1 b/static/v10/man1/imscan.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0aaaf98a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/imscan.1 @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +.TH IMSCAN 1 "arend" +.CT 1 graphics +.SH NAME +imscan \(mi scan greyscale images +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B imscan +[ +.BI -s N +] +[ +.BI -l N +] +.I file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Imscan +digitizes an image with an Imagitex grey-scale scanner +and places the result in the named file in the form of +.IR picfile (5). +The options are +.TP +.BI -s N +Set a scale factor +.RI 1\(<= N \(<=9, +default 4. +With scale factor +.I N +the image is subsampled: only 1 out of every +.I N\(muN +pixels is stored. +A larger scale factor, therefore, produces a smaller image. +.TP +.BI -l N +Use lens focal length +.I N, +where +.I N +is either 5 or 8 (default). +The 8-inch lens scans images at 480 dots per inch. +The 5-inch lens scans at 754 dots per inch. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR cscan (1), +.IR pico (1), +.IR qsnap (1), +.I mugs +in +.IR face (9.7), +.IR picfile (5) +.SH BUGS +It is hard to get more than 2000 pixels per scanline reliably. +For large originals, higher scale factors work better than +smaller ones. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/inews.1 b/static/v10/man1/inews.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..15bb55a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/inews.1 @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +.TH INEWS 1 +.SH NAME +inews \- submit news articles +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B inews +[ +.B \-h +] +.B \-t +.IR title " [ " +.B \-n +.IR newsgroups " ] [ " +.B \-e +.IR "expiration date" " ]" +.PP +.B "inews \-p" +.RI " [ " filename " ] " +.PP +.BI "inews \-C " newsgroup +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Inews +submits news articles to the USENET news +network. +It is intended as a raw interface, not as a human user interface. +Casual users should probably use +.IR postnews (1) +instead. +.PP +The first form is for submitting user articles. +The body will be read from the standard +input. A +.I title +must be specified as there is no default. Each article +belongs to a list of newsgroups. If the +.B \-n +flag is omitted, the list +will default to something line +.IR general . +(On ours, it is +.IR general .) +If you wish to submit +an article in multiple newsgroups, the +.I newsgroups +must be separated by commas and/or spaces. +If not specified, the expiration date will be +set to the local default. +The +.B \-f +flag specifies the article's sender. Without this flag, the sender +defaults to the user's name. +If +.B \-f +is specified, the real sender's name will be included as a Sender line. +The +.B \-h +flag specifies that headers are present at the beginning of the +article, and these headers should be included with the article +header instead of as text. +(This mechanism can be used to edit headers and supply additional +nondefault headers, but not to specify certain information, +such as the sender and article ID, that inews itself generates.) +.LP +When posting an article, the environment is checked for +information about the sender. +If NAME is found, its value is used for the full name, +rather than the system value (often in /etc/passwd). +This is useful if the system value cannot be set, or when +more than one person uses the same login. +If ORGANIZATION is found, the value overrides the system +default organization. +This is useful when a person uses a guest login and is +not primarily associated with the organization owning the machine. +.LP +The second form is used for receiving articles from other machines. +If +.I filename +is given, the article will be read from the specified file; otherwise +the article will be read from the standard input. An expiration date +need not be present and a receival date, if present, will be ignored. +.LP +After local installation, inews will transmit the article to all systems +that subscribe to the newsgroups that the article belongs to. +.LP +The third form is for creating new newsgroups. On some systems, this may +be limited to specific users such as the super-user or news administrator. +(This happens on ours.) +.LP +If the file /usr/lib/news/recording is present, it is taken as a list of +"recordings" to be shown to users posting news. +(This is by analogy to the recording you hear when you dial information +in some parts of the country, asking you if you really wanted to do this.) +The file contains lines of the form: +.br + newsgroups filename +.br +for example: +.br + net.all net.recording + fa.all fa.recording +.br +Any user posting an article to a newsgroup matching the pattern on +the left will be shown the contents of the file on the right. +The file is found in the LIB directory (often /usr/lib/news). +The user is then told to hit DEL to abort or RETURN to proceed. +The intent of this feature is to help companies keep proprietary +information from accidently leaking out. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 25 +/usr/spool/news/.sys.nnn +temporary articles +.TP 25 +.RI /usr/spool/news/ newsgroups / article_no. +Articles +.TP 25 +/usr/spool/oldnews/ +Expired articles +.TP 25 +/usr/lib/news/active +List of known newsgroups and highest local article numbers in each. +.TP 25 +/usr/lib/news/seq +Sequence number of last article +.TP 25 +/usr/lib/news/history +List of all articles ever seen +.TP 25 +/usr/lib/news/sys +System subscription list +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +Mail(1), +binmail(1), +getdate(3), +msgs(1), +news(5), +newsrc(5), +postnews(1), +readnews(1), +recnews(1), +sendnews(8), +uucp(1), +uurec(8), +.SH AUTHORS +Matt Glickman +.br +Mark Horton +.br +Stephen Daniel +.br +Tom R. Truscott diff --git a/static/v10/man1/init.1 b/static/v10/man1/init.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..77aff09e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/init.1 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + 1 2 3 4 + 5 6 + 7 +if +for +else +while +1 2 3 if +4 5 0 for +6 7 8 else +9 10 11 while +1 2 3 if +4 5 0 for +6 7 8 else +9 10 11 while +0 0 0 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/intro.1 b/static/v10/man1/intro.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c10c446 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/intro.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.TH INTRO 1 +.SH NAME +intro \- introduction to commands +.SH DESCRIPTION +This section describes publicly accessible commands +in alphabetic order. +.PP +The name of a particular machine at the head of the +page means that the command lives there and not necessarily +elsewhere. +`Local' means the same, without being specific about where. +.SH SEE ALSO +Section (7) for databases. +.br +Section (8) for `hidden' commands for booting, maintenance, etc. +.br +Section (9) for commands that involve the Teletype 5620 terminal. +.br +.I How to get started, +in the Introduction. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Upon termination each command returns two bytes of status, +one supplied by the system giving the cause for +termination, and (in the case of `normal' termination) +one supplied by the program; +see +.IR exit (2). +The former byte is 0 for normal termination, the latter +is customarily 0 for successful execution, nonzero +to indicate troubles such as erroneous parameters, bad or inaccessible data, +or other inability to cope with the task at hand. +It is called variously `exit code', `exit status' or +`return code', and is described only where special +conventions are involved. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/jim.1 b/static/v10/man1/jim.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..f43ae986 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/jim.1 @@ -0,0 +1,331 @@ +.TH JIM 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +jim, jim.recover\- 630 MTG text editor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B jim +[ +.B \-c +] [ files \&. \&. \&. ] +.br +\f3jim.\(**\f1 +[ +.B \-f +] [ +.B \-t +] [ files \&. \&. \&. ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Jim +is the text editor for the 630 MTG terminal. +.P +It is a shared cached application if the \f3\-c\f1 option is +specified. +This means that multiple instances of jim +may run simultaneously without needing to do a download for +each instance. Once jim is downloaded it does not have to be +downloaded again. +.P +Jim relies on the mouse to select text and commands; +it runs only under +.IR layers (1). +.IR Jim 's +screen consists of a number of +.IR frames , +a one-line command and diagnostic frame at the bottom, +and zero or more larger file frames above it. +Except where indicated, these frames behave identically. +One of the frames is always the current frame, +to which typing and editing commands refer, +and one of the file frames is the working frame, +to which file commands such as pattern searching and I/O refer. +.PP +A frame has at any time a selected region of text, +indicated by reverse video highlighting. +The selected region may be a null string between two characters, +indicated by a narrow vertical bar between the characters. +The editor has a single +.I "save buffer +containing an arbitrary string. +The editing commands simply invoke transformations between the +selected region and the save buffer. +.PP +The mouse buttons are used for the most common operations. +Button 1 is used for selection. +Clicking button 1 in a frame +which is not the current frame makes the indicated frame current. +Clicking button 1 in the current frame selects the null string closest +to the mouse cursor. +Making the same null selection twice (`double clicking') selects +(in decreasing precedence) the bracketed or quoted string, word, or line +enclosing the selection. +By depressing and holding button 1, an arbitrary contiguous visible string +may be selected. +Button 2 provides a small menu of text manipulation functions, described below. +Button 3 provides control for inter-frame operations. +.PP +The button 2 menu entries are: +.TP +.B cut +Copy the selected text to the save buffer and delete it from the frame. +If the selected text is null, the save buffer is unaffected. +.TP +.B paste +Replace the selected text by the contents of the save buffer. +.TP +.B snarf +Copy the selected text to the save buffer. +If the selected text is null, the save buffer is unaffected. +.bp +.PP +Typing +replaces the selected text with the typed text. +If the selected text is not null, +the first character typed forces an implicit +.BR cut . +Control characters are discarded, but +BS (control H), +ETB (control W), +NL (control J) and ESC (escape) have special meanings. +BS is the usual backspace character, which erases the character before the selected text (which is a null string when it takes effect). +ETB erases back to the word boundary preceding the selected text. +There is no line kill character. +NL toggles the current frame between the workframe and the diagnostic +frame, and can be a substitute for manual frame selection with the +mouse. +ESC selects the text typed since the last button hit or ESC. +If an ESC is typed immediately after a button hit or ESC, +it is identical to a +.BR cut . +ESC followed by +.B paste +provides the functionality of a simple undo feature. +.PP +The button 3 menu entries are: +.TP +.B new +Create a new frame by sweeping with the mouse. +.TP +.B reshape +Change the shape of the indicated frame. +The frame is selected by clicking button 3 over the frame. +.TP +.B close +Close the indicated frame and its associated file. +The file is still available for editing later; +only the associated frame is shut down. +.TP +.B write +Write the indicated frame's contents to its associated file. +.PP +The rest of the menu is a list of file names available for editing. +To work in a different file, select the file from the menu. +If the file is not open on the screen, the cursor will switch to an +outline box to prompt for a rectangle to be swept out with button 3. +(Clicking button 3 without moving the mouse creates the largest +possible rectangle.) +If the file is already open, it will simply be made the workframe and +current frame (for typing), perhaps after redrawing if it is obscured +by another frame. +The format of the lines in the menu is: +.TP +\- +possibly an apostrophe, indicating that the file has been modified since +last written, +.TP +\- +possibly a period or asterisk, indicating the file is open (asterisk) or +the workframe (period), +.TP +\- +a blank, +.TP +\- +and the file name. +The file name may be abbreviated by compacting path components to keep +the menu manageable, but the last component will always be complete. +.bp +.PP +The work frame has a +.I "scroll bar +\(em a black vertical bar down the left edge. +A small tick in the bar indicates the relative position of the frame +within the file. +Pointing to the scroll bar and clicking a button controls scrolling +operations in the file: +.TP +button 1 +Move the line at the top of the screen to the y position of the mouse. +.TP +button 2 +Move to the absolute position in the file indicated by the y position of the mouse. +.TP +button 3 +Move the line at the y position of the mouse to the top of the screen. +.PP +The bottom line frame is used for a few typed commands, modeled on +.IR ed (1) , +which operate on the workframe. +When a carriage return is typed in the bottom line, +the line is interpreted as a command. +The bottom line scrolls, but only +when the first character of the next line is typed. +Thus, typically, after some message appears in the bottom line, +a command need only be typed; +the contents of the line will be automatically cleared when the first +character of the command is typed. +The commands available are: +.TP +.B e \f2file\f1\f3 +Edit the named +.IR file , +or use the current file name if none specified. +Note that each file frame has an associated file name. +.TP +.B E \f2file\f1\f3 +Edit the named +.IR file +unconditionally, as in \fIed\fP(1). +.TP +.B f \f2file\f1\f3 +Set the name of the +file associated with the work frame, if one is specified, +and display the result. +.TP +.B g \f2files\f1\f3 +Enter the named +.I files +into the filename menu, without duplication, +and set the work frame to one of the named files. +If the new work frame's file is not open, the user is prompted to create its frame. +The arguments to +.IT g +are passed through +.IR echo (1) +for shell metacharacter interpretation. +.TP +.B w \f2file\f1\f3 +Write the named +.IR file , +or use the current file name if none specified. +.TP +.B q +Quit the editor. +.bp +.TP +.B Q +Quit the editor unconditionally, as in \fIed\fP(1). +.TP +.B / +Search forward for the string matching the regular expression after the slash. +If found, the matching text is selected. +The regular expressions are exactly as in +.IR egrep (1), +with two additions: the character `@' matches any character +.I including +newline, and the sequence `\en' specifies a newline, even in character classes. +The negation of a character class does not match a newline. +An empty regular expression (slash-newline) repeats the last regular expression. +.TP +.B ? +Search backwards for the expression after the query. +.TP +.B 94 +Select the text of line 94, as in +.IR ed . +.TP +.B $ +Select the text of the last line. +.TP +.B cd \f2dir\f1\f3 +Set the working directory to \fIdir\fP, as in the shell. +There is no CDPATH search, but $HOME is the default \fIdir\fP. +.TP +.B = +Display the line number of selection in the current frame. +.TP +.B >\f2Unix-command\fP +Sends the selected text to the standard input of +.IR Unix-command . +.TP +.B <\f2Unix-command\fP +Replaces the selected text by the standard output of +.IR Unix-command . +.TP +.B |\|\f2Unix-command\fP +Replaces the selected text by the standard output of +.IR Unix-command, +given the original selected text as standard input. +.PP +If any of <, > or | is preceded by an asterisk \(**, +the command is applied to the entire file, instead of just the selected text. +If the command for < or | exits with non-zero status, the original text +is not deleted; otherwise, the new text is selected. +Finally, the standard error output of the command, which is merged with the +standard output for >, is saved in the file +$HOME/jim.err . +If the file is non-empty when the command completes, the first line is +displayed in the diagnostic frame. Therefore the command ``>pwd'' +will report +.IR jim 's +current directory. +.PP +The most recent search command ('/' or '?') and Unix command ('<', '|', +or '>') are added to the button 2 menu, so that they may be easily repeated. +.PP +Attempts to quit with modified files, or edit a new file +in a modified frame, are rejected. +A second `q' or `e' command will succeed. +The `Q' or `E' commands ignore modifications and work immediately. +Some consistency checks are performed for the `w' command. +.I jim +will reject write requests which it considers dangerous +(such as writes that change files which are modified when +read into memory). +A second `w' will always write the file. +.bp +.PP +If +.I jim +receives a hang-up signal, it writes a recover file, +which is a shell command file that, when executed, will +retrieve files that were being edited and had been modified. +The name of the file will be of the form \f2jim.\f1 followed +by a uniquely generated alphanumeric string. \f2Jim\f1 will +send mail to the logon id saying files may be recovered and +specifying the path and name of the recover file. If it cannot +write this file in the home directory, it writes it in the +current working directory. The \f3-t\f1 option prints a table +of contents. By default, the jim recover file is interactive; +the \f3-f\f1 option suppresses the interaction. +If no \f2file\f1 argument is given to the jim.recover shell +file, the recovery will apply to all modified files at the +time when jim received the hang-up signal. If there is a +\f2file\f1 argument, only those files will be recovered. +.SH FILES +.ta \w'$DMD/lib/jim.m 'u +$DMD/lib/jim.m terminal support program +.br +/tmp/jim.\(** temporary file +.br +$HOME/jim.err diagnostic output from Unix commands +.br +jim.\(** recovery script created upon \fIjim\fP failure +.SH SEE ALSO +ucache(1). +.br +ed(1), echo(1), egrep(1) in the \f2UNIX System V +User's Reference Manual\f1. +.br +layers(1) in the \f2Unix System V Release 3 User's Reference Manual\f1. +.br +layers(1) in the \f25620 Dot-Mapped Display Reference Manual.\f1 +.SH WARNING +\f2Jim\f1 is reshapable, but a reshape clears the screen +space of all open frames. +.SH BUGS +\" spectacular is the real word... +The regular expression matcher is non-deterministic (unlike +.IR egrep ), +and may be slow for +complicated expressions. +.P +The < and | operators don't snarf the original text. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/join.1 b/static/v10/man1/join.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94117fff --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/join.1 @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +.TH JOIN 1 +.CT 1 files +.SH NAME +join \(mi relational database operator +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B join +[ +.I options +] +.I file1 file2 +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Join +forms, on the standard output, +a join +of the two relations specified by the lines of +.I file1 +and +.IR file2 . +If one of the file names is +.LR - , +the standard input is used. +.PP +.I File1 +and +.I file2 +must be sorted in increasing +.SM ASCII +collating +sequence on the fields +on which they are to be joined, +normally the first in each line. +.PP +There is one line in the output +for each pair of lines in +.I file1 +and +.I file2 +that have identical join fields. +The output line normally consists of the common field, +then the rest of the line from +.IR file1 , +then the rest of the line from +.IR file2 . +.PP +Input fields are normally separated spaces or tabs; +output fields by space. +In this case, multiple separators count as one, and +leading separators are discarded. +.PP +The following options are recognized, with Posix syntax. +.TP +.BI -a " n +In addition to the normal output, +produce a line for each unpairable line in file +.IR n , +where +.I n +is 1 or 2. +.TP +.BI -v " n +Like +.BI -a , +omitting output for paired lines. +.TP +.BI -e " s +Replace empty output fields by string +.IR s . +.TP +.BI -1 " m +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI -2 " m +Join on the +.IR m th +field of +.I file1 +or +.I file2. +.TP +.BI -j "n m" +Archaic equivalent for +.BI - n " m. +.TP +.BI -o fields +Each output line comprises the designated fields. +The comma-separated field designators are either +.BR 0 , +meaning the join field, or have the form +.IR n . m , +where +.I n +is a file number and +.I m +is a field number. +Archaic usage allows separate arguments for field designators. +.PP +.TP +.BI -t c +Use character +.I c +as the only separator (tab character) on input and output. +Every appearance of +.I c +in a line is significant. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +sort /etc/password | join -t: -a 1 -e "" - bdays +Add birthdays to password information, leaving unknown +birthdays empty. +The layout of +.F /etc/passwd +is given in +.IR passwd (5); +.B bdays +contains sorted lines like +.LR "ken:Feb\ 4" . +.TP +.L +tr : ' ' temp +.br +.ns +.TP +.L +join -1 3 -2 3 -o 1.1,2.1 temp temp | awk '$1 < $2' +Print all pairs of users with identical userids. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR sort (1), +.IR comm (1), +.IR awk (1) +.SH BUGS +With default field separation, +the collating sequence is that of +.BI "sort -b" +.BI -k y , y, +with +.BR -t , +the sequence is that of +.BI "sort -t" x +.BI -k y , y. +.br +One of the files must be randomly accessible. + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/jx.1 b/static/v10/man1/jx.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..ab0ebc03 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/jx.1 @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH JX 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +jx \- 630 MTG execution and stdio interpreter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B jx +[\fB \-d \fR] [\fB \-p \fR] [\fB \-z \fR] [ \fB\-f\fR ] [ \fB\-Z\fR n ] [ \fB\-n\fR ] file +.br +[ command line arguments] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I jx +utility +downloads the program in +.I file +to the 630 MTG +and runs it there, simulating most of the standard I/O library +functions. +This gives application programs downloaded into the 630 MTG the ability +to perform operations such as file I/O to files resident on the host +computer, using the same interface as programs +written for execution on the host computer. +.PP +The jx utility calls +.I dmdld +to do the download into the terminal. Therefore, the +\f2-d\f1, \f2-p\f1, \f2-z\f1, \f2-f\f1, \f2-Z\f1, and \f2-n\f1 +options are available for use with \f2jx\f1. See the +.I dmdld(1) +manual page for information on these options. +.PP +\fIStdin\fR directed to the host portion of \f2jx\f1, either through the \f2jx\f1 +command line or with the \fIpopen\fR function, is properly redirected. +Note that input from the 630 MTG keyboard is not translated to \fIstdin\fR +to the host portion of \f2jx\f1. Rather, programs wishing to read from the +keyboard should use \fIkbdchar\fR(3R). +.PP +.I Stdout +and \fIstderr\fR, written to by the below library functions, +will be stored in a buffer during execution. +After the terminal program has +been rebooted, +.I stdout +and +.I stdin +will be redirected to the terminal. +.PP +Programs intended for use by +.I jx +should include \f3\f1 and <\f3dmdio.h\f1> +and call \fIexit\fR(3R) upon termination. \fIExit\fR() returns control to +the shell and causes a reboot of +the default terminal emulator. +.PP +What follows is a list of +stdio library functions available under \fIjx\fR. +These functions are called +from an application downloaded into the 630 MTG +by \f2jx\f1. The \f2jx\f1 library routines in the terminal then +translate the call into a message which is sent to the host portion +of \f2jx\f1 for processing. +.sp +.TS +center; +l l l l. +getc getchar fgets fflush +.sp +putc putchar puts fputs +.sp +fopen freopen fclose access +.sp +popen pclose fread fwrite +.sp +printf Printf fprintf Fprintf +.TE +.sp +The functions fprintf and printf are stripped down versions of +those on UNIX. The functions that start with an upper case +letter are identical to those on UNIX. See printf(3L) for more +details. +.bp +.SH FILES +.nf +$DMD/include/dmdio.h + +$DMD/lib/sysint host portion of \f2jx\f1 after download is complete + +$HOME/.jxout saved standard output + +$HOME/.jxerr saved standard diagnostic output +.fi +.SH SEE ALSO +dmdld(1), exit(3R), kbdchar(3R), printf(3L). +.br +access(2), +fopen(3S), +fread(3S), +getc(3S), +popen(3S), +printf(3S), +putc(3S), +puts(3S) in the +\f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference Manual\f1. +.SH WARNING +.P +Because 630 MTG keyboard data is not sent to the \f2stdin\f1 of the +host component of \f2jx\f1, applications running under \f2jx\f1 which read +from the \f2stdin\f1 will hang if their \f2stdin\f1 is not redirected. +.P +The \f2stdin\f1 can be redirected either from the command line or by +function calls inside the application process running on the +630 MTG terminal. +.SH BUGS +.I Jx +does not work when su'ed to another user. +.P +.I Jx +does not work in the nonlayers environment. +.P +\fIJx\fR does not work with application cached with +\fBA_SHARED\fR, \fBA_BSS\fR or \fBA_DATA\fR. +.P +\fIStderr\fR is buffered. Use fflush (stderr) if this is a +problem. +.P +\fIgetc(), getchar(), putc()\fR, and \fIputchar()\fR are not +macros as described in \fIgetc(3S)\fR and \fIputc(3S)\fR. +.P +The \fIfopen()\fR routine does not support the following +modes: r+, w+, a+. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/kill.1 b/static/v10/man1/kill.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df1c0cbe --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/kill.1 @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +.th KILL I 8/18/73 +.sh NAME +kill \*- do in an unwanted process +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd kill +processid ... +.sh DESCRIPTION +Kills the specified processes. +The processid of each asynchronous process +started with `&' is reported by the shell. +Processid's can also be found by using \fIps\fR (I). +.s3 +The killed process must have +been started from the same typewriter +as the current user, unless +he is the superuser. +.sh "SEE ALSO" +ps(I), sh(I) +.sh BUGS +Clearly people should only be allowed to kill +processes owned by them, and having the same typewriter +is neither necessary nor sufficient. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/kp.1 b/static/v10/man1/kp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58502a5b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/kp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +.TH KP 1 +.CT 1 proc_man sa_mortals +.SH NAME +kp \(mi kernel profiling +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B kp +[ +.B -t +.I duration +] +[ +.B -c +.I command +] +[ +- +.B fsx +] +[ +.I kernel +] +.PP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Kp +prints kernel profiling data. +If the +.B -t +option is specified +.I kp +uses data collected during a +sleep of the indicated duration +(in seconds). +If the +.B -c +option is specified +.I kp +uses data +collected while the indicated command is run +by +.IR system (3). +If neither option is specified +all profiling data since last boot is used; +it is illegal to specify both +.B -t +and +.B -c +options. +.LP +Profiling data consists of +(1) +clock-driven +.IR profil (2)-style +pc bucket counting +and +(2) +system call counts. +The bucket counts are reported resolved to the kernel source-file level +or the +external text symbol level, +according to whether the +.B -f +or +.B -x +options is given, respectively. +Raw unscaled bucket tick counts are given. +System call counts are reported if the +.B -s +option is specified. +Specifying none of +.B sfx +is equivalent to specifying them all: +the default treatment is to report ``the works.'' +.LP +Normally the namelist in +.B /unix +is believed, but this may be overruled by giving the filename +.I kernel +argument. +.LP +Since this program needs privileges to read +.FR /dev/kmem , +the +.B -c +option +is an invitation to horesmanship. +.SH FILES +.B /unix +.br +.B /dev/kmem +.SH BUGS +Not sorted. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ksh.1 b/static/v10/man1/ksh.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ed7ef3b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ksh.1 @@ -0,0 +1,3787 @@ +.ds OK [\| +.ds CK \|] +.ds ' \s+4\v@.3m@\'\v@-.3m@\s-4 +.ds ` \s+4\v@.3m@\`\v@-.3m@\s-4 +.de P +.br +.. +.TH KSH 1 +.SH NAME +ksh \- Korn shell, the not standard command programming language +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ksh +[ +.B \-acefhikmnorstuvx +] [ +.B \-o +option ] .\|.\|. +[ arg .\|.\|. ] +.br +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ksh\^ +is a command programming language +that executes commands read from a terminal +or a file. +.I Rsh\^ +is a restricted version of the standard command interpreter +.IR sh ; +it is used to set up login names and execution environments whose +capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. +See +.I Invocation\^ +below +for the meaning of arguments to the shell. +.SS Definitions. +A +.I metacharacter\^ +is one of the following characters: +.RS +.PP +\f3; & ( ) \(bv < > new-line space tab\fP +.RE +.PP +A +.I blank\^ +is a +.B tab +or a +.BR space . +An +.I identifier\^ +is a sequence of letters, digits, or underscores +starting with a letter or underscore. +Identifiers are used as names for +.IR aliases , +.IR functions , +and +.IR "named parameters" . +A +.I word\^ +is a sequence of +.I characters\^ +separated by one or more non-quoted +.IR metacharacters . +.SS Commands. +A +.I simple-command\^ +is a sequence of +.I blank\^ +separated words +which may be preceded by a parameter assignment list. +(See +.I Environment\^ +below). +The first word specifies the name of the command to +be executed. +Except as specified below, +the remaining words are passed as arguments +to the invoked command. +The command name is passed as argument 0 +(see +.IR exec (2)). +The +.I value\^ +of a simple-command is its exit status +if it terminates normally, or (octal) 200+\f2status\^\fP if +it terminates abnormally (see +.IR signal (2) +for a list of +status values). +.PP +A +.I pipeline\^ +is a sequence of one or more +.I commands\^ +separated by +.BR \(bv . +The standard output of each command but the last +is connected by a +.IR pipe (2) +to the standard input of the next command. +Each command is run as a separate process; +the shell waits for the last command to terminate. +The exit status of a pipeline is the exit +status of the last command. +.PP +A +.I list\^ +is a sequence of one or more +pipelines +separated by +.BR ; , +.BR & , +.BR && , +or +.BR \(bv\|\(bv , +and optionally terminated by +.BR ; , +.BR & , +or +.BR \(bv& . +Of these five symbols, +.BR ; , +.BR & , +and +.BR \(bv& +have equal precedence, +which is lower than that of +.B && +and +.BR \(bv\|\(bv . +The symbols +.B && +and +.B \(bv\|\(bv +also have equal precedence. +A semicolon +.RB ( ; ) +causes sequential execution of the preceding pipeline; an ampersand +.RB ( & ) +causes asynchronous execution of the preceding pipeline (i.e., the shell does +.I not\^ +wait for that pipeline to finish). +The symbol +.B \(bv& +causes asynchronous execution of the preceding command or pipeline +with a two-way pipe established to the parent shell. +The standard input and output of the spawned command +can be written to and read from by the parent Shell +using the +.B \-p +option of +the special commands +.B read +and +.B print\^ +described later. +Only one such command can be active +at any given time. +The symbol +.B && +.RB (\| \(bv\|\(bv \^) +causes the +.I list\^ +following it to be executed only if the preceding +pipeline +returns a zero (non-zero) value. +An arbitrary number of new-lines may appear in a +.I list,\^ +instead of semicolons, +to delimit commands. +.PP +A +.I command\^ +is either a simple-command +or one of the following. +Unless otherwise stated, +the value returned by a command is that of the +last simple-command executed in the command. +.TP +\f3for\fP \f2identifier\^\fP \*(OK \f3in\fP \f2word\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP +Each time a +.B for +command is executed, +.I identifier\^ +is set to the next +.I word\^ +taken from the +.B in +.I word\^ +list. +If +.BI in " word\^" +\&.\|.\|. +is omitted, then +the +.B for +command executes the \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP once for each positional parameter +that is set +(see +.I "Parameter Substitution\^" +below). +Execution ends when there are no more words in the list. +.TP +\f3select\fP \f2identifier\^\fP \*(OK \f3in\fP \f2word\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP +A +.B select +command prints on standard error (file descriptor 2), the set of +.IR word s, +each preceded by a number. +If +.BI in " word\^" +\&.\|.\|. +is omitted, then +the +positional parameters +are used instead +(see +.I "Parameter Substitution\^" +below). +The +.SM +.B PS3 +prompt is printed +and a line is read from the standard input. +If this line consists of the number +of one of the listed +.BR word s, +then the value of the parameter +.I identifier\^ +is set to the +.I word\^ +corresponding to this number. +If this line is empty the selection list is +printed again. +Otherwise the value of the parameter +.I identifier\^ +is set to +.BR null . +The contents of the line read from standard input is +saved in +the parameter +.SM +.BR REPLY. +The +.I list\^ +is executed for each selection until a +.B break\^ +or +.I end-of-file\^ +is encountered. +.TP +\f3case\fP \f2word\^\fP \f3in\fP \*(OK \f2pattern\^\fP \*(OK \(bv \ +\f2pattern\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3)\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;;\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3esac\fP +A +.B case +command executes the +.I list\^ +associated with the first +.I pattern\^ +that matches +.IR word . +The form of the patterns is +the same as that used for +file-name generation (see +.I "File Name Generation\^" +below). +.TP +\f3if\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(OK \ +\f3elif\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \ +\*(OK \f3else\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK \f3f\&i\fP +The +.I list\^ +following \f3if\fP is executed and, +if it +returns a zero exit status, the +.I list\^ +following +the first +.B then +is executed. +Otherwise, the +.I list\^ +following \f3elif\fP +is executed and, if its value is zero, +the +.I list\^ +following +the next +.B then +is executed. +Failing that, the +.B else +.I list\^ +is executed. +If no +.B else +.I list\^ +or +.B then +.I list\^ +is executed, then the +.B if +command returns a zero exit status. +.TP +.PD 0 +\f3while\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP +.TP +\f3until\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP +.PD +A +.B while +command repeatedly executes the +.B while +.I list\^ +and, if the exit status of the last command in the list is zero, executes +the +.B do +.IR list ; +otherwise the loop terminates. +If no commands in the +.B do +.I list\^ +are executed, then the +.B while +command returns a zero exit status; +.B until +may be used in place of +.B while +to negate +the loop termination test. +.TP +\f3(\fP\f2list\^\fP\f3)\fP +.br +Execute +.I list\^ +in a separate environment. +Note, that if two adjacent open parentheses are +needed for nesting, a space must be inserted to avoid +arithmetic evaluation as described below. +.TP +\f3{ \fP\f2list\^\fP\f3;}\fP +.br +.I list\^ +is simply executed. +Note that +.B { +is a +.I keyword\^ +and requires a blank +in order to be recognized. +.TP +.PD 0 +\f3function\fP \f2identifier\^\fP \f3{\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;}\fP +.TP +\f2identifier\^\fP \f3() {\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;}\fP +.PD +Define a function which is referenced by +.IR identifier . +The body of the function is the +.I list\^ +of commands between +.B { +and +.BR } . +(See +.I Functions\^ +below). +.TP +\f3time \fP\f2pipeline\^\fP +.br +The +.I pipeline\^ +is executed and the elapsed time as well as +the user and system time are printed on standard error. +.PP +The following keywords +are only recognized as the first word of a command +and when not quoted: +.if t .RS +.PP +.B +.if n if then else elif fi case esac for while until do done { } function select time +.if t if then else elif fi case esac for while until do done { } function select time +.if t .RE +.SS Comments. +A word beginning with +.B # +causes that word and all the following characters up to a new-line +to be ignored. +.SS Aliasing. +The first word of each command is replaced by the text of an +.B alias +if an +.B alias +for this word has been defined. +The +first character of an +.B alias +name can be any printable character, +but the rest of the characters +must be the same as for a valid +.IR identifier . +The replacement string can contain any +valid Shell script +including the metacharacters listed above. +The first word of each command of the +replaced text will not be tested for additional aliases. +If the last character of the alias value is a +.I blank\^ +then the word following the alias will also be checked for alias +substitution. +Aliases can be used to redefine special +builtin commands but cannot be used to redefine +the keywords listed above. +Aliases can be created, listed, and exported with the +.B alias +command and can be removed with the +.B unalias +command. +Exported aliases remain in effect for sub-shells +but must be reinitialized for separate invocations +of the Shell (See +.I Invocation\^ +below). +.PP +.I Aliasing\^ +is performed when +scripts are read, +not while they are executed. +Therefore, +for an alias to take effect +the +.B +alias +command has to be executed before +the command which references the alias is read. +.PP +Aliases are frequently used as a short hand for full path +names. +An option to the aliasing facility allows the value of the alias +to be automatically set to the full pathname of +the corresponding command. +These aliases are called +.I tracked +aliases. +The value of a +.I tracked +alias is defined the first time the identifier +is read and becomes undefined each time +the +.SM +.B PATH +variable is reset. +These aliases remain +.I tracked +so that the next +subsequent reference will redefine the value. +Several tracked aliases are compiled into the shell. +The +.B \-h +option of the +.B set +command makes each command name which is an +.I identifier\^ +into a tracked alias. +.PP +The following +.I exported aliases +are compiled into the shell +but can be unset or redefined: +.RS 20 +.PD 0 +.TP +.B "echo=\(fmprint \-\(fm" +.TP +.B "false=\(fmlet 0\(fm" +.TP +.B "functions=\(fmtypeset \-f\(fm" +.TP +.B "history=\(fmfc \-l\(fm" +.TP +.B "integer=\(fmtypeset \-i\(fm" +.TP +.B "nohup=\(fmnohup \(fm" +.TP +.B "pwd=\(fmprint \- $\s-1PWD\s+1\(fm" +.TP +.B "r=\(fmfc \-e \-\(fm" +.TP +.B "true=\(fm:\(fm" +.TP +.B "type=\(fmwhence \-v\(fm" +.TP +.B "hash=\(fmalias \-t\(fm" +.PD +.RE +.SS Tilde Substitution. +After alias substitution is performed, each word +is checked to see if it begins with an unquoted +.BR \(ap . +If it does, then the word up to a +.B / +is checked to see if it matches a user name in the +.B /etc/passwd +file. +If a match is found, the +.B \(ap +and the matched login name is replaced by the +login directory of the matched user. +This is called a +.I tilde +substitution. +If no match is found, the original text is left unchanged. +A +.B \(ap +by itself, or in front of a +.BR / , +is replaced by the value of the +.B +.SM HOME +parameter. +A +.B \(ap +followed by a +.B + +or +.B \- +is replaced by the value of +the parameter +.B +.SM PWD +and +.B +.SM OLDPWD +respectively. +.PP +In addition, the value of each +.I "keyword parameter" +is checked to see if it begins with a +.B \(ap +or if a +.B \(ap +appears after a +.BR : . +In either of these cases a +.I tilde +substitution is attempted. +.SS Command Substitution. +The standard output from a command enclosed in +a pair of grave accents (\^\f3\*`\^\*`\fP\^) may be used as part or all +of a word; +trailing new-lines are removed. +The command substitution +\^\f3\*`\^cat file\^\*`\fP\^ +can be replaced by the equivalent but faster +\^\f3\*`\^ \|" ''. +.TP +.SM +.B PS3 +Selection prompt string +used within a +.B select +loop, by default +.RB `` "#? \|" ''. +.TP +.SM +.B SHELL +The pathname of the +.I shell\^ +is kept in the environment. +At invocation, if the value of this variable contains an +.B r +in the basename, +then the shell becomes restricted. +.TP +.B +.SM TMOUT +If set to a value greater than zero, +the shell will terminate if a command is not entered within +the prescribed number of seconds. +(Note that the shell can be compiled with a maximum bound +for this value which cannot be exceeded.) +.TP +.B +.SM VISUAL +If the value of this variable ends in +.IR emacs , +.IR gmacs , +or +.I vi +then the corresponding option +(see Special Command +.B set +below) +will be turned on. +.PD +.RE +.PP +The shell gives default values to +\f3\s-1PATH\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS1\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS2\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1MAILCHECK\s+1\fP, +\f3\s-1TMOUT\s+1\fP and \f3\s-1IFS\s+1\fP, +while +.SM +.BR HOME , +.SM +.B SHELL +.SM +.B ENV +and +.SM +.B MAIL +are +not set at all by the shell (although +.SM +.B HOME +.I is\^ +set by +.IR login (1)). +On some systems +.SM +.B MAIL +and +.SM +.B SHELL +are also +set by +.IR login (1)). +.SS Blank Interpretation. +After parameter and command substitution, +the results of substitutions are scanned for the field separator +characters ( +those found in +.SM +.B IFS +) +and split into distinct arguments where such characters are found. +Explicit null arguments (\^\f3"\^"\fP or \f3\*\(fm\^\*\(fm\fP\^) are retained. +Implicit null arguments +(those resulting from +.I parameters\^ +that have no values) are removed. +.SS File Name Generation. +Following substitution, each command +.I word\^ +is scanned for +the characters +.BR \(** , +.BR ? , +and +.B \*(OK\^ +unless the +.B \-f +option has been +.BR set . +If one of these characters appears +then the word is regarded as a +.IR pattern . +The word is replaced with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pattern. +If no file name is found that matches the pattern, then +the word is left unchanged. +When a +.I pattern\^ +is used for file name generation, +the character +.B . +at the start of a file name +or immediately following a +.BR / , +as well as the character +.B / +itself, +must be matched explicitly. +In other instances of pattern matching the +.B / +and +.B . +are not treated specially. +.PP +.PD 0 +.RS +.TP +.B \(** +Matches any string, including the null string. +.TP +.B ? +Matches any single character. +.TP +.BR \*(OK \^.\|.\|.\^ \*(CK +Matches any one of the enclosed characters. +A pair of characters separated by +.B \- +matches any +character lexically between the pair, inclusive. +If the first character following the opening "[ \|" +is a "! \|" then any character not enclosed is matched. +A +.B \- +can be included in the character set by putting it as the +first or last character. +.PD +.RE +.SS Quoting. +Each of the +.I metacharacters\^ +listed above (See +.I Definitions +above). +has a special meaning to the shell +and cause termination of a word unless quoted. +A character may be +.I quoted\^ +(i.e., made to stand for itself) +by preceding +it with a +.BR \e . +The pair +.B \enew-line +is ignored. +All characters enclosed between a pair of single quote marks (\^\f3\(fm\^\(fm\fP\^), +except a single quote, +are quoted. +Inside double quote marks +(\f3"\^"\fP), +parameter and command substitution occurs and +.B \e +quotes the characters +.BR \e , +.BR \(fm , +\f3"\fP, +and +.BR $ . +.B +"$\(**" +is equivalent to +\f3"$1 \|$2\fP \|.\|.\|.\f3"\fP, +whereas +.B +"$@" +is equivalent to +.B +"$1"\| +.B +"$2"\| +\&.\|.\|.\^. +.PP +The special meaning of keywords can be removed by quoting any +character of the keyword. +The recognition of special command names listed below cannot be altered +by quoting them. +.SS Arithmetic Evaluation. +An ability to perform integer arithmetic +is provided with the special command +.BR let . +Evaluations are performed using +.I long\^ +arithmetic. +Constants are of the form +\*(OK\f2base\f3#\^\f1\*(CK\f2n\^\fP +where +.I base\^ +is a decimal number between two and thirty-six +representing the arithmetic base +and +.I n\^ +is a number in that base. +If +.I base\^ +is omitted +then base 10 is used. +.PP +An internal integer representation of a +.I named parameter\^ +can be specified with the +.B \-i +option of the +.B typeset +special command. +When this attribute is selected +the first assignment to the +parameter determines the arithmetic base +to be used when +parameter substitution occurs. +.PP +Since many of the arithmetic operators require +quoting, an alternative form of the +.B let +command is provided. +For any command which begins with a +.BR (( , +all the characters until a matching +.B )) +are treated as a quoted expression. +More precisely, +.B (( +\&.\|.\|. +.B )) +is equivalent to +.B let\^ +\f3"\fP \|.\|.\|.\f3"\fP. +.SS Prompting. +When used interactively, +the shell prompts with the value of +.SM +.B PS1 +before reading a command. +If at any time a new-line is typed and further input is needed +to complete a command, then the secondary prompt +(i.e., the value of +.BR \s-1PS2\s+1 ) +is issued. +.SS Input/Output. +Before a command is executed, its input and output +may be redirected using a special notation interpreted by the shell. +The following may appear anywhere in a simple-command +or may precede or follow a +.I command\^ +and are +.I not\^ +passed on to the invoked command. +Command and parameter substitution occurs before +.I word\^ +or +.I digit\^ +is used except as noted below. +File name generation +occurs only if the pattern matches a single file +and blank interpretation is not performed. +.TP 14 +.BI < word +Use file +.I word\^ +as standard input (file descriptor 0). +.TP +.BI > word +Use file +.I word\^ +as standard output (file descriptor 1). +If the file does not exist then it is created; +otherwise, it is truncated to zero length. +.TP +.BI >\h@-.3m@> word +Use file +.I word\^ +as standard output. +If the file exists then output is appended to it (by first seeking to the end-of-file); +otherwise, the file is created. +.TP +\f3<\h@-.3m@<\fP\*(OK\f3\-\fP\*(CK\f2word\fP +The shell input is read up to a line that is the same as +.IR word , +or to an end-of-file. +No parameter substitution, command substitution or +file name generation is performed on +.IR word . +The resulting document, +called a +.IR here-document , +becomes +the standard input. +If any character of +.I word\^ +is quoted, then no interpretation +is placed upon the characters of the document; +otherwise, parameter and command substitution occurs, +.B \enew-line +is ignored, +and +.B \e +must be used to quote the characters +.BR \e , +.BR $ , +.BR \*` , +and the first character of +.IR word . +If +.B \- +is appended to +.BR <\h@-.3m@< , +then all leading tabs are stripped from +.I word\^ +and from the document. +.TP +.BI <& digit +The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor +.I digit +(see +.IR dup (2)). +Similarly for the standard output using +.BR >& +.IR digit . +.TP +.B <&\- +The standard input is closed. +Similarly for the standard output using +.BR >&\- . +.PP +If one of the above is preceded by a digit, +then the +file descriptor number referred to is that specified +by the digit +(instead of the default 0 or 1). +For example: +.RS +.PP +\&.\|.\|. \|2>&1 +.RE +.PP +means file descriptor 2 is to be opened +for writing as a duplicate +of file descriptor 1. +.PP +The order in which redirections are specified is significant. +The shell evaluates each redirection in terms of the +.RI ( "file descriptor" ", " file ) +association at the time of evaluation. +For example: +.RS +.PP +\&.\|.\|. \|1>\f2fname\^\fP 2>&1 +.RE +.PP +first associates file descriptor 1 with file +.IR fname\^ . +It then associates file descriptor 2 with the file associated with file +descriptor 1 (i.e. +.IR fname\^ ). +If the order of redirections were reversed, file descriptor 2 would be associated +with the terminal (assuming file descriptor 1 had been) and then file descriptor +1 would be associated with file +.IR fname\^ . +.PP +If a command is followed by +.B & +and job control is not active, +then the default standard input +for the command +is the empty file +.BR /dev/null . +Otherwise, the environment for the execution of a command contains the +file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by +input/output specifications. +.SS Environment. +The +.I environment\^ +(see +.IR environ (7)) +is a list of name-value pairs that is passed to +an executed program in the same way as a normal argument list. +The names must be +.I identifiers\^ +and the values are character strings. +The shell interacts with the environment in several ways. +On invocation, the shell scans the environment +and creates a +parameter +for each name found, +giving it the corresponding value and marking it +.I export . +Executed commands inherit the environment. +If the user modifies the values of these +parameters +or creates new ones, +using the +.B export +or +.B typeset \-x +commands they become part of the +environment. +The environment seen by any executed command is thus composed +of any name-value pairs originally inherited by the shell, +whose values may be modified by the current shell, +plus any additions +which must be noted in +.B export +or +.B typeset \-x +commands. +.PP +The environment for any +.I simple-command\^ +or function +may be augmented by prefixing it with one or more parameter assignments. +A parameter assignment argument is a word of the form +.IR identifier=value . +Thus: +.RS +.PP +\s-1TERM\s+1=450 \|cmd \|args and +.br +(export \|\s-1TERM\s+1; \|\s-1TERM\s+1=450; \|cmd \|args) +.RE +.PP +are equivalent (as far as the above execution of +.I cmd\^ +is concerned). +.PP +If the +.B \-k +flag is set, +.I all\^ +parameter assignment arguments are placed in the environment, +even if they occur after the command name. +The following +first prints +.B "a=b c" +and then +.BR c: +.PP +.RS +.nf +echo \|a=b \|c +set \|\-k +echo \|a=b \|c +.fi +.RE +.SS Functions. +.PP +The +.B function\^ +keyword, described in the +.I Commands +section above, +is used to define shell functions. +Shell functions are read in and stored internally. +Alias names are resolved when the function is read. +Functions are executed like commands with the arguments +passed as positional parameters. +(See +.I Execution +below). +.PP +Functions execute in the same process as the caller and +share all files, traps ( other than +.SM +.B EXIT +and +.SM +.BR ERR ) +and present working directory with the +caller. +A trap set on +.SM +.B EXIT +inside a function +is executed after the function completes. +Ordinarily, +variables are shared between the calling program +and the function. +However, +the +.B typeset +special command used within a function +defines local variables whose scope includes +the current function and +all functions it calls. +.PP +The special command +.B return +is used to return +from function calls. +Errors within functions return control to the caller. +.PP +Function identifiers +can be listed with the +.B \-f +option of the +.B typeset +special command. +The text of functions will also +be listed. +Function can be undefined with the +.B \-f +option of the +.B unset +special command. +.PP +Ordinarily, +functions are unset when the shell executes a shell script. +The +.B \-xf +option of the +.B typeset +command allows a function to be exported +to scripts that are executed without a separate +invocation of the shell. +Functions that need to be defined across separate +invocations of the shell should be placed in the +.B +.SM +ENV +file. +.SS Jobs. +.PP +If the +.B monitor +option of the +.B set +command is turned on, +an interactive shell associates a \fIjob\fR with each pipeline. It keeps +a table of current jobs, printed by the +.B jobs +command, and assigns them small integer numbers. When +a job is started asynchronously with +.BR & , +the shell prints a line which looks +like: +.PP +.DT + [1] 1234 +.PP +indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was job number +1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process id was 1234. +.PP +This paragraph and the next require features that are +not in all versions of UNIX and may not apply. +If you are running a job and wish to do something else you may hit the key +\fB^Z\fR (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to the current job. +The shell will then normally indicate that the job has been `Stopped', +and print another prompt. You can then manipulate the state of this job, +putting it in the background with the +.B bg +command, or run some other +commands and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground with +the foreground command +.BR fg . +A \fB^Z\fR takes effect immediately and +is like an interrupt in that pending output and unread input are discarded +when it is typed. +.PP +A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to read +from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, +but this can be disabled by giving the command ``stty tostop''. +If you set this +tty option, then background jobs will stop when they try to produce +output like they do when they try to read input. +.PP +There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The character +.B % +introduces a job name. If you wish to refer to job number 1, you can +name it as +.B %1 . +Jobs can also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to +.B kill +or restart them. +Thus, on systems that support job control, +.RB ` fg +.BR %ed ' +would normally restart +a suspended +.IR ed (1) +job, if there were a suspended job whose name began with +the string `ed'. +.PP +The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. +In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is marked with a +.B + +and the previous job with a +.BR \- . +The abbreviation +.B %+ +refers +to the current job and +.B %\- +refers to the previous job. +.B %% +is also a synonym for the current job. +.PP +This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes state. +It normally informs you whenever a job becomes blocked so that +no further progress is possible, but only just before it prints +a prompt. This is done so that it does not otherwise disturb your work. +.PP +When you try to leave the shell while jobs are running or stopped, you will +be warned that `You have stopped(running) jobs.' You may use the +.B jobs +command to see what they are. If you do this or immediately try to +exit again, the shell will not warn you a second time, and the stopped +jobs will be terminated. +.SS Signals. +The \s-1INT\s+1 and \s-1QUIT\s+1 signals for an invoked +command are ignored if the command is followed by +.B & +and job +.B monitor +option is not active. +Otherwise, signals have the values +inherited by the shell from its parent, +with the exception of signal 11 +(but see also +the +.B trap +command below). +.SS Execution. +Each time a command is executed, the above substitutions +are carried out. +If the command name matches one +of the +.I "Special Commands\^" +listed below, +it is executed within the +current shell process. +Next, the command name is checked to see if +it matches one of the user defined functions. +If it does, +the positional parameters are saved +and then reset to the arguments of the +.I function\^ +call. +When the +.I function\^ +completes or issues a +.BR return , +the positional parameter list is restored +and any trap set on +.SM +.B EXIT +within the function is executed. +The value of a +.I function\^ +is the value of the last command executed. +A function is also executed in the +current shell process. +If a command name is not a +.I "special command\^" +or a user defined +.IR function , +a process is created and +an attempt is made to execute the command via +.IR exec (2). +.PP +The shell parameter +.B +.SM PATH +defines the search path for +the directory containing the command. +Alternative directory names are separated by +a colon +.RB ( : ). +The default path is +.B :/bin:/usr/bin +(specifying the current directory, +.BR /bin , +and +.BR /usr/bin , +in that order). +Note that the current directory +is specified by a null path name, +which can appear immediately after the +equal sign, between colon delimiters, +or at the end of the path list. +If the command name contains a \f3/\fP then the search path +is not used. +Otherwise, each directory in the path is +searched for an executable file. +If the file has execute permission but is not a +directory or an +.B a.out +file, +it is assumed to be a file containing shell commands. +A sub-shell is spawned to read it. +All non-exported aliases, +functions, +and named parameters are removed in this case. +A parenthesized command is also executed in +a sub-shell. +.SS Command Re-entry. +The text of the last +.B +.SM +HISTSIZE +(default 128) +commands entered from a terminal device +is saved in a +.I history +file. +The file +.B \s-1$HOME\s+1/.history +is used if the +.B +.SM +HISTFILE +variable is not set +or is not writable. +A shell can access the commands of +all +.I interactive +shells which use the same named +.SM +.BR HISTFILE . +The special command +.B fc\^ +is used to list or +edit a portion this file. +The portion of the file to be edited or listed can be selected by +number or by giving the first character or +characters of the command. +A single command or range of commands can be specified. +If you do not specify an editor program as +an argument to +.B fc\^ +then the value of the parameter +.SM +.B FCEDIT +is used. +If +.SM +.B FCEDIT +is not defined then +.I /bin/ed +is used. +The edited command(s) is printed and re-executed upon +leaving the editor. +The editor name +.B \- +is used to skip the editing phase and +to re-execute the command. +In this case a substitution parameter of the form +\f2old\fP\f3=\fP\f2new\fP +can be used to modify the command before execution. +For example, if +.B r +is aliased to +.B \(fmfc \-e \-\(fm +then typing +`\f3r bad=good c\fP' +will re-execute the most recent command which starts with the letter +.BR c , +replacing the string +.B bad +with the string +.BR good . +.SS In-line Editing Options +Normally, each command line entered from a terminal device is simply +typed followed by a new-line (`RETURN' or `LINE\ FEED'). +If either the +.IR emacs , +.IR gmacs , +or +.I vi +option is active, the user can edit the command line. +To be in either of these edit modes +.B set +the corresponding +option. +An editing option is automatically selected each time the +.SM +.B VISUAL +or +.SM +.B EDITOR +variable is assigned a value ending in either of these +option names. +.PP +The editing features require that the user's terminal +accept `RETURN' as carriage return without line feed +and that a space (`\ ' must overwrite the current character on +the screen. +ADM terminal users should set the "space\ -\ advance" +switch to `space'. +Hewlett-Packard series 2621 terminal users should set the straps to +`bcGHxZ\ etX'. +.PP +The editing modes implement a concept where the user is looking through a +window at the current line. +The window width is the value of +.SM +.B COLUMNS +if it is defined, otherwise 80. +If the line is longer than the window width minus two, a mark is +displayed at the end of the window to notify the user. +As the cursor moves and reaches the window boundaries the window will be +centered about the cursor. +The mark is a +.BR > " (" +.BR < ", " +.BR * ) +if the line extends on the +right (left, both) side(s) of the window. +.SS Emacs Editing Mode +This mode is entered by enabling either the +.I emacs +or +.I gmacs +option. +The only difference between these two modes is the way +they handle +.BR ^T . +To edit, the user +moves the cursor to the point needing correction and +then inserts or deletes characters or words as needed. +All the editing commands are control characters or escape +sequences. +The notation for control characters is caret ( +.B ^ +) followed +by the character. +For example, +.B ^F +is the notation for control +.BR F . +This is entered by depressing `f' while holding down the +`CTRL' (control) key. +The `SHIFT' key is +.I not +depressed. +(The notation +.B ^? +indicates the DEL (delete) key.) +.PP +The notation for escape sequences is +.B M- +followed by a +character. +For example, +.B M-f +(pronounced Meta f) +is entered by depressing ESC +(ascii +.B 033 +) +followed by `f'. +( +.B M-F +would be the notation for ESC followed by `SHIFT' (capital) `F'.) +.PP +All edit commands +operate from any place on the line +(not just at the beginning). +Neither the "RETURN" nor the "LINE FEED" key is +entered after edit commands except when noted. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP 10 +.BI ^F +Move cursor forward (right) one character. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-f +Move cursor forward one word. +(The editor's idea of a word is a string of characters +consisting of only letters, digits and underscores.) +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^B +Move cursor backward (left) one character. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-b +Move cursor backward one word. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^A +Move cursor to start of line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^E +Move cursor to end of line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^] char +Move cursor to character +.I char +on current line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^X^X +Interchange the cursor and mark. +.PP +.TP 10 +.I erase +(User defined erase character as defined +by the stty command, usually +.B ^H +or +.BR # .) +Delete previous character. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^D +Delete current character. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-d +Delete current word. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-^H +(Meta-backspace) Delete previous word. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-h +Delete previous word. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-^? +(Meta-DEL) Delete previous word (if your interrupt character is +.B ^? +(DEL, the default) then this command will not work). +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^T +Transpose current character with next character in +.I emacs +mode. +Transpose two previous characters in +.I gmacs +mode. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^C +Capitalize current character. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-C +Capitalize current word. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^K +Kill from the cursor to the end of the line. +If given a parameter of zero then kill from +the start of line to the cursor. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^W +Kill from the cursor to the mark. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-p +Push the region from the cursor to the mark on the stack. +.PP +.TP 10 +.I kill +(User defined kill character as defined +by the stty command, usually +.B ^G +or +.BR @ .) +Kill the entire current line. +If two +.I kill +characters are entered in succession, all +kill characters from then on cause a line feed +(useful when using paper terminals). +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^Y +Restore last item removed from line. (Yank item back to the line.) +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^L +Line feed and print current line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^@ +(Null character) Set mark. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M- +(Meta space) Set mark. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^J +(New\ line) Execute the current line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^M +(Return) Execute the current line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.I eof +End-of-file character, +normally +.BR ^D , +will terminate the shell +if the current line is null. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^P +Fetch previous command. +Each time +.B ^P +is entered +the previous command back in time is accessed. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-< +Fetch the least recent (oldest) history line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M-> +Fetch the most recent (youngest) history line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^N +Fetch next command. +Each time +.B ^N +is entered +the next command forward in time is accessed. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^R string +Reverse search history for a previous command line containing +.IR string . +If a parameter of zero is given the search is forward. +.I String +is terminated by a "RETURN" or "NEW\ LINE". +.PP +.TP 10 +.B ^O +Operate \- Execute the current line and fetch +the next line relative to current line from the +history file. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M- digits +(Escape) Define numeric parameter, the digits +are taken as a parameter to the next command. +The commands that accept a parameter are +.BR ^F , +.BR ^B , +.IR erase , +.BR ^D , +.BR ^K , +.BR ^R , +.B ^P +and +.BR ^N . +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI M- letter +Soft-key \- Your alias list is searched for an +alias by the name +.BI _ letter +and if an alias of this name is defined, its +value will be inserted on the line. +The +.I letter +must not be one of the above meta-functions. +.PP +.TP 10 +.B M-_ +The last parameter of the previous command is inserted +on the line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.B M-. +The last parameter of the previous command is inserted +on the line. +.PP +.TP 10 +.B M-* +Attempt file name generation on the current word. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^U +Multiply parameter of next command by 4. +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI \e +Escape next character. +Editing characters, the user's erase, kill and +interrupt (normally +.B ^? +) +characters +may be entered +in a command line or in a search string if preceded by a +.BR \e . +The +.B \e +removes the next character's +editing features (if any). +.PP +.TP 10 +.BI ^V +Display version of the shell. +.PD +.SS Vi Editing Mode +There are two typing modes. +Initially, when you enter a command you are in the +.I input\^ +mode. +To edit, the user enters +.I control\^ +mode by typing ESC ( +.B 033 +) and +moves the cursor to the point needing correction and +then inserts or deletes characters or words as needed. +Most control commands accept an optional repeat +.I count +prior to the command. +.P +When in vi mode on most systems, +canonical processing is initially enabled and the +command will be echoed again if the speed is 1200 baud or greater and it +contains any control characters or less than one second has elapsed +since the prompt was printed. +The ESC character terminates canonical processing for the remainder of the command +and the user can than modify the command line. +This scheme has the advantages of canonical processing with the type-ahead +echoing of raw mode. +.P +If the option +.B viraw\^ +is also set, the terminal will always have canonical processing +disabled. This mode is implicit for systems that do not support two +alternate end of line delimiters, +and may be helpful for certain terminals. +.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Input Edit Commands" +.PP +.RS +By default the editor is in input mode. +.PD 0 +.TP 10 +.I erase +(User defined erase character as defined +by the stty command, usually +.B ^H +or +.BR # .) +Delete previous character. +.TP 10 +.BI ^W +Delete the previous blank separated word. +.TP 10 +.BI ^D +Terminate the shell. +.TP 10 +.BI ^V +Escape next character. +Editing characters, the user's erase or kill +characters may be entered +in a command line or in a search string if preceded by a +.BR ^V . +The +.B ^V +removes the next character's +editing features (if any). +.TP 10 +.BI \e +Escape the next +.I erase +or +.I kill +character. +.P +.RE +.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Motion Edit Commands" +.RS +These commands will move the cursor. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3l\fP +Cursor forward (right) one character. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3w\fP +Cursor forward one alpha-numeric word. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3W\fP +Cursor to the beginning of the next word that follows a blank. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3e\fP +Cursor to end of word. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3E\fP +Cursor to end of the current blank delimited word. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3h\fP +Cursor backward (left) one character. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3b\fP +Cursor backward one word. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3B\fP +Cursor to preceding blank separated word. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3f\fP\f2c\fP +Find the next character \fIc\fP in the current line. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3F\fP\f2c\fP +Find the previous character \fIc\fP in the current line. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3t\fP\f2c\fP +Equivalent to +.B f +followed by +.BR h . +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3T\fP\f2c\fP +Equivalent to +.B F +followed by +.BR l . +.TP 10 +.B ; +Repeats the last single character find command, +.BR f , +.BR F , +.BR t , +or +.BR T . +.TP 10 +.B , +Reverses the last single character find command. +.TP 10 +.B 0 +Cursor to start of line. +.TP 10 +.B ^ +Cursor to first non-blank character in line. +.TP 10 +.B $ +Cursor to end of line. +.RE +.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Search Edit Commands" +.RS +These commands access your command history. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3k\fP +Fetch previous command. +Each time +.B k +is entered +the previous command back in time is accessed. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3\-\fP +Equivalent to +.BR k . +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3j\fP +Fetch next command. +Each time +.B j +is entered +the next command forward in time is accessed. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3+\fP +Equivalent to +.BR j . +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3G\fP +The command number +.I count +is fetched. +The default is the least recent history command. +.TP 10 +.BI / string +Search backward through history for a previous command containing +.IR string . +.I String +is terminated by a "RETURN" or "NEW\ LINE". +If \fIstring\fP is null the previous string will be used. +.TP 10 +.BI ? string +Same as +.B / +except that search will be in the forward direction. +.TP 10 +.B n +Search for next match of the last pattern to +.B / +or +.B ? +commands. +.TP 10 +.B N +Search for next match of the last pattern to +.B / +or +.BR ? , +but in reverse direction. +Search history for the \fIstring\fP entered by the previous \fB/\fP command. +.RE +.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Text Modification Edit Commands" +.RS +These commands will modify the line. +.TP 10 +.B a +Enter input mode and enter text after the current character. +.TP 10 +.B A +Append text to the end of the line. Equivalent to +.BR $a . +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3c\fP\f2motion\fP +.TP 10 +\f3c\fP[\f2count\fP]\f2motion\fP +Delete current character through the character +.I motion +moves the cursor to and enter input mode. +If \fImotion\fP is +.BR c , +the entire line will be deleted and +input mode entered. +.TP 10 +.B C +Delete the current character through the end of line and enter input mode. +Equivalent to +.BR c$ . +.TP 10 +.B S +Equivalent to +.BR cc . +.TP 10 +.B D +Delete the current character through the end of line. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3d\fP\f2motion\fP +.TP 10 +\f3d\fP[\f2count\fP]\f2motion\fP +Delete current character through the character +.I motion +moves the cursor to. Equivalent to +.BR d$ . +If \fImotion\fP is +.B d , +the entire line will be deleted. +.TP 10 +.B i +Enter input mode and insert text before the current character. +.TP 10 +.B I +Insert text before the beginning of the line. Equivalent to +the two character sequence +.BR ^i . +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3P\fP +Place the previous text modification before the cursor. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3p\fP +Place the previous text modification after the cursor. +.TP 10 +.B R +Enter input mode and +replace characters on the screen with characters you type overlay fashion. +.TP 10 +.BI r c +Replace the current character with +.IR c . +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3x\fP +Delete current character. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3X\fP +Delete preceding character. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3.\fP +Repeat the previous text modification command. +.TP 10 +.B \(ap +Invert the case of the current character and advance the cursor. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3_\fP +Causes the +.I count\^ +word of the previous command to be appended and +input mode entered. +The last word is used +if +.I count\^ +is omitted. +.TP 10 +.B * +Causes an +.B * +to be appended to the current word and file name generation attempted. +If no match is found, +it rings the bell. Otherwise, the word is replaced +by the matching pattern and input mode is entered. +.RE +.SS "\ \ \ \ \ Other Edit Commands" +.RS +Miscellaneous commands. +.TP 10 +.B u +Undo the last text modifying command. +.TP 10 +.B U +Undo all the text modifying commands performed on the line. +.TP 10 +[\f2count\fP]\f3v\fP +Returns the command +.BI "fc \-e ${\s-1VISUAL\s+1:\-${\s-1EDITOR\s+1:\-vi}}" " count" +in the input buffer. +If +.I count\^ +is omitted, then the current line is used. +.TP 10 +.BI ^L +Line feed and print current line. +Has effect only in control mode. +.TP 10 +.BI ^J +(New\ line) Execute the current line, regardless of mode. +.TP 10 +.BI ^M +(Return) Execute the current line, regardless of mode. +.TP 10 +.B \# +Equivalent to +\f3I#\fP\f2\fP. +Useful for causing the current line to be +inserted in the history without being executed. +.RE +.PD +.SS Special Commands. +The following simple-commands are executed in the shell process. +Input/Output redirection is permitted. +File descriptor 1 is the default output location. +Parameter assignment lists preceding the command do not +remain in effect when the command completes unless noted. +.TP +\f3:\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. +The command only expands parameters. +A zero exit code is returned. +.br +.ne 2 +.TP +\f3\|. \f2file\^\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. +Read and execute commands from +.I file\^ +and return. +The commands are executed in the current Shell environment. +The search path +specified by +.B +.SM PATH +is used to find the directory containing +.IR file . +If any arguments +.I arg\^ +are given, +they become the positional parameters. +Otherwise the positional parameters are unchanged. +.TP +\f3alias\fP \*(OK \f3\-tx\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\fP\*(OK \f2=value\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \*(CK +.I Alias\^ +with no arguments prints the list of aliases +in the form +.I name=value\^ +on standard output. +An +.I alias\^ +is defined +for each name whose +.I value\^ +is given. +A trailing space in +.I value\^ +causes the next word to be checked for +alias substitution. +The +.B \-t +flag is used to set and list tracked aliases. +The value of a tracked alias is the full pathname +corresponding to the given +.IR name . +The value becomes undefined when the value of +.SM +.B PATH +is reset but the aliases remained tracked. +Without the +.B \-t +flag, +for each +.I name\^ +in the argument list +for which no +.I value\^ +is given, the name +and value of the alias is printed. +The +.B \-x +flag is used to set or print exported aliases. +An exported alias is defined across sub-shell environments. +Alias returns true unless a +.I name\^ +is given for which no alias has been defined. +.TP +\f3bg\fP \*(OK \f3%\f2job\^\fP \*(CK +This command is only built-in on systems that support job control. +Puts the specified +.I job\^ +into the background. +The current job is put in the background +if +.I job\^ +is not specified. +.TP +\f3break\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Exit from the enclosing +.BR for +.BR while +.BR until +or +.B select\^ +loop, if any. +If +.I n\^ +is specified then break +.I n\^ +levels. +.TP +\f3continue\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Resume the next iteration of the enclosing +.BR for +.BR while +.BR until +or +.B select\^ +loop. +If +.I n\^ +is specified then resume at the +.IR n -th +enclosing loop. +.TP +.PD 0 +\f3cd\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK +.TP +\f3cd\fP \f2old\^\fP \f2new\^\fP +.PD +This command can be in either of two forms. +In the first form it +changes the current directory to +.IR arg . +If +.I arg\^ +is +.B \- +the directory is changed to the previous +directory. +The shell +parameter +.B +.SM HOME +is the default +.IR arg . +The parameter +.SM +.B PWD +is set to the current directory. +The shell parameter +.B +.SM CDPATH +defines the search path for +the directory containing +.IR arg . +Alternative directory names are separated by +a colon +.RB ( : ). +The default path is +.B +(specifying the current directory). +Note that the current directory is specified by a null path name, +which can appear immediately after the equal sign +or between the colon delimiters anywhere else in the path list. +If +.I arg +begins with a \f3/\fP then the search path +is not used. +Otherwise, each directory in the path is +searched for +.IR arg . +.P +The second form of +.B cd +substitutes the string +.I new +for the string +.I old +in the current directory name, +.SM +.B PWD +and tries to change to this new directory. +.P +The +.B cd\^ +command may not be executed by +.I rsh\^. +.TP +\f3eval\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The arguments are read as input +to the shell +and the resulting command(s) executed. +.TP +\f3exec\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. +If +.I arg\^ +is given, +the command specified by +the arguments is executed in place of this shell +without creating a new process. +Input/output arguments may appear and +affect the current process. +If no +arguments are given +the effect of this command is to +modify file descriptors +as prescribed by the input/output redirection list. +In this case, +any file descriptor numbers greater than 2 that are +opened with this mechanism are closed when invoking +another program. +.TP +\f3exit\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Causes the shell to exit +with the exit status specified by +.IR n . +If +.I n\^ +is omitted then the exit status is that of the last command executed. +An end-of-file will also cause the shell to exit +except for a +shell which has the +.I ignoreeof +option (See +.B set +below) turned on. +.TP +\f3export\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The given +.IR name s +are marked for automatic +export to the +.I environment\^ +of subsequently-executed commands. +.TP +.PD 0 +\f3fc\fP \*(OK \f3\-e \f2ename\^\fP \ \*(CK \*(OK \f3\-\f3nlr\^\f1 \*(CK \*(OK \f2first\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2last\^\fP \*(CK +.TP +\f3fc \-e \-\fP \*(OK \f2old\fP\f3\=\fP\f2new\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2command\^\fP \*(CK +.PD +In the first form, +a range of commands from +.I first\^ +to +.I last\^ +is selected from the last +.SM +.B HISTSIZE +commands that were typed at the terminal. +The arguments +.I first\^ +and +.I last\^ +may be specified as a number or as a string. +A string is used to locate the most recent command starting with +the given string. +A negative number is used as an offset to the current command number. +If the flag +.BR \-l , +is selected, +the commands are listed on standard output. +Otherwise, the editor program +.I ename\^ +is invoked on a file containing these +keyboard commands. +If +.I ename\^ +is not supplied, then the value of the parameter +.SM +.B FCEDIT +(default /bin/ed) +is used as the editor. +When editing is complete, the edited command(s) +is executed. +.I last\^ +is not specified +then it will be set to +.IR first . +If +.I first\^ +is not specified +the default is the previous command +for editing and \-16 for listing. +The flag +.B \-r +reverses the order of the commands and +the flag +.B \-n +suppresses command numbers when listing. +In the second form the +.I command\^ +is re-executed after the substitution +\f2old\^\fP\f3=\fP\f2new\^\fP +is performed. +.TP +\f3fg\fP \*(OK \f3%\f2job\^\fP \*(CK +This command is only built-in on systems that support job control. +If +.I job\^ +is specified it brings it to the foreground. +Otherwise, the current job is +brought into the foreground. +.TP +\f3jobs\fP \*(OK \f3\-l\^\fP \*(CK +Lists the active jobs; given the +.B \-l +options lists process id's in addition to the normal information. +.TP +\f3kill\fP \*(OK \f3\-\f2sig\^\fP \*(CK \f2process\^\fP .\|.\|. +Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the +specified signal to the specified jobs or processes. +Signals are either given by number or by names (as given in +.I /usr/include/signal.h, +stripped of the prefix ``SIG''). +The signal names are listed by +.BR "kill \-l'" . +There is no default, saying just `kill' does not +send a signal to the current job. +If the signal being sent is TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), +then the job or process will be sent a CONT (continue) signal +if it is stopped. +The argument +.I process\^ +can be either a process id or a job. +.TP +\f3let\fP \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. +Each +.I arg +is an +.IR "arithmetic expression" +to be evaluated. +All calculations are done as long +integers and no check for overflow +is performed. +Expressions consist of constants, +named parameters, and operators. +The following set of operators, +listed in order of decreasing precedence, +have been implemented: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B \- +unary minus +.TP +.B ! +logical negation +.TP +.B "* / %" +.br +multiplication, division, remainder +.TP +.B "+ \-" +addition, subtraction +.TP +.B "<= >= < >" +.br +comparison +.TP +.B "== !=" +.br +equality inequality +.TP +.B = +arithmetic replacement +.PD +.PP +Sub-expressions in parentheses +.B (\|) +are evaluated first and can be used +to override the above precedence rules. +The evaluation within a precedence group +is from right to left for the +.B = +operator +and from left to right for the others. +.PP +A parameter name must be a valid +.IR identifier . +When a parameter is encountered, +the value associated with the +parameter name is substituted and expression evaluation resumes. +Up to nine levels of recursion are +permitted. +.PP +The return code is +0 if the value of the last expression +is non-zero, and 1 otherwise. +.RE +.TP +\f3newgrp\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +Equivalent to +.BI "exec newgrp" " arg\^" +\&.\|.\|.\^. +.TP +\f3print\fP \*(OK \f3\-Rnprsu\^\fP\*(OK\f2n\fP \*(CK \*(CK \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The shell output mechanism. +With no flags or with flag +.BR \- , +the arguments are printed +on standard output as described by +.IR echo (1). +In raw mode, +.B \-R +or +.BR \-r , +the escape conventions of +.I echo +are ignored. +The +.B \-R +option will print all subsequent arguments and options +other than +.BR \-n . +The +.B \-p +option causes the +arguments to be written onto the pipe +of the process spawned with +.B \(bv& +instead of standard output. +The +.B \-s +option causes the +arguments to be written onto the history file +instead of standard output. +The +.B \-u +flag can be used to specify a one digit +file descriptor unit number +.B n\^ +on which the +output will be placed. +The default is 1. +If the flag +.B \-n +is used, no +.B new-line\^ +is added to the output. +.TP +\f3read\fP \*(OK \f3\-prsu\^\fP\*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\f3?\f2prompt\^\f1 \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The shell input mechanism. +One line is read and +is broken up into words using the characters in +.B +.SM IFS +as separators. +In raw mode, +.B \-r, +a +.B \e +at the end of a line does not signify +line continuation. +The first +word is assigned to the first +.IR name , +the second word +to the second +.IR name , +etc., with leftover words assigned to the last +.IR name . +The +.B \-p +option causes the input line +to be taken from the input pipe +of a process spawned by the shell +using +.BR \(bv& . +If the +.B \-s +fag is present, +the input will be saved as a command in the history file. +The flag +.B \-u +can be used to specify a one digit file +descriptor unit to read from. +The file descriptor can be opened with the +.B exec\^ +special command. +The default value of +.I n\^ +is 0. +If +.IR name +is omitted then +.SM +.B REPLY +is used as the default +.IR name. +The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered. +An end-of-file with the +.B \-p +option causes cleanup for this process +so that another can be spawned. +If the first argument contains a +.BR ? , +the remainder of this word is used as a +.I prompt\^ +when the shell is interactive. +If the given file descriptor is open for writing +and is a terminal device then the prompt is placed +on this unit. +Otherwise the prompt is issued on file descriptor 2. +The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered. +.TP +\f3readonly\fP \*(OK \f2name\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The given +.IR names +are marked +readonly and these +names cannot be changed +by subsequent assignment. +.TP +\f3return\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Causes a shell +.I function +to return +to the invoking script +with the return status specified by +.IR n . +If +.I n\^ +is omitted then the return status is that of the last command executed. +If +.B return +is invoked while not in a +.I function +then it is the same as an +.BR exit . +.TP +\f3set\fP \*(OK \f3\-aefhkmnostuvx\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f3\-o\fP \f2option\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The flags for this command have meaning as follows: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP 8 +.B \-a +All subsequent parameters that are defined are automatically exported. +.TP 8 +.B \-e +If the shell is non-interactive and if a command fails, +execute the +.SM +.B ERR +trap, if set, +and exit immediately. +This mode is disabled while reading profiles. +.TP 8 +.B \-f +Disables file name generation. +.TP 8 +.B \-h +Each command whose name is an +.I identifier\^ +becomes a tracked alias when first encountered. +.TP 8 +.B \-k +All parameter assignment arguments are placed in the environment for a command, +not just those that precede the command name. +.TP 8 +.B \-m +Background jobs will run in a separate process group +and a line will print upon completion. +The exit status of background jobs is reported in a completion message. +On systems with job control, +this flag is turned on automatically for +interactive shells. +.TP 8 +.B \-n +Read commands but do not execute them. +.TP 8 +.B \-o +The following argument can be one of the following option names: +.RS +.TP 8 +.B allexport +Same as +.BR \-a . +.TP 8 +.B errexit +Same as +.BR \-e . +.TP 8 +.B emacs +Puts you in an +.I emacs +style in-line editor for command entry. +.TP 8 +.B gmacs +Puts you in a +.I gmacs +style in-line editor for command entry. +.TP 8 +.B ignoreeof +The shell will not exit on end-of-file. +The command +.B exit +must be used. +.TP 8 +.B keyword +Same as +.BR \-k . +.TP 8 +.B markdirs +All directory names resulting from file name generation have a trailing +.B / +appended. +.TP 8 +.B monitor +Same as +.BR \-m . +.TP 8 +.B noexec +Same as +.BR \-n . +.TP 8 +.B noglob +Same as +.BR \-f . +.TP 8 +.B nounset +Same as +.BR \-u . +.TP 8 +.B verbose +Same as +.BR \-v . +.TP 8 +.B trackall +Same as +.BR \-h . +.TP 8 +.B vi +Puts you in insert mode of a +.I vi\^ +style in-line editor +until you hit escape character +.BR 033 . +This puts you in move mode. +A return sends the line. +.TP 8 +.B viraw +Each character is processed as it is typed +in +.I vi\^ +mode. +.TP 8 +.B xtrace +Same as +.BR \-x . +.TP 8 + +If no option name is supplied then the current option settings are printed. +.RE +.TP 8 +.B \-s +Sort the positional parameters. +.TP 8 +.B \-t +Exit after reading and executing one command. +.TP 8 +.B \-u +Treat unset parameters as an error when substituting. +.TP 8 +.B \-v +Print shell input lines as they are read. +.TP 8 +.B \-x +Print commands and their arguments as they are executed. +.TP 8 +.B \- +Turns off +.B \-x +and +.B \-v +flags and stops examining arguments for flags. +.TP 8 +.B \-\- +Do not change any of the flags; useful in setting +.B $1 +to a value beginning with +.BR \- . +If no arguments follow this flag then the positional parameters are unset. +.PD +.PP +Using +.B \+ +rather than +.B \- +causes these flags to be turned off. +These flags can also be used upon invocation of the shell. +The current set of flags may be found in +.BR $\- . +The remaining arguments are positional +parameters and are assigned, in order, +.if t to\p +.if n to +.BR $1 , +.BR $2 , +\&.\|.\|.\^. +If no arguments are given then the values +of all names are printed on the standard output. +.RE +.TP +\f3shift\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +.br +The positional parameters from +\f3$\fP\f2n\fP\f3+1\fP +\&.\|.\|. +are renamed +.B $1 +\&.\|.\|.\^ +, default +.I n\^ +is 1. +The parameter +.I n\^ +can be any arithmetic expression that evaluates to a non-negative +number less than or equal to +.BR $# . +.TP +\f3test\fP \*(OK \f2expr\^\fP \*(CK +.br +Evaluate conditional expression +.IR expr . +See +.IR test (1) +for usage and description. +The arithmetic comparison operators +are not restricted to integers. +They allow any arithmetic expression. +Four additional primitive expressions are allowed: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +\f3\-L\fP \f2file\^\fP +True if +.I file\^ +is a symbolic link. +.TP +\f2file1\^\fP \f3\-nt\fP \f2file2\^\fP +True if +.I file1\^ +is newer than +.IR file2 . +.TP +\f2file1\^\fP \f3\-ot\fP \f2file2\^\fP +True if +.I file1\^ +is older than +.IR file2 . +.TP +\f2file1\^\fP \f3\-ef\fP \f2file2\^\fP +True if +.I file1\^ +has the same device and i-node number as +.IR file2 . +.PD +.RE +.TP +\f3times\fP +.br +Print the accumulated user and system times for +the shell and for processes +run from the shell. +.TP +\f3trap\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2sig\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. +.I arg\^ +is a command to be read and executed when the shell +receives signal(s) +.IR sig . +(Note that +.I arg\^ +is scanned once when +the trap is set and once when the trap +is taken.) +Each +.I sig\^ +can be given as a number or as the name of the signal. +Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. +Any attempt to set a trap on a signal that +was ignored on entry to the current shell +is ineffective. +An attempt to trap on signal 11 (memory fault) produces an error. +If +.I arg\^ +is omitted or is +.BR \- , +then all trap(s) +.I sig\^ +are reset +to their original values. +If +.I arg\^ +is the null +string then this signal is ignored by the shell and by the commands +it invokes. +If +.I sig\^ +is +.SM +.B ERR +then +.I arg\^ +will be executed whenever a command has a non-zero exit code. +This trap is not inherited by functions. +If +.I sig\^ +is +.B 0 +or +.SM +.B EXIT +and the +.B trap +statement is executed inside the body of a function, +then the command +.I arg\^ +is executed +after the function completes. +If +.I sig\^ +is +.B 0 +or +.SM +.B EXIT +for a +.B trap +set outside any function +then the command +.I arg\^ +is executed +on exit from the shell. +The +.B trap +command +with no arguments prints a list +of commands associated with each signal number. +.TP +\f3typeset\fP \*(OK \f3\-FLRZefilprtux\^\fP\*(OK\f2n\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2name\fP\*(OK \f2=value\^\fP \*(CK \^ \*(CK .\|.\|. \*(CK +Parameter assignments remain in effect after the command completes. +When invoked inside a function, +a new instance of the parameter +.I name\^ +is created. +The parameter value and type are restored +when the function completes. +The following list of attributes may be specified: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B \-F +This flag provides UNIX to host-name file mapping on non-UNIX +machines. +.TP +.B \-L +Left justify and remove leading blanks from +.IR value . +If +.I n +is non-zero it defines the width +of the field, +otherwise it is determined by the width of the value of +first assignment. +When the parameter is assigned to, it is +filled on the right with blanks or truncated, if necessary, to +fit into the field. +Leading zeros are removed if the +.B \-Z +flag is also set. +The +.B \-R +flag is turned off. +.TP +.B \-R +Right justify and fill with leading blanks. +If +.I n +is non-zero it defines the width +of the field, +otherwise it is determined by the width of the value of +first assignment. +The field is left filled with blanks or +truncated from the end if the +parameter is reassigned. +The +.B L +flag is turned off. +.TP +.B \-Z +Right justify and fill with leading zeros if +the first non-blank character is a digit and the +.B \-L +flag has not been set. +If +.I n +is non-zero it defines the width +of the field, +otherwise it is determined by the width of the value of +first assignment. +.TP +.B \-e +Tag the parameter as having an error. +This tag is currently unused by the shell and can be +set or cleared by the user. +.TP +.B \-f +The names refer to function names rather than +parameter names. +No assignments can be made and the only other +valid flag is +.BR \-x . +.TP +.B \-i +Parameter is an integer. +This makes arithmetic faster. +If +.I n +is non-zero it defines the output arithmetic base, +otherwise the first assignment determines the output base. +.TP +.B \-l +All upper-case characters +converted to lower-case. +The upper-case flag, +.B \-u +is turned off. +.TP +.B \-p +The output of this command, if any, is written onto the two-way pipe +.TP +.B \-r +The given +.IR names +are marked +readonly and these +names cannot be changed +by subsequent assignment. +.TP +.B \-t +Tags the named parameters. +Tags are user definable and have no special +meaning to the shell. +.TP +.B \-u +All lower-case characters are converted +to upper-case characters. +The lower-case flag, +.B \-l +is turned off. +.TP +.B \-x +The given +.IR name s +are marked for automatic +export to the +.I environment\^ +of subsequently-executed commands. +.PD +.PP +Using +.B \+ +rather than +.B \- +causes these flags to be turned off. +If no +.I name\^ +arguments are given but flags are specified, +a list of +.I names\^ +(and optionally the +.I values\^ +) +of the +.I parameters\^ +which have these +flags set +is printed. +(Using +.B \+ +rather than +.B \- +keeps the +values to be printed.) +If no +.IR name s +and flags +are given, +the +.I names\^ +and +.I attributes\^ +of all +.I parameters\^ +are printed. +.RE +.TP +\f3ulimit\fP \*(OK \f3\-cdfmpt\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B \-c +imposes a size limit of +.I n\^ +blocks on the size of core dumps +(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). +.TP +.B \-d +imposes a size limit of +.I n\^ +blocks on the size of the data area +(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). +.TP +.B \-f +imposes a size limit of +.I n\^ +blocks on files written by child processes (files of any size may be read). +.TP +.B \-m +imposes a soft limit of +.I n\^ +blocks on the size of physical memory +(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). +.TP +.B \-p +changes the pipe size to +.I n\^ +(\s-1UNIX\s+1/\s-1RT\s+1 only). +.TP +.B \-t +imposes a time limit of +.I n\^ +seconds to be used by each process +(\s-1BSD\s+1 only). +.PD +.PP +If no option is given, +.B \-f +is assumed. +If +.I n\^ +is not given the current limit is printed. +.RE +.TP +\f3umask\fP \*(OK \f2nnn\^\fP \*(CK +The user file-creation mask is set to +.I nnn\^ +(see +.IR umask (2)). +If +.I nnn\^ +is omitted, the current value of the mask is printed. +.TP +\f3unalias\fP \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. +The +.IR +parameters +given by the list of +.IR name s +are removed from the +.I alias\^ +list. +.TP +\f3unset\fP \*(OK \f3\-f\fP \*(CK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. +The parameters given by the list of +.IR name s +are unassigned, +i. e., +their values and attributes are erased. +Readonly variables cannot be unset. +If the flag, +.BR \-f , +is set, then the names refer to +.I function\^ +names. +.TP +\f3wait\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Wait for the specified process and +report its termination status. +If +.I n\^ +is not given then all currently active child processes are waited for. +The return code from this command is that of +the process waited for. +.TP +\f3whence\fP \*(OK \f3\-v\fP \*(CK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. +For each +.IR name , +indicate how it +would be interpreted if used as a command name. +.P +The flag, +.BR \-v , +produces a more verbose report. +.SS Invocation. +If the shell is invoked by +.IR exec (2), +and the first character of argument zero +.RB ( $0 ) +is +.BR \- , +then the shell is assumed to be a +.I login +shell and +commands are read from +.B /etc/profile +and then from either +.B .profile +in the current directory or +.BR \s-1$HOME\s+1/.profile , +if either file exists. +Next, commands are read from +the file named by +performing parameter substitution on +the value of the environment parameter +.SM +.B ENV +if the file exists. +Commands are then read as described below; +the following flags are interpreted by the shell +when it is invoked: +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP 10 +.BI \-c "\| string\^" +If the +.B \-c +flag is present then +commands are read from +.IR string . +.TP +.B \-s +If the +.B \-s +flag is present or if no +arguments remain +then commands are read from the standard input. +Shell output, +except for the output of some of the +.I Special commands\^ +listed above, +is written to +file descriptor 2. +.TP +.B \-i +If the +.B \-i +flag is present or +if the shell input and output are attached to a terminal (as told by +.IR gtty (2)) +then this shell is +.IR interactive . +In this case \s-1TERMINATE\s+1 is ignored (so that \f3kill 0\fP +does not kill an interactive shell) and \s-1INTERRUPT\s+1 is caught and ignored +(so that +.B wait +is interruptible). +In all cases, \s-1QUIT\s+1 is ignored by the shell. +.TP +.B \-r +If the +.B \-r +flag is present the shell is a restricted shell. +.PD +.PP +The remaining flags and arguments are described under the +.B set +command above. +.SS Rsh Only. +.I Rsh +is used to set up login names and execution environments whose +capabilities are more controlled than those of the standard shell. +The actions of +.I rsh\^ +are identical to those of +.IR sh , +except that the following are disallowed: +.RS +.PD 0 +.PP +changing directory (see +.IR cd (1)), +.br +setting the value of +.SM +.B SHELL +or +.SM +.BR PATH\*S, +.br +specifying path or +command names containing +.BR / , +.br +redirecting output +.RB ( > +and +.BR >> ). +.PD +.RE +.PP +The restrictions above are enforced +after \f3.profile\fP and the +.SM +.B ENV +files are interpreted. +.PP +When a command to be executed is found to be a shell procedure, +.I rsh\^ +invokes +.I sh\^ +to execute it. +Thus, it is possible to provide to the end-user shell procedures +that have access to the full power of +the standard shell, +while imposing a limited menu of commands; +this scheme assumes that the end-user does not have write and +execute permissions in the same directory. +.PP +The net effect of these rules is that the writer of the +.B .profile +has complete control over user actions, +by performing guaranteed setup actions +and leaving the user in an appropriate directory +(probably +.I not\^ +the login directory). +.PP +The system administrator often sets up a directory +of commands +(i.e., +.BR /usr/rbin ) +that can be safely invoked by +.IR rsh . +Some systems also provide a restricted editor +.IR red . +.SH EXIT STATUS +Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors, +cause the shell +to return a non-zero exit status. +If the shell is being used non-interactively +then execution of the shell file is abandoned. +Otherwise, the shell returns the exit status of +the last command executed (see also the +.B exit +command above). +.SH FILES +/etc/passwd +.br +/etc/profile +.br +\s-1$HOME\s+1/\f3.\fPprofile +.br +/tmp/sh\(** +.br +/dev/null +.SH SEE ALSO +cat(1), +cd(1), +echo(1), +emacs(1), +env(1), +gmacs(1), +newgrp(1), +test(1), +umask(1), +vi(1), +dup(2), +exec(2), +fork(2), +gtty(2), +pipe(2), +signal(2), +umask(2), +ulimit(2), +wait(2), +rand(3), +a.out(5), +profile(5), +environ(7). +.SH CAVEATS +.PP +If a command which is a +.I "tracked alias" +is executed, and then a command with the same name is +installed in a directory in the search path before the directory where the +original command was found, the shell will continue to +.I exec\^ +the original command. +Use the +.B \-t +option of the +.B alias\^ +command to correct this situation +.PP +If you move the current directory or one above it, +.B pwd\^ +may not give the correct response. +Use the +.B cd\^ +command with a full path name +to correct this situation. +.PP +Some very old shell scripts contain a +.B ^ +as a synonym for the pipe character +.BR \(bv . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lab.1 b/static/v10/man1/lab.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f492a36 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lab.1 @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +.TH LAB 1 alice +.CT 1 misc +.SH NAME +lab \(mi label maker +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lab +[ +.B -m +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lab +causes the +.I files +to be queued for printing as mailing labels. +If no files are named, the standard input is read. +The option +.B -m +causes notification via +.IR mail (1) +to be sent when the job completes. +.PP +The last line of each label is identified by ending it +with one or more spaces and a hyphen. +The hyphen must be the last character in the line; +no white space may follow it. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/spool/lab/* +.TP +.F /usr/spool/lab/* +spool area +.TP +.F /usr/lib/lab +printer daemon +.SH SEE\ ALSO +.IR pr (1) +.SH BUGS +Queued jobs print in directory (seemingly random) order. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/langs.1 b/static/v10/man1/langs.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b9998d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/langs.1 @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +.TH LANGS 1 +.CT 1 prog_other +.SH NAME +altran, cospan, esterel, icon, lisp, macsyma, maple, ops5, pascal, ratfor, S, smp, sno, spitbol, struct, twig \- languages +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B altran +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.br +.B cospan +[ +.I option ... +] +file +.nf +.B esterel +.B iconc +.B icont +.B lisp +.B /usr/lbin/macsyma +.B maple +.B /usr/lbin/ops5 +.fi +.B ratfor +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.br +.B S +.br +.B smp +.br +.B sno +[ +.I file ... +] +.br +.B spitbol +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.br +.B struct +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.br +.B twig +[ +.BI -w xx +] +.I file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Altran, +a language for rational algebra, is +described in W. S. Brown, +.I ALTRAN User's Manual. +For more information execute +.LR "man altran" . +.PP +.I Cospan, +a system which analyzes concurrent programs written in the data-flow +language S/R for properties defined by automata, is +described in +Z. Har'El and R. P. Kurshan, +.I COSPAN User's Guide, +1121-871009-21TM, AT&T Bell Laboratories, 1987. +For more information, execute +.LR "man cospan" . +.PP +.I Esterel +compiles single-process implementations of +programs expressed in terms of asynchronously cooperating +automata. +For more information, execute +.LR "man esterel" . +.PP +.I Icon, +a general-purpose language with +stream-based coroutines is described in R. E. Griswold, +.I The Icon Programming Language, +Prentice-Hall, 1983. +For more information, execute +.LR "man icont" . +.PP +.I Lisp, +the symbol manipulation language, is described in +J. K. Foderara, +`The Franz Lisp Manual', in +Unix Programmer's Manual, Seventh Edition, Virtual VAX-11 Version, +1980, Volume 2C +(Berkeley) +.PP +.I Macsyma, +another symbolic algebra language, +is described in +.I Macsyma Reference Manual, +Laboratory for Computer Science, MIT, 1977. +It breaks if the environment contains shell functions. +.PP +.I Maple, +a third symbolic algebra language, +is described in K. O. Geddes, G. H. Gonnet, and B. W. Char, +.I MAPLE User's Manual, Third Edition, +Research Report CS-83-41 +Dept. of Computer Science, University of Waterloo, 1983. +For more information execute +.LR "man maple" . +.PP +.I Ops5 +is a production-system interpreter +described in +C. L. Forgy +.IR "OPS5 User's Manual" , +Department of Computer Science, +Carnegie-Mellon University, +July, 1981. +For more information execute +.LR "man ops5" . +.PP +.I Pascal +is an interpreter and +.I pc +is a compiler for the well known language. +For more information, type +.LR "man pascal pc pxp" . +.PP +.I Ratfor +accepts Fortran extended with C-like control +constructs and compiles into Fortran. +For more information execute +.LR "man ratfor" . +For a full description see B. W. Kernighan and P. J. Plauger, +.I Software Tools, +Addison-Wesley, 1976. +.PP +.I S, +a system for data analysis and graphics, +is described in +R. A. Becker, J. M. Chambers, and A. R. Wilks, +.I +The New S Language, +Wadsworth, 1988. +.PP +.I Smp, +a fourth symbolic algebra language, +is described in C. Cole and S. Wolfram, +.I SMP Handbook, +California Institute of Technology, 1981. +.PP +.I Sno +is a dialect of Snobol 3. +For more information execute +.LR "man sno" . +.PP +.I Spitbol +is a dialect of Snobol 4. +For more information execute +.LR "man spitbol" . +The full story is in +R. B. K. Dewar, A. P. McCann, R. E. Goldberg, +and S. G. Duff, +.I Macro SPITBOL Program Reference Manual, +and R. E. Griswold, J. F. Poage, and I. P. Polonsky, +.I The SNOBOL4 Programming Language +Academic Press, 1968. +.PP +.I Struct, +an inverse of +.I ratfor, +deduces rational control structure from pure Fortran. +For more information execute +.LR "man struct" . +.PP +.I Twig +is a language for tree manipulation, +useful for code generation and other applications. +For more information execute +.LR "man twig" . +See also S. W. K. Tjiang, +.I Twig Reference Manual, +AT&T Bell Laboratories Computing Science Technical Report 120. +.SH BUGS +These language processors are available on a haphazard +collection of machines. +Many are maintained in the same spirit. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 b/static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e845fc9b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/laserbar.1 @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +.TH LASERBAR 1 +.SH NAME +laserbar \- produce bar codes on a PostScript laser printer +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B laserbar +[\fB-r\fP rotate] [\fB-x\fP xoffset] [\fB-y\fP yoffset] +[\fB-X\fP xscale] [\fB-Y\fP yscale] [\fB-lns\fP] string +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Laserbar +prints on the standard output the PostScript text that will produce +(on a suitable laser printer) the \s-2CODE-39\s+2 bar code +corresponding to +.I string. +The \fBr\fP option may be used to specify a rotation (in +degrees) of the bar code. +The \fBx\fP, \fBy\fP, \fBX\fP, and \fBY\fP options may be used to specify +an x- or y-axis offset (in inches) or scaling factor, respectively. +(The offset is measured from the lower left corner of the page +to the upper left corner of the bar +code. By default, the bar code produced is one inch high, and is scaled +so that the narrowest elements are each 1/72-inch \- i.e., one point \- wide.) +If the \fBl\fP option is specified, the bar code produced is labeled. +If the \fBn\fP option is specified, the resulting PostScript text +includes a leading \f(CWnewpath\fP command, so that the text may stand +alone or precede any other PostScript commands. +If the \fBs\fP option is specified, the resulting PostScript text includes +a trailing \f(CWshowpage\fP command, so that the text may stand alone +or follow any other PostScript commands. +.P +This manual page (if it appears with a bar code printed on it) was +produced by something like the following sequence: +.IP +.ft CW +laserbar -x 2.5 -y 3 -l -n ABC123xyz > tempfile +.br +troff -man -Tpost laserbar.1 | dpost >> tempfile +.br +prt -dprinter -lpostscript tempfile +.ft P +.SH SEE ALSO +laserbar(3), prt(1), dpost(1), postbgi(1), postprint(1), postdmd(1), posttek(1), etc. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lcc.1 b/static/v10/man1/lcc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29ab1194 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lcc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,505 @@ +.TH LCC 1 "local \- 4/13/93" +.SH NAME +lcc \- local ANSI C compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lcc +[ +.I option +| +.I file +]... +.br +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +.I lcc +is a local ANSI C compiler for the VAX, MIPS, SPARC, and Motorola MC68020. +.PP +Arguments whose names end with `.c' are taken to be +C source programs; they are preprocessed, compiled, and +each object program is left on the file +whose name is that of the source with `.o' substituted for `.c'. +Arguments whose names end with `.i' are treated similarly, +except they are not preprocessed. +In the same way, +arguments whose names end with `.s' are taken to be assembly source programs +and are assembled, producing a `.o' file. +.PP +.I lcc +deletes a `.o' file if and only if exactly one +source file (`.c', `.s', or `.i' file) is mentioned and no other file +(source, object, library) or +.B \-l +option is mentioned. +.PP +.I lcc +uses ANSI standard header files +in preference to the `old-style' header files normally found in +.B /usr/include +(see `FILES' below). +Include files not found in the ANSI header files +are taken from the normal default include areas, +which usually includes +.BR /usr/include . +.PP +.I lcc +interprets the following options; unrecognized options are +taken as loader options (see +.IR ld (1)) +unless +.BR \-c , +.BR \-S , +or +.B \-E +precedes them. +Except for +.BR \-l , +all options are processed before any of the files +and apply to all of the files. +Applicable options are passed to each compilation phase in the order given. +.TP +.B \-c +Suppress the loading phase of the compilation, and force +an object file to be produced even if only one program is compiled. +.TP +.B \-g +Produce additional symbol table information for the local debuggers. +.I lcc +warns when +.B \-g +is unsupported. +.TP +.B \-w +Suppress warning diagnostics, such as those +announcing unreferenced statics, locals, and parameters. +The line +.I +#pragma ref id +simulates a reference to the variable +.IR id . +.TP +.BI \-d n +Generate jump tables for switches whose density is at least +.IR n , +a floating point constant between zero and one. +The default is 0.5. +.TP +.SM +.B \-A +Warns about +declarations and casts of function types without prototypes, +missing return values in returns from int functions, +assignments between pointers to ints and pointers to enums, and +conversions from pointers to smaller integral types. +A second +.SM +.B \-A +warns about +unrecognized control lines, +non-ANSI language extensions and source characters in literals, +unreferenced variables and static functions, +declaring arrays of incomplete types, +and exceeding +.I some +ANSI environmental limits, like more than 257 cases in switches. +It also arranges for duplicate global definitions in separately compiled +files to cause loader errors. +.TP +.SM +.B \-P +Writes declarations for all defined globals on standard error. +Function declarations include prototypes; +editing this output can simplify conversion to ANSI C. +This output may not correspond to the input when +there are several typedef's for the same type. +.TP +.B \-n +Arrange for the compiler to produce code +that tests for dereferencing zero pointers. +The code reports the offending file and line number and calls +.IR abort (3). +.TP +.SM +.B \-O +is ignored. +.TP +.SM +.B \-S +Compile the named C programs, and leave the +assembler-language output on corresponding files suffixed `.s'. +.TP +.SM +.B \-E +Run only the preprocessor on the named C programs +and unsuffixed file arguments, +and send the result to the standard output. +.TP +.SM +.B \-C +Prevent the preprocessor from eliding comments. +.TP +.BI \-o " output" +Name the output file +.IR output . +If +.B \-c +or +.B \-S +is specified and there is exactly one source file, +this option names the object or assembly file, respectively. +Otherwise, this option names the final executable +file generated by the loader, and `a.out' is left undisturbed. +.I lcc +warns if +.B \-o +and +.B \-c +or +.B \-S +are given with more than one source file and ignores the +.B \-o +option. +.TP +.SM +.BI \-D \*Sname=def +.br +.ns +.TP +.SM +.BI \-D \*Sname +Define the +.I name +to the preprocessor, as if by `#define'. +If no definition is given, the name is defined as "1". +.TP +.SM +.BI \-U \*Sname +Remove any initial definition of +.IR name . +.TP +.SM +.BI \-I \*Sdir +`#include' files +whose names do not begin with `/' are always +sought first in the directory of the +.I file +arguments, then in directories named in +.SM +.B \-I +options, then in directories on a standard list. +.TP +.SM +.B \-N +Do not search +.I any +of the standard directories for `#include' files. +Only those directories specified by explicit +.SM +.B \-I +options will be searched, in the order given. +.TP +.SM +.BI \-B \*Sstr +Use the compiler \fIstr\fP\fBrcc\fP instead of the default version. +Note that +.I str +often requires a trailing slash. +On Suns only, +.SM +.B \-Bstatic +and +.SM +.BI \-Bdynamic +are passed to the loader; see +.IR ld (1). +.TP +.B \-v +Print commands as they are executed; some of the executed +programs are directed to print their version numbers. +More than one occurrence of +.B \-v +causes the commands to be printed, but +.I not +executed. +.TP +.B \-b +Produce code that counts the number of times each expression is executed. +If loading takes place, replace the standard exit +function by one that writes a +.B prof.out +file when the object program terminates. +A listing annotated with execution counts can then be generated with +.IR bprint (1). +.I lcc +warns when +.B \-b +is unsupported. +.B \-Wf-C +is similar, but counts only the number of function calls. +.TP +.B \-p +Produce code that counts the number of times each function is called. +If loading takes place, replace the standard startup +function by one that automatically calls +.IR monitor (3) +at the start and arranges to write a +.B mon.out +file when the object program terminates normally. +An execution profile can then be generated with +.IR prof (1). +.I lcc +warns when +.B \-p +is unsupported. +.TP +.B \-pg +Causes the compiler to produce counting code like +.BR \-p , +but invokes a run-time recording mechanism that keeps more +extensive statistics and produces a +.B gmon.out +file at normal termination. +Also, a profiling library is searched, in lieu of the standard C library. +An execution profile can then be generated with +.IR gprof (1). +.I lcc +warns when +.B \-pg +is unsupported. +.TP +.SM +.BI \-t \*Sname +.br +.ns +.TP +.SM +.BI \-t +Produce code to print the name of the function, an activation number, +and the name and value of each argument at function entry. +At function exit, produce code to print +the name of the function, the activation number, and the return value. +By default, +.I printf +does the printing; if +.I name +appears, it does. +For null +.I char* +values, "(null)" is printed. +On Suns only, +.SM +.BI \-target +.I name +is accepted, but ignored. +.TP +.SM +.BI \-W \*Sx \fIarg\fP +pass argument +.I arg +to the program indicated by +.IR x ; +.I x +can be one of +.BR p , +.BR f , +.BR a , +or +.BR l , +which refer, respectively, to the preprocessor, the compiler proper, +the assembler, and the loader. +.I arg +is passed as given; if a +.B \- +is expected, it must be given explicitly. +.SM +.BI \-W \*So \fIarg\fP +specifies a system-specific option, +.IR arg . +.PP +Other arguments +are taken to be either loader option arguments, or C-compatible +object programs, typically produced by an earlier +.I lcc +run, or perhaps libraries of C-compatible routines. +Duplicate `.o' files are ignored. +These programs, together with the results of any +compilations specified, are loaded (in the order +given) to produce an executable program with name +.BR a.out . +.PP +.I lcc +assigns the most frequently referenced scalar parameters and +locals to registers whenever possible. +For each block, +explicit register declarations are obeyed first; +remaining registers are assigned to automatic locals if they +are `referenced' at least 3 times. +Each top-level occurrence of an identifier +counts as 1 reference. Occurrences in a loop, +either of the then/else arms of an if statement, or a case +in a switch statement each count, respectively, as 10, 1/2, or 1/10 references. +These values are increased accordingly for nested control structures. +.B \-Wf-a +causes +.I lcc +to read a +.B prof.out +file from a previous execution and to use the data therein +to compute reference counts (see +.BR \-b ). +.SH LIMITATIONS +.PP +.I lcc +accepts the C programming language +as described in the proposed ANSI standard +and in the second edition of Kernighan and Ritchie. +.I lcc +is intended to be used with the GNU C preprocessor, which supports the +preprocessing features introduced by the ANSI standard. +The +.SM +.B \-Wp-trigraphs +option is required to enable trigraph sequences. +.PP +Wide-character literals are accepted +but are treated as plain char literals. +Plain chars are signed chars, +ints and long ints are the same size +as are doubles and long doubles, and +plain int bit fields are signed. +Bit fields are aligned like unsigned integers but are otherwise laid out +as if by the standard C compiler, +.IR cc (1). +Other compilers, such as the GNU C compiler, +.IR gcc (1), +may choose other, incompatible layouts. +.PP +Likewise, calling conventions are intended to be compatible with +.IR cc (1), +except possibly for passing and returning structures. +Specifically, +.I lcc +passes structures like +.I cc +on all targets, +but returns structures like +.I cc +on only the MIPS. +Consequently, calls to/from such functions compiled with +.I cc +or other C compilers may not work. +Calling a function that returns +a structure without declaring it as such violates +the ANSI standard and may cause a core dump. +.SH FILES +.PP +The file names listed below are +.IR typical , +but vary among installations; installation-dependent variants +can be displayed by running +.I lcc +with the +.B \-v +option. +.PP +.ta \w'/usr/lib/gcc-cppxx'u +.nf +file.c input file +file.o object file +a.out loaded output +/tmp/lcc? temporaries +/usr/lib/gcc-cpp preprocessor +/usr/lib/rcc compiler +/usr/lib/bbexit.o exit for profiling +/lib/crt0.o runtime startoff +/lib/[gm]crt0.o startoffs for profiling +/lib/libc.a standard library +/usr/include/lcc ANSI standard headers +/usr/include/libc local ANSI headers +/usr/include traditional headers +prof.out file produced for \fIbprint\fR(1) +mon.out file produced for \fIprof\fR(1) +gmon.out file produced for \fIgprof\fR(1) +.fi +.PP +.I lcc +predefines the macros `unix' and `__LCC__'. +It may also predefine some installation-dependent symbols; option +.B \-v +exposes them. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, +.I The C Programming Language, +Prentice-Hall, 2nd Ed., 1988. +.PP +.I +American National Standard for Information Systems, Programming Language C, +ANSI X3.159-1989, American National Standard Institute, Inc., New York, 1990. +.PP +cc(1), ld(1) +.br +.SH BUGS +Mail bug reports along with the shortest program +that exposes them and the details reported by +.IR lcc 's +.B \-v +option to lcc-bugs@princeton.edu. +.PP +The `ANSI standard headers' conform to the specifications in +the standard, which may be too restrictive for some applications, +but necessary for portability. +Functions given in the ANSI headers may be missing from +the local C library (e.g., `wide character' functions) +or may not correspond exactly to the local version; +for example, the ANSI standard +.B stdio.h +specifies that +.IR printf , +.IR fprintf , +and +.I sprintf +return the number of characters written to the file or array, +but few existing libraries implement this convention. +.PP +On VAXes running 4.3bsd UNIX, +the definitions of +.I tolower +and +.I toupper +erroneously return bad values for non-letter arguments. +.PP +On the MIPS and SPARC, old-style variadic functions must use +.B varargs.h +from MIPS or Sun. New-style is recommended. +.PP +The Sun assembler version 3.5 or later is required on the MC68020, +and only the MC68881 is supported. +.PP +With +.BR \-b , +files compiled +.I without +.B \-b +may cause +.I bprint +to print erroneous call graphs. +For example, if +.B f +calls +.B g +calls +.B h +and +.B f +and +.B h +are compiled with +.BR \-b , +but +.B g +is not, +.B bprint +will report that +.B f +called +.BR h . +The total number of calls is correct, however. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 b/static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ed6b108 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lcoc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +.TH LCOC 1 "30 June 1988" +.SH NAME +lcoc \- Esterel compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lcoc +[ option ] ... [ file ]... +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fIlcoc\fR is the Esterel v3 compiler. +It produce an \fIoc\fR format output from one or more \fIlc\fR format inputs +(or \fIic\fR if no Esterel \fBcopymodule\fP instruction is used). +If there is no input files, the standard input is used. +\fIic\fP format inputs describes Esterel \fBmodules\fP to be processed, +and \fIoc\fP format output describes the computed automata. +Typical use is: +.br +.DS +lcoc < game1.ic > game1.oc +.DE +.br +or +.br +.DS +lcoc game1.ic > game1.oc +.DE +.LP +The following options are interpreted by \fIlcoc\fP. +.IP \fB-version\fR 10 +Gives the version name and terminates ignoring all others arguments. +.IP \fB-v\fR 10 +Verbose option: gives names of the modules compiled. +.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 +Prints statistic informations into the standard error stream: +parsing and compiling times and size of the process. +.IP \fB-size\fR 10 +Prints size informations into the standard error stream: +how many states, actions and action calls are produced. +.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 +Memory state after compiling. +.IP \fB-W\fR 10 +Give warnings about .ic unused actions and .ic dead code. +.IP \fB-show\fR 10 +During the compiling process, gives two informations into +the standard error stream: +how many states are already created and how many states are already +analysed. +.SH FILES +The caller of the command +must have read/write permission for the directories containing +the working files, and execute permission for the \fIlcoc\fR file itself. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The diagnostics produced by \fIlcoc\fR compiler are intended +to be self-explanatory. +.SH IDENTIFICATION +.de VL +\\$2 +.. +Author: F. Boussinot, +CMA, Ecole des Mines de Paris, +.sp 0 +Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE +.sp 0 +Revision Number: +$Revision: 1.3 $ +; Release Date: +$Date: 88/06/30 12:08:10 $ +\&. +.SH SEE ALSO +Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual +.sp 0 +Esterel v3 System Manuals. +.sp 0 +strlic (1), iclc(1), ocl (1). +.sp 0 +.SH BUGS + + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 b/static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6514b0d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lcomp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +.TH LCOMP 1 +.SH NAME +lcomp, lprint \(mi line-by-line profiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lcomp +[ option ... ] file ... +.PP +.B lprint +[ option ] [ file ... ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lcomp +is used in place of +.I cc (1) +or +.I f77 (1) +to insert instruction-counting code into programs. +It recognizes options whose initial letters are taken from the string +.LR CwpDUIRdlNnz , +and accepts files whose names end in +.LR .c , +.LR .f , +.LR .s , +or +.LR .o . +From each source file it derives a +.L .o +file and a +.L .sL +file which +.I lprint +uses to correlate source lines with basic blocks. +.PP +Option +.B -C +declares that +.L .c +files (and +.L .o +files, if no source files are named) +are C++ files. +If the +.B -c +option is not present +.I lcomp +creates +.FR a.out . +Each time +.F a.out +is run statistics are added +to a profiling file +.FR prof.out . +.PP +.I Lprint +produces on the standard output a listing (in the style of +.IR pr (1)) +of the programs compiled by +.I lcomp. +Without arguments or files, +each line of the listing is preceded by the number of times it was executed, +as determined from the data in +.FR prof.out . +.I Lprint +interprets the following options. +.TP +.B -a +Detailed listing of every machine instruction and how often it was executed. +.TP +.B -b +How often each basic block was executed. +.TP +.B -c +Compress the +.F prof.out +file, which otherwise grows with every execution of +.LR a.out . +.TP +.B -f +Print summary information by function: instruction executions, number of +invocations, source instructions, and number of instructions never executed. +.TP +.B -i +Before each line of source print the number of machine instructions executed. +.TP +.B -p +Before each line of source print the number of times the first basic block +in that line was executed. +.TP +.B -s +Summarize the counts by source file: instruction exectuions, source +instructions, instructions never executed, basic block executions, total +number of source basic blocks, and how many were never executed. +.PP +If any file names are given, the arguments +.L abip +apply only to them. +If no options are given, +.L -p +is assumed. +Any combination of options is allowed. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/nexit.o +.TP +.F prof.out +counts +.TP +.F *.sL +for correlating with source +.TP +.F /usr/lib/bb +for finding basic blocks and inserting counting code +.TP +.F /usr/lib/nexit.o +for printing counts when +.L a.out +exits +.SH "SEE ALSO" +cc(1), f77(1) +.SH BUGS +A line in the source file may be in zero, one, or more basic +blocks; +the count given in the listing corresponds to some particular +choice of the basic block to associate with the line. +.br +Processing the output of +.IR yacc (1) +without removing +.L #line +directives will produce unsatisfactory results. +.br +Option +.B -C +masks an option of +.IR cc (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ld.1 b/static/v10/man1/ld.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1347d1b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ld.1 @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'LD (I)'3/15/72'LD (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME ld -- link editor +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS ld__ [ -sulxr______ ] name\d1\u ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION ld__ combines several +object programs into one; resolves external +references; and searches libraries. +In the simplest case the names of several object +programs are given, and ld__ combines them, producing +an object module which can be either executed or +become the input for a further ld__ run. +In the latter case, the "-r" option must be given +to preserve the relocation bits. +.sp +The argument routines are concatenated in the order +specified. The entry point of the output is the +beginning of the first routine. +.sp +If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once. +Only those routines defining an unresolved external +reference are loaded. +If a routine from a library +references another routine in the library, +the referenced routine must appear after the +referencing routine in the library. +Thus the order of programs within libraries +is important. +.sp +ld__ understands several flag arguments which are written +preceded by a "-": +.sp +.in +6 +.ti -3 +-s "squash" the output, that is, remove the symbol table +and relocation bits to save space (but impair the +usefulness of the debugger). +This information can also be removed by strip_____. +.ti -3 +.sp +-u take the following argument as a symbol and enter +it as undefined in the symbol table. This is useful +for loading wholly from a library, since initially the symbol +table is empty and an unresolved reference is needed +to force the loading of the first routine. +.sp +.ti -3 +-l This option is an abbreviation for a library name. +"-l" alone stands for "/usr/lib/liba.a", which +is the standard system library for assembly language +programs. +"-lx" stands for "/usr/lib/libx.a" where x is any character. +There are libraries for Fortran (x="f"), C (x="c"), Explor (x="e") and B (x="b"). + +.ti -3 +-x Do not preserve local +(non-.globl) symbols in the output symbol table; only enter +external symbols. +This option saves some space in the output file. + +.ti -3 +-r generate relocation bits in the output file +so that it can be the subject of another ld__ run. +.sp +.in -6 +The output of ld__ is left on a.out_____. This file is executable +only if no errors occurred during the load. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /usr/lib/lib?.a libraries +.br +a.out output file +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO as(I), ar(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "file +not found"-- bad argument +.sp +"bad format"-- bad argument +.sp +"relocation error"-- bad argument (relocation +bits corrupted) +.sp +"multiply defined"-- same symbol defined twice in same load +.sp +"un"-- stands for "undefined symbol" + +"symbol not found"-- loader bug + +"can't move output file"-- can't move temporary to a.out file + +"no relocation bits"-- an input file lacks relocation information + +"too many symbols"-- too many references to external +symbols in a given routine + +"premature EOF" + +"can't create l.out"-- cannot make temporary file + +"multiple entry point"-- more than one entry point +specified (not possible yet). +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ld80.1 b/static/v10/man1/ld80.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b35d608d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ld80.1 @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.th "ld80" 1 1/2/78 +.sh NAME +"ld80" \*- link editor for the 8080/Z80 load moduals. +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd "ld80" +[ +.bd \*-ultdb +] name ... +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it "ld80" +combines several +object programs into one; resolves external +references; and searches libraries. +In the simplest case the names of several object +programs are given, and +.it "ld80" +combines them, producing +an object module which can be either executed or +become the input for a further +.it "ld80" +run. +The output of +.it "ld80" +is left on +.bd "80.out". +This file is made executable +only if no errors occurred during the load. +.s3 +The argument routines are concatenated in the order +specified. The entry point of the output is the +beginning of the first routine. +.s3 +If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once +at the point it is encountered in the argument list. +Only those routines defining an unresolved external +reference are loaded. +If a routine from a library +references another routine in the library, +the referenced routine must appear after the +referencing routine in the library. +Thus the order of programs within libraries +is important. +.s3 +.it "ld80" +understands several flag arguments which are written +preceded by a `\*-'. +Except for \fB\*-l\fR, +they should appear before the file names. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-b\fR This +option is used to provide an absolute origin for the bss segment +of the resultant "80.out". +The supplied origin must be the next argument on the command +line and must be a positive or negative octal (leading 0) or +decimal number. +The defualt is for the bss segment to immediately follow the data +segment. +Use of this option will cause the relocation information to +be suppressed from the output. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-d\fR This +option is used to provide an absolute origin for the data segment +of the resultant "80.out". +The supplied origin must be the next argument on the command +line and must be a positive or negative octal (leading 0) or +decimal number. +The default is to have the data placed directly +after the text. +Use of this option will cause the relocation information to +be suppressed from the output. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-u\fR take the following argument as a symbol and enter +it as undefined in the symbol table. This is useful +for loading wholly from a library, since initially the symbol +table is empty and an unresolved reference is needed +to force the loading of the first routine. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-t\fR This +option is used to provide an absolute origin for the text segment +of the resultant "80.out". +The supplied origin must be the next argument on the command +line and must be a positive or negative octal (leading 0) or +decimal number. +The default origin is 0. +Use of this option will cause the relocation information to +be suppressed from the output. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-l\fR This +option is an abbreviation for a library name. +\fB\*-l\fR +alone stands for `/usr/z8080/lib/z80', which +is the standard library for assembly language +programs. +\fB\*-l\fIx\fR +stands for `/usr/z8080/lib/z80\fIx\fR.a' where \fIx\fR is any character. +A library is searched when its name is encountered, +so the placement of a \fB\*-l\fR +is significant. +.i0 +.dt +.sh FILES +/usr/z8080/lib/z80 libraries +.br +"80.out" output file +.sh "SEE ALSO" +"as80" (I), ar (I) +.sh BUGS +Most diagnostics are self explanatory. +The strangest is 'origin - conflict' and +occurs whenever an origin supplied by the user via +the -t -d or -b options causes segments to overlap. +The numbers printed out correspond +origins and sizes(both in octal) of each resultant segment. +.bd "80.out" +is produced. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/learn.1 b/static/v10/man1/learn.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db6181ca --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/learn.1 @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +.TH LEARN 1 panther +.CT 1 inst_info +.SH NAME +learn \(mi computer aided instruction about UNIX +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B learn +[ +.BI - directory +] +[ +.I subject +[ +.I lesson +[ +.I speed +] +] +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Learn +gives CAI courses and practice in the use of UNIX. +To get started +simply type `learn'. +The program will ask questions to find out what +you want to do. +The questions may be bypassed by naming a +.I subject, +and the last +.I lesson +number that +.I learn +told you in the previous session. +You may also include a +.I speed +number that was given with the lesson number +(but without the parentheses that +.I learn +places around the speed number). +If +.I lesson +is +.LR - , +.I learn +prompts for each lesson; +this is useful for debugging. +.PP +The +.I subjects +presently handled are +.EX + editor + eqn + files + macros + morefiles + C +.EE +.PP +The special command +.L bye +terminates a +.I learn +session. +.PP +The +.BI - directory +option allows one to exercise a script in +a nonstandard place. +.SH FILES +.F /usr/learn/* +.SH BUGS +The main strength of +.I learn, +that it asks the student to use the real +UNIX, also makes possible baffling mistakes. +It is helpful, especially for nonprogrammers, +to have a UNIX initiate near at hand during the first +sessions. +.PP +Occasionally lessons are incorrect, sometimes because the local version +of a command operates in a non-standard way. +Such lessons may be skipped, +but it takes some sophistication to recognize +the situation. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lex.1 b/static/v10/man1/lex.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95dd3007 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lex.1 @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +.TH LEX 1 +.CT 1 prog_other +.SH NAME +lex \(mi generator of lexical analysis programs +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lex +[ +.B -tvfn +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lex +generates programs to be used in simple lexical analysis of text. +The input +.I files +(standard input default) +contain regular expressions +to be searched for, and actions written in C to be executed when +expressions are found. +.PP +A C source program, +.F lex.yy.c +is generated, to be compiled thus: +.IP +.B cc lex.yy.c -ll +.LP +This program, when run, copies unrecognized portions of +the input to the output, +and executes the associated +C action for each regular expression that is recognized. +.PP +The options have the following meanings. +.TP +.B -t +Place the result on the standard output instead of in file +.FR lex.yy.c . +.TP +.B -v +Print a one-line summary of statistics of the generated analyzer. +.TP +.B -n +Opposite of +.BR -v ; +.B -n +is default. +.TP +.B -f +`Faster' compilation: don't bother to pack +the resulting tables; limited to small programs. +.SH EXAMPLES +This program converts upper case to lower, +removes blanks at the end of lines, +and replaces multiple blanks by single blanks. +.PP +.EX +%% +[A-Z] putchar(yytext[0]+\'a\'-\'A\'); +[ ]+$ +[ ]+ putchar(\' \'); +.EE +.SH FILES +.F lex.yy.c +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR yacc (1), +.IR sed (1) +.br +M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, +`LEX\(emLexical Analyzer Generator', +this manual, Volume 2 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/library.1 b/static/v10/man1/library.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6517a3b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/library.1 @@ -0,0 +1,241 @@ +.nr X \" 0=3b2(default), 1=vax,uts \" 0=3b2(default), 1=vax,uts +.if \nX=0 .ds x} LIBRARY 1 "User Environment Utilities" "RDS Standard" 1 +.if \nX=1 .ds x} LIBRARY 1 "R&D UNIX STD" +.if \nX=2 .ds x} LIBRARY 1 "R&D UNIX STD" "\&" +.if \nX=3 .ds x} +.TH \*(x} +.SH NAME +library \- send information requests to appropriate organization +.PD +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B library [-1234567] [request string] +.PD +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I library +sends document/information requests to the +appropriate organization within the Library Network. +It also handles a variety of requests for other AT&T organizations +(e.g., Engineering Information Services). +It requires the user to discriminate between seven classes of requests +as indicated by the menu it displays: +.sp +.nf +1) Order by number - this includes nearly everything announced + by the AT&T Library Network (e.g. TMs, bulletin items) or handled + by the Engineering Information Services (e.g. J docs, CPSs). +2) Order item not announced by the AT&T Library Network. Available: + Buy a copy of a book; Address labels; Technical Reports; + Internal document by date (id unknown); Photocopies; + Subscribe to a journal; foreign language services. +3) Subscribe or unsubscribe to a bulletin (e.g. Mercury, CTP) +4) Submit a database search. Examples of available databases: + book catalog, internal documents, AT&T personnel, released papers +5) Request human assistance / interaction. Type(s) available: + General AT&T Library Network assistance; Reference question. +6) Request AT&T Library Network information/services. Examples: + LINUS info, products/services descriptions, loan/reserve status +7) Read AT&T Library Network email transmissions + +.fi +Note that the first class includes anything announced by the Library Network operated by AT&T Bell Laboratories. +.PP +The main menu level of +.I library +can be skipped by giving +the number of the desired option (1 - 7) +as the first parameter to the +\f2library\f1. +.PP +The secondary menu levels in +.I library +(presently in options 2, 4, 5 and 6) +can be bypassed by selecting the desired option as the second +parameter. +For example, to do order a photocopy, use the +command +.ce +library -2 -p +.PP +Similarly, if you want to do a search of the personnel database, +you can do the command line +.ce +library -4 -p waldstein, r k +.PP +Requests for objects that can be meaningfully described with one +line can be entered on the command line. +This includes the things orderable by options 1, 3, 4, and 6. +Note that library tries in this case to function with a minimum +of interaction. +For example, if you request a TM this way, +you will not be given a chance to enter remarks connected with the request. +.PP +When permitted, the command line requests can include more than one item +(presently only options 1 and 3 support this). +An example command line is +.ce +library -1 123456-851234-56tm 5d123 ad-123456 +.PP +In options 2, 5, and 6, +.I library +will prompt for a variety of information of varying complexity. +A period (.) at any point in this session will delete the +request being entered. +Blank lines (just hit return) will cause optional information to +be left out of the request. +A line consisting of tilde e (\~e) will, when a long response is +permitted, put you into an editor. +This editor defaults to ed(1). +However, if the environment variable EDITOR is set, the specified +editor is used. +A line consisting of tilde r (\~r) will, when a long response is +permitted, read in the indicated file. +.PP +Option 7 is a misfit, in that it is primarily a reader, not a +request transmitter; although it does allow requesting items. +This option is intended for reading electronic transmissions +from the library network: primarily responses to option 4 search +requests and ASAP (specialized searches like electronic Mercury). +A convenient way to use option 7 is to invoke it via a pipe +from mail(1), mailx(1) or post(1). +.ce + | 3 "library -7" +This assumes that mail message 3 consists of a search result. +The quote marks are required due to post(1) and mailx(1) syntax. +.PP +Break causes +.I library +to exit +without sending any requests. +.PP +In general for more information about what the library command can +do, go into each option and enter a question mark. +This will cause a description of how the option works and +what it can request. +.PP +Several other pieces of information can be passed +to +.I library +to ease and improve its usage. +This information is looked up in a file called .lib (or the file indicated +by the LIBFILE shell variable). +It expects this file to contain lines of the form: +.sp +.ti 10 +ID: \f2individual's PAN or Social Security Number\f1 +.ti 10 +libname: \f2individual's last name\f1 +.ti 10 +liblog: \f2name of log file\f1 +.ti 10 +libcntl: \f2control information\f1 +.ti 10 +reader: \f2reader control information\f1 +.ti 10 +liblocal: \f2control information\f1 +.PP +If this file is not found or lines of this form are not found, +then +.I library +prompts for name and ID (PAN or SS#). +.PP +This information can also be passed to +.I library +as the shell parameters: LIBID, LIBNAME, LIBLOG, LIBCNTL, and LIBLOCAL. +.PP +.I library +keeps a log of requests sent via library if a line in the .lib +file exists giving a log file name, i.e., if you have in +your .lib file a line of the form +.ce +liblog: \f2name of log file\f1 +.PP +.I library +keeps a log of requests in that file. +This file is created in a form that can be read and manipulated +by the +.I mail +command. +To read or modify the log file, type +.ce +mail -f \f2name of log file\f1 +.PP +.I library +creates the log file in your HOME directory unless the file name +given starts with a slash (/). +.I library +will automatically check option 1 requests +for duplicates in the log file. +.PP +The libcntl information is sent with the request to the program +that receives the requests for the library networks. +Control information containing the letter ``a'' +will cause an acknowledgement to be mailed back to you that +your request has been received. +Control information of the form ``m\f2number\f1''will determine the +maximum number of items retrieved by a search request. +For example, a control line of the form +.sp +.ce +libcntl: am100 +.PP +will cause requests to be acknowledged and a maximum of 100 retrieved +search items to be mailed back to you. +.PP +The reader control information is intended to let you personalize +the way +.I library +option 7 works for you. +Each letter after the colon indicates a different option turned +on or off. +Presently available are the following: +.RS +.TP 5 +b +causes library -7 to leave a +blank line between records when more than one is displayed on the screen. +.TP 5 +c +causes +.I library +to confirm that you want the entered requests transmitted. +It does this at the end of the session, before finishing. +.TP 5 +n +is an interesting features causing no introductory menu +of available announcements to be displayed. +The reader then goes straight into the first announcement to be read, +and moves directly from one announcement to the next, without +displaying the menu of those available at each stage. +.RE +.PP +The liblocal information is used to control the execution of +.I library. +Presently the only meaningful control is \f2x\fP. +This causes library(1) to assume you are an expert and the +prompts are generally much shorter. +.PP +.I library +also uses your .lib file to save various repetitious responses +for its own use. +These will prevent you from having to duplicate responses. +.PD +.SH BUGS +.I library +checks upon input whether the request is reasonable. +New styles of request numbers require program modification +before they are valid. +.PD +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 15 +$HOME/.lib +This optional file contains a PAN and name for +.I library +to use. +.TP 15 +/usr/lib/library/library.help +The help message displayed by library. +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +mail(1), post(1), mailx(1) +.\" @(#)library.1 1.12 11/26/90 RnD added diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lim.1 b/static/v10/man1/lim.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..946c7a10 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lim.1 @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +.TH LIM 1 SHARE +.SH NAME +lim \- change shares for users +.SH SYNOPSIS +\fBlim\fP limit{+|\-|=}string[,string...][;...] \-|name|uid-uid|uid\fB..\fP ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lim +changes shares file records for several users, +a range of uids +or a list from standard input. +The changeable limits are designated by their names as defined +in the files +.IR , +and +.I +as follows: +.TP "\w'lastusedXXXXXX'u" +.B charge +Long term account charge. +.TP +.B flags +The only specifiable flag is:- +.IR notshared . +Only the first few letters needed to ensure a unique match are required. +.TP +.B lastused +Date account last used. +.TP +.B sgroup +Scheduling group for the account. +.TP +.B shares +Allocated shares. +.TP +.B usage +Usage for scheduling. +.PP +The next character designates that the limit is to be +incremented (\c +\fB+\fR\c +), decremented (\c +\fB\-\fR\c +), or set (\c +\fB=\fR\c +). +.PP +The third group of characters is interpreted as a number, +a date (if the string contains a `/'), +or as a string +(or as a comma-separated list) +depending on the type of limit being changed. +However, if the first character is '\fB?\fR', +then an explanation of the +options available with the given limit will be listed. +.PP +Additional limits are specified by a semi-colon separated list. +.PP +If any following argument is just a `\fB\-\fR', +then the standard input is read for a list of user names, +one per line. +If any following argument \fIcontains\fP a `\fB\-\fR' +then it is interpreted as a range of uids, +otherwise if it ends in trailing dots (eg: 100\fB..\fR) +it is interpreted as a range running from the first uid up to the +maximum number of registered users. +Otherwise the argument is interpreted as a name. +.PP +A list of valid limits is printed out if +.I lim +is invoked with invalid arguments (or no arguments). +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 16 +/etc/shares +for share details. +.TP +/etc/passwd +for user names and \s-1ID\s0s. +.PD +.SH SEE ALSO +pl(1), lnode(5), shares(5). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.TP +\&... could not change kernel lnode ... +The limits system call failed for a logged in user, +usually because you are attempting to change a scheduling group +to one that isn't currently active. +.SH BUGS +.I Lim +does not use +.IR getshput (3), +so be careful something else is not updating the same entry simultaneously. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/limits.1 b/static/v10/man1/limits.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9beee8c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/limits.1 @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +UCHAR_MAX: 000000ff=255 +USHRT_MAX: 0000ffff=65535 +UINT_MAX: ffffffff=-1 +ULONG_MAX: ffffffff=-1 +CHAR_MAX: 0000007f=127 +SCHAR_MAX: 0000007f=127 +SHRT_MAX: 00007fff=32767 +INT_MAX: 7fffffff=2147483647 +LONG_MAX: 7fffffff=2147483647 +CHAR_MIN: ffffff80=-128 +SCHAR_MIN: ffffff80=-128 +SHRT_MIN: ffff8000=-32768 +INT_MIN: 80000000=-2147483648 +LONG_MIN: 80000000=-2147483648 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 b/static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63ddb0ef --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/linkdata.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.TH LINKDATA 1 +.SH NAME +link \- group data files into the text segment of a .o file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B linkdata file1 file2 ... +.br +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +.IR linkdata +reads the named files and generates an a.out-format file on the +standard output. The resulting file is as if it were assembled from +the following .s file. (The files can be rather long, so it's not +a good idea to make an actual assembly language file.) +.DS L +.ft C + .text + .globl datalist + .set datalist, 1f+4 # if there are no files, use ".set datalist, 1" + +# repeat the following for each file + .align 2 +1: .long 0x31 + .long 2f+4 + .long 3f+4 + .long 1f+4 # for the last file, use .long 1 instead +2: .long strlen("filename")*16+15 + .ascii "filename" + .align 2 +3: .word length(contents of file1)*16+15 + .byte [contents of file 1] + .align 2 + +.ft R +.DE diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lint.1 b/static/v10/man1/lint.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c9d3ee1 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lint.1 @@ -0,0 +1,319 @@ +.TH LINT 1 +.CT 1 prog_c +.SH NAME +lint, cyntax, cem \- C program verifiers +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lint +[ +.B -abchnpuvx +] [ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B cyntax +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B /usr/lib/cyntax/cem +[ +.I option ... +] +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lint +checks, more thoroughly than +.IR cc (1), +the syntactic validity and semantic consistency of +one or more C program +.I files. +It is assumed that all the +.I files +are to be loaded together; they are checked for +mutual compatibility. +Function definitions for certain libraries are available to +.IR lint ; +these libraries are referred to by a +conventional name, +such as +.LR -lm , +in the style of +.IR ld (1). +.PP +Any number of the option letters in the following list +may be used. +The +.BR -D , +.BR -U , +and +.B -I +options of +.IR cc (1) +are also recognized as separate arguments. +.TP +.B p +Attempt to check portability to some other +dialects of C. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B h +Apply heuristics to +intuit bugs, improve style, and reduce waste. +.TP +.B b +Report +.I break +statements that cannot be reached. +.TP +.B v +Suppress complaints about unused arguments in functions. +.TP +.B x +Report variables referred to by extern declarations, +but never used. +.TP +.B a +Report assignments of long values to int variables. +.TP +.B c +Complain about casts which have questionable portability. +.TP +.B u +Do not complain about functions and variables used and not +defined, or defined and not used (this is suitable for running +.I lint +on a subset of files out of a larger program). +.TP +.B n +Do not check compatibility against the standard library. +.PD +.PP +Certain conventional comments in the C source +will change the behavior of +.IR lint : +.TP +.B /*NOTREACHED*/ +at appropriate points. +Stop comments about unreachable code. +.PD 0 +.TP +.BI /*VARARGS n */ +Suppress +the usual checking for variable numbers of arguments +in the following function declaration. +The data types of the first +.I n +arguments are checked; +a missing +.I n +is taken to be 0. +.TP +.BI /*PRINTFLIKE n */ +The data types of the first +.I n\^ +arguments are checked as usual. +The remaining arguments are +checked +against the +.IR n th +argument, which is interpreted as a +.IR printf (3) +format string. +.TP +.BI /*SCANFLIKE n */ +Similarly for +.IR scanf (3). +.TP +.B /*NOSTRICT*/ +Shut off strict type checking in the next expression. +.TP +.B /*ARGSUSED*/ +Turn on the +.B -v +option for the next function. +.TP +.B /*LINTLIBRARY*/ +at the beginning of a file. Shut off complaints about +unused functions in this file. +.PD +.PP +.I Cyntax +makes checks similar to those of +.I lint, +more stringent about syntax, less observant of portability issues. +It keeps type information gleaned from source files, +whose names end with +.LR .c , +in `object files' with corresponding names ending in +.LR .O . +If all goes well it will cross check among all the +.L .c +and +.L .O +input +.I files. +.PP +Options +.BR -D , +.BR -I , +.BR -U , +.BR -o , +.BR -l +are as in +.IR cc (1), +option +.B -n +is as in +.IR lint . +Options +.BR -O , +.BR -P , +.BR -g , +.BR -p , +and +.BR -s +are ignored. +Other options are: +.TP +.B -c +Suppress cross checking. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B -d +Passed to +.IR cem . +.TP +.B -h +Base object files on the basename of the source file +rather than the full pathname. +.TP +.B -G +Change default directory of include files to +.FR /usr/2include , +pass +.B -lg +to +.I cem +instead of +.BR -lc . +.TP +.B -j +Change default directory of include files to +.FR /usr/jerq/include , +pass +.B -lj +to +.I cem +instead of +.BR -lc . +.TP +.B -k +Change default directory of include files to +.FR /usr/ninclude , +pass +.B -lk +to +.I cem +instead of +.BR -lc . +.TP +.B -w +Enable pedantic warning diagnostics. +.TP +.B -m +equivalent to +.LR "-j -DMUX" . +.TP +.B -v +Report what +.I cyntax +is actually doing. +.TP +.BI -V func : n +Declare function +.I func +to have a variable number of arguments, the first +.I n +of which are to be type checked. +.PD +.PP +.I Cem +(cemantics), the cross-checker, is normally invoked only by +.IR cyntax . +It also has options, some of which +.I cyntax +can't be coerced into providing. +Besides +.B -o +and +.BR -l , +they are: +.TP +.B -m +Don't believe file modification times. +These are normally used to avert redundant type checking. +.PD0 +.TP +.B -d +``Debug'': print ascii version of +.L .O +files on standard output. +.TP +.B -p +Be pedantic about type checking. +.TP +.B -t +Unconditionally include file modification times in diagnostics. +.TP +.B -v +Use a verbose format for type names. +.PD +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/lint/llib-port +.TP +.F /usr/lib/lint/lint[12] +programs +.TP +.F /usr/lib/lint/llib-lc +declarations for standard functions +.TP +.F /usr/lib/lint/llib-port +declarations for portable functions +.TP +.F /usr/include/* +.TP +.F /usr/lib/cyntax/ccom +cyntax proper +.TP +.F /usr/lib/cyntax/libc +type library +.TP +.F /usr/lib/cyntax/libj +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR cc (1), +.IR ld (1) +.br +S. C. Johnson +`Lint, a C Program Checker', in +Bell Laboratories, +.I Unix Programmer's Manual, +Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1983, Vol. 2 +.RI ( "Seventh Edition" ) +.SH BUGS +.IR Exit (2) +and other functions which do not return +are not understood by +.IR lint ; +this causes various lies. +.br +The unnatural default setting of +.I lint +option +.B -b +is intended to hide the ugliness of +C code produced by +.IR yacc (1) +and +.IR lex (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lisp.1 b/static/v10/man1/lisp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ca26f391 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lisp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +.TH LISP 1 "alice sola" +.SH NAME +lisp, liszt, lxref \- lisp interpreter and compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lisp +.PP +.B liszt +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I source +] +.PP +.B lxref +[ +.RB \- n +] +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lisp +interprets Franz Lisp, which closely resembles MIT's Maclisp. +Interpreted functions may be mixed with code compiled by +.I liszt, +and both may be debugged using the +`Joseph Lister' trace package. +.LP +There are too many functions to list here; one should refer to the +manuals listed below. +.PP +.I Liszt +compiles the lisp +.I source +file, whose name ends in +.BR .l , +into an object file, whose name ends in +.BR .o . +The following options are available. +.TP +.B \-w +suppress warning diagnostics +.TP +.B \-q +suppress compilation statistics +.TP +.BI \-o " object" +put object code in specified file +.TP +.B \-m +source is Maclisp +.TP +.B \-u +source is UCI Lisp +.TP +.B \-S +leave assembler input in file suffixed +.BR .s ; +do not finish compilation +.TP +.B \-x +place cross-reference list in file suffixed +.B .x +to be used by +.I lxref. +.PP +.I Liszt +with no arguments is the same as +.I lisp. +The compiler may be invoked from the interpreter: +.IP +( liszt [options] foo) +.LP +compiles file `foo.l'. +.PP +.I Lxref +writes to the standard output a readable form of +the named cross-reference files. +Not more than +.I n +(default 50) references to any function will be printed. +.SH FILES +.ta \w'/usr/lib/list/machacks.l 'u +/usr/lib/lisp/auxfns0.l common functions +.br +/usr/lib/lisp/auxfns1.l less common functions +.br +/usr/lib/lisp/trace.l Joseph Lister trace package +.br +/usr/lib/lisp/toplevel.l top level read-eval-print loop +.br +/usr/lib/lisp/machacks.l Maclisp compatibility package +.br +/usr/lib/list/ucifnc.l UCI Lisp compatibility package +.SH SEE ALSO +`F\s-2RANZ\s0\ L\s-2ISP\s0 Manual, Version 1' +by John K. Foderaro +.br +M\s-2ACLISP\s0 Manual +.SH "BUGS" +The error system is in a state of flux and not all error messages are +as informative as they could be. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ln.1 b/static/v10/man1/ln.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80c55e9e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ln.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'LN (I)'3/15/72'LN (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME ln -- make a link +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS ln__ name\d1\u [ name\d2\u ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION ln__ creates a link to an existing file name\d1\u. +If name\d2\u is given, the link has that name; +otherwise it is placed in the current directory +and its name is the last component +of name\d1\u. +.sp +It is forbidden to link to a directory +or to link across file systems. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO rm(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS There is nothing particularly +wrong with ln__, but links don't work right with respect +to the backup system: one copy is backed up for each link, and +(more serious) in case of a file system reload +both copies are restored and the information that a link was involved +is lost. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/load.1 b/static/v10/man1/load.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c4133a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/load.1 @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +.TH LOAD 1 +.CT 1 sa_mortals +.SH NAME +load \(mi load statistics +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B load +[ +.I interval +[ +.I count +[ +.I sysfile +[ +.I corefile +] +] +] +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Load +reports the number of +processes ready to run averaged over the preceding 1, 5, and 15 minutes. +.PP +The optional +.I interval +argument causes +a report once each +.I interval +seconds. +The first report is for all time since a reboot and each +subsequent report is for the last interval only. +.PP +The optional +.I count +argument restricts the number of reports. +.PP +The optional arguments +.I sysfile +and +.I corefile +cause the named files to be consulted instead of the defaults, +.F /unix +and +.FR /dev/kmem . +.SH FILES +.F /dev/kmem +.br +.F /unix +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR vismon (9.1), +.IR ps (1), +.IR vmstat (8) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 b/static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..a850c376 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/loadfont.1 @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH LOADFONT 1 "630 MTG" +.XE "loadfont" +.SH NAME +loadfont \- font managing program +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B +loadfont [\-r name,name...] [\-p directory] [\-s] [\-c] [file...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I loadfont +program lets the user load and remove fonts from the terminal's cache. +It will download its terminal side which interacts with +the user. The command line arguments have the following meanings: +.PP +.TP 12 +\fB\-r\fR +Removes the given font from the terminal's cache. +.PP +.TP 12 +\fB\-p\fR +Sets default search path for font files. If this isn't set, +it defaults to $DMD/termfonts. All the file names in this directory +are put in the load submenu. +.TP 12 +\fB\-s\fR +Makes loadfont stay running after executing the earlier command line options. +.PP +.TP 12 +\fB\-c\fR +Causes loadfont to be cached in the 630 MTG cache system. When +this option is used, the loadfont program will remain in the +terminal after the program exits. Then, the next time loadfont +is executed, it will not have to be downloaded again. +.sp +Another effect of downloading loadfont with the \-c option is +that it can be executed in more than one window without +additional downloading. +.PP +.TP 12 +\fBfile\fR +Loads the given font file into the terminal's cache. +.PP +If a \f3file\f1 argument and/or the +\f3\-r\f1 option are given, loadfont will exit after +loading/removing the specified fonts, unless the \f3\-s\f1 is +also given to make it stay running. +.PP +The user interacts with +.I loadfont +by using a button 2 menu and, when prompted, the keyboard. +When button 2 is depressed, a menu with the following items appears. +.PP +.TP 8 +\fBLoad\fR +Load has a submenu of fonts that can be downloaded. +The fonts listed are all the files in the default search directory. +If the first item, Keyboard, is selected, the user is prompted +for the name of a font file to download. +.PP +.TP 8 +\fBRemove\fR +Remove has a submenu of all the fonts in the terminal's cache. +Selecting one will remove it from the cache and free the memory +it was using. Fonts in ROM or being used by another process +will be greyed in the menu and cannot be removed. +.PP +.TP 8 +\fBQuit\fR +Will make the program exit. +.PP +While a font is downloading, the button 2 menu will have only +one item, Terminate Download. Selecting it will stop the download +and switch the user back to the original menu. +.PP +The three fonts in ROM, resident to the 630 MTG, are called "small +font," "medium font," and "large font." Brief descriptions of these +fonts follow. +.PP +In the tables, +.I cell size +indicates the dimensions of the rectangle containing the character +image. All the characters in a particular font have the same cell size. +.I Character size +is the dimension of the largest character in the font. +.I Max chars +indicates how many characters in that font size will fit +horizontally and vertically in a full screen +window. See the section on fonts in the +\f2630 MTG Software Development Guide\f1 +for more information on font data structures. +.sp +.TS +center, box, tab(~); +lb | l. +Font Name~small font +Character Size~6 pixels wide by 9 pixels high +Cell Size~7 pixels wide by 14 pixels high +Max Chars~140 across, 69 down +_ +Font Name~medium font +Character Size~8 pixels wide by 11 pixels high +Cell Size~9 pixels wide by 14 pixels high +Max Chars~109 across, 69 down +_ +Font Name~large font +Character Size~9 pixels wide by 12 pixels high +Cell Size~11 pixels wide by 16 pixels high +Max Chars~89 across, 61 down +_ +.TE +.bp +.SH FILES +The default search path for font files is $DMD/termfonts. This +directory contains nine fonts. +.sp 2 +.TS +center, box, tab(~); +lb | l. +Font Name~noseprint +Character Size~5 pixels wide by 7 pixels high +Cell Size~6 pixels wide by 9 pixels high +Max Chars~163 across, 108 down +Comments~The characters are a single pixel thick and all +~are smaller than the characters found in the +~resident "small font". +_ +Font Name~7x14thin +Character Size~6 pixels wide by 9 pixels high +Cell Size~7 pixels wide by 14 pixels high +Max Chars~140 across, 69 down +Comments~The difference between "7x14thin" and the resident +~"small font" is in the thickness of the characters. +~The "7x14thin" consists of characters which are a +~single pixel in thickness whereas the "small font" +~consists of characters which are two pixels in thickness. +_ +.TE +.bp +.TS +center, box, tab(~); +lb | l. +Font Name~12x18norm +Character Size~10 pixels wide by 13 pixels high +Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 18 pixels high +Max Chars~81 across, 54 down +Comments~The characters are 2 pixels thick. +_ +Font Name~12x25thin +Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high +Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high +Max Chars~81 across, 39 down +Comments~The characters are a single pixel thick. +_ +Font Name~12x25norm +Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high +Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high +Max Chars~81 across, 39 down +Comments~The characters are 2 pixels thick. +_ +Font Name~12x25round +Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high +Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high +Max Chars~81 across, 39 down +Comments~The main difference between this font and the +~font called "12x25norm" is in the STYLE of the +~characters. The characters in "12x25round" are +~rounder in appearance, whereas the characters in +~"12x25norm" are squarer in appearance. +_ +Font Name~12x25BOLD +Character Size~9 pixels wide by 18 pixels high +Cell Size~12 pixels wide by 25 pixels high +Max Chars~81 across, 39 down +Comments~The characters are 3 pixels thick. +_ +Font Name~script +Character Size~15 pixels wide (approx.) by 15 pixels high +Cell Size~16 pixels wide by 24 pixels high +Max Chars~61 across, 40 down +Comments~The characters in this font are created in +~script style. +_ +Font Name~twice_big +Character Size~18 pixels wide by 24 pixels high +Cell Size~22 pixels wide by 32 pixels high +Max Chars~44 across, 30 down +Comments~The characters are twice as tall and twice as +~wide as the resident "large font" +_ +.TE +.bp +.SH SEE ALSO +ucache(1), font(4). +.br +\f2630 MTG Software Development Guide\f1. +.SH WARNING +.P +Fonts that do not have 128 characters require the proper +parity setting when used in the default window process in the +non-layers environment. This is needed because a mod is done +on characters received from the host with the number of +characters in the font being used. +.P +This implies that parity bits are ignored for fonts with +exactly 128 characters, since c&0x7F == c%128. Fonts with less +than 128 characters need identical parity settings on the host +and in the terminal so that parity bits get stripped properly. +Characters with more than 128 characters require 8 bits with +no parity on both the host and in the terminal, because the +eighth bit is used to access characters greater than +128. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/login.1 b/static/v10/man1/login.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d979e088 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/login.1 @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'LOGIN (I)'3/15/72'LOGIN (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME login -- sign onto UNIX +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS login_____ [ username [ password ] ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION The login_____ command +is used when a user initially +signs onto UNIX, or it may be used at any time to change +from one user to another. +The latter case is the one summarized above and +described here. +See login_____ (VII) for how to dial up initially. + +If login_____ is invoked without an argument, +it will ask for a user name, and, if +appropriate, a password. +Echoing is turned off (if possible) during the typing of the password, +so it will not appear on the written record of the +session. +.sp +After a successful login, +accounting files are updated and +the user is informed of the +existence of mailbox +and message-of-the-day files. + +Login is recognized by the Shell +and executed directly (without forking). +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /tmp/utmp accounting +.br +/tmp/wtmp accounting +.br +mailbox mail +.br +/etc/motd message-of-the-day +/etc/passwd password file +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO login(VII), init(VII), getty(VII), mail(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "login incorrect", +if the name or the password is bad. +"No Shell,", "cannot open password file," "no directory:" +consult a UNIX programming councilor. +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/look.1 b/static/v10/man1/look.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9db99ab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/look.1 @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +.TH LOOK 1 +.CT 1 files +.SH NAME +look \(mi find lines in a sorted list +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B look +[ +.BI -dfnixt c +] +[ +.I string +] +[ +.I file +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Look +consults a sorted +.I file +and prints all lines that begin with +.IR string . +It uses binary search. +.PP +The following options are recognized. +Options +.BI dfnt c +affect comparisons as in +.IR sort (1). +.TP +.B -i +Interactive. +There is no +.I string +argument; instead +.I look +takes lines from the standard input as strings to be looked up. +.TP +.B -x +Exact. +Print only lines of the file whose key matches +.I string +exactly. +.TP +.B -d +`Directory' order: +only letters, digits, +tabs and blanks participate in comparisons. +.TP +.B -f +Fold. +Upper case letters compare equal to lower case. +.TP +.B -n +Numeric comparison with initial string of digits, optional minus sign, +and optional decimal point. +.TP +.BI -t c +`Tab character' +.I c +terminates the sort key in the +.I file. +.PP +If no +.I file +is specified, +.F /usr/dict/words +is assumed, with collating sequence +.BR df . +.SH FILES +.F /usr/dict/words +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR sort (1), +.IR gre (1), +.IR dict (7) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.I Look +returns exit status 0 if +.I string +is found, 1 if not found, 2 for error. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lorder.1 b/static/v10/man1/lorder.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..233f7d6a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lorder.1 @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +.TH LORDER 1 +.CT 1 lib_obj +.SH NAME +lorder \(mi find ordering relation for an object library +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lorder +.I file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The input +is one or more object or library archive (see +.IR ar (1)) +.I files. +The standard output +is a list of pairs of object file names, +meaning that the first file of the pair refers to +external identifiers defined in the second. +The output may be processed by +.IR tsort (1) +to find an ordering of +a library suitable for one-pass sequential access by +.IR ld (1). +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +ar cr libnew.a \`lorder *.o | tsort\` +Build a new library from existing +.B .o +files. +.SH FILES +.F /tmp/*symref +.br +.F /tmp/*symdef +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR ar (1), +.IR tsort (1), +.IR ld (1) +.SH BUGS +The names of object files, in and out of libraries, must end with +.BR .o ; +nonsense results otherwise. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lp.1 b/static/v10/man1/lp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d81c365 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +.TH LP 1 +.CT 1 writing_output comm_dev +.SH NAME +lp \- printer output +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lp +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lp +is a generalized output printing service. +It can be used to queue files for printing, +check a queue, or kill jobs in a queue. +The options are: +.TF -p\ \fIproc\fP +.TP +.BI -d " dest" +Select the destination printer. +If +.I dest +is +.LR ? , +list the currently available printers. +In the absence of +.LR -d , +the destination is taken from the environment variable +.BR LPDEST , +or finally from the file +.FR /usr/spool/lp/defdevice . +Destination +.L stdout +is the standard output. +.TP +.BI -p " proc" +The given preprocessor is invoked. +The default preprocessor is +.LR generic , +which tries to do the right thing for regular text, +.IR troff (1) +output, or +.IR bitfile (9.5) +bitmaps. +If no preprocessing is desired +(e.g. an ImPress file from +.L dviimp +is to be printed) +.L noproc +may be specified. +.TP +.B -q +Print the queue for the given destination. +For some devices, include printer status. +.TP +.B -k +Kill the job(s) given as subsequent arguments instead of file names +for the given destination. +.PD +.PP +The remaining options may be used to affect the output at a given device. +These options may not be applicable to all devices. +.TF -p\ \fIproc\fP +.TP +.BI -c " n" +Print +.I n +copies. +.TP +.BI -f " font" +Set the font (default +.LR CW.11 ). +.TP +.BI -H +Suppress printing of header page. +.TP +.BI -i " n" +Select paper input tray options +.I n. +The value +.I n +may be a comma separated list. +.TP +.BI -l " n" +Set the number of lines per page to +.I n. +.TP +.B -L +Print pages in landscape mode (i.e. turned 90 degrees). +.TP +.BI -m " n" +Set magnification to +.I n. +.TP +.BI -n " n" +Print +.I n +logical pages per physical page. +.TP +.BI -o " list" +Print only pages whose page numbers appear in +the comma-separated +.I list +of numbers and ranges. +A range +.IB n - m +means pages +.I n +through +.IR m ; +a range +.BI - n +means from the beginning to page +.IR n ; +a range +.IB n - +means from page +.I n +to the end. +.TP +.B -r +Reverse the order of page printing (currently not functional). +.TP +.BI -x " n" +Set the horizontal +offset of the print image, measured in inches. +.TP +.BI -y " n" +Set the vertical +offset of the print image, measured in inches. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP 0 +.L +eqn paper | troff -ms | lp +Typeset and print a paper that contains equations. +.TP +.L +pr -l100 file | lp -l100 -fCW.8 +Print a file in a small font at 100 lines per page. +.TP +.L +lp -dstdout -H postfile +Convert a bitmap to postscript form. +Use +.IR mpictures (6) +macros to insert the output into a +.I troff +document. +.TP +.L +lp -du -H -i2,simplex viewgraphs.dvi +will take input from the second paper tray and print single sided, +even if the printer defaults to double sided (duplex) output. +Do not print a header page. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/spool/lp/defdevice +.TP +.F /usr/spool/lp/defdevice +default printer name +.TP +.F /usr/spool/lp/devices +printer list with interface specification +.TP +.F /usr/spool/lp/process +directory of preprocessors +.TP +.F /usr/spool/lp/prob/* +where printer jobs go when things go awry +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR pr (1), +.IR blitblt (9.1), +.IR plot (1), +.IR font (6), +.IR postio (8), +.IR postscript (8) +.SH BUGS +Not all options work with all output devices. +.br +Any user can kill any job. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/lpr.1 b/static/v10/man1/lpr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac3e644e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/lpr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +.TH LPR 1 alice +.CT 1 comm_dev +.SH NAME +lpr \(mi line printer spooler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lpr +[ +.B -m +] +[ +.I name ... +] +.PP +.B lp0 +[ +.I name ... +] +.PP +.B lp1 +[ +.I name ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lpr +causes the +named files +to be queued and then printed off line. +If no files are named, the standard input is read. +The option +.B -m +causes notification via +.IR mail (1) +to be sent when the job completes. +.PP +.I Lp0 +and +.I lp1 +direct output to particular printers. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/spool/lpd/* +.TP +.F /usr/spool/lpd/* +spool area +.TP +.F /usr/lib/lpd +printer daemon +.TP +.F /usr/lib/lpfx +filter to handle banners and underlining +.SH SEE\ ALSO +.IR pr (1), +.IR thinkblt (9.1) +.SH BUGS +Queued jobs print in directory (seemingly random) order. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ls.1 b/static/v10/man1/ls.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb49b736 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ls.1 @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ +.TH LS 1 +.CT 1 files dirs +.SH NAME +ls, lc \(mi list contents of directory +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ls +[ +.B -acdfilrstuFLR +] +.I name ... +.PP +.B lc +[ +.I options +] +.I name ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +For each directory argument, +.I ls +lists the contents of the directory; +for each file argument, +.I ls +repeats its name and any other information requested. +The output is sorted alphabetically by default. +When no argument is given, the current directory is listed. +When several arguments are given, +the arguments are first sorted, +but file arguments appear +before directories and their contents. +.PP +There are an unbelievable number of options: +.TP +.B -l +List in long format, giving mode (see below), number of links, owner, +group, +size in bytes, and time of last modification +for each file. +Symbolic links are identified by a link count marked +.LR L ; +the link count is that of the ultimate file. +If the file is a special file the size field will instead contain +the major and minor device numbers. +.TP +.B -d +If argument is a directory, list its name, not +its contents. +.TP +.B -t +Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of +by name, as is normal. +.TP +.B -L +Under +.B -l +for each symbolic link +give the immediate, not the ultimate, link count +and append the name pointed to. +.TP +.B -a +List all entries; usually +.F . +and +.F .. +are suppressed. +.TP +.B -c +Under +.B -t +sort by time of inode change; +under +.B -l +print time of inode change. +.TP +.B -f +Force each argument to be interpreted as a directory +and list the name found in each slot. +This option turns off +.BR -l ", " -t ", " -s , +and +.BR -r , +and +turns on +.BR -a ; +the order is the order in which entries +appear in the directory. +.TP +.B -F +cause directories to be marked with a trailing +.L / +and executable +files to be marked with a trailing +.L * +.TP +.B -i +Print i-number in first column +of the report for each file listed. +.TP +.B -r +Reverse the order of sort to get reverse alphabetic +or oldest first as appropriate. +.TP +.B -R +recursively list subdirectories encountered. +.TP +.B -s +Give size in Kbytes for each entry. +.TP +.B -u +Under +.B -t +sort by time of last access; +under +.B -l +print time of last access. +.PP +The mode printed under the +.B -l +option contains 11 characters +which are interpreted +as follows: +the first character is +.TP +.B d +if the entry is a directory; +.PD 0 +.TP +.B b +if the entry is a block-type special file; +.TP +.B c +if the entry is a character-type special file; +.TP +.B l +if the entry is a symbolic link and option +.B -L +is in effect; +.TP +.B - +if the entry is a plain file. +.PD +.PP +The next 9 characters are interpreted +as three sets of three bits each. +The first set refers to owner permissions; +the next to permissions to others in the same user-group; +and the last to all others. +Within each set the three characters indicate +permission respectively to read, to write, or to +execute the file as a program. +For a directory, `execute' permission is interpreted +to mean permission to search the directory +for a specified file. +The permissions are indicated as follows: +.TP 3 +.B r +if the file is readable; +.PD 0 +.TP 3 +.B w +if the file is writable; +.TP 3 +.B x +if the file is executable; +.TP 3 +.B - +if the indicated permission is not granted. +.PD +.PP +The group-execute permission character is given +as +.B s +if the file has set-group-ID mode; +likewise the user-execute permission character is given +as +.B s +if the file has set-user-ID mode. +.PP +The last character of the mode (normally a blank) +indicates the type of concurrency control: +.TP +.B e +if the file is set for exclusive access (1 writer or +.I n +readers); +.PD 0 +.TP +.B y +if the file is set for synchronized access (1 writer and +.I n +readers); +.PD 0 +.TP +.B a +if the file is set for append-only (all writes happen at end); +.PD 0 +.TP +.B b +if the file is blinded. +(Blind directories are unreadable.) +.PD +.PP +.I Lc +is the same as +.I ls, +but prints the list in multiple columns. +.SH FILES +.FR /etc/passwd +.br +.FR /etc/group +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR stat (2) +.SH BUGS +Option +.B -s +counts unwritten holes as if they were real data. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/m.1 b/static/v10/man1/m.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1df70e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/m.1 @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +nCC -O -c alloc.c +nCC -O -c dcl.c +nCC -O -c dcl2.c +nCC -O -c dcl3.c +nCC -O -c dcl4.c +nCC -O -c del.c +nCC -O -c error.c +nCC -O -c expand.c +nCC -O -c expr.c +nCC -O -c expr2.c +nCC -O -c expr3.c +nCC -O -c find.c +nCC -O -c lalex.c +nCC -O -c lex.c +nCC -DMUNCH -O -c main.c +nCC -O -c norm.c +nCC -O -c norm2.c +nCC -O -c print.c +nCC -O -c print2.c +nCC -O -c repr.c +nCC -O -c simpl.c +nCC -O -c simpl2.c +nCC -O -c size.c +nCC -O -c table.c +nCC -O -c typ.c +nCC -O -c typ2.c +yacc gram.y + +conflicts: 13 shift/reduce, 3 reduce/reduce +nCC -DGRAM -O -c y.tab.c +nCC -o cfront -O alloc.o dcl.o dcl2.o dcl3.o dcl4.o del.o error.o expand.o expr.o expr2.o expr3.o find.o lalex.o lex.o main.o norm.o norm2.o print.o print2.o repr.o simpl.o simpl2.o size.o table.o typ.o typ2.o y.tab.o diff --git a/static/v10/man1/m4.1 b/static/v10/man1/m4.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e2fd5c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/m4.1 @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ +.TH M4 1 +.CT 1 prog_c +.SH NAME +m4 \(mi macro processor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B m4 +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I M4\^ +is a macro processor +intended as a front end for C and other languages. +Each of the argument files is processed in order; +if there are no files, or if a file name is +.BR - , +the standard input is read. +The processed text is written on the standard output. +.PP +The options and their effects are as follows: +.TP +.B -e +Operate interactively. +Interrupts are ignored and the output is unbuffered. +Using this mode requires a special state of mind. +.TP +.B -s +Enable line sync output for the C preprocessor, +.RB ( #line " .\|.\|.\|)" +.TP +.BI -B int\^ +Change the size of the push-back and argument collection +buffers from the default of 4,096. +.TP +.BI -H int\^ +Change the size of the symbol table hash array from the +default of 199. +The size should be prime. +.TP +.BI -S int\^ +Change the size of the call stack from the default of 100 slots. +Macros take three slots, and non-macro arguments take one. +.TP +.BI -T int\^ +Change the size of the token buffer from the default of 512 bytes. +.PP +The preceding options must appear before any +file names or +.B -D +or +.B -U +options. +.TP +\f5-D\fP\f2name\^\fP[\f5=\fP\f2val\^\fP] +Defines +.I name\^ +to +.I val\^ +or to null if +.I val +is missing. +.TP +.BI -U name\^ +undefines +.IR name . +.PP +Macro calls +have the form: +.IP +.L name(arg1,arg2, .\|.\|., argn) +.PP +The +.B ( +must immediately follow the name of the macro. +If a defined macro name is not followed by a +.BR ( , +it is deemed to have no arguments. +Leading unquoted blanks, tabs, and new-lines are ignored while collecting arguments. +Potential macro names consist of alphabetic letters, +digits, and underscore +.BR _ , +where the first character is not a digit. +.PP +Left and right single quotes are used to quote strings. +The value of a quoted string is the string stripped of the quotes. +.PP +When a macro name is recognized, +its arguments are collected by searching for a matching right +parenthesis. +Macro evaluation proceeds normally during the collection of the arguments, +and any commas or right parentheses +which happen to turn up within the value of a nested +call are as effective as those in the original input text. +After argument collection, +the value of the macro is pushed back onto the input stream +and rescanned. +.PP +The value of a macro is obtained by replacing +each occurrence of +.BI $ n\^ +in the replacement text, +where +.I n\^ +is a digit, +with the +.IR n -th +argument. +Argument 0 is the name of the macro; +missing arguments are replaced by the null string; +.B $# +is replaced by the number of arguments; +.B $* +is replaced by a list of all the arguments separated by commas; +.B $@ +is like +.BR $* , +but each argument is quoted (with the current quotes). +.PP +.I M4\^ +makes available the following built-in macros. +They may be redefined, but once this is done the original meaning is lost. +Their values are null unless otherwise stated. +.TP 12 +.B define +the second argument is installed as the replacement text of the macro +whose name is the first argument. +.TP +.B undefine +Remove the definition of the macro named in the argument. +.TP +.B defn +Return the quoted definition of the argument(s); +useful for renaming macros, especially built-ins. +.TP +.B pushdef +Like +.IR define , +but save any previous definition. +.TP +.B popdef +Remove current definition of the argument(s), +exposing the previous one if any. +.TP +.B ifdef +If the first argument is defined, the value is the second argument, otherwise the third. +If there is no third argument, the value is null. +The word +.L unix\^ +is predefined on +.SM UNIX +versions of +.IR m4 . +.TP +.B shift +Return all but the first argument. +The other arguments pushed back with +commas in between and quoted to +nullify the effect of the extra scan. +.TP +.B changequote +Change quote symbols to the first and second arguments. +The symbols may be up to five characters long. +.B Changequote\^ +without arguments restores the original values +(i.e., +.LR `\|' ). +.TP +.B changecom +Change left and right comment markers from the default +.B # +and new-line. +With no arguments, the comment mechanism is effectively +disabled. +With one argument, the left marker becomes the argument and +the right marker becomes new-line. +With two arguments, both markers are affected. +Comment markers may be up to five characters long. +.TP +.B divert +.I m4\^ +Switch output to one of 10 streams, +numbered 0-9 designated by the argument. +The final output is the concatenation of the streams +in numerical order; +stream 0 is the current initially. +Output to a stream other than 0 through 9 +is discarded. +.TP +.B undivert +Cause immediate output of text from diversions named as +arguments, or all diversions if no argument. +Text may be undiverted into another diversion. +Once undiverted, the diverted text is no longer contained in that diversion. +.TP +.B divnum +Return the name of the current output stream. +.TP +.B dnl +reads and discards characters up to and including the next new-line. +.TP +.B ifelse +If the first argument is the same string as the second, +then the value is the third argument. +If not, and if there are more than four arguments, the process is repeated with arguments 4, 5, 6 and 7. +Otherwise, the value is either the fourth string, or, if that is not present, +null. +.TP +.B incr +Return the value of the argument incremented by 1. +The value of the argument is calculated +by interpreting an initial digit-string as a decimal number. +.TP +.B decr +Return the value of the argument decremented by 1. +.TP +.B eval +Evaluate the argument as an arithmetic expression, using 32-bit arithmetic. +C-like operators include +.BR +-*/% , +bitwise +.BR &|^~ ; +relationals; parentheses. +Octal and hex numbers may be specified as in C. +The second argument specifies the radix for the result; +the default is 10. +The third argument may be used to specify the minimum number +of digits in the result. +.TP +.B len +Returns the number of characters in the argument. +.TP +.B index +Return the position in the first argument where the second argument begins (zero origin), +or \-1 if the second argument does not occur. +.TP +.B substr +Return a substring of the first argument. +The second argument is a zero origin +number selecting the first character; +the third argument indicates the length of the substring. +A missing third argument is taken to be large enough to extend to +the end of the first string. +.TP +.B translit +Transliterate the characters in the first argument +from the set given by the second argument to the set given by the third, +deleting characters that lack a correspondent in the third set. +There is no character-range notation. +.TP +.B include +Return the contents of the file named in the argument. +.TP +.B sinclude +Same, but give no diagnostic if the file is inaccessible. +.TP +.B syscmd +Execute the +.SM UNIX +command given in the first argument. +No value is returned. +.TP +.B sysval +The return code from the last call to +.IR syscmd . +.TP +.B maketemp +Fill in a string of +.LR X +characters in the argument with the current process id. +.TP +.B m4exit +Exit immediately from +.IR m4 . +Argument 1, if given, is the exit code; +the default is 0. +.TP +.B m4wrap +Push the argument back at the end of the input. +Example: +.L m4wrap(`cleanup()') +.TP +.B errprint +Prints the argument +on the standard error file. +.TP +.B dumpdef +Print current names and definitions, +for the named items, or for all if no arguments are given. +.TP +.B traceon +If there are no arguments, turn on tracing for all macros +(including built-ins). +Otherwise, turn on tracing for named macros. +.TP +.B traceoff +Turn off trace globally and for any macros specified. +Macros specifically traced by +.B traceon\^ +can be untraced only by specific calls to +.BR traceoff . +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +define(fib,`ifelse(define(`n',eval($1))n,0,1,n,1,1,dnl() +`eval(fib(n-1)+fib($1-2))')')dnl() +fib(2*3) +.EE +.ns +.IP +Recursively evaluate a Fibonacci number. +The inner +.B define +avoids some reevaluations. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/m6.1 b/static/v10/man1/m6.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e36d1037 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/m6.1 @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'M6 (I)'11/15/72'M6 (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME m6 -- general purpose macro processor +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS m6__ +[ -d__ arg1 ] [ arg2 [ arg3 ] ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION m6__ +takes input from file arg2 (or standard input if arg2 is missing) +and places output on file arg3 (or standard output). +A working file of definitions, "m.def", +is initialized from file arg1 if that is supplied. +M6 differs from the standard [1] in these +respects: +.sp +#trace:, #source: and #end: +are not defined. +.sp +#meta,arg1,arg2: transfers the role of metacharacter +arg1 to character arg2. If two metacharacters become identical +thereby, the outcome of further processing is not guaranteed. +For example, to make []{} play the +roles of #:<> type +.sp +.in+5 +\\\#meta,<\\\#>,[: +.br +[meta,<:>,]: +.br +[meta,[substr,<<>>,1,1;,{] +.br +[meta,[substr,{{>>,2,1;,}] +.in-5 +.sp +#del,arg1: deletes the definition of macro arg1. +.sp +#save: and #rest: save and restore the definition table together with +the current metacharacters on file +m.def. +.sp +#def,arg1,arg2,arg3: works as in the standard with the extension +that an integer may be +supplied to arg3 to cause the new macro to perform the +action of a specified builtin before its replacement text is evaluated. +Thus all builtins +except #def: can be retrieved even after deletion. +Codes for arg3 are: +.sp +.in+5 +.nf +0 - no function +1,2,3,4,5,6 - gt,eq,ge,lt,ne,le +7,8 - seq,sne +9,10,11,12,13 - add,sub,mpy,div,exp +20 - if +21,22 - def,copy +23 - meta +24 - size +25 - substr +26,27 - go,gobk +28 - del +29 - dnl +30,31 - save,rest +.fi +.in-5 +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES m.def--working file of definitions +.br +/usr/lang/mdir/m6a--m6 processor proper (/usr/bin/m6 is only an initializer) +.br +/usr/lang/mdir/m6b--default initialization for m.def +.br +/bin/cp--used for copying initial value of m.def +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO [1] A. D. Hall, +The M6 Macroprocessor, Bell Telephone Laboratories, 1969 +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "err" +-- a bug, an unknown builtin or a bad definition table +.br +"oprd"--can't open input or initial definitions +.br +"opwr"--can't open output +.br +"ova" -- overflow of nested arguments +.br +"ovc" -- overflow of calls +.br +"ovd" -- overflow of definitions +.br +"Try again" -- no process available for copying m.def +.br +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS Characters in internal tables are stored +one per word. +They really should be packed to improve capacity. +For want of space (and because of unpacked formats) no file arguments +have been provided to #save: or #rest:, +and no check is made on the actual opening of file m.def. +Again to save space, +garbage collection makes calls on #save: and #rest: and so overwrites +m.def. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mail.1 b/static/v10/man1/mail.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2fa981c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mail.1 @@ -0,0 +1,662 @@ +'\"macro stdmacro +.if n .pH g1.mail %W% of %G% +.nr X +.if \nX=0 .ds x} mail 1 "Essential Utilities" "\&" +.if \nX=1 .ds x} mail 1 "Essential Utilities" +.if \nX=2 .ds x} mail 1 "" "\&" +.if \nX=3 .ds x} mail "" "" "\&" +.TH \*(x} +.SH NAME +\f4mail\f1, \f4rmail\f1 \- read mail or send mail to users +.SH SYNOPSIS +.SS Sending mail: +.PP +\f4mail\f1 +[ +\f4\-tw\f1 +] [ +\f4\-m\f1 +.I message_type +] +\f2recipient . . .\f1 +.PP +\f4rmail\f1 +[ +\f4\-tw\f1 +] [ +\f4\-m\f1 +.I message_type +] +\f2recipient . . .\f1 +.PP +.SS Reading mail: +.PP +\f4mail\f1 +[ +\f4\-ehpPqr\f1 +] [ +\f4\-f\f1 +\f2file\f1 +] +.PP +.SS Forwarding mail: +.PP +\f4mail \-F\fP \f2recipient . . .\f1 +.PP +.SS Debugging: +.PP +\f4mail\fP [ \f4\-x\fP\f2debug_level\fP ] [ \f2other_mail_options\fP ] +\f2recipient . . .\f1 +.PP +\f4mail\f1 +\f4\-T\f1 +.I mailsurr_file +\f2recipient . . .\f1 +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +A +.I recipient\^ +is usually a user name recognized by +\f4login\fP(1). +When +.I recipients\^ +are named, +\f4mail\fP +assumes a message is being sent +(except in the case of the \f4\-F\fP option). +It reads from the standard input up to an end-of-file +(cntrl-d) or, +if reading from a terminal device, +until it reads a line consisting of just a period. +When either of those indicators is received, +\f4mail\fP +adds the +.I letter\^ +to the +.I mailfile +for each +.IR recipient . +.PP +A \f2letter\fP is composed of some \f2header lines\fP followed by a blank +line followed by the \f2message content\fP. +The \f2header lines\fP section of the letter consists of one or more UNIX +postmarks: +.sp .5 +.RS +\f4From\f1 \f2sender date_and_time\f1 [\f4remote from\f1 \f2remote_system_name\f1] +.RE +.sp .5 +followed by one or more standardized message header lines of the form: +.sp .5 +.RS +\f2keyword-name\f4\f4:\f1 [\f2printable text\f1] +.RE +.sp .5 +where \f2keyword-name\fP is comprised of any printable, +non-whitespace, characters other than colon (`:'). +A \f4Content-Length:\fP header line, +indicating the number of bytes in the \f2message content\fP will always be +present. +A \f4Content-Type:\fP header line that describes the type of the +\f2message content\fP (such as text, binary, multipart, etc.) will always +be present unless the letter consists of only header lines with no message +content. +Header lines may be contined on the following line if that line starts with +white space. +.SS Sending mail: +.PP +The following command-line arguments affect SENDING mail: +.PD 0 +.TP +\f4\-m\f1 +causes a \f4Message-Type:\fP line to be added to the message header with +the value of \f2message_type\fP. +.TP +\f4\-t\f1 +causes a \f4To:\f1 line to be added to the message header +for each of the intended recipients. +.TP +\f4\-w\f1 +causes a letter to be sent to a remote recipient without waiting for the +completion of the remote transfer program. +.PD +.PP +If a letter is found to be undeliverable, it is returned to the +sender with diagnostics that indicate the location and nature of the +failure. +If +\f4mail\fP +is interrupted during input, +the message is saved in the file +\f4dead.letter\f1 +to allow editing and resending. +\f4dead.letter\f1 +is always appended to, +thus preserving any previous contents. +The initial attempt to append to (or create) \f4dead.letter\fP will be in the +current directory. +If this fails, \f4dead.letter\fP will be appended to (or created in) the user's +login directory. +If the second attempt also fails, no \f4dead.letter\fP processing will be +done. +.PP +\f4rmail\fP +only permits the sending of mail; +\f4uucp\fP(1C) +uses +\f4rmail\fP +as a security precaution. +Any application programs that generate mail messages should be sure to +invoke \f4rmail\fP rather than \f4mail\fP for message transport and/or +delivery. +.PP +If the local system has the +Basic Networking Utilities installed, +mail may be sent to a recipient on a remote system. +There are numerous ways to address mail to recipients on remote systems +depending on the transport mechanisms available to the local system. +The two most prevalent addressing schemes are UUCP-style and +Domain-style. +With UUCP-style addressing, +remote recipients are specified +by prefixing the recipient name with the remote system name and +an exclamation point (such as sysa!user). +A series of system names separated by exclamation points +can be used to direct a letter through an extended +network (such as \f4sysa!sysb!sysc!user\f1). +With Domain-style addressing, +remote recipients are specified by appending an `\f4@\f1' and domain (and +possibly sub-domain) information to the recipient name +(such as \f4user@sf.att.com\f1). +(The local System Administrator should be consulted for details on which +addressing conventions are available on the local system.) +.PP +.SS Reading Mail: +.PP +The following command-line arguments affect READING mail: +.PD 0 +.TP +\f4\-e\f1 +causes mail not to be printed. +An exit value of 0 is returned if the user has mail; +otherwise, an exit value of 1 is returned. +.TP +\f4\-h\f1 +causes a window of headers to be initially displayed rather than the latest +message. The display is followed by the `\f4?\f1' prompt. +.TP +\f4\-p\f1 +causes all messages to be printed without prompting for disposition. +.TP +\f4\-P\f1 +causes all messages to be printed with \f2all\fP header lines displayed, +rather than the default selective header line display. +.TP +\f4\-q\f1 +causes +\f4mail\fP +to terminate after interrupts. +Normally an interrupt causes only the +termination of the message being printed. +.TP +\f4\-r\f1 +causes messages to be printed in first-in, first-out order. +.TP +\f\B\-f\fP\0\f2file\fP +causes +\f4mail\fP +to use +.I file\^ +(such as +\f4mbox\f1) +instead of the default +.IR mailfile . +.PD +.PP +\f4mail\fP, +unless otherwise influenced by command-line arguments, +prints a user's mail messages +in last-in, first-out order. +The default mode for printing messages is to display only +those header lines of immediate interest. +These include, but are not limited to, +the UNIX \f4From\fP and \f4>From\fP postmarks, +\f4From:\fP, +\f4Date:\fP, +\f4Subject:\fP, +and \f4Content-Length:\fP header lines, +and any recipient header lines such as +\f4To:\fP, +\f4Cc:\fP, +\f4Bcc:\fP, +etc. +After the header lines have been displayed, +\f4mail\fP will display the contents (body) of the message only if it +contains no unprintable characters. +Otherwise, \f4mail\fP will issue a warning statement about the message +having binary content and \f4not\fP display the content. +(This may be overridden via the \f4p\fP command. See below.) +.PP +For each message, +the user is prompted with a +\f4?\f1, +and a line is read from the standard input. +The following commands are available +to determine the disposition of the message: +.PD +.TP 21 +\f4#\f1 +Print the number of the current message. +.TP +\f4\-\f1 +Print previous message. +.TP +, \f4+\f1, or \f4n\f1 +Print the next message. +.TP +\f4!\f2command\^\f1 +Escape to the shell to do +.IR command . +.TP +\f4a\f1 +Print message that arrived during the \f4mail\fP session. +.TP +\f4d\f1, or \f4dp\f1 +Delete the current message and print the next message. +.TP +\f4d \f2n\fP\f1 +Delete message number \f2n\fP. Do not go on to next message. +.TP +\f4dq\f1 +Delete message and quit \f4mail\fP. +.TP +\f4h\f1 +Display a window of headers around current message. +.TP +\f4h \f2n\fP\f1 +Display a window of headers around message number \f2n\fP. +.TP +\f4h a\f1 +Display headers of all messages in the user's \f2mailfile\f1. +.TP +\f4h d\f1 +Display headers of messages scheduled for deletion. +.TP +\f4m\fP [ \f2persons\^\fP ] +Mail (and delete) the current message to the named +\f2person\f1(\f2s\f1). +.TP +.I n +Print message number \f2n\fP. +.TP +\f4p\f1 +Print current message again, +overriding any indications of binary (that is, unprintable) content. +.TP +\f4P\f1 +Override default brief mode and print current message again, +displaying all header lines. +.TP +\f4q\f1, or cntrl-\s-1D\s+1 +Put undeleted mail back in the +.I mailfile\^ +and quit \f4mail\fP. +.TP +\f4r\f1 [ \f2users\^\fP ] +Reply to the sender, and other \f2user(s)\f1, then delete the +message. +.TP +\f4s\fP [ \f2files\^\fP ] +Save message in the named +\f2file\f1(\f2s\f1)\^ +\f1(\f4mbox\f1 +is default) and delete the message. +.TP +\f4u\f1 [ \f2n\fP ] +Undelete message number \f2n\fP (default is last read). +.TP +\f4w\fP [ \f2files\^\fP ] +Save message contents, without any header lines, +in the named +.I files\^ +\f1(\f4mbox\f1 +is default) and delete the message. +.TP +\f4x\f1 +Put all mail back in the +.I mailfile\^ +unchanged and exit \f4mail\fP. +.TP +\f4y\fP [ \f2files\^\fP ] +Same as save. +.TP +\f4?\f1 +Print a command summary. +.PD +.PP +When a user logs in, the presence of mail, +if any, +is usually indicated. +Also, +notification is made if new mail arrives while using +\f4mail\fP. +.PP +The permissions of +.I mailfile\^ +may be manipulated using \f4chgrp\fP in two ways to alter the function of +\f4mail\fP. +The other +permissions of the file may be read-write (0666), read-only (0664), +or neither read nor write (0660) to allow different levels of privacy. +If changed to other than the default (mode 0660), the file will be preserved +even when empty to perpetuate the desired permissions. +(The administrator may override this file preservation using the +\f4DEL_EMPTY_MAILFILE\fP option of \f4mailcnfg\fP.) +.P +The group id of the mailfile must be \f4mail\f1 +to allow new messages to +be delivered, and the mailfile must be writable by group \f4mail\f1. +.SS Forwarding mail: +.PP +The following command-line argument affects FORWARDING of mail: +.sp .5 +.PD 0 +.TP +\f4\-F\fP\0\f2recipients\fP +Causes all incoming mail to be forwarded to +.IR recipients .\^ +The mailbox must be empty. +.PD +.PP +The \f4\-F\fP option causes the \f2mailfile\fP to contain +a first line of: +.sp .5 +.RS +\f4Forward to\f1 \f2recipient\^. . .\f1 +.RE +.sp .5 +Thereafter, all mail sent to the owner of the +.I mailfile\^ +will be forwarded to each +.IR recipient . +.PP +An \f4Auto-Forwarded-From: ...\f1 line +will be added to the forwarded message's header. +This is especially useful +in a multi-machine environment +to forward all a person's mail to a single machine, +and to keep the recipient informed if the mail +has been forwarded. +.PP +Installation and removal of forwarding is done with the +\f4\-F\f1 +invocation option. +To forward all your mail to \f4systema!user\f1 enter: +.sp .5 +.RS +\f4mail -F\0systema!user\f1 +.sp .5 +.RE +.PP +To forward to more than one recipient enter: +.sp .5 +.RS +\f4mail \-F\0"user1,user2@att.com,systemc!systemd!user3"\f1 +.sp .5 +.RE +.PP +Note that when more than one recipient is specified, the entire list +should be enclosed in double quotes so that it may all be +interpreted as the operand of the \f4\-F\f1 option. +The list can be up to 1024 bytes; either commas or white space can +be used to separate users. +.PP +If the first character of any forwarded-to recipient name is the pipe +symbol (`\(bv'), +the remainder of the line will be interpreted as a command to pipe the +current mail message to. +The command, known as a \f2Personal Surrogate\fP, +will be executed in the environment of the recipient of the +message (that is, basename of the \f2mailfile\fP). +For example, if the mailfile is \f4/var/mail/foo\f1, +\f4foo\fP will be looked up in \f4/etc/passwd\f1 +to determine the correct user\s-1ID\s+1, group\s-1ID\s+1, and \f4HOME\f1 directory. +The command's environment will be set to contain only +\f4HOME\f1, \f4LOGNAME\f1, \f4TZ\f1, \f4PATH\f1 +(= \f4/usr/bin:\f1), and \f4SHELL\f1 (= \f4/bin/sh\f1), +and the command will execute in the recipient's \f4HOME\f1 directory. +If the message recipient cannot be found in /etc/passwd, +the command will not be executed and a non-delivery notification with +appropriate diagnostics will be sent to the message's originator. +.PP +After the pipe symbol, escaped double quotes should be used +to have strings with embedded whitespace be considered as single arguments +to the command being executed. +No shell syntax or +metacharacters may be used unless the command specified is \f4/bin/sh\f1. +For example, +.sp .5 +.RS +\f4mail\0\-F\0"\(bv/bin/sh \-c \e"shell_command_line\e""\f1 +.RE +.sp .5 +will work, but is not advised since using double quotes and +backslashes within the shell_command_line is difficult to do correctly and +becomes tedious \f4very\fP quickly. +.PP +Certain %keywords are allowed within the piped-to command specification +and will be textually substituted for \f2before\fP the command line is +executed. +.sp .5 +.PD 0 +.TP +\f4%R\fP +Return path to the message originator. +.TP +\f4%c\fP +Value of the \f4Content-Type:\f1 header line if present. +.TP +\f4%S\fP +Value of the \f4Subject:\f1 header line if present. +.PD +.PP +If the command being piped to exits with any non-zero value, +\f4mail\fP will assume that message delivery failed and will generate a +non-delivery notification to the message's originator. It is allowable to +forward mail to other recipients \f4and\fP pipe it to a command, +as in +.sp .5 +.RS +\f4mail \-F\0"carol,joe,\(bvmyvacationprog %R"\f1 +.RE +.PP +Two UNIX System facilities that use the forwarding of +messages to commands are \f4notify\fP(1), +which causes asynchronous notification of new mail, +and \f4vacation\fP(1), +which provides an auto-answer capability for messages when the recipient +will be unavailable for an extended period of time. +.PP +To remove forwarding enter: +.sp .5 +.RS +\f4mail \-F\0"\^"\f1 +.RE +.PP +The pair of double quotes is mandatory to set a NULL argument for +the \-F option. +.PP +In order for forwarding to work properly the +.I mailfile\^ +should have \f4mail\fP as group ID, +and the group permission should be read-write. +.PP +\f4mail\fP will exit with a return code of \f40\fP if forwarding was +successfully installed or removed. +.SS Debugging: +.PP +The following command-line arguments cause \f4mail\fP to provide +DEBUGGING information: +.sp .5 +.PD 0 +.TP 22 +\f4\-T\fP\0\f2mailsurr_file +causes \f4mail\fP to display how it will parse and interpret +the \f4mailsurr\fP file. +.TP +\f4\-x\fP\f2debug_level\fP +causes \f4mail\fP to create a trace file containing debugging information. +.PD +.PP +The \f4\-T\fP option requires an argument that will be taken as the +pathname of a test \f4mailsurr\f1 file. +If NULL (as in \f4\-T ""\f1), +the system \f4mailsurr\f1 file will be used. +To use, type '\f4mail\fP \f4\-T\fP \f2test_file\0recipient\fP' and some trivial +message (like "testing"), +followed by a line with either just a dot (`.') or a cntrl-D. +The result of using the \f4\-T\f1 option will be displayed on standard output and +show the inputs and resulting transformations as \f4mailsurr\fP is +processed by the \f4mail\fP command for the indicated recipient. +Mail messages will never actually be sent or delivered when +the \f4\-T\f1 option is used. +.PP +The \f4\-x\f1 option causes \f4mail\fP to create a file named +\f4/tmp/MLDBG\f2process_id\f1 that contains debugging information +relating to how \f4mail\fP processed the current message. +The absolute value of \f2debug_level\f1 controls the verboseness +of the debug information. +Zero implies no debugging. +If \f2debug_level\f1 is greater than zero, +the debug file will be retained \f4only\f1 if \f4mail\fP encountered some +problem while processing the message. +If \f2debug_level\fP is less than zero the debug file will always be retained. +The \f2debug_level\f1 specified via \f4\-x\f1 overrides any specification +of \f4DEBUG\f1 in \f4/etc/mail/mailcnfg\f1. +The information provided by the \f4\-x\f1 option is esoteric and is +probably only useful to System Administrators. +The output produced by the \f4\-x\f1 option is a superset +of that provided by the \f4\-T\f1 option. +.SS Delivery Notification +Several forms of notification are available for mail by +including one of the following lines in the message header. +.PP +\f4Transport-Options:\f1 [ \f4/\f2options\f1 ] +.sp .2 +\f4Default-Options:\f1 [ \f4/\f2options\f1 ] +.sp .2 +\f4>To:\f1 \f2recipient\f1 [ \f4/\f2options\f1 ] +.PP +Where the ``/\f2options\f1'' may be one or more of the following: +.TP 12 +\f4/delivery\f1 +Inform the sender that the message was successfully delivered to the +\f2recipient\f1's mailbox. +.TP +\f4/nodelivery\f1 +Do not inform the sender of successful deliveries. +.TP +\f4/ignore\f1 +Do not inform the sender of \f4un\f1successful deliveries. +.TP +\f4/return\f1 +Inform the sender if mail delivery fails. +Return the failed message to the sender. +.TP +\f4/report\f1 +Same as \f4/return\f1 except that +the original message is not returned. +.PP +The default is \f4/nodelivery/return\f1. +If contradictory options are used, the first will +be recognized and later, conflicting, terms will be ignored. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 20 +\f4dead.letter\f1 +unmailable text +.TP +\f4/etc/passwd\f1 +to identify sender and locate recipients +.TP +\f4/etc/mail/mailsurr\f1 +routing / name translation information +.TP +\f4/etc/mail/mailcnfg\f1 +initialization information +.TP +.SM +\f4$HOME\*S/mbox\f1 +saved mail +.TP +.SM +\f4$MAIL\*S\f1 +variable containing path name of +.I mailfile\^ +.TP +\f4/tmp/ma\f1\(** +temporary file +.TP +\f4/tmp/MLDBG\f1\(** +debug trace file +.TP +\f4/var/mail/\f1\(**\f4.lock\f1 +lock for mail directory +.TP +\f4/var/mail/:saved\f1 +directory for holding temp files to prevent loss of data in the event of a +system crash. +.TP +\f4/var/mail/\f1\f2user\f1 +incoming mail for \f2user\fP; +that is, the +.I mailfile\^ +.PD +.SH SEE ALSO +\f4chmod\fP(1), +\f4login\fP(1), +\f4mailx\fP(1), +\f4notify\fP(1), +\f4write\fP(1), +\f4vacation\fP(1) +.sp .2 +\f4mail_pipe\fP(1M), +\f4mailsurr\fP(4), +\f4mailcnfg\fP(4) in the \f2System Administrator's Reference Manual\f1. +.br +.IR "User\'s Guide" . +.SH NOTES +The "Forward to recipient" feature may result in a loop. +Local loops (messages sent to \f4usera\f1, which are forwarded to +\f4userb\f1, which are forwarded to \f4usera\f1) will be detected +immediately. Remote loops (mail sent to \f4sys1!usera\fP1 which is forwarded +to \f4sys2!userb\f1, which is forwarded to \f4sys1!usera\f1) will also be +detected, but only after the message has exceeded the built-in hop count +limit of 20. +Both cases of forwarding loops will result in a non-delivery +notification being sent to the message originator. +.PP +As a security precaution, the equivalent of a \f4chmod s+g\f1 is performed on +the \f2mailfile\fP whenever forwarding is activated via the \f4\-F\fP +option, +and a \f4chmod s\(mig\fP is done when forwarding is removed via the +\f4\-F\fP option. +If the set\s-1GID\s+1 mode bit is not set when \f4mail\fP +attempts to forward an incoming message to a command, +the operation will fail and a non-delivery report with appropriate +diagnostics will be sent to the message's originator. +.PP +The interpretation and resulting action taken because of the +header lines described in the Delivery Notifications section +above will only occur if this version of \f4mail\fP is installed +on the system where the delivery (or failure) happens. +Earlier versions of \f4mail\fP may not support any types +of delivery notification. +.PP +Conditions sometimes result +in a failure to remove a lock file. +.PP +After an interrupt, the next message may not be printed; +printing may be forced by typing a +\f4p\f1. +.Ee diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 b/static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b39e0bc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mailalias.1 @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +'\"macro stdmacro +.if n .pH g1.mailalias %W% of %G% +.nr X +.if \nX=0 .ds x} mailalias 1 "" "\&" +.if \nX=1 .ds x} mailalias 1 "" +.if \nX=2 .ds x} mailalias 1 "" "\&" +.if \nX=3 .ds x} mailalias "" "" "\&" +.TH \*(x} +.SH NAME +\f4mailalias\f1 \- translate mail alias names +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f4mailalias\f1 [ \f4\-s\f1 ] [ \f4\-v\f1 ] +.I name +\&... +.SH DESCRIPTION +\f4mailalias\fP +is called by +\f4mail\fP. +It places on the standard output a list of mail addresses corresponding to +.IR name . +The mail addresses are found by performing the following steps: +.TP 4 +1. +Look for the file \f4/var/mail/\f2name\f1. +If found, print +.I name +and exit. +.TP 4 +2. +Look for a match in the user's local alias file +\f4$HOME/lib/names\f1. +If a line is found beginning with the word +.IR name , +print the rest of the line on standard output and exit. +.TP 4 +3. +Look for a match in the system-wide alias files, +which are listed in the master path file +\f4/etc/mail/namefiles\f1. +If a line is found beginning with the word +.IR name , +print the rest of the line on standard output and exit. +.P +If an alias file is a directory name \f2dir\fP, then search the file +\f2dir\fP/\f2name\fP. +By default, the file \f4/etc/mail/namefiles\fP lists +the directory \f4/etc/mail/lists\fP +and +the file \f4/etc/mail/names\f1. +.TP 4 +4. +Otherwise print +.I name +and exit. +.PP +The alias files may contain comments (lines beginning with +\f4#\f1) +and information lines of the form: +.IP +.I "name\0list-of-addresses" +.PP +Tokens on these lines are separated by white-space. +Lines may be continued by placing a backslash (\e) at the end of the line. +.PP +If the +\f4-s\f1 +option is not specified and more than one name is being translated, each line +of output will be prefixed with the name being translated. +.PP +The +\f4-v\f1 +option causes debugging information to be written to standard output. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 30n +\f4$HOME/lib/names\f1 +private aliases +.TP +\f4/etc/mail/namefiles\f1 +list of files to search +.TP +\f4/etc/mail/names\f1 +standard file to search +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +\f4uucp\fP(1), +\f4mail\fP(1). +.br +\f4smtp\fP(1M), +\f4smtpd\fP(1M), +\f4smtpqer\fP(1M), +\f4smtpsched\fP(1M), +\f4tosmtp\fP(1M) in the \f2System Administrator's Reference Manual\f1. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mailx.1 b/static/v10/man1/mailx.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..296a1e8d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mailx.1 @@ -0,0 +1,1249 @@ +'\"macro stdmacro +.if n .pH g1.mailx %W% of %G% +.nr X +.if \nX=0 .ds x} mailx 1 "Essential Utilities" "\&" +.if \nX=1 .ds x} mailx 1 "Essential Utilities" +.if \nX=2 .ds x} mailx 1 "" "\&" +.if \nX=3 .ds x} mailx "" "" "\&" +.TH \*(x} +.\" mailx command (in COMMAND section) +.de Cm +.PD +.\"sp +.ne 3 +.TP +\\f4\\$1\\f1\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 +.\"br +.. +.\" lines two through n of mailx command (.Cm) +.de C +.PD 0 +.ne 2 +.TP +\\f4\\$1\\f1\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 +.\"br +.. +.\" mailx tilde escape (in TILDE ESCAPE section) +.de Ti +.\"sp +.ne 2 +.TP +\\f4~\\^\\$1\\f1 \\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 +.\"br +.. +.\" mailx environment variable that takes an arg (in ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE section) +.de Va +.\"sp +.ne 2 +.TP +\\f4\\$1\\f1=\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7 \\$8 \\$9 +.\"br +.. +.\" mailx environment variable that does not take an arg (in ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE section) +.de V +.\"sp +.ne 2 +.TP +\\f4\\$1\\f1 +.\"br +.. +.\" mailx environment variable in running text +.de Ev +\f4\\$1\f1\\$2 +.. +.ds Ma \\f4mailx\\f1 +.ds EV "\s-1ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES\s+1 +.ds CM "\s-1COMMANDS\s+1 +.ds TX "\s-1TILDE ESCAPES\s+1 +.ds WA "\s-1WARNINGS\s+1 +.ds al \\f2alias\\f1 +.ds nu \\f2number\\f1 +.ds ms \\f2message\f1 +.ds sh \\f2shell-command\\f1 +.ds mC \\f2mail-command\\f1 +.ds dl \\f4dead.letter\\f1 +.ds mr \\f4.mailrc\\f1 +.ds mb \\f4mbox\\f1 +.ds mx \\f4mailbox\\f1 +.ds ml \\f2msglist\\f1 +.ds om [\\f2msglist\\f1] +.ds hf \\f2header-field\\f1 +.ds fn \\f2filename\\f1 +.ds st \\f2string\\f1 +.ds dr \\f2directory\\f1 +.ds nm \\f2name\\f1 +.SH NAME +\f4mailx\f1 \- interactive message processing system +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f4mailx\f1 +[ +.I options +] [ +.IR name \|.\|.\|.\| +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +The command +\f4mailx\fP provides a comfortable, flexible environment for sending and +receiving messages electronically. +When reading mail, +\*(Ma provides commands to facilitate saving, deleting, and responding to +messages. +When sending mail, +\*(Ma allows editing, reviewing and other modification of the message +as it is entered. +.PP +Many of the remote features of \f4mailx\fP +work only if the Basic Networking Utilities are installed on your system. +.PP +Incoming mail is stored in a standard file for each user, +called the \*(mx for that user. +When \*(Ma is called to read messages, +the \*(mx is the default place to find them. +As messages are read, +they are marked to be moved to a secondary file for storage, +unless specific action is taken, +so that the messages need not be seen again. +This secondary file is called the \*(mb +and is normally located in the user's +\f4HOME\f1 +directory +[see +.Ev MBOX +(\*(EV) for a description of this file]. +Messages can be saved in other secondary files named by the user. +Messages remain in a secondary file until forcibly removed. +.PP +The user can access a secondary file by using the +\f4\-f\f1 option of the \*(Ma command. +Messages in the secondary file can then be read or otherwise +processed using the same \*(CM as in the primary \*(mx. +This gives rise within these pages to the notion of a current \*(mx. +.PP +On the command line, +.I options +start with a dash (\-) and any other arguments are taken to be +destinations (recipients). +If no recipients are specified, +\*(Ma attempts to read messages from the \*(mx. +Command-line options are: +.PP +.RS +.TP 14 +\f4\-d\f1 +Turn on debugging output. +.TP +\f4\-e\f1 +Test for presence of mail. +\f4mailx\fP prints nothing and exits with a successful return code if there is +mail to read. +.TP +\f4\-f\f1 [\*(fn] +Read messages from \*(fn instead of \*(mx. +If no \*(fn is specified, +the \*(mb is used. +.TP +\f4\-F\f1 +Record the message in a file named after the first recipient. +Overrides the +.Ev record +variable, if set (see \*(EV). +.TP +\f4\-h\f1 \*(nu +The number of network ``hops'' made so far. +This is provided for network +software to avoid infinite delivery loops. +This option and its argument is passed to the delivery program. +.TP +\f4\-H\f1 +Print header summary only. +.TP +\f4\-i\f1 +Ignore interrupts. +See also +.Ev ignore +(\*(EV). +.TP +\f4\-I\f1 +Include the newsgroup and article-id header lines when printing mail +messages. +This option requires the \f4\-f\f1 option to be specified. +.TP +\f4\-n\f1 +Do not initialize from the system default +.I mailx.rc +file. +.TP +\f4\-N\f1 +Do not print initial header summary. +.TP +\f4\-r\f2 address\f1 +Use +.I address +as the return address when invoking the delivery program. +All tilde commands are disabled. +This option and its argument is passed to the delivery program. +.TP +\f4\-s\f2 subject\f1 +Set the Subject header field to +.IR subject . +.TP +\f4\-T\f2 file\f1 +Message-id and article-id header lines are recorded in \f2file\f1 after the +message is read. +This option will also set the \f4\-I\f1 option. +.TP +\f4\-u\f2 user\f1 +Read +.IR user 's +\*(mx. +This is only effective if +.IR user 's +\*(mx is not read protected. +.TP +\f4\-U\f1 +Convert \f4uucp\fP style addresses to internet standards. +Overrides the +.Ev conv +environment variable. +.TP +\f4\-V\f1 +Print the \*(Ma version number and exit. +.RE +.PP +When reading mail, +\*(Ma is in +\f2command mode\f1. +A header summary of the first several messages is displayed, +followed by a prompt indicating \*(Ma can accept regular commands +(see \*(CM below). +When sending mail, +\*(Ma is in +\f2input mode\f1. +If no subject is specified on the command line, +a prompt for the subject is printed. +(A subject longer than 1024 characters causes \*(Ma to print the +message \f2mail: ERROR signal 10\fP; the mail will not be delivered.) +As the message is typed, +\*(Ma reads the message and store it in a temporary +file. +Commands may be entered by beginning a line with the tilde (~) escape +character followed by a single command letter and optional arguments. +See \*(TX for a summary of these commands. +.PP +At any time, +the behavior of \*(Ma is governed by a set of +\f2environment variables\f1. +These are flags and valued parameters which are set and cleared via the +\f4se\f1t +and +\f4uns\f1et +commands. +See \*(EV below for a summary of these parameters. +.PP +Recipients listed on the command line may be of three types: +login names, +shell commands, +or +alias groups. +Login names may be any network address, +including mixed network addressing. +If mail is found to be undeliverable, an attempt is +made to return it to the sender's \f2mailbox\f1. +If the recipient name begins with a pipe symbol ( | ), +the rest of the name is taken to be a shell command to pipe the +message through. +This provides an automatic interface with any program that reads the standard +input, such as +\f4lp\fP(1) +for recording outgoing mail on paper. +Alias groups are set by the +\f4a\f1lias +command (see \*(CM below) +and are lists of recipients of any type. +.PP +Regular commands are of the form +.PP +.RS +[ +.I command +] [ +.I msglist +] [ +.I arguments +] +.RE +.PP +If no command is specified in \f2command mode\f1, +\f4p\f1rint +is assumed. +In \f2input mode\f1, +commands are recognized by the escape character, +and lines not treated as commands are taken as input for the message. +.PP +Each message is assigned a sequential number, +and there is at any time the notion of a current message, +marked by a right angle bracket (>) in the header summary. +Many commands take an optional list of messages +(\*(ml) to operate on. +The default for \f2msglist\f1 is the current message. +A \*(ml is a list of message identifiers separated by spaces, +which may include: +.PP +.RS +.TP 8 +\f4n\f1 +Message number +\f4n\f1. +.TP +\f4\&.\f1 +The current message. +.TP +\f4^\f1 +The first undeleted message. +.TP +\f4$\f1 +The last message. +.TP +\f4*\f1 +All messages. +.TP +\f4n\-m\f1 +An inclusive range of message numbers. +.TP +\f4user\f1 +All messages from +\f4user\f1. +.TP +\f4/string\f1 +All messages with +\f4string\f1 +in the subject line (case ignored). +.TP +\f4:\f2c\f1 +All messages of type +.IR c , +where +.I c +is one of: +.RS 13 +.TP +\f4d\f1 +deleted messages +.TP +\f4n\f1 +new messages +.TP +\f4o\f1 +old messages +.TP +\f4r\f1 +read messages +.TP +\f4u\f1 +unread messages +.RE 0 +.RS 13 +Note that the context of the command determines whether this type of +message specification makes sense. +.RE +.PP +Other arguments are usually arbitrary strings whose usage +depends on the command involved. +File names, +where expected, +are expanded via the normal shell conventions [see +\f4sh\fP(1)]. +Special characters are recognized by certain commands and are +documented with the commands below. +.PP +At start-up time, +\*(Ma tries to execute commands from the optional system-wide file +(\f4/etc/mail/mailx.rc\f1) to initialize +certain parameters, +then from a private start-up file +\f1(\f4$HOME/.mailrc\f1) +for personalized variables. +With the exceptions noted below, +regular commands are legal inside start-up files. +The most common use of a start-up file is +to set up initial display options and alias lists. +The following commands are not legal in the start-up file: +\f4!\f1, +\f4C\f1opy, +\f4e\f1dit, +\f4fo\f1llowup, +\f4F\f1ollowup, +\f4ho\f1ld, +\f4m\f1ail, +\f4pre\f1serve, +\f4r\f1eply, +\f4R\f1eply, +\f4sh\f1ell, +and +\f4v\f1isual. +An error in the start-up file causes the remaining lines in the file to +be ignored. +The \*(mr file is optional, and must be constructed locally. +.SS \*(CM +The following is a complete list of \*(Ma commands: +.PP +.Cm ! \*(sh +Escape to the shell. +See +.Ev SHELL +(\*(EV). +.Cm # "" \f2comment\f1 +Null command (comment). +This may be useful in \*(mr files. +.Cm = +Print the current message number. +.Cm ? +Prints a summary of commands. +.Cm a lias \*(al \*(nm ... +.C g roup \*(al \*(nm ... +Declare an alias for the given names. +The names are substituted +when +\*(al is used as a recipient. +Useful in the \*(mr file. +.Cm alt ernates \*(nm ... +Declares a list of alternate names for your login. +When responding to a message, +these names are removed from the list of recipients for the response. +With no arguments, +\f4alt\f1ernates +prints the current list of alternate names. +See also +.Ev allnet +(\*(EV). +.Cm cd "" [\*(dr] +.C ch dir [\*(dr] +Change directory. +If \*(dr is not specified, +\f4$HOME\f1 +is used. +.Cm c opy [\*(fn] +.C c opy \*(om \*(fn +Copy messages to the file without marking the messages as saved. +Otherwise equivalent to the +\f4s\f1ave +command. +.Cm C opy \*(om +Save the specified messages in a file whose name is derived from the +author of the +message to be saved, without marking the messages as saved. +Otherwise equivalent to the +\f4S\f1ave +command. +.Cm d elete \*(om +Delete messages from the \*(mx. +If +.Ev autoprint +is set, +the next message after the last one deleted is printed +(see \*(EV). +.Cm di scard [\*(hf ...] +.C ig nore [\*(hf ...] +Suppresses printing of the specified header fields when displaying messages +on the screen. +Examples of header fields to ignore are +\f4status\f1 +and +\f4cc\f1. +The fields are included when the message is saved. +The +\f4P\f1rint +and +\f4T\f1ype +commands override this command. +If no header is specified, the current list of header fields being ignored +will be printed. +See also the \f4undi\f1scard and \f4unig\f1nore commands. +.Cm dp "" \*(om +.C dt "" \*(om +Delete the specified messages from the \*(mx and print the next message +after the last one deleted. +Roughly equivalent to a +\f4d\f1elete +command followed by a +\f4p\f1rint +command. +.Cm ec ho \*(st ... +Echo the given strings [like +\f4echo\fP(1)]. +.Cm e dit \*(om +Edit the given messages. +The messages are placed in a temporary file and the +.Ev EDITOR +variable +is used to get the name of the editor +(see \*(EV). +Default editor is +\f4ed\fP(1). +.Cm ex it +.C x it +Exit from \*(Ma, +without changing the \*(mx. +No messages are saved in the \*(mb (see also +\f4q\f1uit). +.Cm fi le [\*(fn] +.C fold er [\*(fn] +Quit from the current file of messages and read in the specified file. +Several special characters are recognized when used as file names, +with the following substitutions: +.RS 10 +.TP 10 +\f4%\f1 +the current \*(mx. +.TP +\f4%\f2user\f1 +the \*(mx for +.IR user . +.TP +\f4#\f1 +the previous file. +.TP +\f4&\f1 +the current \*(mb. +.RE +.RS 5 +Default file is the current \*(mx. +.RE +.Cm folders +Print the names of the files in the +directory set by the +.Ev folder +variable +(see \*(EV). +.Cm fo llowup [\*(ms] +Respond to a message, +recording the response in a file whose name is derived from the +author of the message. +Overrides the +.Ev record +variable, if set. +See also the +\f4F\f1ollowup, +\f4S\f1ave, +and +\f4C\f1opy +commands and +.Ev outfolder +(\*(EV). +.Cm F ollowup \*(om +Respond to the first message in the \*(ml, +sending the message to the author of each message in the \*(ml. +The subject line is taken from the first message +and the response is recorded in a file whose name is derived +from the author of the first message. +See also the +\f4fo\f1llowup, +\f4S\f1ave, +and +\f4C\f1opy +commands +and +.Ev outfolder +(\*(EV). +.Cm f rom \*(om +Prints the header summary for the specified messages. +.Cm g roup \*(al \*(nm ... +.C a lias \*(al \*(nm ... +Declare an alias for the given names. +The names are substituted +when +\*(al is used as a recipient. +Useful in the \*(mr file. +.Cm h eaders [\*(ms] +Prints the page of headers which includes the message specified. +The +.Ev screen +variable sets the number of headers per page +(see \*(EV). +See also the +\f4z\f1 +command. +.Cm hel p +Prints a summary of commands. +.Cm ho ld \*(om +.C pre serve \*(om +Holds the specified messages in the \*(mx. +.Cm i f \f2s\f1 | \f2r\f1 +.C "" \*(mCs +.C el se +.C "" \*(mCs +.C en dif +Conditional execution, where +.I s +executes following \*(mCs, up to an +\f4el\f1se +or +\f4en\f1dif, +if the program is in +.I send +mode, and +.I r +causes the \*(mCs to be executed only in +.I receive +mode. +Useful in the \*(mr file. +.Cm ig nore [\*(hf ...] +.C di scard [\*(hf ...] +Suppresses printing of the specified header fields when displaying messages +on the screen. +Examples of header fields to ignore are +\f4status\f1 +and +\f4cc\f1. +All fields are included when the message is saved. +The +\f4P\f1rint +and +\f4T\f1ype +commands override this command. +If no header is specified, the current list of header fields being ignored +will be printed. +See also the \f4undi\f1scard and \f4unig\f1nore commands. +.Cm l ist +Prints all commands available. +No explanation is given. +.Cm m ail \*(nm ... +Mail a message to the specified users. +.Cm M ail \*(nm +Mail a message to the specified user and record a copy of it +in a file named after that user. +.Cm mb ox \*(om +Arrange for the given messages to end up in the standard \*(mb save file +when \*(Ma terminates normally. +See +.Ev MBOX +(\*(EV) for a description of this file. +See also the +\f4ex\f1it +and +\f4q\f1uit +commands. +.Cm n ext [\*(ms] +Go to next message matching \*(ms. +A \*(ml may be specified, +but in this case the first valid message in the list is the only one used. +This is useful for jumping to the next message from a specific user, +since the name would be taken as a command in the absence of a real command. +See the discussion of \*(mls above for a description of +possible message specifications. +.Cm pi pe \*(om [\*(sh] +.C | "" \*(om [\*(sh] +Pipe the message through the given \*(sh. +The message is treated as if it were read. +If no arguments are given, +the current message is piped through the command specified by the +value of the +.Ev cmd +variable. +If the +.Ev page +variable is set, +a form feed character is inserted after each message +(see \*(EV). +.Cm pre serve \*(om +.C ho ld \*(om +Preserve the specified messages in the \*(mx. +.Cm P rint \*(om +.C T ype \*(om +Print the specified messages on the screen, +including all header fields. +Overrides suppression of fields by the +\f4ig\f1nore +command. +.Cm p rint \*(om +.C t ype \*(om +Print the specified messages. +If +.Ev crt +is set, +the messages longer than the number of lines specified by the +.Ev crt +variable are paged through the command specified by the +.Ev PAGER +variable. +The default command is +\f4pg\fP(1) +(see \*(EV). +.Cm q uit +Exit from \*(Ma, +storing messages that were read in \*(mb and unread messages in the \*(mx. +Messages that have been explicitly saved in a file are deleted. +.Cm R eply \*(om +.C R espond \*(om +Send a response to the author of each message in the \*(ml. +The subject line is taken from the first message. +If +.Ev record +is set to a file name, +the response is saved at the end of that file (see \*(EV). +.Cm r eply [\*(ms] +.C r espond [\*(ms] +Reply to the specified message, +including all other recipients of the message. +If +.Ev record +is set to a file name, +the response is saved at the end of that file (see \*(EV). +.Cm S ave \*(om +Save the specified messages in a file whose name is derived from +the author of the first message. +The name of the file is taken to be the author's name with all +network addressing stripped off. +See also the +\f4C\f1opy, +\f4fo\f1llowup, +and +\f4F\f1ollowup +commands and +.Ev outfolder +(\*(EV). +.Cm s ave [\*(fn] +.C s ave \*(om \*(fn +Save the specified messages in the given file. +The file is created if it does not exist. +THe file defaults to \*(mb. +The message is deleted from the \*(mx when +\*(Ma terminates unless +.Ev keepsave +is set +(see also \*(EV and the +\f4ex\f1it +and +\f4q\f1uit +commands). +.Cm se t +.C se t \*(nm +.C se t \*(nm=\*(st +.C se t \*(nm=\*(nu +Define a variable called \*(nm. +The variable may be given a null, string, or numeric value. +\f4Se\f1t +by itself prints all defined variables and their values. +See \*(EV for detailed descriptions of the \*(Ma variables. +.Cm sh ell +Invoke an interactive shell [see also +.Ev SHELL +(\*(EV)]. +.Cm si ze \*(om +Print the size in characters of the specified messages. +.Cm so urce \*(fn +Read commands from the given file and return to command mode. +.Cm to p \*(om +Print the top few lines of the specified messages. +If the +.Ev toplines +variable is set, +it is taken as the number of lines to print +(see \*(EV). +The default is 5. +.Cm tou ch \*(om +Touch the specified messages. +If any message in \*(ml is not specifically saved in a file, +it is placed in the \*(mb, +or the file specified in the +.Ev MBOX +environment variable, upon normal termination. +See +\f4ex\f1it +and +\f4q\f1uit. +.Cm T ype \*(om +.C P rint \*(om +Print the specified messages on the screen, +including all header fields. +Overrides suppression of fields by the +\f4ig\f1nore +command. +.Cm t ype \*(om +.C p rint \*(om +Print the specified messages. +If +.Ev crt +is set, +the messages longer than the number of lines specified by the +.Ev crt +variable are paged through the command specified by the +.Ev PAGER +variable. +The default command is +\f4pg\fP(1) +(see \*(EV). +.Cm u ndelete \*(om +Restore the specified deleted messages. +Will only restore messages deleted in the current mail session. +If +.Ev autoprint +is set, the last message of those restored is printed +(see \*(EV). +.Cm undi scard \*(hf ... +.C unig nore \*(hf ... +Remove the specified header fields from the list being ignored. +.Cm uns et \*(nm ... +Causes the specified variables to be erased. +If the variable was imported from the execution environment (i.e., a +shell variable) then it cannot be erased. +.Cm ve rsion +Prints the current version. +.Cm v isual \*(om +Edit the given messages with a screen editor. +The messages are placed in a temporary file and the +.Ev VISUAL +variable +is used to get the name of the editor +(see \*(EV). +.Cm w rite \*(om \*(fn +Write the given messages on the specified file, +minus the header and trailing blank line. +Otherwise equivalent to the +\f4s\f1ave +command. +.Cm x it +.C ex it +Exit from \*(Ma, +without changing the \*(mx. +No messages are saved in the \*(mb (see also +\f4q\f1uit). +.Cm z [+ | \-] +Scroll the header display forward or backward one screen\-full. +The number of headers displayed is set by the +.Ev screen +variable +(see \*(EV). +.SS \*(TX +The following commands may be entered only from +\f2input mode\f1, +by beginning a line with the tilde escape character (~). +See +.Ev escape +(\*(EV) +for changing this special character. +.PP +.Ti ! \*(sh +Escape to the shell. +.Ti . +Simulate end of file (terminate message input). +.Ti : \*(mC +.PD 0 +.Ti _\ \*(mC +.PD +Perform the command-level request. +Valid only when sending a message while reading mail. +.Ti ? +Print a summary of tilde escapes. +.Ti A +Insert the autograph string +.Ev Sign +into the message +(see \*(EV). +.Ti a +Insert the autograph string +.Ev sign +into the message +(see \*(EV). +.Ti b \*(nms ... +Add the \*(nms to the blind carbon copy (Bcc) list. +.Ti c \*(nms ... +Add the \*(nms to the carbon copy (Cc) list. +.Ti d +Read in the \*(dl file. +See +.Ev DEAD +(\*(EV) for a description of this file. +.Ti e +Invoke the editor on the partial message. +See also +.Ev EDITOR +(\*(EV). +.Ti f \*(om +Forward the specified messages. +The messages are inserted into the message +without alteration. +.Ti h +Prompt for Subject line and To, Cc, and Bcc lists. +If the field is displayed with an initial value, +it may be edited as if you had just typed it. +.Ti i \*(st +Insert the value of the named variable into the text of the message. +For example, +\f4~A\f1 +is equivalent to +\f1'\f4~i\f1\\f4Sign.'\f1 +Environment variables set and exported in the shell are also +accessible by ~i. +.Ti m \*(om +Insert the specified messages into the letter, +shifting the new text to the right one tab stop. +Valid only when sending a message while reading mail. +.Ti p +Print the message being entered. +.Ti q +Quit from input mode by simulating an interrupt. +If the body of the message is not null, +the partial message is saved in \*(dl. +See +.Ev DEAD +(\*(EV) for a description of this file. +.Ti r \*(fn +.PD 0 +.Ti <\ \*(fn +.Ti <\ !\*(sh +.PD +Read in the specified file. +If the argument begins with an exclamation point (!), +the rest of the string is taken as an arbitrary shell command +and is executed, +with the standard output inserted into the message. +.Ti s \*(st ... +Set the subject line to \*(st. +.Ti t \*(nms ... +Add the given \*(nms to the To list. +.Ti v +Invoke a preferred screen editor on the partial message. +See also +.Ev VISUAL +(\*(EV). +.Ti w \*(fn +Write the message into the given file, +without the header. +.Ti x +Exit as with +\f4~q\f1 +except the message is not saved in \*(dl. +.Ti | \*(sh +Pipe the body of the message through the given \*(sh. +If the \*(sh returns a successful exit status, +the output of the command replaces the message. +.SS \*(EV +The following are environment variables taken from the execution environment and +are not alterable within \*(Ma. +.Va \s-1HOME\s+1 \*(dr +The user's base of operations. +.Va \s-1MAILRC\s+1 \*(fn +The name of the start-up file. +Default is +\f4$HOME/.mailrc\f1. +.PP +The following variables are internal \*(Ma variables. +They may be imported from the execution environment or +set via the +\f4se\f1t +command at any time. +The +\f4uns\f1et +command may be used to erase variables. +.PP +.V allnet +All network names whose last component (login name) match are treated as +identical. +This causes the \*(ml message specifications to behave similarly. +Default is +\f4noallnet\f1. +See also the +\f4alt\f1ernates +command and the +.Ev metoo +variable. +.V append +Upon termination, append messages to the end of the \*(mb file instead of prepending them. +Default is +\f4noappend.\f1 +.V askcc +Prompt for the Cc list after the Subject is entered. +Default is +\f4noaskcc\f1. +.V askbcc +Prompt for the Bcc list after the Subject is entered. +Default is +\f4noaskbcc\f1. +.V asksub +Prompt for subject if it is not specified on the command line +with the +\f4\-s\f1 +option. +Enabled by default. +.V autoprint +Enable automatic printing of messages after +\f4d\f1elete +and +\f4u\f1ndelete +commands. +Default is +\f4noautoprint\f1. +.V bang +Enable the special-casing of exclamation points (!) in shell escape +command lines +as in +\f4vi\fP(1). +Default is +\f4nobang\f1. +.Va cmd \*(sh +Set the default command for the +\f4pi\f1pe +command. +No default value. +.Va conv \f2conversion\f1 +Convert uucp addresses to the specified +address style. +The only valid conversion now is +\f4internet\f1, +which uses domain-style addressing. +Conversion is disabled by default. +See also the +\f4\-U\f1 +command-line option. +.Va crt \*(nu +Pipe messages having more than \f2number\f1 lines +through the command specified by the value of the +.Ev PAGER +variable +.RI +[\f4pg\f1(1) by default]. +Disabled by default. +.Va DEAD \*(fn +The name of the file in which to save partial letters +in case of untimely interrupt. +Default is +\f4$HOME/dead.letter\f1. +.V debug +Enable verbose diagnostics for debugging. +Messages are not delivered. +Default is +\f4nodebug\f1. +.V dot +Take a period on a line by itself during input from a terminal as end-of-file. +Default is +\f4nodot\f1. +.Va EDITOR \*(sh +The command to run when the +\f4e\f1dit +or +\f4~e\f1 +command is used. +Default is +\f4ed\fP(1). +.Va escape \f2c\f1 +Substitute +.I c +for the ~ escape character. +Takes effect with next message sent. +.Va folder \*(dr +The directory for saving standard mail files. +User-specified file names beginning with a plus (+) +are expanded by preceding the file name with +this directory name to obtain the real file name. +If \*(dr does not start with a slash (/), +\f4$HOME\f1 +is prepended to it. +In order to use the plus (+) construct on a +\*(Ma command line, +.Ev folder +must be an exported +\f4sh\fP +environment variable. +There is no default for the +.Ev folder +variable. +See also +.Ev outfolder +below. +.V header +Enable printing of the header summary when entering \*(Ma. +Enabled by default. +.V hold +Preserve all messages that are read in the \*(mx instead of putting them +in the standard \*(mb save file. +Default is +\f4nohold\f1. +.V ignore +Ignore interrupts while entering messages. +Handy for noisy dial-up lines. +Default is +\f4noignore\f1. +.V ignoreeof +Ignore end-of-file during message input. +Input must be terminated by a period (.) on a line by itself +or by the +\f4~.\f1 +command. +Default is +\f4noignoreeof\f1. +See also +.Ev dot +above. +.V keep +When the \*(mx is empty, +truncate it to zero length instead of removing it. +Disabled by default. +.V keepsave +Keep messages that have been saved in other files in the \*(mx +instead of deleting them. +Default is +\f4nokeepsave\f1. +.Va \s-1MBOX\s+1 \*(fn +The name of the file to save messages which have been read. +The +\f4x\f1it +command overrides this function, +as does saving the message explicitly in another file. +Default is +\f4$HOME/mbox\f1. +.V metoo +If your login appears as a recipient, +do not delete it from the list. +Default is +\f4nometoo\f1. +.Va \s-1LISTER\s+1 \*(sh +The command (and options) to use when listing the contents of the +.Ev folder +directory. +The default is +\f4ls\fP(1). +.V onehop +When responding to a message that was originally sent to several +recipients, +the other recipient addresses are normally forced to be relative to the +originating author's machine for the response. +This flag disables alteration of the recipients' addresses, +improving efficiency in a network where all machines can send directly +to all other machines (i.e., one hop away). +.V outfolder +Causes the files used to record outgoing messages to be located +in the directory specified by the +.Ev folder +variable unless the +path name is absolute. +Default is +\f4nooutfolder\f1. +See +.Ev folder +above and the +\f4S\f1ave, +\f4C\f1opy, +\f4fo\f1llowup, +and +\f4F\f1ollowup +commands. +.V page +Used with the +\f4pi\f1pe +command to insert a form feed after each message sent through the pipe. +Default is +\f4nopage\f1. +.Va \s-1PAGER\s+1 \*(sh +The command to use as a filter for paginating output. +This can also be used to specify the options to be used. +Default is +\f4pg\fP(1). +.Va prompt \*(st +Set the \f2command mode\f1 prompt to \*(st. +Default is +\f1``\f4?\ \f1''. +.V quiet +Refrain from printing the opening message and version when entering \*(Ma. +Default is +\f4noquiet\f1. +.Va record \*(fn +Record all outgoing mail in \*(fn. +Disabled by default. +See also +.Ev outfolder +above. +If you have the +.Ev record +and +.Ev outfolder +variables set but the +.Ev folder +variable not set, messages are saved in +\f4+\f1\*(fn instead of \*(fn. +.V save +Enable saving of messages in \*(dl on interrupt or delivery error. +See +.Ev DEAD +for a description of this file. +Enabled by default. +.Va screen \*(nu +Sets the number of lines in a screen\-full of headers for the +\f4h\f1eaders +command. +It must be a positive number. +.Va sendmail \*(sh +Alternate command for delivering messages. +Default is +\f4/usr/bin/rmail\f1. +.V sendwait +Wait for background mailer to finish before returning. +Default is +\f4nosendwait\f1. +.Va SHELL \*(sh +The name of a preferred command interpreter. +Default is +\f4sh\fP(1). +.V showto +When displaying the header summary and the message is from you, +print the recipient's name instead of the author's name. +.Va sign \*(st +The variable inserted into the text of a message when the +\f4~a\f1 +(autograph) command is given. +No default +[see also +\f4~i\f1 +(\*(TX)]. +.Va Sign \*(st +The variable inserted into the text of a message when the +\f4~A\f1 +command is given. +No default +[see also +\f4~i\f1 +(\*(TX)]. +.Va toplines \*(nu +The number of lines of header to print with the +\f4to\f1p +command. +Default is 5. +.Va \s-1VISUAL\s+1 \*(sh +The name of a preferred screen editor. +Default is +\f4vi\fP(1). +.SH FILES +.TS +l l. +\f4$HOME/.mailrc\f1 personal start-up file +\f4$HOME/mbox\f1 secondary storage file +\f4/var/mail/*\f1 post office directory +\f4/usr/share/lib/mailx/mailx.help*\f1 help message files +\f4/etc/mail/mailx.rc\f1 optional global start-up file +\f4/tmp/R[emqsx]*\f1 temporary files +.TE +.SH SEE ALSO +\f4ls\fP(1), +\f4mail\fP(1), +\f4pg\fP(1). +.SH NOTES +The \f4\-h\f1 and \f4\-r\f1 options can be used only +if \*(Ma is using a delivery program other than +\f4/usr/bin/rmail\f1. +.PP +Where \*(sh +is shown as valid, +arguments are not always allowed. +Experimentation is recommended. +.PP +Internal variables imported from the execution environment cannot be +\f4uns\f1et. +.PP +The full internet addressing is not fully supported by \*(Ma. +The new standards need some time to settle down. +.PP +Attempts to send a message having a line consisting only of a ``.'' +are treated as the end of the message by \f4mail\fP(1) (the standard +mail delivery program). +.\" @(#)mailx.1 6.2 of 9/2/83 +.Ee diff --git a/static/v10/man1/make.1 b/static/v10/man1/make.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66b14bda --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/make.1 @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ +.TH MAKE 1 +.CT 1 prog_c writing_troff prog_other +.SH NAME +make \(mi maintain collections of programs +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B make +[ +.B -f +.I makefile +] +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I name ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Make +executes recipes in +.I makefile +to update the target +.IR names +(usually programs). +If no target is specified, the targets of the first rule in +.I makefile +are updated. +If no +.B -f +option is present, +.L makefile +and +.L Makefile +are tried in order. +If +.I makefile +is +.LR - , +the standard input is taken. +More than one +.B -f +option may appear. +.PP +.I Make +updates a target if it depends on prerequisite files +that have been modified since the target was last modified, +or if the target does not exist. +The prerequisites are updated before the target. +.PP +The makefile +comprises a sequence of rules and macro definitions. +The first line of a rule is a +blank-separated list of targets, then a single or double colon, +then a list of prerequisite files terminated by semicolon or newline. +Text following a semicolon, and all following lines +that begin with a tab, are shell commands: +the recipe for updating the target. +.PP +If a name appears as target in more than one single-colon rule, it depends +on all of the prerequisites of those rules, but only +one recipe may be specified among the rules. +A target in a double-colon rule is updated by the following +recipe only if it is out of date with respect to the +prerequisites of that rule. +.PP +Two special forms of name are recognized. +A name like +.IR a ( b ) +means the file named +.I b +stored in the archive named +.I a. +A name like +.IR a (( b )) +means the file stored in archive +.I a +and containing the entry point +.I b. +.PP +Sharp and newline surround comments. +.PP +In this makefile +.L pgm +depends on two +files +.L a.o +and +.LR b.o , +and they in turn depend on +.L .c +files and a common file +.LR ab.h : +.PP +.EX +pgm: a.o b.o + cc a.o b.o -lplot -o pgm +.EE +.PP +.EX +a.o: ab.h a.c + cc -c a.c +.EE +.PP +.EX +b.o: ab.h b.c + cc -c b.c +.EE +.PP +Makefile lines of the form +.IP +.IB "string1 " = " string2" +.LP +are macro definitions. +Subsequent appearances of +.BI $( string1 ) +are replaced by +.IR string2 . +If +.I string1 +is a single character, the parentheses are optional; +.B $$ +is replaced by +.BR $ . +Each entry in the environment (see +.IR sh (1)) +of the +.I make +command is taken as a macro definition, +as are command arguments with embedded equal signs. +.PP +Lines of the form +.IB "string1 " := " string2" +occurring in a recipe are assignments: macro definitions +that are made in the course of executing the recipe. +.PP +A target containing a single +.B % +introduces a pattern rule, +which controls the making of names that do not occur +explicitly as targets. +The +.B % +matches an arbitrary string called the stem: +.IB A % B +matches any string that begins with +.I A +and ends with +.I B. +A +.B % +in a prerequisite name stands for the stem; +and the special macro +.B $% +stands for the stem in the recipe. +A name that has no explicit recipe is +matched against the target of each pattern rule. +The first pattern rule for which the prerequisites exist +specifies +further dependencies. +.PP +The following pattern rule maintains an object library where all the C source files +share a common include file +.LR defs.h . +.PP +.EX +arch.a(%.o) : %.c defs.h + cc -c $%.c + ar r arch.a $%.o + rm $%.o +.EE +.PP +A set of default pattern rules is built in, and effectively +follows the user's list of rules. +Assuming these rules, +which tell, among other things, how to make +.B .o +files from +.B .c +files, the first example becomes: +.PP +.EX +pgm: a.o b.o + cc a.o b.o -lplot -o pgm +.EE +.PP +.EX +a.o b.o: ab.h +.EE +.PP +Here, greatly simplified, is a sample of the built-in rules: +.PP +.EX + CC = cc + %.o: %.c + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -c $%.c + %.o: %.f + f77 $(FFLAGS) -c $%.f + % : %.c + $(CC) $(CFLAGS) -o $% $%.c +.EE +.PP +The first rule +says that a name ending in +.B .o +could be made +if a matching name ending in +.B .c +were present. +The second states a similar rule for files ending in +.BR .f . +The third says that an arbitrary name can be made +by compiling a file with that name suffixed by +.BR .c . +.PP +Macros make the builtin pattern rules flexible: +.B CC +names the particular C compiler, +.B CFLAGS +gives +.IR cc (1) +options, +.B FFLAGS +for +.IR f77 (1), +.B LFLAGS +for +.IR lex (1), +.B YFLAGS +for +.IR yacc (1), +and +.B PFLAGS +for +.IR pascal (A). +.PP +An older, now disparaged, means of specifying default rules +is based only on suffixes. +Prerequisites are inferred according to selected suffixes +listed as the `prerequisites' for the special name +.BR .SUFFIXES ; +multiple lists accumulate; +an empty list clears what came before. +.PP +The rule to create a file with suffix +.I s2 +that depends on a similarly named file with suffix +.I s1 +is specified as an entry +for the `target' +.IR s1s2 . +Order is significant; the first possible name for which both +a file and a rule exist +is inferred. +An old style rule for making +optimized +.B .o +files from +.B .c +files is +.PP +.EX +\&.SUFFIXES: .c .o +\&.c.o: ; cc -c -O -o $@ $*.c +.EE +.PP +The following two macros are defined for use in any rule: +.TP +.B $($@) +full name of target +.PD0 +.TP +.B $($/) +target name beginning at the last slash, if any +.PD +.LP +A number of other special macros are defined +automatically in rules invoked by one of the implicit mechanisms: +.TP +.B $* +target name with suffix deleted +.PD0 +.TP +.B $@ +full target name +.TP +.B $< +list of prerequisites in an implicit rule +.TP +.B $? +list of prerequisites that are out of date +.TP +.B $^ +list of all prerequisites +.PD +.PP +The following are included for consistency with System V: +.TP +.B $(@D) +directory part of +.B $@ +(up to last slash) +.PD0 +.TP +.B $(@F) +file name part of +.B $@ +(after last slash) +.TP +.B $(*D) +directory part of +.B $* +(up to last slash) +.TP +.B $(*F) +file name part of +.B $* +(after last slash) +.TP +.B $(. +.PP +Interrupt and quit cause the target to be deleted +unless the target depends on the special name +.BR .PRECIOUS . +.PP +.I Make +includes a rudimentary parallel processing ability. +If the separation string is +.B :& +or +.B ::& , +.I make +can run the command sequences to create the prerequisites +simultaneously. +If two names are separated by an ampersand on the right side +of a colon, those two may be created in parallel. +.PP +Other options: +.TP +.B -i +Equivalent to the special entry +.L .IGNORE: . +.TP +.B -k +When a command returns nonzero status, +abandon work on the current entry, but +continue on branches that do not depend on the current entry. +.TP +.B -n +Trace and print, but do not execute the commands +needed to update the targets. +.TP +.B -t +Touch, i.e. update the modified date of targets, without +executing any commands. +.TP +.B -r +Turn off built-in rules. +.TP +.B -s +Equivalent to the special entry +.BR .SILENT: . +.TP +.B -e +Environment definitions override conflicting definitions in arguments +or in makefiles. +Ordinary precedence is argument over makefile +over environment. +.TP +.B -o +Assume old style default suffix list: +.L +\&.SUFFIXES: .out .o .c .e .r .f .y .l .s .p +.TP +.BI -P n +Permit +.I n +command sequences to be done in parallel with +.BR & . +.TP +.B -z +Run commands by passing them to the shell; +normally simple commands are run directly by +.IR exec (2). +.SH FILES +.F makefile +.br +.F Makefile +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR sh (1), +.I touch +in +.IR chdate (1), +.IR ar (1), +.IR mk (1) +.SH BUGS +Comments can't appear on recipe lines. +.br +Archive entries are not handled reliably. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/makeml.1 b/static/v10/man1/makeml.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c66b9efa --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/makeml.1 @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ +.TH MAKEML 1 +.SH NAME +makeml \- build the Standard ML of New Jersey system +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B makeml +options +.br +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fIMakeml\fP is a tool for building the Standard ML of New Jersey system (sml) +from source and `.mo' files. +For the standard installation the only options required are the machine type and +operating system. +There are also options to build a version with the compiler object code in the +heap instead of the text segment and to build the batch compiler. +For example +.RS +makeml \-vax \-bsd \-noshare +.RE +builds the vax version of the interactive system to run on bsd systems with +the compiler object code in the heap. +.SH OPTIONS +The following basic options are the only ones needed for normal use. +.TP +.BI \-sun3 +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI \-m68 +Build the sun-3 version of the system. +An operating system option must be specified (-sunos or -mach). +.TP +.BI \-sun4 +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI \-sparc +Build the sun-4 version of the system. +An operating system option must be specified (-sunos or -mach). +.TP +.BI \-next +Build the NeXT version of the system (implies -m68). +.TP +.BI \-encore +Build the Encore Multimax (ns32032 processor) version of the system. +This implies the \fB-bsd\fP option. +.TP +.BI \-vax +Build the vax version of the system. +For the vax an operating system option must be specified. +.TP +.BI \-bsd +Build a version that runs under bsd unix. For the Sun-3 or Sun-4, +you must specify either -sunos or -mach, not -bsd. +.TP +.BI \-sunos +Build a version that runs under SunOS. +.TP +.BI \-mach +Build a version that runs under Mach. +.TP +.BI \-ultrix +Build a version that runs under Ultrix. +.TP +.BI \-v9 +Build a version that runs under v9 Unix. +.TP +.BI \-batch +Build the batch compiler (with default name `smlc') instead of an +interactive system. +.TP +.BI \-noshare +Do not link the `.mo' files into an `a.out' format object file and include it in the +runtime executable. +.TP +.BI \-i +Make the `sml' image start out using the interpreter for faster compilation +and slower execution (for interactive system only; can switch +back to native code once in +`sml' by `System.Control.interp := false'). +.TP +.BI \-ionly +Build an image (with default name `smli') that has only the interpreter. +This gives fast compilation and saves space by eliminating the code +generator from the executable, but results in slower execution. +.TP +.BI \-o " image" +Use image as the name of the system image. +The default image name is `sml' for interactive systems, `smli' for the +interpreter only system and `smlc' for the batch compiler. +.PP +The following options may be used to tune garbage collection and paging performance. +.TP +.BI \-h " heapsize" +Set the initial heap size to \fIheapsize\fP kilo-bytes. +.TP +.BI \-m " softlimit" +Set the soft limit on the heap size to \fIsoftlimit\fP kilo-bytes. +.TP +.BI \-r " ratio" +Set the ratio of the heap size to live data to \fIratio\fP. +This must be at least 3. +.PP +The following options are for building and testing new versions of the system; they +are not necessary for normal installation. +.TP +.BI \-run +Build the run-time kernel (`runtime/run'), but don't build a system. +.TP +.BI \-noclean +Don't remove the existing `.o' files in the runtime directory. +.TP +.BI \-norun +Don't re-compile the runtime kernel. +This implies the \fB-noclean\fP option. +.TP +.BI \-target " machine" +Build a batch cross compiler for \fImachine\fP. +For example, to build a \fBvax\fP to \fBsparc\fP cross compiler +.ti +0.5i +makeml \-vax \-bsd \-target sparc +.br +This option implies the \fB-batch\fP option. +.TP +.BI \-mo " path" +Use \fIpath\fP as the directory containing the `.mo' files. +.TP +.BI \-runtime " path" +Use \fIpath\fP as the source directory for the runtime code. +.TP +.BI \-D def +When compiling the runtime code add ``\fB-D\fP\fIdef\fP'' as a command line option. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +linkdata(1) +.SH AUTHOR +John Reppy +.SH BUGS +This will not work with the sun cross-compilers (really a problem with the +runtime makefile). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/man.1 b/static/v10/man1/man.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dec4ecce --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/man.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'MAN (I)'3/15/72'MAN (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME man -- run off section of UNIX manual +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS man___ title [ section ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION man___ +is a shell command file that will locate +and run off a particular section of this manual. +Title is the the desired +part of the manual. +Section is the section number of the manual. +(In Arabic, not Roman numerals.) +If section is missing, 1_ is assumed. +For example, + + man man + +would reproduce this page. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /sys/man/man?/* +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO sh(I), roff(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "File not found", "Usage .." +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/maple.1 b/static/v10/man1/maple.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a8dba35 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/maple.1 @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +.TH MAPLE 1 "02 June 1987" "University of Waterloo" +.ds ]W "Symbolic Comp. Group +.SH NAME +maple \- interactive symbolic algebraic program +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B maple +[ +.B \-b +libname +] [ +.B \-q +] [ +.B \-s +] +\" If a constant width font is used, set cW to 1. +\" Other set cW to 0 and use .cs to set constant spacing for examples +.ie \w'M'>\w'.' .nr cW 0 +.el .nr cW 1 +\" +.SH DESCRIPTION +Initiate a session with the +.I maple +symbolic algebraic program. +Expressions are read from standard input and the results are produced +in the standard output file as soon as each input expression has been +read. +Maple has the ability to algebraically manipulate unbounded integers, +exact rational numbers, real numbers with arbitrary precision, symbolic +formulae, polynomials, sets, lists, and equations. +It can solve systems of equations, differentiate formulae, and integrate +formulae. +In the following example from a Maple session, Maple's output +is shown to the right of the input expressions. +.sp +.ps 9 +.vs 10 +.nf +.if !\n(cW .cs R 18 +.in +2 +p:=x^2\-x\-2; + 2 + p := x \- x \- 2 + +q:=(x+1)^2; + 2 + q := (x + 1) + +s:=p/q; + 2 + x \- x \- 2 + s := \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- + 2 + (x + 1) + +diff(s,x); # differentiate with respect to x + + 2 + 2 x \- 1 x \- x \- 2 + \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- \- 2 \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- + 2 3 + (x + 1) (x + 1) + +normal(s); + x \- 2 + \-\-\-\-\-\-\- + x + 1 + +Digits := 47; + Digits := 47 + +x := 3^50; + x := 717897987691852588770249 + +s; + 717897987691852588770247 + \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- + 717897987691852588770250 + +evalf(s); + .99999999999999999999999582113329270438496099068 + +quit; + +.in -2 +.if !\n(cW .cs R +.fi +.ps 10 +.vs 12 + +If there is a system-wide maple initialization file with the name +.I init +under the src subdirectory of the Maple library, then this file +is read before the session starts. +In addition, if there is a maple initialization file named +.I .mapleinit +in the user's home directory, this file is read next. +If the \fI\-s\fR (suppress initialization) +option is specified, Maple will forego reading +any initialization file when initiating a session. + + +If the +.I \-b +(library) option is used, +then +.I pathname +should be the pathname of a directory which contains the Maple library. +This is used to initialize the value of the Maple variable `libname'. +By default, `libname' is initialized with the pathname /u/maple/lib. +Some sites may install a maple shell script which uses the \fI\-b\fR +option to redefine the library pathname to be whatever is appropriate +for those sites, e.g., +.nf + maple \-b /usr/public/waterloo/maple/lib $* +.fi + +The \fI\-q\fR (quiet) option will suppress the printing of Maple's +startup logo, various informational messages (words used messages +and garbage collection messages), and the signoff message. +Maple is better suited for use as a filter when these messages are +suppressed. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.I "Maple: A Sample Interactive Session" +issued by the Symbolic Computation Group as +Research Report CS-85-01 available from the Department of Computer +Science, University of Waterloo, +.br +.I "Maple User's Guide" +by B.W. Char et al, Watcom Publications Limited, Waterloo, Ontario (1985). +.br +.IR mint (1) +.SH FILES +\&.mapleinit +.br +/usr/maple/lib \- Maple library (Pathname subject to change at +each installation.) +.SH AUTHOR +Symbolic Computation Group, University of Waterloo +.SH "FOR HELP" +At Waterloo, there is the newsgroup uw.maple which contains broadcasts +and discussions which would be of interest to general Maple users. +You should subscribe to this newsgroup if you intend to use Maple in +more than just a casual manner. +Users are encouraged to post their questions regarding Maple to this +newsgroup if they feel that their enquiries are of a general nature. +Replies will be posted to the newsgroup for all to see. +If you have a question that you think is of a very specific nature and +not of interest to others, you may send a mail message to +maple_help@watmum. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/match.1 b/static/v10/man1/match.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..058a529d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/match.1 @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 +.TH MATCH 1 +.SH NAME +match \- compare style tables from two or more texts +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B match +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +[style-file1 [style-file2 ...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Match +collates selected variables from tables produced by the +.IR style (1) +command and prints values from the different files +one below the other for easy comparison. +The +.I style-files +must contain tables produced by +.IR style . +.PP +.I Match +can also run on one file +to produce an abbreviated version of the +.I style +table. +.PP +When comparing texts, it is advisable to use +texts of similar length. +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH USES +This program is useful for visually inspecting similarities +and differences among stylistic features of different documents +or drafts and their revisions. +.SH SEE ALSO +style(1), +prose(1). +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/matlab.1 b/static/v10/man1/matlab.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..69866780 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/matlab.1 @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +.TH MATLAB 1 +.CT 1 numbers +.SH NAME +matlab \(mi interactive matrix desk calculator +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B /usr/lbin/matlab +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Matlab +manipulates complex matrices interactively. +Special cases include +real matrices and scalars. +Operations include pseudoinversion (which +is inversion for square nonsingular matrices), eigendecomposition, +various other factorizations, solution of linear equations, matrix +products (including inner and outer products), Kronecker products, +log, exponential and trigonometric functions of matrices, and rank and +condition estimation. +.PP +Variables are alphanumeric strings of at most +4 characters. +Case is ignored. +Expressions and assignment statements are written +as in Fortran. +Multiple statements can be put on one line, +separated by either comma or semicolon; the result of a statement +is written on the standard output unless a semicolon follows the statement. +Extensions to Fortran notation include: +.PP +.I Matrix construction +from elements. +Elements in a row are separated by commas; columns are +separated by semicolons; matrices are surrounded by +.L < > +brackets. +.PP +.I Transpose +is indicated by postfix prime +.LR ' . +.PP +.I Consecutive integers +are denoted by colons in the style 1:4 or 1:2:8 (meaning 1,3,5,7). +.L A(2:5) +is a subarray; +.L A(:,j) +is a column. +.PP +.I Identity +matrix is denoted +.LR eye ; +its dimensions are dictated by context. +.PP +.I Reverse division +is denoted by \e . +For example, +.L x = A \e b +is roughly the same as +.LR "x = inv(A) * b" , +except that Gaussian elimination, if applicable, is used to compute +.IR x . +.PP +Some +.I matlab +commands: +.TP +.B help +.PD0 +.TP +.BI help " word" +List commands and functions, or specific information about a +.IR word : +.IP +.ft 5 +.nf +ABS ANS ATAN BASE CHAR CHOL CHOP CLEA COND CONJ COS +DET DIAG DIAR DISP EDIT EIG ELSE END EPS EXEC EXIT +EXP EYE FILE FLOP FLPS FOR FUN HESS HILB IF IMAG +INV KRON LINE LOAD LOG LONG LU MACR MAGI NORM ONES +ORTH PINV PLOT POLY PRIN PROD QR RAND RANK RCON RAT +REAL RETU RREF ROOT ROUN SAVE SCHU SHOR SEMI SIN SIZE +SQRT STOP SUM SVD TRIL TRIU USER WHAT WHIL WHO WHY +.fi +.TP +.BI save(' file ') +.TP +.BI save(' file \fR[\fB, var \fR]...\fB') +Save all current variables, +or just the designated variables in +.I file. +.TP +.BI load(' file ') +Restore saved variables. +.TP +.BI exec(' file ') +Execute the commands in +.I file +before reading more commands from the standard input. +.PD +.PP +.I Matlab +can be called as a subroutine. +For details, see the reference or +type +.LR "help user" . +.SH FILES +.F /usr/lib/mathelp.dac +.br +.F /usr/lib/mathelp.idx +.SH "SEE ALSO" +Cleve Moler, +.I MATLAB User's Guide, +Technical Report CS81\-1 (Revised), Dept. +of Computer Science, University of New Mexico, 1982. +(Available in troff form with the Matlab source.) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..374c5e43 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68ar.1 @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ +.TH MC68AR 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68ar \- archive and library maintainer for portable archives +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mc68ar +key [ posname ] afile name ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mc68ar\^ +maintains groups of files +combined into a single archive file. +Its main use +is to create and update library files as used by the link editor. +It can be used, though, for any similar purpose. +.PP +When +.I mc68ar\^ +creates an archive, it creates headers in a format that is portable across +all machines. The portable archive's format and structure are described in +detail in +.IR ar (4). +The archive symbol table [described in +.IR ar (4)] +is used by the link editor +[\f2mc68ld(1)\f1] +to effect multiple passes over libraries of +object files in an efficient manner. +Whenever the +.IR mc68ar (1) +command is used to create or update the contents of an archive, the +symbol table is rebuilt. The symbol table can be forced to be rebuilt +by the +.BR s +option described below. +.PP +.I Key\^ +is one character from the set +.BR drqtpmx , +optionally concatenated with +one or more of +.BR vuaibcls . +.I Afile\^ +is the archive file. +The +.I names\^ +are constituent files in the archive file. +The meanings of the +.I key\^ +characters are: +.TP +.B d +Deletes the named files from the archive file. +.TP +.B r +Replaces the named files in the archive file. +If the optional character +.B u +is used with +.BR r , +then only those files with +modified dates later than +the archive files are replaced. +If an optional positioning character from the set +.B abi +is used, then the +.I posname\^ +argument must be present +and specifies that new files are to be placed +after +.RB ( a ) +or before +.RB ( b +or +.BR i ) +.IR posname . +Otherwise +new files are placed at the end. +.TP +.B q +Quickly appends the named files to the end of the archive file. +Optional positioning characters are invalid. +The command does not check whether the added members +are already in the archive. +Useful only to avoid quadratic behavior when creating a large +archive piece-by-piece. +.TP +.B t +Prints a table of contents of the archive file. +If no names are given, all files in the archive are tabled. +If names are given, only those files are tabled. +.TP +.B p +Prints the contents of named files in the archive. +.TP +.B m +Moves the named files to the end of the archive. +If a positioning character is present, +then the +.I posname\^ +argument must be present and, +as in +.BR r , +specifies where the files are to be moved. +.TP +.B x +Extracts the named files. +If no names are given, all files in the archive are +extracted. +In neither case does +.B x +alter the archive file. +.bp +.TP +.B v +Verbose. +Under the verbose option, +.I mc68ar\^ +gives a file-by-file +description of the making of a +new archive file from the old archive and the constituent files. +When used with +.BR t , +it gives a long listing of all information about the files. +When used with +.BR x , +it precedes each file with a name. +.TP +.B c +Create. +Normally, +.I mc68ar\^ +will create +.I afile\^ +when it needs to. +The create option suppresses the +normal message that is produced when +.I afile\^ +is created. +.TP +.B l +Local. +Normally, +.I mc68ar\^ +places its temporary files in the directory +.BR /tmp . +This option causes them to be placed in the local directory. +.TP +.B s +Symbol table creation. +Forces the regeneration of the archive symbol table even if +.IR mc68ar (1) +is not invoked with a command which will modify the archive contents. +This command is useful to restore the archive symbol table after the +.IR mc68strip (1) +command has been used on the archive. +.SH FILES +/tmp/ar\(** temporaries +.SH SEE ALSO +mc68ld(1), +mc68lorder(1), +mc68strip(1). +.br +a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference +Manual\f1. +.SH BUGS +If the same file is mentioned twice in an argument list, +it may be put in the archive twice. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..31b323da --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68as.1 @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.TH MC68AS 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68as \- \*N MC68000 assembler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.BR mc68as +.RB "[" \-o " objfile]" +.if 'mc68'x86' .RB \-x +.if 'mc68'3b' .RB "[" \-Q "]" +.RB "[" \-n "]" +.RB "[" \-m "]" +.RB "[" \-R "]" +.RB "[" \-V "]" +file-name +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68as +command +assembles the named file. +.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ +The output file is executable if no errors +occurred during the assembly, transfer vectors were not used, +and there are no unresolved external references.\} +The following flags +may be specified in any order: +.TP \w'\fB\-o\fP\ \fIobjfile\fP\ \ 'u +.BI \-o " objfile" +Puts the output of the assembly in +.IR objfile . +By default, the output file name is formed by +removing the +.B .s +suffix, if there is one, from the input file name +and appending a +.B .o +suffix. +.if 'mc68'x86' \{\ +.TP +.B \-x +This +flag is +.I required +for all x86 files. +\} +.if 'mc68'3b' \{ +.TP +.B \-Q +Warn the user if a transfer vector operand is used +in any context other than a "call" instruction. +\} +.TP +.B \-n +Turns off long/short address optimization. +By default, address optimization takes place. +.TP +.B \-m +Runs the +.I m4 +macro pre-processor +on the input to the assembler. +.TP +.B \-R +Removes (unlinks) the input file after assembly +is completed. +.TP +.B \-V +Writes the version number of the assembler being run +on the standard error output. +.SH FILES +.RI /tmp/mc68a[A-L]AAa XXXXXX +temporary files +.SH "SEE ALSO" +mc68ld(1), +mc68nm(1), +mc68strip(1). +.br +a.out(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference +Manual\f1. +.br +m4(1) in the +\f2UNIX System V User's Reference Manual\f1. +.br +\f2UNIX Assembler User's Guide for the Motorola 68000\f1 in the +\f2630 MTG Software Development Guide\f1. +.SH WARNING +.if 'mc68'3b' \{ +.PP +If the input file does not contain a +.B .file +assembler directive and the +.B \-m +flag was not specified, +the file name given by the assembler when an +error occurs is one of the temporary files +.RB ( /usr/tmp/mc68as \s-1XXXXXX\s+1) +\} +.PP +If the +.B \-m +.RI ( m4 +macro pre-processor invocation) option is used, +keywords for +.I m4 +.RI "[see " m4 (1)] +cannot be used as symbols (variables, functions, labels) +in the input file since +.I m4 +cannot determine which are assembler symbols and +which are real +.I m4 +macros. +.SH BUGS +The +.B even +assembler directive is not guaranteed to work +in the +.B .text +section when optimization is performed. +.PP +Arithmetic expressions may only have +one forward referenced symbol per expression. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..4cc4e674 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68conv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +.SA 1 +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH MC68CONV 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68conv \- \*N MC68000 object file converter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mc68conv +.RB [ \- ] +.RB [ \-a ] +.RB [ \-o ] +.RB [ \-p ] +.RB [ \-s ] +.B -t +target files +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68conv +command +converts \*N object files from their current format to the format +of the +.I target +machine. +Mc68conv can read an archive file in any of three formats: +the +.SM UNIX +pre-5.0 format, the 5.0 random access format, and the +6.0 portable +.SM ASCII +format. +It produces a file in the format specified +.RB ( -a , +.BR -o , +or +.BR -p ). +The converted file is written to +file\c +.I .v\c +\&. +.PP +Command line options are: +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \- +indicates +.I files +should be read from +.I stdin\c +\&. +.PP +.TP 12 +.B \-a +If the input file is an archive, produces the ouput file in the +6.0 portable ASCII archive format. +.PP +.TP 12 +.B \-o +If the input file is an archive, produces +the output file in the UNIX pre-5.0 format. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-p +If the input file is an archive, produces the ouput file in the +UNIX 5.0 random access archive format. +This is the default. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-s +Functions exactly as 3bswab, i.e. "preswab" +all characters in the object file. This is useful only for AT&T +3B20 Computer object files which are to be "swab-dumped" from a DEC machine +to a 3B20 Computer. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-t " target" +Converts the object file to the byte ordering of the +machine (\f2target\f1) to which the object file is being shipped. This +may be another host or a target machine. Legal values for +.I target +are: pdp, vax, ibm, i80, x86, b16, n3b, m32, and mc68. +.PP +Mc68conv can be used to convert all object files in common object file +format. It can be used on either +the source ("sending") or target ("receiving") machine. +.PP +Mc68conv is meant to ease the problems created +by a multi-host cross-compilation development environment. Mc68conv is best +used within a procedure for shipping object files from one machine to +another. +.SH "EXAMPLE" +.nf +# ship object files from pdp11 to ibm +$echo \(**.out | mc68conv -t ibm -$OFC\/foo.o +$uucp \(**.v my370!~\/rje\/ +.fi +.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" +All diagnostics are +intended to be self-explanatory. Fatal diagnostics on the command +lines cause termination. Fatal diagnostics on an input file cause the +program to continue to the next input file. +.bp +.SH "WARNINGS" +.PP +Mc68conv will not convert archives from one format to another if +both the source and target machines have the same byte ordering. +The +.SM UNIX +tool +.IR convert (1) +should be used for this purpose. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..43a1d523 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68cpp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH MC68CPP 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68cpp \- the C language preprocessor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B $DMD/lib/mc68cpp [ +option ... +.B ] +.B [ +ifile +.B [ +ofile +.B ] ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +.I Mc68cpp\^ +is the C language preprocessor which is invoked as the +first pass of any C compilation using the +.IR dmdcc (1) +command. Thus, the output of +.I mc68cpp\^ +is designed to be in a form acceptable as input +to the next pass of the C compiler. +As the C language evolves, +.I mc68cpp\^ +and the rest of the C compilation package will be +modified to follow these changes. +Therefore, the use of +.I mc68cpp\^ +other than in this framework is not suggested. +The preferred way to invoke +.I mc68cpp\^ +is through the +.IR dmdcc (1) +command, since the functionality of +.I mc68cpp\^ +may some day be moved elsewhere. See +.IR m4 (1) +for a general macro processor. +.PP +.I Mc68cpp\^ +optionally accepts two file names as arguments. +.I Ifile\^ +and +.I ofile\^ +are respectively the input and output +for the preprocessor. They default to standard input +and standard output if not supplied. +.PP +The following \fIoptions\fP to +.I mc68cpp\^ +are recognized: +.TP +.B \-P +Preprocesses the input without producing the line control +information used by the next pass of the C compiler. +.TP +.B \-C +By default, +.I mc68cpp\^ +strips C-style comments. If the +.B \-C +option is specified, all comments (except those found on +.I mc68cpp +directive lines) +are passed along. +.TP +.BI \-U name\^ +Removes any initial definition of +.IR name , +where +.I name\^ +is a reserved symbol +that is predefined by the particular preprocessor. +The current list of these possibly reserved symbols includes: +.PD 0 +.ne 3v +.RS 10 +.TP 19 +operating system: +ibm, gcos, os, tss, unix +.TP +hardware: +interdata, pdp11, u370, u3b, u3b5, vax, mc68000, mc68k16, mc68k32 +.TP +\s-1UNIX\s+1 variant: +.SM RES\*S, +.SM RT +.RE +.PD +.TP +.BI \-D name\^ +.PD 0 +.TP +.BI \-D name=def\^ +Defines +.I name\^ +as if by a +.B #define +directive. If no +.I =def\^ +is given, +.I name\^ +is defined as 1. +.bp +.PD +.TP +.BI \-I dir\^ +Changes the algorithm for searching for +.B #include +files +whose names do not begin with \f3/\fP +to look in +.I dir\^ +before looking in the directories on the standard list. +Thus, +.B #include +files whose names are enclosed in \f3"\|"\fP +will be searched for +first in the directory of the +.I ifile\^ +argument, +then in directories named in +.B \-I +options, +and last in directories on a standard list. +For +.B #include +files whose names are enclosed in +.BR <> , +the directory of the +.I ifile\^ +argument is not searched. +.PP +Two special names are understood by +.IR mc68cpp . +The name +.B _\^\^_\s-1LINE\s+1_\^\^_ +is defined as the current line number (as a decimal integer) as known by +.IR mc68cpp , +and +.B _\^\^_\s-1FILE\s+1_\^\^_ +is defined as the current file name (as a C string) as known by +.I mc68cpp.\^ +They can be used anywhere (including in macros) just as any +other defined name. +.PP +All +.I mc68cpp\^ +directives start with lines whose first character is +.BR # . +The directives are: +.TP +.BI #define " name" " " token-string +Replaces subsequent instances of +.I name\^ +with +.IR token-string . +.TP +\fB#define\fI name\fB(\fI arg\fB, ...,\fI arg\fB )\fI token-string\fR +Notice that there can be no space between +.I name +and the +.BR ( . +Replaces subsequent instances of +.I name +followed by a +.BR ( , +a list of comma separated tokens, and a +.B ) +by +.I token-string +where each occurrence of an +.I arg +in the +.I token-string +is replaced by the corresponding token in the comma separated list. +.TP +.BI #undef " name" +Causes the definition of +.I name +(if any) to be forgotten from now on. +.TP +\fB#include\fI "filename" +.PD 0 +.TP +.BI #include " " < filename > +Include at this point the contents of +.I filename +(which will then be run through +.IR mc68cpp ). +When the +.BI < filename > +notation is used, +.I filename +is only searched for in the standard places. +See the +.B \-I +option above for more detail. +.PD +.TP +\fB#line\fI integer-constant "filename" +Causes +.I mc68cpp +to generate line control information for the next pass of the +C compiler. +.I Integer-constant +is the line number of the next line +and +.I filename +is the file where it comes from. +If \fI"filename"\fR is not given, the current file name is unchanged. +.TP +.B #endif +.br +Ends a section of lines begun by a test directive +.RB ( #if , +.BR #ifdef , +or +.BR #ifndef ). +Each test directive must have a matching +.BR #endif . +.bp +.TP +.BI #ifdef " name" +The lines following will appear in the output if, and only if, +.I name +has been the subject of a previous +.B #define +without being the subject of an intervening +.BR #undef . +.TP +.BI #ifndef " name" +The lines following will not appear in the output if, and only if, +.I name +has been the subject of a previous +.B #define +without being the subject of an intervening +.BR #undef . +.SK +.TP +.BI #if " constant-expression" +Lines following will appear in the output if, and only if, the +.I constant-expression +evaluates to non-zero. +All binary non-assignment C operators, the +.B ?: +operator, the unary +.BR \(mi , +.BR ! , +and +.B ~ +operators are all legal in +.IR constant-expression . +The precedence of the operators is the same as defined by the C language. +There is also a unary operator +.BR defined , +which can be used in +.I constant-expression +in these two forms: +.BI defined " " ( " name " ) +or +.BI defined " name" . +This allows the utility of +.BR #ifdef " and " #ifndef +in a +.B #if +directive. +Only these operators, integer constants, and names which +are known by +.I mc68cpp +should be used in +.IR constant-expression . +In particular, the +.B sizeof +operator is not available. +.TP +.B #else +Reverses the notion of the test directive which +matches this directive. So if lines previous to +this directive are ignored, the following lines +will appear in the output, +and vice versa. +.PP +The test directives and the possible +.B #else +directives can be nested. +.SH FILES +.TP 1.5i +/usr/include +standard directory for +.B #include +files +.SH SEE ALSO +.PP +dmdcc(1). +.br +m4(1) in the +\f2UNIX System V User's Reference Manual\f1. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.PP +The error messages produced by +.I mc68cpp\^ +are intended to be self-explanatory. The line number and filename +where the error occurred are printed along with the diagnostic. +.SH WARNING +When newline characters were found in argument lists for macros +to be expanded, previous versions of +.I mc68cpp\^ +put out the newlines as they were found and expanded. +The current version of +.I mc68cpp\^ +replaces these newlines with blanks to alleviate problems that the +previous versions had when this occurred. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..f26c0178 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68cprs.1 @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +.TH MC68CPRS 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68cprs \- compress a MC68000 object file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mc68cprs +.RB [ \-pv ] +infile outfile +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68cprs +command +reduces the size of a Motorola 68000 object file, +.IR infile , +by removing duplicate structure and union descriptors. +The reduced file, +.IR outfile , +is produced as output. +.PP +The options are: +.PP +.TP 6 +.B \-p +Prints statistical messages including: +.sp +.RS 12 +total number of tags +.br +total duplicate tags +.br +total reduction of +.IR infile . +.RE +.PP +.TP 6 +.B \-v +Prints verbose error messages if error condition occurs. +.SH EXAMPLE +.ft CW + mc68cprs dmda.out sm3b +.ft R +.SH SEE ALSO +mc68strip(1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..d44c9134 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68dis.1 @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +.TH MC68DIS 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68dis \- MC68000 disassembler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mc68dis +.RB [ \-o ] +.RB [ \-V ] +.RB [ \-L ] +.RB [ \-d " sec]" +.RB [ \-da " sec ]" +.RB [ \-F " function]" +.RB [ \-t " sec]" +.br +.RB [ \-l " string]" +files +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68dis +command +produces an assembly language listing +of each of its +object +.IR file +arguments. +The listing includes +assembly +statements +and a hexadecimal or octal representation of the binary that +produced those statements. +.PP +The following \fIoptions\fP are +interpreted by the disassembler and may be specified in any order. +.PP +.TP 12 +.B \-o +Prints numbers in octal. +Default is hexadecimal. +.PP +.TP 12 +.B \-V +Version number of the disassembler is written to standard error. +.PP +.TP 12 +.B \-L +Invokes a look-up of C source labels in the symbol table for +subsequent printing. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-d " sec" +Disassembles the +named section as data, +printing the offset of +the data from the +beginning of the section. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-da " sec" +Disassembles the +named section as data, +printing the actual +address of the data. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-F " function" +Disassembles the +named function +in each object file +that is specified +on the command line. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-t " sec" +Disassembles the +named section as text. +.PP +.TP 12 +.BR \-l " string" +Disassembles the +library file specified +as +.IR string . +For example, +one would issue the +command +.B "mc68dis \-l x \-l z" +to disassemble +.B libx.a +and +.B libz.a\c +\&. +All libraries are +assumed to be in +.BR $DMD/lib . +.DT +.br +.PP +If the +.BR \-d , +.B \-da +or +.BR \-t +options are specified, +only those named +sections from each +user supplied file name +are disassembled. +Otherwise, all sections +containing text will +be disassembled. +.PP +If the +.BR \-F +option is specified, +only those named +functions from each +user supplied file name +are disassembled. +.B \-F +only works with object files that have been compiled with the +.B "dmdcc -g" +option. +.bp +.PP +On output, a number enclosed in brackets +at the beginning of a line, +such as +.BR [5] , +represents a C break-pointable line number that +starts with the following instruction. +These line numbers are present only when the +object file has been compiled with the +.B "dmdcc -g" +option. +An expression such as +.B <40> +in the operand field, +following a relative displacement +for control transfer instructions, +is the computed address +within the section to which +control is transferred. +Similarly, an expression such as +\f3<40>+%d0\f1, +following a program counter index plus displacement +operand, indicates that the effective address +of the operand in the current section is 40 plus the content of %d0. +A C function name +will appear in the first column, +followed by +.BR (\|) , +if the function was compiled with +.BR -g . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dmdcc(1), +mc68as(1), +mc68ld(1). +.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" +The self-explanatory diagnostics +indicate errors in +the command line or problems +encountered with the +specified files. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..6552bbe6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68dump.1 @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +.TH MC68DUMP 1 "630 MTG" +.tr ~ +.SH NAME +mc68dump \- dump parts of an MC68000 object file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mc68dump +.RB [ \-acfghlorst ] +.RB [ \-z " name]" +files +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68dump +command +dumps selected parts of each +of its object \fIfile\fP arguments. +.PP +This command +accepts both object files and archives of object files. +It +processes each file argument according to one or more of the following +options: +.TP \w'\fB\-d~number~~'u +.B \-a +Dumps the archive header of each member of each archive file +argument. +.TP +.B \-g +Dumps the global symbols in the symbol table of a 6.0 archive. +.TP +.B \-f +Dumps each file header. +.TP +.B \-o +Dumps each optional header. +.TP +.B \-h +Dumps section headers. +.TP +.B \-s +Dumps section contents. +.TP +.B \-r +Dumps relocation information. +.TP +.B \-l +Dumps line number information. +.TP +.B \-t +Dumps symbol table entries. +.TP +.BR \-z ~name +Dumps line number entries for the named function. +.TP +.BR \-c +Dumps the string table. +.PP +The following \fImodifiers\fP are used in conjunction with the options +listed above to modify their capabilities. +.TP \w'\fB\-d~number~~'u +.BR \-d ~number +Dumps the section number or range of sections starting at \fInumber\fP +and ending either at the last section number or \fInumber\fP specified by +.BR +d . +.TP +.BR +d ~number +Dumps sections in the range either beginning with +first section or beginning +with section specified by \fB\-d\fP. +.TP +.BR \-n ~name +Dumps information pertaining only to the named entity. +This +.I modifier +applies to +.BR \-h , +.BR \-s , +.BR \-r , +.BR \-l , +and +.BR \-t . +.TP +.B \-p +Suppresses printing of the headers. +.TP +.BR \-t ~index +Dumps only the indexed symbol table entry. +The +\f3-t\f1, +used in conjunction with +.BR +t , +specifies a range of symbol +table entries. +.TP +.BR +t ~index +Dumps the symbol table entries in the range ending with the indexed entry. +The range begins at the first symbol table entry or at the entry +specified by the +.B \-t +option. +.TP +.B \-u +Underlines the name of the file for emphasis. +.TP +.B \-v +Dumps information in symbolic representation rather than numeric +(e.g., +.SM C_STATIC +instead of +.BR \s-10X02\s+1 ). +This \fImodifier\fP can be used with all the above options +except +.B \-s +and +.B \-o +options +of +.IR mc68dump. +.TP +.BR \-z ~name,number +Dumps line number entry or range of line numbers starting at +.I number +for the named function. +.TP +.BR \+z ~number +Dumps line numbers starting at either function +.IR name " or " number +specified +by +.BR \-z, +up to +.I number +specified by +.BR +z . +.PP +.PP +Blanks separating an \fIoption\fP and its \fImodifier\fP are optional. +The comma separating the name from the number modifying the +.B \-z +option may +be replaced by a blank. +.PP +The +.B -z +and +.B -n +options that take a +.I name +modifier will only work with object files that have been compiled +with the +.B "dmdcc \-g" +option. +.PP +The +.I mc68dump +command +attempts to format the information it dumps in a meaningful way, +printing certain information in character, +hex, octal or decimal representation as appropriate. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dmdcc(1). +.br +a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programer's +Reference Manual\f1. +.tr ~~ diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..5d64faf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68ld.1 @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +.\" @(#) ld.1: 2.3 11/17/83 +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH MC68LD 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68ld \- link editor for MC68000 object files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f3mc68ld [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file-names +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68ld +command +combines several +object files into one, +performs relocation, +resolves external symbols, +and supports symbol table information +for symbolic debugging. +In the simplest case, the names of several object +programs are given, and +.I mc68ld +combines them, producing +an object module that can either be executed or +used as input for a subsequent +.I mc68ld +run. +The output of +.I mc68ld +is left in +.BR mc68a.out . +This file is executable +if no errors occurred during the load. +If any input file, +.IR file-name , +is not an object file, +.I mc68ld +assumes it is either a text file containing link editor directives +or an archive library. +(See +the \f2Link Editor\f1 in the \f2UNIX System V Support Tools +Guide\f1 for a discussion of input directives.) +.PP +If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once +at the point it is encountered in the argument list. +Only those routines defining an unresolved external +reference are loaded. +The order of library members is unimportant because +\fImc68ld\fR passes through each library's (archive) symbol +table as many times as necessary until no new +external symbols are resolved and no new references are generated. +.PP +The following options are recognized by +.IR mc68ld . +.TP \w'\fB\-u\fP\ symname\ \ 'u +.if !'mc68'' \{\ +.B \-a +Produces an absolute file; gives warnings for undefined references. +Relocation information is stripped from the output object file +unless the +.B \-r +option is given. The +.B \-r +option is needed only when an absolute file should retain its +relocation information (the normal case for the 630 MTG +downloaded programs). +If neither +.BR \-a " nor " \-r +is given, +.B \-a +is assumed. +\} +.TP +.BR \-e " epsym" +Sets the default entry point address for the output file to be that of +the symbol +.IR epsym . +.if \nF \{\ +This option forces the +.B \-X +option to be set. \} +.TP +.BR \-f " fill" +Sets the default fill pattern for ``holes'' within +an output section as well as initialized bss sections. +The argument \fIfill\fP is a two-byte constant. +.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ +.TP +.B \-i +This option specifies that separate ``I'' and ``D'' space are to be +generated. +.B \-i +has no effect if +.B \-tv +is given. +This allows 64K of instructions and 64K of data. +'br \} +.if 'mc68'x86' \{\ +.TP +.B \-i +This option specifies that separate ``I'' and ``D'' space is to be +generated. +The option +.B \-i +has no effect if +.B \-tv +is given. +This allows up to 1 MB of text and 1 MB of data. +'br \} +.ie \nD \{\ +.TP +.BR \-l "x" +Searchs a library +.BI lib x .a, +where \fIx\fR is up to seven characters. +A library is searched when its name is encountered, +so the placement of a \fB\-l\fR +is significant. +By default, libraries are located in +.ie 'mc68'' +.BR /lib. +.el $DMD/lib. +'br \} +.el \{\ +.TP +.BI \-l x +Searches a library +.BI lib x .a, +where \fIx\fR is up to seven characters. +A library is searched when its name is encountered, +so the placement of a \fB\-l\fR +is significant. +By default, libraries are located in +.ie 'mc68'' /lib and /usr/lib. +.el $DMD/lib . +'br \} +.TP +.B \-m +Produces a map or listing of the input/output sections +on the standard output. +.TP +.BR \-o " outfile" +Produces an output object file by the name +.IR outfile . +The name of the default object file is +.BR mc68a.out . +.TP +.B \-r +Retains relocation entries in +the output object file. +Relocation entries must be saved if the +output file is to become an input file in a +subsequent +.I mc68ld +run. +.ie 'mc68'' The +.el \{\ +Unless +.B \-a +is also given, the +\} +link editor will not complain about +unresolved references. +.TP +.B \-s +Strips line number entries and +symbol table information +from the output object file. +.if \nG \{\ +.TP +.B \-t +Turns off the warning about multiply defined symbols that are +not the same size. +'br \} +.if \nC \{\ +.TP +.B \-tv +Transfer vector object files are expected. +When libraries are searched with this option, +component object modules with the wrong magic +number are ignored (as are transfer vector modules +when +.B \-tv +is not given). +The default is +.I no +transfer vectors. +'br \} +.TP +.BR \-u " symname" +Enters \fIsymname\fP as an undefined symbol +in the symbol table. +This is useful +for loading entirely from a library, since initially the symbol +table is empty and an unresolved reference is needed +to force the loading of the first routine. +.\" .if \nG \{\ +.\" .TP +.\" .B \-x +.\" Do not preserve local (non-.globl) symbols in the output symbol +.\" table; enter external and static symbols only. This option saves +.\" some space in the output file. +.\" 'br \} +.if \nH \{\ +.TP +.B \-z +Do not bind anything to address zero. This option will catch null +pointers. +.TP +.B \-F +Allows the object module to be paged. +'br \} +.TP +.BR \-L " dir" +Changes the algorithm of searching for +.BI lib x .a +to look in +.IR dir +before looking in $DMD/lib. +This option is effective only if it precedes the +.B \-l +option on the command line. +.if \nG \{\ +.TP +.B \-M +Outputs a message for each multiply defined external definition. +'br \} +.TP +.B \-N +Puts the data section immediately following the text in the output file. +.TP +.B \-V +Outputs a message giving information about the version of mc68ld +being used. +.TP +.BR \-VS " num" +Uses +\f2num\f1 +as a decimal version stamp +identifying the +.BR mc68a.out +file that is produced. The version +stamp is stored in the optional header. +.if \nF \{\ +.TP +.B \-X +Generates a standard UNIX file header within the ``optional header'' +field in the output file. +'br \} +.DT +.br +.DT +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 25 +.ie 'mc68'' /lib/lib\fI?\fR.a +.el $DMD/lib/lib\fI?\fR.a +libraries +.if 'mc68'' \{\ +.TP 25 +/usr/lib/lib?.a +libraries +\} +.TP 25 +mc68a.out +output file +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dmdcc(1), mc68as(1). +.br +a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's +Reference Manual\f1. +.bp +.SH WARNINGS +Through its options and input directives, the Motorola 68000 link editor gives +users great flexibility; +however, those who use the input directives must assume +some added responsibilities. +Input directives and options should insure the following properties +for programs: +.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ +.IP \- 5 +C programs must have data +.RB ( .data "), bss (" .bss ), +and stack space in one 64K byte region. +Stack space +.I must +be provided. +'br \} +.IP \- 5 +C defines a zero pointer as null. +A pointer to which zero has been assigned must +not point to any object. +To satisfy this, users must not place any object +at virtual address zero in the data space. +.tr ~ +.IP \- 5 +When the link editor is called through +.IR dmdcc (1), +a startup routine is linked with the user's program. This +routine usually calls exit(~) [see +.IR exit (3R)] +after execution of the main program. If the user +calls the link editor directly, then the user must insure that +the program always calls exit(~) rather than falling through the +end of the entry routine. +.if 'mc68'b16' \{\ +.IP \- 5 +Without a transfer vector, all text (code) +must reside within a single 64K-byte area. +Transfer vector function linkage removes this +restriction. +.PP +By default, the link editor takes care of these +things. +Specifying regions or defining sections with names other +than +.BR .bss ", " .data ", " .text ", or" +.B .tv +can decrease the link editor's ability to do these +automatically. +In general, users should not specify regions when the +program uses a transfer vector. +'br \} +.if \nC \{\ +.SH BUGS +.I mc68ld +can not currently create transfer vector symbols. +Thus no symbols created through assignment in an +input directive will be given an entry in the transfer vector. +In particular, this means the entry point of a program +can not be redefined by assignment to +.BR main . +Unsuspecting users who create such a symbol and expect it +to be in the transfer vector receive an obscure error +message about an invalid transfer vector relocation reference. +'br \} +.PP +The +\f3\-VS\f1 \f2num\f1 +option has an effect only when the +.B "\-X" +option is also selected. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..6eb484ff --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68lorder.1 @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH MC68LORDER 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68lorder \- find ordering relation for an object library +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mc68lorder +file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The input +is one or more object or library archive +.I files\^ +[see +.IR mc68ar (1)]. +The standard output +is a list of pairs of object file names, +meaning that the first file of the pair refers to +external identifiers defined in the second file. +The output may be processed by +.IR tsort (1) +to find an ordering of +a library suitable for one-pass access by +.IR mc68ld (1). +Note that the link editor +.IR mc68ld (1) +is capable of multiple passes over an archive in the portable archive format +[see +.IR ar (4)] +and does not require that +.IR mc68lorder (1) +be used when building an archive. The usage of +the +.IR mc68lorder (1) +command may, however, allow for a slightly more efficient access of +the archive during the link edit process. +.PP +The following example builds a new library +from existing +.B \&.o +files. +.PP +.RS +.ft CM +mc68ar cr library `mc68lorder \(**.o | tsort` +.ft 1 +.RE +.SH FILES +\(**symref, \(**symdef temporary files +.SH "SEE ALSO" +mc68ar(1), +mc68ld(1). +.br +ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference +Manual\f1. +.br +tsort(1) in the +\f2\s-1UNIX\s+1 System V User Reference Manual\f1. +.SH BUGS +Object files whose names do not end with +.BR .o , +even when +contained in library archives, are overlooked. +The global symbols and references are attributed to +some other file. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..02c2f36c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68nm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +.TH MC68NM 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68nm \- print name list of a MC68000 object file +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f3mc68nm [\f1 options \f3]\f1 file-names +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68nm\^ +command +displays the symbol table of each +Motorola 68000 object file +.IR file-name . +.I File-name\^ +may be a relocatable or absolute Motorola 68000 object file; +or it may be an archive of relocatable or absolute Motorola 68000 object files. +For each symbol, the following information is printed. +For the \f3TYPE\f1, \f3SIZE\f1, or \f3LINE\f1 information, +the object file must be compiled with the +\f3-g\f1 option of the \f2dmdcc\f1(1) command. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B Name +The name of the symbol. +.TP 9 +.B Value +Its value expressed as an offset or an address +depending on its storage class. +.TP 9 +.B Class +Its storage class. +.TP 9 +.B Type +Its type and derived type. +If the symbol is an instance of a structure or of a union, then the structure +or union tag is given following the type (e.g. struct-tag). +If the symbol is an array, then the array dimensions are given +following the type (eg., +.BR char[ n ][ m ] ). +.TP 9 +.B Size +Its size in bytes, if available. +.TP 9 +.B Line +The source line number at which it is defined, if available. +.TP 9 +.B Section +For storage classes static and external, +the object file section containing the symbol (e.g., text, data or bss). +.DT +.br +.PP +The output of +.I mc68nm +may be controlled using the following options: +.\" .if !'mc68'' \{\ +.\" .PP +.\" .TP 9 +.\" .B \-a +.\" Produce full output. Redundant symbols (.text, .data, and .bss), +.\" normally suppressed, are printed. +.\" \} +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-d +Prints the value and size of a symbol in decimal (the default). +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-o +Prints the value and size of a symbol in octal instead of decimal. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-x +Prints the value and size of a symbol in hexadecimal instead of decimal. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-h +Does not display the output header data. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-v +Sorts external symbols by value before they are printed. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-n +Sorts external symbols by name before they are printed. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-e +Prints only external and static symbols. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-f +.\" .ie 'mc68'' \{\ +Produces full output. Prints redundant symbols (.text, .data and .bss), +that are normally suppressed. +.\" \} +.\" .el \{\ +.\" ``Fancy'' output is produced; that is, the symbol table information +.\" is post-processed to reflect the block structure of the source code. +.\" \} +.bp +.TP 9 +.B \-u +Prints undefined symbols only. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-V +Prints the version of the mc68nm command executing on the standard error output. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-T +By default, +.I mc68nm\^ +prints the entire name of the symbols listed. +Since object files can have symbol names with an arbitrary number of +characters, a name that is longer than the width of the column set aside +for names will overflow its column, forcing every column after the name +to be misaligned. The +.B \-T +option causes +.I mc68nm\^ +to truncate every name which would otherwise overflow its column and +place an asterisk as the last character in the displayed name to mark +it as truncated. +.DT +.br +.PP +Options may be used in any order, either singly or in combination, +and may appear anywhere in the command line. +Therefore, both +.B "mc68nm name \-e \-v" +and +.B "mc68nm \-ve name" +print the static and external symbols in +.IR name , +with external symbols sorted by value. +.SH "FILES" +/usr/tmp/nm?????? +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dmdcc(1), +mc68as(1), +mc68ld(1). +.br +a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference +Manual\f1. +.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" +.TP 9 +``mc68nm: name: cannot open'' +if +.I name +cannot be read. +.PP +.TP 9 +``mc68nm: name: bad magic'' +if +.I name +is not an appropriate Motorola 68000 object file. +.PP +.TP 9 +``mc68nm: name: no symbols'' +if the symbols have been stripped from +.IR name . +.SH "WARNINGS" +When all the symbols are printed, they must be printed in the order they +appear in the symbol table in order to preserve scoping information. +Therefore, the +.B \-v +and +.B \-n +options should be used only in conjunction with the +.B \-e +option. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..0707b768 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68size.1 @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +.ds ZZ DEVELOPMENT PACKAGE +.TH MC68SIZE 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68size \- print section sizes of MC68000 object files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.BR mc68size +.RB [ -o ] +.RB [ -x ] +.RB [ -V ] +files +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68size +command +produces section size information for each section in the +Motorola 68000 object files. +The size of the text, data, and bss (uninitialized data) +sections are printed along with the total size of the object +file. If an archive file is input to the mc68size command the +information for all archive members is displayed. +.PP +Numbers are printed in decimal unless either the +.B \-o +or the +.B \-x +option is used, in which case they are printed in +octal, or in hexadecimal, respectively. +.PP +The +.B \-V +flag will supply the version information on the +.I mc68size +command. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dmdcc(1), +mc68as(1), +mc68ld(1). +.br +a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's Reference +Manual\f1. +.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" +"mc68size: name: cannot open" +.br + if +.I name +cannot be read. +.PP + +"mc68size: name: bad magic" +.br + if +.I name +is not a Motorola 68000 object file. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 b/static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 new file mode 100755 index 00000000..7d02e453 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mc68strip.1 @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +.TH MC68STRIP 1 "630 MTG" +.SH NAME +mc68strip \- strip symbolic information from MC68000 object file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mc68strip +.RB [ \-l ] +.RB [ \-m ] +.RB [ \-x ] +.RB [ \-r ] +.RB [ \-s ] +.if 'mc68'3b' \{\ +.RB [ \-f ] +.\} +.RB [ \-V ] +file-names +.SH DESCRIPTION +The +.I mc68strip +command +strips the symbol table and line number information from +Motorola 68000 object files, +including archives. +Once this has been done, no symbolic debugging access +is available for that file; therefore, this command is +normally run only on production modules that have +been debugged and tested. +.PP +The amount of information stripped from the symbol table +can be controlled by using the following options: +.PP +.TP 9 +.BR \-l +Strips line number information only; +does not strip any symbol table information. +.PP +.TP 9 +.BR \-m +Strips symbol table information only; +does not strip any relocation information. +Used for 630 MTG applications which need relocation information for downloads, +but do not neccesarily need symbol table information. +This option does not work on archives. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-x +Does not strip static or external symbol information. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-r +Resets the relocation indices into the symbol table. +.if 'mc68'3b' \{\ +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-f +Removes the relocation information from an executable object file +for all sections not of type COPY. Reset +relocation indices into the symbol table for all retained relocation +information. +.\} +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-s +Resets the line number indices into the symbol table (does not remove). +Resets the relocation indices into the symbol table. +.PP +.TP 9 +.B \-V +Prints the version of the mc68strip command executing on the standard error output. +.DT +.br +.PP +If there are any relocation entries in the object file and any symbol +table information is to be stripped, +.I mc68strip +will complain and terminate without stripping +.I file-name +unless the +\f3\-r\f1 or \f3\-m\f1 +flags are used. +.PP +If the +.IR mc68strip +command is executed on a common archive file [see +.IR ar (4)] +the archive symbol table will be removed. The archive +symbol table must be restored by executing the +.IR mc68ar (1) +command with the +.B s +option before the archive can be +link edited by the +.IR mc68ld (1) +command. +.IR Mc68strip (1) +will instruct the user with appropriate warning messages when this +situation arises. +.PP +The purpose of this command is to reduce the file storage +overhead taken by the object file. +.SH "FILES" +/usr/tmp/mc68str?????? +.SH "SEE ALSO" +dmdcc(1), +mc68ar(1), +mc68as(1), +mc68ld(1). +.br +a.out(4), ar(4) in the \f2UNIX System V Programmer's +Reference Manual\f1. +.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" +.TP 9 +mc68strip: name: cannot open +.br + if +.I name +cannot be read. +.PP +.TP 9 +mc68strip: name: bad magic +.br + if +.I name +is not a Motorola 68000 object file. +.PP +.TP 9 +mc68strip: name: relocation entries present; cannot strip +.br + if +.I name +contains relocation entries and the +\f3\-r\f1 or \f3\-m\f1 +flag is not used, +the symbol table information cannot be stripped. +.PP +.TP 9 +mc68strip: name: other options set with "m" option +.br + if +other flags are used with the -m option which is mutually exclusive. +.PP +.TP 9 +mc68strip: "m" option not allowed on archive files +.br + if +file name is an archive file. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/memo.1 b/static/v10/man1/memo.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2103d66 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/memo.1 @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +.TH MEMO 1 "local" +.SH NAME +memo \- produce macros for MM interactively +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B memo +.I filename \ +[ +.I argument\ +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Memo +is designed as a computer +aid to help new or infrequent users of the PWB/MM Memorandum +Macros. +It asks questions interactively to produce a +file which contains the necessary introductory and concluding +macros for PWB/MM. +In order to enter the text of the memo, you must enter +the editor. +For help to any question enter a +.I +\? +A detailed explanation of the proper +answer will be printed. +.P +The following are optional arguments to be used when filename already exists to avoid lengthy printout: +.TP 7 +.B a +Enter editor to add/modify text. +.TP 7 +.B b +Be prompted for concluding macros. +.TP 7 +! +Overwrite filename and begin introductory macros. +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR nroff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/merge.1 b/static/v10/man1/merge.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39c8f7fb --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/merge.1 @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +.th MERGE I 11/7/73 +.sh NAME +merge \*- merge several files +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd merge +[ +.bd \*-anr +] [ \fB\*-\fIn\fR ] [ \fB+\fIn\fR ] [ name ... ] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Merge +merges several files together +and writes the result on +the standard output. +If a file +is designated by +an unadorned `\*-', +the standard input is understood. +.s3 +The merge is line-by-line in increasing ASCII collating sequence, +except that upper-case letters are considered +the same as the corresponding lower-case letters. +.s3 +.it Merge +understands several flag arguments. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-a\fR Use strict ASCII collating sequence. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-n\fR An initial numeric string, possibly preceded by '\*-', +is sorted by numerical value. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-r\fR Data is in reverse order. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\*-\fIn\fR The first \fIn\fR fields in each line +are ignored. A field is defined as a string of non-space, non-tab +characters separated by tabs and spaces from its neighbors. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB+\fIn\fR The first \fIn\fR characters are ignored. +Fields (with \fB\*-\fIn\fR) +are skipped before characters. +.i0 +.sh "SEE ALSO" +sort(I) +.sh BUGS +Only 8 files can be handled; +any further files are ignored. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mesg.1 b/static/v10/man1/mesg.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..880ab13d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mesg.1 @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'MESG (I)'3/15/72'MESG (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME mesg -- permit or deny messages +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS mesg____ [ n_ ][ y_ ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION mesg____ n_ +forbids messages via write_____ by revoking non-user +write permission on the user's typewriter. +mesg____ y_ reinstates permission. +mesg____ with no argument reverses the current permission. +In all cases the previous state is reported. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /dev/tty? +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO write(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" if the standard input file is not a typewriter +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mint.1 b/static/v10/man1/mint.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f9bd7a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mint.1 @@ -0,0 +1,420 @@ +.TH MINT 1 "02 June 1987" "University of Waterloo" +.ds ]W "Symbolic Comp. Group +.SH NAME +mint \- produce usage report from a maple program +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mint +[ +.B \-i +info_level +] +[ +.B \-l +] +[ +.B \-d +library_database +] +[ +.B \-a +database_file +] +[ +.B \-q +] +[ file ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fIMint\fP produces a report about possible errors in a Maple source file +and also reports about how variables are used in the file. +If \fIfile\fP is not given, then the standard input file is used to +read Maple source statements. +Unlike \fImaple\fP, \fImint\fP is not terminated when it reads a +quit statement. +It is terminated when it reaches the end of file. +When started, \fImint\fP normally produces a mint leaf logo. +This can be suppressed by the use of the \fB\-q\fP (quiet) option. + +The amount of information to be produced by \fImint\fP is specified by the +\fIinfo_level\fP argument. +The values allowed for this argument are: +.nf + + 0 \- Display no information. + 1 \- Display only severe errors + 2 \- Display severe and serious errors + 3 \- Display warnings as well as severe and serious errors + 4 \- \kxGive a full report on variable usage as well as + \h'|\nxu'displaying errors and warnings + +.fi +A report for each procedure in the file is displayed +separately followed by a global report for statements not contained +within any procedure. +If the severity of errors found within a procedure is less than +what \fIinfo_level\fP specifies, then no report is produced for +that procedure. +In all cases, the most severe error found in the file will be used +to set the exit status for \fImint\fP. +Thus, by using an \fIinfo_level\fP of 0, \fImint\fP can be used to +determine the severity of errors in a file without actually producing +any output at all. +If no value is given for \fIinfo_level\fP on the command line, a default +value of 2 (severe and serious errors) is used. + +The types of errors and warnings found are classified as severe, +serious, and warning. A severe error is an undisputable error. +A serious error +is almost certainly an error. However, persons defining procedures +for addition to the Maple library may choose to ignore these ``errors''. +Warnings are possible errors. +They point to constructs that may be correct in some contexts, but +probable errors in other contexts. +The types of errors and warnings produced are: +.in +0.8i +.ti -0.8i + +\fBSEVERE\fP + +.ti -0.4i +Syntax errors +.br +A caret symbol will point to the token +that is being read when the error occurred. + +.ti -0.4i +Duplicated parameter +.br +A name appears more than once in a parameter list for a +procedure. + +.ti -0.4i +Duplicated local +.br +A name is declared more than once in the list of local +variables for a procedure. + +.ti -0.4i +Local variable and parameter conflict +.br +A name is used both as a parameter and a local +variable within a procedure. In further analysis, +the name is treated as a parameter. + +.ti -0.4i +Local variable and system-defined name conflict +.br +The name of a local variable is also used by Maple as a +system-defined name. + +.ti -0.4i +Parameter and system-defined name conflict +.br +The name of a parameter is also used by Maple as a +system-defined name. + +.ti -0.4i +Duplicated loop name +.br +A loop nested within another loop uses as its loop +control variable the same name that the outer loop uses. + +.ti -0.4i +Break or next statement outside of a loop +.br +A break or a next statement occurs outside of any loop. +(Break or next may still be used as names within an +expression outside of a loop.) + +.ti -0.4i +RETURN or ERROR function call outside of a procedure +.br +A function call to RETURN or ERROR occurs outside of +a procedure body. (RETURN or ERROR may still be used +as names if they are not invoked as functions.) + +.ti -0.4i +Unreachable code +.br +There are statements which follow directly after a goto type +of statement. These statements are unreachable and will never +be executed. A goto statement is a next statement, a break +statement, a quit, stop, or done statement, a RETURN() call, +an ERROR() call. +An if statement all branches of which end in a goto statement +is also considered a goto statement. + +.ti -0.8i +\fBSERIOUS\fP + +.ti -0.4i +Overly long name +.br +A name whose length is too long is used. The length of +the name is truncated to the maximum allowed. + +.ti -0.4i +Unused local variable +.br +A local variable is declared for a procedure but never +used within the procedure body. + +.ti -0.4i +Local variable assigned a value but not used otherwise +.br +A local variable is assigned a value within a procedure but +is not otherwise used. + +.ti -0.4i +Local variable never assigned a value but used as a value +.br +A local variable was never assigned a value in a procedure but +within the procedure its value is used in an expression. +Such an expression would contain a pointer to a non-existent +local variable if the expression were returned or assigned to +a global variable. + +.ti -0.4i +System-defined name is overwritten +.br +A name which is treated as a system-defined name by Maple +is assigned a value. +The class of system-defined names includes names which are +special names for the Maple kernel, e.g., true and Digits, +names of built-in functions, e.g., anames and lprint, +names of functions which are automatically readlib-defined, e.g., +cat or help. +Also included are names that are special to routines for evalf, +diff, expand, etc. +Examples of these are Pi and sinh. +These special names generally should not be assigned a value in order +for some library routines to work properly. +Included in the report is an indication of which parts of Maple use +the system-defined names. + +.ti -0.4i +Dubious global name in a procedure +.br +A global name is used within a procedure. A global name is +a name which is not a parameter, a local name, a system-defined name, or +a catenated name. +A quoted name used as an argument to the routines lprint, print, and +ERROR is probably used just for output and is not considered a name. +Global names used as procedure +names in a function call are not considered errors. +Also excluded are names of files in the Maple library, e.g., +`convert/ratpoly`. +All remaining names are considered as global names. +By convention, global names used in a package of routines should +begin with the `_` (underscore) character. +Those that do not are considered dubious and are reported here. + +.ti -0.4i +Library file name overwritten +.br +The name of a library file, e.g., `convert/ratpoly`, is assigned +a value. It is usual for the name of a library file to also be +the name of a library function. Hence, the library function +`convert/ratpoly` is no longer accessible. +(The \fB\-l\fP (library file) option will downgrade these messages +from a serious error to a report.) + +.ti -0.4i +Unused parameter in a procedure +.br +A name specified in the parameter list of a procedure is +never used in the procedure. This is considered a serious +error if `args' is never used in the procedure either. +If args is used in the procedure, then it's possible that +the parameter may be accessed through a construct using `arg' +and this error is downgraded to a warning. + +.ti -0.4i +Wrong argument count in a procedure call +.br +The number of arguments passed in a procedure call doesn't match the +number of formal arguments in the definition of a procedure of the +same name recorded in the library database file. +A library database file (cf. \fBDATABASE FILES\fP) contains information +about the minimum number of arguments expected for a procedure, the +maximum number of arguments, whether `nargs' is used in the procedure +body, and the name of the file in which the procedure is defined. +If the number of actual arguments passed is either less than the +minimum arguments expected or more than the maximum number expected +\fIand\fP `nargs' is not used in the procedure body, then a warning is +generated. +This warning is suppressed if one of the arguments passed is `args'. +It is a common practice for a procedure to take its argument list, +contained in the expression sequence `args', and pass that on to +other procedures. +What appears to \fImint\fP as one argument is in reality a sequence +of arguments. +.ti -0.8i + +\fBWARNING\fP + +.ti -0.4i +Equation used as a statement +.br +This may be intentional. On the other hand, it's common +for many Fortran and C programmers to mistype '=' for +the assignment operator which is ':=' in Maple. + +.ti -0.4i +Unused parameter in a procedure +.br +See similar entry under serious errors. + +.ti -0.4i +Global name used +.br +A global name which may or may not start with '_' is used within +this procedure. + +.ti -0.4i +Catenated name used +.br +A name is formed through the catenation operator. + +.in -0.8i +\fBOTHER REPORTS\fP +.sp +If \fIinfo_level\fP is 4, then a usage report is given for each procedure +as well as global statements within the file. +Each usage report shows how parameters, local variables, global variables, +system-defined names and catenated names are used. +As well can easily be done, the following information about how a +variable is used may be provided: +.nf + + 1. Used as a value + 2. Used as a table or list element + 3. Used as a call-by-value parameter + 4. Used as a call-by-name parameter (a quoted parameter) + 5. Called as a function + 6. Assigned a procedure + 7. Assigned a list + 8. Assigned a set + 9. Assigned a range + 10. Assigned a value as a table or list element + 11. \kxAssigned a function value + \h'|\nxu'(assigned a value to remember as a function value) + +.fi + +In addition, a list of all the error messages generated is given. + +.SH COMMAND OPTIONS +The \fB\-i\fP (info level) and \fB\-q\fP (quiet) options are explained +above. +The \fB\-l\fP (library file) option will suppress the catenated name +warning and the global name warning if only one of each is used +outside of any procedure. +Typically, a Maple library source file will contain one of each for +use in loading the library file. +This option will also suppress error messages about library file names +being overwritten since one of the purposes of a library file is to +assign a procedure to a library file name. +Moreover, warnings about the assignment of values to the system-defined +names Digits and printlevel are suppressed since this often happens +in a library file. + +.SH INITIALIZATION FILE +If there is a file named .mintrc in your home directory, \fImint\fP +will read this file for command line options. +This file may contain several lines containing command line options or +arguments as you would type them on a command line. +Since \fImint\fP reads this file and then scans the actual command line, +arguments on the actual command line can override arguments in the +initialization file. +A good use of the initialization file may be to enter the name of the +Maple library procedure database file when using the \fB\-d\fP option, +obviating the need to type this each time \fImint\fP is used. + +.SH PROCEDURE DATABASE FILES +A procedure database file contains information about the definition of +procedures which is useful in ensuring that these procedures are +used correctly. +Each line in a database file contains the following: + +.nf + +.fi + +where is a legal Maple name without any embedded blanks, + is the minimum number of arguments expected for +, is the maximum number of arguments, +is 1 if `nargs' is used in the procedure body for and +0 otherwise, is the name of the file in which +is defined. +The entries on each line are in free format but must be separated +from one another by at least one space character. +The values for and should be numbers in +the range 0 to 999. +If is 999 for an entry, that denotes that the procedure +has no upper limit on the number of arguments. +There may be multiple entries for a particular procedure. +Later entries supercede earlier ones. + +A procedure database file for the entire Maple library is generated +or updated periodically. +This file is +/usr/maple/data/mint.db and contains close to 1200 entries and +it takes \fImint\fP about 7 seconds to read this file. + +A private database file can be generated through the use of +the \fB\-a\fP command line option for \fImint\fP. +A file name must follow \fB\-a\fP on the command line and is taken +to be a procedure database file. +As \fImint\fP scans procedure definitions in the input file, it +will append procedure database entries into the database file. +For information gathered automatically by \fImint\fP about a +procedure, and will both be the number of +formal arguments used in the procedure definition. +You can edit the database file to adjust these values. +Remember that use of `nargs' in a procedure body sets the +field to 1 in the database entry and that this will turn off +argument count checking for that procedure. + +.SH EXAMPLES + +.ft CW +.nf +mint -d /usr/maple/data/mint.db -a my.db -i 4 rat_poisson +mint -d /usr/maple/data/mint.db -d my.db rat_trap +mint -i 1 -q warfarin +.fi +.ft P + +The first example gives a full report (info_level = 4) for the +Maple source file rat_poisson. +It reads the Maple library database file and uses this to check that +procedures defined in the Maple library are called with the correct +number of arguments. +Information about procedures defined in rat_poisson is \fIappended\fP +to my.db. + +In the second example, both the Maple library database file and +the private database file my.db are used to check number of arguments +used in procedure calls in the file rat_trap. +Entries in my.db supercede entries in the library database file +if the name of a library procedure has been redefined in my.db. + +In the third example, no argument count checking is done. +Since the info_level is set to 1, only severe errors are +reported. +Since the \fB\-q\fP (quiet) option is used, the printing +of the \fImint\fP leaf logo is suppressed in the output. + +.SH FILES USED +\&.mintrc \- Mint initialization file +/usr/maple/data/mint.db \- \kxMaple library procedure database +\h'|\nxu'(The location of the database may be different for each site) +.SH SEE ALSO +maple + +.SH STATUS +\fIMint\fP will return an exit status of 1, 2, or 3 if the +worst error it detects is a warning, serious error, or severe +error, respectively. An exit status of 0 is returned if no +errors or warnings are found. + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mk.1 b/static/v10/man1/mk.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d0018c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mk.1 @@ -0,0 +1,617 @@ +.TH MK 1 +.CT 1 prog_c writing_troff prog_other +.SH NAME +mk, mkconv, membername \- maintain (make) related files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mk +[ +.B -f +.I mkfile +] ... +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I name ... +] +.PP +.B mkconv +.I makefile +.PP +.B membername +.I aggregate ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mk +is most often used to keep object files current with the +source they depend on. +.PP +.I Mk +reads +.I mkfile +and builds and executes dependency dags (directed acyclic graphs) for the target +.IR names . +If no target is specified, the targets of the first non-metarule in +the first +.I mkfile +are used. +If no +.B -f +option is present, +.L mkfile +is tried. +Other options are: +.TP \w'\fL-d[egp]\ 'u +.B -a +Assume all targets to be out of date. +Thus, everything gets made. +.PD 0 +.TP +.BR -d [ egp ] +Produce debugging output +.RB ( p +is for parsing, +.B g +for graph building, +.B e +for execution). +.TP +.B -e +Explain why each target is made. +.TP +.B -i +Force any missing intermediate targets to be made. +.TP +.B -k +Do as much work as possible in the face of errors. +.TP +.B -m +Generate an equivalent makefile on standard output. +Recipes are not handled well. +.TP +.B -n +Print, but do not execute, the commands +needed to update the targets. +.TP +.B -t +Touch (update the modified date of) non-virtual targets, without +executing any recipes. +.TP +.B -u +Produce a table of clock seconds spent with +.I n +recipes running. +.TP +.BI -w name1,name2,... +Set the initial date stamp for each name +to the current time. +The names may also be separated by blanks or newlines. +(Use with +.B -n +to find what else would need to change if the named files +were modified.) +.PD +.PP +.I Mkconv +attempts to convert a +.IR make (1) +.I makefile +to a +.IR mkfile +on standard output. +The conversion is not likely to be faithful. +.PP +The shell script +.I membername +extracts member names +(see `Aggregates' below) +from its arguments. +.SS Definitions +A +.I mkfile +consists of +.I assignments +(described under `Environment') and +.IR rules . +A rule contains +.I targets +and a +.I tail. +A target is a literal string, or +.I label, +and is normally a file name. +The tail contains zero or more +.I prerequisites +and an optional +.I recipe, +which is a shell script. +.PP +A +.I metarule +has a target of the form +.IB A % B +where +.I A +and +.I B +are (possibly empty) strings. +A metarule applies to any label that matches the target with +.B % +replaced by an arbitrary string, called the +.IR stem . +In interpreting a metarule, +the stem is substituted for all occurrences of +.B % +in the prerequisite names. +A metarule may be marked as using regular expressions (described under `Syntax'). +In this case, +.B % +has no special meaning; +the target is interpreted according to +.IR regexp (3). +The dependencies may refer to subexpressions in the normal way, using +.BI \e n. +The +.I dependency dag +for a target consists of +.I nodes +connected by directed +.IR arcs . +A node consists of a label +and a set of arcs leading to prerequisite nodes. +The root +node is labeled with an original target +.I name. +.SS Building the Dependency Dag +.PP +Read the +.I mkfiles +in command line order and distribute rule tails over targets +to get single-target rules. +.PP +For a node +.IR n , +for every rule +.I r +that matches +.IR n 's +label generate an arc to a prerequisite node. +The node +.I n +is then marked as done. +The process is then repeated for each of the prerequisite nodes. +The process stops if +.I n +is already done, +or if +.I n +has no prerequisites, +or if any rule would be used more than +.B $NREP +times on the current path in the dag. +A probable node is one where the label exists as a file +or is a target of a non-metarule. +.PP +After the graph is built, it is checked for cycles, +and subdags containing no probable nodes are deleted. +Also, for any node with arcs generated by a non-metarule with a recipe, +arcs generated by a metarule with a recipe +are deleted. +Disconnected subdags are deleted. +.SS Execution +Labels have an associated date stamp. +A label is +.I ready +if it has no prerequisites, or +all its prerequisites are made. +A ready label is +.I trivially uptodate +if it is not a target and has a nonzero date stamp, or +it has a nonzero date stamp, +and all its prerequisites are made and predate the ready label. +A ready label is marked +.I made +(and given a date stamp) +if it is trivially uptodate or by executing the recipe +associated with the arcs leading from the node associated with the ready label. +The +.B P +attribute can be used to generalize +.IR mk 's +notion of determining if prerequisites predate a label. +Rather than comparing date stamps, it executes a specified program +and uses the exit status. +.PP +Date stamps are calculated differently for virtual labels, +for labels that correspond to extant files, +and for other labels. +If a label is +.I virtual +(target of a rule with the +.B V +attribute), +its date stamp is initially zero and upon being made is set to +the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites. +Otherwise, if a label is nonexistent +(does not exist as a file), +its date stamp is set to the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites, +or zero if it has no prerequisites. +Otherwise, the label is the name of a file and +the label's date stamp is always that file's modification date. +.PP +Nonexistent labels which have prerequisites +and are prerequisite to other label(s) are treated specially unless the +.B -i +flag is used. +Such a label +.I l +is given the date stamp of its most recent prerequisite +and if this causes all the labels which have +.I l +as a prerequisite to be trivially uptodate, +.I l +is considered to be trivially uptodate. +Otherwise, +.I l +is made in the normal fashion. +.PP +Two recipes are called identical if they arose by distribution +from a single rule as described above. +Identical recipes may be executed only when all +their prerequisite nodes are ready, and then just one instance of +the identical recipes is executed to make all their target nodes. +.PP +Files may be made in any order that respects +the preceding restrictions. +.PP +A recipe is executed by supplying the recipe as standard input to +the command +.B + /bin/sh -e +.br +The environment is augmented by the following variables: +.TP 14 +.B $alltarget +all the targets of this rule. +.TP +.B $newprereq +the prerequisites that caused this rule to execute. +.TP +.B $nproc +the process slot for this recipe. +It satisfies +.RB 0\(<= $nproc < $NPROC , +where +.B $NPROC +is the maximum number of recipes that may be executing +simultaneously. +.TP +.B $pid +the process id for the +.I mk +forking the recipe. +.TP +.B $prereq +all the prerequisites for this rule. +.TP +.B $stem +if this is a metarule, +.B $stem +is the string that matched +.BR % . +Otherwise, it is empty. +For regular expression metarules, the variables +.LR stem0 ", ...," +.L stem9 +are set to the corresponding subexpressions. +.TP +.B $target +the targets for this rule that need to be remade. +.PP +Unless the rule has the +.B Q +attribute, +the recipe is printed prior to execution +with recognizable shell variables expanded. +To see the commands print as they execute, +include a +.L set -x +in your rule. +Commands returning nonzero status (see +.IR intro (1)) +cause +.I mk +to terminate. +.SS Aggregates +Names of the form +.IR a ( b ) +refer to member +.I b +of the aggregate +.IR a . +Currently, the only aggregates supported are +.IR ar (1) +archives. +.SS Environment +Rules may make use of shell (or environment) variables. +A legal shell variable reference of the form +.B $OBJ +or +.B ${name} +is expanded as in +.IR sh (1). +A reference of the form +.BI ${name: A % B = C\fB%\fID\fB}\fR, +where +.I A, B, C, D +are (possibly empty) strings, +has the value formed by expanding +.B $name +and substituting +.I C +for +.I A +and +.I D +for +.I B +in each word in +.B $name +that matches pattern +.IB A % B . +.PP +Variables can be set by +assignments of the form +.I + var\fB=\fR[\fIattr\fB=\fR]\fItokens\fR +.br +where +.I tokens +and the optional attributes +are defined under `Syntax' below. +The environment is exported to recipe executions. +Variable values are taken from (in increasing order of precedence) +the default values below, the environment, the mkfiles, +and any command line assignment. +A variable assignment argument overrides the first (but not any subsequent) +assignment to that variable. +.br +.ne 1i +.EX +.ta \n(.lu/3u +\n(.lu/3u +.nf +AS=as FFLAGS= NPROC=1 +CC=cc LEX=lex NREP=1 +CFLAGS= LFLAGS= YACC=yacc +FC=f77 LDFLAGS= YFLAGS= +BUILTINS=' +.ta 8n +%.o: %.c + $CC $CFLAGS -c $stem.c +%.o: %.s + $AS -o $stem.o $stem.s +%.o: %.f + $FC $FFLAGS -c $stem.f +%.o: %.y + $YACC $YFLAGS $stem.y && + $CC $CFLAGS -c y.tab.c && mv y.tab.o $stem.o; rm y.tab.c +%.o: %.l + $LEX $LFLAGS -t $stem.l > $stem.c && + $CC $CFLAGS -c $stem.c && rm $stem.c' +ENVIRON= +.EE +.PP +The builtin rules are obtained from the variable +.B BUILTINS +after all input has been processed. +The +.B ENVIRON +variable is split into parts at control-A characters, +the control-A characters are deleted, and the parts are +placed in the environment. +The variable +.B MKFLAGS +contains all the option arguments (arguments starting with +.L - +or containing +.LR = ) +and +.B MKARGS +contains all the targets in the call to +.IR mk . +.SS Syntax +Leading white space (blank or tab) is ignored. +Input after an unquoted +.B # +(a comment) is ignored as are blank lines. +Lines can be spread over several physical lines by +placing a +.B \e +before newlines to be elided. +Non-recipe lines are processed by substituting for +.BI ` cmd ` +and then substituting for variable references. +Finally, the filename metacharacters +.B []*? +are expanded. +.tr #" +Quoting by +.BR \&'' , +.BR ## , +and +.B \e +is supported. +The semantics for substitution and quoting are given in +.IR sh (1). +.PP +The contents of files may be included by lines beginning with +.B < +followed by a filename. +.PP +.tr ## +Assignments and rule header lines are distinguished by +the first unquoted occurrence of +.B : +(rule header) +or +.B = +(assignment). +.PP +A rule definition consists of a header line followed by a recipe. +The recipe consists of all lines following the header line +that start with white space. +The recipe may be empty. +The first character on every line of the recipe is elided. +The header line consists of at least one target followed by the rule separator +and a possibly empty list of prerequisites. +The rule separator is either a single +.LR : +or is a +.L : +immediately followed by attributes and another +.LR : . +If any prerequisite is more recent than any of the targets, +the recipe is executed. +This meaning is modified by the following attributes +.TP +.B < +The standard output of the recipe is read by +.I mk +as an additional mkfile. +Assignments take effect immediately. +Rule definitions are used when a new dependency dag is constructed. +.PD 0 +.TP +.B D +If the recipe exits with an error status, the target is deleted. +.TP +.B N +If there is no recipe, the target has its time updated. +.TP +.B P +The characters after the +.B P +until the terminating +.B : +are taken as a program name. +It will be invoked as +.B "sh -c prog 'arg1' 'arg2'" +and should return 0 exit status +if and only if arg1 is not out of date with respect to arg2. +Date stamps are still propagated in the normal way. +.TP +.B Q +The recipe is not printed prior to execution. +.TP +.B R +The rule is a metarule using regular expressions. +.TP +.B U +The targets are considered to have been updated +even if the recipe did not do so. +.TP +.B V +The targets of this rule are marked as virtual. +They are distinct from files of the same name. +.PD +.PP +Similarly, assignments may have attributes terminated by +.BR = . +The only assignment attribute is +.TP 3 +.B U +Do not export this variable to recipe executions. +.SH EXAMPLES +A simple mkfile to compile a program. +.IP +.EX +prog: a.o b.o c.o + $CC $CFLAGS -o $target $prereq +.EE +.PP +Override flag settings in the mkfile. +.IP +.EX +$ mk target CFLAGS='-O -s' +.EE +.PP +To get the prerequisites for an aggregate. +.IP +.EX +$ membername 'libc.a(read.o)' 'libc.a(write.o)' +read.o write.o +.EE +.PP +Maintain a library. +.IP +.EX +libc.a(%.o):N: %.o +libc.a: libc.a(abs.o) libc.a(access.o) libc.a(alarm.o) ... + names=`membername $newprereq` + ar r libc.a $names && rm $names +.EE +.PP +Backquotes used to derive a list from a master list. +.IP +.EX +NAMES=alloc arc bquote builtins expand main match mk var word +OBJ=`echo $NAMES|sed -e 's/[^ ][^ ]*/&.o/g'` +.EE +.PP +Regular expression metarules. +The single quotes are needed to protect the +.BR \e s. +.IP +.EX +\&'([^/]*)/(.*)\e.o':R: '\e1/\e2.c' + cd $stem1; $CC $CFLAGS -c $stem2.c +.EE +.PP +A correct way to deal with +.IR yacc (1) +grammars. +The file +.B lex.c +includes the file +.B x.tab.h +rather than +.B y.tab.h +in order to reflect changes in content, not just modification time. +.IP +.EX +YFLAGS=-d +lex.o: x.tab.h +x.tab.h: y.tab.h + cmp -s x.tab.h y.tab.h || cp y.tab.h x.tab.h +y.tab.c y.tab.h: gram.y + $YACC $YFLAGS gram.y +.EE +.PP +The above example could also use the +.B P +attribute for the +.B x.tab.h +rule: +.IP +.EX +x.tab.h:Pcmp -s: y.tab.h + cp y.tab.h x.tab.h +.EE +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR make (1), +.IR chdate (1), +.IR sh (1), +.IR regexp (3) +.br +A. Hume, +.RI ` Mk : +a Successor to +.IR Make ', +this manual, Volume 2 +.SH BUGS +Identical recipes for regular expression metarules only have one target. +.br +Seemingly appropriate input like +.B CFLAGS=-DHZ=60 +is parsed as an erroneous attribute; correct it by inserting +a space after the first +.LR = . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c159819 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mkdir.1 @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'MKDIR (I)'3/15/72'MKDIR (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME mkdir -- make a directory +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS mkdir_____ dirname ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION mkdir_____ creates specified directories +in mode 17. +.sp +The standard entries "." and ".." are made automatically. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO rmdir(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "dirname ?" +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4273ce25 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mkdist.1 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +.TH MKDIST 1 +.SH NAME +mkdist, insdist \(em make and install distribution packages +.SH SYNOPSIS +.ft CW +/usr/lib/dist/mkdist [-v] [-D \fIold\fP=\fInew\fP] [-[Xx] \fIcommand\fP] \fIfiles ...\fP +.sp +/usr/lib/dist/insdist [-v] [-D \fIold\fP=\fInew\fP] [-R \fIrootdir\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mkdist +packages the named files into a distribution package on the standard output. +A distribution package is an ordinary +.IR tar (1) +file, containing the files of the package as well as installation information +for use by +.IR insdist . +.PP +The +.B -D +option to both +.I mkdist +and +.I insdist +allows prefix substitution to be performed on pathnames going into the +distribution. (\c +.I Mkdist +arranges for all file names in the distribution to be absolute path names, +by prepending the current directory to any relative pathname arguments.) +At most one +.B -D +option will be applied to any name in the distribution, so there are no +substitution loops. If multiple +.B -D +options might match a given file name, the leftmost one from the command +line is chosen. +The +.B -R +option (\c +.I insdist +only) additionally specifies that all files are to be unpacked relative +to the given root directory. +.PP +The +.B -X +and +.B -x +options to +.I mkdist +allow a command to be given that will be executed +when the distribution is unpacked by +.I insdist . +These options are identical, except that pathname prefix substitution from +.B -D +options will be applied to a command specified in a +.B -X +option. +.PP +The +.B -v +option turns on verbose output describing what's going on. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR tar (1) +.SH BUGS +The +.B -v +option should show more. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ccc3a918 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mkstand.1 @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 +.TH MKSTAND 1 +.SH NAME +mkstand \- compile style standards for prose program +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mkstand +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +][ +.B \-mm +| +.B \-ms +][ +.B \-li +| +.B \+li +][ +.B \-o +outfile ] file1 file2 ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mkstand +enables users to compile their own set of +.IR style (1) +standards for use by +.IR prose (1). +.I Prose +describes stylistic features of a text +and compares them to specified standards. +If a user or group, for example a writing group, +has many documents of a certain type +that they consider good, +those documents can be used as the basis for their own standards. +.I Mkstand +creates the standards, +which reflect the stylistic features +of the input documents. +Then the user can use +.I prose +to evaluate documents according to those standards. +.PP +.I Mkstand +runs +.I style +on a set of documents and computes the means +and standard deviations of certain +.I style +statistics. +Then it puts these into +.I outfile +.RI ( stand.out +is the default) in a format that +.I prose +can read. +Then if +.I prose +is run with the command: +.PP +.RS 5 +.BI "prose \-x " "outfile textfile" +.RE +.PP +it compares +.I textfile +with the standards in +.IR outfile . +The command: +.PP +.RS 5 +.BI "wwbstand \-x " "outfile" +.RE +.PP +will display the standards in a comprehensible form. +.PP +.I Mkstand +tries to produce valid standards by enforcing these requirements: +.RS 5 +.TP +1. +Input files must be at least 90 sentences or 1900 words long. +.TP +2. +If an input file has +.I style +scores that are more than 2 standard deviations from the mean, +scores for that file are excluded from the computation of the standards. +.RE +.PP +Although +.I mkstand +will compile standards for any number of documents (up to 75), +standards will be most reliable if at least 20 documents are used. +.PP +Because +.I mkstand +runs +.IR deroff (1) +on input files before computing scores, +formatting header files should be included as part of the input. +.PP +Four options affect +.IR deroff : +.RS 5 +.TP +.B \-mm +eliminate +.IR mm (1) +macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences +(e.g. headings), +from the analysis. +This is the default. +.TP +.B \-ms +eliminate +.IR ms (1) +macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences, +from the analysis. +The +.B \-ms +flag overrides the default, +.BR \-mm . +.TP +.B \-li +eliminate list items, +as defined by +.I mm +macros, from the analysis. +This is the default. +.TP +.B \+li +Include list items in the input text, +in the analysis. +This flag should be used if the texts contain lists of sentences, +but not if the texts contain many lists of non-sentences. +.RE +.PP +Other options are: +.RS 5 +.TP 11 +.BI \-o " outfile" +put standards in +.I outfile +instead of the default +.IR stand.out . +.RE +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.PP +.I Mkstand +saves the +.I style +scores it used in computing the standards in a file named +.IR styl.scores . +Users should examine the scores in this file +for any scores that seem unusual or invalid. +If any are found, +.I mkstand +should be rerun without the unusual document. +.SH FILES +.TP 21 +/tmp/$$stat.out +temporary file containing +.I style +tables of input files +.TP +stand.out +default output file containing standards +.TP +styl.scores +output file containing +.I style +scores used in compiling standards +.SH SEE ALSO +prose(1), +style(1), +deroff(1), +wwbstand(1), +wwb(1). +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2906eb97 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mkstr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +.TH MKSTR 1 2/24/79 +.UC +.SH NAME +mkstr \- create an error message file by massaging C source +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mkstr +[ +.B \- +] +messagefile prefix file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mkstr +is used to create files of error messages. +Its use can make programs with large numbers of error diagnostics much +smaller, and reduce system overhead in running the program as the +error messages do not have to be constantly swapped in and out. +.PP +.I Mkstr +will process each of the specified +.I files, +placing a massaged version of the input file in a file whose name +consists of the specified +.I prefix +and the original name. +A typical usage of +.I mkstr +would be +.DT +.PP + mkstr pistrings xx *.c +.PP +This command would cause all the error messages from the C source +files in the current directory to be placed in the file +.I pistrings +and processed copies of the source for these files to be placed in +files whose names are prefixed with +.I xx. +.PP +To process the error messages in the source to the message file +.I mkstr +keys on the string +\%`error("' +in the input stream. +Each time it occurs, the C string starting at the `"' is placed +in the message file followed by a null character and a new-line character; +the null character terminates the message so it can be easily used +when retrieved, the new-line character makes it possible to sensibly +.I cat +the error message file to see its contents. +The massaged copy of the input file then contains a +.I lseek +pointer into the file which can be used to retrieve the message, i.e.: +.IP +.DT +.nf +\fBchar\fR efilname[] = "/usr/lib/pi_strings"; +\fBint\fR efil = -1; +.sp +error(a1, a2, a3, a4) +{ + \fBchar\fR buf[256]; + + \fBif\fR (efil < 0) { + efil = open(efilname, 0); + \fBif\fR (efil < 0) { +oops: + perror(efilname); + exit(1); + } + } + \fBif\fR (lseek(efil, (long) a1, 0) |\|| read(efil, buf, 256) <= 0) + \fBgoto\fR oops; + printf(buf, a2, a3, a4); +} +.fi +.PP +The optional +.B \- +causes the error messages to be placed at the end of the specified +message file for recompiling part of a large +.IR mkstr \|ed +program. +.SH SEE\ ALSO +lseek(2), xstr(1) +.SH AUTHORS +William Joy and Charles Haley +...SH BUGS +...All the arguments except the name of the file to be processed could be made unnecessary. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 b/static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ad049ee --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mkunique.1 @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +.TH MKUNIQUE 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +mkunique \- create files with unique names +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mkunique +[ +.I template ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mkunique +uses the library function +.IR mkunique (3) +to create +files with unique names, +one per specified template. +If no template is supplied, +.I mkunique +creates a single file with template +.LR qXXXXXX . +The resulting file names are echoed on the standard output, +one per line. +.LP +This command may be used to create names for scratch files in +publically shareable multilevel secure `blind' directories, +without violating security policy. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR mkunique (3), +.IR mktemp (3), +.IR bl (4) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mm.1 b/static/v10/man1/mm.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7931c0ed --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +.TH MM 1 +.SH NAME +mm \- print out documents formatted with the \s-1MM\s+1 macros +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mm +[ options ] [ files ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mm\^ +can be used to type out documents using +.IR nroff (1) +and the +.SM MM +text-formatting macro package. +It has options to specify +preprocessing by +.IR tbl (1) +and/or +.IR neqn (1) +and postprocessing by various terminal-oriented output filters. +The proper pipelines and the +required arguments and flags for +.IR nroff (1) +and +.SM MM +are generated, depending on the options selected. +.PP +.I Options\^ +for +.I mm\^ +are given below. +Any other arguments or flags (e.g., +.BR \-rC3 ) +are passed +to +.IR nroff (1) +or to +.SM MM\*S, +as appropriate. +Such options can occur in any order, +but they must appear before the +.I files\^ +arguments. +If no arguments are given, +.I mm\^ +prints a list of its options. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP 9 +.BI \-T term +Specifies the type of output terminal; +for a list of recognized values for +.IR term , +type +.BR "help term2" . +If this option is +.I not\^ +used, +.I mm\^ +will use the value of the shell variable +.SM +.B $TERM +from the environment (see +.IR profile (5) +and +.IR environ (7)) +as the value of +.IR term , +if +.SM +.B $TERM +is set; +otherwise, +.I mm\^ +will use +.B 450 +as the value of +.IR term . +If several terminal types are specified, +the last one takes precedence. +.TP +.B \-12 +Indicates that the document is to be produced in 12-pitch. +May be used when +.SM +.B $TERM +is set to one of +.BR 300 , +.BR 300s , +.BR 450 , +and +.BR 1620 . +(The pitch switch on the +.SM DASI +300 and 300s terminals must be manually +set to +.B 12 +if this option is used.) +.TP +.B \-c +Causes +.I mm\^ +to invoke +.IR col (1); +note that +.IR col (1) +is invoked automatically by +.I mm\^ +unless +.I term\^ +is one of +.BR 300 , +.BR 300s , +.BR 450 , +.BR 37 , +.BR 4000A , +.BR 382 , +.BR 4014 , +.BR tek , +.BR 1620 , +and +.BR X . +.TP +.B \-e +Causes +.I mm\^ +to invoke +.IR neqn (1); +also causes +.I neqn +to read the +.B /usr/pub/eqnchar +file (see +.IR eqnchar (7)). +.TP +.B \-t +Causes +.I mm\^ +to invoke +.IR tbl (1). +.TP +.B \-E +Invokes the +.B \-e +option of +.IR nroff (1). +.TP +.B \-y +Causes +.I mm\^ +to use the non-compacted version of the macros (see +.IR mm (7)). +.PD +.PP +As an example (assuming that the shell variable +.SM +.B $TERM +is set in the environment to +.BR 450 ), +the two command lines below are equivalent: +.RS +.PP +mm \|\-t \|\-rC3 \|\-12 \|ghh\(** +.br +tbl \|ghh\(** \|\(bv \|nroff \|\-cm \|\-T450\-12 \|\-h \|\-rC3 +.RE +.PP +.I Mm\^ +reads the standard input +when +.B \- +is specified +instead of any file names. +(Mentioning other files together with +.B \- +leads to disaster.)\ +This option allows +.I mm\^ +to be used as a filter, e.g.: +.RS +.PP +cat \|dws \|\(bv \|mm \|\- +.RE +.SH HINTS +.PD 0 +.TP +1. +.I Mm\^ +invokes +.IR nroff (1) +with the +.B \-h +flag. +With this flag, +.IR nroff (1) +assumes that the terminal has tabs set +every 8 character positions. +.TP +2. +Use the +.BI \-o list\^ +option of +.IR nroff (1) +to specify ranges of pages to be output. +Note, however, that +.IR mm , +if invoked with +one or more of the +.BR \-e , +.BR \-t , +and +.B \- +options, +.I together\^ +with the +.BI \-o list\^ +option of +.IR nroff (1) +may cause a harmless ``broken pipe'' diagnostic +if the last page of the document is not specified in +.IR list . +.TP +3. +If you use the +.B \-s +option of +.IR nroff (1) +(to stop between pages of output), +use line-feed (rather than return or new-line) +to restart the output. +The +.B \-s +option of +.IR nroff (1) +does not work with the +.B \-c +option of +.IR mm , +or if +.I mm\^ +automatically invokes +.IR col (1) +(see +.B \-c +option above). +.TP +4. +If you lie to +.I mm\^ +about the kind of terminal its output will be printed on, +you'll get (often subtle) garbage; +however, if you are redirecting output into a file, use the +.B \-T37 +option, and then use the appropriate terminal filter when you actually print that file. +.PD +.br +.ne 4 +.SH SEE ALSO +.tr ~ +.PD 0 +col(1), env(1), eqn(1), greek(1), mmt(1), nroff(1), tbl(1), +profile(5), mm(7), term(7). +.PP +.I "\s-1MM\s+1\-Memorandum Macros\^" +by D.~W. Smith and J.~R. Mashey. +.PP +.I "Typing Documents with \s-1MM\s+1\|" +by D.~W. Smith and E.~M. Piskorik. +.PD +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.tr ~~ +``mm: \|no input file''\| if +none of the arguments is a readable file and +.I mm\^ +is not used as a filter. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mmt.1 b/static/v10/man1/mmt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a5663650 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mmt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +.TH MMT 1 +.SH NAME +mmt, mvt \- typeset documents, view graphs, and slides +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mmt +[ options ] [ files ] +.PP +.B mvt +[ options ] [ files ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +These two commands are very similar to +.IR mm (1), +except that they both typeset their input via +.IR troff (1), +as opposed to formatting it via +.IR nroff (1); +.I mmt\^ +uses +the +.SM MM +macro package, +while +.I mvt\^ +uses the +Macro Package for +View Graphs and Slides. +These two commands have options to specify +preprocessing by +.IR tbl (1) +and/or +.IR eqn (1). +The proper pipelines and the +required arguments and flags for +.IR troff (1) +and +for +the macro packages +are generated, depending on the options selected. +.PP +.I Options\^ +are given below. +Any other arguments or flags (e.g., +.BR \-rC3 ) +are passed +to +.IR troff (1) +or to +the macro package, +as appropriate. +Such options can occur in any order, +but they must appear before the +.I files\^ +arguments. +If no arguments are given, +these commands +print a list of their options. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP 10 +.B \-e +Causes +these commands +to invoke +.IR eqn (1); +also causes +.I eqn +to read the +.B /usr/pub/eqnchar +file (see +.IR eqnchar (7)). +.TP +.B \-t +Causes +these commands +to invoke +.IR tbl (1). +.TP +.B \-Tst +Directs the output to the +.SM MH STARE +facility. +.TP +.B \-Tvp +Directs the output to a Versatec printer via the +.IR vpr (1) +spooler; +this option is not available at all +.SM UNIX +sites. +.TP +.B \-T4014 +Directs the output to a Tektronix 4014 terminal via the +.IR tc (1) +filter. +.TP +.B \-Ttek +Same as +.BR \-T4014 . +.TP +.B \-a +Invokes the +.B \-a +option of +.IR troff (1). +.TP +.B \-y +Causes +.I mmt\^ +to use the non-compacted version of the macros (see +.IR mm (7)). +No effect for +.IR mvt . +.PD +.PP +These commands read the standard input +when +.B \- +is specified +instead of any file names. +.PP +.I Mvt\^ +is just a link to +.I mmt\^. +.SH HINT +Use the +.BI \-o list\^ +option of +.IR troff (1) +to specify ranges of pages to be output. +Note, however, that these commands, if invoked with +one or more of the +.BR \-e , +.BR \-t , +and +.B \- +options, +.I together\^ +with the +.BI \-o list\^ +option of +.IR troff (1) +may cause a harmless ``broken pipe'' diagnostic +if the last page of the document is not specified in +.IR list . +.SH SEE ALSO +.tr ~ +.PD 0 +env(1), eqn(1), mm(1), tbl(1), tc(1), troff(1), profile(5), +environ(7), mm(7), mv(7). +.PP +.I "\s-1MM\s+1\-Memorandum Macros\^" +by D.~W. Smith and J.~R. Mashey. +.PP +.I "Typing Documents with \s-1MM\s+1\^" +by D.~W. Smith and E.~M. Piskorik. +.PP +.I "A Macro Package for View Graphs and Slides\^" +by T.~A. Dolotta and D.~W. Smith (in preparation). +.PD +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.tr ~~ +``m[mv]t: \|no input file''\| if +none of the arguments is a readable file and +the command +is not used as a filter. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/monk.1 b/static/v10/man1/monk.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc7adb64 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/monk.1 @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +.TH MONK 1 +. \".TH MONK 1 EXPTOOLS +.CT 1 writing_other +.SH NAME +monk, monksample, monkspell, monkmerge \- typeset documents and letters +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B monk +[ +.I options +|\ +.I files +] +.PP +.B monksample +[ +.I sample +] +.PP +.B monkspell +[ +.I options +] +... +[ +.I files +] +... +.PP +.B monkmerge +[ +.I files +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Monk +formats the text in the named +.I files +for +phototypesetting, using other +.IR troff (1) +preprocessors as necessary. +.I Options\^ +are given below. +Any other arguments or flags (e.g., +.BR -o1-2 ) +are passed +to +.I troff. +Options can occur in any order and can be intermixed with files. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.BI -A commands +Invoke the +.I commands +after all preprocessors and before +.IR troff . +.TP +.BI -B commands +Invoke the +.I commands +after +.I monk +and before any other preprocessor. +.PD +.TP +.B -E +Invoke the +.B -e +option of +.IR troff . +.TP +.BR -N +Use the uncompressed monk databases. +This facilitates debugging monk database entries. +.TP +.BI -R file +Use +.I file +as the index file for +.IR prefer (1). +.TP +.BI -S dest +Send output to device +.IR dest . +Supported forms are: +.RS +.TF -Sapsend +.TP +.BR -Sapsend +Linotronic L200P; see +.IR apsend (1). +.TP +.BR -Sd202 +Mergenthaler Linotron 202; see +.IR d202 (A). +. \".TP +. \".BR -Si300 +. \"\s-1EXPTOOLS\s+1 spooler; see +. \".IR i300 (1). +.TP +.BR -Slp +Postscript line printer; see +.IR lp (1) +(default). +. \".TP +. \".BR -Slpr +. \"Allentown spooler; see +. \".IR lpr (1) +.TP +.BR -Sproof +Teletype 5620 or 630 terminal; see +.IR proof (9.1). +. \".TP +. \".BR -Sprt +. \"Unison spooler; see +. \".IR prt (1). +.TP +.BR -Sthink +HP ThinkJet; see +.IR thinkblt (9.1). +.TP +.BR -S- +Standard output. +.PD +.RE +.TP 0 +.BI -T device +Prepare output for device specified as in +.B -T +option of +.IR troff (1). +.TP +.B -x +Shows the preprocessors that are being invoked. +.PD +.PP +The following options are not normally needed because monk automatically +determines which preprocessors are required. +However, if the commands in +.B -A +or +.B -B +options require a preprocessor, their use can be forced by +the following options. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B -c +.I col +postprocessor; see +.IR column (1). +(Automatically invoked for many printing terminals.) +.TP +.B -cn +.IR cite (A) +. \".TP +. \".B -cw +. \".IR cw (1) +.TP +.B -e +.IR eqn (1) +.TP +.B -g +.IR grap (1) +.TP +.B -i +.IR ideal (1) +.TP +.B -ipa +.IR ipa (A) +.TP +.B -p +.IR pic (1) +.TP +.B -r +.IR prefer (1) +.TP +.B -t +.IR tbl (1) +.TP +.B -tp +.IR tped ; +see +.IR ped (9.1) +.PD +.PP +.I Monksample +produces on the standard output a skeleton document that you can +redirect into a file and edit. +If no argument is given, +.I monksample +prints a list of the available +.I samples. +They are: +.TF centerpb +.TP +.B acm +Association for Computing Machinery galley sheets. +.TP +.B centerpb +Center Phone Book. +.TP +.B cspress +Computer Science Press galley sheets. +.TP +.B form1 +AT&T Bell Laboratories merit review form 1. +.TP +.B im +AT&T Bell Laboratories internal memorandum. +.TP +.B kluwer +Kluwer Academic Publishers book format. +.TP +.B letter +Letters with optional AT&T letterhead. +.TP +.B memo +Internal AT&T correspondence. +.TP +.B model +IEEE/ACM model sheets. +.TP +.B research +AT&T Bell Laboratories bi-annual research report. +.TP +.B rp +AT&T Bell Laboratories release paper. +.TP +.B song +Song sheets for singing at nursing homes. +.TP +.B tc +AT&T Bell Laboratories technical correspondence. +.TP +.B tm +AT&T Bell Laboratories technical memorandum. +.PD +.PP +.I Monkspell +looks up words from the named +.I files +(standard input default) +in a public spelling list and in a private list. +Possible misspellings\(emwords +that occur in neither and are not plausibly derivable +from the former\(emare placed on the standard output. +It ignores constructs of +.IR monk (1), +.IR troff (1) +and its standard preprocessors. +It runs +.IR demonk (1) +with all specified options and passes its output to +.IR spell (1). +The following options, in addition to all options for +.IR deroff (1), +are available: +.TP +.BI -d dir +Use non-standard +.I monk +database directory +.I +dir. +.TP +.B -i +Ignore +.I monk +.L |\^insert +and +.L |\^source +commands as well as +.I troff +.L .so +and +.L .nx +requests. +.PP +.I Monkmerge +reads each file and copies it to standard output, +replacing +.I monk +.B insert +commands with the file contents. +It ignores +.I monk +.B source +commands, which include a file without processing the +.I monk +commands within. +If no input file is given, +.I monkmerge +reads from standard input. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +monk paper +Format the file using the default typesetter fonts and output device. +.TP +.L +monk -Sproof paper +Format a file and proof it on a 5620 terminal. +.SH FILES +.TF $MHOME/sample +.TP +.F $MHOME/cite +forward and backward reference preprocessor +.TP +.F $MHOME/db +monk databases +.TP +.F $MHOME/monk +monk compiler +.TP +.F $MHOME/tmac.p +macros for +.IR pic (1) +preprocessor +.TP +.F $MHOME/sample +directory for existing samples +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR prefer (1), +.IR troff (1), +.IR deroff (1), +.IR tex (1), +.IR lp (1), +.IR apsend (1), +.IR d202 (A), +.IR thinkblt (9.1), +.IR proof (9.1) +.br +Murrel, S. L., +Kowalski, T. J., +`Typing Documents on the UNIX System: Using Monk 0.6', +this manual, Volume 2 +. \".SH AUTHOR +. \"Sharon Peeters and T. J. Kowalski +. \".SH PROVIDER +. \"Alan Hastings diff --git a/static/v10/man1/movie.1 b/static/v10/man1/movie.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0cc8e53a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/movie.1 @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ +.TH MOVIE 1 +.CT 1 files prog_other +.SH NAME +movie, stills \- algorithm animation +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B movie +[ +.B -t +.I termprog +] +[ +.BI -m memory +] +[ +.I file +] +.br +.B stills +[ +.I files ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +.I Movie +converts a script in a movie language +into an internal representation, then displays it in a window on a +Teletype 5620, AT&T630, or X11 system (depending on which version has been compiled). +If the filename is of the form +\f2file\f(CW.s\f1, +.I movie +creates the intermediate form in +\f2file\f(CW.i\f1, +which will be used in subsequent calls if it is more recent than +\f2file\f(CW.s\f1. +The options are: +.TP +.BI -t " termprog +Load +.I termprog +instead of the default terminal program. +.br +.ns +.TP +.B -m\f2mem\fP +Use +.I mem +bytes of terminal memory instead of the default. +.PP +In the terminal, button 1 stops and starts the movie; +button 2 adjusts view sizes and selects clicks; +button 3 sets various parameters. +.PP +.SS Movie language +.br +.B text +.I options x y string. +Text is centered and medium size by default; options: one of +.B "center +.B ljust +.B rjust +.B above +.BR below , +and one of +.BR "small +.B medium +.B big +.BR bigbig . +A leading quote is stripped from +.IR string , +as is a trailinbg quote if a leading one is present. +.br +.BI line +.I "options x1 y1 x2 y2. +Lines are solid by default; options: one of +.B "fat +.B fatfat +.B dotted +.B dashed +and one of +.B "-> +.B <- +.BR <-> . +.br +.BI box +.I "options xmin ymin xmax ymax. +A box may +.BR fill ed. +.br +.BI circle +.I "options x1 y1 radius. +Radius is measured in the +.I x +dimension. +A circle may be +.BR fill ed. +.br +Any text or geometrical object may be labeled with a name and colon. +A subsequent appearance of a label in the same view erases the previous +object with that label. +.BI erase +.I label +erases the object explicitly. +.B clear +erases all objects currently in the current view. +.br +.BI click +.I "optional name +leaves a mark in the intermediate with this name; +clicks are used to control stepping in a movie or to define frames +for a set of stills. +.br +A movie may consist of multiple independent views, +each presented as a rectangular sub-window. +.BI view +.I name +associates +subsequent objects with this view, +until changed again. +Labels and coordinates are local to views. +If no view statements appear, there is a single implicit view +.BR def.view . +.br +Comments follow #; blank lines are ignored. +.PP +.I Stills +converts selected frames of a movie into +commands for +.IR pic (1). +Commands for +.I stills +begin with +.B .begin stills +and end with +.B .end +.BR stills . +.SH FILES +All files are in +.BR /usr/lib/movie . +.TF stills.awk +.TP +.F develop +Shell script to control conversion from script language to internal form. +.TP +.F fdevelop +C program that does the work. +.TP +.F stills.awk +Awk program to process stills language into +.IR pic (1). +.TP +.F anim +Host end of the animation system. +.TP +.F animterm +terminal end. +.TP +.F newer +Test whether one file is newer than another. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +J. L. Bentley and B. W. Kernighan, +.IR "A System for Algorithm Animation" , +CSTR 132, January, 1987. +.SH BUGS +The 630 can only handle 65000 bytes of memory. +.br diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mp.1 b/static/v10/man1/mp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..62174fef --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,304 @@ +.TH MP 1 +.CT 1 writing_other +.SH NAME +mp, MetaPost \- system for drawing pictures +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B mp +[ +.B -I +] +[ +.B -T +] +[ +.I first-line +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Mp +interprets the MetaPost language and produces +.I PostScript +pictures. The MetaPost language is similar to Knuth's Metafont +with additional features for including +.IR tex (1) +or +.IR troff (1) +commands and accessing features of PostScript not found in Metafont. +The +.B -T +flag selects +.I troff +instead of +.IR tex . +.PP +An argument given on the command line +behaves as the first input line. +That can be either a (possibly truncated) file name +or a sequence MetaPost commands starting with +.L \e +and including an +.L input +command. Thus +.L mp figs +processes the file +.LR figs.mp . +The basename of +.L figs +becomes the +.IR jobname , +and is used in forming output file names. If no file is named, the +jobname becomes +.LR mpout . +The default +.L .mp +extension can be overridden by specifying an extension explicitly. +.PP +There is normally one output file for each picture generated, +and the output files are named +.IR jobname.nnn , +where +.I nnn +is a number passed to the +.L beginfig +macro. The output file name is +.IB jobname .ps +if this number is negative. +.PP +The output files can be used as figures in a TeX document by including +.IP +.BI "\especial{psfile=" jobname.nnn } +.LP +in the TeX document. Alternatively, one can +.L \einput epsf.tex +and then use the macro +.BI "\eepsfbox{" jobname.nnn } +to produce a box of the appropriate size containing the figure. +.TP +.BI btex " TeX commands " etex +This causes +.I mp +to generate a MetaPost picture expression that corresponds to the +TeX commands. If the TeX commands generate +more than one line of text, it must be in a +.L \evbox +or a minipage environment. +.TP +.BI verbatimtex " TeX commands " etex +This is ignored by +.I mp +except that the TeX commands are passed on to TeX. When using LaTeX +instead of TeX the input file must start with a +.L verbatimtex +block that gives the +.L \edocumentstyle +and +.L "\ebegin{document}" +commands. +.PP +Since most TeX fonts have to be downloaded as bitmaps, the +.L btex +feature works best when the output of +.L mp +is to be included in a TeX document so that +.IR dvips (1) +can download the fonts. For self-contained PostScript output that can be +used directly or included in a +.I troff +document, start your MetaPost input file with the command +.L "prologues:=1" +and stick to standard PostScript fonts. TeX and MetaPost use the names in the +third column of the file +.LR /usr/lib/mp/trfonts.map . +.PP +MetaPost output can be included in a +.I troff +document via the +.IR mpictures (6) +macro package. In this case +.I mp +should be invoked with the +.B -T +flag so that the commands between +.L btex +and +.L etex +or between +.L verbatimtex +and +.L etex +are interpreted as +.I troff +instead of TeX. (This automatically sets +.L prologues:=1 +). +.PP +Here is a list of the environment variables affect the behavior of +.IR mp : +.TF MPXCOMMAND +.TP +.B MPINPUTS +Search path for +.L \einput +files. +It should be colon-separated, +and start with dot. +Default: +.L .:/usr/lib/mp +.TP +.B MFINPUTS +Auxiliary search path for +.L \einput +files with +.L .mf +extensions. +Default: +.L .:/usr/lib/mf +.TP +.B TEXFONTS +Search path for font metric files. +Default: +.L .:/usr/lib/tex/fonts/tfm +.TP +.B MPXCOMMAND +The name of a shell script that converts embedded typesetting commands +to a form that +.I mp +understands. +Defaults: +.L /usr/lib/mp/bin/makempx +for +.I tex +and +.L /usr/lib/mp/bin/troffmpx +for +.I troff +.TP +.B TEX +The version of TeX to use when processing +.L btex +and +.L verbatimtex +commands. Default: +.L tex +.TP +.B TROFF +The +.I troff +pipeline for +.L btex +and +.L verbatimtex +commands. Default: +.B eqn -d\e$\e$ | troff -Tpost +.TP +.B MPMEMS +Search path for +.L .mem +files. Default: +.L .:/usr/lib/mp +.TP +.B MPPOOL +Search path for strings. +Default: +.L .:/usr/lib/mp +.TP +.B MPEDITOR +A command for invoking an editor with +.L %s +in place of the file name and +.L %d +in place of the line number. +Default: +.L /bin/ed %s +.TP +.B TEXVFONTS +Search path for virtual fonts. +Default: +.L /usr/lib/tex/fonts/psvf +.PD +.PP +A +.L .mem +file is a binary file that permits fast loading of fonts and macro packages. +.I Mp +reads the default +.F plain.mem +unless another +.L .mem +file is specified at the start of the first line with an +.L & +just before it. There is also an +.F mfplain.mem +that simulates plain Metafont so that +.I mp +can read +.L .mf +fonts. (Plain Metafont is described in +.I The +.IR METAFONTbook ). +.PP +Experts can create +.L .mem +files be invoking +.I mp +with the +.B -I +switch and giving macro definitions followed by a +.L dump +command. +.PP +The MetaPost language is similar to Metafont, but the manual +.I A User's Manual for MetaPost +assumes no knowledge of Metafont. MetaPost does not have bitmap +output commands or Metafont's online display mechanism. Use +.IR dvips (1) +and +.IR psi (9.1) +to see the results before printing. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/tex/macros/doc/mpintro.tex +.TP +.F /usr/lib/mp/* +macros, +.L .mem +files, and tables for handling included +.I tex +and +.I troff +.TP +.F /usr/lib/mp/bin +Directory for programs that handle included +.I tex +and +.IR troff . +.F /usr/lib/mp/trfonts.map +table of corresponding font names for +.IR troff , +PostScript, and TeX +.TP +.F /usr/lib/tex/macros/epsf.tex +The TeX input file where the +.L \eepsfbox +macro is defined +.TP +.F /usr/lib/tex/macros/doc/mpintro.tex +TeX input for a document that describes the MetaPost language +.TP +.F /usr/lib/mp/examples.mp +The source file for the figures used in +.F mpintro.tex +.TP +.F /n/bowell/usr/src/cmd/tex/mp/doc/* +More information on using MetaPost with +.IR troff . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR tex (1), +.IR lp (1), +.IR psi (9.1), +.br +Donald E. Knuth, +.I The METAFONTbook, +Addison Wesley, 1986, +.br +John D. Hobby, +.I A User's Manual for MetaPost +AT&T Bell Labs Computing Science Technical Report 162, 1991. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mt.1 b/static/v10/man1/mt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e01ec0c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'MT (I)'6/12/72'MT (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME mt -- manipulate magtape +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS mt__ [ key ] [ name ... ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION mt__ +saves and restores selected portions of the file system +hierarchy on magtape. +Its actions are controlled by the key___ argument. +The key is a string of characters containing +at most one function letter and possibly +one or more function modifiers. +Other arguments to the command are file or directory +names specifying which files are to be dumped, restored, +or tabled. + +The function portion of +the key is specified by one of the following letters: + +.in +6 +.ti -3 +r The indicated files and directories, together with +all subdirectories, are dumped +onto the tape. +The old contents of the tape are lost. + +.ti -3 +x extracts the named files from the tape to the file system. +The owner, mode, and date-modified are restored to what they +were when the file was dumped. +If no file argument is given, the entire contents of the +tape are extracted. + +.ti -3 +t lists the names of all files stored on the tape which +are the same as or are hierarchically below +the file arguments. If no file argument is given, +the entire contents of the tape are tabled. + +.ti -3 +l is the same as t_ except that an expanded listing +is produced giving all the available information about the +listed files. + +.in -6 +The following characters may be used in addition to the letter +which selects the function desired. + +.in +6 +.ti -3 +0, ..., 7 This modifier selects the drive on which the tape is mounted. +"0" is the default. + +.ti -3 +v Normally mt__ does its work silently. The v_ (verbose) +option causes it to type the name of each file it treats +preceded by a letter to indicate what is happening. + +.in +2 + a file is being added + x file is being extracted + +.in -2 +The v_ option can be used with r_ and x_ only. + +.ti -3 +f causes +new entries copied on tape to be 'fake' in that +only the entries, not the data associated +with the entries are updated. +Such fake entries cannot be extracted. +Usable only with r_. + +.ti -3 +w causes mt__ to pause before treating each file, type +the indicative letter and the file name (as with v_) +and await the user's response. Response +"y" means "yes", so the file is treated. Null response +means "no", and the file does not take part +in whatever is being done. Response "x" means "exit"; +the mt__ command terminates immediately. In the x_ function, +files previously asked about +have been extracted already. +With r_, no change has been made to the tape. + +.ti -3 +m make (create) directories during an x_ if necessary. +.in -6 +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /dev/mt? +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO tap(I), tap(V) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS Tape open error +.br +Tape read error +.br +Tape write error +.br +Directory checksum +.br +Directory overflow +.br +Seek error +.br +Tape overflow +.br +Phase error (a file has changed after it was selected for +dumping but before it was dumped) +.br +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS If, during an "x", +the files are specified in a different order +than they are on the tape, +seek errors will result because the tape +cannot be rewound. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/mv.1 b/static/v10/man1/mv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7966ab0a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/mv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'MV (I)'2/9/73'MV (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME mv -- move or rename a file +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS mv__ name\d1\u name\d2\u +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION mv__ +changes the name of name\d1\u to +name\d2\u. +If name\d2\u is a directory, name\d1\u is moved to +that directory with its original file-name. +Directories may only be moved within the same parent +directory (just renamed). +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO -- +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS yes +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 b/static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4fe22985 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/newcrypt.1 @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +.TH ENCRYPT 1 +.SH NAME +encrypt, decrypt \- encrypt or decrypt a message or file +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B encrypt +[ +.B \-p +] +[ password ] +.br +.B decrypt +[ +.B \-p +] +[ password ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Encrypt +( +.I decrypt +) +reads from the standard input and writes +on the standard output. +The +.I password +is a key, up to 127 characters in length, which selects a particular transformation. +If no +.I password +is given, +.I encrypt +demands a key from the terminal (without echoing what the user types). +If the wrong key is given to decrypt, it will usually exit without +writing on standard output. +.PP +If the +.B \-p +option is specified, the ciphertext will be encoded into printing +characters only; suitable for sending through mail. +In this mode, +.B decrypt +ignores any lines that do not have a special prefix (added by +.B encrypt +), +so messages received in the mail can be read without having to edit +out headers. +.PP +Encryption takes place in three layers. The first addresses traffic +analysis threats by hiding the size of the message and insuring that +if the same message is send repeatedly with the same +.I password +the ciphertext will be entirely different each time. +The second layer is the proposed Data Encryption Standard (DES) used +in Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) mode. Finally, a key-dependent character +transposition is applied to the ciphertext which impedes the +assembly of corresponding pairs of DES blocks under a known-plaintext attack. +.PP +The user is encouraged to use a lengthy password. A short sequence of +words chosen at random from a dictionary and committed to memory is +a good plan. +.SH FILES +/dev/tty for typed key +.SH AUTHOR +D.P.Mitchell +.SH BUGS +This encryption program is not provably secure, and the author gives no +guarantee that it cannot be broken. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 b/static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56f29c23 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/newcsh.1 @@ -0,0 +1,366 @@ +.TH NEWCSH 1 +.UC 4 +.bd S 3 +.SH NAME +newcsh \- description of new csh features (over oldcsh) +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B csh +\fIcsh-options\fR +.SH SUMMARY +This is a summary of features new in +.IR csh (1) +in this version of the system; an older version of +.I csh +is available as +.I oldcsh. +This newer +.I csh +has some new process control primitives and a few other new features. +Users of +.I csh +must (and automatically) use the new terminal driver (summarized in +.IR newtty(4) +and completely described with the old in +.IR tty (4)) +which allows generation of some new +interrupt signals from the keyboard which tell jobs to stop, +and arbitrates access to the terminal; +on CRT's the command ``stty crt'' is +normally placed in the +.I .login +file to be executed at login, +to set other useful modes of this terminal driver. +.PP +.B "Jobs." +.PP +The most important new feature in this shell is the control of +.I jobs. +A job is associated with each pipeline, where a pipeline is either +a simple command like ``date'', or a pipeline like ``who | wc''. +The shell keeps a table of current jobs, and assigns them small +integer numbers. +When you start a job in the background, the shell prints a line +which looks like: +.PP +\ \ \ \ [1] 1234 +.PP +this indicating that the job which was started asynchronously with ``&'' +is job number 1 and has one (top-level) process, whose process id is 1234. +The set of current jobs is listed by the +.I jobs +command. +.PP +If you are running a job and wish to do something else you may hit the +key ^Z (control-Z) which sends a +.I stop +signal to the current job. The shell will then normally indicate that +the job has been ``Stopped'', and print another prompt. +You can then +put the job in the background with the command ``bg'', or run +some other commands and then return the job to the foreground with +``fg''. +A ^Z takes effect immediately and is like an interrupt in that +pending output and unread input are discarded when it is typed. +There is another special key ^Y which does not generate a stop signal +until a program attempts to +.IR read (2) +it. +This can usefully be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands +for a job which you wish to stop after it has read them. +.PP +A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to read +from the terminal. Background jobs are normally allowed to produce output, +but this can be disabled by doing ``stty tostop''. If you set this +tty option, then background jobs will stop when they try to produce +output like they do when they try to read input. +.PP +There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The character +``%'' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer to job number 1, you can +name it as ``%1''. Just naming a job brings it to the foreground; thus +``%1'' is a synonym for ``fg %1'', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. +Similarly saying ``%1 &'' resumes job 1 in the background. +Jobs can also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start them, +if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus ``%ex'' would normally restart +a suspended +.IR ex (1) +job, if there were only one suspended job whose name began with +the string ``ex''. It is also possible to say ``%?string'' +which specifies a job whose text contains +.I string, +if there is only one such job. +.PP +The shell also maintains a notion of the current and previous jobs. +In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is marked with a ``+'' +and the previous job with a ``\-''. The abbreviation ``%+'' refers +to the current job and ``%\-'' refers to the previous job. For close +analogy with the +.I history +mechanism, +``%%'' is also a synonym for the current job. +.PP +.B "Status reporting." +.PP +This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes state. +It normally informs you whenever a job becomes blocked so that +no further progress is possible, but only just before it prints +a prompt. This is done so that it does not otherwise disturb your work. +If, however, you set the shell variable +.I notify, +the shell will notify you immediately of changes of status in background +jobs. +There is also a shell command +.I notify +which marks a single process so that its status changes will be immediately +reported. By default +.I notify +marks the current process; +simply say ``notify'' after starting a background job to mark it. +.PP +When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you will +be warned that ``You have stopped jobs.'' You may use the ``jobs'' +command to see what they are. If you do this or immediately try to +exit again, the shell will not warn you a second time, and the suspended +jobs will be unmercifully terminated. +.PP +.B "New builtin commands." +.HP 5 +.B bg +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBbg\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Puts the current or specified jobs into the background, continuing them +if they were stopped. +.HP 5 +.B fg +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBfg\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Brings the current or specified jobs into the foreground, continuing them if +they were stopped. +.HP 5 +.B jobs +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +.B "jobs \-l" +.br +Lists the active jobs; given the +.B \-l +options lists process id's in addition to the normal information. +.HP 5 +\fBkill %\fRjob +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ \fB%\fRjob\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\fR\ pid +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\ \-\fRsig\ pid\ ... +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBkill\ \-l\fR +.br +Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the +specified signal to the specified jobs or processes. +Signals are either given by number or by names (as given in +.I /usr/include/signal.h, +stripped of the prefix ``SIG''). +The signal names are listed by ``kill \-l''. +There is no default, saying just `kill' does not +send a signal to the current job. +If the signal being sent is TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), +then the job or process will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well. +.HP 5 +.B notify +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBnotify\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when the status of the +current or specified jobs changes; normally notification is presented +before a prompt. All jobs are marked ``notify'' if the shell variable +``notify'' is set. +.HP 5 +\fBstop\ %\fRjob\ ... +.br +Stops the specified job which is executing in the background. +.HP 5 +\fB%\fRjob +.br +Brings the specified job into the foreground. +.HP 5 +\fB%\fRjob \fB&\fR +.br +Continues the specified job in the background. +.br +.ne 5 +.PP +.B "Process limitations." +.PP +The shell provides access to an experimental facility for limiting +the consumption by a single process of system resources. +The following commands control this facility: +.HP 5 +\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR \fImaximum-use\fR +.HP 5 +\fBlimit\fR \fIresource\fR +.br +.ns +.HP +\fBlimit\fR +.br +Limits the consumption by the current process and each process +it creates to not individually exceed \fImaximum-use\fR on the +specified \fIresource\fR. If no \fImaximum-use\fR is given, then +the current limit is printed; if no \fIresource\fR is given, then +all limitations are given. +.IP +Resources controllable currently include \fIcputime\fR (the maximum +number of cpu-seconds to be used by each process), \fIfilesize\fR +(the largest single file which can be created), \fIdatasize\fR +(the maximum growth of the data+stack region via +.IR sbrk (2) +beyond the end of the program text), \fIstacksize\fR (the maximum +size of the automatically-extended stack region), and \fIcoredumpsize\fR +(the size of the largest core dump that will be created). +.IP +The \fImaximum-use\fR may be given as a (floating point or integer) +number followed by a scale factor. For all limits other than \fIcputime\fR +the default scale is ``k'' or ``kilobytes'' (1024 bytes); +a scale factor of ``m'' or ``megabytes'' may also be used. +For cputime the default scaling is ``seconds'', while ``m'' for minutes +or ``h'' for hours, or a time of the form ``mm:ss'' giving minutes +and seconds may be used. +.IP +For both \fIresource\fR names and scale factors, unambiguous prefixes +of the names suffice. +.HP 5 +\fBunlimit\fR \fIresource\fR +.br +.ns +.HP 5 +\fBunlimit\fR +.br +Removes the limitation on \fIresource\fR. If no \fIresource\fR +is specified, then all \fIresource\fR limitations are removed. +.ne 5 +.PP +.B "Directory stack." +.PP +This shell now keeps track of the current directory (which is kept +in the variable +.I cwd) +and also maintains a stack of directories, which is printed by the +command +.I dirs. +You can change to a new directory and push down the old directory +stack by using the command +.I pushd +which is otherwise like the +.I chdir +command, changing to its argument. +You can pop the directory stack by saying +.I popd. +Saying +.I pushd +with no arguments exchanges the top two elements of the directory stack. +The elements of the directory stack are numbered from 1 starting at the top. +Saying +.I pushd +with a argument ``+\fIn\fR'' rotates the directory stack to make that entry +in the stack be at the top and changes to it. +Giving +.I popd +a ``+\fIn\fR'' argument eliminates that argument from the directory stack. +.PP +.B "Miscellaneous." +.PP +This shell imports the environment variable USER into the variable +.I user, +TERM into +.I term, +and +HOME into +.I home, +and exports these back into the environment whenever the normal +shell variables are reset. +The environment variable PATH is likewise handled; it is not +necessary to worry about its setting other than in the file +.I \&.cshrc +as inferior +.I csh +processes will import the definition of +.I path +from the environment, and re-export it if you then change it. +(It could be set once in the +.I \&.login +except that commands over the Berknet would not +see the definition.) +.PP +There are new commands +.I eval, +which is like the eval of the Bourne shell +.IR sh (1), +and useful with +.IR tset (1), +and +.I suspend +which stops a shell (as though a ^Z had stopped it; since +shells normally ignore ^Z signals, this command is necessary.) +.PP +There is a new variable +.I cdpath; +if set, then each directory in +.I cdpath +will be searched for a directory named in a +.I chdir +command if there is no such subdirectory of the current directory. +.PP +An +.I unsetenv +command removing environment variables has been added. +.PP +There is a new ``:'' modifier ``:e'', which yields the extension +portion of a filename. Thus if ``$a'' is ``file.c'', ``$a:e'' is ``c''. +.PP +There are two new operators in shell expressions ``!~'' and ``=~'' which +are like the string operations ``!='' and ``=='' except that the right +hand side is a +.I pattern +(containing, e.g. ``*''s, ``?''s and instances of ``[...]'') +against which the left hand operand is matched. This reduces the +need for use of the +.I switch +statement in shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern matching. +.PP +The form ``$<'' is new, and is replaced by a line from the standard +input, with no further interpretation thereafter. It may therefore +be used to read from the keyboard in a shell script. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +csh(1), killpg(2), sigsys(2), signal(2), jobs(3), sigset(3), tty(4) +.SH BUGS +Command sequences of the form ``a ; b ; c'' are not handled gracefully +when stopping is attempted. If you suspend ``b'', the shell will then +immediately execute ``c''. This is especially noticeable if this +expansion results from an +.I alias. +It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to force it to +a subshell, i.e. ``( a ; b ; c )'', but see the next bug. +.PP +Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. +.PP +Control over output is primitive; +perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good virtual +terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface much more +interesting things could be done with output control. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 b/static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e77a2030 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/newgrp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +.TH NEWGRP 1 +.CT 1 proc_man secur +.SH NAME +newgrp \(mi change to a new group +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B newgrp +.I group +[ +.I command +[ +.I arg ... +] ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Newgrp +runs a +.I command +with the (real and effective) groupid temporarily set to +.I group. +If no command is given, the user's shell (see +.IR passwd (5)) +is executed. +.PP +A password is demanded if the group has +a password and the user does not. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +exec newgrp bin +Restart the shell with a different groupid. +.SH FILES +.F /etc/group +.br +.F /etc/passwd +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR login (8), +.IR getuid (2) +.SH BUGS +On other systems, +.I newgrp +is built into the shell. +Here it will spawn a new shell unless invoked with +.BR exec . diff --git a/static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 b/static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fbae397a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/newscheck.1 @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ +.TH NEWSCHECK 1 +.SH NAME +newscheck \- check to see if user has news +.SH SYNOPSIS +newscheck [yne] [readnews options] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I newscheck +reports to the user whether or not he has news. +.TP 10 +.B y +Reports "There is news" if the user has news to read. +.TP 10 +.B n +Reports "No news" if their isn't any news to read. +.TP 10 +.B e +Executes +.I readnews(1) +if there is news. +.PP +If there are no options, +.B y +is the default. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 25 +/usr/lib/news/active +Active newsgroups +.TP 25 +~/.newsrc +Options and list of previously read articles +.SH SEE ALSO +readnews(1), +inews(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nice.1 b/static/v10/man1/nice.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eda8f19b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/nice.1 @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +.th NICE I 11/1/73 +.sh NAME +nice \*- run a command at low priority +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd nice +command [ arguments ] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Nice +executes +.it command +at low priority. +.sh "SEE ALSO" +nohup(I), nice(II) +.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nm.1 b/static/v10/man1/nm.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a4bc5be --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/nm.1 @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'NM (I)'3/15/72'NM (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME nm -- print name list +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS nm__ [ name ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION nm__ +prints the symbol table from the output file of an +assembler or loader run. +Each symbol name is preceded by its value (blanks if undefined) +and one of the letters "U" (undefined) "A" (absolute) "T" +(text segment symbol), +"D" (data segment symbol), or "B" +(bss segment symbol). +Global symbols have their first character underlined. +The output is sorted alphabetically. +.sp +If no file is given, the symbols in a.out_____ are listed. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES a.out +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO as(I), ld(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS "?" +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nm80.1 b/static/v10/man1/nm80.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba9a0422 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/nm80.1 @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +.th NM80 1 03/01/77 +.sh NAME +nm80 \*- print name list +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd nm80 +[ +.bd \-cnrupgfabdth +] +[ name ] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Nm80 +prints the symbol table from the output file of an +assembler or loader run. +Each symbol name is preceded by its value (blanks if undefined) +and one of the letters: +.s1 +\fBU\fR (undefined) +.br +\fBA\fR (absolute) +.br +\fBT\fR (text segment symbol) +.br +\fBD\fR (data segment symbol) +.br +\fBB\fR (bss segment symbol) +.br +\fBF\fR (file name) +.br +\fBC\fR (common symbol) +.s3 +If the symbol is local (non-external) +the type letter is in lower case. +The output is sorted alphabetically. +.s3 +If no file is given, the symbols in +.bd 80.out +are listed. +Absolute symbols have their values printed in octal. +Non-absolute symbols are assumed to be addresses +and are printed in a "low byte:high byte" format. +.s3 +Options are: +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-a\fR list only absolute symbols +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-b\fR list only bss symbols +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-c\fR list only C-style external symbols, that is +those beginning with underscore `\*_'. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-d\fR list only data symbols +those beginning with underscore `\*_'. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-f\fR print only the file names. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-g\fR print only global (external) symbols +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-n\fR sort by value instead of by name +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-p\fR don't sort; print in symbol-table order +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-r\fR sort in reverse order +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-t\fR list only text symbols +those beginning with underscore `\*_'. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-u\fR print only undefined symbols. +.s3 +.lp +4 4 +\fB\-h\fR print output in hex. +.i0 +.sh FILES +80.out +.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nohup.1 b/static/v10/man1/nohup.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..090375d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/nohup.1 @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +.th NOHUP I 11/1/73 +.sh NAME +nohup \*- run a command immune to hangups +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd nohup +command [ arguments ] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Nohup +executes +.it command +with hangups, +quits and interrupts all ignored. +.sh "SEE ALSO" +nice(I), signal(II) +.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/notary.1 b/static/v10/man1/notary.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6524f30c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/notary.1 @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +.TH NOTARY 1 +.CT 1 comm_term sa_mortals secur +.SH NAME +sign, enroll, verify, key, notaryd \(mi sign and verify certificates +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B "notary sign +.PP +.B "notary enroll +[ +.B -n +] +.I name +.PP +.B "notary verify +.I name +.I xsum +.I text +.PP +.B lmask +.B xn +.B /usr/notary/notaryd +[ +.B -m +.I mtpt +] +[ +.B -d +.I dir +] +.PP +.B "notary key +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Notary +provides a document-authentication service. +Any user may `sign' a document by presenting it and +a secret key to the notary. +The notary returns a certificate (a cryptographic checksum made +with the secret key). +For the certificate to be useful, the key must +be enrolled with the notary under some public name. +Given the certificate and the public name, any user may +ask the notary to authenticate the document by verifying that +it is indeed as certified. +.PP +.I Sign +writes on the standard output a certificate for its standard input. +The secret key +is demanded from the terminal. +.PP +.I Enroll +prompts the terminal for a secret key to associate with the +public +.IR name . +Unless this is a new enrollment for +.I name, +indicated by option +.BR -n , +the previous value of the key is demanded from the terminal. +If a trivial new key is presented, the +.I name +is erased from the database. +.PP +.I Verify +tells whether +.I xsum +is the checksum of +.IR text, +figured with the enrolled key for the public +.IR name . +.PP +.I Notaryd +is the notary daemon, which mounts itself on +.I mtpt +(default +.FR /cs/notary ) +and keeps its log files and database in directory +.I dir +(default +.FR /usr/notary ). +The database is encrypted, so that although +.I notaryd +is normally started by +.IR rc (8), +it cannot serve other requests until it has been primed by a +.L "notary key +request, which obtains the notary's master key from +the terminal. +.SH FILES +.nf +.F /cs/notary +.F /usr/notary/* +.fi +.SH "SEE ALSO +.IR notary (3) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/notify.1 b/static/v10/man1/notify.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60d4194a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/notify.1 @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +'\"macro stdmacro +.if n .pH g1.notify %W% of %G% +.nr X +.if \nX=0 .ds x} notify 1 "Essential Utilities" "\&" +.if \nX=1 .ds x} notify 1 "Essential Utilities" +.if \nX=2 .ds x} notify 1 "" "\&" +.if \nX=3 .ds x} notify "" "" "\&" +.TH \*(x} +.SH NAME +\f4notify\f1 \- notify user of the arrival of new mail +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f4notify\fP \f4\-y\fP [ \f4\-m\fP \f2mailfile\fP ] +.br +\f4notify\fP [ \f4\-n\fP ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.PP +When a new mail message arrives, +the \f4mail\fP command first checks if the recipient's mailbox indicates +that the message is to be forwarded elsewhere (to some other recipient or +as the input to some command). +\f4notify\fP is used to set up forwarding on the user's mailbox so that the new +message is saved into an alternative mailbox and, +if the user is currently logged in, +he or she is notified immediately of the arrival of new mail. +.PP +Command-line options are: +.sp .5 +.PD 0 +.TP 12 +\f4\-m\f2\0mailfile\f1 +File to save mail messages into while automatic notification is activated. +If not specified, it defaults to \f2$HOME/.mailfile\fP. +.TP +\f4\-n\f1 +Remove mail notification facility +.TP +\f4\-y\f1 +Install mail notification facility +.PD +.PP +If invoked with no arguments, +\f4notify\fP reports whether automatic mail notification is activated or not. +.PP +The notification is done by looking in \f4/etc/utmp\f1 to +determine if the recipient is currently logged in, +and if so, on which terminal device. +Then the terminal device is opened for writing and the user is notified about +the new message. +The notification will indicate who the message is from. +If the message contains a \f4Subject:\fP header line it will be included. +(For security, all unprintable characters within the header will be converted +to an exclamation point.) +.PP +If the user is logged in multiple times he or she will get multiple +notifications, one per terminal. +To disable notifications to a particular login session, +the \f4mesg\fP(1) command can be used to disable writing +to that terminal. +.PP +If there are multiple machines connected together via RFS or NFS, +\f4notify\f1 will look up the \f4/etc/utmp\fP files on the other systems as +well. +To do this, the file \f4/etc/mail/notify.sys\f1 will be +consulted, which will contain two columns, the first being the name of a +system and the second being a path to find the root filesystem for that +machine. +.PP +If \f4notify\fP has troubles delivering the mail to the specified mailfile, +\f4notify\fP +will look up the directory of the mailfile in \f4/etc/mail/notify.fsys\fP. +If the file's directory is found in the first column of the file, the mail will be +forwarded to the system listed in the second column instead of being returned +to the sender. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 18 +\f4/tmp/notif\f1\(** +temporary file +.TP 18 +\f4/var/mail/\f1\(** +users' standard mailboxes +.TP 18 +\f4/usr/lib/mail/notify2\f1 +program that performs the notification +.TP 18 +\f4/etc/mail/notify.fsys\f1 +list of file systems and home systems +.TP 18 +\f4/etc/mail/notify.sys\f1 +list of machines and paths to their root filesystems +.TP 18 +\f4/etc/utmp\f1 +list of users who are logged in +.PD +.SH SEE ALSO +\f4mail\fP(1), \f4mesg\fP(1). +.br +.IR "User\'s Guide" . +.br +.ne 8 +.SH NOTES +Because \f4notify\fP uses the ``\f4Forward to \(bv\f2command\f1'' facility of +\f4mail\fP to implement notifications, +\f4/var/mail/\f2username\f1 should not be specified as the place +to put newly arrived messages via the \f4\-m\fP invocation option. +The \f4mail\fP command uses +\f4/var/mail/\f2username\f1 to hold either mail messages, +\f4or\fP indications of mail forwarding, +but not both simultaneously. +.PP +If the user is using \f4layers\fP(1), +the notification will \f4only\fP appear in the \f4login\fP window. +.\"@(#)notify.1 1.2 +.Ee diff --git a/static/v10/man1/nroff.1 b/static/v10/man1/nroff.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a770595 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/nroff.1 @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'NROFF (I)'1/15/73'NROFF (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME nroff -- format text +.sp +.ti 0 +.nf +SYNOPSIS nroff_____ [+_N] [-s__] [-h__] [-q__] [-i__] files +.fi +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION nroff_____ +formats text according to control lines embedded +in the text files. +The non-file option arguments are interpreted as follows: + +.in +6 +.ti -3 ++N Output will commence at the first page whose page +number is N (independent of whether or not the +page number is being printed). + +.ti -3 +-s Stop between pages. Printing will halt prior to +each page (including the first) to permit paper +loading and changing. Printing is restarted by +typing either a "newline" or "delete" character. + +.ti -3 +-h High-speed output. During output, strings of +space characters are replaced where possible with +tab characters to speed up output. Futhermore, if +the output is directed into a file or a pipe, +this mode effectively reduces the total number of +characters in the file or pipe; this is especially +important in multi-column output where the +temporary file(s) or pipe(s) would otherwise contain +a large number of space characters. + +.ti -3 +-q The prompt names for insertions are not printed +and the bell character is sent instead; in +addition, the insertion is not echoed. This mode +permits insertions during the actual output printing + +.ti -3 +-i Index mode. NROFF creates a file called "index" +containing every word output together with the +line and page number. The format is word, tab, +page, tab, line, newline, etc. Invoking this mode +slows down the execution of NROFF considerably. +.sp +.in -6 +Nroff is more completely described +in [1]. +A condensed Request Summary is included here. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /etc/suftab suffix hyphenation tables +.br +/tmp/rtm? temporary +.br +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO [1] NROFF User's Manual (available as MM-73-1271-2). +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS none +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS - +.in 0 +.bp +.cc % +%nf +%ce +REQUEST REFERENCE AND INDEX + +Request Initial If no Cause +Form____ Value_____ Argument________ Break_____ Explanation___________ + +I. Page____ Control_______ + +.pl +_N N=66 N=66 no P_age L_ength. +.bp +_N N=1 - yes B_egin P_age. +.pn +_N N=1 ignored no P_age N_umber. +.po +_N N=0 N=prev no P_age O_ffset. +.ne N - N=1 no NE__ed N lines. + +II. Text____ Filling_______, Adjusting_________, and___ Centering_________ + +.br - - yes BR__eak. +.fi fill - yes FI__ll output lines. +.nf fill - yes N_oF_ill. +.ad c adj,norm adjust no AD__just mode on. +.na adjust - no N_oA_djust. +.ce N off N=1 yes CE__nter N input text lines. + +III. Line____ Spacing_______ and___ Blank_____ Lines_____ + +.ls +_N N=1 N=prev no L_ine S_pacing. +.sp N - N=1 yes SP__ace N lines +.lv N - N=1 no OR- +.sv N - N=1 no S_aV_e N lines. +.os - - no O_utput S_aved lines. +.ns space - no N_o-S_pace mode on. +.rs - - no R_estore S_pacing. +.xh off - no EX_tra-H_alf-line mode on. + +IV. Line____ Length______ and___ Indenting_________ + +.ll +_N N=65 N=prev no L_ine L_ength. +.in +_N N=0 N=prev yes IN__dent. +.ti +_N - N=1 yes T_emporary I_ndent. + +V. Macros______, Diversion_________, and___ Line____ Traps_____ + +.de xx - ignored no DE__fine or redefine a macro. +.rm xx - - no R_eM_ove macro name. +.di xx - end no DI__vert output to macro "xx". +.wh -_N xx - no WH__en; set a line trap. +.ch -_N -_M - no OR- +.ch xx -_M - no OR- +.ch -_N y - no OR- +.ch xx y - no CH__ange trap line. + +VI. Number______ Registers_________ + +.nr a +_N -_M - no OR- +.nr ab +_N -_M - no N_umber R_egister. +.nc c \\n \\n no N_umber C_haracter. +.ar arabic - no Arabic numbers. +.ro arabic - no Roman numbers. +.RO arabic - no ROMAN numbers. + +VII. Input_____ and___ Output______ Conventions___________ and___ Character_________ Translations____________ + +.ta N,M,... none no PseudoTA__bs setting. +.tc c space space no T_ab replacement C_haracter. +.lc c . . no L_eader replacement C_haracter. +.ul N - N=1 no UN__derline input text lines. +.cc c . . no Basic C_ontrol C_haracter. +.c2 c ' ' no Nobreak control character. +.li N - N=1 no Accept input lines LI__terally. +.tr abcd.... - no TR__anslate on output. + +VIII. Hyphenation___________. + +.nh on - no N_o H_yphen. +.hy on - no HY__phenate. +.hc c none none no H_yphenation indicator C_haracter. + +IX. Three_____ Part____ Titles______. + +.tl 'left'center'right' no T_itL_e. +.lt N N=65 N=prev no L_ength of T_itle. + +X. Output______ Line____ Numbering_________. + +.nm +_N M S I off no N_umber M_ode on or off, set parameters. +.np M S I reset no N_umber P_arameters set or reset. + +XI. Conditional___________ Input_____ Line____ Acceptance__________ + +.if c anything - no OR- +.if !c anything - no OR- +.if N anything - no OR- +.if !N anything - no IF__ true accept line of "anything". + +XII. Environment___________ Switching_________. + +.ev N N=0 N=prev no E_nV_ironment switched. + +XIII. Insertions__________ from____ the___ Standard________ Input_____ Stream______ + +.rd prompt bell no R_eaD_ insert. +.ex - - no EX__it. + +XIV. Input_____ File____ Switching _________ + +.so filename - no Switch SO__urce file (push down). +.nx filename - no N_eX_t file. +.sp +XV. Miscellaneous_____________ + +.ig - - no IG__nore. +.fl - - no FL__ush output buffer. +.ab - - no AB__ort. +%cc . +.fi +.in 16 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/occ.1 b/static/v10/man1/occ.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7190fbe2 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/occ.1 @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +.TH OCC 1 "8 Juillet 88" +.SH NAME +occ \- Esterel and Lustre C code producer +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B occ +[ option ] ... [ file ]... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The \fIocc\fR code producer takes as input one or more \fIoc\fR files +and produces standard executable C code. +If there is no input files, the standard input is used. +Typical use is: +.DS +occ < game1.oc +.DE +or +.DS +occ game1.oc +.DE +.LP +The following options are interpreted by \fIocc\fP. +.IP \fB-version\fR 10 +Gives the version name and terminates ignoring all others arguments. +.IP \fB-array\fR 10 +Arrays of automata are available using the \fB -array\fR option. +.IP \fB-nopack\fR 10 +With this option, there is no packaging of input, output and sensor interface +procedures. This option is available for compatibility with old +\fIocc\fR versions. +.IP \fB-s\fR 10 +Silent mode. No output file is generated. +.IP \fB-v\fR 10 +Verbose option: gives names of the input module. +.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 +Prints statistic informations into the standard error stream: +global time and size of the process. +.IP \fB-size\fR 10 +Prints size informations into the standard error stream: +how many actions and how many bytes are produced. +.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 +Memory state after compiling. +.IP "\fB\-B\fP \fIname\fP" 10 +\fIname\fP denotes the output file default base name. +The suffix .c is added automatically (and possibly a working +directory name --see the following option). +If this option is omitted the output code is printed in file: +occ_out.c. +For instance, +.DS +occ -B game1 game1.oc +.DE +.IP "\fB\-D\fP \fIdirectory\fP" 10 +Specify a directory where the output file will be placed. +The default is the current directory. +.SH FILES +The caller of the command +must have read/write permission for the directories containing +the working files, and execute permission for the occ file. +.SH IDENTIFICATION +.de VL +\\$2 +.. +Author: A Ressouche, +INRIA, +.sp 0 +Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE +.sp 0 +Revision Number: +$Revision: 1.5 $ +\&. +.SH SEE ALSO +Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual +.sp 0 +Esterel v3 System Manuals. +.sp 0 +strlic (1), iclc(1), lcoc (1). +.sp 0 +.SH BUGS + + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 b/static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..149a572b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ocdebug.1 @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +.TH OCDEBUG 1 "8 Juillet 88" +.SH NAME +ocdebug \- Esterel and Lustre Debug code producer +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ocdebug +[ option ] ... [ file ]... +.SH DESCRIPTION +The \fIocdebug\fR code producer takes as input one or more \fIoc\fR files +and produces a human-readable file. +If there is no input files, the standard input is used. +Typical use is: +.DS +ocdebug < game1.oc +.DE +or +.DS +ocdebug game1.oc +.DE +.LP +The following options are interpreted by \fIocdebug\fP. +.IP \fB-version\fR 10 +Gives the version name and terminates ignoring all others arguments. +.IP \fB-names\fR 10 +With this option, \fIocdebug\fR prints the signal name between brackets +for each present signal test and between braces for each output action +performed in the automaton. +.IP \fB-halts\fR 10 +With this option, \fIocdebug\fR prints the haltset of each state after the +keyword: \fBhaltset\fR +.IP \fB-emitted\fR 10 +With this option, the list of output or local signals emitted in each +transition is printed out after the keyword: \fBemitted\fR. +.IP \fB-s\fR 10 +Silent mode. No output file is generated. +.IP \fB-v\fR 10 +Verbose option: gives names of the input module. +.IP \fB-stat\fR 10 +Prints statistic informations into the standard error stream: +global time and size of the process. +.IP \fB-memstat\fR 10 +Memory state after compiling. +.IP "\fB\-B\fP \fIname\fP" 10 +\fIname\fP denotes the output file default base name. +The suffix .debug is added automatically (and possibly a working +directory name --see the following option). +If this option is omitted the output code is printed in file: +ocdebug_out.debug. +For instance, +.DS +ocdebug -B game1 game1.oc +.DE +.IP "\fB\-D\fP \fIdirectory\fP" 10 +Specify a directory where the output file will be placed. +The default is the current directory. +.SH FILES +The caller of the command +must have read/write permission for the directories containing +the working files, and execute permission for the occ file. +.SH IDENTIFICATION +.de VL +\\$2 +.. +Author: A Ressouche, +INRIA, +.sp 0 +Sophia-Antipolis, 06600 Valbonne, FRANCE +.sp 0 +Revision Number: +$Revision: 1.4 $ +\&. +.SH SEE ALSO +Esterel v3 Programming Language Manual +.sp 0 +Esterel v3 System Manuals. +.sp 0 +strlic (1), iclc(1), lcoc (1). +.sp 0 +.SH BUGS + + diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ocr.1 b/static/v10/man1/ocr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..184a240a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ocr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +.TH OCR 1 cetus,hydra,coma +.CT 1 graphics +.SH NAME +ocr \- optical character recognition +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ocr +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ocr +reads a black-and-white image of a page from +.IR file , +and writes ASCII to the standard output. +If no +.I file +is specified, it reads from the standard input. +.PP +The input is a +.IR picfile (5) +image of one column of machine-printed text, normally +scanned in by +.IR cscan (1). +Fonts, sizes, and line-spacings may vary within the column, +but each line should have a constant text size and baseline. +Lines should be parallel and roughly horizontal. +.PP +In the output, white space approximates the original page layout. +Words that +.IR spell (1) +are preferred, and hyphenations across lines are recombined. +.PP +The options are: +.nr xx \w'\fL-pn,m\ \ ' +.TP \n(xxu +.BI -a s +The alphabet is the union of symbol sets selected by characters in string +.IR s , +from among: +.RS +.PD +.nr yy \w'\fLA\ \ ' +.TP \n(yyu +.B A +ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ +.PD0 +.TP +.B a +abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz +.PD0 +.TP +.B 0 +0123456789 +.PD0 +.TP +.B . +.ie t \&.\^,\|-\^:\^;\|*\^'\|\^"\|?\^!\|/\|&\|$\^(\^)\^[\|\^]\|#\|@\|% \0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0 \kz(basic punctuation) +.el \&.\^,\|-\^:\^;\|*\^'\|\^"\|?\^!\|/\|&\|$\^(\^)\^[\|\^]\|#\|@\|% \0\0\0\0\0\0\0 \kz(basic punctuation) +.ig +should include ` /(em + ??? +shouldn't include []#@% ??? +.. +.PD0 +.TP +.B ^ +^\|\f(CW~\fR\^`\|\^\\\||\|\^{\|}\|_ \h'|\nzu'(extended punct'n) +.ig +should include []#@% ??? +shouldn't include ` ??? +.. +.PD0 +.TP +.B + ++\^\-\^*\|/\|<\^>\^=\^.\^E\|e\|[\|] \h'|\nzu'(numerical punct'n) +.PD0 +.TP +.B s +.ie t \(sc\^\(dg\^\(dd\^\(ct\|\(bu\|\(co\|\(rg\|\(de\^\(fm\^\(en\|\^\(mi\|\(em \h'|\nzu'(selected non-ASCII) +.el \\(sc\\(dg\\(dd\\(ct\\(bu\\(co ... \h'|\nzu'(selected non-ASCII) +.PD0 +.TP +.B l +.ie t \(fi\|\(fl\|f\h'-.1m'f\|f\h'-.1m'\(fi\|f\h'-.1m'\(fl\|\N'114'\|\N'115'\|\N'105'\|\N'106' \h'|\nzu'(ligatures and digraphs) +.el fi fl ff ffi ffl ae oe ... \h'|\nzu'(ligatures, digraphs) +.PD0 +.TP +.B g +.ie t \(*a\(*b\(*g\(*d\(*e\(*z\(*y\(*h\(*i\(*k\(*l\(*m\(*n\(*c\(*o\(*p\(*r\(*s\(*t\(*u\(*f\(*x\(*q\(*w \h'|\nzu'(Greek lower case) +.el \\(*a\\(*b\\(*g\\(*d\\(*e\\(*z ... \h'|\nzu'(Greek lower case) +.PD0 +.TP +.B G +.ie t AB\(*G\(*DEZH\(*HIK\(*LMN\(*CO\(*PP\(*STY\(*FX\(*Q\(*W \h'|\nzu'(Greek upper case) +.el AB\\(*G\\(*DEZ ... \h'|\nzu'(Greek upper case) +.PD +.PP +The default is +.BR -aAa0.+^ , +the full printable-ASCII set, which may be abbreviated as +.BR -ap . +Thus, +.B -apslgG +selects all of the above. +.RE +.PD +.TP \n(xxu +.B -c +Find columns in complex nested layouts using greedy white covers algorithm. +.TP +.BI -m l[,r] +Trim the left and right margins of the image by +.I l +and +.I r +inches, respectively, before looking for columns. +If +.I r +is omitted, it is assumed to equal +.IR l. +.TP +.BI -n n +Find the +.I n +largest columns by analysis of a single vertical projection. +Each column should be compactly-printed +and separated from the others by at least 2 ems of horizontal white space. +.TP +.BI -p n,m +Point sizes lie in the range [ +.I n, m +]; other sizes are discarded. +The default is +.BR -p6,24 . +.TP +.B -s +Defeat spelling check (but continue to favor numeric strings and good punctuation). +.TP +.B -t +Write +.IR troff (1) +format. +Each column is shown on a separate page, lines at their original height, +words at their original horizontal location, and +characters roughly original size in Times roman. +Hyphenated words are not recombined. +.TP +.B -u +Unspellable words are prefixed with `?' or, if +.B -t +is specified, printed boldface. +.TP +.BI -w w +Find the largest column of width +.I w +inches, within a single vertical projection. +.SS Fonts +Trained on over 100 Latin-alphabet book fonts in various italic, bold, etc styles. +Only one font of Greek, without diacriticals. +Also Swedish and Tibetan, on request. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR bcp (1), +.IR cscan (1), +.IR font (6), +.IR picfile (5), +.IR spell (1), +.IR troff (1) +.SH BUGS +For best results, use images of high-contrast, cleanly-printed original +documents digitized at a resolution of 400 pixels/inch or higher. +It may help to restrict the alphabet and sizes to what's there. +.ig +8.7 CPU minutes on pipe to read this page, September 1989. +.. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/od.1 b/static/v10/man1/od.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..114143ee --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/od.1 @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'OD (I)'1/15/73'OD (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME od -- octal dump +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS od__ [ -abcdho_______ ] [ file ] [ [+_]offset[._][b_] ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION od__ +dumps +file____ +in +one or more formats +as +selected by the first argument. +(If the first argument is missing, -o__ is default.) +The meanings of the format argument characters +are: + +.in +5 +.ti -2 +a_ interprets words as PDP-11 instructions and +dis-assembles the operation code. +Unknown operation codes print as ???. + +.ti -2 +b_ interprets bytes in octal. + +.ti -2 +c_ interprets bytes in ascii. +Unknown ascii characters are printed as \\?. + +.ti -2 +d_ interprets words in decimal. + +.ti -2 +h_ interprets words in hex. + +.ti -2 +o_ interprets words in octal. + +.in -5 +The file argument specifies which file is to be dumped. +If no file argument is specified, +the standard input is used. +Thus od can be used as a filter. + +The offset argument specifies the offset +in the file where dumping is to commence. +This argument is normally interpreted +as octal bytes. +If '.' is appended, the offset is interpreted in +decimal. +If 'b' is appended, the offset is interpreted in blocks. +(A block is 512 bytes.) +If the file argument is omitted, +the offset argument must be preceded by '+'. + +Dumping continues until an end-of-file +condition or until +halted by sending an interrupt signal. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO db(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/olint.1 b/static/v10/man1/olint.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9911eee4 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/olint.1 @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +.TH LINT 1 +.UC 4 +.SH NAME +lint \- a C program verifier +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B lint +[ +.B \-abchnpuvx +] +file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Lint +attempts to detect features of the C program +.I files +which are +likely to be bugs, or non-portable, or wasteful. +It also checks the type usage of the program more strictly +than the compilers. +Among the things which are currently found are +unreachable statements, +loops not entered at the top, +automatic variables declared and not used, +and logical expressions whose value is constant. +Moreover, the usage of functions is checked to find +functions which return values in some places and not in others, +functions called with varying numbers of arguments, +and functions whose values are not used. +.PP +By default, it is assumed that all the +.I files +are to be loaded together; they are checked for +mutual compatibility. +Function definitions for certain libraries are available to +.IR lint ; +these libraries are referred to by a +conventional name, +such as `\-lm', in the style of +.IR ld (1). +.PP +Any number of the options in the following list +may be used. +The +.SM +.BR \-D "\*S," +.SM +.BR \-U "\*S," +and +.SM +.B \-I +options of +.IR cc (1) +are also recognized as separate arguments. +.TP +.B p +Attempt to check portability to the +.I IBM +and +.I GCOS +dialects of C. +.TP +.B h +Apply a number of heuristic tests to attempt to +intuit bugs, improve style, and reduce waste. +.TP +.B b +Report +.I break +statements that cannot be reached. +(This is not the default because, unfortunately, +most +.I lex +and many +.I yacc +outputs produce dozens of such comments.) +.TP +.B v +Suppress complaints about unused arguments in functions. +.TP +.B x +Report variables referred to by extern declarations, +but never used. +.TP +.B a +Report assignments of long values to int variables. +.TP +.B c +Complain about casts which have questionable portability. +.TP +.B u +Do not complain about functions and variables used and not +defined, or defined and not used (this is suitable for running +.I lint +on a subset of files out of a larger program). +.TP +.B n +Do not check compatibility against the standard library. +.PP +.IR Exit (2) +and other functions which do not return +are not understood; this causes various lies. +.PP +Certain conventional comments in the C source +will change the behavior of +.IR lint : +.TP +/*NOTREACHED*/ +at appropriate points +stops comments about unreachable code. +.TP +.RI /*VARARGS n */ +suppresses +the usual checking for variable numbers of arguments +in the following function declaration. +The data types of the first +.I n +arguments are checked; +a missing +.I n +is taken to be 0. +.TP +/*NOSTRICT*/ +shuts off strict type checking in the next expression. +.TP +/*ARGSUSED*/ +turns on the +.B \-v +option for the next function. +.TP +/*LINTLIBRARY*/ +at the beginning of a file shuts off complaints about +unused functions in this file. +.SH FILES +.ta \w'/usr/lib/llib-port 'u +/usr/lib/lint/lint[12] programs +.br +/usr/lib/lint/llib-lc declarations for standard functions +.br +/usr/lib/lint/llib-port declarations for portable functions +.SH SEE ALSO +cc(1) +.br +S. C. Johnson, +.I Lint, a C Program Checker +.SH BUGS +There are some things you just +.B can't +get lint to shut up about. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/opr.1 b/static/v10/man1/opr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0c015ccf --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/opr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'OPR (I)'1/15/73'OPR (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME opr -- off line print +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS opr___ [--__] [-_] [+_] [+-__]file918 ... +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION opr___ +will arrange to have the +201 data phone daemon submit a job to the +Honeywell 6070 to print the file arguments. +Normally, +the output appears at the GCOS central site. +If the first argument is --__, the output +is remoted to station R1. +(Station R1 has a 1403 printer.) + +Normally, each file is printed in the state it is found +when the data phone daemon reads it. +If a particular file argument is preceded by +_, +or a preceding argument of +_ has been encountered, +then opr___ will make a copy for the daemon to print. +If the file argument is preceded by -_, +or a preceding argument of -_ has been encountered, +then opr will unlink (remove) the file. + +If there are no +arguments except for the optional --__, +then the standard input is read and off-line printed. +Thus opr___ may be used as a filter. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /usr/dpd/* spool area +.br +/etc/passwd personal ident cards +.br +/etc/dpd daemon +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO dpd(I), passwd(V) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS -- +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS -- diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ops5.1 b/static/v10/man1/ops5.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7b58b27 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ops5.1 @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +.TH OPS5 1 +.SH NAME +ops5 \- a rule-based production-system environment +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ops5 +.SH DESCRIPTION +Ops5 is a rule-based language built on Lisp. +A program consists of a collection of +if\(enthen rules and a global `working memory'. +Each rule has a conditional expression, the +.SM `LHS' +and a +sequence of actions, the +.SM `RHS'. +A +.SM LHS +consists of one or more patterns and is +`satisfied' when every pattern +matches an element in working memory. +.PP +The rule interpreter executes a `recognize-act' cycle: +.IP 1. +Match: Evaluate the +.SM LHS\*Ss +of the rules to determine which are satisfied. +.IP 2. +Conflict Resolution: Select one rule from among the ones with satisfied +.SM LHS\*Ss. +If no +.SM LHS\*Ss +is satisfied halt execution. +.IP 3. +Act: Perform the operations specified in the +.SM RHS +of the selected rule. +.PP +The top level commands +in order of usefulness are: +.TP 12 +.B watch +report on firings and working memory changes +.EX +(watch) ;Report current watch level +(watch 0) ;No report +(watch 1) ;Report rule names and working memory time tags +(watch 2) ;Report rule names, working memory time tags + ;and changes to working memory +.EE +.TP +.B load +load working memory and rule declarations +.EX +(load 'billing.l) ;Load file `billing.l' +.EE +.TP +.B run +start the rule interpreter +.EX +(run) ;Run until no rules are satisfied or halt executed +(run 1) ;Run one rule firing +.EE +.TP +.B exit +exit +.I ops5 +.EX +(exit) +.EE +.B +.TP +.B back +back up the rule interpreter +.EX +(back 32) ;Back up 32 rule firings +.EE +.TP +.B wm +display working memory +.EX +(wm 32) ;Display working memory element 32 +.EE +.TP +.B ppwm +display parts of working memory +.EX +(ppwm customer ^record bad) ;Display all customer working memory + ;elements with `bad' records +.EE +.TP +.B pm +display production or rule memory +.EX +(pm good-customer) ;Display rule `good-customer' +.EE +.TP +.B cs +print the conflict set +.EX +(cs) +.EE +.TP +.B matches +print matches for condition elements of a rule +.EX +(matches bad-customer) ;Display matches for rule `bad-customer' +.EE +.TP +.B pbreak +set a break point after a production firing +.EX +(pbreak bad-but-long-term-customer) ;Set break point after rule + ;`bad-but-long-term-customer' +.EE +.TP +.B make +make working memory elements +.EX +;Make a customer working memory element +(make customer ^name Terry ^record bad ^years 22) +.EE +.TP +.B remove +remove working memory elements +.EX +(remove *) ;Remove all working memory elements +(remove 17) ;Remove working memory element 17 +.EE +.TP +.B excise +remove rules +.EX +;Remove `good-customer' and `bad-customer' rules +(excise good-customer bad-customer) +.EE +.TP +.B openfile +open a file +.EX +;Open `ruletrace.ops' as output +;and associate it with traceoutput port +(openfile traceoutput |ruletrace.ops| out) +;Open `answers' as input and associate it with stdin port +(openfile stdin |answers| in) +.EE +.TP +.B closefile +close a file +.EX +(closefile traceoutput stdin) ;Close traceoutput and stdin ports +.EE +.TP +.B default +change default input and output files +.EX +(default nil trace) ;Change trace port back to default +(default traceoutput write) ;Change write port to traceoutput +(default stdin accept) ;Change accept port to stdin +.EE +.TP +.B strategy +select rule interpreter strategy. +.EX +(strategy) ;Report current strategy +(strategy mea) ;Selects mea strategy +(strategy lex) ;Selects lex strategy (default on startup) +.EE +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/lisp +.TP +.F /usr/lib/lisp +lisp library +.SH "SEE ALSO" +Forgy, C. L., +.IR "OPS5 User's Manual" , +Department of Computer Science, +Carnegie-Mellon University, +July, 1981 +.br +lisp (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +When +.I ops5 +stops executing for any reason, you are placed in the +.I lisp +top-level routine. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/org.1 b/static/v10/man1/org.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6cb7d250 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/org.1 @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 +.TH ORG 1 +.SH NAME +org \- show the organization of a document +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B org +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +[file ...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Org +copies the input text to the output, +and formats it, +preserving headings and paragraph boundaries, +but only including the first and last sentence of each paragraph. +The input text must contain standard +.I mm(1) +macros. +.PP +The output can be used to study the general organization of the paper, +and is sometimes a good abstract. +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH SEE ALSO +mm(1). +.SH BUGS +The input text must contain standard +.I mm +macros. +.PP +.I Org +will not recognize common abbreviations at the end of +a sentence as the sentence end. +Consequently, more than two sentences may be printed for a paragraph. +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/osh.1 b/static/v10/man1/osh.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3202dfb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/osh.1 @@ -0,0 +1,1151 @@ +.if t .ds ' \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\'\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ +.if n .ds ' ' +.if t .ds ` \h@.05m@\s+4\v@.333m@\`\v@-.333m@\s-4\h@.05m@ +.if n .ds ` ` +.ds OK [\| +.ds CK \|] +.TH SH 1 +.SH NAME +sh \- shell, the standard command programming language +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B sh +[ +.B \-ceiknrstuvx +] [ args ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Sh\^ +is a command programming language +that executes commands read from a terminal +or a file. +See +.I Invocation\^ +below +for the meaning of arguments to the shell. +.SS Commands. +A +.I simple-command\^ +is a sequence of non-blank +.I words\^ +separated by +.I blanks\^ +(a +.I blank\^ +is a +tab +or a +space). +The first word specifies the name of the command to +be executed. +Except as specified below, +the remaining words are passed as arguments +to the invoked command. +The command name is passed as argument 0 +(see +.IR exec (2)). +The +.I value\^ +of a simple-command is its exit status +if it terminates normally, or (octal) 200+\f2status\^\fP if +it terminates abnormally (see +.IR signal (2) +for a list of +status values). +.PP +A +.I pipeline\^ +is a sequence of one or more +.I commands\^ +separated by +.BR \(bv . +The standard output of each command but the last +is connected by a +.IR pipe (2) +to the standard input of the next command. +Each command is run as a separate process; +the shell waits for the last command to terminate. +.PP +A +.I list\^ +is a sequence of one or more +pipelines +separated by +.BR ; , +.BR & , +.BR && , +or +.BR \(bv\|\(bv , +and optionally terminated by +.B ; +or +.BR & . +Of these four symbols, +.B ; +and +.B & +have equal precedence, +which is lower than that of +.B && +and +.BR \(bv\|\(bv . +The symbols +.B && +and +.B \(bv\|\(bv +also have equal precedence. +A semicolon +.RB ( ; ) +causes sequential execution of the preceding pipeline; an ampersand +.RB ( & ) +causes asynchronous execution of the preceding pipeline (i.e., the shell does +.I not\^ +wait for that pipeline to finish). +The symbol +.B && +.RB (\| \(bv\|\(bv \^) +causes the +.I list\^ +following it to be executed only if the preceding +pipeline +returns a zero (non-zero) exit status. +An arbitrary number of new-lines may appear in a +.IR list , +instead of semicolons, +to delimit commands. +.PP +A +.I command\^ +is either a simple-command +or one of the following. +Unless otherwise stated, +the value returned by a command is that of the +last simple-command executed in the command. +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +\f3for\fP \f2name\^\fP \*(OK \f3in\fP \f2word\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP +Each time a +.B for +command is executed, +.I name\^ +is set to the next +.I word\^ +taken from the +.B in +.I word\^ +list. +If +.BI in " word\^" +\&.\|.\|. +is omitted, then +the +.B for +command executes the \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP once for each positional parameter +that is set +(see +.I "Parameter Substitution\^" +below). +Execution ends when there are no more words in the list. +.TP +\f3case\fP \f2word\^\fP \f3in\fP \*(OK \f2pattern\^\fP \*(OK \(bv \ +\f2pattern\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3)\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3;;\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \f3esac\fP +A +.B case +command executes the +.I list\^ +associated with the first +.I pattern\^ +that matches +.IR word . +The form of the patterns is +the same as that used for +file-name generation (see +.I "File Name Generation\^" +below). +.TP +\f3if\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(OK \ +\f3elif\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3then\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. \ +\*(OK \f3else\fP \f2list\^\fP \*(CK \f3f\&i\fP +The +.I list\^ +following \f3if\fP is executed and, +if it +returns a zero exit status, the +.I list\^ +following +the first +.B then +is executed. +Otherwise, the +.I list\^ +following \f3elif\fP +is executed and, if its value is zero, +the +.I list\^ +following +the next +.B then +is executed. +Failing that, the +.B else +.I list\^ +is executed. +If no +.B else +.I list\^ +or +.B then +.I list\^ +is executed, then the +.B if +command returns a zero exit status. +.TP +\f3while\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3do\fP \f2list\^\fP \f3done\fP +A +.B while +command repeatedly executes the +.B while +.I list\^ +and, if the exit status of the last command in the list is zero, executes +the +.B do +.IR list ; +otherwise the loop terminates. +If no commands in the +.B do +.I list\^ +are executed, then the +.B while +command returns a zero exit status; +.B until +may be used in place of +.B while +to negate +the loop termination test. +.TP +\f3(\fP\f2list\^\fP\f3)\fP +.br +Execute +.I list\^ +in a sub-shell. +.TP +\f3{\fP\f2list\^\fP\f3;}\fP +.br +.I list\^ +is simply executed. +.PD +.PP +The following words +are only recognized as the first word of a command +and when not quoted: +.if t .RS +.PP +.B +.if n if then else elif fi case esac for while until do done { } +.if t if then else elif f\&i case esac for while until do done { } +.if t .RE +.SS Comments. +A word beginning with +.B # +causes that word and all the following characters up to a new-line +to be ignored. +.SS Command Substitution. +The standard output from a command enclosed in +a pair of grave accents (\^\f3\*`\^\*`\fP\^) may be used as part or all +of a word; +trailing new-lines are removed. +.SS Parameter Substitution. +The character +.B $ +is used to introduce substitutable +.IR parameters . +Positional parameters may be assigned values by +.BR set . +Variables may be set by writing: +.RS +.PP +.IB name = value\^ +\*(OK +.IB name = value\^ +\*(CK .\|.\|. +.RE +.PP +Pattern-matching is not performed on +.IR value . +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3}\fP +A +.I parameter\^ +is a sequence of letters, digits, or underscores (a +.IR name ), +a digit, +or any of the characters +.BR \(** , +.BR @ , +.BR # , +.BR ? , +.BR \- , +.BR $ , +and +.BR !\\^ . +The value, if any, of the parameter is substituted. +The braces are required only when +.I parameter\^ +is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore +that is not to be interpreted as part of its name. +A +.I name\^ +must begin with a letter or underscore. +If +.I parameter\^ +is a digit then it is a positional parameter. +If +.I parameter\^ +is +.B \(** +or +.BR @ , +then all the positional +parameters, starting with +.BR $1 , +are substituted +(separated by spaces). +Parameter +.B $0 +is set from argument zero when the shell +is invoked. +.TP +\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:\-\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP +If +.I parameter\^ +is set and is non-null then substitute its value; +otherwise substitute +.IR word . +.TP +\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:=\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP +If +.I parameter\^ +is not set or is null +then set it to +.IR word ; +the value of the parameter is then substituted. +Positional parameters may not be assigned to +in this way. +.TP +\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:?\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP +If +.I parameter\^ +is set and is non-null then substitute its value; +otherwise, print +.I word\^ +and exit from the shell. +If +.I word\^ +is omitted, then the message +``parameter null or not set'' +is printed. +.TP +\f3${\fP\f2parameter\^\fP\f3:+\fP\f2word\^\fP\f3}\fP +If +.I parameter\^ +is set and is non-null then substitute +.IR word ; +otherwise substitute nothing. +.PD +.PP +In the above, +.I word\^ +is not evaluated unless it is +to be used as the substituted string, +so that, in the following example, +.B pwd +is executed only if +.B d +is not set or is null: +.RS +.PP +echo \|${d:\-\^\*`\^pwd\^\*`\^} +.RE +.PP +If the colon +.RB ( : ) +is omitted from the above expressions, then the +shell only checks whether +.I parameter\^ +is set or not. +.PP +The following +parameters +are automatically set by the shell: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B # +The number of positional parameters in decimal. +.TP +.B \- +Flags supplied to the shell on invocation or by +the +.B set +command. +.TP +.B ? +The decimal value returned by the last synchronously executed command. +.TP +.B $ +The process number of this shell. +.TP +.B ! +The process number of the last background command invoked. +.PD +.RE +.PP +The following +parameters +are used by the shell: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B +.SM HOME +The default argument (home directory) for the +.I cd\^ +command. +.TP +.B +.SM PATH +The search path for commands (see +.I Execution\^ +below). +.TP +.B +.SM MAIL +If this variable is set to the name of +a mail file, then the shell informs the user of +the arrival of mail in the specified file. +.TP +.SM +.B PS1 +Primary prompt string, by default +.RB `` "$ \|" ''. +.TP +.SM +.B PS2 +Secondary prompt string, by default +.RB `` "> \|" ''. +.TP +.SM +.B IFS +Internal field separators, +normally +.BR space , +.BR tab , +and +.BR new-line . +.PD +.RE +.PP +The shell gives default values to +\f3\s-1PATH\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS1\s+1\fP, \f3\s-1PS2\s+1\fP, and \f3\s-1IFS\s+1\fP, +while +.SM +.B HOME +and +.SM +.B MAIL +are +not set at all by the shell (although +.SM +.B HOME +.I is\^ +set by +.IR login (1)). +.SS Blank Interpretation. +After parameter and command substitution, +the results of substitution are scanned for internal field separator +characters (those found in +.BR \s-1IFS\s+1 ) +and split into distinct arguments where such characters are found. +Explicit null arguments (\^\f3"\^"\fP or \f3\*'\^\*'\fP\^) are retained. +Implicit null arguments +(those resulting from +.I parameters\^ +that have no values) are removed. +.SS File Name Generation. +Following substitution, each command +.I word\^ +is scanned for +the characters +.BR \(** , +.BR ? , +and +.BR \*(OK . +If one of these characters appears +then the word is regarded as a +.IR pattern . +The word is replaced with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pattern. +If no file name is found that matches the pattern, then +the word is left unchanged. +The character +.B . +at the start of a file name +or immediately following a +.BR / , +as well as the character +.B / +itself, +must be matched explicitly. +.PP +.PD 0 +.RS +.TP +.B \(** +Matches any string, including the null string. +.TP +.B ? +Matches any single character. +.TP +.BR \*(OK .\|.\|.\^ \*(CK +Matches any one of the enclosed characters. +A pair of characters separated by +.B \- +matches any +character lexically between the pair, inclusive. +If the first character following the opening +\`\`\*(OK\'\' +is a +.B "``!''" +then any character not enclosed is matched. +.PD +.RE +.SS Quoting. +The following characters have a special meaning to the shell +and cause termination of a word unless quoted: +.RS +.PP +\f3; & ( ) \(bv < > new-line space tab\fP +.RE +.PP +A character may be +.I quoted\^ +(i.e., made to stand for itself) +by preceding +it with a +.BR \e . +The pair +.B \enew-line +is ignored. +All characters enclosed between a pair of single quote marks (\^\f3\*'\^\*'\fP\^), +except a single quote, +are quoted. +Inside double quote marks +(\f3"\^"\fP), +parameter and command substitution occurs and +.B \e +quotes the characters +.BR \e , +.BR \*` , +\f3"\fP, +and +.BR $ . +.B +"$\(**" +is equivalent to +\f3"$1 \|$2\fP \|.\|.\|.\f3"\fP, +whereas +.B +"$@" +is equivalent to +.B +"$1"\| +.B +"$2"\| +\&.\|.\|.\|. +.SS Prompting. +When used interactively, +the shell prompts with the value of +.SM +.B PS1 +before reading a command. +If at any time a new-line is typed and further input is needed +to complete a command, then the secondary prompt +(i.e., the value of +.BR \s-1PS2\s+1 ) +is issued. +.SS Input/Output. +Before a command is executed, its input and output +may be redirected using a special notation interpreted by the shell. +The following may appear anywhere in a simple-command +or may precede or follow a +.I command\^ +and are +.I not\^ +passed on to the invoked command; +substitution occurs before +.I word\^ +or +.I digit\^ +is used: +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP 14 +.B word +Use file +.I word\^ +as standard output (file descriptor 1). +If the file does not exist then it is created; +otherwise, it is truncated to zero length. +.TP +.B >\h@-.3m@>word +Use file +.I word\^ +as standard output. +If the file exists then output is appended to it (by first seeking to the end-of-file); +otherwise, the file is created. +.TP +\f3<\h@-.3m@<\fP\*(OK\f3\-\fP\*(CK\f3word\fP +The shell input is read up to a line that is the same as +.IR word , +or to an end-of-file. +The resulting document becomes +the standard input. +If any character of +.I word\^ +is quoted, then no interpretation +is placed upon the characters of the document; +otherwise, parameter and command substitution occurs, +(unescaped) +.B \enew-line +is ignored, +and +.B \e +must be used to quote the characters +.BR \e , +.BR $ , +.BR \*` , +and the first character of +.IR word . +If +.B \- +is appended to +.BR <\h@-.3m@< , +then all leading tabs are stripped from +.I word\^ +and from the document. +.TP +.B <&digit +The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor +.I digit\^ +(see +.IR dup (2)). +Similarly for the standard output using +.BR > . +.TP +.B <&\- +The standard input is closed. +Similarly for the standard output using +.BR > . +.PD +.PP +If one of the above is preceded by a digit, +then the +file descriptor created is that specified +by the digit +(instead of the default 0 or 1). +For example: +.RS +.PP +\&.\|.\|. \|2>&1 +.RE +.PP +creates file descriptor 2 that is a duplicate +of file descriptor 1. +.PP +If a command is followed by +.B & +then the default standard input +for the command +is the empty file +.BR /dev/null . +Otherwise, the environment for the execution of a command contains the +file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified by +input/output specifications. +.SS Environment. +The +.I environment\^ +(see +.IR environ (7)) +is a list of name-value pairs that is passed to +an executed program in the same way as a normal argument list. +The shell interacts with the environment in several ways. +On invocation, the shell scans the environment +and creates a +parameter +for each name found, +giving it the corresponding value. +Executed commands inherit the same environment. +If the user modifies the values of these +parameters +or creates new ones, +none of these affects the environment +unless the +.B export +command is used to bind the shell's +parameter +to the environment. +The environment seen by any executed command is thus composed +of any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the shell, +plus any modifications or additions, +all of which must be noted in +.B export +commands. +.PP +The environment for any +.I simple-command\^ +may be augmented by prefixing it with one or more assignments to +parameters. +Thus: +.RS +.PP +\s-1TERM\s+1=450 \|cmd \|args and +.br +(export \|\s-1TERM\s+1; \|\s-1TERM\s+1=450; \|cmd \|args) +.RE +.PP +are equivalent (as far as the above execution of +.I cmd\^ +is concerned). +.PP +If the +.B \-k +flag is set, +.I all\^ +keyword arguments are placed in the environment, +even if they occur after the command name. +The following +first prints +.B "a=b c" +and then +.BR c: +.PP +.RS +.nf +echo \|a=b \|c +set \|\-k +echo \|a=b \|c +.fi +.RE +.SS Signals. +The \s-1INTERRUPT\s+1 and \s-1QUIT\s+1 signals for an invoked +command are ignored if the command is followed by +.BR & ; +otherwise signals have the values +inherited by the shell from its parent, +with the exception of signal 11 +(but see also +the +.B trap +command below). +.SS Execution. +Each time a command is executed, the above substitutions +are carried out. +Except for the +.I "Special Commands\^" +listed below, a new +process is created and +an attempt is made to execute the command via +.IR exec (2). +.PP +The shell parameter +.B +.SM PATH +defines the search path for +the directory containing the command. +Alternative directory names are separated by +a colon +.RB ( : ). +The default path is +.B :/bin:/usr/bin +(specifying the current directory, +.BR /bin , +and +.BR /usr/bin , +in that order). +Note that the current directory is specified by a null path name, +which can appear immediately after the equal sign +or between the colon delimiters anywhere else in the path list. +If the command name contains a \f3/\fP then the search path +is not used. +Otherwise, each directory in the path is +searched for an executable file. +If the file has execute permission but is not an +.B a.out +file, +it is assumed to be a file containing shell commands. +A sub-shell (i.e., a separate process) is spawned to read it. +A parenthesized command is also executed in +a sub-shell. +.SS Special Commands. +The following commands are executed in the shell process +and, except as specified, +no input/output redirection is permitted for such commands: +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP +.B : +No effect; the command does nothing. +A zero exit code is returned. +.br +.TP +.BI ".\| " file\^ +Read and execute commands from +.I file\^ +and return. +The search path +specified by +.B +.SM PATH +is used to find the directory containing +.IR file . +.TP +\f3break\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Exit from the enclosing \f3for\fP or +.B while +loop, if any. +If +.I n\^ +is specified then break +.I n\^ +levels. +.TP +\f3continue\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Resume the next iteration of the enclosing +\f3for\fP or +.B while +loop. +If +.I n\^ +is specified then resume at the +.IR n -th +enclosing loop. +.TP +\f3cd\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK +Change the current directory to +.IR arg . +The shell +parameter +.B +.SM HOME +is the default +.IR arg . +.br +.ne 2.1v +.TP +\f3eval\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The arguments are read as input +to the shell +and the resulting command(s) executed. +.TP +\f3exec\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The command specified by +the arguments is executed in place of this shell +without creating a new process. +Input/output arguments may appear and, if no other +arguments are given, cause the shell +input/output to be modified. +.TP +\f3exit\fP \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK +Causes a shell to exit +with the exit status specified by +.IR n . +If +.I n\^ +is omitted then the exit status is that of the last command executed +(an end-of-file will also cause the shell to exit.) +.TP +\f3export\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The given +.IR name s +are marked +for automatic export to the +.I environment\^ +of subsequently-executed commands. +If no arguments are given, then a list of all +names that are exported in this shell is printed. +.TP +\f3newgrp\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +Equivalent to +.BI "exec newgrp" " arg\^" +\&.\|.\|.\|. +.TP +\f3read\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +One line is read from the standard input and +the first +word is assigned to the first +.IR name , +the second word +to the second +.IR name , +etc., with leftover words assigned to the last +.IR name . +The return code is 0 unless an end-of-file is encountered. +.TP +\f3readonly\fP \*(OK \f2name\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK +The given +.IR name s +are marked +.I readonly\^ +and +the values of the these +.IR name s +may not be changed +by subsequent assignment. +If no arguments are given, then a list +of all +.I readonly\^ +names is printed. +.TP +\f3set\fP \*(OK \f3\-ekntuvx\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP .\|.\|. \*(CK \*(CK +.RS +.TP +.B \-e +If the shell is non-interactive then exit immediately if a command +exits with a non-zero exit status. +.TP +.B \-k +All keyword arguments are placed in the environment for a command, +not just those that precede the command name. +.TP +.B \-n +Read commands but do not execute them. +.TP +.B \-t +Exit after reading and executing one command. +.TP +.B \-u +Treat unset variables as an error when substituting. +.TP +.B \-v +Print shell input lines as they are read. +.TP +.B \-x +Print commands and their arguments as they are executed. +.TP +.B \-\- +Do not change any of the flags; useful in setting $1 to -. +.PP +Using +.B \+ +rather than +.B \- +causes these flags to be turned off. +These flags can also be used upon invocation of the shell. +The current set of flags may be found in +.BR $\- . +The remaining arguments are positional +parameters and are assigned, in order, to +.BR $1 , +.BR $2 , +\&.\|.\|.\|. +If no arguments are given then the values +of all names are printed. +.RE +.TP +\f3shift\fP +.br +The positional parameters from +.B $2 +\&.\|.\|. +are renamed +.B $1 +\&.\|.\|.\|. +.TP +\f3test\fP +.br +Evaluate conditional expressions. See +.IR test (1) +for usage and description. +.TP +\f3times\fP +.br +Print the accumulated user and system times for processes +run from the shell. +.TP +\f3trap\fP \*(OK \f2arg\^\fP \*(CK \*(OK \f2n\^\fP \*(CK .\|.\|. +.I arg\^ +is a command to be read and executed when the shell +receives signal(s) +.IR n . +(Note that +.I arg\^ +is scanned once when +the trap is set and once when the trap +is taken.) +Trap commands are executed in order of signal number. +Any attempt to set a trap on a signal that +was ignored on entry to the current shell +is ineffective. +An attempt to trap on signal 11 (memory fault) produces an error. +If +.I arg\^ +is absent then all trap(s) +.I n\^ +are reset +to their original values. +If +.I arg\^ +is the null +string then this signal is ignored by the shell and by the commands +it invokes. +If +.I n\^ +is 0 then the command +.I arg\^ +is executed +on exit from the shell. +The +.B trap +command +with no arguments prints a list +of commands associated with each signal number. +.TP +\f3umask\fP \*(OK \f2nnn\^\fP \*(CK +The user file-creation mask is set to +.I nnn\^ +(see +.IR umask (2)). +If +.I nnn\^ +is omitted, the current value of the mask is printed. +.TP +\f3wait\fP +Wait for all child processes to terminate +report the termination status. +If +.I n\^ +is not given then all currently active child processes are waited for. +The return code from this command is always zero. +.PD +.PP +.SS Invocation. +If the shell is invoked through +.IR exec (2) +and the first character of argument zero +is +.BR \- , +commands are initially read from +.B /etc/profile +and then from +.BR \s-1$HOME\s+1/.profile , +if such files exist. +Thereafter, commands are read as described below, which +is also the case when the shell is invoked as +.BR /bin/sh . +The flags below are interpreted by the shell on invocation only; Note +that unless the +.B \-c +or +.B \-s +flag is specified, the first argument is assumed to be the +name of a file containing commands, and the remaining +arguments are passed as positional parameters +to that command file: +.PP +.PD 0 +.TP 10 +.BI \-c "\| string\^" +If the +.B \-c +flag is present then +commands are read from +.IR string . +.TP +.B \-s +If the +.B \-s +flag is present or if no +arguments remain +then commands are read from the standard input. +Any remaining arguments specify the positional parameters. +Shell output is written to +file descriptor 2. +.TP +.B \-i +If the +.B \-i +flag is present or +if the shell input and output are attached to a terminal, +then this shell is +.IR interactive . +In this case \s-1TERMINATE\s+1 is ignored (so that \f3kill 0\fP +does not kill an interactive shell) and \s-1INTERRUPT\s+1 is caught and ignored +(so that +.B wait +is interruptible). +In all cases, \s-1QUIT\s+1 is ignored by the shell. +.PD +.PP +The remaining flags and arguments are described under the +.B set +command above. +.PP +.SH EXIT STATUS +Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors, +cause the shell +to return a non-zero exit status. +If the shell is being used non-interactively +then execution of the shell file is abandoned. +Otherwise, the shell returns the exit status of +the last command executed (see also the +.B exit +command above). +.SH FILES +/etc/profile +.br +\s-1$HOME\s+1/\f3.\fPprofile +.br +/tmp/sh\(** +.br +/dev/null +.SH SEE ALSO +cd(1), +env(1), +login(1), +newgrp(1), +rsh(1), +test(1), +umask(1), +dup(2), +exec(2), +fork(2), +pipe(2), +signal(2), +ulimit(2), +umask(2), +wait(2), +a.out(5), +profile(5), +environ(7). +.SH BUGS +The command +.B readonly +(without arguments) produces the same output as the command +.BR export . +.br +If +.B <\h@-.3m@< +is used to provide standard input to an +asynchronous process invoked by +.BR & , +the shell gets mixed up about naming +the input document; +a garbage file +.B /tmp/sh\(** +is created and the shell complains about not being able +to find that file by another name. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ov.1 b/static/v10/man1/ov.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3a4bcd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ov.1 @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'OV (I)'6/12/72'OV (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME ov -- overlay pages +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS ov__ [ file ] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION ov__ +is a postprocessor for producing double column formatted +text when using nroff(I). +ov__ +literally overlays successive pairs of 66-line pages. + +If the file argument is missing, +the standard input is used. +Thus ov__ may be used as a filter. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES none +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO nroff(I), pr(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS none +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS Other page lengths should be permitted. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/p.1 b/static/v10/man1/p.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ba07596 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/p.1 @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +.TH P 1 +.CT 1 comm_term +.SH NAME +p, pg, more \(mi paginate +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B p +[ +.BI - number +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I P +copies its standard input, or the named files if given, +to its standard output, +stopping at the end of every 22nd line, and between files, +to wait for a newline from the user. +The page size may be set by +saying (for example) +.IP +.L p -60 +.PP +While waiting for a newline, +.I p +interprets some commands: +.TP +.B - +Reprint last page. +.L -- +reprints the second last page, etc. +.TP +.B ! +Pass the rest of the line to the shell as a command. +.TP +.B q +Quit. +.PP +.I Pg +and +.I more +are synonyms for +.I p. +.SH BUGS +Because of limited storage, +.I p +can't back up too far. +.br +.I Pg +and +.I more +exist only to placate old programs that call paginators. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pack.1 b/static/v10/man1/pack.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..830e917c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pack.1 @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +.TH PACK 1 +.CT 1 files +.SH NAME +pack, unpack, pcat, compress, uncompress, zcat \(mi compress and expand files +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pack +[ +.B - +] +.I file ... +.PP +.B unpack +.I file ... +.PP +.B pcat +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B compress +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B uncompress +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B zcat +[ +.B -V +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pack +attempts to compress the +.I files +and places the results in +corresponding files named +.IB file .z +with the same access modes, dates, and owner as the originals. +Successfully packed files are removed. +.PP +.I Unpack +reverses the process. +.PP +.I Pcat +unpacks files to the standard output. +.PP +The +.B .z +suffix may be omitted from the name of the +input file for +.I unpack +or +.I pcat. +.PP +.I Pack +encodes individual characters in a Huffman code. +Option +.B - +causes statistics of the encoding to be printed. +The option toggles on and off at each appearance among the +list of +.I files. +.PP +.I Compress, uncompress, +and +.I zcat +work like +.I pack, unpack, +and +.I pcat, +putting each compressed +.I file +into +.IB file .Z . +The options are +.TP +.B -f +(force) +Compress even when it doesn't save space. +.TP +.B -c +Write to the standard output; change no files. +.I Zcat +is identical to +.I uncompress +.B -c. +.TP +.BI -b bits +.I Compress +uses a modified Lempel-Ziv encoding. +Common substrings in the file are replaced by +variable-length codes up to size +.I bits +(default 16). +Smaller limits devour less address space. +.TP +.B -v +Print percent reduction for each file. +.TP +.B -V +Print program version number. +.PP +.I Compress-uncompress +pack better and are faster overall; +.I pack-unpack +work on smaller machines and are much more widely available. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +T. A. Welch, +`A Technique for High Performance Data Compression,' +.I "IEEE Computer," +17 (1984) 8-19. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The exit code of +.I pack, unpack, +or +.I pcat +is the number of files it failed to process. +.PP +The exit code of +.I compress, uncompress, +or +.I zcat +is 0 normally, 1 for error, 2 for ineffective compression +(i.e. expansion). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/paper.1 b/static/v10/man1/paper.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab19376a --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/paper.1 @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ +.TH PAPER 1 +.SH NAME +paper \- list input on HP2621P printer +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B paper +[ +.I file +] +... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I paper +prints the argument files (or the standard input +if there are no arguments) on the user's terminal +which is assumed to be a HP2621P. +A handshaking protocol is used to prevent overrunning +the terminal's buffer and dropping characters. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 b/static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21ad8a30 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/paranoia.1 @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ +Lest this program stop prematurely, i.e. before displaying + + `END OF TEST', + +try to persuade the computer NOT to terminate execution when an +error like Over/Underflow or Division by Zero occurs, but rather +to persevere with a surrogate value after, perhaps, displaying some +warning. If persuasion avails naught, don't despair but run this +program anyway to see how many milestones it passes, and then +amend it to make further progress. + +Answer questions with Y, y, N or n (unless otherwise indicated). + + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 0 Page: 1 + +Users are invited to help debug and augment this program so it will +cope with unanticipated and newly uncovered arithmetic pathologies. + +Please send suggestions and interesting results to + Richard Karpinski + Computer Center U-76 + University of California + San Francisco, CA 94143-0704, USA + +In doing so, please include the following information: + Precision: double; + Version: 10 February 1989; + Computer: + + Compiler: + + Optimization level: + + Other relevant compiler options: + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 1 Page: 2 + +Running this program should reveal these characteristics: + Radix = 1, 2, 4, 8, 10, 16, 100, 256 ... + Precision = number of significant digits carried. + U2 = Radix/Radix^Precision = One Ulp + (OneUlpnit in the Last Place) of 1.000xxx . + U1 = 1/Radix^Precision = One Ulp of numbers a little less than 1.0 . + Adequacy of guard digits for Mult., Div. and Subt. + Whether arithmetic is chopped, correctly rounded, or something else + for Mult., Div., Add/Subt. and Sqrt. + Whether a Sticky Bit used correctly for rounding. + UnderflowThreshold = an underflow threshold. + E0 and PseudoZero tell whether underflow is abrupt, gradual, or fuzzy. + V = an overflow threshold, roughly. + V0 tells, roughly, whether Infinity is represented. + Comparisions are checked for consistency with subtraction + and for contamination with pseudo-zeros. + Sqrt is tested. Y^X is not tested. + Extra-precise subexpressions are revealed but NOT YET tested. + Decimal-Binary conversion is NOT YET tested for accuracy. + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 2 Page: 3 + +The program attempts to discriminate among + FLAWs, like lack of a sticky bit, + Serious DEFECTs, like lack of a guard digit, and + FAILUREs, like 2+2 == 5 . +Failures may confound subsequent diagnoses. + +The diagnostic capabilities of this program go beyond an earlier +program called `MACHAR', which can be found at the end of the +book `Software Manual for the Elementary Functions' (1980) by +W. J. Cody and W. Waite. Although both programs try to discover +the Radix, Precision and range (over/underflow thresholds) +of the arithmetic, this program tries to cope with a wider variety +of pathologies, and to say how well the arithmetic is implemented. + +The program is based upon a conventional radix representation for +floating-point numbers, but also allows logarithmic encoding +as used by certain early WANG machines. + +BASIC version of this program (C) 1983 by Prof. W. M. Kahan; +see source comments for more history. + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 3 Page: 4 + +Program is now RUNNING tests on small integers: +-1, 0, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 27, 32 & 240 are O.K. + +Searching for Radix and Precision. +Radix = 2.000000 . +Closest relative separation found is U1 = 1.3877788e-17 . + +Recalculating radix and precision + confirms closest relative separation U1 . +Radix confirmed. +The number of significant digits of the Radix is 56.000000 . + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 30 Page: 5 + +Subtraction appears to be normalized, as it should be. +Checking for guard digit in *, /, and -. + *, /, and - appear to have guard digits, as they should. + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 40 Page: 6 + +Checking rounding on multiply, divide and add/subtract. +Multiplication appears to round correctly. +Division appears to round correctly. +Addition/Subtraction appears to round correctly. +Checking for sticky bit. +Sticky bit used incorrectly or not at all. + +Does Multiplication commute? Testing on 20 random pairs. + No failures found in 20 integer pairs. + +Running test of square root(x). +Testing if sqrt(X * X) == X for 20 Integers X. +Test for sqrt monotonicity. +sqrt has passed a test for Monotonicity. +Testing whether sqrt is rounded or chopped. +Square root is neither chopped nor correctly rounded. +Observed errors run from 0.0000000e+00 to 5.0000000e-01 ulps. + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 90 Page: 7 + +Testing powers Z^i for small Integers Z and i. +... no discrepancis found. + +Seeking Underflow thresholds UfThold and E0. +Smallest strictly positive number found is E0 = 2.93874e-39 . +Since comparison denies Z = 0, evaluating (Z + Z) / Z should be safe. +What the machine gets for (Z + Z) / Z is 2.00000000000000000e+00 . +This is O.K., provided Over/Underflow has NOT just been signaled. + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 120 Page: 8 + + +FLAW: X = 4.04076183095161330e-39 + is not equal to Z = 2.93873587705571880e-39 . +yet X - Z yields 0.00000000000000000e+00 . + Should this NOT signal Underflow, this is a SERIOUS DEFECT +that causes confusion when innocent statements like + if (X == Z) ... else ... (f(X) - f(Z)) / (X - Z) ... +encounter Division by Zero although actually +X / Z = 1 + 0.375 . +The Underflow threshold is 2.93873587705571880e-39, below which +calculation may suffer larger Relative error than merely roundoff. +SERIOUS DEFECT: Range is too narrow; U1^4 Underflows. +Since underflow occurs below the threshold +UfThold = (2.00000000000000000e+00) ^ (-1.28000000000000000e+02) +only underflow should afflict the expression + (2.00000000000000000e+00) ^ (-1.28000000000000000e+02); +actually calculating yields: 0.00000000000000000e+00 . +This computed value is O.K. + +Testing X^((X + 1) / (X - 1)) vs. exp(2) = 7.38905609893065010e+00 as X -> 1. +Accuracy seems adequate. +Testing powers Z^Q at four nearly extreme values. + ... no discrepancies found. + + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 160 Page: 9 + +Searching for Overflow threshold: +This may generate an error. + +* * * FLOATING-POINT ERROR * * * +Can `Z = -Y' overflow? +Trying it on Y = -8.50705917302346160e+37 . +Seems O.K. +Overflow threshold is V = 1.70141183460469230e+38 . +There is no saturation value because the system traps on overflow. +No Overflow should be signaled for V * 1 = 1.70141183460469230e+38 + nor for V / 1 = 1.70141183460469230e+38 . +Any overflow signal separating this * from the one +above is a DEFECT. + + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 190 Page: 10 + + +What message and/or values does Division by Zero produce? + Trying to compute 1 / 0 produces ... +* * * FLOATING-POINT ERROR * * * + + Trying to compute 0 / 0 produces ... +* * * FLOATING-POINT ERROR * * * + +Diagnosis resumes after milestone Number 220 Page: 11 + + +The number of SERIOUS DEFECTs discovered = 1. +The number of FLAWs discovered = 1. + +The arithmetic diagnosed has unacceptable Serious Defects. + +A total of 3 floating point exceptions were registered. +END OF TEST. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pascal.1 b/static/v10/man1/pascal.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8886a2ec --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pascal.1 @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +.TH PASCAL 1 +.CT 1 prog_other +.SH NAME +pascal \(mi language interpreter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pascal +[ +.B -cx +] +[ +.BI - options +] +[ +.B -i +.I name ... +] +[ +.IB name .p +] +[ +.I obj +[ +.I argument ... +] +] +.PP +.B pmerge +.IB name .p +.I \&... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pascal +translates Pascal source programs +to interpretable form, executes them, +or both. +Under option +.B -c +the programs are translated +but not executed. +The translated code appears in file +.FR obj . +Under option +.B -x +.I pascal +interprets the previously translated code in file +.I obj +(default +.FR obj ). +.I Arguments +are made available through the built-ins +.L argc +and +.LR argv . +.PP +Options +.B -c +and +.B -x +must come first. +.PP +Option +.B -i +causes the named procedures and include files to be listed. +.PP +Other options are combined in a separate string: +.TP +.B b +Buffer the runtime +file +.LR output . +.PD0 +.TP +.B l +Make a program listing during translation. +.TP +.B n +List each included +file on a new page with a banner line. +.TP +.B p +Suppress the post-mortem control flow backtrace +if an error occurs; +override execution limit of 500,000 statements. +.TP +.B s +Accept standard Pascal only; +non-standard constructs cause warning diagnostics. +.TP +.B t +Suppress runtime tests of subrange variables and treat +assert statements as comments. +.TP +.B u +Card image mode; +only the first 72 characters of input lines are used. +.TP +.B w +Suppress warning diagnostics. +.TP +.B z +Cause the interpreter to gather profiling data for +later analysis by +.IR pxp (A). +.PD +.PP +.I Pmerge +combines the named source files into a single source file on the +standard output. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/pascal/* +.TP +.F *.p +source +.TP +.F *.i +include files +.TP +.F /usr/lib/pascal/* +.TP +.F obj +.TP +.F /tmp/pix* +obj for compile-and-go +.TP +.F pmon.out +profile data file +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR pc (1), +.IR pxp (A) +.br +W. N. Joy, Susan L. Graham, C. B. Haley, +`Berkeley Pascal User's Manual', in +.I +Unix Programmer's Manual, Seventh Edition, Virtual VAX-11 Version, +1980, Vol 2C +(Berkeley). +There +.I pascal +is called +.I pi, px, +and +.IR pix. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The first character of an +error message indicates its class: +.TP +.L E +Fatal error; no code will be generated. +.PD0 +.TP +.L e +Non-fatal error. +.TP +.L w +Warning \- a potential problem. +.TP +.L s +Warning \- nonstandard Pascal construct. +.SH BUGS +The keyword +.L packed +is recognized but has no effect. +.br +Diagnostics for an included file may appear in the listing +of the next one. +.br +A dummy +.I obj +must be given if both source and +.I arguments +are present. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/passwd.1 b/static/v10/man1/passwd.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c8943a24 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/passwd.1 @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +.TH PASSWD 1 +.CT 1 comm_term sa_mortals secur +.SH NAME +passwd, pwx \(mi change login password +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B passwd +[ +.B -an +] +[ +.I name +] +.PP +.B priv pwx +[ [ +.B -qcd +] +.I name +] ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Passwd +changes a password +associated with the user +.IR name +(your own name by default). +.PP +The program prompts for the old password and then for the new one. +The caller must supply both. +The new password must be typed twice, to forestall mistakes. +.PP +New passwords must be at least four characters long if they use +a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters long +if monocase. +These rules are relaxed if you are insistent enough. +.PP +Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a password; +the owner must prove he knows the old password. +.PP +If the +.B -a +option is given, +.I passwd +prompts for new values of certain fields of the +password file entry. +.PP +The super-user may use the +.B -n +option to install new users. +The prompts are self-explanatory, +and most of the defaults obvious. +A null response to the +.L UID: +prompt +assigns a numeric userid one greater than the +largest one previously in +.FR /etc/passwd . +A null response to +.L Directory: +assigns a home directory in +.FR /usr . +If the first character of the response to this +prompt is an asterisk, the remaining characters +are taken as the name of the new user's home +directory, and a symbolic link to this directory +is placed in +.FR /usr . +.PP +A new user's home directory starts with a file named +.FR .profile , +which is a copy of +.F /etc/stdprofile +with +.B \eN +replaced by the user's name, and +.B \eD +replaced by the name of the user's home directory. +.PP +.I Pwx +modifies the password entry for +the named user in the secret password file, +.IR pwfile (5). +With no option +.I pwx +changes the classical password for the named user, +or the invoker by default. +The options are +.TP +.B -c +Change other information. +A special editing password for a fictitious user, +`pwedit', is demanded. +Then +.I pwx +prompts for treatment of the user password, +SNK key, maximum privilege, and clearance (maximum ceiling). +.TP +.B -d +Delete an entry. +The editing password is demanded. +.TP +.B -q +Demand the user password. +If a correct password is entered, return status 0; +otherwise nonzero. +.PP +Options +.B -c +and +.B -d +require +.B T_SETPRIV +privilege. +.SH FILES +.F /etc/passwd +.br +.F /etc/stdprofile +.br +.F /etc/pwfile +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR crypt (3), +.IR passwd (5), +.IR pwfile (5), +.IR pwserv (8) +.br +Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, +`UNIX password security,' +.I AT&T Bell Laboratories Technical Journal +63 (1984) 1649-1672 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/patch.1 b/static/v10/man1/patch.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..736e0324 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/patch.1 @@ -0,0 +1,320 @@ +''' $Header: patch.man,v 1.3 85/03/26 15:11:06 lwall Exp $ +''' +''' $Log: patch.man,v $ +''' Revision 1.3 85/03/26 15:11:06 lwall +''' Frozen. +''' +''' Revision 1.2.1.4 85/03/12 16:14:27 lwall +''' Documented -p. +''' +''' Revision 1.2.1.3 85/03/12 16:09:41 lwall +''' Documented -D. +''' +''' Revision 1.2.1.2 84/12/05 11:06:55 lwall +''' Added -l switch, and noted bistability bug. +''' +''' Revision 1.2.1.1 84/12/04 17:23:39 lwall +''' Branch for sdcrdcf changes. +''' +''' Revision 1.2 84/12/04 17:22:02 lwall +''' Baseline version. +''' +.de Sh +.br +.ne 5 +.PP +\fB\\$1\fR +.PP +.. +.de Sp +.if t .sp .5v +.if n .sp +.. +''' +''' Set up \*(-- to give an unbreakable dash; +''' string Tr holds user defined translation string. +''' Bell System Logo is used as a dummy character. +''' +.ie n \{\ +.tr \(bs-\*(Tr +.ds -- \(bs- +.if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(bs\h'-12u'\(bs\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch +.if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(bs\h'-12u'\(bs\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch +.ds L" "" +.ds R" "" +.ds L' ' +.ds R' ' +'br\} +.el\{\ +.ds -- \(em\| +.tr \*(Tr +.ds L" `` +.ds R" '' +.ds L' ` +.ds R' ' +'br\} +.TH PATCH 1 "May 10, 1986" "Systems Development Corp" +.SH NAME +patch \- a program for applying a diff file to an original +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B patch +[options] orig diff [+ [options] orig] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Patch +will take a patch file containing any of the three forms of difference +listing produced by the +.I diff +program and apply those differences to an original file, producing a patched +version. +By default, the patched version is put in place of the original, with +the original file backed up to the same name with the +extension \*(L".orig\*(R", or as specified by the +.B -b +switch. +You may also specify where you want the output to go with a +.B -o +switch. +If +.I diff +is omitted, or is a hyphen, the patch will be read from standard input. +.PP +Upon startup, patch will attempt to determine the type of the diff file, +unless over-ruled by a +.BR -c , +.BR -e , +or +.B -n +switch. +Context diffs and normal diffs are applied by the +.I patch +program itself, while ed diffs are simply fed to the +.I ed +editor via a pipe. +.PP +.I Patch +will try to skip any leading garbage, apply the diff, +and then skip any trailing garbage. +Thus you could feed an article or message containing a context or normal +diff to +.IR patch , +and it should work. +If the entire diff is indented by a consistent amount, +this will be taken into account. +.PP +With context diffs, and to a lesser extent with normal diffs, +.I patch +can detect when the line numbers mentioned in the patch are incorrect, +and will attempt to find the correct place to apply each hunk of the patch. +As a first guess, it takes the line number mentioned for the hunk, plus or +minus any offset used in applying the previous hunk. +If that is not the correct place, +.I patch +will scan both forwards and backwards for a set of lines matching the context +given in the hunk. +All lines of the context must match. +If +.I patch +cannot find a place to install that hunk of the patch, it will put the +hunk out to a reject file, which normally is the name of the output file +plus \*(L".rej\*(R". +(Note that the rejected hunk will come out in context diff form whether the +input patch was a context diff or a normal diff. +If the input was a normal diff, many of the contexts will simply be null.) +.PP +If no original file is specified on the command line, +.I patch +will try to figure out from the leading garbage what the name of the file +to edit is. +In the header of a context diff, the filename is found from lines beginning +with \*(L"***\*(R" or \*(L"---\*(R", with the shortest name of an existing +file winning. +Only context diffs have lines like that, but if there is an \*(L"Index:\*(R" +line in the leading garbage, +.I patch +will try to use the filename from that line. +The context diff header takes precedence over an Index line. +If no filename can be intuited from the leading garbage, you will be asked +for the name of the file to patch. +.PP +(If the original file cannot be found, but a suitable SCCS or RCS file is +handy, +.I patch +will attempt to get or check out the file.) +.PP +Additionally, if the leading garbage contains a \*(L"Prereq: \*(R" line, +.I patch +will take the first word from the prerequisites line (normally a version +number) and check the input file to see if that word can be found. +If not, +.I patch +will ask for confirmation before proceeding. +.PP +The upshot of all this is that you should be able to say, while in a news +interface, the following: +.Sp + | patch -d /usr/src/local/blurfl +.Sp +and patch a file in the blurfl directory directly from the article containing +the patch. +.PP +If the patch file contains more than one patch, +.I patch +will try to apply each of them as if they came from separate patch files. +This means, among other things, that it is assumed that separate patches +will apply to separate files, and that the garbage before each patch will +be examined for interesting things such as filenames and revision level, as +mentioned previously. +You can give switches (and another original file name) for the second and +subsequent patches by separating the corresponding argument lists +by a \*(L'+\*(R'. +The argument list for a second or subsequent patch may not specify a new +patch file, however. +.PP +.I Patch +recognizes the following switches: +.TP 5 +.B \-b +causes the next argument to be interpreted as the backup extension, to be +used in place of \*(L".orig\*(R". +.TP 5 +.B \-c +forces +.I patch +to interpret the patch file as a context diff. +.TP 5 +.B \-d +causes +.I patch +to interpret the next argument as a directory, and cd to it before doing +anything else. +.TP 5 +.B \-D +causes +.I patch +to use the "#ifdef...#endif" construct to mark changes. +The argument following will be used as the differentiating symbol. +Note that, unlike the C compiler, there must be a space between the +.B \-D +and the argument. +.TP 5 +.B \-e +forces +.I patch +to interpret the patch file as an ed script. +.TP 5 +.B \-l +causes the pattern matching to be done loosely, in case the tabs and +spaces have been munged in you input file. +Any sequence of whitespace in the pattern line will match any sequence +in the input file. +Normal characters must still match exactly. +Each line of the context must still match a line in the input file. +.TP 5 +.B \-n +forces +.I patch +to interpret the patch file as a normal diff. +.TP 5 +.B \-N +forces patch to not try and reverse the diffs if it thinks that they may have +been swapped. See the +.B \-R +option below. +.TP 5 +.B \-o +causes the next argument to be interpreted as the output file name. +.TP 5 +.B \-p +causes leading pathnames to be kept. +If the diff is of the file \*(lqb/a.c\*(rq, patch will look for \*(lqa.c\*(rq +in the \*(lqb\*(rq directory, instead of the current directory. +This probably won't work if the diff has rooted pathnames. +.TP 5 +.B \-r +causes the next argument to be interpreted as the reject file name. +.TP 5 +.B \-R +tells +.I patch +that this patch was created with the old and new files swapped. +(Yes, I'm afraid that does happen occasionally, human nature being what it +is.) +.I Patch +will attempt to swap each hunk around before applying it. +Rejects will come out in the swapped format. +The +.B \-R +switch will not work with ed diff scripts because there is too little +information to reconstruct the reverse operation. +.Sp +If the first hunk of a patch fails, +.I patch +will reverse the hunk to see if it can be applied that way unless the +.B \-N +option is supplied. +If it can, the +.B \-R +switch will be set automatically. +If it can't, the patch will continue to be applied normally. +(Note: this method cannot detect a reversed patch if it is a normal diff +and if the first command is an append (i.e. it should have been a delete) +since appends always succeed. +Luckily, most patches add lines rather than delete them, so most reversed +normal diffs will begin with a delete, which will fail, triggering the +heuristic.) +.TP 5 +.B \-s +makes +.I patch +do its work silently, unless an error occurs. +.TP 5 +.B \-x +sets internal debugging flags, and is of interest only to +.I patch +patchers. +.SH ENVIRONMENT +No environment variables are used by +.IR patch . +.SH FILES +/tmp/patch* +.SH SEE ALSO +diff(1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Too many to list here, but generally indicative that +.I patch +couldn't parse your patch file. +.PP +The message \*(L"Hmm...\*(R" indicates that there is unprocessed text in +the patch file and that +.I patch +is attempting to intuit whether there is a patch in that text and, if so, +what kind of patch it is. +.SH CAVEATS +.I Patch +cannot tell if the line numbers are off in an ed script, and can only detect +bad line numbers in a normal diff when it finds a \*(L"change\*(R" command. +Until a suitable interactive interface is added, you should probably do +a context diff in these cases to see if the changes made sense. +Of course, compiling without errors is a pretty good indication that it +worked, but not always. +.PP +.I Patch +usually produces the correct results, even when it has to do a lot of +guessing. +However, the results are guaranteed to be correct only when the patch is +applied to exactly the same version of the file that the patch was +generated from. +.SH BUGS +Could be smarter about partial matches, excessively \&deviant offsets and +swapped code, but that would take an extra pass. +.PP +If code has been duplicated (for instance with #ifdef OLDCODE ... #else ... +#endif), +.I patch +is incapable of patching both versions, and, if it works at all, will likely +patch the wrong one, and tell you it succeeded to boot. +.PP +If you apply a patch you've already applied, +.I patch +will think it is a reversed patch, and un-apply the patch. +This could be construed as a feature. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pax.1 b/static/v10/man1/pax.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..606de37b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pax.1 @@ -0,0 +1,657 @@ +.\" +.\" G. S. Fowler +.\" AT&T Bell Laboratories +.\" +.\" @(#)pax.1 (ulysses!gsf) 01/11/90 +.\" +.TH PAX 1 +.SH NAME +pax \- portable archive interchange +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pax +[ +.B \-rmnov +] [ +.B \-f +.I archive +] [ +.B \-s +.RI / old / new /[gp] +] [ +.I "pattern ..." +] +.LP +.B pax +.B \-w +[ +.B mv +] [ +.B \-b +.I blocking +] [ +.B \-f +.I archive +] [ +.B \-s +.RI / old / new /[gp] +] [ +.B \-x +.I format +] [ +.I "pathname ..." +] +.LP +.B pax +.B \-rw +[ +.B mov +] [ +.B \-s +.RI / old / new /[gp] +] [ +.I "pathname ..." +] +.I directory +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I pax +reads and writes archive files in various formats. +There are four operation modes controlled by combinations of the +.B \-r +and +.B \-w +options. +.PP +.B "pax \-w" +writes the files and directories named by the +.I pathname +arguments to the standard output together with +pathname and status information. +A directory +.I pathname +argument refers to the files and (recursively) subdirectories +of that directory. +If no +.I pathname +arguments are given then the standard input is read to get +a list of pathnames to copy, one pathname per line. +In this case only those pathnames appearing on the standard input are copied. +.PP +.B "pax \-r" +reads files from the standard input that is assumed +to be the result of a previous +.B "pax \-w" +command. +Only files with names that match any of the +.I pattern +arguments are selected. +A +.I pattern +is given in the name-generating notation of +.IR sh (1), +except that the +.B / +character is also matched. +The default if no +.I pattern +is given is +.BR * , +which selects all files. +The selected files are conditionally created and copied relative +to the current directory tree, subject to the options described below. +By default the owner and group of selected files will be that of the +current user, and the permissions and modify times will be the same +as those in the archive. +If the +.B \-r +option is omitted then a table of contents of the selected files is +listed on the standard output. +.PP +.B "pax \-rw" +reads the files and directories named in the +.I pathname +arguments and copies them to the destination +.IR directory . +A directory +.I pathname +argument refers to the files and (recursively) subdirectories +of that directory. +If no +.I pathname +arguments are given then the standard input is read to get +a list of pathnames to copy, one pathname per line. +In this case only those pathnames appearing on the standard input are copied. +.I directory +must exist before the copy. +.PP +The standard archive formats are automatically detected on input. +The default output archive format is implementation defined, +but may be overridden by the +.B \-x +option described below. +.I pax +archives may be concatenated to combine multiple volumes on a single +tape or file. +This is accomplished by forcing any format prescribed pad data to be null bytes. +Hard links are not maintained between volumes, and +delta and base archives cannot be multi-volume. +.PP +A single archive may span many files/devices. +The second and subsequent file names are prompted for on the terminal input. +The response may be: +.TP +.BI ! command +Execute +.I command +via +.IR system (3) +and prompt again for file name. +.TP +.B EOF +Exit without further processing. +.TP +.B CR +An empty input line retains the previous file name. +.TP +.I pathname +The file name for the next archive part. +.SS "Basic Options" +These options support basic archive operations. +.TP +.BI b " blocking" +Set the output blocking size. +If no suffix (or a +.B c +suffix) is specified then +.I blocking +is in 1 character units. +A +.B b +suffix multiplies +.I blocking +by 512 (1 block), a +.B k +suffix multiplies +.I blocking +by 1024 (1 kilobyte) and an +.B m +suffix multiplies +.I blocking +by 1048576 (1 megabyte). +.I blocking +is automatically determined on input and is ignored for +.BR \-rw . +The default +.I blocking +is +.B 10k +for block and character special archive files and +implementation defined otherwise. +The minimum +.I blocking +is +.BR 1c . +.TP +.BI f " archive" +.I archive +is the pathname of the input or output archive, overriding the default +standard input for +.B \-r +and +.B \-rw +or standard output for +.BR \-w . +.TP +.B m +File modification times are not retained. +.TP +.B n +For +.B \-r +the pattern arguments are treated as ordinary file names. +Only the first occurrence of each of these files in the +input archive is read. +.I pax +exits with zero exit status after all files in the list have been read. +If one or more files in the list is not found, +.I pax +writes a message to standard error for each of these files +and exits with a non-zero exit status. +The file names are compared before any of the +.B \-i, +.B \-s, +or +.B \-y +options are applied. +.TP +.B o +Restore file ownership as specified in the archive. +The current user must have appropriate privileges. +.TP +\fBs\fP /\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/[\fIglpu\fP] +File names and symbolic link text are mapped according +to the +.IR ed (1) +style substitution expression. +Any non-null character may be used as a delimiter +.RB ( / +shown here). +Multiple +.B \-s +expressions may be specified; the expressions are applied from left to right, +terminating with the first successful substitution. +A trailing +.B l +converts the matched string to lower case. +A trailing +.B p +causes successful mappings to be listed on the standard error. +A trailing +.B u +converts the matched string to upper case. +File names that substitute to the null string are ignored on +both input and output. +The +.B \-P +option inhibits symbolic link text substitution. +.TP +.B v +Produces a verbose table of contents listing on the standard output when both +.B \-r +and +.B \-w +are omitted. +Otherwise the file names are listed on the standard error +as they are encountered. +.TP +.BI x " format" +Specifies the output archive +.IR format . +If specified with +.B \-rw +then the standard input is treated as an archive that is converted to a +.I format +archive on the standard output. +The input format, which must be one of the following, +is automatically determined. +The default output format, named by +.BR \- , +is +.BR cpio . +The formats are: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B asc +The +.B s5r4 +extended +.IR cpio (5) +character format. +.TP +.B ansi +ANSI standard label tape format. +Only regular files with simple pathnames are archived. +Valid only for blocked devices. +.TP +.B asc +The +.B s5r4 +extended +.IR cpio (5) +character format. +.TP +.B aschk +The +.B s5r4 +extended +.IR cpio (5) +character format with header checksum. +This format is misnamed +.B crc +in the +.B s5r4 +documentation. +.TP +.B binary +The +.IR cpio (5) +binary format with symbolic links. +This format is obsolete and should not be used on output. +.TP +.B cpio +The +.IR cpio (5) +character format with symbolic links. +This is the default output format. +.TP +.B ibmar +EBCDIC standard label tape format. +Only regular files with simple pathnames are archived. +Valid only for tape devices. +.TP +.B posix +The IEEE 1003.1b-1990 interchange format, partially compatible with +the X3.27 standard labeled tape format. +.TP +.B portarch +The svr2 portable object library format. +Valid only on input. +.TP +.B randarch +The BSD ranlib object library format. +Valid only on input. +.TP +.B tar +The +.IR tar (5) +format with symbolic links. +.TP +.B ustar +The POSIX IEEE Std 1003.1-1988 tar format. +.TP +.B vmsbackup +ANSI standard label VMS backup savset tape format. +Valid only for input tape devices. +.PD +.RE +.SS "Compatibility Options" +These options provide functional compatibility with the old +.IR cpio (1) +and +.IR tar (1) +commands. +.TP +.B a +For +.B \-w +append files to the end of the archive. +.TP +.B c +Complement the match sense of the +.I pattern +arguments. +.TP +.B d +Intermediate directories not explicitly listed in the archive +are not created. +.TP +.B i +Interactively +.I rename +files. +A file is skipped if a null line is entered and +.I pax +exits if +.B EOF +is encountered. +.TP +.B l +For +.BR \-rw , +files are linked rather than copied when possible. +.TP +.B p +Preserve the access times of input files after they have been copied. +.TP +.BI t " device" +.I device +is an identifier that names the input or output archive device, +overriding the default standard input for +.B \-r +or standard output for +.BR \-w . +Tape devices may be specified as +.IR drive [ density\|rewind ] +where +.I drive +is a drive number in the range [0\-7], +.I density +is one of +.BR l , +.B m +and +.B h +for +.B low +(800 bpi), +.B medium +(1600 bpi \- default) +and +.B high +(6250 bpi) +tape densities and +.I rewind +is +.B n +to inhibit rewinding of the tape device when it is closed. +Other forms for +.I device +are implementation defined. +.TP +.B u +Copy each file only if it is newer than a pre-existing file with the same name. +This option implies +.BR \-a . +.TP +.B y +Interactively prompt for the disposition of each file. +.B EOF +or an input line starting with +.B q +causes +.I pax +to exit. +Otherwise an input line starting with anything other than +.B y +causes the file to be ignored. +.SS "Extended Options" +These options provide fine archive control, including delta archive operations. +.TP +.BI e " filter" +Run the +.I filter +command on each file to be output. +The current name of the file to be output is appended to the filter command +string before the command is executed by the shell. +.TP +.B h +Inhibit archive heading and summmary information messages to stderr. +.TP +.B k +For +.B \-r +continue processing the archive after encountering an error by attempting +to locate the next valid entry. +This is useful for archives stored on unreliable media. +.TP +.BI z " base" +Specifies the delta base archive +.I base +that is assumed to be the result of a previous +.B "pax \-w" +command. +For +.B \-w +the input files are compared with the files in +.I base +and file delta information is placed in the output archive +using the delta algorithm. +For +.B \-r +the delta information in the input archive is used to update the +output files with respect to the files in +.IR base . +For +.B \-rw +the delta information in the archive on the standard input is used +to generate an archive on the standard output whose entries are updated +with respect to the files in +.IR base . +If +.I base +is +.B \- +or an empty file then the input files are simply compressed. +.B "\-z -" +must also be specified to produce a compressed archive for +.BR \-rw . +.TP +.BI B " count" +Sets the maximum archive part output character count. +.I pax +prompts for the next archive part file name. +Valid only with +.BR \-w . +.TP +.B C +Archive entries smaller than +.BI \-B " maxblocks" +must be contained within a single part. +Valid only with +.BR \-B . +.TP +.B L +Copy a logical view of the input files. +Symbolic links are followed, causing the pointed to files to be copied +rather than the symbolic link information. +This is the default. +.TP +.BI M " message" +Set the +.I "end of medium" +prompt to +.IR message . +This message is used to prompt interactively for the next tape +reel or cartridge in cases where the tape runs out before +all files have been copied. +.I message +may contain one +.IR printf (3) +style integer format specification that is replaced with the +next part number. +.TP +.B P +Copy a physical view of the input files. +Causes symbolic link information to be copied as opposed to the +default (logical view) action of following symbolic links +and copying the pointed to files. +.TP +\fBR\fP \fIoption\fP[\fIvalue\fP][,\fIoption\fP[\fIvalue\fP]...] +Set record oriented format options. +Multiple options may be concatenated using +.BR , . +Some options may be fixed for some formats. +The options are: +.RS +.PD 0 +.TP +.B c +Record data is subject to character set conversions. +.TP +.BI f format +Set the output record format to +.IR format . +The supported record formats are: +.RS +.TP +.B D +Variable length with 4 byte record header. +The record size default is 512. +.TP +.B F +Fixed length with no record header. +The record size default is 128. +.TP +.B S +Spanned variable length with 4 byte record header. +The record size default is 0 (no limit). +.TP +.B U +Variable length with no record header. +The output block size matches the size of each output record. +The record size default is 512. +.TP +.B V +Spanned variable length with binary 4 byte record header. +The record size default is 0 (no limit). +The +.B D +format is preferred. +.PD +.RE +.TP +.BI m pattern +Only those files with input record format matching +.I pattern +are processed. +.TP +.B p +Partial output blocks are padded to the full blocksize. +.TP +.BI s size +Set the output record size to +.IR size . +.I size +should divide the output blocking. +.TP +.BI v label +Set the output volume label to +.IR label . +Some formats may truncate and/or case-convert +.IR label . +.PD +.RE +.TP +.B S +Similar to +.B \-l +except that symbolic links are created. +.TP +.BI U " id" +Set file ownership to the default of the user named +.IR id . +Valid only for the super-user. +.TP +.B V +Output a `.' as each file is encountered. +This overrides the +.B \-v +option. +.TP +.B X +Do not cross mount points when searching for files to output. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +The number of files, blocks, and optionally the number of volumes and +media parts are listed on the standard error. +For +.B \-v +the input archive formats are also listed on the standard error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.B "pax \-w \-t 1m ." +Copies the contents of the current directory to tape drive 1, medium density. +.TP +.PD 0 +.BI mkdir " newdir" +.TP +.BI cd " olddir" +.TP +.BI "pax \-rw ." " newdir" +.PD +Copies the +.I olddir +directory hierarchy to +.IR newdir . +.SH "SEE ALSO" +ar(1), cpio(1), find(1), ksh(1), tar(1), tw(1), libdelta(3), cpio(5), tar(5) +.SH BUGS +Special privileges may be required to copy special files. +.br +Each archive format has a hard upper limit on member pathname sizes. +.br +Device, user-id and group-id numbers larger than 65535 cause additional +header records to be output. +These records are ignored by old versions of +.IR cpio (1) +and +.IR tar (1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pc.1 b/static/v10/man1/pc.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26b50792 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pc.1 @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ +.TH PC 1 +.CT 1 prog_other +.SH NAME +pc \- pascal language compiler +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pc +[ +.I option +] +[ +.B \-i +.I name ... +] +.I name ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pc +compiles the Pascal source file +.IB name .p +into an executable file called, by default, +.IR a.out . +.PP +Multiple +.B .p +files are compiled into object files suffixed +.B .o +in place of +.BR .p . +Object files may be combined by +.IR ld (1) +into an executable +.I a.out +file. +Exactly one object file must supply a +.B program +statement. +The other files contain +declarations which logically nest within the program. +Objects shared between separately compiled files +must be declared in +.BR include d +header files, whose names must end with +.BR .h . +An +.B external +directive, similar to +.BR forward , +declares +.BR function s +and +.BR procedure s +in +.B .h +files. +.PP +These options have the same meaning as in +.IR cc (1): +.BR "-c -g -w -p -O -S -o" . +The following options are peculiar to +.IR pc . +.TP +.B -C +Compile code to perform runtime checks, +verify +.B assert +statements, +and initialize variables to zero as in +.IR pascal (1). +.PD 0 +.TP +.B -b +Block buffer the file +.I output. +.TP +.B -i +Produce a listing for +the specified procedures, functions and +.B include +files. +.TP +.B -l +Make a program listing during translation. +.TP +.B -s +Accept standard Pascal only; +non-standard constructs cause warning diagnostics. +.TP +.B -z +Allow execution profiling with +.IR pxp (A) +by generating statement counters, and arranging for the +creation of the profile data file +.I pmon.out +when the resulting object is executed. +.PD +.PP +Other arguments +are taken +to be loader option arguments, +perhaps libraries of +.IR pc -compatible +routines; see +.IR ld (1). +Certain options can also be controlled in comments within the program +as described in the +.I "Berkeley Pascal User's Manual." +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/pc2.0strings +.TP +.B file.p +pascal source files +.TP +.B /usr/lib/pc0 +compiler +.TP +.B /lib/f1 +code generator +.TP +.B /usr/lib/pc2 +runtime integrator (inline expander) +.TP +.B /lib/c2 +peephole optimizer +.TP +.B /usr/lib/pc3 +separate compilation consistency checker +.TP +.B /usr/lib/pc2.0strings +text of the error messages +.TP +.B /usr/lib/how_pc +basic usage explanation +.TP +.B /usr/lib/libpc.a +intrinsic functions and I/O library +.TP +.B /usr/lib/libm.a +math library +.TP +.B /lib/libc.a +standard library, see +.IR intro (3) +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR pascal (1), +.IR pxp (A) , +.IR cc (1), +.IR ld (1), +.IR adb (1), +.IR sdb (1), +.IR prof (1) +.br +W. N. Joy, Susan L. Graham, C. B. Haley, +`Berkeley Pascal User's Manual', in +Unix Programmer's Manual, Seventh Edition, Virtual VAX-11 Version, +1980, Vol 2C +(Berkeley). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +See +.IR pascal (1) +for an explanation of the error message format. +Internal errors cause messages containing the word `SNARK'. +.SH BUGS +The keyword +.B packed +is recognized but has no effect. +.br +The binder is not as strict as it might be. +.br +The +.B -z +flag doesn't work for separately compiled files. +.br +Because +.B -s +is used by +.I pc, +it can't be passed to the loader. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 b/static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8eab605 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pcopy.1 @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +.TH PCOPY 1 +.SH NAME +pcopy \- paranoid file copy +.SH SYNOPSIS +[ +.B priv +] +.B pcopy +[ +.I input output +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pcopy +copies an input file to an output file preserving, +if possible, file ownership, dates, and label. +The copying is performed in +such a way as to assure faithfulness +even in the presence of interfering processes. +.PP +Privilege, obtained via +.IR priv (1), +is required to reproduce privileged files. +The user must be able to write the output file, +and be able to read and write files with the label +of the input file. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR cp (1), +.IR pex (4) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pfe.1 b/static/v10/man1/pfe.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb139834 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pfe.1 @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +.th PFE I 11/1/73 +.sh NAME +pfe \*- print floating exception +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd pfe +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Pfe +will examine the floating point exception register and +print a diagnostic for the last +floating point exception. +.sh "SEE ALSO" +signal(II) +.sh BUGS +Since there is but one floating point +exception register and it cannot be +saved and restored by the system, +the floating exception +that is printed is the one that occured system wide. +Floating exceptions are therefore volatile. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pic.1 b/static/v10/man1/pic.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..516bc370 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pic.1 @@ -0,0 +1,341 @@ +.de PS \" start picture +. \" $1 is height, $2 is width, both in inches +.if \\$1>0 .sp .35 +.ie \\$1>0 .nr $1 \\$1 +.el .nr $1 0 +.in (\\n(.lu-\\$2)/2u +.ne \\$1 +.. +.de PE \" end of picture +.in +.if \\n($1>0 .sp .65 +.. +.TH PIC 1 +.CT 1 writing_troff graphics +.SH NAME +pic, tpic \(mi troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pic +[ +.I files +] +.PP +.B tpic +[ +.I files +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pic +is a +.IR troff (1) +preprocessor for drawing figures on a typesetter. +.I Pic +code is contained between +.B .PS +and +.B .PE +lines: +.IP +.EX +\&.PS \f2optional-width\fP \f2optional-height\fP +\f2element-list\fP +\&.PE +.EE +If +.IR optional-width +is present, the picture is made that many inches wide, +regardless of any dimensions used internally. +The height is scaled in the same proportion unless +.IR optional-height +is present. +If +.B .PF +is used instead of +.BR .PE , +the typesetting position after printing is restored to what it was +upon entry. +.PP +A line of the form +.IP +.BI .PS < file +causes +.I pic +to treat the the named file as if it stood in place of the +.B .PS +line. +.PP +An +.IR element-list +is a list of elements: +.EX + \f2primitive attribute-list\fP + \f2placename\fP : \f2element\fP + \f2placename\fP : \f2position\fP + \f2var\fP = \f2expr\fP + \f2direction\fP + { \f2element-list\fP } + [ \f2element-list\fP ] + for \f2var\fP = \f2expr\fP to \f2expr\fP by \f2expr\fP do { \f2anything\fP } + if \f2expr\fP then { \f2anything\fP } else { \f2anything\fP } + copy \f2file,\fP copy thru \f2macro,\fP copy \f2file\fP thru \fPmacro\fP + sh { \f2commandline\fP } + print \f2expr\fP + reset \f2optional var-list\fP + \f2troff-command\fP +.EE +.PP +Elements are separated by newlines or semicolons; +a long element may be continued by ending the line with a backslash. +Comments are introduced by a +.BI # +and terminated by a newline. +Variable names begin with a lower case letter; +place names begin with upper case. +Place and variable names retain their values +from one picture to the next. +.PP +After each primitive +the current position moves in the current direction +.RB ( up , down , +.BR left , right +(default)) by the size of the primitive. +The current position and direction are saved upon entry +to a +.BR { ... } +block and restored upon exit. +Elements within a block enclosed in +.BR [ ... ] +are treated as a unit; +the dimensions are determined by the extreme points +of the contained objects. +Names, variables, and direction of motion within a block are local to that block. +.PP +.IR troff-command +is any line that begins with a period. +Such a line is assumed to make sense in the context where it appears; +generally, this means only size and font changes. +Changes to vertical spacing will produce broken pictures. +.PP +The +.I primitive +objects are: +.br +.EX + box circle ellipse arc line arrow spline move \f2text-list\fP +.EE +.L arrow +is a synonym for +.LR "line ->" . +.PP +An +.IR attribute-list +is a sequence of zero or more attributes; +each attribute consists of a keyword, perhaps followed by a value. +.EX +.ta .5i 2.5i + h(eigh)t \f2expr\fP wid(th) \f2expr\fP + rad(ius) \f2expr\fP diam(eter) \f2expr\fP + up \f2opt-expr\fP down \f2opt-expr\fP + right \f2opt-expr\fP left \f2opt-expr\fP + from \f2position\fP to \f2position\fP + at \f2position\fP with \f2corner\fP + by \f2expr, expr\fP then + dotted \f2opt-expr\fP dashed \f2opt-expr\fP + chop \f2opt-expr\fP -> <- <-> + invis same + \f2text-list\fP \f2expr\fP +.EE +Missing attributes and values are filled in from defaults. +Not all attributes make sense for all primitives; +irrelevant ones are silently ignored. +The attribute +.L at +causes the geometrical center to be put at the specified place; +.L with +causes the position on the object to be put at the specified place. +For lines, splines and arcs, +.L height +and +.L width +refer to arrowhead size. +A bare +.I expr +implies motion in the current direction. +.PP +Text is normally an attribute of some primitive; +by default it is placed at the geometrical center of the object. +Stand-alone text is also permitted. +A text list +is a list of text items: +.EX +\f2 text-item\fP: + "..." \f2positioning ...\fP + sprintf("\f2format\fP", \f2expr\fP, \f2...\fP) \f2positioning ...\fP +\f2 positioning\fP: + center ljust rjust above below +.EE +If there are multiple text items for some primitive, +they are arranged vertically and centered except as qualified. +Positioning requests apply to each item independently. +Text items may contain in-line +.I troff +commands for size and font changes, local motions, etc., +but make sure that these are balanced +so that the entering state is restored before exiting. +.PP +A position is ultimately an +.I x,y +coordinate pair, but it may be specified in other ways. +.EX +\f2 position\fP: + \f2expr, expr\fP + \f2place\fP \(+- \f2expr, expr\fP + \f2place\fP \(+- ( \f2expr, expr\fP ) + ( \f2position\fP,\f2 position\fP ) \f2x\fP\fR from one, \f2y\fP\fR the other\fP + \f2expr\fP [\f2of the way\fP] between \f2position\fP and \f2position\fP + \f2expr\fP < \f2position\fP , \f2position\fP > + ( \f2position\fP ) +.EE +.PP +.EX +\f2 place\fP: + \f2placename\fP \f2optional-corner\fP + \f2corner\fP of \f2placename\fP + \f2nth\fP \f2primitive\fP \f2optional-corner\fP + \f2corner\fP of \f2nth\fP \f2primitive\fP + Here +.EE +An +.IR optional-corner +is one of the eight compass points +or the center or the start or end of a primitive. +.EX +\f2 optional-corner\fP: + .n .e .w .s .ne .se .nw .sw .c .start .end +\f2 corner\fP: + top bot left right start end +.EE +Each object in a picture has an ordinal number; +.IR nth +refers to this. +.EX +\f2 nth\fP: + \f2n\fPth\f2, n\fPth last +.EE +.PP +The built-in variables and their default values are: +.EX +.ta .5i 2.5i + boxwid = 0.75 boxht = 0.5 + circlerad = 0.25 arcrad = 0.25 + ellipsewid = 0.75 ellipseht = 0.5 + linewid = 0.5 lineht = 0.5 + movewid = 0.5 moveht = 0.5 + textwid = 0 textht = 0 + arrowwid = 0.05 arrowht = 0.1 + dashwid = 0.1 arrowhead = 2 + scale = 1 +.EE +These may be changed at any time, +and the new values remain in force from picture to picture until changed again +or reset by a +.L reset +statement. +Variables changed within +.B [ +and +.B ] +revert to their previous value upon exit from the block. +Dimensions are divided by +.B scale +during output. +.PP +Expressions in +.I pic +are evaluated in floating point. +All numbers representing dimensions are taken to be in inches. +.EX +\f2 expr\fP: + \f2expr\fP \f2op\fP \f2expr\fP + - \f2expr\fP + ! \f2expr\fP + ( \f2expr\fP ) + variable + number + \f2place\fP .x \f2place\fP .y \f2place\fP .ht \f2place\fP .wid \f2place\fP .rad + sin(\f2expr\fP) cos(\f2expr\fP) atan2(\f2expr,expr\fP) log(\f2expr\fP) exp(\f2expr\fP) + sqrt(\f2expr\fP) max(\f2expr,expr\fP) min(\f2expr,expr\fP) int(\f2expr\fP) rand() +\f2 op\fP: + + - * / % < <= > >= == != && || +.EE +.PP +The +.B define +and +.B undef +statements are not part of the grammar. +.EX + define \f2name\fP { \f2replacement text\fP } + undef \f2name\fP +.EE +Occurrences of +.BR $1 , +.BR $2 , +etc., +in the replacement text +will be replaced by the corresponding arguments if +.I name +is invoked as +.EX + \f2name\fP(\f2arg1\fP, \f2arg2\fP, ...) +.EE +Non-existent arguments are replaced by null strings. +Replacement text +may contain newlines. +The +.B undef +statement removes the definition of a macro. +.PP +.I Tpic +is a +.IR tex (1) +preprocessor that accepts +.IR pic +language. +It produces Tex commands that define a box called +.BR \egraph , +which contains the picture. +The box may be output this way: +.IP +.L +\ecenterline{\ebox\egraph} +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above +move +A: ellipse + circle rad .1 with .w at A.e + circle rad .05 at 0.5 + arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5 +.EE +.PP +.PS +arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above +move +A: ellipse + circle rad .1 with .w at A.e + circle rad .05 at 0.5 + arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5 +.PE +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR cip (9.1), +.IR ideal (1), +.IR ped (9.1), +.IR grap (1), +.IR dag (1), +.IR doctype (1), +.IR troff (1) +.br +B. W. Kernighan, +`PIC\(ema Graphics Language for Typesetting', +this manual, Volume 2 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/picasso.1 b/static/v10/man1/picasso.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..41684f16 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/picasso.1 @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ +.if n .pH g1.picasso @(#)picasso 1.0 of 1/2/90 +.TH PICASSO 1 +.SH NAME +picasso \- a line drawing program +.SH SYNOPSIS +\f3picasso [ \-b\f2size\fP \-F\f2path\fP \-I\f2path\fP \-l\f2n\fP \-M\f2n\fP \-m\f2margin\fP \-p\f2m\fPx\f2n\fP \-t \-x ] [ \- ] [ \f2file_name\^(s)\fP ] +.ft 1 +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B Picasso +is a +processor for a PIC-like drawing language that produces PostScript output. +By default, this output is scaled to fit an 8 by 10 inch print area, and +centered on the page. +.PP +.B \-b +.IR size +specifies a buffer of \f2size\f1 objects accumulated before translation +into PostScript. +By default, an entire picture is buffered; +on machines with small memories, a buffer of a few thousand objects +can prevent thrashing when processing a very large picture. +This option is for exceptional cases and is not often needed. +.PP +.B \-I +.IR path +overrides the standard path for searching for the PostScript prologue +and font descriptions (not needed in normal use). +.PP +.B \-F +.IR path +overrides the standard path for font width tables. +The default is to use the \f(CWtroff\fP tables. +.PP +.B \-l +.IR n +processes layer \f2n\f1 only, as specified by \f(CWcurlayer=\f2n\fP. +.PP +.B \-M +.IR n +magnifies the output image by \f2n\f1 (shrinks if 0 < \f2n\fP < 1). +.PP +.B \-p +.IR m\f3x\fPn +.ft 1 +specifies output device size in inches (8.5x11 default). +.PP +.B \-t +packages the PostScript with surrounding troff input so that the +output file may be passed down a pipeline to +.BR troff (1). +The Drechsler/Wilks +.B mpictures +macro package can be used with +.B troff +to insert the pictures appropriately within the document. +Without the flag +.B picasso +outputs \fIonly\fR PostScript, dropping any text outside the markers +(.PS and .PE) delimiting each picture. +.PP +.B \-m +.IR margin +specifies an empty border, in printer's points, that +.B picasso +will place around each picture. +This may be useful at times to prevent too tight clipping against +adjacent text or the edge of the paper. +By default no margin is supplied; +to cause a 1/8" (9 point) margin, for example, specify +.BR \-m9 . +.PP +.B \-x +suppresses the default scaling and centering. +.PP +The +.B picasso +picture description language is object oriented, the basic objects being +.BR arrow , +.BR arc , +.BR box , +.BR circle , +.BR ellipse , +.BR line , +.BR sector , +.BR spline , +and (quoted) text. +These can be combined, hierarchically, into +.BR blocks . +Primitive objects can be drawn with +.BR solid , +.BR dashed , +.BR dotted , +or +.B invisible +edges. +These edges may be of varying +.B weight +(thickness) +and of any shade of gray (from black = 0 to white = 1) or color. +The predefined colors are +.BR black , +.BR white , +.BR red , +.BR green , +.BR blue , +.BR cyan , +.BR magenta , +and +.BR yellow . +.PP +Objects may be named and referred to by name or by anonymous +references such as +1st box, 4th object, or 2nd last circle. +Object names require an initial upper case letter; +names beginning with lower case or an underscore are numeric variables. +There are a number of predefined variables such as +.BR circlerad , +.BR boxwid , +.BR linecolor . +.B Picasso +provides a limited set of programming language constructs +(loops, if statements, macros, some arithmetic) +for combining simple objects into relatively complex pictures. +.PP +By default, objects are placed on the page adjacent to each other +and from left to right. +The default direction may be changed, and any object can be placed +.B at +a specific postion, +given either in absolute coordinates or by reference to other objects and +points of interest. +Any object has a +.BR top , +.BR bottom , +.BR left , +and +.B right +point; +these points may also be refered to directionally as +.BR north , +.BR south , +.BR west , +and +.B east +(or +.BR n , +.BR s , +.BR w , +and +.BR e .) +The ``corner'' points may also be specified, +.IR e.g. , +.B northwest +or +.BR nw. +Lines have +.B start +and +.B end +points; +you may also refer to +.BR 1st , +.BR 2nd ... +.B nth +points along a line. +Boxes, circles, and ellipses have eight predefined points corresponding +to the directional references mentioned above, the first point being in +the eastern direction and the 8th point towards the southeast. +For any object, the ``corner'' points really lie on the corners of a box +surrounding the object while the ``counted'' points lie on the object itself. +This distinction is normally relevant only for circles and ellipses, but +since an object can be rotated or otherwise transformed it occasionally +has significance for other objects as well. +.SH EXAMPLE +The following is a simple no-smoking sign described in the +.B picasso +language. + +.in +.5i +.ft CW +.nf + .PS + d = 0.5 + [ box ht d wid 3.5 weight d/20 + box ht d wid d/2 filled 0.5 noedge + spline weight 0.2 edge .75 right d then up d \\ + then right d then up d + ] + linecolor = red; lineweight = 0.375 + circle rad 3 at last block + line from last circle .4th to last circle .8th + .PE +.in -.5i +.fi +.ft R + +If this is used in a +.B troff +document and processed through +.B picasso +with the +.B -t +flag, the .PS marking the start of the picture can specify the size and +placement of the picture at that point in your document. +For example, to place the no smoking sign centered on the page in a 3 +inch square area, flag the start of the picture with\f(CW .PS 3 3 c\fR. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.BR troff (1), +.BR troff (5) +.SH REFERENCE +R. L. Drechsler and A. R. Wilks, +.I PostScript pictures in troff documents. +.br +B. W. Kernighan, +.I PIC \(em A Crude Graphics Language for Typesetting +.br +N-P. Nelson, M. L. Siemon, +.I +Picasso 1.0, An OPEN LOOK Drawing Program +.ft P +.\" @(#)picasso.1 1.0 of 1/4/84 +.SH BUGS +.B Picasso +is not completely compatible with +.BR pic (1). +Besides having a number of new keywords and predefined variable names, +.B picasso +also centers pictures on a page rather than placing them at upper left. +.P +The interactive version is unable to generate many elements +of the language, nor will it preserve such elements (e.g., loops) +if they are read in then written out. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pico.1 b/static/v10/man1/pico.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a1ff018f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pico.1 @@ -0,0 +1,273 @@ +.TH PICO 1 +.CT 1 editor graphics +.SH NAME +pico \(mi graphics editor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pico +[ +.B -mfto +] +[ +.B -wN -hN +] +[ +.I files +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pico +is an interactive editor for grey-scale and color images. +Editing operations are expressed in a C-like style. +The options are +.TP \w'\f5slower\ 'u +.BI -m n +Display on a Metheus frame buffer, +.BI /dev/om n. +A missing +.I n +is taken to be 0. +.TP +.B -f +Display on an Itoh frame buffer, +.BR /dev/iti0 . +.TP +.B -t +Show parse trees for expressions; toggled by the interactive command +.LR tree . +.TP +.B -o +Turn off the optimizer; toggled by +.LR optim . +.PP +Files are referred to in expressions as +.BI $ n, +where +.I n +is the basename or an integer, +see +.B f +below. +Otherwise file names are given as strings in double quotes, +which may be elided from names that do not contain +.LR / . +.LP +In general, the result of the previous edit +operation is available under the name +.LR old . +The destination +of the current operation is called +.LR new . +.LP +.I Pico +handles images with coordinates (0,0) in the upper left hand corner +and +.RB ( X , Y ) +in the lower right. +Brightnesses range from 0 (black) to +.BR Z +(white, +.BR Z =255). +The quantities +.BR X , Y , Z +may be used in expressions and set by options: +.TP \w'\f5slower\ 'u +.BI -w " n +Set the width +.B X +of the work area to +.I n +pixels, default 511. +.TP +.BI -h " n +Set the height +.BR Y , +default 511. +.PP +.LP +.I Pico +reads commands from the standard input: +.TP +.B help +Give a synopsis of commands and functions. +.TP +.BI a " file +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI a " x y w d file" +Attach a new file. +Optional parameters +.I x +and +.I y +give the origin of a subrectangle in the work buffer; +.I w +and +.I d +define width and depth of the image as stored in the file. +.TP +.BI d " file" +.PD0 +.TP +.BI "d $" n +Delete (close) the file. +.PD +.TP +.BI h " file" +Read header information from the file. +.TP +.BI r " file" +Read commands from +.I file +as if they were typed on the terminal. +Can not be done recursively. +.TP +.BI w " file +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI "w - " file +Write the file, restricted to the current window +(see below). +Use +.I pico +format by default. +With a minus flag, +write a headerless image +(red channel only, if picture is colored); see also +.IR picfile (5). +.TP +.B nocolor +.PD0 +.TP +.B color +Set the number of channels updated in the work buffer to 1 +(black and white) or 3 (red, green, blue). +.PD +.TP +.BI window " x y w d" +Restrict the work area to a portion of the +work buffer with the upper left corner at +.RI ( x,y ), +and the lower right at +.RI ( x+w, y+d ). +.TP +.BI get " file" +.br +.ns +.TP +.BI "get $" n +The picture file is (re)opened and read into the work area. +.TP +.B f +Show names, sizes, and file numbers of open files. +.TP +.B faster +.br +.ns +.TP +.B slower +In slow display the screen is updated once per pixel computed; +in fast display (default), once per line of pixels. +.TP +.BI show " name" +Show symbol table information, such as the current value of variables. +If +.I name +is omitted, the whole symbol table is shown. +.TP +.B functions +Print information on all user defined and builtin functions. +.TP +.BI def " name \fB(\fI args \fB) {\fI program \fB}" +Define a function, with optional arguments. +Variables are declared in these styles: +.PD0 +.IP +.EX +int var; +global int var; +array var[N]; +global array var[N]; +.EE +.PD +.TP +.BI x " expr" +Execute the expression in a default loop over all pixels in the +current window. +.TP +.BI "x {" program " }" +Execute the +.I program. +The program must define its own control flow. +.TP +.B q +Quit. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L "pico -w1280 -h1024 -m5" +Get a work buffer that exactly fills a Metheus screen. +.TP +.L +a "/tmp/images/rob" +Make a file accessible. +It will be known henceforth as +.LR $rob . +.PP +.EX +.L a 1280 0 3072 512 junk +.L get $junk +.EE +.PD0 +.IP +Direct attention to a 512\(mu512 subrectangle in the middle +of a 3072\(mu512 image stored in a file named junk, +and read it into the workspace. +.LP +.EX +x new = Z - old +x new[x,y] = Z - old[x,y] +x {for(x=0; x<=X; x++) for(y=0; y<=Y; y++) new[x,y] = Z-old[x,y];} +.EE +.PD0 +.IP +Three ways to make a negative image. +Note the defaults on control flow +and array indexing. +.PD +.LP +.EX +window 0 0 256 256 +x new = $1[xclamp(x*2), yclamp(y*2)] +.EE +.PD0 +.IP +Scale a 512\(mu512 image to one quarter of the screen. +The built-in functions +.L xclamp +and +.L yclamp +guard against indexing out of range. +.PD +.LP +.EX +x { printf("current value of %s[%d]:\et%d\en", "histo", 128, hist[128]); } +.EE +.PD0 +.IP +Turn off the default control flow (curly braces) and use the +builtin function printf to check the value of an array element. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +.IR bcp (1), +.IR imscan (1), +.IR flicks (9.1), +.IR rebecca (9.1), +.IR picfile (5), +.IR flickfile (9.5) +.br +G. J. Holzmann, +`PICO Tutorial', +this manual, Volume 2 +.br +G. J. Holzmann, +.I Beyond Photography\(emthe Digital Darkroom, +Prentice-Hall, 1988 diff --git a/static/v10/man1/picpack.1 b/static/v10/man1/picpack.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee5a428f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/picpack.1 @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +.TH PICPACK 1 +.SH NAME +.B picpack +\- PostScript picture packing preprocessor +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpicpack\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B picpack +copies +.I files +to stdout, expanding picture inclusion requests +(marked by the +.MW .BP +or +.MW .PI +macros) into an in-line +format that can be passed through +.B troff +and handled by +.BR dpost . +If no +.I files +are specified +or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.I files +standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-k list +.I list +is a comma- or space-separated string of words used to locate +picture inclusion requests. +The start of every line in the input +.I files +is compared with each word in +.I list . +If there is a match, the second string on the line is +taken as the pathname of a picture file that is added +to the output file. +The default +.I list +is +.RM `` ".BP .PI ''. +.TP +.OP \-q +Suppress ``missing picture file'' error messages. +.PP +.B picpack +is a trivial preprocessor that, in a sense, duplicates some of the +picture inclusion capabilities already available in +.BR dpost . +.B picpack +should not be used if your formatting command line includes +a call to +.BR dpost . +Its only purpose is to combine picture files with text in a single +file that can be passed through +.B troff +and unpacked, at some later time, by +.BR dpost . +The original picture inclusion mechanism, with files are pulled in by +.BR dpost , +is the preferred approach. +.SH EXAMPLES +A typical application might be in a distributed printing environment +where everything up to +.B troff +is run by the user and everything after +.B troff +is handled by a spooling daemon (perhaps +.BR lp ). +In that case the command line would be, +.EX +pic \f2file\fP | tbl | eqn | picpack | troff -mm -Tpost | lp +.EE +A poor example, although one that should still work, would be, +.EX +pic \f2file\fP | tbl | eqn | picpack | troff -mm -Tpost | dpost >\f2file\fP.ps +.EE +In this case picture inclusion requests could (and should) be handled by +.BR dpost . +Running +.B picpack +is not needed or even recommended. +It should be dropped from any pipeline that includes a call to +.BR dpost . +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.SH WARNINGS +.PP +Combining pictures and text using the capabilities available in +.B dpost +is the recommended approach and is always guaranteed to be more +efficient than +.BR picpack . +Running +.B picpack +and +.B dpost +in the same pipeline makes little sense. +.PP +Using +.B picpack +will likely result in files that can no longer be reliably passed +through other important +.B troff +postprocessors like +.BR proof . +At present +.B picpack +is only guaranteed to work with +.BR dpost . +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR troff (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pl.1 b/static/v10/man1/pl.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..85794975 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pl.1 @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +.TH PL 1 SHARE +.SH NAME +pl \- print share information for designated users +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pl +[-a[g]] [-[n][v]] [-pfilename] [-u uid[-uid] ...] [login-name ...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pl +prints the share information +for the given list of login names. +The optional flags affect the default behaviour as follows:- +.TP "\w'-pfileXX'u" +.BI -a [g] +This flag causes information on all currently active users to be printed. +The optional flag +.B g +restricts the selection to real users (ie: doesn't print +.IR groups ). +.TP +.BI -n +The normal output is one item per line, +this flag puts all items for a user on the same line. +.TP +.BI -p file +Directs +.I pl +to use an alternate shares file, whose path name is +.IR file . +.TP +.BI -u +The list is assumed to be user IDs. +If any two user IDs are separated by a minus, then an inclusive range is assumed. +.TP +.BI -v +The normal output includes descriptions of each item, +this flag turns off verbose mode. +.PP +If no arguments are given then +.I pl +will use the login name of the person that executed +the command. +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP "\w'/etc/sharesXX'u" +/etc/shares +The shares file. +.TP +/etc/passwd +Information on user names and \s-1ID\s0s. +.PD +.SH "SEE ALSO" +lnode(5), passwd(5), share(5). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/plot.1 b/static/v10/man1/plot.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67165bab --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/plot.1 @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +.th PLOT I 6/4/73 +.sh NAME +plot \*- make a graph +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd plot +[ option ] ... +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Plot +takes pairs of numbers from the +standard input as abscissas and +ordinates of a graph. +The graph is plotted on the storage scope, /dev/vt0. +.s3 +The following options are recognized, +each as a separate argument. +.s3 +.lp +5 5 +\fBa\fR Supply abscissas automatically (they are missing from +the input); spacing is given by the next +argument, or is assumed to be 1 if next argument is not a number. +.s3 +.lp +5 5 +\fBc\fR Place character string given by next argument +at each point. +.s3 +.lp +5 5 +\fBd\fR Omit connections between points. (Disconnect.) +.s3 +.lp +5 5 +\fBg\fIn\fR Grid +style: +.lp +5 0 +\fIn\fR=0, no grid +.lp +5 0 +\fIn\fR=1, axes only +.lp +5 0 +\fIn\fR=2, complete grid (default). +.s3 +.lp +5 5 +\fBs\fR Save screen, don't erase before plotting. +.s3 +.lp +5 5 +\fBx\fR Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) \fIx\fR limits. +.s3 +.lp +5 5 +\fBy\fR Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) +\fIy\fR limits. +.s3 +.i0 +Points are connected by straight line segments in the order +they appear in input. +If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, or if +the automatic increment is negative, the graph is plotted +upside down. +Automatic abscissas begin with the lower \fIx\fR limit, or with 0 +if no limit is specified. +Grid lines and automatically determined limits fall on round +values, however roundness +may be subverted by giving an inappropriately rounded +lower limit. +Plotting symbols specified by +.bd c +are +placed so that a small initial letter, +such as + o x, will fall +approximately on the plotting point. +.sh FILES +/dev/vt0 +.sh "SEE ALSO" +spline(VI) +.sh BUGS +A limit of 1000 points is enforced silently. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/post.1 b/static/v10/man1/post.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d63982c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/post.1 @@ -0,0 +1,607 @@ +'\" t +.TH POST 1 "Post 4.0" " " +.ds q \fBpost\fP +.ds p \fIpost\fP +.SH NAME +post \- read or send mail with corporate directory access +.SH SYNOPSIS +.SS Reading Mail +\*q [\fImailx\fR(1) options] +.SS Sending Mail +\*q [\fImailx\fR(1) options] [directory query options] address ... +.SS Directory Assistance +\*q \fB\-D\fR +.br +\*q \fB\-w\fR [directory query options] address ... +.SS Directory Update +\*q \fB\-S\fR +.SS Administrative +\*q \fB\-G\fR [\fIsource\fR [\fIdest\fR]] +.br +\*q \fB\-V\fR +.SH DESCRIPTION +\*p is a mail processing system for reading and sending +messages using +.IR mailx (1). +It provides the ability to look up employee/site information in +on-line corporate directories, in addition +to recognizing +.IR mailx (1) +and +.IR mail (1) +addressing conventions. +\*p also generates paper mail for intra-company delivery. +.SS "Addressing" +An +.I address +is one of: +.RS 2 +.TS +tab(;); +l l. +\fIalias\fP;as defined in \fImailx\fR(1) +\fIlocal file delivery\fP;\fB+\fIfile\fR or \fB|\fIprogram\fR as defined in \fImailx\fR(1) +\fInetwork address\fP;[\fIsystem\fB!\fR...]\fB!\fIlogin\fR or \fIlogin\fB@\fIsystem\fR +\fIpaper address\fP;\fBpaper!\fIname\fB:\fIloc\fB:\fIroom\fR +\fIlogin\fP;local user login id +\fIquery\fP;corporate directory query +.TE +.RE +.PP +First, +.I alias +is resolved. +If the first character is a \fB+\fR or \fB|\fR, \fIlocal file delivery\fP +is assumed. +Then, \fIaddress\fP is searched from the left for the +first occurrence of a \fB!\fR, \fB@\fR, \fB/\fR, \fB:\fP, or \fB\=\fR. +If this character is a +.BR ! " or" +.BR @ , +.I address +is a +.I "network address" +.RI ( login +in +.I "network address" +can be a +.I query +or +.IR mail (1) +system-wide alias). +An +.I address +beginning with +.B paper! +delivers intra company mail specified by +.IR name , +.IR loc , +.RI and " room. +If the first character from the left is a +.BR / , +.BR : " or" +.BR = , +then +.I address +is a +.I query. +Finally, if +.B \%POSTETC +is set in the environment and +.I address +is found in +.BR /etc/passwd , +it is a +.IR login , +otherwise it is treated as a +.IR query . +A +.I query +is one more +.I "value pairs" +separated by +.BR / " or" +.BR : . +Colon must be used in place of slash in \fIsystem\fB!\fIquery\fR. +A +.I "value pair" +is the construction \fIattribute\fB=\fIvalue\fR +(see +.BR Attributes ). +.SS "Reading Mail" +.PP +See +.IR mailx (1). +.SS "Sending Mail" +See +.IR mailx (1) +and +.B Directory Queries. +A resolution prompt will appear if +.I address +is ambiguous or invalid. +.br +.SS "Directory Assistance" +.TP +.B \-D +Gives you information on the corporate directory: +a support contact for reporting problems, +the last update of the directory, +and available attributes and titles. +.TP +.B \-w +Who. +Query directory. +.br +.ne 2i +.SS "Directory Update" +.TP +.B \-S +Update user information interactively and set up a new user on the system. +This is automatically invoked when using \*p for the first time to send mail. +The session prompts for personnel identification number, +reporting organization, +location code, room number, telephone number and electronic +mail address. +The default for each prompt is displayed within brackets. +To delete a value, enter +.BR \- . +Any new information is electronically mailed to the Corporate Directory +Administrator for update of the master directory. +.SS "Administrative" +.TP +.B \-G \fR[\fIsource\fR [\fIdest\fR]] +Generate a new +.IR user (4) +file by reading the +.I source +file, deleting entries for users no longer on the system, and writing +the result to the file +.IR dest . +Both +.I source +and +.I dest +are in +.IR user (4) +format and the default for both is +.BR $POST/lib/user . +.TP +.B \-V +Print the current version and release date. +.SS "Directory Queries" +.TP +.BI \-a " attribute\fR[\fI/attribute\fR...] +Provide default +.IR attribute(s) . +If a +.I query +sequence is missing an +.IR attribute , +assume the corresponding +.I attribute +in the +.B \-a +argument. +The default is +.BR pn . +.TP +.BI \-m " mods +Opens the directory specified by +.I mods +(see +.IR modules (4)). +.TP +.BI \-o " fmt +Format output of directory search (see +.BR "Output Formatting" ). +The default format is +.br +.B "%24pn %10org %6loc %6room %12tel %ema" +.TP +.BI \-q " query +Provide default value pairs. +If a +.I query +is missing a +value pair given in the +.BR \-q +argument, add the value pair to the +.I query +(see +.BR POSTQUAL ). +.br +.ne 8i +.SS Attributes +The ``Directory Attributes'' table below contains a list of the +attributes used in +.IR queries . +The table also supplies a short description, a match type and a list +of value characteristics (see explanation following table) for each attribute. +.PP +.TS +center,allbox,tab(;); +c s s s s +c | c | c | c | c +l | l | c | c | l. +\fBDirectory Attributes\fP +\fIAttribute;Description;Match Type;Characteristics;Example\fR +_ +pn;personal name;x;i;pn=j.f.s.smith,jr +name;personal name;x;i;name=p_jones_\^_md +first;first name;p;ia;first=frederick +middle;first middle name;p;ia;middle=bernard +middle2;second middle name;p;ia;middle2=emile +last;last name;s;ia;last=adams +suffix;name suffix;e;ia;suffix=sr +soundex;soundex code;e;i;soundex=m460 +_ +pid;personnel identification number;n;a;pid=103459 +org;organization code;p;i;org=45263 +com;company affiliation;p;i;com=bl +tl;title abbreviation;w;i;tl=dh +occ;occupational code;e;;occ=c +_ +tel;full telephone number;t;a;tel="(201) 386-4419" +area;area code;e;a;area=201 +exch;exchange;e;a;exch=386 +ext;extension;e;a;ext=4419 +cornet;cornet number;e;a;cornet=232 +_ +loc;location code;s;ia;loc=wh +room;room number;p;ia;room=3a-359 +street;street address;p;ia;street="whippany road" +city;city address;p;ia;city=whippany +state;state address;e;ia;state=nj +zip;zip code;p;a;zip=07981 +_ +ema;email address;s;;ema=attmail!fsmith +_ +multi;employees with multiple locations;e;m;multi=1 +_ +attribute;display valid attributes;e;;\-o %attribute +.TE +.PP +.SS Match Type +.PD 0 +.TP +.B e +Exact match. +.TP +.B n +Numeric match. +.TP +.B p +Prefix match. +.TP +.B s +Exact match unless argument ends with a star +.RB ( * ), +in which case prefix match. +.TP +.B t +Telephone match. +Treat rightmost four numbers as extension, +next three rightmost as exchange, +and last three rightmost as area code. +Non-alphanumerics are ignored. +The output format is +.IR "area exch ext" " ." +.TP +.B w +Prefix match on every word. +.TP +.B x +Personal name match. +Syntax for personal name is: +[\fIfirst\fB.\fR[\fImiddle\fB.\fR[\fImiddle2\fB.\fR]]]\fIlast\fR[\fB,\^\fIsuffix\fR]\ \ or +[\fIfirst\fB_\fR[\fImiddle\fB_\fR[\fImiddle2\fB_\fR]]]\fIlast\fR[\fB_\^_\fIsuffix\fR] +.br +.ne 1i +To prefix match on last name, append +.B * +or +.B ... +to +.IR last . +To phonetic match on last name, append +.B ? +or +.B ~ +to +.IR last , +or prepend personal name with +.BR ? . +The output format for +.B pn +is +\fIlast\fB,\ \fIfirst\ middle\ middle2\fB,\ \fIsuffix\fR\ ; +and +.B name +is +\fIfirst\fB_\fImiddle\fB_\fImiddle2\fB_\fIlast\fB_\^_\fIsuffix\fR\ . +See +.B first, +.B middle, +.B middle2, +.B last, +and +.B suffix +for the characteristics of the individual parts of +.BR pn " and +.BR name . +.PD +.SS Characteristics +.PD 0 +.TP +.B a +Ignore non-alphanumerics. +.TP +.B i +Ignore case. +.TP +.B m +Multiple records match. +If argument is empty, +.BR 1 " or +.BR 2 , +retrieve first, second or third record for +.IR query , +respectively. +.PD +.PP +\*p attributes used for mail delivery are described in the following table. +These attributes only take effect on +.IR queries . +.PP +.TS +center,box,tab(;); +c s s +c | c | c +c | l | lw(3i). +\fBDelivery Attributes\fP +_ +\fIAttribute;Possible Values;Description += +\fRdel;paper;T{ +Delivery type. +Forces paper mail delivery for \fIquery\fP recipients. +T} +_ +ask;yes, no (default);T{ +Ask before sending mail. +The recipients of the message are displayed. +T} +_ +all;yes, no (default);T{ +Send to all recipients matching \fIquery\fP. +Useful when sending to entire organizations. +The \fIquery\fP is not expanded in the message header. +T} +_ +.TE +.SS Output Formatting +The +.I fmt +argument specified with the +.B \-o +option is used as a +.IR printf (3C)-like +string for formatting the output of directory queries. +All characters are copied literally, except for +attribute substitutions and backslash escapes. +Quoting may be necessary to prevent shell interpretation. +.PP +The syntax for attribute substitutions is: +.IP +\fB% \fIflags width . precision \fIattribute\fP +.PP +Only +.BR % " and +.I attribute +are required. +.I Flags +may be one or more of the following: +.RS 2 +.PD 0 +.TP +.B \(mi +Right justify (left justification is the default). +.TP +.B ^ +Capitalize the first letter of each word. +.TP +.B + +Capitalize all letters in the value. +.TP +.B < +If the value is empty, +delete back to the last +.B \e\^< +or beginning of output. +.TP +.B > +If the value is empty, skip to the next +.B \e\^> +or end of format string. +.RE +.PD +.PP +.I Width +is an integer giving the minimum field width. +If the value has fewer characters than this number, the +value will be padded on the right (or left, if the +.B \(mi +flag is present) with blank spaces. +The default +.I width +is zero. +.P +.I Precision +is an integer that specifies +the maximum number of characters to +be printed from the value. +If the value has +more characters than this number, they will not +be printed. +Zero is a special case meaning print all characters (the default). +A period is used to +separate +.I width +and +.I precision +and is only used if +.I precision +is used. +.PP +To follow an +.I attribute +with an alphanumeric, +enclose the attribute substitution +(except for the percent sign) in curly braces, +.BR {} . +.PP +.ne 3i +The backslash escapes are: +.PP +.TS +allbox,center,tab(;); +c s +c | c +c | l. +\fBOutput Format Backslash Escapes\fP +\fIEscape;Meaning\fR +_ +\e\^c;Suppress terminating new-line +\e\^b;Backspace +\e\^f;Form feed +\e\^n;New-line +\e\^r;Carriage return +\e\^t;Tab +\e\^v;Vertical Tab +\e\^\fInnn\fR;Octal ASCII character +\e\^<;Marker for < flag +\e\^>;Marker for > flag +.TE +.br +.SS Environment Variables +.TP +.B POSTETC +When this variable is set, \*p will search +.B /etc/passwd +for +.I login +arguments. +.TP +.BI POSTQUAL\= query +Provide default +.I "value pairs" +for +.IR query . +If a +.I query +is missing +.I "value pair" +given in the +.B POSTQUAL +argument, add it to the +.I query +.RB ( \-q +overrides +.BR POSTQUAL ). +.SH EXAMPLES +.PD 0 +Read from your \fBmbox\fP file: +.IP +post \-f +.PP +Send mail to all department heads in Division 452: +.IP +post org=452/tl=dh/all=yes +.PP +Send paper mail to all employees at Whippany in section 3A: +.IP +post loc=wh/room=3a/all=yes/del=paper +.PP +Query directory for employees using system whutt: +.IP +post \-w ema=whutt!* +.PP +Query directory and format output in label-like form: +.IP +post \-w \-o "%^pn\e\^n%+loc %+room" org=123 +.PP +Query directory for valid attributes: +.IP +post \-w \-o %attribute +.PD +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.TP 30 +$POST/lib/dispatch +distributed directory map +.TP +$POST/lib/mailx +mailx program used by \*p +.TP +$POST/lib/user +list of +.IR post (1) +users on this system +.TP +$POST/lib/dbinfo +program to retrieve directory information +.TP +$POST/lib/update +program to update directory +.TP +$POST/lib/genuser +program to update +.IR user (4) +file +.TP +/bin/mail +local mail delivery agent +.TP +/bin/rmail +remote mail delivery agent +.TP +/etc/passwd +list of local users +.PD +.SH SEE ALSO +btoa(1), +fixmbox(1), +forward(1), +gone.fishing(1), +mail(1), +mailx(1), +pq(1), +genesis(1M), +server(1M), +upas(1M), +pq(3C), +dispatch(4), +ev(4), +mail(4), +modules(4), +user(4). +.br +.nf +.I "Post 4.0 Product Release Description" +.I "Post 4.0 Primer" +.I "Post 4.0 User Guide" +.I "Post 4.0 User Reference Manual" +.I "Post 4.0 Administrator Reference Manual" +.I "Post 4.0 Quick Reference Card" +.I "Post 4.0 Programmer Guide" +.I "Post 4.0 Administrator Guide" +.fi +.SH WARNINGS +Colon must be used in place of slash in the construction: +\fIsystem\fB!\fIquery\fR. +.SH BUGS +Mailings to very large mailing lists, e.g., +.BR com=bl/all=yes , +may fail by exceeding system limits (see +.IR exec (2)). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 b/static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..971e14a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postbgi.1 @@ -0,0 +1,243 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH POSTBGI 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B postbgi +\- PostScript translator for +.SM BGI +(Basic Graphical Instructions) files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostbgi\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postbgi +translates +.SM BGI +(Basic Graphical Instructions) +.I files +into PostScript and writes the results on the +standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-f name +Print text using font +.IR name . +Any PostScript font can be used, +although the best results will only be +obtained with constant width fonts. +The default font is Courier. +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which by default is located at the center of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP +.OP \-w num +Set the line width used for graphics to +.I num +points, where a point is approximately 1/72 +of an inch. +By default +.I num +is set to 0 points, which forces lines to be +one pixel wide. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed at the +center of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y up the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves everything up the page. +The default offset is 0 inches. +.TP +.OP \-E name +Set the character encoding for text fonts to +.IR name . +Requesting +.I name +means include file +.MI \*(dQ name .enc \f1. +A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. +The default selects file +.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . +.TP +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/postbgi.ps . +.PP +Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include +.I string +in the output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-R action +Requests special +.I action +(e.g., +.MR manualfeed ) +on a per page or global basis. +The +.I action +string can be given as +.IR request , +.IM request : page\f1\|, +or +.IM request : page : file\f1\|. +If +.I page +is omitted or given as 0, the request +applies to all pages. +If +.I file +is omitted, the request +lookup is done in +.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . +.PP +.B postbgi +can handle +.SM STARE +(black and white) and +.SM PRISM +(color) +.SM BGI +jobs. +By default plots are rigidly scaled to fill the page, which produces +the good results for most +.SM STARE +jobs. +.SM PRISM +jobs typically fill regions with colors, and often require device +specific tuning to produce acceptable results. +Adding the +.MW \-P"/prism\ true\ def" +option is strongly recommended when +.B postbgi +is translating +.SM PRISM +jobs. +.br +.ne 7v +.SH EXAMPLES +For most +.SM STARE +jobs, +.EX +postbgi \f2file +.EE +gives good results, while +.EX +postbgi \-P"/prism true def" \f2file +.EE +is recommended when translating +.SM PRISM +jobs. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.SH BUGS +The default line width is too small for write-white +print engines, like the one used by the PS-2400. +Several +.SM BGI +opcodes have not been implemented. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/postbgi.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy (1), +.BR postdmd (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR postmd (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR postreverse (1), +.BR posttek (1), +.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 b/static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8716aa2 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postdaisy.1 @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH POSTDAISY 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B postdaisy +\- PostScript translator for Diablo 630 files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostdaisy\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postdaisy +translates Diablo 630 daisy-wheel +.I files +into PostScript and writes the results on the +standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-f name +Print +.I files +using font +.IR name . +Any PostScript font can be used, +although the best results will only be +obtained with constant width fonts. +The default font is Courier. +.TP +.OP \-h num +Set the initial horizontal motion index to +.IR num . +Determines the character advance and the default +point size, unless the +.OP \-s +option is used. +The default is 12. +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which is located near the upper left corner of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP +.OP \-r num +Selects carriage return and line feed behavior. +If +.I num +is 1 a line feed generates a carriage return. +If +.I num +is 2 a carriage return generates a line feed. +Setting +.I num +to 3 enables both modes. +.TP +.OP \-s num +Use point size +.I num +instead of the default value set by the +initial horizontal motion index. +.TP +.OP \-v num +Set the initial vertical motion index to +.IR num . +The default is 8. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed near the +upper left corner of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y down the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0.25 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves text down the page. +The default offset is 0.25 inches. +.TP +.OP \-E name +Set the character encoding for text fonts to +.IR name . +Requesting +.I name +means include file +.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. +A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. +The default selects file +.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . +.TP +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/postdaisy.ps . +.PP +Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include +.I string +in output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-R action +Requests special +.I action +(e.g., +.MR manualfeed ) +on a per page or global basis. +The +.I action +string can be given as +.IR request , +.IM request : page\f1\|, +or +.IM request : page : file\f1\|. +If +.I page +is omitted or given as 0, the request +applies to all pages. +If +.I file +is omitted, the request +lookup is done in +.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/postdaisy.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdmd (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR postmd (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR postreverse (1), +.BR posttek (1), +.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 b/static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb3317b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postdmd.1 @@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH POSTDMD 1 +.SH NAME +.B postdmd +\- PostScript translator for +.SM DMD +bitmap files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostdmd\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postdmd +translates +.SM DMD +bitmap +.IR files , +as produced by +.BR dmdps , +or +.I files +written in the Ninth Edition +.BR bitfile (9.5) +format +into PostScript and writes the results on the +standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-b num +Pack the bitmap in the output file using +.I num +byte patterns. +A value of 0 turns off all packing of the output file. +By default +.I num +is 6. +.TP +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-f +Flip the sense of the bits in +.I files +before printing the bitmaps. +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which by default is located at the center of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP +.OP \-u +Disables much of the unpacking for Eighth +Edition bitmap files. +Usually results in smaller output files that take longer to print. +Not a recommended option. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed at the +center of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y up the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves everything up the page. +The default offset is 0. +.TP +.TP +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/postdmd.ps . +.PP +Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include +.I string +in the output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-R action +Requests special +.I action +(e.g., +.MR manualfeed ) +on a per page or global basis. +The +.I action +string can be given as +.IR request, +.IM request : page\f1\|, +or +.IM request : page : file\f1\|. +If +.I page +is omitted or given as 0, the request applies to all pages. +If +.I file +is omitted, the request lookup is done in +.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . +.PP +Only one bitmap is printed on each logical page, and each of the input +.I files +must contain complete descriptions of at least one bitmap. +Decreasing the pattern size using the +.OP \-b +option may help throughput on printers with fast processors +(e.g., \s-1PS\s+1-810), +while increasing the pattern size will often be the right move +on older models +(.e.g, \s-1PS\s+1-800). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.br +.ne 4v +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/postdmd.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR postmd (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR postreverse (1), +.BR posttek (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postgif.1 b/static/v10/man1/postgif.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35476893 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postgif.1 @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH POSTGIF 1 +.SH NAME +.B postgif +\- PostScript translator for +.SM GIF +files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostgif\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postgif +translates Graphics Interchange Format (\s-1GIF\s+1) +.I files +into PostScript and writes the results on the +standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-f +Flip the sense of the bits in +.I files +before printing the pixmaps. +.TP +.OP \-g +Generate picture in gray instead of color +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which by default is located at the center of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed at the +center of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y up the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves everything up the page. +The default offset is 0. +.TP +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/postgif.ps . +.PP +Two options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include +.I string +in the output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.PP +Only one pixmap is printed on each logical page, +and each of the input +.I files +must contain complete descriptions of at least one pixmap. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.br +.ne 1i +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/postgif.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy (1), +.BR postdmd (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR postmd (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR postreverse (1), +.BR posttek (1), +.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postio.1 b/static/v10/man1/postio.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3075951b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postio.1 @@ -0,0 +1,308 @@ +.TH POSTIO 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B postio +\- serial interface for PostScript printers +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostio\f1 +.OP \-l line +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postio +sends +.I files +to the PostScript printer attached to +.IR line . +If no +.I files +are specified the standard input is sent. +The first group of +.I options +should be sufficient for most applications: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-b speed +Transmit data over +.I line +at baud rate +.I speed. +Recognized baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. +The default +.I speed +is 9600 baud. +.TP +.OP \-c +Do not send +.MR ^C s +(interrupts) to the printer, +which means +.B postio +does not force a busy printer into the idle state. +.TP +.OP \-l line +Connect to printer attached to +.IR line . +In most cases there is no default and +.B postio +must be able to read and write +.IR line . +If +.I line +does not begin with +.MW / +it is treated as a Datakit destination. +.TP +.OP \-q +Prevents status queries while +.I files +are being sent to the printer. +When status queries are disabled a dummy message is appended +to the log file before each block is transmitted. +.TP +.OP \-B num +Set internal buffer size for reading and writing +.I files +to +.I num +bytes +(default is 2048 bytes). +.TP +.OP \-D +Enable debug mode. +Guarantees that everything read on +.I line +will be added to the log file (standard error by default). +.TP +.OP \-L file +Data received on +.I line +gets put in +.IR file . +The default log +.I file +is standard error. +Printer or status messages that do not indicate a change in state +are not normally written to +.I file +but can be forced out using the +.OP \-D +option. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Send +.I string +to the printer before any of the input files. +The default +.I string +is simple PostScript code that disables timeouts. +.TP +.OP \-R num +Run +.B postio +as a single process if +.I num +is 1 or as separate read and write processes if +.I num +is 2. +By default +.B postio +runs as a single process. +.PP +The next two +.I options +are provided for users who expect to run +.B postio +on their own. +Neither is suitable for use in spooler interface +programs: +.TP 0.35i +.OP \-i +Run the program in interactive mode. +Any +.I files +are sent first and followed by the standard input. +Forces separate read and write processes +and overrides many other options. +To exit interactive mode use your interrupt or quit character. +To get a friendly interactive connection with the printer type +.MW executive +on a line by itself. +.TP +.OP \-t +Data received on +.I line +and not recognized as printer or status information is written to +the standard output. +Forces separate read and write processes. +Convenient if you have a PostScript program that +will be returning useful data to the host. +.PP +The last option is not generally recommended and should only +be used if all else fails to provide a reliable connection: +.TP 0.35i +.OP \-S +Slow the transmission of data to the printer. +Severely limits throughput, runs as a single process, +disables the +.OP \-q +option, limits the internal buffer size to 1024 bytes, +can use an excessive amount of +.SM CPU +time, and does nothing in interactive mode. +.PP +Best performance is usually obtained by using +a large internal buffer +.OP -B "" ) ( +and by running the program as separate read and write processes +.OP \-R2 "" ). ( +Inability to fork the additional process causes +.B postio +to continue as a single read/write process. +When one process is used, only data sent to the printer is flow-controlled. +.PP +The options are not all mutually exclusive. +The +.OP \-i +option always wins, selecting its own settings for whatever is +needed to run interactive mode, independent of anything else +found on the command line. +Interactive mode runs as separate read and write processes +and few of the other +.I options +accomplish anything in the presence of the +.OP \-i +option. +The +.OP \-t +option needs a reliable two way connection to the printer and +therefore tries to force separate read and write processes. +The +.OP \-S +option relies on the status query mechanism, so +.OP \-q +is disabled and the program runs as a single process. +.PP +In most cases +.B postio +starts by making a connection to +.I line +and then attempts to force the printer into the +.SM IDLE +state by sending an appropriate sequence of +.MW ^T +(status query), +.MW ^C +(interrupt), and +.MW ^D +(end of job) characters. +When the printer goes +.SM IDLE +.I files +are transmitted along with an occasional +.MW ^T +(unless the +.OP \-q +option was used). +After all the +.I files +are sent the program waits until it is reasonably sure the +job is complete. +Printer generated error messages received at any time +except while establishing the initial connection +(or when running interactive mode) cause +.B postio +to exit with a non-zero status. +In addition to being added to the log file, printer error messages +are also echoed to standard error. +.SH EXAMPLES +Run as a single process at 9600 baud and send +.I file1 +and +.I file2 +to the printer attached to +.MR /dev/tty01 : +.EX +postio -l /dev/tty01 \f2file1 file2 +.EE +Same as above except two processes are used, +the internal buffer is set to 4096 bytes, +and data returned by the printer gets put in file +.MR log : +.EX +postio -R2 -B4096 -l/dev/tty01 -Llog \f2file1 file2 +.EE +Establish an interactive connection with the printer at Datakit +destination +.MR my/printer : +.EX +postio -i -l my/printer +.EE +Send file +.MW program +to the printer connected to +.MR /dev/tty22 , +recover any data in file +.MR results , +and put log messages in file +.MR log : +.EX +postio -t -l /dev/tty22 -L log program >results +.EE +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if the files ran successfully. +System errors (e.g., ``can't open the line'') set the low order +bit in the exit status, while PostScript errors set bit 1. +An exit status of 2 usually means the printer +detected a PostScript error in the input +.IR files . +.SH WARNINGS +.PP +The input +.I files +are handled as a single PostScript job. +Sending several different jobs, each with their own internal +end of job mark +.RM ( ^D ) +is not guaranteed to work properly. +.B postio +may quit before all the jobs have completed and could be restarted +before the last one finishes. +.PP +All the capabilities described above may not be available on every +machine or even across the different versions of +.SM UNIX +that are currently supported by the program. +For example, the code needed to connect to a Datakit destination may only +work on System\ V and may require that the +.SM DKHOST +software package be available at compile time. +.PP +There may be no default +.I line +so using +.OP \-l +option is strongly recommended. +If omitted +.B postio +may attempt to connect to the printer using the standard output. +If Datakit is involved the +.OP \-b +may be ineffective and attempts by +.B postio +to flow control data in both directions may not work. +The +.OP \-q +option can help if the printer is connected to \s-1RADIAN\s+1. +The +.OP \-S +option is not generally recommended and should only be used if +all else fails to establish a reliable connection. +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR buildtables (1), +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy (1), +.BR postdmd (1), +.BR postmd (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR postreverse (1), +.BR posttek (1), +.BR printfont (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postmd.1 b/static/v10/man1/postmd.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb67d969 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postmd.1 @@ -0,0 +1,330 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH POSTMD 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B postmd +\- matrix display program for PostScript printers +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostmd\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postmd +reads a series of floating point numbers from +.IR files , +translates them into a PostScript gray scale image, +and writes the results on the standard output. +In a typical application the numbers might be +the elements of a large matrix, +written in row major order, +while the printed image could help locate +patterns in the matrix. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-b num +Pack the bitmap in the output file using +.I num +byte patterns. +A value of 0 turns off all packing of the output file. +By default +.I num +is 6. +.TP +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-d dimen +Sets the default matrix dimensions for all input +.I files +to +.IR dimen . +The +.I dimen +string can be given as rows or rows\^\(mu\^columns. +If columns is omitted it will be set to rows. +By default +.B postmd +assumes each matrix is square and sets the number of rows +and columns to the square root of the number of elements in +each input file. +.TP +.OP \-g list +.I list +is a comma- or space-separated string of integers, each lying between +0 and 255 inclusive, +that assigns PostScript gray scales to the regions of the real line +selected by the +.OP \-i +option. +255 corresponds to white and 0 to black. +.B postmd +assigns a default gray scale that omits white (i.e., 255) and gets +darker as the regions move from left to right along the real line. +.TP +.OP \-i list +.I list +is a comma- or space-separated string of +.I N +floating point numbers that +partition the real line into +.RI 2 N +1 +regions. +The +.I list +must be given in increasing numerical order. +The partitions are used to map floating point numbers read from the input +.I files +into gray scale integers that are assigned automatically by +.B postmd +or arbitrarily selected using the +.OP \-g +option. +The default interval +.I list +is ``\*(mB\-1,0,1\fP'' which partions the real line into 7 regions. +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which by default is located at the center of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP +.OP \-w window +.I window +is a comma- or space-separated list of four positive integers that +select the upper left and lower right corners of a submatrix from +each of the input +.IR files . +Row and column indices start at 1 in the upper left corner and the +numbers in the input +.I files +are assumed to be written in row major order. +By default the entire matrix is displayed. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed at the +center of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y up the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves everything up the page. +The default offset is 0. +.TP +.OP \-E name +Set the character encoding for text fonts to +.IR name . +Requesting +.I name +means include file +.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. +A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. +The default selects file +.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . +.TP +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/postmd.ps . +.PP +Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include +.I string +in the output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-R action +Requests special +.I action +(e.g., +.MR manualfeed ) +on a per page or global basis. +The +.I action +string can be given as +.IR request , +.IM request : page\f1\|, +or +.IM request : page : file\f1\|. +If +.I page +is omitted or given as 0, the request +applies to all pages. +If +.I file +is omitted, the request +lookup is done in +.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . +.PP +Only one matrix is displayed on each logical page, +and each of the input +.I files +must contain complete descriptions of exactly one matrix. +Matrix elements are floating point numbers arranged in row major order in +each input file. +White space, including newlines, is not used to determine matrix +dimensions. +By default +.B postmd +assumes each matrix is square and sets the number of rows and columns +to the square root of the number of elements in the input file. +Supplying default dimensions on the command line using the +.OP \-d +option overrides this default behavior, and in that case the +dimensions apply to all input +.IR files . +.PP +An optional header can be supplied with each input file and is used +to set the matrix dimensions, the partition of the real line, the gray scale +map, and a window into the matrix. +The header consists of keyword/value pairs, each on a separate line. +It begins on the first line of each input file and ends with the +first unrecognized string, which should be the first matrix element. +Values set in the header take precedence, but only apply to the +current input file. +Recognized header keywords are +.MR dimension , +.MR interval , +.MR grayscale , +and +.MR window . +The syntax of the value string that follows each keyword parallels what is +accepted by the +.OP \-d , +.OP \-i , +.OP \-g , +and +.OP \-w +options. +.SH EXAMPLES +For example, suppose +.I file +initially contains the 1000 numbers +in a 20\(mu50 matrix. +Then the command line: +.EX +postmd -d20x50 -i"-100 100" -g0,128,254,128,0 \f2file +.EE +and prepending the header, +.EX +dimension 20x50 +interval -100.0 .100e+3 +grayscale 0 128 254 128 0 +.EE +to +.I file +and typing the command line: +.EX +postmd \f2file +.EE +produce exactly the same output. +The interval list partitions the real line into five regions and +the gray scale list maps numbers less than \-100 or greater than 100 +into 0 (i.e., black), numbers equal to \-100 or 100 into 128 +(i.e., 50 percent +black), and numbers between \-100 and 100 into 254 (i.e., almost white). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.SH WARNINGS +The largest matrix that can be adequately displayed is a function +of the interval and gray scale lists, the printer resolution, +and the paper size. +A 600\(mu600 matrix is an optimistic upper bound for a two element interval +list (i.e. five regions) using 8.5\(mu11 inch paper on a 300 dpi printer. +.PP +Using white (i.e., 255) in a gray scale list is not recommended and will not +show up in the legend and bar graph that +.B postmd +displays below each image. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/postmd.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy (1), +.BR postdmd (1), +.BR postio (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR postreverse (1), +.BR posttek (1), +.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postnews.1 b/static/v10/man1/postnews.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..994091a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postnews.1 @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +.TH POSTNEWS 1 +.UC +.SH NAME +postnews \- submit news articles +.SH SYNOPSIS +.BR postnews " [ " +.IR article " ]" +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Postnews +is a shell script that calls +.IR inews (1) +to submit news articles to USENET. +It will prompt the user for the title of the article +(which should be a phrase suggesting the subject, +so that persons reading the news can tell if they +are interested in the article) +for the newsgroup, +and for the distribution. +.PP +An omitted newsgroup (from hitting return) +will default to +.IR general . +.PP +.I general +is read by everyone on the local machine. +Other possible newsgroups include, but are not limited to, +.IR btl.general , +which is read by all users at all Bell Labs sites on USENET, +.IR net.general , +which is read by all users at all sites on USENET, +and +.IR net.news , +which is read by users interested in the network news on all sites. +There is often a local set of newsgroups, such as +.IR ucb.all , +that circulate within a local set of machines. +(In this case, +.I ucb +newsgroups circulate among machines at the +University of California at Berkeley.) +.PP +The distribution can be any valid newsgroup name list, +and defaults to the same as the newsgroup. +(If they are the same, the distribution will be omitted from the +headers put into the editor buffer.) +A distribution header will, if given, be included in the headers +of the article, affecting where the article is distributed to. +.PP +After entering the title, newsgroup, and distribution, +the user will be placed in an editor. +If $EDITOR is set in the environment, that editor will be used. +Otherwise, postnews defaults to +.IR vi (1). +.PP +An initial set of headers containing the subject and newsgroups +will be placed in the editor, followed by a blank line. +The article should be appended to the buffer, after the blank line. +These headers can be changed, or additional headers added, +while in the editor, if desired. +.PP +Optionally, the article +will be read from the specified +.IR filename . +.PP +For more sophisticated uses, such as posting news from a program, see +.IR inews (1). +.SH FILES +.PD 0 +.SH "SEE ALSO" +Mail(1), +checknews(1), +inews(1), +mail(1), +readnews(1). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postprint.1 b/static/v10/man1/postprint.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93dd3ff8 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postprint.1 @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH POSTPRINT 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B postprint +\- PostScript translator for text files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostprint\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postprint +translates text +.I files +into PostScript and writes the results on the +standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-f name +Print +.I files +using font +.IR name . +Any PostScript font can be used, +although the best results will only be +obtained with constant width fonts. +The default font is Courier. +.TP +.OP \-l num +Set the length of a page to +.I num +lines. +By default +.I num +is 66. +Setting +.I num +to 0 is allowed, and will cause +.B postprint +to guess a value, based on the point size that is being used. +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which is located near the upper left corner of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP +.OP \-r num +Selects carriage return behavior. +Carriage returns are ignored if +.I num +is 0, +cause a return to column 1 if +.I num +is 1, +and generate a newline if +.I num +is 2. +The default +.I num +is 0. +.TP +.OP \-s num +Print +.I files +using point size +.IR num . +When printing in landscape mode +.I num +is scaled by a factor that depends on the +imaging area of the device. +The default size for portrait mode is 10. +.TP +.OP \-t num +Assume tabs are set every +.I num +columns, starting with the first column. +By default tabs are set every 8 columns. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed near the +upper left corner of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y down the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0.25 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves text down the page. +The default offset is 0.25 inches. +.TP +.OP \-E name +Set the character encoding for text fonts to +.IR name . +Requesting +.I name +means include file +.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. +A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. +The default selects file +.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . +.TP +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/postprint.ps . +.PP +Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include +.I string +in the output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-R action +Requests special +.I action +(e.g., +.MR manualfeed ) +on a per page or global basis. +The +.I action +string can be given as +.IR request , +.IM request : page\f1\|, +or +.IM request : page : file\f1\|. +If +.I page +is omitted or given as 0, the request +applies to all pages. +If +.I file +is omitted, the request +lookup is done in +.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . +.PP +A new logical page is started after 66 lines have been printed +on the current page, or whenever an +.SM ASCII +form feed character is read. +The number of lines per page can be changed using the +.OP \-l +option. +Unprintable +.SM ASCII +characters are ignored, +and lines that are too long are silently truncated +by the printer. +.SH EXAMPLES +.PP +Print +.I file1 +and +.I file2 +in landscape mode: +.EX +postprint -pland \f2file1 file2 +.EE +Print three logical pages on each physical page in portrait mode: +.EX +postprint -n3 \f2file +.EE +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/postprint.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy(1), +.BR postdmd(1), +.BR postio(1), +.BR postmd(1), +.BR postreverse(1), +.BR posttek(1), +.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 b/static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7c3fd1e --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/postreverse.1 @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +.TH POSTREVERSE 1 +.SH NAME +.B postreverse +\- reverse the page order in a PostScript file +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpostreverse\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" file [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B postreverse +reverses the page order in files that conform to Adobe's +Version 1.0 or Version 2.0 PostScript file structuring conventions, +and writes the results on the standard output. +Only one input +.I file +is allowed and if no +.I file +is specified, the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-o list +Select pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-r +Do not reverse the pages in +.IR file . +.TP +.OP \-T dir +Use +.I dir +as the temporary file directory when +reading from the standard input. +By default +.I dir +is set to +.MR /tmp . +.PP +.B postreverse +can handle a limited class of files +that violate page independence, +provided all global definitions are bracketed by +.MW %%BeginGlobal +and +.MW %%EndGlobal +comments. +In addition, files that mark the end of each page with +.MW "%%EndPage:\ label\ ordinal" +comments will also reverse properly, provided the prologue and +trailer sections can be located. +If +.B postreverse +fails to find an +.MW %%EndProlog +or +.MW %%EndSetup +comment the entire +.I file +is copied, unmodified, to the standard output. +.PP +Since global definitions are pulled out of individual +pages and put in the prologue, the output file can be +minimally conforming, even if the input +.I file +was not. +.SH EXAMPLES +Select pages 1 to 100 from +.I file +and reverse the pages: +.EX +postreverse -o1-100 \f2file +.EE +Print four logical pages on each physical page +and reverse all the pages: +.EX +postprint -n4 \f2file\fP | postreverse +.EE +Produce a minimally conforming file from output +generated by dpost without reversing the pages: +.EX +dpost \f2file\fP | postreverse -r +.EE +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I file +was successfully processed. +.SH BUGS +No attempt has been made to deal with redefinitions of global +variables or procedures. +If standard input is used, the input +.I file +will be read three times before being reversed. +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy(1), +.BR postdmd(1), +.BR postio(1), +.BR postmd(1), +.BR postprint(1), +.BR posttek(1), +.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/posttek.1 b/static/v10/man1/posttek.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2477170b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/posttek.1 @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH POSTTEK 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B posttek +\- PostScript translator for Tektronix 4014 files +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBposttek\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B posttek +translates Tektronix 4014 graphics +.I files +into PostScript and writes the results on the +standard output. +If no +.I files +are specified, or if +.OP \- +is one of the input +.IR files , +the standard input is read. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP +.OP \-f name +Print text using font +.IR name . +Any PostScript font can be used, +although the best results will only be +obtained with constant width fonts. +The default font is Courier. +.TP +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which by default is located at the center of +each page. +The default magnification is 1.0. +.TP +.OP \-n num +Print +.I num +logical pages on each piece of paper, +where +.I num +can be any positive integer. +By default +.I num +is set to 1. +.TP +.OP \-o list +Print pages whose numbers are given in the comma-separated +.IR list . +The list contains single numbers +.I N +and ranges +.IR N1\-\|N2 . +A missing +.I N1 +means the lowest numbered page, a missing +.I N2 +means the highest. +.TP +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBlandscape\fP. +.TP +.OP \-w num +Set the line width used for graphics to +.I num +points, where a point is approximately 1/72 +of an inch. +By default +.I num +is set to 0 points, which forces lines to be +one pixel wide. +.TP +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive x axis. +The default +coordinate system has the origin fixed at the +center of the page, with positive +x to the right and positive y up the page. +Positive +.I num +moves everything right. +The default offset is 0.0 inches. +.TP +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the positive y axis. +Positive +.I num +moves everything up the page. +The default offset is 0.0. +.TP +.OP \-E name +Set the character encoding for text fonts to +.IR name . +Requesting +.I name +means include file +.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. +A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. +The default selects file +.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . +.TP +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/posttek.ps . +.PP +Three options allow insertion of arbitrary PostScript +at controlled points in the translation process: +.TP 0.75i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.I file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-P string +Include. +.I string +in the output file; +.I string +must be legitimate PostScript. +.TP +.OP \-R action +Requests special +.I action +(e.g., +.MR manualfeed ) +on a per page or global basis. +The +.I action +string can be given as +.IR request, +.IM request : page\f1\|, +or +.IM request : page : file\f1\|. +If +.I page +is omitted or given as 0, the request +applies to all pages. +If +.I file +is omitted, the request +lookup is done in +.MR \*(dQ/ps.requests . +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A 0 exit status is returned if +.I files +were successfully processed. +.SH BUGS +The default line width is too small for write-white +print engines, like the one used by the \s-1PS\s+1-2400. +.br +.ne 4v +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/posttek.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/forms.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/ps.requests +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postdaisy(1), +.BR postdmd(1), +.BR postio(1), +.BR postmd(1), +.BR postprint(1), +.BR postreverse(1), +.BR psencoding (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pp.1 b/static/v10/man1/pp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef00f5ad --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ +.TH PP 1 +.SH NAME +pp \- C pretty printer +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pp +[\fB\-T\fPdev] +[\fB\-f\fPfont] +[\fB\-t\fPtitle] +[files] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pp +formats the named C source files, or its standard input +if none are given, +and produces troff +.I output +format on its standard output. +Thus, its output is suitable for printing on a typesetter with +a program such as +d202(1). +In the output, comments are italicized, +keywords are emboldened, +and each page has header and footer tags. +The +.B \-T +option sets the device for output; the default is 202. +The +.B \-f +option sets the main font; the default is E, or Eurostyle. +The +.B \-t +option generates a title page with the title specified and a +date stamp. +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.I Pp +complains and exits if it cannot find a required font. +If this happens, take the name of the missing font to +a local font guru. +.SH "SEE ALSO" +pr(1), troff(1), d202(1), dcan(1), etc. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pq.1 b/static/v10/man1/pq.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7cfec15c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pq.1 @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +.TH PQ 1 "Post 4.0" " " +.SH NAME +pq \- directory query interface +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pq +.RB [ \-l ] +[directory query options] query ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I pq\^ +is a fast directory query interface; the +.I "directory query options" +and +.I query +are defined in +.IR post (1). +Unlike +.BR "post \-w" , +.I pq +does not recognize aliases and +.BR \-q , +and only uses the +.B POST +environment variable. +.TP +.B \-l +Query location directory; equivalent to +.br +.B +\-a loc \-o "%6loc %12tel [%3cornet] %street, %city, %state, %zip" +.SH EXAMPLES +.PD 0 +Query directory for members of an office: +.IP +pq loc=mh/room=2b519 +.PP +Query directory for location information: +.IP +pq \-l mt +.PP +Query directory for cornet number of a location: +.IP +pq \-l \-o %cornet ih +.PD +.SH FILES +.TP 30 +$POST/lib/dispatch +directory configuration file +.SH SEE ALSO +post(1), +pq(3C), +dispatch(4), +modules(4). diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pr.1 b/static/v10/man1/pr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80bd0dcc --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'PR (I)'1/15/73'PR (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME pr -- print file +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS pr__ [-cm___] [-h__ name] [-_n] [+_n] [file918 ...] +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION pr__ +produces a printed listing of one or more files. +The output is separated into pages headed by a date, +the name of the file or a header (if any), and the page number. +If there are no file arguments, pr__ prints the standard +input file, and is thus usable as a filter. + +Options apply to all following files but may be reset +between files: + + -c__ print current date + -m__ print date file last modified (default) +.sp + -_n produce n-column output +.sp + +_n begin printing with page n +.sp + -h__ treats the next argument as a header +.sp +If there is a header in force, it is printed in place of +the file name. +.sp +Interconsole messages via write_____(I) are +forbidden during a pr__. +.sp +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES /dev/tty? +to suspend messages. +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO cat(I), cp(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS none (files not found are ignored) +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS In multi-column +output, non-printing characters other than new-line +cause misalignment. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/prefer.1 b/static/v10/man1/prefer.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..71debd08 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/prefer.1 @@ -0,0 +1,489 @@ +.tr @| +.TH PREFER 1 +.CT 1 writing_troff +.SH NAME +prefer, pinvert, penter, plook, pconvert \- maintain and use bibliographic references +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B prefer +[ +.I option ... +] +.PP +.B penter +[ +.I outfile +] +.PP +.B pinvert +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I file ... +] +.PP +.B plook +[ +.B -p +.I dbfile +] +[ +.I keyword ... +] +.PP +.B pconvert +[ +.B -d +] +.I file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Prefer +is a +.IR troff (1) +preprocessor for bibliographic references. +It copies a document from the standard input +to the standard output, using a bibliographic database to +change symbolic references +into full references ready for typesetting by +.IR troff (1). +Although symbolic references are in the style of +.IR monk (1), +.I prefer +does not depend on +.I monk. +The options are: +.TF dbfile +.TP +.B -n +Format for +.IR nroff . +.TP +.BI -o sortkey +Under the +.B @reference_list +command, sort according to +.IR sortkey , +any combinations of the letters +.LR a +(author) +.LR d +(date), and +.LR t +(title), +rather than +in database sequence. +If +.I sortkey is +.LR sort , +sort according to the current style. +.TP +.BI -p dbfile +Use +.I dbfile +as the bibliographic database (default +.FR prefer.out ). +.TP +.B -r +Format as a released paper +(technical memorandum default). +.TP +.BI -s style +Set the formatting +.I style , +one of +.LR att +(default), +.LR acm , +.LR apa , +.LR ieee , +.LR lsa , +.LR pami , +.LR spectrum . +.PD +.PP +.I Prefer +recognizes the following commands, +which may appear anywhere in a document. +Parentheses +.B () +in the commands +may be replaced by any of +.B "{} [] <>". +.TP +.BI @reference_style( " style arg ..." ) +Switch to a new formatting style. +All previous references are forgotten +and a new list of references is begun. +If +.I style +is +.B same +the current style remains (but all previous references are forgotten). +Optional +.IR args +are: +.RS +.TF sequence +.TP +.BR tm +Format as a technical memorandum. +.TP +.B rp +Format as a released paper. +.TP +.B nroff +Format for +.I nroff. +.TP +.B troff +Format for +.I troff. +.TP +.B sort +Print a +.B @reference_list +in an order appropriate for the current style. +.TP +.B sequence +Print a +.B @reference_list +in database sequence. +.TP +.I sortkey +Print a +.B @reference_list +according to the +.IR sortkey , +any combination of the letters +.LR a , +.LR d , +.LR t +as above. +.PD +.RE +.TP +.BI @reference( keywords +.I %ref_fields +.IB %flags ) +.br +Insert a citation mark +in the current style +(e.g. [7], \s-2\v'-0.4m'3\v'0.4m'\s+2, (Knuth, 1975)). +One or more +.I keywords +cause selection from the bibliographic database. +Each +.B % +argument must begin a new line. +.I %ref_field +lines override information from the database; +with no +.I keywords +a complete reference +may be given. +For the form of reference fields, see the output of +.I penter +or the paper in Volume 2. +The following +.I %flags +may modify the citation. +.RS +.TF posttextstring +.TP +.B %no_author +Exclude author information. +.TP +.B %no_date +Exclude date from the citation mark. +.TP +.B %no_cite +Omit the entire citation, but include the entry in the final reference list. +.TP +.BI %pre_text " string +Insert +.I string +before the citation mark. +.TP +.BI %post_text " string +Insert +.I string +after the citation mark +.PD +.RE +.TP +.BI @reference_include( " dbfile ..." ) +Include the contents of the database(s) +.I dbfile(s) +in the list of references, +treating them as +.B %no_cite +entries. +.TP +.B @reference_placement +Produce a list of all references specified in +.B @reference +or +.B @reference_include +commands since +the beginning of the document or the last +.B @reference_style +or +.BR @reference_placement . +.TP +.BI @reference_list( " dbfile ..." ) +Format the contents of the database(s) +.IR dbfile . +.TP +.BI @\^reference_database( " dbfile " ) +Switch to database +.I dbfile +.PP +.I Penter +helps build +.I prefer +bibliographic databses. +It prompts for a reference type, +and then for admissible attributes, such as author, date, etc. +A default value proposed in brackets +.B [] +may be accepted by typing a newline, +skipped by typing spaces before the newline, +or overridden by typing a new value. +The character +.L & +appended to an attribute causes +.I penter +to prompt for the attribute again +(to enter multiple authors, for example). +.PP +The answer +.L ? +to the initial prompt gets a list of all reference types. +The answer +.L help +gets a subprompt for a reference type +whose pertinent attributes will then be listed. +The answer +.L ? +to the subprompt gets attributes for every type. +.PP +The attribute +.B also +permits one entry to refer to another +by naming keywords for +the other reference. +An entire `also' citation may be included within a +.B @reference +thus: +.br +.ns +.IP +.EX +%also_begin \fItext\fP +\fI%ref_fields\fP +%also_end +.EE +.PP +The attribute +.B keywords +prompts for distinguishing keys for the current entry, in addition to +those already occurring within author, title, etc. +.PP +The `reference type' +.B quit +causes +.I penter +to exit, first appending the collected database information to +.I outfile +.RF ( prefer.out +by default). +.PP +The `attribute' +.B ~e +permits editing of the current reference with the editor +specified by environment variable +.BR EDITOR , +.IR ed (1) +by default; +.B ~v +gets the editor +.BR VISUAL , +.IR vi (1) +by default. +.PP +.I Pinvert +creates an inverted index to one or more bibliographic database +.I files. +The index is placed in +.IB file .i , +where +.I file +is the first input file. +An associated +.IB file .h +contains the names of the input files. +The options are: +.TF commmon +.TP +.BI -c common +Do not index words listed in file +.I common +(default +.FR /usr/lib/eign ). +.TP +.BI -i ignore +Do not index information about attributes listed in file +.I ignore. +(The default +.F /usr/lib/prefer/ignore +lists +.BR %volume , +.BR %number , +.BR %part , +.BR %pages , +.B %X +(location status), +.B %Y +(read status), +.B %Z +(comment).) +.TP +.BI -k i +Maximum number of keys kept per record (default 100). +.TP +.BI -l i +Maximum length of keywords (default 6, none is less than 3). +.TP +.BI -p file +The basename of the index is +.I file. +Prefer will write the index to +.IB file .i . +.TP +.B -v +Verbose. +Print statistics. +.PD +.PP +.I Plook +uses the inverted index to +retrieve bibliographic records by +.I keywords +from the command line +or the standard input. +Records that contain all the keywords in the request +are sent to +the standard output. +Option +.B -p +is the same as for +.I pinvert. +.PP +.I Pconvert +converts a +.IR refer (1) +database to +.I prefer +style. +Under option +.B -d +it converts +.IR refer -style +commands in a document to +.I prefer +style. +.ig +.SH EXAMPLES +.EX +@\^reference_style +A keyword citation@reference in the middle of a line. +.br +A complete citation +.br +@reference( +.br +%post_text , Chapter 6 +.br +%type book +.br +%author Aho, Alfred V. +.br +%author Sethi, Ravi +.br +%author Ullman, Jeffrey D. +.br +%title Compilers, Principles, Techniques, and Tools +.br +%publisher Addison-Wesley +.br +%address Reading, Massachusetts +.br +%date 1986 ). +.br +\&.ce +Bibliography +@\^reference_placement +.. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/prefer/mypubenter +.TP +.F prefer.out +default database +.TP +.F prefer.out.i +default index file +.TP +.F prefer.out.h +default header file containing names of databases +.TP +.F /usr/lib/eign +default list of common words +.TP +.F /usr/lib/prefer/ignore +default list of +.I %ref_fields +to ignore for indexing +.TP +.F /usr/lib/prefer/styles/* +.I awk +scripts of formatting instructions for each style +.TP +.F /tmp/prefer* +scratch file +.TP +.F /usr/lib/prefer/ptemplate +reference type definitions, self-describing +.TP +.F /usr/lib/prefer/mypubenter +program executed by penter +.SH +.SH SEE ALSO +M. A. Derr, +`Formatting References with Prefer', +this manual, Volume 2 +.br +.IR refer (1), +.IR monk (1), +.IR troff (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Prefer +commands don't work immediately after certain +formatting macros, e.g. .SM, .I, .B. +.br +.I Plook +complains if the first key matches more references than it can store. +Try rearranging your request so a less common word comes first. +.br +.I Pinvert +does not record options +.B -c +and +.BR -l . +If you use them with +.I pinvert, +you will have to supply them for +.I prefer +and +.I plook +as well. +.tr @@ diff --git a/static/v10/man1/printenv.1 b/static/v10/man1/printenv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1deddc08 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/printenv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ +.TH PRINTENV 1 +.CT 1 shell +.SH NAME +printenv \- print environment +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B printenv +[ +.I name +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +With no arguments, +.I printenv +places the strings of the environment, described in +.IR environ (5), +on the standard output one per line. +.PP +If a +.I name +is specified, its value is retrieved from the environment +and printed. +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR sh (1), +.IR rc (1), +.IR environ (5), +.IR getenv (3) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Exit status 1 is returned when a specified +.I name +is not present in the environment. +.SH BUGS +The +.I name +feature cannot handle functions. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/printfont.1 b/static/v10/man1/printfont.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e1bfcba --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/printfont.1 @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH PRINTFONT 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B printfont +\- font listing program for PostScript printers +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBprintfont\f1 +.OP "" options [] +.OP "" files [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B printfont +builds a PostScript program that prints character set tables for +one or more PostScript fonts. +The program is written on the standard output, +and when sent to a PostScript printer usually prints a 16\(mu16 table +that shows the available (encoded) characters in each font. +The following +.I options +are understood: +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-a num +Set the character cell axes mode to +.IR num . +0 disables axes printing, 1 draws a baseline, +2 adds a vertical line through the character origin, +and 3 adds a vertical line through the next character origin. +The default is 0. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-b num +Print each table in base +.IR num . +The base determines the number of rows and columns in the table. +It also affects the character code placed in the lower left corner of each cell. +The default is 16 (hexadecimal). +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-c num +Print +.I num +copies of each page. +By default only one copy is printed. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-f name +Use font +.I name +for labeling the tables. +The default font is Helvetica. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-g num +Use +.I num +as the gray level for marking cells not currently assigned to characters. +The gray level should fall between 0 (black) and 1 (white). +The default is 0.85. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-m num +Magnify each logical page by the factor +.IR num . +Pages are scaled uniformly about the origin, +which is located near the upper left corner of each page. +The default is 1.0. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-p mode +Print +.I files +in either \*(mBportrait\fP or \*(mBlandscape\fP +.IR mode . +Only the first character of +.I mode +is significant. +The default +.I mode +is \*(mBportrait\fP. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-v +Completely label each character cell. +The full character name goes in the upper left corner and the +character width (at point size 1) goes in the lower right corner. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-w num +Set the line width to +.I num +points, where a point is approximately 1/72 of an inch. +A line width of 0 means 1 pixel. +The default line width is resolution dependent. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-x num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the x axis. +Positive +.I num +shifts the table to the right. +The default offset is 0. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-y num +Translate the origin +.I num +inches along the y axis. +Positive +.I num +shifts the table up the page. +The default offset is 0. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-C file +Copy +.I file +to the output file; +.B file +must contain legitimate PostScript. +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-E name +Set the character encoding for text fonts to +.IR name . +Requesting +.I name +means include file +.MI \*(dQ/ name .enc \f1. +A nonexistent encoding file is silently ignored. +The default selects file +.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . +.TP 1.0i +.OP \-L file +Use +.I file +as the PostScript prologue. +.br +The default is +.MR \*(dQ/printfont.ps . +.PP +Arguments should be PostScript +.I font +names or the word +.MR all , +which means the full set of +.SM ROM +and disk based fonts available on a printer. +.B printfont +prints one font table per page. +Each page is labeled with the +.I font +name, the printer product name and interpreter version number, +and the gray level, linewidth, and printer resolution. +.PP +Black cells are used to mark characters listed in the font's +.MW Encoding +array but missing from its +.MW CharStrings +dictionary. +They usually indicate an incomplete font or a mistake in the +.MW Encoding +array. +The check is skipped if the font doesn't include a +.MW CharStrings +dictionary. +.br +.ne 4v +.SH EXAMPLES +Print the characters available in the Times-Roman, Symbol and +ZapfDingbats fonts: +.EX +printfont Times-Roman Symbol ZapfDingbats | lp ... +.EE +Print a baseline under each character and fully label the cells: +.EX +printfont -a1 -v Times-Roman Symbol ZapfDingbats | lp ... +.EE +Dump all the fonts available on a printer using the Latin1 character encoding: +.EX +printfont -ELatin1 all | lp ... +.EE +.SH WARNINGS +Printing a single table can take several minutes. +Dumping all available fonts can tie a printer up for an hour or more. +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/printfont.ps +.br +.MW \*(dQ/*.enc +.SH SEE ALSO +buildtables(1), +dpost(1), +postio(1), +psencoding(1), +trofftable(1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/priv.1 b/static/v10/man1/priv.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a649446 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/priv.1 @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +.TH PRIV 1 +.CT 1 sa_nonmortals secur +.SH NAME +priv, privedit \- run a command with privileges +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B priv +[ +.I option ... +] [ +.I command +.I arg ... +] +.PP +.B priv privedit +.I node +.I changes +.SH DESCRIPTION +If a +.I command +is given, +.I priv +determines from the +.IR privs (5) +file the most specifically matching +.B REQUEST +for which the process has all the +.B NEEDS +and to which it has +.BR ACCESS +(terminology explained in +.IR privs (5)). +If a unique most specific match is found, +.I priv +asks for confirmation. +Then, if the confirmation is +.LR y , +the request is executed. +Privileges and process ceiling are set according to +the pertinent entry in +.FR /etc/privs +and the current directory is set to a place with +security label +.BR L_NO ; +see +.IR getflab (2). +Thus relative pathnames won't work in the +.I command +until it executes +.IR chdir (2). +.PP +If no command is given, the contents of the +.I privs +file are printed on the standard output. +.PP +The options are +.TP +.B -n +Determine and report authorization and actions. +Do not execute them except, if +.B PRIVEDIT +is requested, place the edited privilege +file on the standard output. +.TP +.BI -f " servfile +Use +.I servfile +instead of +.FR /cs/priv , +to use a non-standard privilege server. +.PP +One request is more specific than another +if the regular language for each argument +of the first request is contained in the corresponding +language for the second request, +and at least one containment is proper. +.PP +The standard error and standard input are used for confirmations. +Both must come from the same trusted source, either a pexable +stream with a stream identifier, or a pipe from a trusted +process; see +.IR pex (4) +and +.IR stream (4). +.PP +.I Privedit +applies to the +.I privs +file the modifications given in the +.I changes +file. +Only the part of the authorization tree rooted at the given +.I node +may be changed. +The form of +.I changes +is described in +.IR privs (5). +The changes are echoed and confirmation is requested. +.RI ( Privedit, +like any other +.I command, +is a conventional token defined by the +.I privs +file; it is not built in.) +.PP +.I Priv +clears the environment to prevent hidden corruption +by untrusted processes. +For the same reason it asks confirmation of the argument list. +What you see is what it will do. +.PP +The real work of +.I priv +is done by +.IR privserv (8). +.I Priv +communicates with +.I privserv +via a pipe that the latter mounts on +.BR /cs/priv . +.SH FILES +.F /etc/privs +.br +.F /cs/priv +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR privs (5), +.IR privserv (8), +.IR session (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +If a +.I command +is performed, +.I priv +returns the result of the last constituent action; see +.IR privs (5). +.SH BUGS +Trailing null +.I args +are deleted. +.br +The standard input and standard error cannot freely be redirected. +.br +It is possible for a password to be demanded twice. +This would be mitigated if requests were assessed in +decreasing order of specificity instead of table order. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/prof.1 b/static/v10/man1/prof.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da7c5521 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/prof.1 @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +.th PROF I 3/12/73 +.sh NAME +prof \*- display profile data +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd prof +[ +.bd \*-v +] [ +.bd \*-a +] [ +.bd \*-l +] [ file ] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Prof +will read the file +mon.out +produced by the +monitor subroutine. +Under default modes, +the namelist in the +object file (a.out default) +is read and correlated to the +mon.out profile. +The percentage of time spent +between adjacent valued +external symbols is printed +in decreasing order. +If the +.bd \*-a +option is used, +all symbols are used rather than +just external symbols. +If the option +.bd \*-l +is used, +the output is listed by +symbol value rather than +decreasing percentage. +If the +.bd \*-v +option is used, +all printing is suppressed +and a profile plot is produced +on /dev/vt0. +.sh FILES +mon.out for profile +.br +a.out for namelist +.br +/dev/vt0 for plotting +.sh "SEE ALSO" +mon(III), profil(II) +.sh BUGS diff --git a/static/v10/man1/proof.1 b/static/v10/man1/proof.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b817bd9c --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/proof.1 @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ +.pa 1 +.he 'PROOF (I)'1/15/73'PROOF (I)' +.ti 0 +NAME proof -- compare two text files +.sp +.ti 0 +SYNOPSIS proof_____ +oldfile newfile +.sp +.ti 0 +DESCRIPTION proof_____ +lists +those lines of +.ul +newfile +that differ from corresponding lines in +.ul +oldfile. +The line number in +.ul +newfile +is given. +When changes, insertions or deletions have +been made the program attempts to resynchronize +the text in the two files by finding a sequence of +lines in both files that again agree. +.sp +.ti 0 +FILES -- +.sp +.ti 0 +SEE ALSO cmp(I) +.sp +.ti 0 +DIAGNOSTICS yes, +but they are undecipherable, e.g. "?1". +.sp +.ti 0 +BUGS proof_____ +is still evolving. Any bugs discovered or suggestions +should be brought to ENP. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/proofr.1 b/static/v10/man1/proofr.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea98fd87 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/proofr.1 @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.1, January 1981 +.TH PROOFR 1 +.SH NAME +proofr \- automatic proofreader +.br +proofer \- alternative command-name for proofr +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B proofr +[ +.B \-s +][ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +file ... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Proofr +is an automatic proofreading system +that runs modified versions of 5 programs: +.RS 5 +.TP 14 +.IR spellwwb (1) +- checks for misspelled words. +.TP +.IR punct (1) +- checks for rudimentary punctuation errors. +.TP +.IR double (1) +- searches for consecutive occurrences of the same word. +.TP +.IR dictplus (1) +- locates wordy and/or misused phrases and suggests alternatives. +.TP +.IR splitinf (1) +- searches for split infinitives. +.RE +.PP +.I Proofr +is one of the programs run under the +.IR wwb (1) +command. +.PP +Options are: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-s +produce a short summary version of +.IR proofr . +.RE +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.SH NOTE +If the user has a file called +.IR $HOME/lib/ddict , +.I proofr +will run +.I dictplus +so that phrases in +.I ddict +are located or ignored, as specified. +See diction(1), dictadd(1), dictplus(1) for more information. +.PP +If the user has a file called +.IR $HOME/lib/spelldict , +.I proofr +will run +.I spellwwb +so that words in +.I spelldict +are not listed as errors. +See spellwwb(1) and spelladd(1) for more information. +.SH FILES +.TP 21 +/tmp/$$* +temporary files +.SH SEE ALSO +spellwwb(1), +punct(1), +double(1), +splitinf(1), +diction(1), +wwb(1), +worduse(1), +spelltell(1), +deroff(1). +.SH BUGS +See other manual pages for bugs in individual programs. +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/prose.1 b/static/v10/man1/prose.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29be4d2d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/prose.1 @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +.id NOTICE-NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OUTSIDE BELL SYS EXCEPT UNDER WRITTEN AGRMT +.id Writer's Workbench version 2.2, February 24, 1981 +.TH PROSE 1 +.SH NAME +prose \- describe style characteristics of text +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B prose +[ +.B \-flags +][ +.B \-ver +] +[ +.B \-tm +| +.B \-c +| +.B \-t +| +.B \-x +standards-file +][ +.B \-mm +| +.B \-ms +] [ +.B \-li +| +.B \+li +][ +.B \-s +][ +.B \-f +style-file | file ...] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Prose +describes the writing style of a document +as determined by +.IR style "(1), +but the output is in prose form. +The output describes readability, word and sentence lengths, +sentence structure and variation. +.PP +The program checks that a document's scores on certain +.I style +variables fall within the average range for documents of a specified type. +Whenever the score for a variable is outside the average range, +a warning message is printed with information +about the variable, +and commands that can be run to get further information. +.PP +.I Prose +creates a file called +.I styl.tmp +that contains the table produced by +.IR style . +.PP +.I Prose +compares a document with standards +for one of several document types, +according to the following flags: +.RS 5 +.TP 5 +.B \-tm +Compare input text to good Bell Laboratories TM's. (This is the default.) +.TP +.B \-c +Evaluate input text for craft suitability. +.TP +.B \-t +Compare input text with good training documents. +.TP +.BI \-x " standards-file" +Compare input text with standards contained in user-specified +.IR standards-file . +See +.IR mkstand (1) +to set up the +.IR standards-file . +.RE +.PP +Because +.I prose +runs +.IR deroff (1) +before looking at the text, +formatting header files should be included as part of the input. +.PP +Options affecting +.IR deroff (1) +are: +.RS 5 +.TP +.B \-mm +eliminate +.IR mm (1) +macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences +(e.g. headings), +from the analysis. +This is the default. +.TP +.B \-ms +eliminate +.IR ms (1) +macros, and associated text that is not part of sentences, +from the analysis. +The +.B \-ms +flag overrides the default, +.BR \-mm . +.TP +.B \-li +eliminate list items, +as defined by +.I mm +macros, from the analysis. +This is the default. +.TP +.B \+li +Include list items in the input text, +in the analysis. +This flag should be used if the text contains lists of sentences, +but not if the text contains many lists of non-sentences. +.RE +.PP +Other options are: +.RS 5 +.TP +.B \-s +Produce a short (10 line) summary version of +.IR prose . +.TP +.BI \-f " style-file" +If a file containing the +.I style +table exists as output from the +.I style +program, +or from a previous +.I prose +run, +it may be specified so that +.I prose +need not run +.I style +again. +.I Styl.tmp +can be used as the +.IR style-file . +The input text file should not be used with the +.B \-f +flag. +.RE +.PP +Two options give information about the program: +.RS 5 +.TP 7 +.B \-flags +print the command synopsis line (see above) +showing command flags and options, +then exit. +.TP +.B \-ver +print the Writer's Workbench version number of the command, then exit. +.RE +.PP +.I Prose +is one of the programs run under the +.IR wwb (1) +command. +.SH EXAMPLES +The command: +.PP +.RS 5 +.B "prose \-t \+li filename" +.RE +.PP +will describe how the style characteristics of +.I filename +compare with standards for training documents. +Lists will be included in the analysis. +The +.IR style (1) +table will be left in the file +.IR styl.tmp . +.br +Then the command: +.PP +.RS 5 +.B "prose \-x standards-file \-f styl.tmp" +.RE +.PP +will use the style statistics already gathered for +.IR filename , +and describe how they compare with the user-defined +standards contained in +.IR standards-file . +.SH FILES +.TP 21 +styl.tmp +contains +.I style +table +.TP +wwb/lib/prosedoc +contains all standards used for comparison, +and stored +.I prose +output text files +.SH SEE ALSO +style(1), wwb(1), +deroff(1), +match(1), +wwbstand(1), +mkstand(1), +worduse(1). +.SH SUPPORT +.IR "COMPONENT NAME: " "Writer's Workbench" +.br +.IR "APPROVAL AUTHORITY: " "Div 452" +.br +.IR "STATUS: " Standard +.br +.IR "SUPPLIER: " "Dept 45271" +.br +.IR "USER INTERFACE: " "Stacey Keenan, Dept 45271, PY x3733" +.br +.IR "SUPPORT LEVEL: " "Class B - unqualified support other than Div 452" diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ps.1 b/static/v10/man1/ps.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3819a0fa --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ps.1 @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +.th PS I 10/15/73 +.sh NAME +ps \*- process status +.sh SYNOPSIS +.bd ps +[ +.bd alx +] +.sh DESCRIPTION +.it Ps +prints certain indicia about active +processes. +The +.bd a +flag asks for information about all processes with teletypes (ordinarily +only one's own processes are displayed); +.bd x +asks even about processes with no typewriter; +.bd l +asks for a long listing. +Ordinarily only the typewriter number (if not one's own) +and the process number are given. +.s3 +The long listing is columnar and contains +.s3 +.lp +5 0 +A number encoding the state (last digit) +and flags (first 1 or 2 digits) of the process. +.s3 +The priority of the +process; high numbers mean low priority. +.s3 +A number related in some unknown way to the +scheduling heuristic. +.s3 +The last character of +the control typewriter of the process. +.s3 +The process unique number +(as in certain cults it is possible +to kill a process if you know its true name). +.s3 +The size in blocks of the core image of the process. +.s3 +The last column if non-blank tells the core +address in the system of the +event which the process is waiting for; +if blank, the process is running. +.s3 +.i0 +.dt +Unfortunately if you have forgotten the number of a process +you will have to guess which one it is. +Plain +.it ps +will tell you only a list of numbers. +.sh FILES +/usr/sys/unix system namelist +.br +/dev/mem resident system +.sh "SEE ALSO" +kill(I) +.sh BUGS +The ability to see, even if dimly, +the name by which the process was invoked would +be welcome. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 b/static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0c0a3a65 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/psencoding.1 @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +.ds dQ /usr/lib/postscript +.TH PSENCODING 1 "DWB 3.2" +.SH NAME +.B psencoding +\- check or set the default PostScript font encoding +.SH SYNOPSIS +\*(mBpsencoding\f1 +.OP "" encoding [] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.B psencoding +sets the default font Encoding used by many PostScript translators to +.IR encoding . +No arguments means list the available choices and the current default. +.PP +PostScript encoding files are in directory +.MR \*(dQ . +Many existing PostScript translators include the encoding file +.MR Default.enc , +if it exists, in the output they generate. +.PP +Requesting +.I encoding +as the default means link the file +.MI \*(dQ/ encoding .enc +to the file +.MR \*(dQ/Default.enc . +Changing the default encoding assumes you can write in directory +.MR \*(dQ . +.SH FILES +.MW \*(dQ/Default.enc +.br +.MW \*(dQ/*.enc +.SH SEE ALSO +.BR buildtables (1), +.BR dpost (1), +.BR postprint (1), +.BR trofftable (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/psifile.1 b/static/v10/man1/psifile.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e9078da --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/psifile.1 @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +.TH PSIFILE 1 +.CT 1 writing_output +.SH NAME +psifile, mhssend\- postscript interpreter/fax sender +.lg 0 +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B psifile +[ +.I option ... +] [ +.I file +] +.br +.B mhssend +.I phone_number +.I file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Psifile +reads Postscript input from +.I file +or from standard input +and produces a file containing an image of the page. +The format of the output file is specified by the following options: +.TF /make/it +.TP +.B -fax +runs at 200 dpi and produces g31 fax in the multipage fax format called +.BR mhs , +putting its output in file +.B fax\fI$$\fP.mhs +by default. If a phone number is supplied, +the output file is pushed to +.B /tmp +on fama +and +.B mhssend +is run to send the fax. +.TP +.BI -P " phone_no" +specifies the destination phone number for +.BR -fax . +.TP +.B -g4 +runs at 300 dpi and produces a fax g4 file called +.B psi.out.g4 +by default that +can be displayed on the gnots with +.IR rbits . +.TP +.B -bm +produces +.IR bitfile (9.5) +output in file +.B psi.out +by default. +.I -bm +is useful for debugging postscript programs because +it has better diagnostics than the printers. +.PP +Other options are +.TF /this/is +.TP +.B -s +assumes the file is in +.B mhs +format and sends it to the phone number provided with +.B -P +above. +.TP +.BI -o " name" +use +.I name +as the basename of the output file. +.TP +.BI -p " page" +only output postscript page number +.I page +as determined by +.B %%Page +comments in the file. +.sp +.PP +Fonts are implemented with 24 point bitmap fonts. +Those available are +Symbol, Courier, Times-Roman, Times-Italic, Times-Bold, Times-BoldItalic, Helvetica, +Helvetica-Oblique, Helvetica-Bold, Helvetica-BoldOblique. +Fonts +Courier-Bold, +Courier-Oblique, +and +Courier-BoldOblique +are mapped to +Courier. +Postscript type 1 fonts are implemented and work if supplied +with the input. +.sp +.PP +For best results with TeX documents, run +.B dvips +with the +.B -Tfax +or +.B "-D 200" +option to get fonts of the proper resolution. +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +troff -ms memo | lp -dstdout -H | psifile -fax -P 4223 +.br +.TP +.L +troff -ms memo | dpost | psifile -fax -P 4223 +Two equivalent ways to format a memo, convert it to PostScript, +and produce a fax file. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/psi/psifaxg4 +.TP +.F fax\fI$$\fP.mhs +default +.B -fax +output file +.TP +.F psi.out.g4 +default +.B -g4 +output file +.TP +.F psi.out +default +.B -bm +output file +.TP +.B /usr/lib/psi/psifax +postscript\->mhs format program +.TP +.B /usr/lib/psi/psifaxg4 +postscript\->fax g4 program +.TP +.B /usr/lib/psi/psibm +postscript\->bitfile program +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR psi (9.1), +.IR lp (1), +.IR dvips (1), +.IR postscript (8), +.IR proof (9.1) , +.IR bcp (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +.PP +Symbols that lack bitmaps are replaced by `?' +and an error is reported. +.SH BUGS +Unimplemented PostScript features are rotated images +and half tone screens. +Imagemasks may only be rotated by multiples of 90 degrees, +not by arbitrary angles. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/psix.1 b/static/v10/man1/psix.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..de343774 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/psix.1 @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ +.TH PSIX 1 +.CT 1 writing_output +.SH NAME +psix \- postscript interpreter +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B psix +[ +.I option ... +] [ +.I file +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Psix +reads Postscript input from +.I file +or from standard input +and simulates the resulting pages in a +window under X Windows. +If the large window it brings up is too big +for your screen, you can use +.I -geometry +to change its size. You may also want to use the +.I -a +option described below. +.PP +The options are +.TP +.BI -p n +Display page +.IR n , +where +.I n +is determined from the +.B %%Page +comments in the file. +If these are not present, page selection will not work. +.TP +.B -R +Pages in the file are in reverse order. This flag must be used on such files +for the +.I -p +option to work. +.TP +.B -r +Display the image at full scale, with the bottom left +corner positioned at the bottom left corner of the window. +(By default, the image is scaled to fit the window, maintaining +the aspect ratio of a printer.) +.HP +.B -a +.I x y +.br +Display the image at full scale with position +.I x,y +of the image placed at the bottom left corner of the window. +.PP +Fonts are implemented with size-24 bitmap fonts. +Those available are +Symbol, Courier, Times-Roman, Times-Italic, Times-Bold, Times-BoldItalic, Helvetica, +Helvetica-Oblique, Helvetica-Bold, Helvetica-BoldOblique. +Fonts +Courier-Bold, +Courier-Oblique, +and +Courier-BoldOblique +are mapped to +Courier. +Other postscript fonts, including type1, may be used if +they are supplied before they're referenced. +.PP +When the `cherries' icon is displayed, you can move forward +by typing return or you can use mouse button 3 +to move forward +.RB ( more ), +to a particular page +.RB ( page ), +or quit +.RB ( done ). +.SH EXAMPLES +.TP +.L +troff -ms memo | lp -dstdout -H | psi +.br +.ns +.TP +.L +troff -ms memo | dpost | psi +Two equivalent ways to format a memo, convert it to PostScript, +and display it. +.PP +For best results with TeX documents, use +.B dvips +with the +.BR -Tjerq , +.BR -Tgnot , +or +.B "-D 100" +option to get fonts of the proper resolution and run +.I psi +with the +.I -r +or +.I -a +flag to prevent +.I psi +from scaling. +.SH FILES +.TF psi.err +.TP +.F psi.err +error messages +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR lp (1), +.IR dvips (1), +.IR postscript (8), +.IR proof (9.1), +.IR psifile (1), +.IR psi (9.1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +A `dead mouse' icon signals an error; +error comments are placed on file +.FR psi.err . +.PP +Symbols that lack bitmaps are replaced by `?' +and an error is reported. +.SH BUGS +Unimplemented PostScript features are rotated images and +half tone screens. +Imagemasks may only be rotated by multiples of 90 degrees, not +by arbitrary angles. +.br +Skipping pages may cause operators to be undefined. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/ptx.1 b/static/v10/man1/ptx.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b14ad396 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/ptx.1 @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.TH PTX 1 +.CT 1 writing_aids +.SH NAME +ptx \- permuted index +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B ptx +[ +.I option ... +] +[ +.I input +[ +.I output +] +] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Ptx +generates a permuted index to file +.I input +on file +.I output +(standard input and output default). +It has three phases: the first does the permutation, generating +one line for each keyword in an input line. +The keyword is rotated to the front. +The permuted file is then +sorted. +Finally, the sorted lines are rotated so the keyword +comes at the middle of the page. +.I Ptx +produces output exemplified by: +.br +.IP +.L +\&.xx "tail" "before" "keyword and after" "head" +.LP +where +.L .xx +may be defined as a +.IR troff (1) +macro +for user-defined formatting. +The +.I before +and +.I keyword and after +fields incorporate as much of the line as will fit +around the keyword when it is printed at the middle of the page. +.I Tail +and +.I head, +at least one of which is an empty string, +are wrapped-around pieces small enough to fit +in the unused space at the opposite end of the line. +When original text must be discarded, +.L / +marks the spot. +.PP +The following options can be applied: +.TP +.BR -f +Fold upper and lower case letters for sorting. +.TP +.BR -t +Prepare the output for the phototypesetter; +the default line length is 100 characters. +.TP +.BI -w " n" +Use the next argument, +.I n, +as the width of the output line. +The default line length is 72 characters. +.TP +.BI -g " n" +Use the next argument, +.I n, +as the number of characters to allow for each gap +among the four parts of the line as finally printed. +The default gap is 3 characters. +.TP +.BI -o " only" +Use as keywords only the words given in the +.I only +file. +.TP +.BI -i " ignore" +Do not use as keywords any words given in the +.I +ignore +file. +If the +.B -i +and +.B -o +options are missing, use +.F /usr/lib/eign +as the +.I +ignore +file. +.TP +.BI -b " break" +Use the characters in the +.I break +file to separate words. +In any case, tab, newline, and space characters are always used as break characters. +.TP +.B -r +Take any leading nonblank characters of each input line to +be a reference identifier (as to a page or chapter) +separate from the text of the line. +Attach that identifier as a 5th field on each output line. +.PP +The index for this manual was generated using +.I ptx. +.SH FILES +.F /usr/lib/eign +.SH BUGS +Line length counts do not account for overstriking or +proportional spacing. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/punct.1 b/static/v10/man1/punct.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06574a94 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/punct.1 @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +.TH PUNCT 1 +.SH NAME +punct \- punctuation checker +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B /usr/bin/WWB/punct +[ file ... ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Punct +scans English text for punctuation errors and doubled words. +When it finds an error, +it places the error on the standard output +together with line number and suggested repunctuation. +.SH FILES +.ta \w'/tmp/$$* 'u +/tmp/$$* temporary files +.SH SEE ALSO +style(1), diction(1), wwb(1) +.SH BUGS +.I Punct +will consider unfamiliar abbreviations ending with a period (except initials) +to be the end of the sentence, +consequently, it will capitalize the next word. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/push.1 b/static/v10/man1/push.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af26404b --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/push.1 @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +.TH PUSH 1 +.CT 1 comm_mach +.SH NAME +push, pull, npush, npull \- datakit remote file copy +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B push +[ +.B -v +] +.I machine file ... remotedir +.PP +.B pull +[ +.B -v +] +.I machine file ... localdir +.PP +.B npush +[ +.B -v +] +.I machine file ... remotedir +.PP +.B npull +[ +.B -v +] +.I machine file ... localdir +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Push +and +.I pull +copy files between machines over Datakit. +.I Push +copies +.I files +from the local machine +to the directory +.I remotedir +on the named +.I machine. +.I Pull +copies +.I files +from the named +.I machine +to the directory +.I localdir +on the local machine. +The last component of the name of a copy is the same +as that of the original. +If one of the +.I files +is a directory, a corresponding +directory is created +and the directory's files are copied, recursively. +.PP +Option +.B -v +announces each file as it is copied. +.PP +Pushing and pulling involve two programs running in +different contexts on different machines. +In particular, pulling +to directory +.L . +puts files in the local current directory, +but pushing to +.L . +puts files in the remote home directory. +Shell metacharacters which are to be interpreted +on the remote machine must be quoted. +.PP +.I Npush +and +.I npull +behave exactly like +.I push +and +.I pull, +but use a different protocol, necessary for communicating +to some other Datakit clusters. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/Rpush +.TP +.F /usr/lib/Rpull +link to +.F /usr/bin/pull +for remote end of transaction +.TP +.F /usr/lib/Rpush +link to +.F /usr/bin/push +.SH SEE ALSO +.IR con (1), +.IR cp (1), +.IR rcp (1), +.IR cu (1), +.IR uucp (1) +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Messages marked +.L (remote) +are from the sister process running on the +remote machine. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pwd.1 b/static/v10/man1/pwd.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd408d3d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pwd.1 @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +.TH PWD 1 +.CT 1 dirs +.SH NAME +pwd, where \(mi machine name and working directory +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pwd +.PP +.B where +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pwd +prints the pathname of the working (current) directory. +.PP +.I Where +prints the name of the machine and the pathname of the +current directory in the form +.IP +.IB machine ! fullpathname +.SH SEE ALSO +.I cd +in +.IR sh (1) diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 b/static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40c4dd7f --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pwintf.1 @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +.TH PWINTF 1 SHARE +.SH NAME +pwintf \- print selected limits file entries using printf formats +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pwintf +[-p shares_file] expression format [identifier..] +.SH DESCRIPTION +For each entry in the system shares file the expression +argument is evaluated. +If the result is non zero +the remaining arguments are treated as if they were arguments +to +.I printf +(see +.IR printf (3S)). +An alternative shares file may be specified with the +.I -p +option. +.PP +Expression elements are: +.TP "\w'identifierXXXX'u" +|| +Binary or. Non zero if the left hand side or the right hand side +evaluates to a non zero value. +.TP +&& +Binary and. Non zero if the left hand side and the right hand +side are both non zero. +.TP +== != +Equal/not equal to. Non zero if the left hand side +and the right hand side +are equal/not equal. +.TP +> < +Greater/less than. Non zero is the left hand side is +greater/less than the right hand side. +.TP +>= <= +Greater/less than or equal to. Non zero if the left hand side +is greater/less than or equal to the right hand side. +.TP +~ +Regular expression matching. Non zero if the string on the left +hand side matches the regular expression given by the string +on the right hand side. Regular expressions are given in the +style of +.I ed +(see +.IR ed (1)). +.TP +! +Unary not. Non zero if the right hand side evaluates to zero. +.TP +".." +A string of characters. +.TP +{..} +A date. +Date specifications are in the style: +.B {[[[[[yy]mm]dd]hh]mm][.ss]}. +For example +.B {01271200} +would be noon on the 27th of January in the current year. +.TP +(..) +A sub-expression. +.TP +identifier +Any one of the identifiers described below. +.TP +number +A decimal digit string. +.PP +Note that the expression may have to be quoted +to stop the shell from interpreting symbols such as +\fB&\fR +as symbols having special meaning. +.SH FORMATS +All +.I printf +format specifications and modifiers are allowed except the +\&'*' modifier. To facilitate the printing of dates +which are stored as the number of seconds since +1st January 1970, +\fB%t\fR +may be used. This will cause the corresponding integral +argument to be interpreted as a time and given in the style +of +.I ctime +(see +.IR ctime (3C)). +All modifiers will be ignored in such a time specification. +.SH IDENTIFIERS +In the following list words printed in +.B "this font" +are as defined in the include files and . +.PD 0 +.TP "\w'assumeddisconXX'u" +activelnode +1 if the account has the +.B ACTIVELNODE +flag set. +.TP +changed +1 if the account has the +.B CHANGED +flag set. +.TP +charge +The long term accumulated costs of the account as a floating point number. +.TP +deadgroup +1 if the account has the +.B DEADGROUP +flag set. +.TP +dirpath +The initial directory of the account as a string. +.TP +flags +A string containing the names of the flags set for this account. +.TP +gecos +The ``gecos'' field of the account as a string. +.TP +gid +The integral gid of this account. +.TP +lastref +1 if the account has the +.B LASTREF +flag set. +.TP +lastused +The time the account last did anything. +.TP +lname +The login name of the account as a string. +.TP +notshared +1 if the account has a +.B NOTSHARED +flag. +.TP +now +The current time. +.TP +pword +The encrypted password of the account as a string. +.TP +sgroup +The uid of the scheduling group of this account. +.TP +sgroupname +The lname of the scheduling group of this account. +.TP +shares +The integral number of shares the account has. +.TP +shellpath +The initial shell of the account as a string. +.TP +usage +The usage of the account as a floating point number. +.TP +uid +The integral uid of this account. +.PD +.SH FILES +/etc/passwd +.br +/etc/shares +.SH SEE ALSO +printf(3S), ctime(3C), shares(5). +.SH DIAGNOSTICS +Yes. A summary of usage is given when pwintf +is invoked with no arguments. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/pxp.1 b/static/v10/man1/pxp.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3cffc462 --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/pxp.1 @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +.TH PXP 1 +.CT 1 prog_other +.SH NAME +pxp, pxref \- pascal printer, profiler, and cross-reference lister +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B pxp +[ +.B -acdefjnstuw_ +] +[ +.B -23456789 +] +[ +.B -z +[ +.I name ... +] +] +.IB name .p +.PP +.B pxref +[ +.B - +] +.IB name .p +.SH DESCRIPTION +.I Pxp +prints the Pascal program +.IB name .p +in a standard `pretty' form. +Under option +.B -z +the listing is annotated with statement execution counts +from a previous +.IR pascal (1) +run. +.TP +.B -a +Print the bodies of all procedures and functions in the profile; +even those which were never executed. +.TP +.B -d +Include declaration parts in a profile. +.TP +.B -e +Eliminate +.B include +directives when reformatting a file; +the +.B include +is replaced by the reformatted contents of the specified +file. +.TP +.B -f +Fully parenthesize expressions. +.TP +.B -j +Left justify all procedures and functions. +.TP +.B -n +Eject a page +as each file is included; +in profiles, print a blank line at the top of the page. +.TP +.B -s +Strip comments from the input text. +.TP +.B -t +Print only a table of counts of +procedure and function calls. +.TP +.B -u +Card image mode; only the first 72 characters of input lines +are used. +.TP +.B -w +Suppress warning diagnostics. +.TP +.B -z +Generate an execution profile. +The presence of any +.I names +causes the profile to be restricted to the named procedures, +functions, and include files. +.TP +.B -\_ +Underline keywords. +.TP +.BI - d +With +.I d +a digit, +use +.I d +spaces as the indenting unit. +The default is 4. +.PP +.I Pxref +makes a line-numbered listing and cross-reference index for +.IB name .p . +The optional +.B - +argument suppresses the listing. +.SH FILES +.TF /usr/lib/how_pxp +.TP +.F *.p +input files +.TP +.F *.i +include files +.TP +.F pmon.out +profile data +.TP +.F /usr/lib/how_pxp +information on basic usage +.DT +.SH "SEE ALSO" +Berkeley Pascal User's Manual +.br +.IR pascal (1) +.SH BUGS +.I Pxref +trims identifiers to 10 characters and pads lines with blanks. diff --git a/static/v10/man1/qed.1 b/static/v10/man1/qed.1 new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21e7b38d --- /dev/null +++ b/static/v10/man1/qed.1 @@ -0,0 +1,1617 @@ +.TH "QED" 1 +. \" /*% nroff -man % +.if t .ds q \(aa +.if n .ds q ' +.SH NAME +qed \- multi-file text editor +.SH SYNOPSIS +.B qed +[ +.B \- +] [ +.B \-i +] [ +.B \-q +] [ +.B \-e +] [ +.B \-x +startupfile +] [ filename1 filename2 ... ] +.SH DESCRIPTION +\fIQed\fP +is a multiple-file programmable text editor based on +.IR ed . +.PP +.I Qed +operates on a copy of any file it is editing; changes made +in the copy have no effect on the file until a \fIw\fR +or \fIW\fR (write) +command is given. +The copy of the text being edited resides +in a scratch area called a +.I buffer. +There are 56 buffers, labeled by alphabetics `a' to `z' and `A' to `Z', +and the characters `{', `|', `}' and `~' +(the four ASCII characters following `z'). +These 56 characters are called, for notational efficiency, +.I bnames. +The buffers can contain any ASCII character except NUL. +.PP +If +.I file +arguments are given, +.I qed +simulates an +.I r +command (see below) on each of the named files; that is to say, +the files are read into +.I qed's +buffers so that they can be edited. +The first is read into buffer `a', the second into buffer `b', +through `z', +then from `A' to `Z', +up to a maximum of 52 files. +The optional +.B \- +puts +.I qed +in non-\c +.I verbose +mode (described with the +.I o +command). +The +\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-e\fR +and +.B \-i +are equivalent to performing an initial +`oqs', `oes' or `ois' command (see the +.I o +command below). +.PP +When \fIqed\fP starts up, +the file named by the environment variable +.B QEDFILE +is read into +buffer `~' and executed +(i.e. read as command input), before +reading in files and accepting commands from the terminal. +The argument +.I filename\c +s are set in the buffers before the startup file is executed, +so the startup file can treat the \fIfilenames\fR as arguments. +The default startup file may be overridden with the \fB\-x\fR option. +.PP +Input to +.I qed +can be redirected, at any time, +to come from storage such as a buffer +by use of a +.I special +.I character +such as ``\eb''. +All the +.I qed special character +sequences are discussed in detail below; +they all begin with a +backslash `\\'. +.PP +.I Qed +has a +.I truth flag +which is set according to the success of certain commands +and which can be tested for conditional execution, and a +.I count +which is set to such values as the number of successful substitutions +performed in an +.I s +command. +Each buffer has associated with it a +(possibly null) filename and a +.I changed +flag, which is +set if the contents of the buffer are known to differ +from the contents of the named file in that buffer. +.PP +Commands to +.I qed +have a simple and regular structure: zero or +more +.I addresses +followed by a single character +\fIcommand\fP, +possibly +followed by parameters to the command. +These addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. +Every command which requires addresses has default addresses, +so that the addresses can often be omitted. +.PP +In general, any number of commands can appear on a line. +Some commands require that the character following +the command be a separator, such as blank, tab or newline. +Usually, a +.I display +.IR character , +.IR p , +.IR P , +.IR l , +or +.I L +may precede the separator, +causing the resulting line to be displayed in the specified format +after the command. +Certain commands allow the input of text for placement in the buffer. +This text can be supplied in two forms: +either +on the same line, after the command, +or on lines following the command, +terminated by a line containing only a period `\fB.\fP'. +If the text is on the command line, +it is separated from the command by a space or a tab. +If the tab is used, it is considered part of the text. +.PP +.I Qed +supports a limited form of +\fIregular\fP \fIexpression\fP +notation. +A regular expression specifies +a set of strings of characters. +A member of this set of strings is said to be +.I matched +by the regular expression. +Regular expressions in +.I qed +are delimited by enclosing them in a pair of identical characters, +frequently slashes `/'. +In the following specification for regular expressions the word `character' +means any character but newline. +Note that special character interpretation always occurs +.I before +executing a command. +Thus, the backslashes mentioned below are those present +after special characters have been interpreted. +.IP 1. +Any character except a metacharacter matches itself. +Metacharacters are the regular expression delimiter plus +< [ \fB.\fP and \e | > ^ * \+ $ +when another rule gives them a meaning. +.IP 2. +A \fB.\fP matches any character. +.IP 3. +A backslash \\ followed by +any metacharacter in the list given in rule 1 +is a regular expression and matches that character. +A backslash followed by one of +! _ { } ( ) +or a non-zero digit +has a special meaning discussed below; +otherwise, backslashes have literal meaning in regular expressions. +.IP 4. +The metacharacter \e\|! matches any control character +except tab or newline. +.IP 5. +A non-empty string +.I s +enclosed in square brackets +[\fIs\fP] (or [^\fIs\fP]) matches any character in (or not in) \fIs\fP. +In +.IR s , +\\ has no special meaning, and ] may only appear as the first character. +A substring +.IR a \- b , +with +.I a +and +.I b +in ascending ASCII order, stands for the inclusive range of ASCII characters. +.IP 6. +A regular expression, +of the form <\fIx1\fP> or <\fIx1\fR|\|\fIx2\fR|\|...|\|\fIxn\fR>, +where the \fIx\fR's are regular expressions of form 1-12, matches what +the leftmost successful \fIx\fR +matches. +.IP 7. +A backslash followed by a non-zero digit +.I n +matches a copy of the string that the bracketed regular expression +(see rule 11) +beginning with the \fIn\fPth \e\|( matched. +.IP 8. +A regular expression of form 1-7 followed by * (\+) +matches a sequence of zero (one) or more matches of the regular expression. +.IP 9. +The metacharacter \\\|_ matches a non-empty +maximal-length sequence of blanks and tabs. +.IP 10. +The metacharacter \\\|{ (\\\|}) matches the empty string at the beginning +(end) of an identifier. An identifier is defined to be +an underscore _ or alphabetic followed by zero or more +underscores, alphabetics or digits. +.IP 11. +A regular expression, +.IR x , +of form 1-12, bracketed \e\|(\|\fIx\fP\|\e\|) matches what +.I x +matches. +The nesting of these brackets in each regular expression of an +alternation (rule 6) must be identical. +An alternation with these brackets may not be iterated (rule 8). +.IP 12. +A regular expression of form 1-12, +.IR x , +followed by a regular expression of form 1-11, +.IR y , +matches a match for +.I x +followed by a match for +.IR y , +with the +.I x +match being as long as possible while still permitting a +.I y +match. +.IP 13. +A regular expression of form 1-12 preceded by ^ (followed by $) is constrained +to matches that begin at the left (end at the right) end of a line. +.IP 14. +A regular expression of form 1-13 picks out the longest among the leftmost matches +in a line. +.IP 15. +An empty regular expression stands for a copy of the last regular expression encountered. +.PP +.i0 +Regular expressions are used in addresses and the +.I g +and +.I v +commands +to specify +lines, in the +.I s +command +to specify a portion of a line which is to be replaced, +in the +.I G +and +.I V +commands to refer to buffers in which to perform commands, +and in general whenever text +is being specified. +.PP +To understand addressing in +.I qed +it is necessary to know that at any time there is a +\fIcurrent buffer\fR +and a +\fIcurrent line.\fR +When +.I qed +is invoked, +the current buffer is +buffer `a', +but may be changed at any time by a +.I b +(change buffer) command. +All addresses refer to lines in the current buffer, +except for a special case described under the +.I m +(move) command. +.PP +Generally speaking, the current line is +the last line affected by a command; however, +the exact effect on the current line +is discussed under the description of +the command. +Addresses are constructed as follows. +.IP 1. +The character `\fB.\fR' addresses the current line. +.IP 2. +The character `$' addresses the last line of the buffer. +.IP 3. +A decimal number +.I n +addresses the +\fIn\fR-th +line of the buffer. +.IP 4. +`\*q\fIx\fR' addresses the line marked with the +mark name character \fIx\fR, +which must be a bname. +Lines are marked with the +.I k +command described below. +It is an error for the marked line to be outside of the current buffer. +.IP 5. +A regular expression enclosed in slashes `/' addresses +the first matching line +found by searching forwards from the line after the current line. +If necessary, the search wraps around to the beginning of the +buffer. +If the trailing `/' would be followed by a newline, +it may be omitted. +.IP 6. +A regular expression enclosed in queries `?' addresses +the first matching line +found by searching backwards from the line before +the current line. +If necessary +the search wraps around to the end of the buffer. +If the trailing `?' would be followed by a newline, +it may be omitted. +.IP 7. +An address followed by a plus sign `+' +or a minus sign `\-' followed by a decimal number specifies that address plus +(resp. minus) the indicated number of lines. +The plus sign may be omitted. +.IP 8. +An address followed by `+' or `\-' followed by a +regular expression enclosed in slashes specifies the first +matching line following (resp. preceding) that address. +The search wraps around if necessary. +The `+' may be omitted. +Enclosing the regular expression in `?' reverses the search direction. +.IP 9. +If an address begins with `+' or `\-' +the addition or subtraction is taken with respect to the current line; +e.g. `\-5' is understood to mean `\fB.\fR\-5'. +.IP 10. +If an address ends with a `+' (or `\-') 1 is added (resp. subtracted). +As a consequence of this rule and rule 9, +the address `\-' refers to the line before the current line. +Moreover, trailing `+' and `\-' characters have cumulative effect, so `\-\-' +refers to the current line less 2. +.IP 11. +To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the editor, +the character `^' in addresses is entirely +equivalent to `\-'. +.PP +.i0 +Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. +Commands which require no addresses regard the presence +of an address as an error. +Commands which accept one or two addresses +assume default addresses when none is given. +If more addresses are given than the command requires, +the last one or two (depending on what is accepted) are used. +The last addressed line must not precede the second-last addressed line. +.PP +Typically, addresses are separated from each other by a comma `,'. +They may instead be separated by a semicolon `;' +in which case the current line `\fB.\fR' is set to the first address +before the second address is interpreted. +The second of two separated addresses may not be a line +earlier in the buffer than the first. +If the address on the left (right) side of a comma or semicolon +is absent, it defaults to the first (resp. last) line. +.PP +Filename operands of commands may be made up of printing characters only. +However, when the filename appears as the argument to the invocation of +\fIqed\fP, +non-printing characters may be included. +When a filename is specified for a command, +it is terminated at the first blank, tab or newline. +.PP +In the following list of +.I qed +commands, the default addresses +are shown in parentheses. +The parentheses are not part of +the address, but are used to show that the given addresses are +the default. +.TP 5 +( \fB. \fR)\|a +The append command accepts input text +and appends it after the addressed line. +`\fB.\fR' is left +on the last line input, if there +were any, otherwise at the addressed line. +Address `0' is legal for this command; text is placed +at the beginning of the buffer. +.TP 5 +b +The change buffer command sets the current buffer +to be that named. +`\fB.\fR', `$' and the remembered +.I filename +are set to those of the new buffer; +upon return to a previously used buffer, +`\fB.\fR' will be set to its value when the buffer was last used. +.TP 5 +( \fB. \fR)\|b[+\-\^\fB.\fP\^][pagesize][display character] +The browse command provides page-oriented printing. +The optional `+', `\-', or +.RB ` . ' +specifies whether the next, +previous, +or surrounding page +is to be printed; if absent, `+' is assumed. +.IB b . +also prints several carets `^^^^^' +immediately below the current line. +If a pagesize is given, it is used for the current browse +command and remembered as the default. +The pagesize is initially 22 lines. +If a display character is given, +the lines are printed in the specified format, +and the format is remembered as the default. +Initially, `p' is the default. +For +.I b+ +and +.IR b\- , +`\fB.\fP' is left at the last line displayed; +for +\fIb\fP\fB.\fP, +it is unchanged. +NOTE: The browse and change buffer commands are the same character! +The two commands can be syntactically distinguished +in all cases except for `b'; +this ambiguity may be resolved by typing the (implicit) `+' +after the `b'. +.TP 5 +( \fB. \fR, \fB. \fR)\|c +The change +command deletes the addressed lines, then accepts input +text which replaces these lines. +`\fB.\fR' is left at the last line input; if there were none, +it is left at the line preceding the deleted lines. +If an interrupt signal (usually ASCII DEL) is received during a +change command, the old lines are not deleted. +.TP 5 +( \fB. \fR, \fB. \fR)\|d +The delete command deletes the addressed lines from the buffer. +The line after the deleted section becomes the current line; +if the deleted lines were originally at the end, +the new last line becomes the current line. +The character after the `d' can only be one of +a blank, newline, tab, or display character. +Line 0 is a valid address for deletion; +deleting line 0 has no affect on any lines in the buffer. +.TP 5 +e filename +The edit +command causes the entire contents of the current buffer to be deleted, +and then the named file to be read in. +`\fB.\fR' is set to the last line of the buffer. +The number of characters read is typed +if +.I qed +is in +.I verbose +mode. +The \fIfilename\fP is remembered for possible use as a default file name +in a subsequent +\fIf\fP, \fIr\fR, \fIw\fR, or \fIW\fR command. +.TP 5 +E filename +The +.I E +command is like +.IR e , +except that +.I qed +does not check to see +if the buffer has been modified +since the last +.I w +command. +.TP 5 +f filename +The filename command prints information about the current buffer, +in the format used by the \fIn\fR command. +If \fIfilename\fP is given, +the currently remembered file name is changed to \fIfilename\fP. +If +.I qed +is not in verbose mode, +the information is only printed if the +.I filename +is not specified. +If it is not desired to set the +.I filename, +the character immediately after the f must be a newline. +Otherwise, the first token +(which may be the null string) +on the line, after a mandatory non-empty sequence of blanks and tabs, +is taken to be the +.I filename. +These rules apply to all +.I filename\c +-using commands, +.I e, +.I f, +.I r, +.I R, +.I S, +.I w +and +.I W, +although some regard specification of an explicitly null \fIfilename\fP as an +error. +.TP 5 +( 1 , $ )\|g/regular expression/command list +In the global +command, the first step is to mark every line in the range which matches +the regular expression. +Then for every such line, the +command list is executed with `\fB.\fR' initially set to that line. +Any embedded newlines in the command list +must be escaped with a backslash. +The +\fIa\fP, +\fIi\fP, +and +.I c +commands and associated input are permitted; +the `\fB.\fR' terminating input mode may be omitted if it would be on the +last line of the command list. +The commands +.I g +and +.I v +are not permitted in the command list. +If the command list is empty, `\fB.\fPp' is assumed. +The regular expression may be delimited by any character other than newline. +.TP 5 +G/regular expression/command list +In the globuf +command, the first step is to mark every active buffer +whose output from an +.I f +command +(with the +.I filename +printed literally) +would match the regular expression. +(An active buffer is one which has either some text or +a remembered file name.)\ +Then for every such buffer, the +command list is executed with the current buffer set to that buffer. +In other respects it is like the global command, +except that only the commands +.I G +and +.I V +are not permitted in the command list. +If the command list is empty, `f' is assumed. +.TP 5 +h